Nissan Teana j32 2008 Service Repair Manual

QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
Publication Number:
SM8E00-1J32E0E
A
A GENERAL INFORMATION GI General Information
B ENGINE EM Engine Mechanical
LU Engine Lubrication System
B
CO Engine Cooling System
EC Engine Control System
FL Fuel System
C
EX Exhaust System
STR Starting System
ACC Accelerator Control System
D TRANSMISSION TM Transaxle & Transmission
& DRIVELINE FAX
RAX
FSU
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Front Suspension
D
E SUSPENSION
F BRAKES
RSU
WT
BR
Rear Suspension
Road Wheels & Tires
Brake System
E
G STEERING
PB
BRC
ST
Parking Brake System
Brake Control System
Steering System
F
H RESTRAINTS
STC
SB
SR
Steering Control System
Seat Belt
SRS Airbag
G
H
MODEL J32 SERIES SRC SRS Airbag Control System
I VENTILATION, HEATER VTL Ventilation System
& AIR CONDITIONER HA Heater & Air Conditioning System
I
HAC Heater & Air Conditioning Control System
J BODY INTERIOR INT Interior
IP Instrument Panel
J
SE Seat
ADP Automatic Drive Positioner
K BODY EXTERIOR, DOOR, DLK Door & Lock
ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
K
SEC Security Control System
GW Glass & Window System
PWC Power Window Control System
L
RF Roof
EXT Exterior
L DRIVER CONTROLS MIR Mirrors
EXL Exterior Lighting System
INL
WW
DEF
Interior Lighting System
Wiper & Washer
Defogger
M
M ELECTRICAL &
POWER CONTROL
HRN
PWO
BCS
Horn
Power Outlet
Body Control System
N
LAN
PCS
CHG
LAN System
Power Control System
Charging System
O
N DRIVER INFORMATION
& MULTIMEDIA
PG
MWI
WCS
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements
Meter, Warning Lamp & Indicator
Warning Chime System
P
AV Audio, Visual & Navigation System
P MAINTENANCE MA Maintenance
© 2008 NISSAN INTERNATIONAL SA
All rights reserved. No part of this Electronic Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form,
or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan International
SA, Switzerland.
FOREWORD
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the NISSAN
TEANA, model J32 series.
In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle,
this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the
PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting
any repair task.
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information
at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in speci-
fications and methods at any time without notice.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the
technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle.
The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a man-
ner that the service may be performed safely and accurately.
Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the
tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service procedures,
tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by NISSAN must
first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s
safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected.
NISSAN INTERNATIONAL SA
Service Engineering Section
Paris, France
GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION GI B
E
CONTENTS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................... 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 24 F
Description ...............................................................24
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............................ 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Description ................................................................ 3 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- G
Terms ........................................................................ 3 SIONER" .................................................................24
Units .......................................................................... 3 Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service .............24
Contents .................................................................... 3 Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- H
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions ...... 4 tion after Battery Disconnect ...................................24
Components .............................................................. 4 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover....25
General Precautions ................................................25
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ..... 6 Three Way Catalyst .................................................27 I
Description ................................................................ 6 Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis...... 6 System .....................................................................27
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Pro- Hoses ......................................................................27 J
cedures ..................................................................... 7
Engine Oils ..............................................................28
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS ................ 9 Air Conditioning .......................................................28
Connector Symbols ................................................... 9 Fuel ..........................................................................29 K
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- ......................... 10 LIFTING POINT ................................................. 30
Description .............................................................. 11
Commercial Service Tools .......................................30
Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift .......30 L
ABBREVIATIONS ..............................................13
Abbreviation List ...................................................... 13 Board-On Lift ...........................................................31
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD TOW TRUCK TOWING ..................................... 32

M
BOLTS ................................................................14 Tow Truck Towing ...................................................32
Description .............................................................. 14 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle) ...........32
Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Includ- BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 34 N
ed) ........................................................................... 14
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL
TERMINOLOGY .................................................17
INCIDENT .......................................................... 34
SAE J1930 Terminology List ................................... 17 O
Work Flow ................................................................34
FEATURES OF NEW MODEL ..................... 21 Control Units and Electrical Parts ............................34
Intermittent Incident .................................................35
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION .....................21 Circuit Inspection .....................................................37 P
Model Variation ....................................................... 21
Information About Identification or Model Code ...... 21 CONSULT-III/GST CHECKING SYSTEM ......... 43
Dimensions ............................................................. 23 Description ...............................................................43
Wheels & Tires ........................................................ 23 CONSULT-III Function and System Application*1....43
CONSULT-III/GST Data Link Connector (DLC)
PRECAUTION .............................................. 24 Circuit ......................................................................43
GI-1
Wiring Diagram - CONSULT-III/GST CHECKING ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-
SYSTEM - ............................................................... 45 TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................. 48
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 48 BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Required
Procedure After Battery Disconnection ................... 48
GI-2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GI
Description INFOID:0000000003852757
B
This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diag-
noses”.
C
Terms INFOID:0000000003852758
• The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury
and/or damage to some part of the vehicle. D
WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed.
BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information. E
Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment.
Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjust-
ment.
F
Units INFOID:0000000003852759
• The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and G
alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system.
Also with regard to tightening torque of bolts and nuts, there are descriptions both about range and about the
standard tightening torque.
H
“Example”
Range
I
Outer Socket Lock Nut : 59 - 78 N·m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb)
Standard J
Drive Shaft Installation Bolt : 44.3 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)

K
Contents INFOID:0000000003852760
• A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g. ) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the L
first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab.
• THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section.
• THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system.
• THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section M
and a number (e.g. “BR-5”).
• THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of
work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations. N
Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle
or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary.
GI-3
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions INFOID:0000000003852761
The following sample explains the relationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in
the text and the service procedures.
SAIA0519E
Components INFOID:0000000003852762
• THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (see the following) and contain tightening torques, lubri-
cation points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to
perform repairs.
The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appro-
priate PARTS CATALOG.
Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration is
used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration.
GI-4
GI
SFIA2959E F
1. Union bolt 2. Copper washer 3. Brake hose

4. Cap 5. Bleed valve 6. Sliding pin bolt
G
7. Piston seal 8. Piston 9. Piston boot
10. Cylinder body 11. Sliding pin 12. Torque member mounting bolt
13. Washer 14. Sliding pin boot 15. Bushing H
16. Torque member 17. Inner shim cover 18. Inner shim
19. Inner pad 20. Pad retainer 21. Pad wear sensor
22. Outer pad 23. Outer shim 24. Outer shim cover I
1: PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease 2: Rubber grease : Brake fluid
or silicone-based grease
Refer to GI section for additional symbol definitions.
J
SYMBOLS
SAIA0749E O
GI-5
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.
• Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Work Flow” in each section.
• After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
• Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for
identification/location of components and harness connectors.
• When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF.
• Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-har-
ness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identi-
fication of harness connectors.
• Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
• After accomplishing the Diagnosis Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all
harness connectors are reconnected as they were.
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003852764
JPAIA0021GB
1. Test group number and test group title

• Test group number and test group title are shown in the upper portion of each test group.
2. Work and diagnosis procedure
• Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
3. Questions and results
• Questions and required results are indicated in test group.
4. Action
• Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question.
GI-6
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures INFOID:0000000003852765
GI
I
SAIA1539E
GI-7
SAIA1540E
GI-8
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
GI
Connector Symbols INFOID:0000000003852766
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. B
• Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by
a single line and followed by the direction mark.
• Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by
a double line and followed by the direction mark. C
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to
OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section, D
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
SAIA0257E
I
• Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. J
SGI363
P
GI-9
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- INFOID:0000000003852767
• For detail, refer to following GI-11, "Description".
JCAWA0005GB
GI-10
GI
Number Item Description

1 Power supply • This means the power supply of fusible link or fuse. B
2 Fusible link • “X” means the fusible link.
Number of fusible link/
3 • This means the number of fusible link or fuse location. C
fuse
4 Fuse • “/” means the fuse.
Current rating of fus-
5 • This means the current rating of the fusible link or fuse. D
ible link/fuse
6 Optional splice • The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application.
• The letter shows which harness the connector is located in.
E
7 Connector number • Example “M”: main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to, .PG-83, "How
To Read Harness Layout",PG-85, "Main Harness"
8 Splice • The shaded circle “ ” means the splice.

F
9 Page crossing • This circuit continues to an adjacent page.
10 Option abbreviation • This means the vehicle specifications which layouts the circuit between “ ”.
11 Relay • This shows an internal representation of the relay. G
12 Option description • This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.
• This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A H
13 Switch
position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position.
14 Circuit (Wiring) • This means the wiring.
15 System branch • This shows that the circuit is branched to other systems. I
16 Shielded line • The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.
17 Component name • This shows the name of a component.
18 Ground (GND) • This shows the ground connection.
J
• This means the connector information.

19 Connector
• This unit-side is described by the connector symbols.
K
20 Connectors • This means that a transmission line bypasses two connectors or more.
• This shows a code for the color of the wire.
BR = Brown L
B = Black
OR or O = Orange
W = White
P = Pink
R = Red
PU or V (Violet) = Purple
G = Green
21 Wire color L = Blue
GY or GR = Gray M
SB = Sky Blue
Y = Yellow
CH = Dark Brown
LG = Light Green
DG = Dark Green
N
• When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as
shown below:
Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe
22 Terminal number • This means the terminal number of a connector. O
SWITCH POSITIONS
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition. P
A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when:
GI-11
• ignition switch is “OFF”,
• doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
• pedals are not depressed, and
• parking brake is released.
SGI860
MULTIPLE SWITCH
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
• The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
• The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
JSAIA0017GB
GI-12
ABBREVIATIONS
ABBREVIATIONS
GI
Abbreviation List INFOID:0000000003852769
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: B
ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION
A/C Air Conditioner C
A/T Automatic Transaxle/Transmission
ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid
D1 Drive range 1st gear D
D2 Drive range 2nd gear
D3 Drive range 3rd gear
E
D4 Drive range 4th gear
FR, RR Front, Rear
LH, RH Left-Hand, Right-Hand F
M/T Manual Transaxle/Transmission
OD Overdrive
G
P/S Power Steering
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.
SDS Service Data and Specifications H
SST Special Service Tools
2WD 2-Wheel Drive
I
22 2nd range 2nd gear
21 2nd range 1st gear
12 1st range 2nd gear J
11 1st range 1st gear
GI-13
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
This vehicle has both new standard based on ISO* and previous standard bolts/nuts. There are some differ-
ences between these two types of bolts/ nuts; shape of the head, grade of strength, hexagonal width across
flats and the standard tightening torque.
• For guidance in discriminating, refer to GI-14, "Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included)".
• The new standard machine screws and tapping screws have a head of ISO standard torx recess.
• If the tightening torque is not described in the description or figure, refer to GI-14, "Tightening Torque Table
(New Standard Included)".
*ISO: International Organization for Standardization
Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included) INFOID:0000000003852911
CAUTION:
• The special parts are excluded.
• The bolts/nuts in these tables have a strength (discrimination) number/symbol assigned to the head
or the like. As to the relation between the strength grade in these tables and the strength (discrimi-
nation) number/symbol, refer to “DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS”.
PREVIOUS STANDARD
Hexagonal Tightening torque (Without lubricant)

Grade Bolt di-
Bolt width Pitch
(Strength ameter Hexagon head bolt Hexagon flange bolt
size across flats mm
grade) mm
mm N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb
M6 6.0 10 1.0 5.5 0.56 4 49 7 0.71 5 62
1.25 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 —
M8 8.0 12
1.0 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 —
1.5 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
4T M10 10.0 14
1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
1.75 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 —
M12 12.0 17
1.25 45 4.6 33 — 65 6.6 48 —
M14 14.0 19 1.5 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 —
M6 6.0 10 1.0 9 0.92 7 80 11 1.1 8 97
1.25 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 —
M8 8.0 12
1.0 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 —
1.5 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 —
7T M10 10.0 14
1.25 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 —
1.75 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 —
M12 12.0 17
1.25 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 —
M14 14.0 19 1.5 130 13 96 — 170 17 125 —
M6 6.0 10 1.0 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 —
1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
M8 8.0 12
1.0 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
1.5 55 5.6 41 — 80 8.2 59 —
9T M10 10.0 14
1.25 55 5.6 41 — 80 8.2 59 —
1.75 100 10 74 — 130 13 96 —
M12 12.0 17
1.25 100 10 74 — 130 13 96 —
M14 14.0 19 1.5 170 17 125 — 210 21 155 —
CAUTION:
GI-14
The parts with aluminum or the cast iron washer surface/thread surface are excluded.
GI
NEW STANDARD BASED ON ISO
Hexagonal Tightening torque

Grade Bolt di- B
Bolt width Pitch
(Strength ameter Hexagon head bolt Hexagon flange bolt
size across flats mm
grade) mm
mm N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb
M6 6.0 10 1.0 5.5 0.56 4 49 7 0.71 5 62 C
1.25 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 —
M8 8.0 13
1.0 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 —
4.8 D
1.5 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
(Without M10 10.0 16
lubricant) 1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
1.75 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 — E
M12 12.0 18
1.25 45 4.6 33 — 65 6.6 48 —
M14 14.0 21 1.5 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 —
M6 6.0 10 1.0 4 0.41 3 35 5.5 0.56 4 49 F
1.25 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 —
M8 8.0 13
1.0 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 —
G
4.8 1.5 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 —
(With lu- M10 10.0 16
bricant) 1.25 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 —
1.75 35 3.6 26 — 45 4.6 33 — H
M12 12.0 18
1.25 35 3.6 26 — 45 4.6 33 —
M14 14.0 21 1.5 65 6.6 48 — 80 8.2 59 —
I
M6 6.0 10 1.0 8 0.82 6 71 10 1.0 7 89
1.25 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.6 18 —
M8 8.0 13
1.0 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.6 18 — J
8.8 1.5 40 4.1 30 — 50 5.1 37 —
(With lu- M10 10.0 16
bricant) 1.25 40 4.1 30 — 50 5.1 37 —
K
1.75 70 7.1 52 — 85 8.7 63 —
M12 12.0 18
1.25 70 7.1 52 — 85 8.7 63 —
M14 14.0 21 1.5 120 12 89 — 140 14 103 — L
M6 6.0 10 1.0 10 1.0 7 89 12 1.2 9 106
1.25 27 2.8 20 — 32 3.3 24 —
M8 8.0 13 M
1.0 27 2.8 20 — 32 3.3 24 —
10.9 1.5 55 5.6 41 — 65 6.6 48 —
(With lu- M10 10.0 16
bricant) 1.25 55 5.6 41 — 65 6.6 48 —
N
1.75 95 9.7 70 — 110 11 81 —
M12 12.0 18
1.25 95 9.7 70 — 110 11 81 —
M14 14.0 21 1.5 160 16 118 — 180 18 133 — O
CAUTION:
1. Use tightening torque with lubricant for the new standard bolts/nuts in principle. Friction coeffi-
cient stabilizer is applied to the new standard bolts/nuts. P
2. However, use tightening torque without lubricant for the following cases. Friction coefficient stabi-
lizer is not applied to the following bolts/nuts.
- Grade 4.8, M6 size bolt, Conical spring washer installed
- Paint removing nut (Size M6 and M8) for fixing with weld bolt
GI-15
DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS
SAIA0453E
GI-16
TERMINOLOGY
TERMINOLOGY
GI
SAE J1930 Terminology List INFOID:0000000003852771
All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new B
terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart.
NEW ACRONYM /
NEW TERM OLD TERM C
ABBREVIATION
Air cleaner ACL Air cleaner
Barometric pressure BARO ***
D
Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD BAROS-BCDD BCDD
Camshaft position CMP ***
Camshaft position sensor CMPS Crank angle sensor E
Canister *** Canister
Carburetor CARB Carburetor
F
Charge air cooler CAC Intercooler
Closed loop CL Closed loop
Closed throttle position switch CTP switch Idle switch G
Clutch pedal position switch CPP switch Clutch switch
Continuous fuel injection system CFI system ***
H
Continuous trap oxidizer system CTOX system ***
Crankshaft position CKP ***
Crankshaft position sensor CKPS *** I
Data link connector DLC ***
Diagnostic test mode DTM Diagnostic mode
Diagnostic test mode selector DTM selector Diagnostic mode selector J
Diagnostic test mode I DTM I Mode I
Diagnostic test mode II DTM II Mode II
K
Diagnostic trouble code DTC Malfunction code
Direct fuel injection system DFI system ***
Distributor ignition system DI system Ignition timing control L
Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater EFE-mixture heater Mixture heater
Early fuel evaporation system EFE system Mixture heater control
M
Electrically erasable programmable read
EEPROM ***
only memory
Electronic ignition system EI system Ignition timing control
N
Engine control EC ***
Engine control module ECM ECCS control unit
Engine coolant temperature ECT Engine temperature O
Engine coolant temperature sensor ECTS Engine temperature sensor
Engine modification EM ***
P
Engine speed RPM Engine speed
Erasable programmable read only memory EPROM ***
Evaporative emission canister EVAP canister Canister
Evaporative emission system EVAP system Canister control solenoid valve
Exhaust gas recirculation valve EGR valve EGR valve
GI-17
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
NEW TERM OLD TERM
ABBREVIATION
Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT
EGRC-BPT valve BPT valve
valve
Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid
EGRC-solenoid valve EGR control solenoid valve
valve
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sen-
sor EGRT sensor Exhaust gas temperature sensor
EGR temperature sensor
Flash electrically erasable programmable
FEEPROM ***
read only memory
Flash erasable programmable read only
FEPROM ***
memory
Flexible fuel sensor FFS ***
Flexible fuel system FF system ***
Fuel pressure regulator *** Pressure regulator
Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid
*** PRVR control solenoid valve
valve
Fuel trim FT ***
Heated Oxygen sensor HO2S Exhaust gas sensor
Idle air control system IAC system Idle speed control
Idle air control valve-air regulator IACV-air regulator Air regulator
Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control
IACV-AAC valve Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve
valve
Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve IACV-FICD solenoid valve FICD solenoid valve
Idle air control valve-idle up control sole-
IACV-idle up control solenoid valve Idle up control solenoid valve
noid valve
Idle speed control-FI pot ISC-FI pot FI pot
Idle speed control system ISC system ***
Ignition control IC ***
Ignition control module ICM ***
Indirect fuel injection system IFI system ***
Intake air IA Air
Intake air temperature sensor IAT sensor Air temperature sensor
Knock *** Detonation
Knock sensor KS Detonation sensor
Malfunction indicator lamp MIL Check engine light
Manifold absolute pressure MAP ***
Manifold absolute pressure sensor MAPS ***
Manifold differential pressure MDP ***
Manifold differential pressure sensor MDPS ***
Manifold surface temperature MST ***
Manifold surface temperature sensor MSTS ***
Manifold vacuum zone MVZ ***
Manifold vacuum zone sensor MVZS ***
Mass air flow sensor MAFS Air flow meter
Mixture control solenoid valve MC solenoid valve Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve
Multiport fuel injection system MFI system Fuel injection control
GI-18
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
NEW TERM OLD TERM
ABBREVIATION GI
Nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM ***
On board diagnostic system OBD system Self-diagnosis
B
Open loop OL Open loop
Oxidation catalyst OC Catalyst
Oxidation catalytic converter system OC system *** C
Oxygen sensor O2S Exhaust gas sensor
Park position switch *** Park switch
D
Park/neutral switch
Park/neutral position switch PNP switch Inhibitor switch
Neutral position switch
Periodic trap oxidizer system PTOX system *** E
Positive crankcase ventilation PCV Positive crankcase ventilation
Positive crankcase ventilation valve PCV valve PCV valve
F
Powertrain control module PCM ***
Programmable read only memory PROM ***
Pulsed secondary air injection control sole-
PAIRC solenoid valve AIV control solenoid valve
G
noid valve
Pulsed secondary air injection system PAIR system Air induction valve (AIV) control
Pulsed secondary air injection valve PAIR valve Air induction valve H
Random access memory RAM ***
Read only memory ROM ***
I
Scan tool ST ***
Secondary air injection pump AIR pump ***
Secondary air injection system AIR system *** J
Sequential multiport fuel injection system SFI system Sequential fuel injection
Service reminder indicator SRI ***
K
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection sys-
*** Simultaneous fuel injection
tem
Smoke puff limiter system SPL system ***
L
Supercharger SC ***
Supercharger bypass SCB ***
System readiness test SRT *** M
Thermal vacuum valve TVV Thermal vacuum valve
Three way catalyst TWC Catalyst
N
Three way catalytic converter system TWC system ***
Three way + oxidation catalyst TWC + OC Catalyst
Three way + oxidation catalytic converter O
TWC + OC system ***
system
Throttle chamber
Throttle body TB
SPI body
P
Throttle body fuel injection system TBI system Fuel injection control
Throttle position TP Throttle position
Throttle position sensor TPS Throttle sensor
Throttle position switch TP switch Throttle switch
Lock-up cancel solenoid
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TCC solenoid valve
Lock-up solenoid
GI-19
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
NEW TERM OLD TERM
ABBREVIATION
Transmission control module TCM A/T control unit
Turbocharger TC Turbocharger
Vehicle speed sensor VSS Vehicle speed sensor
Volume air flow sensor VAFS Air flow meter
Warm up oxidation catalyst WU-OC Catalyst
Warm up oxidation catalytic converter sys-
WU-OC system ***
tem
Warm up three way catalyst WU-TWC Catalyst
Warm up three way catalytic converter sys-
WU-TWC system ***
tem
Wide open throttle position switch WOTP switch Full switch
***: Not applicable
GI-20
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< FEATURES OF NEW MODEL >
FEATURES OF NEW MODEL GI
Model Variation INFOID:0000000003852772
B
Destination Body Engine Transmission Axle Grade Model

C
250XE BLGULCW-EQA
Russia and VQ25DE 250XL-V6 BLGULEW-EQA

Sedan CVT 2WD
Ukraine 250XV-V6 BLGULGW-EQA D
VQ35DE 350XV-V6 BLJULHW-EQA
Model variation code (Prefix and suffix designations)
E
JPAIA0315GB
J
Information About Identification or Model Code INFOID:0000000003852773
K
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
JPAIA0322ZZ
GI-21
Vehicle identification number (Chas-

Vehicle identification plate
1. 2. sis number) (Under the front right- 3. Tire placard
(Under the front right-side seat)
side seat)
4. Air conditioner specification label
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT
JPAIA0316GB
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
JPAIA0053ZZ
1. Type approval number (Models with 2. Vehicle identification number (Chas- 3. Gross vehicle weight
WVTA) sis number)
Blank (Models without WVTA)
4. Gross combination weight 5. Gross axle weight (Front) 6. Gross axle weight (Rear)
+ Gross trailing capacity (weight)
7. Vehicle type 8. Body color code 9. Trim color code
10. Model variation code
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
: Vehicle front
JPAIA0323ZZ
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
GI-22
CVT Unit (RE0F10A)
GI
: Vehicle front
SAIA1496E
D
CVT Unit (RE0F09B)

E
: Unit front
SAIA0360E
H
Dimensions INFOID:0000000003852774
Unit: mm (in) I
Overall length 4,850 (190.9)
Overall width 1,795 (70.7)
J
Overall height 1,475 (58.1)
Front tread 1,560 (61.4)*1, 1,550 (61.0)*2
Rear tread 1,560 (61.4)*1, 1,550 (61.0)*2 K
Wheelbase 2,775 (109.3)
*1: 205/65R16 tire model
*2: 215/55R17 tire model L
Wheels & Tires INFOID:0000000003852775
M
Application Conventional Spare
16 X 6-1/2J/40 (1.57)
Road wheel/offset mm (in) N
17 X 7J/45 (1.77)
Conventional
205/65R16 95H
Tire size
215/55R17 94V
O
GI-23
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not
described in each individual section.
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000003852830
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service INFOID:0000000003852778
WARNING:
Comply with the following warnings to prevent any serious accident.
• Disconnect the battery cable (negative terminal) or the power supply fuse before installing, remov-
ing, or touching the xenon headlamp (bulb included). The xenon headlamp contains high-voltage
generated parts.
• Never work with wet hands.
• Check the xenon headlamp ON-OFF status after assembling it to the vehicle. Never turn the xenon
headlamp ON in other conditions. Connect the power supply to the vehicle-side connector.
(Turning it ON outside the lamp case may cause fire or visual impairments.)
• Never touch the bulb glass immediately after turning it OFF. It is extremely hot.
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Install the xenon bulb securely. (Insufficient bulb socket installation may melt the bulb, the connec-
tor, the housing, etc. by high-voltage leakage or corona discharge.)
• Never perform HID circuit inspection with a tester.
• Never touch the xenon bulb glass with hands. Never put oil and grease on it.
• Dispose of the used xenon bulb after packing it in thick vinyl without breaking it.
• Never wipe out dirt and contamination with organic solvent (thinner, gasoline, etc.).
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000003852856
NOTE:
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the push-button ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion, then disconnect both battery cables.
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both
battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.
If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
This vehicle is equipped with a push-button ignition switch and a steering lock unit.
If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be turned.
GI-24
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the procedure
below before starting the repair operation. GI
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE: B
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position.
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.) C
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation. D
5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the push-button ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering
wheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.) E
6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000003852857
F
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
G
I
PIIB3706J
General Precautions INFOID:0000000003852781 J
• Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without

proper exhaust ventilation.
Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable K
materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflam-
mable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas,
etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to prop- L
erly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials.
Do not smoke while working on the vehicle.
M
SGI285
N
• Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire
blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jack-
ing up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at
the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehi- O
cle.
These operations should be done on a level surface.
• When removing a heavy component such as the engine or tran- P
saxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop
them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially
the brake tubes and master cylinder.
SGI231
GI-25
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Before starting repairs which do not require battery power:
Turn off ignition switch.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
• If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of
radio and each control unit is erased.
SEF289H
• To prevent serious burns:

Avoid contact with hot metal parts.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
• Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an
appropriate manner.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray
and possibly a fire.
• Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent
prior to inspection or assembly.
SGI233
• Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers,
cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones.
• Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set.
• Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence.
• Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM).
Static electricity may damage internal electronic components.
• After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection.
• Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual.
• Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required.
• Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended
special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs.
• When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems,
check all affected lines for leaks.
PBIC0190E
• Before servicing the vehicle:

Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers.
Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint.
SGI234
WARNING:
To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness
connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module)
GI-26
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections. GI
Three Way Catalyst INFOID:0000000003852782
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To B
prevent this, follow the instructions.
• Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
• When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when nec- C
essary.
• Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the
catalyst.
Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three D
way catalyst.
Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System INFOID:0000000003852783
E
• Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the
multiport fuel injection system or ECM:
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. F
Disconnect negative battery terminal.
Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM.
• Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injec-
G
tors, be sure to release fuel pressure.
• Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow
sensor.
H
SGI787
Hoses INFOID:0000000003852784
I
HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

• To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with J
tapered tool or screwdriver.
SMA019D M
• To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure that hose insertion
length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose N
stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose
stopper.)
O
SMA020D
HOSE CLAMPING
GI-27
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original posi-
tion (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace
of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at
that position.
• Discard old clamps; replace with new ones.
SMA021D
• After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of

the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around.
SMA022D
Engine Oils INFOID:0000000003852785
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact
with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
• Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
• Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
• Do not put oily rags in pockets.
• Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
• Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regu-
larly.
• First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
• Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
• Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Prepara-
tions containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
• Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
• If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
• Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
• Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste dis-
posal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal
facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources.
The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Air Conditioning INFOID:0000000003852786
Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to
HA section “REFRIGERATION SYSTEM” for specific instructions.
GI-28
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Fuel INFOID:0000000003852787
GI
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel
other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could B
also affect the warranty coverage validity.
VQ35DE
Use Unleaded premium gasoline of at least 95 octane (RON). C
If unleaded premium gasoline is not used, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91
(RON) may be used at slightly redused performance. However, for maximum vehicle performance and the
best driveability, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.
D
VQ25DE
Use unleaded regular gasoline of at least 91 octane (RON).
Use unleaded premium gasoline if instructed on the fuel filler lid. E
GI-29
LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
LIFTING POINT
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000003852788
Tool name Description
Board on attachment
S-NT001
Safety stand attachment
S-NT002
CAUTION:
• Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a mission
jack or equivalent.
• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle,
suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a mission jack or equiv-
alent.
• Be careful not to smash or do not do anything that would affect piping parts.
Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift INFOID:0000000003852789
WARNING:
• Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes,
etc. under the vehicle.
• Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
• Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
• When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of
the vehicle are well balanced.
• When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and
sill spoiler.
GI-30
LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
GI
JMAIA0091ZZ F
1. Safety stand point and lift up point (front) 2. Safety stand point and lift up point 3. Garage jack point (front)
(rear)
G
4. Garage jack point (rear)
CAUTION:
There is canister just behind Garage jack point rear. Jack up be carefully. H
Board-On Lift INFOID:0000000003852790
CAUTION: I
Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
• The board-on lift attachment (A) set at front end of vehicle
should be set on the front of the sill under the front door
J
opening.
• Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.
: Vehicle front K
JMAIA0004ZZ
GI-31
TOW TRUCK TOWING
< PRECAUTION >
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing INFOID:0000000003852791
CAUTION:
• All applicable state or Provincial laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be
obeyed.
• It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage to the vehicle during tow-
ing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer.
• Always attach safety chains before towing.
• When towing, make sure that the transaxle, steering system and powertrain are in good order. If any
unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
• Never tow a CVT model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
• Never tow an automatic transaxle model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle.
2WD MODELS
JMAIA0095ZZ
NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground.
CAUTION:
• Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised with the rear
wheels on the ground.
• When the battery of a vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is dischanged, the vehicle
should be towed with the front wheels on towing dollies or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck.
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle) INFOID:0000000003852792
FRONT
Securely install the vehicle recovery hook stored with jacking tools.
Make sure that the hook is properly secured in the stored place after
use.
WARNING:
• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
• Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to
explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle
could also overheat and be damaged.
CAUTION:
• Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the vehicle
recovery hooks or main structural members of the vehicle. JMAIA0092ZZ
Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
GI-32
TOW TRUCK TOWING
< PRECAUTION >
• Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehi-
cle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks. GI
• Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.
• Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or
cooling systems.
B
• Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or
recovery.
REAR C
WARNING:
• Rear hook is not available.
D
JMAIA0093ZZ
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION G
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under
the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacture's recommendations when using their H
product.
If the vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System. I
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. J
Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive).
Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D. K
Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehi-
cle. L
GI-33
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000003852793
WORK FLOW
SGI838
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis:
WHAT Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio).
STEP 1 WHEN Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency.
WHERE Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.
System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction).
HOW
Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed.
Operate the system, road test if necessary.
STEP 2 Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”.
Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
• Power Supply Routing
• System Operation Descriptions
STEP 3
• Applicable Service Manual Sections
• Check for any Service Bulletins
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments.
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage.
STEP 4 Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Lay-
outs.
STEP 5 Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.
Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inad-
STEP 6
vertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.
Control Units and Electrical Parts INFOID:0000000003852794
PRECAUTIONS
• Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
• Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
• Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts.
• Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
GI-34
• Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hit-
ting it. GI
• Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid
temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water
is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehi-
B
cle.
• Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
• Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
• Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper C
and lower covers.
SAIA0255E
D
• When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to
each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from
damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. E
• When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the
specified check adapter.
F
SEF348N
K
Intermittent Incident INFOID:0000000003852795
DESCRIPTION L
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the
conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The fol-
lowing section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an M
electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
• Vehicle vibration N
• Heat sensitive
• Freezing
• Water intrusion O
• Electrical load
• Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the
problem. P
VEHICLE VIBRATION
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with
A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustra-
tion.
Connector & Harness
GI-35
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently
shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate.
This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
Hint
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector termi-
nals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs inter-
mittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the
terminals on related connectors in the system.
Sensor & Relay
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
SGI839
Engine Compartment
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the
things to check for are:
• Connectors not fully seated.
• Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
• Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
• Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
• Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground
Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection
by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the
wiring for continuity.
Behind the Instrument Panel
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehi-
cle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw.
Under Seating Areas
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides)
during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or
pinching.
HEAT SENSITIVE
• The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car
has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a
heat sensitive condition.
• To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the
component with a heat gun or equivalent.
CAUTION:
Do not heat components above 60°C (140°).
• If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly
insulate the component.
SGI842
FREEZING
GI-36
• The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car
warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freez- GI
ing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
• There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for
the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold
B
enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked out-
side overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis
of those electrical components which could be affected.
• The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer C
long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car
and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or
SGI843
replace the component. D
WATER INTRUSION
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy
weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intru- E
sion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car
or running it through a car wash.
CAUTION:
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. F
SGI844
H
ELECTRICAL LOAD
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with
all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog
lamps) turned on. I
K
SGI845
COLD OR HOT START UP L

On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when
the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to
make a proper diagnosis.
M
Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000003852796
DESCRIPTION N
• In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thor-
ough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow O
the correct test procedure.
• You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring
harness or electrical component to do this.
P
OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit.
There are two types of shorts.
When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to
SHORT • SHORT CIRCUIT
change.
• SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit.
GI-37
TESTING FOR “OPENS” IN THE CIRCUIT
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This
will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your work-
ing knowledge of the system.
SGI846-A
Continuity Check Method

The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance
function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start
with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
• Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example)
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
• Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that por-
tion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
• Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit
has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resis-
tance condition. (point B)
• Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the
circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infi-
nite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Voltage Check Method
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
• Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
• With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1.
no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
• Close SW1 and probe at relay.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay.
no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
• Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
TESTING FOR “SHORTS” IN THE CIRCUIT
GI-38
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
GI
SGI847-A
Resistance Check Method D

• Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
• Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known E
good ground.
• With SW1 open, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A).
F
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
• Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground.
Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). G
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
• Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a
known good ground. Then, check for continuity. H
continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C).
no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Voltage Check Method I
• Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid discon-
nected) powered through the fuse.
• Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse ter-
minal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). J
• With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. K
• With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for
voltage.
voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. L
• With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage.
voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C).
no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. M
GROUND INSPECTION
• Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can N
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
• Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can
drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. O
Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
• When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. P
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
GI-39
• For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section.
SGI853
VOLTAGE DROP TESTS

• Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage
drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
• Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire
will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand
of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will
be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
• Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
• If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
Measuring Voltage Drop — Accumulated Method
• Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the
DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
• Operate the circuit.
• The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
SGI974
Measuring Voltage Drop — Steb-by-Step

• The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those
in “Computer Controlled Systems”).
• Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage.
GI-40
• The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the
system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire GI
gauge or corrosion.
• The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
B
SAIA0258E
G
CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST
System Description
• When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp. H
CASE 1
K
MGI034A
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART

Terminal No. Description L
In case of high resistance such as single
Input/ Condition Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name strand (V) *
Output
Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Ex- M
Body Switch ON Battery voltage
1 Switch Input ample)
ground
Switch OFF 0V Approx. 0
Switch ON Battery voltage Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp)
N
Body
2 Lamp Output
ground Switch OFF 0V Approx. 0
• The voltage value is based on the body ground. O
• *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the
lamp.
P
GI-41
CASE 2
MGI035A
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART

Terminal No. Description
In case of high resistance such as single
Input/ Condition Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name strand (V) *
Output
Body Switch ON 0V Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)

1 Lamp Output
ground Switch OFF Battery voltage Battery voltage
Body Switch ON 0V Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)

2 Switch Input
ground Switch OFF 5V Approx. 5
• The voltage value is based on the body ground.
• *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the
lamp.
GI-42
CONSULT-III/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
GI
• When CONSULT-III/GST is connected with a data link connector B

(A) equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the con-
trol unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of
diagnostic tests.
C
1 : Instrument driver lower panel
• Refer to “CONSULT-III Software Operation Manual” for more infor-
mation. D
JPAIA0313GB E
CONSULT-III Function and System Application*1 INFOID:0000000003852798
HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER

ABS (Including VDC)
AUTO DRIVE POS.
TRANSMISSION
METER/M&A
G
MULTI AV
IPDM E/R
AIR BAG
ENGINE
HVAC
BCM
ABS
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices I

Work Support x x - - x x - x - x - x
faster and more accurately.
Self-Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items. x x x x x x x x x x x x
Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real J
Data Monitor x x - x x x x x x x x x
time.
This mode displays a network diagnosis result about
CAN Diagnosis x x - x x x x x x - x x
CAN by a diagram. K
CAN Diagnosis Support
It monitors the status of CAN communication. x x - x x x x x x - x -
Monitor
Active Test
Send the drive signal from CONSULT-III to the actua-
x - - - x x x x x x - x
L
tor. The operation check can be performed.
DTC & SRT confirma- The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diag-
x - - - - - - - - - - -
tion nosis status/result can be confirmed. M
Display the ECU identification number (part number
ECU Identification x x - - x x x x x x x x
etc.) of the selected system.
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU N
with either "OK" or "NG". For engine, more practical
Function Test x x x - - - x x - - - -
tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are
available.
Configuration Function to READ/WRITE vehicle configuration - - - - x - - - - x - -
O
Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU

Special Function - x x x - - - - - - - -
are displayed.
P
x: Applicable
*1: If GST application is equipped, functions in accordance with SAE J1979 and ISO 15031-5 can be used.
CONSULT-III/GST Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INFOID:0000000003852799
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-III/GST cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items.
GI-43
Symptom Check item

CONSULT-III/GST cannot ac- • CONSULT-III/GST DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8 and 16) and ground circuit (Terminal 4 and
cess any system. 5)
• Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
CONSULT-III cannot access in- diagram for each system.)
dividual system. (Other sys- • Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-III DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
tems can be accessed.) diagram for each system.)
• Open or short circuit CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NOTE:
The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A
short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-III access to other sys-
tems.
If the GST cannot operate properly, check the circuit based on the information of SAE J1962 and ISO 15031-
3.
GI-44
Wiring Diagram - CONSULT-III/GST CHECKING SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003852800
GI
JCAWM0069GB
P
GI-45
JCAWM0070GB
GI-46
GI
JCAWM0071GB
GI-47
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Re-
GI-48
quired Procedure After Battery Disconnection INFOID:0000000003852904
GI
SYSTEM ITEM REFERENCE

WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY HAC-10, "Temperature Setting Trimmer" B
WITHOUT INTELLI- HAC-110, "WITHOUT INTELLIGENT AIR
GENT AIR CONITION- CONDITIONER SYSTEM : Temperature
Temperature set-
WITH 7 INCH DIS- ER SYSTEM Setting Trimmer" C
ting trimmer
PLAY WITH INTELLIGENT HAC-114, "WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CON-
AIR CONDITIONER DITIONER SYSTEM : Temperature Setting
SYSTEM Trimmer"
D
WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY HAC-10, "Foot Position Setting Trimmer"
Foot position set- GENT AIR CONITION- CONDITIONER SYSTEM : Foot Position E
ting trimmer WITH 7 INCH DIS- ER SYSTEM Setting Trimmer"
PLAY
WITH INTELLIGENT HAC-114, "WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CON-
AIR CONDITIONER DITIONER SYSTEM : Foot Position Setting
SYSTEM Trimmer" F
Inlet port memory function* —
HAC-11, "Inlet Port Memory Function
WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY G
(FRE)"
Inlet port Memory GENT AIR CONITION- CONDITIONER SYSTEM : Inlet Port Mem-
function (FRE) WITH 7 INCH DIS- ER SYSTEM ory Function (FRE)" H
PLAY WITH INTELLIGENT HAC-115, "WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CON-
AIR CONDITIONER DITIONER SYSTEM : Inlet Port Memory
SYSTEM Function (FRE)" I
Automatic temper- HAC-11, "Inlet Port Memory Function
ature control WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY
(REC)"
WITHOUT INTELLI- HAC-111, "WITHOUT INTELLIGENT AIR J
Inlet port Memory GENT AIR CONITION- CONDITIONER SYSTEM : Inlet Port Mem-
Function (REC) WITH 7 INCH DIS- ER SYSTEM ory Function (REC)"
PLAY WITH INTELLIGENT HAC-115, "WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CON- K
AIR CONDITIONER DITIONER SYSTEM : Inlet Port Memory
SYSTEM Function (REC)"
WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY* —
L
WITHOUT INTELLI-
GENT AIR CONITION- —
Gas Sensor Sen-
ER SYSTEM*
sitivity Adjust- WITH 7 INCH DIS- M
ment Function PLAY HAC-116, "WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CON-
WITH INTELLIGENT
DITIONER SYSTEM : Gas Sensor Sensitiv-
AIR CONDITIONER
ity Adjustment Function (With Intelligent Air
SYSTEM
Conditioner System)" N
Auto Intake Switch Interlocking Movement Change* —
WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY* —
WITHOUT INTELLI- O
GENT AIR CONITION- —
Clean Switch In-
ER SYSTEM*
terlocking Move- WITH 7 INCH DIS-
ment Change PLAY HAC-116, "WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CON- P
WITH INTELLIGENT
DITIONER SYSTEM : Clean Switch Inter-
AIR CONDITIONER
locking Movement Change Function (With
SYSTEM
Intelligent Air Conditioner System)"
ADP-7, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN
Automatic drive
Automatic drive positioner system REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMI-
positioner
NAL : Description"
GI-49
SYSTEM ITEM REFERENCE
PWC-5, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN
Power window
Power window control system REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMI-
control
NAL : Description"
Sunroof system Sunroof system* —
Sunshade system Sunshade system* —
AV-47, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN
DISPLAY AND AUDIO SYSTEM REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMI-
NAL : Description"
Rear view monitor
possible route line
Rear view monitor BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMI-
center position ad-
NAL : Description"
justment
BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMI-
NAL : Description"
Around view moni-
Predicted conurse line center position adjustment* —
tor
Automatic back
Automatic back door system* —
door system
Engine oil level
Engine oil level read* —
read
*: Not equipped
GI-50
ENGINE
SECTION
ENGINE MECHANICAL
EM EM
E
CONTENTS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................14 F
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS SPARK PLUG ................................................... 15

(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 3 Exploded View .........................................................15
G
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise ....................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................15
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause Inspection ................................................................16
of the Symptom ......................................................... 4
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE .................. 17 H
PRECAUTION ............................................... 5 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................17
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5 COMPRESSION PRESSURE ........................... 22

Inspection ................................................................22 I
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 5
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 24
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
J
SIONER" ................................................................... 5 ENGINE COVER ............................................... 24
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- Exploded View .........................................................24
tion after Battery Disconnect ..................................... 5 Removal and Installation .........................................24
Precaution for Drain Engine Coolant and Engine K
Oil .............................................................................. 6 DRIVE BELT AUTO TENSIONER AND IDLER
Precaution for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ................. 6 PULLEY ............................................................. 25
Precaution for Removal and Disassembly ................ 6 Exploded View .........................................................25 L
Precaution for Inspection, Repair and Replace- Removal and Installation .........................................25
ment .......................................................................... 6
Precaution for Assembly and Installation .................. 6 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ....................... 26
Exploded View .........................................................26 M
Precaution for Angle Tightening ................................ 6
Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 7 Removal and Installation .........................................26
Inspection ................................................................27
PREPARATION ............................................ 8 N
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR .................. 28
PREPARATION ................................................... 8 Exploded View .........................................................28
Special Service Tool ................................................. 8 Removal and Installation .........................................29
O
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 9
INTAKE MANIFOLD ......................................... 32
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................... 12 Exploded View .........................................................32
Removal and Installation .........................................32 P
DRIVE BELT .......................................................12 Inspection ................................................................33
Exploded View ........................................................ 12
Checking ................................................................. 12 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY
Tension Adjustment ................................................ 12 CATALYST ........................................................ 34
Removal and Installation ......................................... 12 Exploded View .........................................................34
Removal and Installation .........................................34
AIR CLEANER FILTER ......................................14 Inspection ................................................................37
EM-1
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER .......................... 38 OIL SEAL ........................................................... 93
Exploded View ........................................................ 38
Removal and Installation ........................................ 38 VALVE OIL SEAL ..................................................... 93
Inspection ............................................................... 42 VALVE OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation ......... 93
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ................. 44 FRONT OIL SEAL ..................................................... 93
Exploded View ........................................................ 44 FRONT OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation ........ 93
Removal and Installation ........................................ 44 REAR OIL SEAL ....................................................... 94
Inspection ............................................................... 48 REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation ........... 94
IGNITION COIL, SPARK PLUG AND ROCK- CYLINDER HEAD .............................................. 96
ER COVER ......................................................... 49 Exploded View ........................................................ 96
Exploded View ........................................................ 49 Removal and Installation ......................................... 97
Removal and Installation ........................................ 49 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 100
Inspection .............................................................. 104
TIMING CHAIN .................................................. 52
Exploded View ........................................................ 52 CYLINDER BLOCK .......................................... 107
Removal and Installation ........................................ 53 Exploded View ...................................................... 107
Inspection ............................................................... 65 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 110
Inspection .............................................................. 119
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 67
HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING .. 129
ENGINE ASSEMBLY ......................................... 67 Description ............................................................ 129
Exploded View ........................................................ 67 Piston .................................................................... 129
Removal and Installation ........................................ 67 Connecting Rod Bearing ..................................... 130
Inspection ............................................................... 75 Main Bearing ........................................................ 132
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ............. 76 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE STAND SETTING ................................ 76 (SDS) ......................................................... 135
Setting .................................................................... 76
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE UNIT .................................................... 78 (SDS) ................................................................ 135
Disassembly ........................................................... 78 General Specification ........................................... 135
Assembly ................................................................ 78 Drive Belt .............................................................. 136
Spark Plug ............................................................ 136
REAR TIMING CHAIN CASE ............................ 79 Intake Manifold ...................................................... 136
Exploded View ........................................................ 79 Exhaust Manifold .................................................. 136
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 80 Camshaft ............................................................... 136
Cylinder Head ...................................................... 139
CAMSHAFT ....................................................... 84 Cylinder Block ...................................................... 143
Exploded View ........................................................ 84 Main Bearing ........................................................ 146
Removal and Installation ........................................ 84 Connecting Rod Bearing ..................................... 147
Inspection ............................................................... 88
EM-2
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise INFOID:0000000003802222
EM
JPBIA1711GB
EM-3
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom INFOID:0000000003802223
1. Locate the area where noise occurs.

2. Confirm the type of noise.
3. Specify the operating condition of the engine.
4. Check specified noise source.
If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Operating condition of engine

Location Type of Before After When Source of Refer-
When When While Check item
of noise noise warm- warm- start- noise ence page
idling racing driving
up up ing
Top of en- Ticking or Tappet
C A — A B — Valve clearance EM-17
gine clicking noise
Rocker
cover Camshaft Camshaft runout EM-136
Cylinder Rattle C A — A B C bearing Camshaft journal oil EM-136
head noise clearance
Piston to piston pin oil EM-143

Slap or Piston pin clearance
— A — B B —
knock noise Connecting rod bushing EM-143
oil clearance
Piston to cylinder bore EM-143
Crank- clearance
shaft pul- Piston ring side clear- EM-143
Slap or Piston
ley A — — B B A ance
rap slap noise
Cylinder Piston ring end gap EM-143
block Connecting rod bend EM-143
(Side of and torsion
engine) Connect- Connecting rod bushing EM-143
Oil pan ing rod oil clearance
Knock A B C B B B
bearing Connecting rod bearing EM-147
noise oil clearance
Main bearing oil clear- EM-146
Main bear-
Knock A B — A B C ance
ing noise
Crankshaft runout EM-143
Timing
Front of chain and Timing chain cracks EM-65
engine Tapping or timing and wear
A A — B B B
Timing ticking chain ten- Timing chain tensioner EM-52
chain case sioner operation
noise
Drive belt
Squeak-
(Sticking
ing or fizz- A B — B — C Drive belt deflection
or slip-
ing EM-12
ping)
Front of
Drive belt Idler pulley bearing op-
engine Creaking A B A B A B
(Slipping) eration
Water CO-18,
Squall
A B — B A B pump Water pump operation "Exploded
Creak
noise View"
A: Closely related B: Related C: Sometimes related —: Not related
EM-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
EM
C
PIIB3706J
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT F
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along G
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
H
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: I
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. J
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- K
connectors.
L
INFOID:0000000003802313
NOTE: M
battery cables. N
This vehicle is equipped with a push-button ignition switch and a steering lock unit. O
below before starting the repair operation.
P
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
EM-5
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.
wheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
Precaution for Drain Engine Coolant and Engine Oil INFOID:0000000003802227
Drain engine coolant and engine oil when the engine is cooled.
Precaution for Disconnecting Fuel Piping INFOID:0000000003802228
• Before starting work, check no fire or spark producing items are in the work area.
• Release fuel pressure before disconnecting and disassembly.
• After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage.
Precaution for Removal and Disassembly INFOID:0000000003802229
• When instructed to use SST, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or unin-
structed operations.
• Exercise maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces.
• Dowel pins are used for several parts alignment. When replacing and reassembling parts with dowel pins,
check that dowel pins are installed in the original position.
• Cover openings of engine system with a tape or the equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials.
• Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and reassembly.
• When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally
opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be used
in the step.
Precaution for Inspection, Repair and Replacement INFOID:0000000003802230
Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and
replace if necessary.
Precaution for Assembly and Installation INFOID:0000000003802231
• Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification.

• When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the
ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified,
do exactly as specified.
• Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring.
• Dowel pins are used for several parts alignment. When replacing and reassembling parts with dowel pins,
check that dowel pins are installed in the original position.
• Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check engine oil or engine coolant passages for
any restriction and blockage.
• Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust.
Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well.
• Release air within route when refilling after draining engine coolant.
• After repairing, start the engine and increase engine speed to check engine coolant, fuel, engine oil, and
exhaust gases for leakage.
Precaution for Angle Tightening INFOID:0000000003802232
• Use the angle wrench [SST: KV10112100 (BT8653-A)] for the final tightening of the following engine parts:
- Cylinder head bolts
- Main bearing cap bolts
- Connecting rod cap bolts
- Crankshaft pulley bolt (No the angle wrench is required as bolt flange is provided with notches for angle
tightening)
• Never use a torque value for final tightening.
• The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step.
EM-6
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil.
A
Precaution for Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000003802233
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING

EM
• After removing mounting nuts and bolts, separate the mating sur-
face using the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] (A) and
remove old liquid gasket sealing.
CAUTION: C
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• Tap the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] to insert it (B), and
then slide it (C) by tapping on the side as shown in the figure. D
• In areas where the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] is diffi-
cult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the parts, to remove
it.
CAUTION: E
JPBIA0052ZZ
If for some unavoidable reason tool such as a screwdriver is
used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE F
1. Using a scraper (A), remove old liquid gasket adhering to the
gasket application surface and the mating surface.
• Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the gas- G
ket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes.
2. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating sur-
face with white gasoline (lighting and heating use) to remove H
adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials.
JPBIA0053ZZ
3. Attach liquid gasket tube to the tube presser (commercial ser- J

vice tool).
Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent.
4. Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with K
the specified dimensions.
• If there is a groove for liquid gasket application, apply liquid
gasket to the groove. L
EMA0622D
M
• As for bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the holes.
Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Check to N
read the text of this manual.
• Within 5 minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating
component. O
• If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
• Never retighten mounting bolts or nuts after the installation.
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
engine oil and engine coolant. P
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe
SEM159F
them.
EM-7
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000003802234
Tool number
(SPX North America No.) Description
Tool name
KV10116200 Disassembling valve mechanism
(J26336-A) Part (1) is a component of KV10116200
Valve spring compressor (J26336-A), but Part (2) is not so.
1. KV10115900
(J26336-20)
Attachment
2.KV10109220
( — )
Adapter PBIC1650E
KV10107902 Replacing valve oil seal

(J38959)
Valve oil seal puller
NT011
KV10115600 Installing valve oil seal

(J-38958) Use side A.
Valve oil seal drift a: 20 mm (0.79 in) dia.
b: 13 mm (0.51 in) dia.
c: 10 mm (0.406 in)
d: 8 mm (0.31 in) dia.
e: 10.7 mm (0.421 in)
f: 5 mm (0.20 in) dia.
S-NT603
EM03470000 Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore

(J8037)
Piston ring compressor
NT044
ST16610001 Removing pilot converter

(J23907)
Pilot bushing puller
NT045
KV10111100 Removing oil pan (lower and upper), front and

(J37228) rear timing chain case, etc.
Seal cutter
NT046
EM-8
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool number
(SPX North America No.) Description A
Tool name
KV10112100 Tightening bolts for connecting rod bearing
(BT8653-A) cap, cylinder head, etc. in angle EM
Angle wrench
NT014
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio sensor 1 D

(J3647-A) For 22 mm (0.87 in) width hexagon nut
Heated oxygen sensor wrench
E
NT379 F
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sen-
(J38365) sor 2
Heated oxygen sensor wrench a: 22 mm (0.87 in) G
H
NT636
— Removing fuel tube quick connectors in en-

(J-45488) gine room I
Quick connector release (Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG:
Part No. 16441 6N210)
J
PBIC0198E
K
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000003802235
L
(SPX North America No.)
Description
Tool name
( — ) Loosening bolts and nuts M
Power tool
PBIC0190E
O
( — ) Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
Tube presser
NT052
EM-9
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Description
Tool name
( — ) Removing and installing engine
Manual lift table caddy
ZZA1210D
(J24239-01) Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt,

Cylinder head bolt wrench and used with the angle wrench [SST:
KV10112100 (BT8653-A)]
a: 13 mm (0.51 in) dia.
b: 12 mm (0.47 in)
c: 10 mm (0.39 in)
NT583
( — ) Checking compression pressure

1.Compression tester
2.Adapter
ZZA0008D
( — ) Removing and installing spark plug

Spark plug wrench a: 14 mm (0.55 in)
JPBIA0399ZZ
( — ) Removing and installing crankshaft pulley

Pulley holder
ZZA1010D
( — ) Finishing valve seat dimensions

Valve seat cutter set
NT048
( — ) Removing and installing piston ring

Piston ring expander
NT030
EM-10
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Description
Tool name A
( — ) Removing and installing valve guide
Valve guide drift Intake and Exhaust:
a: 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia. EM
b: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia.
C
NT015
( — ) (1): Reaming valve guide inner hole

Valve guide reamer (2): Reaming hole for oversize valve guide D
Intake and Exhaust:
d1: 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia.
d2: 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia.
E
NT016
F
a: (J-43897-18) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
b: (J-43897-12) before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor and
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner heated oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lu-
bricant shown below.) G
a: J-43897-18 [18 mm (0.71 in) dia.] for zir-
conia heated oxygen sensor and air fuel
ratio sensor
b: J-43897-12 [12 mm (0.47 in) dia.] for tita- H
AEM488 nia heated oxygen sensor
( — ) Lubricating air fuel ratio sensor and oxygen
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR sensor threads cleaning tool when recondi- I
or equivalent meeting MIL specifica- tioning exhaust system threads
tion MIL-A-907)
AEM489
EM-11
DRIVE BELT
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE >
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
DRIVE BELT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000003802236
JPBIA1625ZZ
1. Idler pulley 2. Drive belt 3. Power steering oil pump

4. Drive belt auto-tensioner 5. Crankshaft pulley 6. Idler pulley
7. A/C compressor 8. Alternator
A. Indicator B. Range when new drive belt is installed C. Possible use range
D. View D
: Engine front
Checking INFOID:0000000003802237
WARNING:
Be sure to perform the this step when engine is stopped.
• Check that the indicator (A) of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the possible use range (C).
NOTE:
• Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
• When new drive belt is installed, the indicator should be within the range (B) in the figure.
• Visually check entire drive belt for wear, damage or cracks.
• If the indicator is out of the possible use range or belt is damaged, replace drive belt.
Tension Adjustment INFOID:0000000003802238
Refer to EM-136, "Drive Belt".

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003802239
REMOVAL
1. Remove front wheel and tire (RH).
2. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View".
EM-12
DRIVE BELT
3. Hold the hexagonal part in center of drive belt auto-tensioner
pulley with a box wrench securely. Then move the wrench han- A
dle in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of drive belt).
CAUTION:
• Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may
EM
occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off.
• Never loosen the hexagonal part in center of drive belt
auto-tensioner pulley (Never turn it counterclockwise). If
turned counterclockwise, the complete drive belt auto- C
tensioner must be replaced as a unit, including the pulley.
4. Insert a rod approximately 6 mm (0.24 in) in diameter such as JPBIA1627ZZ
short-length screwdriver into the hole (A) of the retaining boss to D
fix drive belt auto-tensioner pulley.
• Keep drive belt auto-tensioner pulley arm locked after drive belt is removed.
5. Loosen drive belt from water pump pulley in sequence, and remove it. E
INSTALLATION
1. Hook drive belt on to all pulleys except for drive belt auto-tensioner pulley, and then onto drive belt auto-
tensioner pulley finally. F
CAUTION:
• Confirm drive belt is completely set to pulleys.
• Check for engine oil, working fluid and engine coolant are not adhered to drive belt and each G
pulley groove.
2. Release drive belt auto-tensioner, and apply tension to drive belt.
3. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise several times to equalize tension between each pulley. H
4. Confirm tension of drive belt at indicator is within the possible use range. Refer to EM-12, "Exploded
View".
I
EM-13
AIR CLEANER FILTER
AIR CLEANER FILTER
REMOVAL
1. Unhook air cleaner case (lower) side clips and lift up air cleaner case (upper).
2. Remove air cleaner filter from air cleaner case (lower).
PBIC1165E
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the air cleaner filter by aligning the seal with the notch of air cleaner case.
EM-14
SPARK PLUG
SPARK PLUG
A
EM
J
JPBIA1637GB
1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. PCV hose K

4. Clamp 5. PCV valve 6. O-ring
7. Rocker cover (bank 1) 8. PCV hose 9. Rocker cover gasket (bank 1)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) L
10. O-ring 11. 12. Oil filler cap
(bank 1)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
13. Rocker cover (bank 2) 14. Rocker cover gasket (bank 2) 15.
(bank 2) M
16. PCV hose 17. Clamp
A. To intake manifold collector B. Refer to EM-49 C. Camshaft bracket side
D. To air duct assembly N
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.

O
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View". P
2. Remove air cleaner cases (upper and lower) and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
3. Remove electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
4. Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
5. Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View".
EM-15
SPARK PLUG
6. Remove spark plug with a spark plug wrench (commercial ser-
vice tool).
a : 14 mm (0.55 in)
JPBIA0030ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Inspection INFOID:0000000003802243
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Use the standard type spark plug for normal condition.
Spark plug (Standard type) : Refer to EM-136, "Spark Plug".

CAUTION:
• Never drop or shock spark plug.
• Never use a wire brush for cleaning.
• If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be
used.
Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 bar, 6 kg/

cm2, 85 psi)
Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
SMA773C
• Spark plug gap adjustment is not required between replace-

ment intervals.
• Measure spark plug gap. When it exceeds the limit, replace
spark plug even if it is within the specified replacement mile-
age. Refer to EM-136, "Spark Plug".
JPBIA0031ZZ
EM-16
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
A
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003802244
INSPECTION EM
Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if
there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance.
In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve- C
related parts, or of unusual engine conditions due to changes in
valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing
noise), perform inspection as follows:
D
: Engine front
JPBIA0164ZZ
F
1. Remove rocker covers (bank 1 and bank 2). Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View".
2. Measure the valve clearance as follows: G
a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke.
• Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark
(grooved line without color) ( ) with timing indicator. H
SEM727G
K
• Check that intake and exhaust cam nose on No. 1 cylinder
(engine front side of bank 1) are located as shown in the fig-
ure. L
• If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360 degrees) and align
as shown in the figure.
M
: Engine front
N
JPBIA0044ZZ
b. Use a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter

O
and camshaft.
Valve clearance : Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft".

P
SEM139D
EM-17
• By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at
locations marked “×” as shown in the table below (locations
indicated in the figure).
: Engine front
• No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC
Measuring position [bank 1 (A)] No. 1 CYL. No. 3 CYL. No. 5 CYL.
No. 1 cylinder at com- EXH (C) × (B)

pression TDC INT (D) × (E)
Measuring position [bank 2 (H)] No. 2 CYL. No. 4 CYL. No. 6 CYL.
No. 1 cylinder at com- INT (D) × (F)

pression TDC EXH (C) × (G)
JPBIA0165ZZ
c. Rotate crankshaft by 240 degrees clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at
TDC its compression stroke.
NOTE:
Mark a position 240 degrees (b) from a corner of the hexagonal
part of crankshaft pulley mounting bolt as shown in the figure.
Use the hexagonal part as a guide.
1 : Crankshaft pulley
A : Paint mark
JPBIA0166ZZ
EM-18
locations marked “×” as shown in the table below (locations A
: Engine front
EM
Measuring position [bank 1 (A)] No. 1 CYL. No. 3 CYL. No. 5 CYL. C
No. 3 cylinder at com- EXH (C) × (B)

pression TDC INT (D) × (E)
D
No. 3 cylinder at com- INT (D) × (F)

pression TDC EXH (C) × (G) E
G
JPBIA0167ZZ
d. Rotate crankshaft by 240 degrees clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at
TDC of compression stroke. H
NOTE:
Mark a position 240 degrees (b) from a corner of the hexagonal
part of crankshaft pulley mounting bolt as shown in the figure.
I
Use the hexagonal part as a guide.
A : Paint mark J
JPBIA0166ZZ
EM-19
locations marked “×” as shown in the table below (locations
: Engine front
Measuring position [bank 1 (A)] No. 1 CYL. No. 3 CYL. No. 5 CYL.
No. 5 cylinder at EXH (C) × (B)

compression TDC INT (D) × (E)
No. 5 cylinder at INT (D) × (F)

compression TDC EXH (C) × (G)
JPBIA0168ZZ
3. Perform adjustment if the measured value is out of the standard. Refer to “ADJUSTMENT”.
ADJUSTMENT
• Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter.
1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to “INSPECTION”.
2. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-84, "Exploded View".
3. Remove valve lifters at the locations that are out of the standard.
4. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters with a
micrometer (A).
JPBIA0169ZZ
5. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation: t = t1+ (C1 – C2)

t = Valve lifter thickness to be replaced
t1 = Removed valve lifter thickness
C1 = Measured valve clearance
C2 = Standard valve clearance:
Intake : 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Exhaust : 0.33 mm (0.013 in)
• VQ25DE
EM-20
- Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks
on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). A
A : Stamp
B : Thickness of valve lifter EM
Stamped mark 788P indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thick-
ness. (intake side)
Stamped mark 666U indicates 6.66 mm (0.2622 in) in thick- C
ness. (exhaust side)
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 size with range 7.88 to
8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) (intake side) and 6.66 to 7.18 JPBIA0170ZZ
mm (0.2622 to 0.2827 in) (exhaust side) in steps of 0.02 D

(0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft".
CAUTION:
Install identification letter at the end, “P”and “U”, at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis- E
installation between intake and exhaust)
• VQ35DE
- Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks
on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). F
A : Stamp
B : Thickness of valve lifter G
Stamp mark 788P indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness.
JPBIA0170ZZ
I
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in steps of
0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft".
J
6. Install selected valve lifter.
7. Install camshaft. Refer to EM-84, "Exploded View".
8. Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns. K
9. Check that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the specifications by referring to the specified
values. Refer to EM-17, "Inspection and Adjustment".
10. Install all removal parts in the reverse order of removal. L
11. Warm up the engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration.
EM-21
COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it.

2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-411, "Inspection".
3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. Refer to EC-20,
"Component Parts Location".
4. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View".
5. Remove ignition coil and spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View".
6. Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-III).
7. Install compression gauge with an adapter (commercial service
tool) onto spark plug hole.
PBIC0900E
• Use the adapter whose picking up end inserted to spark plug

hole is smaller than 20 mm (0.79 in) in diameter. Otherwise, it
may be caught by cylinder head during removal.
a : φ20 mm (0.79 in)
JPBIA0171ZZ
8. With accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn ignition switch to “START” for cranking. When the gauge
pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and the engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each
cylinder.
Compression pressure : Refer to EM-135, "General Specification".

CAUTION:
Always use a fully charged battery to obtain the specified engine speed.
• If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the
engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
• If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated with
combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head
gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again.
• If some cylinder has low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole
of the cylinder to recheck it for compression.
- If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check pis-
ton rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be mal-
functioning. Check valves for damage. Replace valve or valve seat accordingly.
• If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains
low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case, replace cyl-
inder head gaskets.
9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts.
EM-22
10. Start the engine, and check that the engine runs smoothly.
11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-124, "Description". A
EM
EM-23
ENGINE COVER
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR >
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
ENGINE COVER
JPBIA1712GB
1. Engine cover
REMOVAL
1. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
2. Remove engine cover mounting bolts (A), (B).
JPBIA1718ZZ
3. Draw and pull out engine cover from engine cover mounting bolts (C), (D).
CAUTION:
• Pull engine cover from mounting bolt (D) holding with hand the position (E) as shown in the fig-
ure.
• Never damage or scratch engine cover when installing or removing.
4. Remove engine mounting bolts (C), (D), if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
EM-24
DRIVE BELT AUTO TENSIONER AND IDLER PULLEY
DRIVE BELT AUTO TENSIONER AND IDLER PULLEY
A
EM
G
JPBIA1626GB
1. Drive belt auto-tensioner 2. Idler pulley 3. Idler pulley

4. Bracket
H
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003802249 I
Removal
1. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation". J
• Keep auto-tensioner pulley arm locked after drive belt is removed.
2. Remove auto-tensioner and idler pulley.
• Keep auto-tensioner pulley arm locked to install or remove auto-tensioner. K
Installation
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: L
If there is damage greater than peeled paint, replace drive belt auto-tensioner.
EM-25
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
JPBIA2193GB
1. Mass air flow sensor 2. Air cleaner case (upper) 3. Air cleaner filter
4. Clamp 5. Air duct assembly 6. Clamp
7. PCV hose 8. Air duct (inlet) 9. Grommet
10. Collar 11. Grommet 12. Grommet
13. Bracket 14. Bracket 15. Collar
16. Grommet 17. Air cleaner case (lower)
A. To electric throttle control actuator B. To rocker cover (bank 2) C. VQ25DE
REMOVAL
1. Remove air duct (inlet).
2. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor.
3. Disconnect PCV hose.
4. Remove air cleaner cases (upper and lower) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assembly disconnect-
ing their joints.
• Add mating marks as necessary for easier installation.
5. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary.
CAUTION:
Handle mass air flow sensor with following cares.
• Never shock mass air flow sensor.
• Never disassemble mass air flow sensor.
EM-26
• Never touch mass air flow sensor.
A
INSTALLATION
• Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly.
EM
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL C

Inspect air duct assembly for crack or tear.
• If anything found, replace air duct assembly.
D
EM-27
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
VQ25DE
JPBIA2194GB
1. Vacuum hose 2. Clamp 3. Clamp

4. PCV hose 5. Intake manifold collector 6. Gasket
7. Vacuum hose 8. VIAS control solenoid valve 9. Vacuum hose
Electronic controlled engine mount
10. Bracket 11. 12. Vacuum hose
control solenoid valve
13. Vacuum hose 14. Vacuum gallery 15. Vacuum hose
EVAP canister purge control solenoid
16. 17. Clamp 18. EVAP hose
valve
19. Service port 20. Bracket 21. EVAP hose
22. EVAP hose 23. EVAP pipe 24. EVAP hose
25. Clamp 26. Water hose 27. Water hose
28. Bracket 29. Electric throttle control actuator 30. Gasket
A. To brake booster B. To rocker cover (bank 1) C. To vacuum tube (rear)
D. To vacuum pipe E. To heater pipe F. To water outlet
: Engine front
VQ35DE
EM-28
EM
I
JPBIA1713GB
1. Vacuum hose 2. Clamp 3. Clamp

J
4. PCV hose 5. Intake manifold collector 6. Gasket
7. Vacuum hose 8. Bracket 9.
10. Vacuum hose 11. Vacuum hose 12. Vacuum hose K
13. Vacuum gallery 14. Vacuum hose 15. Vacuum hose
EVAP canister purge control solenoid
16. VIAS control solenoid valve 2 17. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 18. L
valve
19. Clamp 20. EVAP hose 21. Service port
22. Bracket 23. EVAP hose 24. EVAP hose
25. EVAP pipe 26. EVAP hose 27. Clamp M
28. Water hose 29. Water hose 30. Bracket
31. Electric throttle control actuator 32. Gasket
A. To brake booster B. To rocker cover (bank 1) C. To vacuum tube (rear) N
D. To vacuum pipe E. To heater pipe F. To water outlet
: Engine front
O
P
REMOVAL
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain engine coolant when the engine is hot.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch engine cover.
EM-29
2. Remove air cleaner cases (upper and lower) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assembly. Refer to
EM-26, "Exploded View".
3. Drain engine coolant, or when water hoses are disconnected, attach plug to prevent engine coolant leak-
age. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
CAUTION:
Perform this step when the engine is cold.
4. Remove front wiper arm and extension cowl top. Refer to WW-105, "Exploded View" and EXT-20,
"Exploded View".
5. Disconnect water hoses from electric throttle control actuator.
• When engine coolant is not drained from radiator, attach plug to water hoses to prevent engine coolant
leakage.
6. Remove electric throttle control actuator as follows:
a. Disconnect harness connector.
b. Loosen mounting bolts in reverse order as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid any shock to electric throttle
control actuator.
• Never disassemble.
JPBIA1631ZZ
7. Remove the following parts:

• Vacuum hose
• PCV hose
• High pressure piping from intake manifold collector: Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View".
• Electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve
8. Disconnect EVAP hoses and harness connector from EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve.
9. Remove EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve and bracket assembly.
10. Remove VIAS control solenoid valve mounting bolts and vacuum gallery mounting bolts, and then move
vacuum gallery.
• Add mating marks as necessary for easier installation.
11. Loosen mounting nuts and bolts in reverse order as shown in
the figure, and remove intake manifold collector and gasket.
: Engine front
CAUTION:
Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
NOTE:
Figure is shown as an example of VQ35DE.
JPBIA1628ZZ
INSTALLATION
Intake Manifold Collector
EM-30
Tighten mounting nuts and bolts in numerical order as shown in the
figure. A
: Engine front
NOTE: EM
Figure is shown as an example of VQ35DE.
JPBIA1628ZZ
D
Electric Throttle Control Actuator
• Tighten mounting bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure.
• Perform the “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” when har-
ness connector of electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. E
Refer to EC-16, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
• Perform the “Idle Air Volume Learning” and “Throttle Valve Closed F
Position Learning” when electric throttle control actuator is
replaced. Refer to EC-16, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Spe-
cial Repair Requirement".
G
JPBIA1631ZZ
EM-31
INTAKE MANIFOLD
INTAKE MANIFOLD
JPBIA1629GB
1. Intake manifold 2. Gasket

A. Refer to EM-32
REMOVAL
3. Remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-44, "Exploded View".
4. Loosen mounting nuts and bolts in reverse order as shown in
the figure to remove intake manifold with power tool.
: Engine front
JPBIA1630ZZ
5. Remove gaskets.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order or removal.
Intake Manifold
• If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque below.
: 10.8 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
EM-32
INTAKE MANIFOLD
• Tighten all mounting nuts and bolts to the specified torque in two or
more steps in numerical order shown in the figure. A
: Engine front
EM
1st step : 7.4 N·m (0.75 kg-m, 5 ft-lb)
2nd step and after : 25.5 N·m (2.6 kg-m, 19 ft-lb)
C
JPBIA1630ZZ
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL E

Surface Distortion
• Check the surface distortion of the intake manifold mating surface
with a straightedge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). F
Limit : Refer to EM-136, "Intake Manifold".

• If it exceeds the limit, replace intake manifold. G
JPBIA0015ZZ
EM-33
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
JPBIA2235GB
1. Gasket 2. Exhaust manifold (bank 1) 3. Exhaust manifold cover (bank 1)

4. Air fuel ratio sensor 1 (bank 1) 5. Ring gasket 6. Three way catalyst (bank 1)
7. Three way catalyst support (bank 1) 8. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) 9. Air fuel ratio sensor 1 (bank 2)
10. Exhaust manifold cover (bank 2) 11. Exhaust manifold (bank 2) 12. Ring gasket
13. Three way catalyst (bank 2) 14. Three way catalyst support (bank 2) 15. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)
A. To oil pan (upper) B. Upper mark
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down.
1. Remove following parts:
• Air duct (inlet), air cleaner case (upper) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assembly: Refer to EM-
26, "Exploded View".
• Engine cover: Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View".
• Front wiper arm: Refer to WW-105, "Exploded View".
• Extension cowl top: Refer to EXT-20, "Exploded View".
2. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
EM-34
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove air fuel ratio sensor
1 on both banks with the heated oxygen sensor wrench [SST: A
KV10117100 (J3647-A)] (B).
• Put marks to identify installation positions of each air fuel ratio
sensor 1.
EM
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage air fuel ratio sensor 1.
• Discard any air fuel ratio sensor 1 which has been
dropped onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. C
Replace with a new sensor.
NOTE:
JPBIA1781ZZ
Figure is shown as an example of bank 2 (A). D
4. Disconnect harness connector and remove heated oxygen sen-

sor 2 on both banks with the heated oxygen sensor wrench
E
[SST: KV10114400 (J38365)] (B).
A : Bank 1
C : Bank 2 F
• Put marks to identify installation positions of each heated oxy-
gen sensor 2.
CAUTION: G
• Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor 2.
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been JPBIA2247ZZ
dropped onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. H

Replace with a new sensor.
5. Remove exhaust manifold covers (bank 1 and bank 2).

I
6. Remove three way catalyst support mounting bolts (bank 1 and bank 2).
7. Remove three way catalysts (bank 1 and bank 2) by loosening bolts first and then removing nuts.
CAUTION: J
Handle carefully to avoid any shock to three way catalyst.
8. Loosen mounting nuts in reverse order as shown in the figure to
remove exhaust manifolds (bank 1 and bank 2). K
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2 L
: Engine front
NOTE:
Disregard No. 7 and 8 when loosing. M
JPBIA1633ZZ
9. Remove gaskets.
CAUTION:
EM-35
INSTALLATION
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Install in the direction indicated in the figure.
A : Bank 1
B : Triangle press
C : Bank 2
: Engine front
PBIC4954E
Exhaust Manifold
• If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the torque specified below.
: 15.4 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)

• Tighten mounting nuts in numerical order as shown in the figure.
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2
: Engine front
NOTE:
No. 7 and 8 mean double tightening of nuts No. 1 and 2.
JPBIA1633ZZ
Three Way Catalyst Supports

1. Temporarily tighten three way catalyst support mounting bolts.
2. Tighten three way catalyst support mounting bolts to oil pan (upper).
3. Tighten three way catalyst support mounting bolts to three way catalyst.
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 and Heated Oxygen Sensor 2
• Install air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 in the original position.
EM-36
• Install referring the following if the installation positions cannot be
identified. A
Glass tube color

Air fuel ratio sensor 1 : Gray EM
Heated oxygen sensor 2 : White
CAUTION:
• Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor and a new heated C
oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using oxygen
sensor thread cleaner (commercial service tool: J-43897-18 or PBIC2652E
J43897-12) and apply anti-seize lubricant (commercial service D
tool).
• Never over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage
to air fuel ratio sensor and heated oxygen sensor, resulting in “MI” coming on.
E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL F

Surface Distortion
• Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating sur-
face with a straightedge and a feeler gauge. G
Limit : Refer to EM-136, "Exhaust Manifold".

H
• If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold.
PBIC1173E
J
EM-37
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
JPBIA1636GB
1. Oil pan (upper) 2. O-ring 3. Oil pan gasket (front)

4. Relief valve 5. Oil pressure switch 6. Oil cooler
7. Connector bolt 8. Oil filter 9. Oil strainer
10. Drain plug 11. Drain plug washer 12. Oil pan (lower)
13. Rear plate cover 14. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 15. Oil pan gasket (rear)
A. Refer to LU-10 B. To oil pump C. Oil pan side
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain engine oil when the engine is hot.
NOTE:
When removing oil pan (lower) or oil strainer only, take step 1 then step 18 and 19.
1. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Draining".
CAUTION:
Never spill engine oil on drive belt.
2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
CAUTION:
Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
3. Remove following parts:
• Front road wheel and tires (RH and LH)
EM-38
• Splash guard (RH and LH): Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View".
• Exhaust front tube: Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". A
• Drive belt: Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove A/C compressor with piping connected, and temporarily secure it to aside. Refer to HA-36,
"Exploded View". EM
5. Remove oil level gauge. Refer to EM-96, "Exploded View".
6. Remove front drive shaft (RH). Refer to FAX-16, "Exploded View".
7. Remove three way catalyst (bank 1 and bank 2) from exhaust manifolds (bank 1 and bank 2). Refer to C
8. Remove oil pressure switch.
9. Remove oil filter. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Installation". D
10. Remove oil cooler and water pipes. Refer to LU-11, "Exploded View".
11. Support transaxle assembly with a suitable jack.
CAUTION: E
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
12. Support front suspension member with a suitable jack.
13. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM-67, "Exploded View". F
14. Remove engine mounting insulator (LH) mounting bolts from transaxle. Refer to EM-67, "Exploded View".
15. Remove rear torque rod through bolts from rear torque rod bracket. Refer to EM-67, "Exploded View".
G
16. Remove member stay, front suspension member fixing bolts and nuts. Refer to FSU-16, "Exploded View".
17. Lower the jack for the front suspension member to the height.
18. Remove oil pan (lower) as follows: H
a. Loosen mounting bolts in reverse order as shown in the figure to
remove.
I
K
PBIC0782E
b. Insert the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] (A) between L

oil pan (upper) and oil pan (lower).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• Never insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating M
surfaces.
c. Slide the seal cutter by tapping on the side of tool with a ham-
mer. Remove oil pan (lower). N
JPBIA0276ZZ
O
19. Remove oil strainer.

P
EM-39
20. Loosen mounting bolts in the reverse order as shown in the fig-
ure to remove.
• Insert the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] between oil
pan (upper) and cylinder block. Slide seal cutter by tapping on
the side of tool with a hammer. Remove oil pan (upper).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• Never insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating
surfaces.
PBIC1636E
21. Remove O-rings (2) from bottom of cylinder block (1) and oil
pump (3).
: Engine front
JPBIA1379ZZ
22. Remove oil pan gaskets (1).
A : Notch
B : Protrusion
: Engine front
JPBIA0433ZZ
INSTALLATION
1. Install oil pan (upper) as follows:
a. Use a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
CAUTION:
Never scratch or damage the mating surfaces when clean-
ing off old liquid gasket.
• Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder
block.
• Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and threads.
MEM108A
b. Install new oil pan gaskets.
EM-40
• Apply liquid gasket to new oil pan gaskets as shown in the fig-
ure. A
C : Sealing point
a : 15 mm (0.59 in) EM
b : 5 mm (0.20 in)
C
JPBIA0432ZZ
D
• To install, align protrusion (B) of oil pan gasket with notches
(A) of front timing chain case and rear oil seal retainer.
E
: Engine front
• Install oil pan gasket (1) with smaller arc to front timing chain
case side. F
G
JPBIA0433ZZ
c. Install new O-rings (2) on the bottom of cylinder block (1) and oil H
pump (3).
: Engine front
I
JPBIA1379ZZ K
d. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket with the tube presser

(commercial service tool) to the cylinder block mating surface of L
oil pan (upper) to a limited portion as shown in the figure.
b : 35 mm (1.38 in)
c : φ3.5 - 4.5 mm (0.138 - 0.177 in) M
: Engine front
Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. N

CAUTION:
• For bolt holes with marks (5 locations), apply liquid JPBIA0434ZZ
gasket outside the holes.
• Apply a bead of 4.5 to 5.5 mm (0.177 to 0.217 in) diameter to area (a). O
• Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
e. Install oil pan (upper).
CAUTION: P
Install avoiding misalignment of both O-rings.
EM-41
• Tighten mounting bolts in numerical order as shown in the fig-
ure.
• There are two types of mounting bolts. Refer to the following
for locating bolts.
M8 × 135 mm (5.31 in) : 11

M8 × 92 mm (3.62 in) : 5, 7, 8
M8 × 25 mm (0.98 in) : Except the above
PBIC1636E
2. Install oil strainer to oil pump.

3. Install oil pan (lower) as follows:
a. Use scraper (A) to remove old liquid gasket from mating sur-
faces.
• Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and thread.
CAUTION:
Never scratch or damage the mating surfaces when clean-
ing off old liquid gasket.
JPBIA0025ZZ
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket with the tube presser

(commercial service tool) (A) to the oil pan (lower) as shown in
the figure.
b : φ4.0 - 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in)

CAUTION:
Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
JPBIA0026ZZ
c. Install oil pan (lower).

• Tighten mounting bolts in numerical order as shown in the fig-
ure.
4. Install oil pan drain plug.
• Refer to the figure of components of former page for installa-
tion direction of drain plug washer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded
View".
5. Install in the reverse order of removal after this step.
NOTE:
At least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed, pour engine oil.
PBIC0782E

Clean oil strainer if any object attached.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Check the engine oil level and adjust engine oil. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
2. Start engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil.
EM-42
3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
4. Check the engine oil level again. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". A
EM
EM-43
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
JPBIA1714GB
1. Fuel feed hose 2. Quick connector cap 3. Fuel tube

4. O-ring 5. Fuel damper 6. Fuel damper cap
7. Clip 8. O-ring (black) 9. Fuel injector
10. O-ring (green)
A. Refer to EM-44
CAUTION:
Never remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown in the figure.
REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop.
• Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
• Never smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area.
• To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain engine coolant when engine is hot.
1. Remove air duct (inlet), air cleaner cases (upper and lower) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assem-
bly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
3. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-411, "Inspection".
4. Remove front wiper arm and extension cowl top. Refer to WW-105, "Exploded View" and EXT-20,
"Exploded View".
EM-44
5. Drain engine coolant, or when water hoses are disconnected, attach plug to prevent engine coolant leak-
age. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" or EM-28, "Exploded View". A
CAUTION:
Perform this step when the engine is cold.
6. Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View". EM
7. When separating fuel feed hose and fuel tube connection, disconnect quick connector as follows:
a. Remove quick connector cap from quick connector.
C
b. Disconnect quick connector from fuel tube as follows:
CAUTION:
Disconnect quick connector by using the quick connector release [SST: — (J-45488)], not by pick-
ing out retainer tabs. D
i. With the sleeve side of quick connector release facing to quick connector, install the quick connector
release onto fuel tube.
E
ii. Insert the quick connector release (A) into quick connector (2)
until sleeve (B) contacts and goes no further. Hold quick connec-
tor release on that position. F
C : Insert and retain
CAUTION: G
Inserting quick connector release hard will not disconnect
quick connector. Hold quick connector release where it
contacts and goes no further.
H
iii. Draw and pull out quick connector straight from fuel tube (1).
CAUTION: JPBIA0033ZZ
• Pull quick connector (E) holding position (D) as shown in

the figure. I
• Never pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
• Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
• Avoid fire and sparks. J
• Keep parts away from heat source. Especially, be careful when welding is performed around
them.
• Never expose parts to battery electrolyte or other acids.
• Never bend or twist connection between quick connector and fuel feed hose (with damper) dur- K
ing installation/removal.
• To keep clean the connecting portion and to avoid dam-
age and foreign materials, cover them completely with L
plastic bags, etc. (A) or something similar.
JPBIA0035ZZ
O
8. Disconnect harness connector from fuel injector.
EM-45
9. Loosen mounting bolts in reverse order as shown in the figure,
and remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly.
: Engine front
CAUTION:
Never tilt fuel tube, or remaining fuel in pipes may flow out
from pipes.
JPBIA1715ZZ
10. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube as follows:

a. Open and remove clip (1).
3 : O-ring (green)
4 : O-ring (black)
A : Installed condition
B : Clip mounting groove
b. Remove fuel injector (2) from fuel tube (5) by pulling straight.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with remaining fuel that may go out from fuel
tube. JPBIA1958ZZ
• Be careful not to damage injector nozzle during removal.
• Never bump or drop fuel injector.
• Never disassemble fuel injector.
11. Remove fuel damper from fuel tube.

INSTALLATION
1. Install fuel damper as follows:
a. Install new O-ring (2) to fuel tube (1) as shown. When handling
new O-ring, be careful of the following caution:
CAUTION:
• Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
• Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
• Never clean O-ring with solvent.
• Check that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign
material.
• When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with
tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch
O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being
attached, never insert it quickly into fuel tube.
• Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Never twist it.
b. Install spacer (3) to fuel damper (4).
c. Insert fuel damper straight into fuel tube.
CAUTION:
• Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up.
• Never pressure-fit with excessive force.
Reference value : 130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lb)

• Insert fuel damper until (B) is touching (A) of fuel tube.
d. Tighten bolts evenly in turn. JPBIA0316ZZ
• After tightening bolts, check that there is no gap between fuel

damper cap (5) and fuel tube.
2. Install new O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the following.
CAUTION:
EM-46
• Upper and lower O-ring are different. Be careful not to confuse them.
A
Fuel tube side : Black
Nozzle side : Green
EM
• Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
• Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
• Never clean O-ring with solvent.
• Check that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. C
• When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, never insert it quickly
into fuel tube. D
• Insert O-ring straight into fuel injector. Never decenter or twist it.
3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube as follows:
a. Insert clip (3) into clip mounting groove (F) on fuel injector (5). E
2 : O-ring (black)
4 : O-ring (green)
F
• Insert clip so that protrusion (E) of fuel injector matches cutout
(C) of clip.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse clip. Replace it with new one. G
• Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If
interference occurs, replace O-ring.
b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube (1) with clip attached. H
• Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
• Insert fuel injector so that protrusion (A) of fuel tube matches
cutout (B) of clip. I
• Check that fuel tube flange (G) is securely fixed in flange fixing
groove (D) on clip.
c. Check that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector J
does not rotate or come off.
• Check that protrusions of fuel injectors and fuel tubes are
aligned with cutouts of clips after installation.
K
JPBIA1959ZZ
4. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold. L

CAUTION:
Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts.
• Tighten mounting bolts in two steps in numerical order as
M
shown in the figure.
: Engine front
N
1st step : 10.1 N·m (1.0 kg-m, 7 ft-lb)

2nd step : 22.0 N·m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) O
JPBIA1715ZZ
P
5. Connect fuel injector harness.
6. Install intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
7. Connect quick connector between fuel feed hose and fuel tube connection with the following procedure:
a. Check no foreign substances are deposited in and around fuel tube and quick connector, and no damage
on them.
b. Thinly apply new engine oil around fuel tube from tip end to spool end.
EM-47
c. Align center to insert quick connector straightly into fuel tube.
• Insert quick connector (1) to fuel tube until top spool (2) is
completely inside quick connector, and 2nd level spool (3)
exposes right below quick connector.
B : Fitted condition
: Upright insertion
CAUTION:
• Hold (A) position as shown in the figure when inserting
fuel tube into quick connector.
• Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to pre-
JPBIA0275ZZ
vent damage to O-ring inside quick connector.
• Insert until you hear a “click” sound and actually feel the engagement.
• To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step.
d. Pull quick connector by hand holding (A) position. Check it is
completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come out
from fuel tube (2).
1 : Fuel feed hose

B : Upper view
e. Install quick connector cap (3) to quick connector.
• Install quick connector cap with arrow on surface facing in
direction of quick connector (fuel feed hose side).
CAUTION:
JPBIA0039ZZ
If quick connector cap cannot be installed smoothly, quick
connector may have not been installed correctly. Check connection again.
f. Secure fuel feed hose to clamp of quick connector cap.


Check on Fuel Leakage
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with the engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check there
are no fuel leakage at connection points.
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking at points out of clear sight.
2. Start the engine. With engine speed increased, check again that there are no fuel leakage at connection
points.
CAUTION:
Never touch the engine immediately after stopped, as the engine becomes extremely hot.
EM-48
IGNITION COIL, SPARK PLUG AND ROCKER COVER
A
EM
J
JPBIA1637GB
1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. PCV hose K

4. Clamp 5. PCV valve 6. O-ring
7. Rocker cover (bank 1) 8. PCV hose 9. Rocker cover gasket (bank 1)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) L
10. O-ring 11. 12. Oil filler cap
(bank 1)
13. Rocker cover (bank 2) 14. Rocker cover gasket (bank 2) 15.
(bank 2) M
16. PCV hose 17. Clamp
A. To intake manifold collector B. Refer to EM-49 C. Camshaft bracket side
D. To air duct assembly N

O
REMOVAL
1. Remove the following parts: P
• Air cleaner cases (upper and lower) and air duct assembly: Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
• Intake manifold collector: Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect PCV hose from rocker cover.
EM-49
3. Remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1 and bank
2).
A : Keep off any magnetic materials

CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks.
• Never disassemble
• Never allow metal powder to adhere to magnetic part at
sensor tip.
• Never place sensors in a location where they are exposed
to magnetism. JPBIA0454ZZ
4. Remove PCV valve and O-ring from rocker cover, if necessary.

5. Remove oil filler cap from rocker cover, if necessary.
6. Remove ignition coil.
CAUTION:
Never shock ignition coil.
7. Remove harness clips on the rocker cover.
8. Loosen bolts in reverse order shown in the figure.
: Engine front
JPBIA1634ZZ
9. Remove rocker cover gasket from rocker cover.

10. Use scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1).
CAUTION:
Never scratch or damage the mating surface when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
INSTALLATION
EM-50
1. Apply liquid gasket to the position shown in the figure with the
following procedure: A
A : Liquid gasket application point

F : View F EM
b : 4 mm (0.16 in)
c : φ2.5 - 3.5 mm (0.098 - 0.138 in)
d : 5 mm (0.20 in) C
g : 10 mm (0.39 in)
I : End surface of camshaft bracket (No. 1)
: Engine front D
a. Refer to figure (E) to apply liquid gasket to joint part of camshaft
bracket (No. 1) (1) and cylinder head. E
b. Refer to figure (H) to apply liquid gasket in 90 degrees to figure.
G
JPBIA0274ZZ
2. Install rocker cover gasket to rocker cover.

H
3. Install rocker cover.
• Check if rocker cover gasket is not dropped from the installation groove of rocker cover.
4. Tighten bolts in two steps separately in numerical order as I

: Engine front J
1st step : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)

K
2nd step : 8.33 N·m (0.85 kg-m, 74 in-lb)
JPBIA1634ZZ
5. Install in the reverse order of removal after this step. P
EM-51
TIMING CHAIN
TIMING CHAIN
JPBIA1638GB
Timing chain tensioner (secondary) Timing chain tensioner (secondary)

1. 2. Internal chain guide 3.
(bank 2) (bank 1)
4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. O-ring 6. Timing chain (secondary)
7. Timing chain (primary) 8. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 9. Slack guide
10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Rear timing chain case
13. Tension guide 14. O-ring 15. O-ring
16. O-ring 17. Front timing chain case 18. Valve timing control cover gasket (bank 1)
EM-52
TIMING CHAIN
Intake valve timing control sole-
19. Valve timing control cover (bank 1) 20. 21. Seal ring
noid valve (bank 1) A
22. Water pump cover 23. Front oil seal 24. Crankshaft pulley
25. Crankshaft pulley bolt 26. 27. Valve timing control cover (bank 2)
noid valve (bank 2) EM
Valve timing control cover gasket
28.
(bank 2)
A. Refer to EM-53
C

D
REMOVAL
E
2. Drain engine coolant from inside engine. Refer to EM-76, "Setting".
4. Remove rocker covers (bank 1 and bank 2). Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View". F
5. Remove oil pans (lower and upper) and oil strainer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
6. Remove drive belt, idler pulleys and bracket. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation" and EM-25,
"Exploded View". G
7. Separate engine harness removing their brackets from front timing chain case.
8. Remove valve timing control covers.
• Loosen mounting bolts in reverse order as shown in the figure. H
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2 I
C : Dowel pin hole
CAUTION:
Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) cen- J
ter hole. When removing, keep it horizontal until it is com-
pletely disconnected.
JPBIA1639ZZ K
9. Obtain No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke as follows:

a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved L
line without color) ( ) with timing indicator.
SEM727G O
EM-53
TIMING CHAIN
b. Check that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder
(engine front side of bank 1) are located as shown in the figure.
: Engine front
• If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360 degrees) and align

JPBIA0044ZZ
10. Remove crankshaft pulley as follows:

a. Fix crankshaft with the pulley holder (commercial service tool)
(A).
b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at
10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position.
CAUTION:
Never remove crankshaft pulley bolt as it will be used as a
supporting point for suitable puller.
PBIC3961E
c. Place suitable puller tab on holes of crankshaft pulley, and pull

crankshaft pulley through.
CAUTION:
Never put suitable puller tab on crankshaft pulley periphery,
as this will damage internal damper.
SEM915E
11. Remove front timing chain case as follows:

a. Loosen mounting bolts in reverse order as shown in the figure.
JPBIA1640ZZ
EM-54
TIMING CHAIN
b. Insert a suitable tool (A) into the notch at the top of front timing
chain case as shown in the figure. A
c. Pry off case by moving the tool as shown in the figure.
• Use the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] to cut liquid
gasket for removal. EM
CAUTION:
• Never use screwdrivers or something similar.
• After removal, handle front timing chain case carefully so
it does not tilt, cant, or warp under a load. C
JPBIA0048ZZ
D
12. Remove water pump cover from front timing chain case.
• Use the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] to cut liquid gasket for removal.
13. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using a suit- E
able tool.
• Use a screwdriver for removal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage front timing chain case. F
EMQ0032D H
14. Remove O-ring (1) from rear timing chain case.
A : Bank 1 I
B : Bank 2
JPBIA1111ZZ
15. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: L

a. Remove lower mounting bolt (1).
b. Loosen upper mounting bolt (2) slowly, and then turn timing
chain tensioner (primary) (3) on the mounting bolt so that M
plunger (4) is fully expanded.
NOTE:
Even if plunger is fully expanded, it is not dropped from the body N
of timing chain tensioner (primary).
c. Remove upper mounting bolt, and then remove timing chain ten-
sioner (primary).
O
JPBIA0085ZZ
EM-55
TIMING CHAIN
16. Remove internal chain guide, tension guide and slack guide.
NOTE:
Tension guide can be removed after removing timing chain (pri-
mary).
PBIC2266E
17. Remove timing chain (primary) and crankshaft sprocket.

CAUTION:
After removing timing chain (primary), never turn crankshaft and camshaft separately, or valves
will strike the piston heads.
18. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
a. Attach a suitable stopper pin (B) to the bank 1 (A) and bank 2
(C) timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1).
NOTE:
• Use approximately 0.5 mm (0.02 in) dia. hard metal pin as a
stopper pin.
• For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to
EM-84, "Exploded View". [Removing camshaft bracket (No. 1)
is required.]
JPBIA1727ZZ
b. Remove camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH) mounting bolts.

• Secure the hexagonal portion of camshaft using a wrench to
loosen mounting bolts.
CAUTION:
Never loosen mounting bolts with securing anything
other than the camshaft hexagonal portion or with ten-
sioning the timing chain.
KBIA1698J
c. Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets.

• Turn camshaft slightly to secure slackness of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side.
EM-56
TIMING CHAIN
• Insert 0.5 mm (0.020 in) thick metal or resin plate between tim-
ing chain and timing chain tensioner plunger (guide) (F). A
Remove timing chain (secondary) (1) together with camshaft
sprockets with timing chain loose from guide groove.
EM
A : Bank 1
B : Timing chain tensioner (Body)
C : View C
C
D : Stopper pin
E : Plate
JPBIA1725ZZ
CAUTION: D
Be careful of plunger coming-off when removing timing chain (secondary). This is because
plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) moves during operation, leading to coming-off of
fixed stopper pin.
NOTE: E
• Camshaft sprocket (INT) is two-for-one structure of sprockets for timing chain (primary) and for timing
chain (secondary).
• Figure is shown as an example of bank 1. F
• When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following caution:
CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket.
• Never disassemble. [Never loosen bolts (A) as shown in G
the figure].
J
PBIC2980E
19. Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) from cylinder head as follows, if necessary.
• Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) with a stopper pin attached. K
20. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front
timing chain case, and opposite mating surfaces.
L
N
SEM737G
• Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole (B) and thread. O
A : Remove sticking old liquid gasket

P
JPBIA0051ZZ
EM-57
TIMING CHAIN
21. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from
water pump cover.
SEM926E
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The below figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corre-
sponding sprocket, with the components installed.
JPBIA1716GB
1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Timing chain (secondary)

4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 6. Slack guide
7. Timing chain (primary) 8. Crankshaft sprocket 9. Water pump
10. Tension guide 11. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) 12. Crankshaft key
A. Mating mark B. Mating mark (pink link) C. Mating mark (punched)
D. Mating mark (orange) E. Mating mark (notched)
1. Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) to cylinder head as follows if removed. Refer to EM-84,
"Exploded View".
• Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) with a stopper pin attached and new O-ring.
EM-58
TIMING CHAIN
2. Check that dowel pin hole, dowel pin and crankshaft key are
located as shown in the figure. (No. 1 cylinder at compression A
TDC)
NOTE:
Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown in the
EM
figure, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted
camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side) C

: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank
Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side) KBIA1073E
D
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank
Crankshaft key
: At cylinder head side of bank 1 E
CAUTION:
Hole on small dia. side must be used for intake side dowel pin hole. Never misidentify (ignore big
dia. side). F
3. Install timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH) as follows:
CAUTION:
Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark positions G
repeatedly during the installation process.
a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it
pressed in with stopper pin (A). H
JPBIA0095ZZ
K
b. Install timing chain (secondary) (1) and camshaft sprockets (INT
and EXH).
A : Camshaft sprocket (INT) back face L

B : Orange link
C : Mating mark (Circle)
D : Camshaft sprocket (EXH) back face M
E : Mating mark (2 circle on front face)
F : Dowel pin groove
G : Mating mark (2 ovals on front face) N
H : Mating mark (Oval)
I : Dowel pin hole
O
NOTE:
Figure shows bank 1 (rear view).
• Align the mating marks on timing chain (secondary) (orange
link) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH) P
(punched), and install them.
NOTE:
• Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back
side of camshaft sprocket (secondary).
• There are two types of mating mark, circle and oval types.
They should be used for the bank 1 and bank 2, respectively. JPBIA1726ZZ
EM-59
TIMING CHAIN
Bank 1 : Use circle type.

Bank 2 : Use oval type.
• Align dowel pin and pin hole on camshafts with the groove and dowel pin on sprockets, and install them.
• On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with dowel pin on
the back side of camshaft sprocket, and install them.
• On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove on camshaft sprocket, and
install them.
• In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin are not fit on mating parts, make fine
adjustment to the position holding the hexagonal portion on camshaft with wrench or equivalent.
• Mounting bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is
enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins.
• It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating
marks during and after installation. To make the matching eas-
ier, make a mating mark on the top of sprocket teeth and its
extended line in advance with paint.
PBIC0891E
c. After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten camshaft sprocket mounting bolts.
• Secure camshaft using wrench at the hexagonal portion to
tighten mounting bolts.
KBIA1698J
d. Pull stopper pins (B) out from timing chain tensioners (second-
ary) (1).
A : Bank 1
C : Bank 2
JPBIA1727ZZ
4. Install tension guide.

5. Install timing chain (primary) as follows:
EM-60
TIMING CHAIN
a. Install crankshaft sprocket (1).
A
A : Crankshaft side
B : Engine front side
C : Mating mark (Front side) EM
• Check the mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face the front
of the engine.
C
JPBIA0273ZZ
D
b. Install timing chain (primary).
• Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) on
camshaft sprocket (INT) is aligned with the pink link on timing
E
chain, while the mating mark (notched) on crankshaft sprocket
is aligned with the orange one on timing chain, as shown in the
figure.
• When it is difficult to align mating marks of timing chain (pri- F
mary) with each sprocket, gradually turn camshaft using
wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating
marks.
G
• During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating
mark alignments of timing chains (secondary).
PBIC3494E
K
6. Install internal chain guide, slack guide and timing chain ten-
sioner (primary). L
PBIC2109E
EM-61
TIMING CHAIN
CAUTION:
Never overtighten slack guide mounting bolt (2). It is nor-
mal for a gap (A) to exist under the bolt seat when mounting
bolt is tightened to specification.
1 : Slack guide
3 : Cylinder block
JPBIA0117ZZ
7. Install the timing chain tensioner (primary) with the following procedure:
a. Pull plunger stopper tab (A) up (or turn lever downward) so as to
remove plunger stopper tab from the ratchet of plunger (D).
NOTE:
Plunger stopper tab and lever (C) are synchronized.
b. Push plunger into the inside of tensioner body.
c. Hold plunger in the fully compressed position by engaging
plunger stopper tab with the tip of ratchet.
d. To secure lever, insert stopper pin (E) through hole of lever into
tensioner body hole (B).
• The lever parts and the tab are synchronized. Therefore, the
plunger will be secured under this condition. JPBIA0118ZZ
NOTE:
Figure shows the example of 1.2 mm (0.047 in) diameter thin screwdriver being used as the stopper pin.
e. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) (1).
• Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the
back and the mounting surfaces of timing chain tensioner (pri-
mary).
f. Pull out stopper pin (A) after installing, and then release plunger.
JPBIA0119ZZ
8. Check again that the mating marks on each sprocket and each timing chain have not slipped out of align-
ment.
9. Install new O-rings (1) on rear timing chain case.
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2
JPBIA1111ZZ
10. Install new front oil seal on front timing chain case.
• Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip.
EM-62
TIMING CHAIN
• Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown in the figure.
A
A : Oil seal lip
B : Dust seal lip
: Engine inside EM
: Engine outside
JPBIA0054ZZ
D
• Using a suitable drift [outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 in)], press-
fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case
end face. E
• Check the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not
inverted.
G
PBIC0790E
11. Install water pump cover to front timing chain case. H

• Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket with the tube presser
(commercial service tool) to water pump cover (1) as shown in
the figure.
I
a : φ2.3 - 3.3 mm (0.091 - 0.130 in)
J
K
JPBIA1722ZZ
12. Install front timing chain case as follows:

L
EM-63
TIMING CHAIN
a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket with the tube presser
(commercial service tool) to front timing chain case back side as
D : Bolt hole
E : Protrusion
f : φ2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in)
JPBIA1782ZZ
b. Install front timing chain case as to fit its dowel pin hole together dowel pin on rear timing chain case.
c. Tighten mounting bolts to the specified torque in numerical order
• There are two types of mounting bolt. Refer to the following for
locating bolts.
M8 bolts : 1, 2
: 28.4 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
M6 bolts : Except the above
: 12.7 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
JPBIA1640ZZ
d. After all bolts tightening, retighten them to the specified torque in
numerical order as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking on surface mating with oil pan (upper).
e. After installing front timing chain case, check the surface height
difference between the following parts on the oil pan (upper)
mounting surface.
Standard
Front timing chain case to rear timing chain case:
−0.14 to 0.14 mm (−0.006 to 0.006 in)
• If not within the standard, repeat the installation procedure.
SEM943G
13. Install intake valve timing control covers as follows:

a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves.
b. Being careful not to move seal rings from the installation grooves, align dowel pins on front timing chain
case with the holes to install valve timing control covers.
EM-64
TIMING CHAIN
c. Tighten mounting bolts in numerical order as shown in the fig-
ure. A
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2 EM
C : Dowel pin hole
JPBIA1639ZZ
D
14. Install crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal.
• When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with a plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not circumference).
E
b. Fix crankshaft with the pulley holder (commercial service tool).
c. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt.
F
: 44.1 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)
d. Place a paint mark (A) on crankshaft pulley (1) aligning with the
angle mark (B) on crankshaft pulley bolt (2). Tighten the bolt 90 G
degrees (angle tightening).
PBIC4627J
J
15. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to confirm it turns
smoothly.
16. Install in the reverse order of removal after this step. K
L
Timing Chain
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates and roller M
links of timing chain. Replace timing chain as necessary.
A : Crack
N
B : Wear
JPBIA0091ZZ P
Inspection for Leakage
The following are procedures for checking fluids leak, lubricates leak.
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
EM-65
TIMING CHAIN
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
- Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leak-
age at connection points.
- Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in guide may generate a
pounding noise during and just after the engine start. However, this does not indicate an unusualness. Noise
will stop after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to check there is no leakage of fuel, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and
engine coolant.
• Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the
specified level, if necessary.
Summary of the inspection items:
Items Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped
Engine coolant Level Leakage Level
Engine oil Level Leakage Level
Other oils and fluid* Level Leakage Level
Fuel Leakage Leakage Leakage
*: Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
EM-66
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
EM
JPBIA2195GB
M
1. Upper torque rod 2. Engine mounting insulator (RH) 3. Engine mounting bracket (RH)
4. Engine mounting bracket (front) 5. Engine mounting insulator (front) 6. Vacuum hose
N
7. Vacuum tube (front) 8. Vacuum hose 9. Engine mounting insulator (LH)
10. Vacuum hose 11. Engine mounting insulator (rear) 12. Engine mounting bracket (rear)
13. Vacuum tube (rear) 14. Gusset 15. Rear torque rod
O
16. Rear torque rod bracket
To electronic controlled engine mount
A. To transaxle B. C. VQ25DE
: Vehicle front
P
WARNING:
• Situate the vehicle on a flat and solid surface.
EM-67
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
• Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.
• For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts described in PARTS
CATALOG.
CAUTION:
• Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or uninstructed operations.
• Never start working until exhaust system and engine coolant are cool enough.
• If items or work required are not covered by the engine section, refer to the applicable sections.
• Always use the support point specified for lifting.
• Use either 2-pole lift type or separate type lift as best you can. If board-on type is used for unavoid-
able reasons, support at the rear axle jacking point with transmission jack or similar tool before
starting work, in preparation for the backward shift of center of gravity.
• For supporting points for lifting and jacking point at rear axle, refer to GI-30, "Garage Jack and
Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift".
REMOVAL
Outline
At first, remove the engine and the transaxle assembly with front suspension member downward. Then sepa-
rate the engine and the transaxle.
Preparation
2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
• Front road wheel and tires
• Splash guards (RH and LH): Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View".
• Air duct (inlet), air cleaner cases (upper and lower) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assembly:
Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
• Battery and battery tray: Refer to PG-109, "Removal and Installation".
• Reservoir tank of radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
• Front wiper arm: Refer to WW-105, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect engine room harness at the TCM, ECM and other sides.
CAUTION:
To keep clean harness connector and avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely
with plastic bags or something similar.
5. Remove battery bracket with ECM and TCM.
6. Remove extension cowl top. Refer to EXT-20, "Exploded View".
Engine Room
1. Disconnect heater hoses. Refer to CO-25, "Exploded View".
• Install plug to avoid leakage of engine coolant.
2. Remove EVAP hose. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect fuel feed hose quick connector at fuel tube side. Refer to EM-44, "Exploded View".
• Install plug to avoid leakage of fuel.
4. Disconnect transaxle shift control cable at transaxle side. Refer to TM-319, "Exploded View" (VQ25DE) or
TM-157, "Exploded View" (VQ35DE).
5. Disconnect brake booster vacuum hose at engine side. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
6. Disconnect ground cable.
7. Disconnect A/C compressor piping at A/C compressor side. Refer to HA-36, "Exploded View".
8. Disconnect suction hoses of power steering oil pump at reservoir tank side. Refer to ST-34, "Exploded
View".
• Install plug to avoid leakage of power steering fluid.
9. Disconnect CVT fluid cooler hoses from radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
EM-68
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
10. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-15, "VQ25DE : Exploded View" (VQ25DE) or STR-20, "VQ35DE :
Exploded View" (VQ35DE). A
Vehicle Underbody
1. Remove front drive shafts (RH and LH). Refer to FAX-16, "Exploded View".
EM
3. Remove heat insulator.
4. Disconnect steering lower joint at power steering gear assembly side, and release steering lower shaft. C
Refer to ST-16, "Exploded View".
5. Disconnect front stabilizer connecting rod. Refer to FSU-14, "Exploded View".
6. Remove strut assembly and steering knuckle fixing nuts and bolts. Refer to FSU-9, "Exploded View" and D
FAX-8, "Exploded View".
7. Remove front wheel sensor (RH and LH) for ABS from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
E
8. Remove front brake caliper assembly with piping connected, and temporarily secure it to aside for vehicle
side. Refer to BR-34, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
9. Disconnect power steering piping at a point between vehicle and engine. Refer to ST-34, "Exploded
F
View".
• Install plug to avoid leakage of power steering fluid.
10. Remove rear plate cover from oil pan (upper). Then remove bolts fixing drive plate to torque converter.
Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View" and TM-332, "Removal and Installation" (VQ25DE) or TM-168, G
"Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE).
11. Remove transaxle joint bolts which pierce at oil pan (upper) lower rear side. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded
View". H
12. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks. I
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal powder to adhere to magnetic part at sensor tip.
• Never place sensors in a location where they are exposed to magnetism. J
Removal
1. Use a manual lift table caddy (commercial service tool) or equiv-
alently rigid tool such as a transmission jack. Securely support K
bottom of front suspension member.
CAUTION:
Put a piece of wood or something similar as the supporting
L
surface, secure a completely stable condition.
PBIC1190E
N
2. Remove engine mounting insulator (RH) and engine mounting bracket (RH).
3. Remove mounting bolt between transverse link and front suspension member with power tool.
4. Remove front suspension member mounting nuts and bolts. Refer to FSU-16, "Exploded View". O
5. Carefully lower jack, or raise lift to remove the engine and the transaxle assembly and front suspension
member. When performing work, observe the following caution:
CAUTION: P
• Confirm there is no interference with the vehicle.
• Check all connection points have been disconnected.
• Keep in mind the center of vehicle gravity changes. If necessary, use jack(s) to support the vehi-
cle at rear jacking point(s) to prevent it from falling it off the lift.
Separation
EM-69
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
1. Install engine slingers into front of cylinder head (bank 1) (3) and
rear of cylinder head (bank 2) (2).
1 : Engine rear slinger

4 : Engine front slinger (upper)
5 : Engine front slinger (lower)
: Engine front
JPBIA1729ZZ
2. Remove power steering oil pump, power steering piping and power steering bracket from engine and tran-
saxle assembly. Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses of front engine mounting insulator and rear engine mounting insulator.
4. Lift with hoist the engine and the transaxle assembly and front suspension member.
CAUTION:
• Before and during this lifting, always check if any harnesses are left connected.
• Avoid damage to and oil/grease smearing or spills onto engine mounting insulator.
5. Remove rear torque rod and rear torque rod bracket.
6. Remove each engine mounting insulator and each engine mounting bracket from engine, transaxle and
front suspension member.
7. Separate engine and transaxle assembly from front suspension member.
CAUTION:
• Before and during this lifting, always check if any harnesses are left connected.
• Avoid damage to and oil/grease smearing or spills onto engine mounting insulator.
8. Separate engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View" (VQ25DE) or TM-168,
"Exploded View" (VQ35DE).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never allow engine mounting insulator to be damage and careful no oil gets on it.
• Check all mounting insulators are seated properly, then tighten mounting nuts and bolts.
Preparation
1. Install the engine mounting bracket (RH) to the engine as follows:
EM-70
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
a. Tighten the bolt No. 7 as shown in the figure. (temporarily)
A
: Vehicle front
b. Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure.

EM
(specified torque)
G
JPBIA1730ZZ
2. Install the engine mounting bracket (front) to the engine as follows:

H
: Engine front
I
(specified torque)
J
K
JPBIA1731ZZ
3. Install the engine mounting bracket (rear) and gusset to the engine as follows:
a. Tighten the bolt No. 4 as shown in the figure. (temporarily) L
: Engine front
M
(specified torque)
N
JPBIA1732ZZ
O
4. Install the rear torque rod bracket to the engine as follows:

a. Tighten the bolt No. 3 as shown in the figure. (temporarily) P
b. Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure. (specified torque)
EM-71
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
• VQ25DE
: Engine front
JPBIA2376ZZ
• VQ35DE
: Engine front
JPBIA2377ZZ
5. Install the engine mounting insulator (LH) to the transaxle as follows:

b. Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure. (specified torque)
• VQ25DE
: Vehicle front
JPBIA2196ZZ
• VQ35DE
: Vehicle front
JPBIA1734ZZ
6. Install the engine mounting insulator (front) to the front suspension member as follows:
EM-72
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
A
: Vehicle front

EM
(specified torque)
JPBIA1735ZZ
D
7. Install the engine mounting insulator (rear) to the front suspension member as follows:
E
: Vehicle front

(specified torque) F
JPBIA2373ZZ
H
8. Install the rear torque rod to the front suspension member as follows:
I
: Vehicle front

(specified torque) J
JPBIA1738ZZ
L
9. Install the engine mounting brackets (front and rear) to the engine mounting insulators (front and rear).
10. Install the engine mounting insulator (LH) to the front suspension member.
• Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure.
- VQ25DE M
: Vehicle front
N
P
JPBIA2197ZZ
EM-73
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
- VQ35DE
: Vehicle front
JPBIA1739ZZ
11. Install the rear torque rod to the rear torque rod bracket.
12. Install the vacuum tube (front) as follows:
: Engine front

(specified torque)
JPBIA1740ZZ
13. Install the vacuum tube (rear) as follows:

: Engine front

(specified torque)
JPBIA1741ZZ
Installation
1. Install the engine mounting insulator (RH) as follows:
: Vehicle front
b. Tighten the bolts No. 2, 3 in numerical order as shown in the fig-

ure. (specified torque)
c. Tighten the bolt No. 1 as shown in the figure. (specified torque)
d. Tighten the bolts No. 4, 5, 6 in numerical order as shown in the
figure. (specified torque)
JPBIA1742ZZ
2. Install the upper torque rod as follows:
EM-74
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
A
: Vehicle front

EM
(specified torque)
JPBIA1743ZZ
D
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION E
The following are procedures for checking fluids leak, lubricates leak and exhaust gases leak. F
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. G
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. H
• Warm up engine thoroughly to check there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. I
Summary of the inspection items: J
Engine oil Level Leakage Level K
L
Exhaust gases — Leakage —
EM-75
ENGINE STAND SETTING
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Setting INFOID:0000000003802278
NOTE:
Explained here is how to disassemble with engine stand supporting transaxle surface. When using different
type of engine stand, note with difference in steps and etc.
1. Remove the engine assembly from the vehicle. Refer to EM-67, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the parts that may restrict installation of engine to widely use engine stand.
NOTE:
The procedure is described assuming that you use a widely use engine stand holding the surface, to
which transmission is installed.
• Remove drive plate. Fix crankshaft pulley with the pulley holder (commercial service tool), and remove
mounting bolts.
• Loosen mounting bolts in diagonal order.
• Check for deformation or damage drive plate.
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble drive plate.
• Never place drive plate with signal plate facing down.
• When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or scratch it.
• Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from becoming magnetized.
3. Remove pilot converter using the pilot bushing puller (SST) as

necessary.
SEM005G
4. Lift the engine with hoist to install it onto the widely use engine stand.
CAUTION:
Use an engine stand that has a load capacity [220 kg (485 lb) or more] large enough for supporting
the engine weight.
• If the load capacity of the stand is not adequate, remove the following parts beforehand to reduce the
potential risk of overturning the stand.
- Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
- Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-32, "Exploded View".
- Remove fuel injector and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-44, "Exploded View".
- Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View".
- Remove rocker cover. Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View".
- Remove exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-34, "Exploded View".
- Other removable brackets.
NOTE:
EM-76
The figure shows an example of widely use engine stand (A)
that can hold mating surface of transaxle with drive plate A
removed.
CAUTION:
Before removing the hanging chains, check the engine
EM
stand is stable and there is no risk of overturning.
JPBIA0190ZZ
D
6. Drain engine coolant by removing water drain plugs (A) and (B)
from cylinder block both sides as shown in the figure. E
C : Plug
D : Connector bolt
F
Tightening torque : Refer to EM-110, "Disassem-

bly and Assembly". G
K
PBIC2487E
EM-77
ENGINE UNIT
ENGINE UNIT
Disassembly INFOID:0000000003802279

2. Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-32, "Exploded View".
3. Remove exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-34, "Exploded View".
4. Remove oil pan (lower). Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
5. Remove ignition coil, spark plug and rocker cover. Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View".
6. Remove fuel injector and fuel tube. Refer to EM-44, "Exploded View".
7. Remove timing chain and rear timing chain case. Refer to EM-52, "Exploded View" and EM-79, "Exploded
View".
8. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-84, "Exploded View".
9. Remove cylinder head. Refer to EM-96, "Exploded View".
Assembly INFOID:0000000003802280
Assembly in the reverse order of disassembly.
EM-78
REAR TIMING CHAIN CASE
A
EM
JPBIA1638GB
P
Timing chain tensioner (secondary) Timing chain tensioner (secondary)
1. 2. Internal chain guide 3.
(bank 2) (bank 1)
4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. O-ring 6. Timing chain (secondary)
7. Timing chain (primary) 8. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 9. Slack guide
10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Rear timing chain case
13. Tension guide 14. O-ring 15. O-ring
16. O-ring 17. Front timing chain case 18. Valve timing control cover gasket (bank 1)
EM-79
19. Valve timing control cover (bank 1) 20. 21. Seal ring
noid valve (bank 1)
22. Water pump cover 23. Front oil seal 24. Crankshaft pulley
25. Crankshaft pulley bolt 26. 27. Valve timing control cover (bank 2)
noid valve (bank 2)
28.
(bank 2)
A. Refer to EM-80
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000003802282
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove front timing chain case and timing chain. Refer to EM-52, "Exploded View".
2. Remove water pump. Refer to CO-18, "Exploded View".
3. Remove oil pans (upper and lower) and oil strainer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
4. Remove rear timing chain case as follows:
a. Loosen and remove mounting bolts in reverse order as shown in
the figure.
b. Cut liquid gasket using the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100
(J37228)] and remove rear timing chain case.
JPBIA1641ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never remove plate metal cover (1) of oil passage.
• After removal, handle rear timing chain case carefully so
it does not tilt, cant, or warp under a load.
JPBIA0088ZZ
5. Remove O-rings (1) from cylinder block.
: Engine front
JPBIA0090ZZ
6. Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) from cylinder head as follows, if necessary.
a. Remove camshaft brackets (No. 1). Refer to EM-84, "Exploded View".
EM-80
b. Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1) with a stopper
pin (B) attached. A
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2 EM
JPBIA1727ZZ
D
7. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases, and oppo-
site mating surfaces.
• Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole (B) and thread. E
A : Remove sticking old liquid gasket
JPBIA0051ZZ H
ASSEMBLY
1. Install rear timing chain case as follows: I
• Install new O-rings (1) onto cylinder block.
: Engine front
J
L
JPBIA0090ZZ
a. Apply liquid gasket with the tube presser (commercial service tool) to rear timing chain case back side as
shown in the figure. M
CAUTION:
• For “A” in the figure, completely wipe out liquid gasket extended on a portion touching at engine N
coolant.
EM-81
• Apply liquid gasket on installation position of water pump and cylinder head very completely.
PBIC2616E
b. Align rear timing chain case with dowel pins (bank 1 and bank 2) on cylinder block and install rear timing
chain case.
• Check O-rings stay in place during installation to cylinder block and cylinder head.
c. Tighten mounting bolts in numerical order as shown in the fig-
ure.
• There are two types of mounting bolts. Refer to the following
for locating bolts.
Bolt length: Bolt position

20 mm (0.79 in) : 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
16 mm (0.63 in) : Except the above
: 12.7 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
JPBIA1641ZZ
d. After all bolts tightening, retighten them to the specified in

numerical order as shown in the figure.
e. After installing rear timing chain case (1), check the surface
height difference between the following parts on the oil pan
(upper) mounting surface.
2 : Cylinder block
Standard
Rear timing chain case to cylinder block:
−0.24 to 0.14 mm (−0.009 to 0.006 in)
• If not within the standard, repeat the installation procedure. JPBIA1944ZZ
EM-82
2. Install water pump with new O-rings. Refer to CO-18, "Exploded View".
A
3. Install front timing chain case and timing chain. Refer to EM-52, "Exploded View".
4. After installing front timing chain case, check the surface height
difference between the following parts on the oil pan (upper)
mounting surface. EM
Standard
Front timing chain case to rear timing chain case: C
−0.14 to 0.14 mm (−0.006 to 0.006 in)
• If not within the standard, repeat the installation procedure. D
SEM943G
5. Install in the reverse order of removal after this step. E
EM-83
CAMSHAFT
CAMSHAFT
JPBIA1719GB
1. Camshaft bracket (No. 3, 4) 2. Camshaft bracket (No. 2) 3. Seal washer

4. Camshaft bracket (No. 1) 5. Dowel pin 6. Camshaft (EXH) (bank 1)
Timing chain tensioner (secondary)
7. Camshaft (INT) (bank 1) 8. Valve lifter 9.
(bank 1)
Timing chain tensioner (secondary)
10. Spring 11. Plunger 12.
(bank 2)
13. Cylinder head (bank 2) 14. Dowel pin 15. Camshaft sensor bracket
16. Camshaft (EXH) 17. Camshaft signal plate (INT) 18. Camshaft (INT)
19. Cylinder head (bank 1) 20. Camshaft signal plate (INT) 21. Camshaft sensor bracket
A. Refer to EM-84
REMOVAL
1. Remove front timing chain case, camshaft sprocket, timing chain and rear timing chain case. Refer to EM-
52, "Exploded View" and EM-79, "Exploded View".
EM-84
CAMSHAFT
2. Loosen camshaft sensor bracket bolts in reverse order as
shown in the figure. A
: Engine front
NOTE: EM
The order of loosening bolts in the same for bank 1 and bank 2.
JPBIA1960ZZ
D
3. Remove camshaft brackets.
• Mark camshafts, camshaft brackets and bolts so they are placed in the same position and direction for
installation.
E
• Equally loosen camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in
reverse order as shown in the figure.
: Engine front F
JPBIA0257ZZ
L
4. Remove camshafts.
5. Remove valve lifters.
• Identify installation positions, and store them without mixing them up.
M
6. Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1) from cylinder
head.
A : Bank 1 N
B : Bank 2
• Remove timing chain tensioner (secondary) with its stopper
pin (C) attached. O
NOTE:
Stopper pin should be attached when timing chain (secondary)
is removed. P
JPBIA0121ZZ
INSTALLATION
EM-85
CAMSHAFT
1. Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1) on both sides of
cylinder head.
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2
• Install timing chain tensioner (secondary) with its stopper pin
(C) attached.
• Install timing chain tensioner (secondary) with sliding part fac-
ing downward on cylinder head (bank 1), and with sliding part
facing upward on cylinder head (bank 2).
JPBIA0121ZZ
2. Install valve lifters.

• Install it in the original position.
3. Install camshafts.
: Engine front
• Follow your identification marks made during removal, or fol-

low the identification marks that are present on new camshafts
for proper placement and direction.
JPBIA1749ZZ
VQ25DE
Paint marks
Bank INT/EXH Dowel pin (1)
M1 (D) M2 (E) M3 (C)
EXH (B) Yes No Purple Light blue
1
INT (A) Yes Yellow No Light blue
INT (A) Yes Yellow No Light blue
2
EXH (B) Yes No Purple Light blue
VQ35DE
Paint marks
Bank INT/EXH Dowel pin (1)
M1 (D) M2 (E) M3 (C)
EXH (B) Yes No Light blue Light blue
1
INT (A) Yes Pink No Light blue
INT (A) Yes Pink No Light blue
2
EXH (B) Yes No Light blue Light blue
• Install camshaft so that dowel pin (A) on front end face are
positioned as shown in the figure. (No. 1 cylinder TDC on its
compression stroke)
NOTE:
Though camshaft does not stop at the portion as shown in the
figure, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted
camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure.
JPBIA2368ZZ
4. Install camshaft brackets.
EM-86
CAMSHAFT
• Remove foreign material completely from camshaft bracket backside and from cylinder head installation
face. A
• Install camshaft bracket in original position and direction as
EM
A : No. 1
B : No. 2
C : No. 3
C
D : No. 4
E : Bank 1
F : Exhaust side
D
G : Intake side
H : Bank 2
I : Intake side
E
J : Exhaust side
: Engine front
JPBIA0258ZZ
H
• Install camshaft brackets (No. 2 to 4) aligning the stamp marks
(A) as shown in the figure.
I
B : Bank 1
C : Bank 2
: Engine front J
NOTE:
There are no identification marks indicating left and right for
camshaft bracket (No. 1). K
JPBIA0272ZZ
L
• Apply liquid gasket to mating surface of camshaft bracket (No.
1) as shown on bank 1 and bank 2.
a : 8.5 mm (0.335 in) M

b : 2 mm (0.08 in)
c : Clearance 5 mm (0.20 in)
d : φ2.0 - 2.3 mm (0.08 - 0.12 in) N
* : Apply liquid gasket to rear timing chain case side
O
JPBIA0255ZZ
EM-87
CAMSHAFT
5. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts in the following steps, in numeri-
cal order as shown in the figure.
: Engine front
a. Tighten No. 7 to 10 in order as shown.
: 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 1 ft-lb)

b. Tighten No. 1 to 6 in order as shown.
: 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 1 ft-lb)

c. Tighten No. 1 to 10 in numerical order as shown.
: 5.88 N·m (0.60 kg-m, 4 ft-lb)

d. Tighten No. 1 to 10 in numerical order as shown.
: 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)

CAUTION:
After tightening mounting bolts of camshaft brackets (No.
1), be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket from the JPBIA0257ZZ
parts list below.

• Mating surface of rocker cover
• Mating surface of rear timing chain case
6. Tighten camshaft sensor bracket bolts in numerical order as
: Engine front
NOTE:
The order of tightening bolts in the same for bank 1 and bank 2.
JPBIA1960ZZ
7. Measure difference in levels between front end faces of cam-

shaft bracket (No. 1) and cylinder head.
Standard : −0.14 to 0.14 mm (−0.0055 to 0.0055 in)

• Measure two positions (both intake and exhaust side) for a
single bank.
• If the measured value is out of the standard, reinstall camshaft
bracket (No. 1).
EMQ0044D
8. Inspect and adjust the valve clearance. Refer to EM-17, "Inspection and Adjustment".

Camshaft Runout
1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journals of camshaft.
EM-88
CAMSHAFT
CAUTION:
Never support No. 1 journal (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter A
from the other three locations.
2. Set a dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal.
3. Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and measure the EM
camshaft runout on a dial indicator. (Total indicator reading)
Standard and limit : Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft". C

4. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
PBIC0929E
Camshaft Cam Height E

1. Measure the camshaft cam height with a micrometer.
F
Standard cam height : Refer to EM-136, "Cam-
(Intake and exhaust) shaft".
Cam wear limit : Refer to EM-136, "Cam- G
shaft".
2. If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
H
EMQ0072D
Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance I

CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER
• Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal with a micrometer
(A). J
Standard and limit : Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft".

K
JPBIA0122ZZ
M
CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER
• Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with the specified torque. Refer to EM-84, "Removal and Installation" for the
tightening procedure. N
• Measure inner diameter (A) of camshaft bracket with a bore gauge.
Standard : Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft".

O
PBIC1645E
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE

• (Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) – (Camshaft journal diameter).
EM-89
CAMSHAFT

• If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE:
Camshaft brackets cannot be replaced as single parts, because there are machined together with cylinder
head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly.
Camshaft End Play
• Install a dial indicator in thrust direction on front end of camshaft.
Measure the end play of a dial indicator when camshaft is moved
forward/backward (in direction to axis).
SEM864E
• Measure the following parts if out of the limit.

- Dimension (A) for camshaft No. 1 journal
Standard : 27.500 - 27.548 mm (1.0827 - 1.0846 in)

- Dimension (B) for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing
Standard : 27.360 - 27.385 mm (1.0772 - 1.0781 in)

• Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/or
cylinder head.
KBIA2404J
Camshaft Sprocket Runout

1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journals of camshaft.
CAUTION:
Never support No. 1 journal (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter
from the other three locations.
2. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout with a dial indicator.
(Total indicator reading)
Limit : Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft".

• If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
PBIC0930E
Valve Lifter
EM-90
CAMSHAFT
Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks.
• If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to EM-136, A
"Camshaft".
EM
KBIA0182E
D
Valve Lifter Clearance
VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER

• Measure the outer diameter at 1/2 height of valve lifter with a E
micrometer (A) since valve lifter is in barrel shape.
Standard
: Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft". F
(Intake and exhaust)
JPBIA0125ZZ H
VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER

• Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head with
an inside micrometer. I
Standard
: Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft". J
SEM867E
L
VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE

• (Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) – (Valve lifter outer diameter)
M
Standard
: Refer to EM-136, "Camshaft".
N
• If the calculated value is out of the standard, referring to each standard of valve lifter outer diameter and
valve lifter hole diameter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION O
Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove
CAUTION:
• Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 is detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT-III P
and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to EC-137, "Diagnosis Pro-
cedure".
• Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from the splashing engine oil.
1. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while
checking.
a. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-411, "Inspection".
EM-91
CAMSHAFT
b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors. Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View" and EM-44,
"Exploded View".
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-79, "Exploded View".
4. Crank engine, and then check that engine oil comes out from
intake valve timing control solenoid valve hole (A). End crank
after checking.
1 : Valve timing control cover (bank 2)

: Engine front
WARNING:
Be careful not to touch rotating parts. (drive belt, idler pul-
ley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.)
CAUTION:
JPBIA1783ZZ
• Prevent splashing by using a shop cloth so as to prevent
the worker from injury from engine oil and so as to prevent engine oil contamination.
• Prevent splashing by using a shop cloth so as to prevent engine oil from being splashed to
engine and vehicle. Especially, be careful no to apply engine oil to rubber parts of drive belt,
engine mounting insulator, etc. Wipe engine oil off immediately if it is splashed.
5. Perform the following inspection if engine oil does not come out from intake valve timing control solenoid
valve oil hole of the cylinder head.
• Remove oil filter, and then clean it. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Installation".
• Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to LU-2,
"Engine Lubrication System".
6. Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT),
and then check each oil groove for clogging.
• Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to LU-2, "Engine Lubrication System".
7. After inspection, install removed parts in the reverse order.
The following are procedures for checking fluids leak, lubricates leak.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may
generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after
hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to check there is no leakage of fuel, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and
engine coolant.
EM-92
OIL SEAL
OIL SEAL
A
VALVE OIL SEAL
VALVE OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003802286
EM
REMOVAL
1. Remove camshaft relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to EM-84, "Exploded View".
C
2. Remove valve lifters. Refer to EM-84, "Exploded View".
3. Turn crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent valve from dropping
into cylinder.
D
4. Remove valve collet.
• Compress valve spring with the valve spring compressor [SST:
KV10116200 (J26336-A)] (A), the attachment [SST:
KV10115900 (J26336-20)] (C), the adapter [SST: E
KV10109220 ( — )] (B). Remove valve collet with a magnet
hand.
CAUTION: F
When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes.
JPBIA0180ZZ
5. Remove valve spring retainer, and valve spring. H

6. Remove valve oil seal using the valve oil seal puller [SST:
KV10107902 (J38959)] (A).
I
K
JPBIA0177ZZ
L
INSTALLATION
1. Apply new engine oil on new valve oil seal joint and seal lip.
2. Using the valve oil seal drift [SST: KV10115600 (J-38958)] (A), M
press fit valve seal to height (b) shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Dimension: Height measured before valve spring seat installa-
tion N
Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)

O
JPBIA0178ZZ
P
FRONT OIL SEAL
FRONT OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003802287
REMOVAL
EM-93
OIL SEAL
• Road wheel and tire (RH)
• Splash guard (RH): Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View".
• Crankshaft pulley: Refer to EM-52, "Exploded View".
2. Remove front oil seal using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crank-
shaft.
SEM829E
INSTALLATION
1. Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip of new front oil seal.
2. Install front oil seal.
• Install front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown in
the figure.
A : Oil seal lip

B : Dust seal lip
: Engine inside
: Engine outside
JPBIA0054ZZ
• Using a suitable drift, press-fit until the height of front oil seal is
level with the mounting surface.
- Suitable drift: outer diameter 60 mm (2.36 in), inner diameter
50 mm (1.97 in).
• Check the garter spring is in position and seal lips not inverted.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and
crankshaft.
• Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil
seal.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal after this step. SEM829E
REAR OIL SEAL

REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003802288
REMOVAL
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View" (VQ25DE) or TM-168, "Exploded View"
(VQ35DE).
2. Remove drive plate. Refer to EM-107, "Exploded View".
3. Remove oil pan (upper). Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
EM-94
OIL SEAL
4. Use a seal cutter (SST) to cut away liquid gasket and remove
rear oil seal retainer. A
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage mating surfaces.
NOTE:
EM
Regard both rear oil seal and retainer a an assembly.
SEM830E
D
INSTALLATION
1. Remove old liquid gasket on mating surfaces of cylinder block and oil pan (upper) using scraper.
2. Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip of new oil seal retainer. E
3. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket with the tube presser
(commercial service tool) to rear oil seal retainer as shown in the
figure.
F
CAUTION:
G
H
PBIC2649E
4. Install rear oil seal retainer to cylinder block. Refer to EM-107, "Exploded View". I
• Check the garter spring is in position and seal lips not inverted.
J
EM-95
CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD
REMOVAL
JPBIA1748ZZ
1. Oil level gauge 2. Cylinder head (bank 2) 3. Cylinder head bolt

4. Cylinder head (bank 1) 5. Cylinder head gasket (bank 1) 6. Cylinder head gasket (bank 2)
A. Refer to EM-97
DISASSEMBLY
EM-96
CYLINDER HEAD
EM
H
JPBIA1728GB
1. Valve lifter 2. Valve collet 3. Valve spring retainer

4. Valve spring 5. Valve oil seal 6. Valve spring seat I
7. Valve guide (EXH) 8. Spark plug 9. Spark plug tube
10. Cylinder head (bank 1) 11. Valve seat (EXH) 12. Valve (EXH)
13. Valve (INT) 14. Valve seat (INT) 15. Valve guide (INT) J
16. Cylinder head (bank 2)
: Apply high strength thread locking sealant or equivalent.
K
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

L
REMOVAL
• Oil level gauge M
• Rocker cover: Refer to EM-49, "Exploded View".
• Fuel tube and fuel injector assembly: Refer to EM-44, "Exploded View". N
• Intake manifold: Refer to EM-32, "Exploded View".
• Exhaust manifold: Refer to EM-34, "Exploded View".
• Water inlet and thermostat assembly: Refer to CO-23, "Exploded View".
• Water outlet, water connector, water bypass pipe and heater pipe: Refer to CO-25, "Exploded View". O
• Timing chain and rear timing chain case: Refer to EM-52, "Exploded View" and EM-79, "Exploded
View".
• Camshaft: Refer to EM-84, "Exploded View". P
EM-97
CYLINDER HEAD
2. Remove cylinder head bolts in reverse order as shown in the fig-
ure with cylinder head bolt wrench (commercial service tool) and
power tool to remove cylinder heads (bank 1 and bank 2).
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2
: Engine front
JPBIA0172ZZ
3. Remove cylinder head gaskets.

INSTALLATION
1. Install new cylinder head gaskets.
2. Turn crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC.
1 : Crankshaft key
: Bank 1 side
• Crankshaft key should line up with the bank 1 cylinder center

line as shown in the figure.
JPBIA1752ZZ
EM-98
CYLINDER HEAD
3. Install cylinder head follow the steps below to tighten cylinder
head bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure with cylin- A
der head bolts wrench (commercial service tool).
A : Bank 1
EM
B : Bank 2
: Engine front
CAUTION: C
• If cylinder head bolts reused, check their outer diameters
before installation. Refer to EM-104, "Inspection".
• Before installing cylinder head, inspect cylinder head dis- D
tortion. Refer to EM-104, "Inspection".
a. Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of cylinder
head bolts.
E
b. Tighten all cylinder head bolts.
: 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb) F

c. Completely loosen all cylinder head bolts.
: 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb) G

JPBIA0172ZZ
CAUTION:
In step “c”, loosen bolts in reverse order of that indicated in the figure.
H
d. Tighten all cylinder head bolts.
: 39.2 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb)

I
e. Turn all cylinder head bolts 103 degrees clockwise (angle tightening).
CAUTION:
Check the tightening angle by using the angle wrench [SST: J
KV10112100 (BT8653-A)] (A). Avoid judgment by visual
inspection without.
• Check tightening angle indicated on the angle wrench indica-
tor plate. K
f. Turn all cylinder head bolts 103 degrees clockwise again (angle
tightening).
L
JPBIA0175ZZ M
4. After installing cylinder head, measure distance between front

end faces of cylinder block and cylinder head (bank 1 and bank
2). N
Standard : 14.1 - 14.9 mm (0.555 - 0.587 in)

O
• If measured value is out of the standard, reinstall cylinder
head.
EMQ0662D
EM-99
CYLINDER HEAD
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove spark plug with spark plug wrench (commercial service tool).
2. Remove valve lifter.
3. Remove valve collet.
KV10116200 (J26336-A)] (A), the attachment [SST:
KV10115900 (J26336-20)] (C) and the adapter [SST:
KV10109220 ( — )] (B). Remove valve collet with a magnet
hand.
CAUTION:
JPBIA0180ZZ
4. Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat.
5. Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove valve.
6. Remove valve oil seal with the valve oil seal puller [SST:
KV10107902 (J38959)] (A).
JPBIA0177ZZ
7. Remove valve seat, if valve seat must be replaced.

• Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat
recess in cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this. Refer to EM-139, "Cylinder Head".
CAUTION:
Prevent to scratch cylinder head by excessive boring.
8. Remove valve guide, if valve guide must be replaced.
a. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230
to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil (A).
JPBIA0184ZZ
EM-100
CYLINDER HEAD
b. Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2 ton, 2.0 lmp
ton) pressure] or a hammer and the valve guide drift (commer- A
cial service tool).
WARNING:
Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protec- EM
tive equipment to avoid getting burned.
SEM931C
D
9. Remove spark plug tube, as necessary.
• Using a pliers, pull spark plug tube out of cylinder head.
CAUTION:
E
• Take care not to damage cylinder head.
• Once removed, spark plug tube will be deformed and cannot be reused. Never remove it unless
absolutely necessary.
F
ASSEMBLY
1. If valve guide is removed in step 8 (DISASSEMBLY), install it.
Replace with oversized [0.2 mm (0.008 in)] valve guide.
G
a. Using the valve guide reamer (commercial service tool) (A),
ream cylinder head valve guide hole.
H
Valve guide hole diameter (for service parts):
Intake and exhaust
: Refer to EM-139, "Cylinder Head". I
J
JPBIA0185ZZ
b. Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in

heated oil (A). K
JPBIA0184ZZ
N
c. Using the valve guide drift (commercial service tool), press valve
guide from camshaft side to the dimensions as in the figure.
O
Projection (A)
Intake and exhaust
: Refer to EM-139, "Cylinder Head". P
WARNING:
Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protec-
tive equipment to avoid getting burned.
JPBIA0186ZZ
EM-101
CYLINDER HEAD
d. Using the valve guide reamer (commercial service tool) (A),
apply reamer finish to valve guide.
Standard : Refer to EM-139,

(Intake and exhaust) "Cylinder Head".
JPBIA0185ZZ
2. If valve seat is removed in step 7 (DISASSEMBLY), install it.

Replace with oversize [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] valve seat.
a. Ream cylinder head recess diameter (a) for service valve seat.
Oversize : Refer to EM-139,

• Be sure to ream in circles concentric to valve guide center.
This will enable valve to fit correctly.
JPBIA0188ZZ
b. Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in

heated oil (A).
JPBIA0184ZZ
c. Provide valve seats cooled well with dry ice. Force fit valve seat into cylinder head.
WARNING:
Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned.
CAUTION:
Avoid directly touching cold valve seats.
d. Using the valve seat cutter set (commercial service tool) or valve
seat grinder, finish seat to the specified dimensions. Refer to
EM-139, "Cylinder Head".
CAUTION:
When using the valve seat cutter, firmly grip cutter handle
with both hands. Then, press on the contacting surface all
around the circumference to cut in a single drive. Improper
pressure on with cutter or cutting many different times may
result in stage valve seat.
SEM934C
e. Using compound, grind to adjust valve fitting.

f. Check again for normal contact. Refer to EM-104, "Inspection".
3. Install new valve oil seals as follows:
EM-102
CYLINDER HEAD
a. Apply new engine oil on valve oil seal joint and seal lip.
b. Install with the valve oil seal drift [SST: KV10115600 (J-38958)] A
(A) press fit valve seal to height (b) shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Dimension: Height measured before valve spring seat installa- EM
tion.
Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)

C
JPBIA0178ZZ
D
4. Install valve spring seat.

5. Install valve. E
NOTE:
Larger diameter valves are for intake side.
F
6. Install valve spring (uneven pitch type).
• Install narrow pitch end (paint mark) to cylinder head side
(valve spring seat side).
G
A : Wide pitch
B : Narrow pitch
C : Paint mark H
: Cylinder head side
Paint mark color: Blue I

JPBIA0179ZZ
7. Install valve spring retainer. J

8. Install valve collet.
KV10116200 (J26336-A)] (A), the attachment [SST: K
KV10115900 (J26336-20)] (C) and the adapter [SST:
KV10109220 ( — )] (B). Install valve collet with a magnet
hand.
CAUTION: L
• Tap valve stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installa-
tion to check its installed condition. M
JPBIA0180ZZ
N
9. Install valve lifter.
10. Install spark plug tube.
O
• Press-fit spark plug tube as follows:
a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to cylinder head mounting hole.
b. Apply sealant to area within approximately 12 mm (0.47 in) from edge of spark plug tube press-fit side.
P
Use high strength thread locking sealant or equivalent.
EM-103
CYLINDER HEAD
c. Using a drift, press-fit spark plug tube so that its height (A) is as
specified in the figure.
B : High strength thread locking sealant application area
Standard press-fit height: 37.7 - 38.7 mm (1.484 - 1.524 in)

CAUTION:
• When press-fitting, take care not to deform spark plug
tube.
• After press-fitting, wipe off liquid gasket protruding onto
JPBIA0181ZZ
cylinder-head upper face.
11. Install spark plug with the spark plug wrench (commercial service tool).

Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter
• Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening
method. Whenever the size difference between (C) and (B)
exceeds the limit, replace them with new one.
Limit [(C) - (B)] : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
A : Measuring point
d : 11 mm (0.43 in)
e : 48 mm (1.89 in)
• If reduction of outer diameter appears in a position other than (B), JPBIA0173ZZ
use it as (B) point.
Cylinder Head Distortion
NOTE:
When performing this inspection, cylinder block distortion should be also checking. Refer to EM-143,
"Cylinder Block".
1. Using a scraper, wipe off oil, scale, gasket, sealant and carbon deposits from surface of cylinder head.
CAUTION:
Never allow gasket fragments to enter engine oil or engine coolant passages.
2. At each of several locations on bottom surface of cylinder head,
measure the distortion in six directions (A), (B), (C), (D), (E) and
(F).
Limit : Refer to EM-139, "Cylinder Head".

• If it exceeds the limit, replace cylinder head.
JPBIA0176ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Valve Dimensions
• Check the dimensions of each valve. For the dimensions, refer to EM-139, "Cylinder Head".
• If dimensions are out of the standard, replace valve and check valve seat contact. Refer to "Valve Seat Con-
tact".
Valve Guide Clearance
Valve Stem Diameter
EM-104
CYLINDER HEAD
• Measure the diameter of valve stem with micrometer (A).
A
Standard : Refer to EM-139,
EM
Valve Guide Inner Diameter
• Measure the inner diameter of valve guide with bore gauge.
Standard C
: Refer to EM-139,
JPBIA0183ZZ
Valve Guide Clearance D

• (Valve guide clearance) = (Valve guide inner diameter) – (Valve stem diameter)
Valve guide clearance E

: Refer to EM-139, "Cylinder Head".
Standard and limit (Intake and exhaust)
• If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace valve and/or valve guide. When valve guide must be
replaced, refer to EM-100, "Disassembly and Assembly". F
Valve Seat Contact
• After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are within the specifications, perform this
procedure. G
• Apply prussian blue (or white lead) onto contacting surface of valve seat to check the condition of the valve
contact on the surface.
• Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference. H
• If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting
surface still has “NG” conditions (B) even after the recheck,
replace valve seat. Refer to EM-100, "Disassembly and Assem-
bly". I
A : OK
J
K
JPBIA0187ZZ
Valve Spring Squareness

• Set a try square (A) along the side of valve spring and rotate L
spring. Measure the maximum clearance between the top of spring
and try square.
M
B : Contact
Limit : Refer to EM-139, "Cylinder Head".

N
• If it exceeds the limit, replace valve spring.
JPBIA0189ZZ O
Valve Spring Dimensions and Valve Spring Pressure Load
EM-105
CYLINDER HEAD
• Check the valve spring pressure at specified spring height.
Standard (Intake and exhaust)

Free height
Installation height : Refer to EM-139,
Installation load "Cylinder Head".
Height during valve open
Load with valve open
• If the installation load or load with valve open is out of the stan- SEM113
dard, replace valve spring.

The following are procedures for checking fluids leak, lubricates leak and exhaust gases leak.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to check there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including
Exhaust gases — Leakage —
EM-106
CYLINDER BLOCK
CYLINDER BLOCK
A
VQ25DE EM
JPBIA2236GB
EM-107
CYLINDER BLOCK
1. Reinforcement plate 2. Drive plate 3. Rear oil seal retainer

4. Cylinder block 5. Knock sensor 6. Sub harness
7. Thrust bearing (upper) 8. Main bearing (upper) 9. Crankshaft
10. Crankshaft key 11. Thrust bearing (lower) 12. Main bearing (lower)
13. Main bearing cap 14. Main bearing cap bolt 15. Main bearing beam
16. Baffle plate 17. Connecting rod bolt 18. Connecting rod bearing cap
19. Connecting rod bearing 20. Connecting rod 21. Snap ring
22. Piston pin 23. Piston 24. Oil ring
25. Second ring 26. Top ring 27. Pilot converter
A. Crankshaft side B. Chamfered C. Refer to EM-110
D. Front mark
VQ35DE
EM-108
CYLINDER BLOCK
EM
JPBIA2237GB
P
1. Reinforcement plate 2. Drive plate 3. Rear oil seal retainer
4. Sub harness 5. Knock sensor 6. Cylinder block
7. Thrust bearing (upper) 8. Main bearing (upper) 9. Crankshaft
10. Crankshaft key 11. Thrust bearing (lower) 12. Main bearing (lower)
13. Main bearing cap 14. Main bearing cap bolt 15. Main bearing beam
16. Baffle plate 17. Connecting rod bolt 18. Connecting rod bearing cap
EM-109
CYLINDER BLOCK
19. Connecting rod bearing 20. Connecting rod 21. Snap ring
22. Piston pin 23. Piston 24. Oil ring
25. Second ring 26. Top ring 27. Pilot converter
28. Oil jet
A. Crankshaft side B. Chamfered C. Refer to EM-110
D. Front mark
DISASSEMBLY
• Intake manifold: Refer to EM-32, "Exploded View".
• Oil pans (lower and upper): Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
• Front and rear timing chain case: Refer to EM-79, "Exploded View".
• Cylinder head: Refer to EM-96, "Exploded View".
2. Remove knock sensor.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle sensor avoiding shocks.
3. Remove rear oil seal retainer.
• Remove by inserting screwdriver between main bearing cap and rear oil seal retainer.
CAUTION:
If rear oil seal retainer is removed, replace it with new one.
NOTE:
Regard both rear oil seal and retainer as an assembly.
4. Remove baffle plate from main bearing beam.
5. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly with the following procedure:
• Before removing piston and connecting rod assembly, check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to
EM-119, "Inspection".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop connecting rod bearing, and to scratch the surface.
a. Position crankshaft pin corresponding to connecting rod to be removed onto the bottom dead center.
b. Remove connecting rod bearing cap.
c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push piston and connect-
ing rod assembly out to the cylinder head side.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the cylinder wall and crankshaft
pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big
end.
EMQ0191D
6. Remove connecting rod bearings from connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop connecting rod bearing, and to scratch the surface.
7. Remove piston rings form piston.
• Before removing piston rings, check the piston ring side clearance. Refer to EM-119, "Inspection".
EM-110
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Use a piston ring expander (commercial service tool) (A).
CAUTION: A
• When removing piston rings, be careful not to damage
piston.
• Be careful not to damage piston rings by expanding them
EM
excessively.
JPBIA0194ZZ
D
8. Remove piston from connecting rod as follows:
a. Using a snap ring pliers (A), remove snap rings.
E
JPBIA0195ZZ
H
b. Heat piston to 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F) with an industrial use
drier (A) or equivalent.
I
K
JPBIA0196ZZ
c. Push out piston pin with stick of outer diameter approximately 20

mm (0.79 in). L
PBIC0262E
O
9. Remove main bearing cap bolts.
NOTE:
• Before loosening main bearing cap bolts, measure the crankshaft end play. Refer to EM-119, "Inspec- P
tion".
EM-111
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Loosen main bearing cap bolts in the reverse order shown in
the figure in several different steps.
: Engine front
JPBIA0439ZZ
10. Remove main bearing beam.
PBIC0881E
11. Remove main bearing caps.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop main bearing, and to scratch the sur-
face.
• Using main bearing cap bolts, remove main bearing cap while
shaking it back-and-forth.
EMQ0195D
12. Remove crankshaft.

13. Remove main bearings and thrust bearings from cylinder block and main bearing caps.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop main bearing, and to scratch the surface.
14. Remove oil jet. (VQ35DE)
ASSEMBLY
1. Fully air-blow engine coolant and engine oil passages in cylinder block, cylinder bore and crankcase to
remove any foreign material.
CAUTION:
Use a goggles to protect your eye.
EM-112
CYLINDER BLOCK
2. Install each plug to cylinder block as shown in the figure.
A
B : Water drain plug
• Apply sealant to the thread of water drain plug (A).
Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. EM
• Apply sealant to the thread of connector bolt (D).
• Apply sealant to the thread of plug (C).
C
Use high strength thread locking sealant or equivalent.
• Replace washers with new one.
G
PBIC2487E
• Tighten each plug and connector bolt as specified below. H
Part Washer Tightening torque

A Yes 62.0 N·m (6.3 kg-m, 46 ft-lb)
I
B No 9.8 N·m (1.0 kg-m, 87 in-lb)
C Yes 62.0 N·m (6.3 kg-m, 46 ft-lb)
D No 39.2 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb) J
3. Install oil jet. (VQ35DE)

• Insert oil jet dowel pin (A) into cylinder block dowel pin hole, K
and tighten mounting bolts.
: Engine front
L
JPBIA0198ZZ N
4. Install main bearings and thrust bearings as follows:
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop main bearing, and to scratch the surface. O
a. Remove dust, dirt, and engine oil on bearing mating surfaces of cylinder block and main bearing caps.
EM-113
CYLINDER BLOCK
b. Install thrust bearings (1) to the both sides of the No. 3 journal
housing on cylinder block and main bearing cap.
A : No. 1
B : No. 2
C : No. 3
D : No. 4
F : Thrust bearing installation position
: Engine front
• Install thrust bearings with the oil groove (E) facing crankshaft JPBIA0199ZZ
arm (outside).
• Install thrust bearing with a projection on one end on cylinder block, and thrust bearing with a projection
at center on main bearing cap. Align each projection with mating notch.
c. Install main bearings paying attention to the direction.

• Main bearing with oil hole (B) and groove (C) goes on cylinder
block. The one without them goes on main bearing cap.
A : Cylinder block side

D : Main bearing cap side
: Engine front
• Before installing main bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing

surface (inside). Do not apply engine oil to the back surface,
but thoroughly clean it.
• When installing, align main bearing stopper protrusion to cut- JPBIA0200ZZ
out of cylinder block and main bearing caps.
• Ensure the oil holes on cylinder block and those on the corresponding bearing are aligned.
5. Install crankshaft to cylinder block.

• While turning crankshaft by hand, check that it turns smoothly.
6. Install main bearing caps.
• Main bearing caps are identified by identification mark cast on
them. For installation, face front mark (E) to front side.
A : No. 1
B : No. 2
C : No. 3
D : No. 4
: Engine front
NOTE:
Main bearing cap cannot be replaced as a single part, because it JPBIA0440ZZ
is machined together with cylinder block.
7. Install main bearing beam.

• Install main bearing beam with front mark facing downward (oil pan side).
• Install main bearing beam with front mark facing front of the
engine.
PBIC0881E
EM-114
CYLINDER BLOCK
8. Install main bearing cap bolts in numerical order as shown in the
figure as follows: A
: Engine front
a. Inspect the outer diameter of main bearing cap bolt. Refer to EM

EM-119, "Inspection".
b. Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of main bear-
ing cap bolts. C
c. Tighten main bearing cap bolts in several different steps.
JPBIA0439ZZ
: 35.3 N·m (3.6 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) D
d. Turn all main bearing cap bolts 90 degrees clockwise (angle tightening).
CAUTION: E
Use the angle wrench [SST: KV10112100 (BT8653-A)] to
check tightening angle. Never make judgment by visual
inspection.
• After installing main bearing cap bolts, check that crankshaft F
can be rotated smoothly by hand.
• Check the crankshaft end play. Refer to EM-119, "Inspection".
G
H
PBIC0921E
9. Install piston to connecting rod as follows:

a. Using snap ring pliers, install new snap ring to the groove of piston rear side. I
• Insert it fully into groove to install.
b. Install piston to connecting rod.
• Using an industrial drier or similar tool, heat piston until piston pin can be pushed in by hand without J
excess force [approximately 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F)]. From the front to the rear, insert piston pin into
piston and connecting rod.
• Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the K
cylinder number on connecting rod are positioned as shown in
the figure.
c. Install new snap ring to the groove of the piston front side. L
• Insert it fully into groove to install.
• After installing, check that connecting rod moves smoothly.
SEM838F N
10. Using a piston ring expander (commercial service tool) (A),

install piston rings.
CAUTION: O
• When installing piston rings, be careful not to damage
piston.
• Be careful not to damage piston rings by expending them P
excessively.
JPBIA0194ZZ
EM-115
CYLINDER BLOCK
• If there is stamped mark on ring, mount it with marked side up.
NOTE:
If there is no stamp on ring, no specific orientation is required
for installation.
Stamped mark: VQ25DE VQ35DE

Top ring (A) :R :—
Second ring (B) :R2 :2R
JPBIA0263ZZ
• Position each ring with the gap as shown in the figure referring
to the piston front mark (D).
C : Top ring gap

E : Oil ring upper or lower rail gap (either of then)
F : Second ring and oil ring spacer gap
a : 90 degrees
b : 45 degrees
JPBIA0205ZZ
• Check the piston rings side clearance. Refer to EM-119, "Inspection".

11. Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop connecting rod bearing, and to scratch the surface.
• Before installing connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing surface (inside). Do not apply
engine oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it.
• When installing, align connecting rod bearing stopper protru-
sion (B) with cutout (C) of connecting rod and connecting rod
bearing cap to install.
• Ensure the oil hole (A) on connecting rod and that on the cor-
responding bearing are aligned.
JPBIA0206ZZ
12. Install piston and connecting rod assembly to crankshaft.

• Position crankshaft pin corresponding to connecting rod to be installed onto the bottom dead center.
• Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston and crankshaft pin journal.
• Match the cylinder position with the cylinder number on connecting rod to install.
• Be sure that front mark on piston crown is facing front of engine.
• Using a piston ring compressor [SST: EM03470000 (J8037)]
(A) or suitable tool, install piston with the front mark on the pis-
ton crown facing the front of the engine.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the cylinder wall and crankshaft
pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big
end.
JPBIA0207ZZ
EM-116
CYLINDER BLOCK
13. Install connecting rod bearing cap.
• Match the stamped cylinder number marks on connecting rod A
with those on connecting rod bearing cap to install.
A : Sample codes
EM
B : Bearing stopper groove
C : Small-end diameter grade
D : Standard stamp
C
E : Weight grade
F : Cylinder No.
G : Management code
JPBIA0208ZZ D
I : Management code
• Be sure that front mark (H) on connecting rod bearing cap is facing front of the engine.
E
14. Tighten connecting rod bolt as follows:
a. Inspect the outer diameter of connecting rod bolt. Refer to EM-119, "Inspection".
b. Apply engine oil to the threads and seats of connecting rod bolts. F
c. Tighten connecting rod bolts.
: 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) G

d. Then tighten all connecting rod bolts 90 degrees clockwise (angle tightening).
CAUTION:
Always use the angle wrench [SST: KV10112100 (BT8653- H
A)]. Avoid tightening based on visual check alone.
• After tightening connecting rod bolts, check that crankshaft
rotates smoothly. I
• Check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-119,
"Inspection".
J
SEM953E
K
15. Install baffle plate to main bearing beam.

16. Install new rear oil seal retainer to cylinder block. Refer to EM-94, "REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Instal- L
lation".
17. Install pilot converter.
• With drift [outer diameter: approximately 33 mm (1.30 in)], M
press-fit as far as it will go.
PBIC0899E
EM-117
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Press-fit pilot converter with its chamfer facing crankshaft as
: Crankshaft side
JPBIA0210ZZ
18. Install knock sensors.

• VQ25DE
- Install knock sensor so that connector faces the front of the
engine.
- After installing knock sensor, connect harness connector, and
lay it out to rear of engine.
CAUTION:
• Never tighten mounting bolts while holding connector.
• If any impact by dropping is applied to knock sensor,
replace it with new one.
NOTE:
• Check that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block
mating surface and the back surface of knock sensor.
PBIC0810E
• Check that knock sensor does not interfere with other parts.
• VQ35DE
- Install knock sensor so that connector faces the rear of the
engine.
A : Bank 1
B : Bank 2
: Engine front
- After installing knock sensor, connect harness connector, and

lay it out to rear of engine.
CAUTION:
• Never tighten mounting bolts while holding connector.
• If any impact by dropping is applied to knock sensor,
replace it with new one.
NOTE:
• Check that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block
mating surface and the back surface of knock sensor.
• Check that knock sensor does not interfere with other parts.
19. Note the following, assemble in the reverse order of disassem-
bly after this step.
Drive plate
• When installing drive plate to crankshaft, be sure to correctly
align crankshaft side dowel pin and drive plate side dowel pin
JPBIA0211ZZ
hole.
- If these are not aligned correctly, engine runs roughly and “MI” turns on.
EM-118
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Install drive plate (2) and reinforcement plate (3) as shown in
the figure. A
1 : Ring gear
4 : Pilot converter EM
5 : Crankshaft
A : Rounded
: Engine front C
• Holding ring gear with the pulley holder (commercial service
tool). JPBIA0212ZZ
• Tighten mounting bolts crosswise over several times. D

E
CRANKSHAFT END PLAY
• Measure the clearance between thrust bearings and crankshaft
arm when crankshaft is moved fully forward or backward with a dial
indicator. F
Standard and limit : Refer to EM-143, "Cylinder Block".

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace thrust bearings, G
and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft
also.
H
EMQ0196D
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE I

• Measure the side clearance between connecting rod and crank-
shaft arm with a feeler gauge (A).
J
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod, K

and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft
also.
L
JPBIA0536ZZ
PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE

M
Piston Pin Hole Diameter
Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole with an inside
micrometer (A).
N
Standard : Refer to EM-143, "Cylinder Block".
JPBIA0217ZZ
Piston Pin Outer Diameter
EM-119
CYLINDER BLOCK
Measure the outer diameter of piston pin with a micrometer (A).
JPBIA0218ZZ
Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance

(Piston to piston pin oil clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) – (Piston pin outer diameter)

• If the calculated value is out of the standard, replace piston and piston pin assembly.
• When replacing piston and piston pin assembly, refer to EM-129, "Description".
NOTE:
• Piston is available together with piston pin as assembly.
• Piston pin (piston pin hole) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no
piston pin grades can be selected. (Only “0” grade is available.)
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
• Measure the side clearance of piston ring (1) and piston ring
groove with a feeler gauge (C).
A : NG
B : OK

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and
measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace piston also.
JPBIA0219ZZ
PISTON RING END GAP

• Check that the cylinder bore inner diameter is within the specification. Refer to EM-143, "Cylinder Block".
• Lubricate with new engine oil to piston (1) and piston ring (2), and
then insert piston ring until middle of cylinder with piston, and mea-
sure the piston ring end gap with a feeler gauge (B).
A : Press-fit
C : Measuring point

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and
measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, rebore cylinder and use JPBIA0220ZZ
oversize piston and piston rings.
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
EM-120
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Check with a connecting rod aligner.
A
A : Bend
B : Torsion
C : Feeler gauge EM
Bend limit
: Refer to EM-143, "Cylinder Block".
Torsion limit C
• If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly.
D
G
JPBIA0221ZZ
CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER

• Install connecting rod bearing cap without installing connecting rod H
bearing, and tightening connecting rod bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to EM-110, "Disassembly and Assembly" for the
tightening procedure.
I
1 : Connecting rod
• Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod big end with an
J
inside micrometer.

JPBIA0222ZZ K
• If out of the standard, replace connecting rod assembly.
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE
L
Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter
Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bushing with an inside
micrometer (A).
M
O
JPBIA0223ZZ
Piston Pin Outer Diameter P
EM-121
CYLINDER BLOCK
Measure the outer diameter of piston pin with a micrometer (A).
JPBIA0218ZZ
Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance

(Connecting rod bushing oil clearance) = (Connecting rod bushing inner diameter) – (Piston pin outer diame-
ter)

• If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin
assembly.
• If replacing piston and piston pin assembly, refer to EM-129, "Description".
• If replacing connecting rod assembly, refer to EM-130,
"Connecting Rod Bearing" to select the connecting rod bearing.
A : Sample codes
B : Bearing stopper groove
C : Small-end diameter grade
D : Standard stamp
E : Weight grade
F : Cylinder No.
G : Management code
JPBIA0208ZZ
H : Front mark
I : Management code
Factory installed parts grading:

• Service parts apply only to grade “0”.
- VQ25DE
A : Piston grade number

B : Front mark
C : Piston pin grade number
D : Identification code
JPBIA2198ZZ
- VQ35DE

B : Front mark
C : Piston pin grade number
JPBIA2199ZZ
EM-122
CYLINDER BLOCK
Unit: mm (in)
A
Grade 0 1
22.000 - 22.006 22.006 - 22.012
Connecting rod bushing inner diameter *
(0.8661 - 0.8664) (0.8664 - 0.8666) EM
21.993 - 21.999 21.999 - 22. 005
Piston pin hole diameter
(0.8659 - 0.8661) (0.8661 - 0.8663)
21.989 - 21.995 21.995 - 22.001 C
Piston pin outer diameter
(0.8657 - 0.8659) (0.8659 - 0.8662)
*: After installing in connecting rod
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION D

• Using a scraper, remove gasket on the cylinder block surface, and also remove engine oil, scale, carbon, or
other contamination.
CAUTION: E
Be careful not to allow gasket flakes to enter engine oil or engine coolant passages.
• Measure the distortion on the cylinder block upper face at some
different points in six directions (C), (D), (E), (F), (G) and (H) with a
F
straightedge (A) and a feeler gauge (B).
Limit : Refer to EM-143, "Cylinder Block".

G
• If it exceeds the limit, replace cylinder block.
JPBIA0224ZZ
MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER I

• Install main bearing caps (2) and main bearing beam without
installing main bearings, and tighten main bearing cap bolts to the
specified torque. Refer to EM-110, "Disassembly and Assembly" J
for the tightening procedure.
• Measure the inner diameter of main bearing housing with a bore
gauge.
K
• If out of the standard, replace cylinder block (1) and main bearing L
caps as assembly.
NOTE: JPBIA0225ZZ
Cylinder block cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is

machined together with main bearing caps. M
PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE

Cylinder Bore inner Diameter N
• Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round
and taper at six different points on each cylinder. [(A) and (B) direc-
tions at (C), (D) and (E)] is in longitudinal direction of engine.
O
f : 10 mm (0.39 in)
g : 60 mm (2.36 in)
P
h : 120 mm (4.72 in)

JPBIA0226ZZ
EM-123
CYLINDER BLOCK
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, or if there are scratches
and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall, hone or rebore the inner
wall.
• Oversize piston is provided. When using oversize piston, rebore
cylinder so that the clearance of the piston to cylinder bore satis-
fies the standard.
CAUTION:
When using oversize piston, use oversize pistons for all cylin-
ders with oversize piston rings.
Oversize (O/S) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) SEM843E
Piston Skirt Diameter

Measure the outer diameter of piston skirt with a micrometer (A).
Measure point
: Refer to EM-143, "Cylinder Block".
Standard
JPBIA0227ZZ
Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance

Calculate by piston skirt diameter and cylinder bore inner diameter [direction (B), position (D)].
(Clearance) = (Cylinder bore inner diameter) – (Piston skirt diameter).

• If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace piston and piston pin assembly. Refer to EM-129, "Piston".
Reboring Cylinder Bore
1. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston to cylinder bore clearance to piston skirt diameter.
Rebored size calculation: D = A + B – C

where,
A: Piston skirt diameter as measured
B: Piston to cylinder bore clearance (standard value)
C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
D: Bored diameter
2. Install main bearing caps and main bearing beam, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder
bores may be distorted in final assembly.
3. Cut cylinder bores.
NOTE:
• When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored.
• Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a
time.
4. Hone cylinders to obtain the specified piston to cylinder bore clearance.
5. Measure finished cylinder bore for the out-of-round and taper.
NOTE:
Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down.
CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER
• Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft main journals with a micrometer.
EM-124
CYLINDER BLOCK
• If out of the standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance. Then use undersize bearing. Refer to EM-
132, "Main Bearing". A
CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER
• Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft pin journal with a
micrometer (A). EM

• If out of the standard, measure the connecting rod bearing oil C
clearance. Then use undersize bearing. Refer to EM-130,
"Connecting Rod Bearing".
D
JPBIA0228ZZ
E
CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER
• Measure the dimensions at four different points as shown in the
figure on each main journal and pin journal with a micrometer.
• Out-of-round is indicated by the difference in the dimensions F
between (d) and (c) at (a) and (b).
• Taper is indicated by the difference in the dimensions between.
G
Limit : Refer to EM-143, "Cylinder Block".
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, correct or replace crank-
shaft. H
• If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected
main journal and/or pin journal. Then select the main bearing and/ JPBIA0229ZZ
or connecting rod bearing. Refer to EM-132, "Main Bearing" and/ I

or EM-130, "Connecting Rod Bearing".
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
• Place V-block on precise flat table, and support the journals on the both end of crankshaft. J
• Place a dial indicator straight up on the No. 3 journal.
• While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on a
dial indicator. (Total indicator reading)
K
• If it exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft. L
M
SEM346D
CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE

N
Method by Calculation
• Install connecting rod bearings (1) to connecting rod (2) and con-
necting rod cap, and tighten connecting rod bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to EM-110, "Disassembly and Assembly" for the O
tightening procedure.
• Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bearing with an
inside micrometer. P
(Oil clearance) = (Connecting rod bearing inner diameter) – (Crank-
shaft pin journal diameter)
Standard and limit : Refer to EM-147,

"Connecting Rod Bearing". JPBIA0230ZZ
EM-125
CYLINDER BLOCK
• If the calculated value exceeds the limit, select proper connecting rod bearing according to connecting rod
big end diameter and crankshaft pin journal diameter to obtain the specified bearing oil clearance. Refer to
EM-130, "Connecting Rod Bearing".
Method of Using Plastigage
• Remove oil and dust on crankshaft pin journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely.
• Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil
holes.
• Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap, and tighten connecting
rod bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-110, "Disassembly and Assembly" for the tightening proce-
dure.
CAUTION:
Never rotate crankshaft.
• Remove connecting rod bearing cap and bearings, and using the
scale on the plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width.
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is
same as that described in the “Method by Calculation”.
JPBIA0231ZZ
MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE

Method by Calculation
• Install main bearings (3) to cylinder block (1) and main bearing
caps (2), and main bearing cap bolts with main bearing beam to
the specified torque. Refer to EM-110, "Disassembly and Assem-
bly" for the tightening procedure.
• Measure the inner diameter of main bearing with a bore gauge.
(Oil clearance) = (Main bearing inner diameter) – (Crankshaft main
journal diameter)
Standard and limit : Refer to EM-146, "Main Bearing".

• If the calculated value exceeds the limit, select proper main bear-
ing according to main bearing inner diameter and crankshaft main JPBIA0232ZZ
journal diameter to obtain the specified bearing oil clearance.

Refer to EM-132, "Main Bearing".
Method of Using Plastigage
• Remove engine oil and dust on crankshaft journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely.
• Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil
holes.
• Install main bearing to cylinder block and main bearing caps, and tighten main bearing cap bolts with main
bearing beam to the specified torque. Refer to EM-110, "Disassembly and Assembly" for the tightening pro-
cedure.
CAUTION:
Never rotate crankshaft.
EM-126
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Remove main bearing caps and bearings, and using the scale on
the plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width. A
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is
same as that described in the “Method by Calculation”.
EM
JPBIA0231ZZ
D
MAIN BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT
• When main bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the
specified torque with main bearings (1) installed, the tip end of
bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-110, "Disassembly and E
Assembly" for the tightening procedure.
A : Crush height F
Standard : There must be crush height.

• If the standard is not met, replace main bearings. G
JPBIA0233ZZ
CONNECTING ROD BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT H

• When connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being tightened
to the specified torque with connecting rod bearings (1) installed,
the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-110, "Disassem-
I
bly and Assembly" for the tightening procedure.
A : Crush height
J
Standard : There must be crush height.
• If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings. K
JPBIA0233ZZ
MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER

• Measure the outer diameters (c), (d) at two positions as shown in L
the figure.
a : 20 mm (0.79 in) M
b : 30 mm (1.18 in)
e : 10 mm (0.39 in)
• If reduction appears in (a) range, regard it (c). N
Limit [(d) – (c)] : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)

• If it exceeds the limit (large difference in dimensions), replace main JPBIA0234ZZ
O
bearing cap bolt with new one.
CONNECTING ROD BOLT OUTER DIAMETER P
EM-127
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Measure the outer diameter (d) at position shown in the figure.
• If the reduction appears in a position other than (d), regard it as (d).
Standard : 7.90 - 8.00 mm (0.3110 - 0.3150 in)

Limit : 7.75 mm (0.3051 in)
• When (d) exceeds the limit (when it becomes thinner), replace
connecting rod bolt with new one.
PBIC0912E
DRIVE PLATE
• Check drive plate and signal plate for deformation or damage.
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble drive plate.
• Never place drive plate with signal plate facing down.
• When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or
scratch it.
• Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from becom-
ing magnetized.
• If anything is found, replace drive plate.
JPBIA0192ZZ
OIL JET (VQ35DE)

• Check nozzle for deformation and damage.
• Blow compressed air from nozzle, and check for clogs.
• If it is not satisfied, clean or replace oil jet.
OIL JET RELIEF VALVE (VQ35DE)
• Using a clean plastic stick, press check valve in oil jet relief valve.
Check that valve moves smoothly with proper reaction force.
• If it is not satisfied, replace oil jet relief valve.
EMU0468D
EM-128
HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
A
EM
Selection points Selection parts Selection items Selection methods
Determined by match of cylin-
der block bearing housing
C
Between cylinder block and Main bearing grade grade (inner diameter of hous-
Main bearing
crankshaft (bearing thickness) ing) and crankshaft journal
grade (outer diameter of jour-
nal) D
Combining service grades for
connecting rod big end diame-
Between crankshaft and con- Connecting rod bearing grade
Connecting rod bearing ter and crankshaft pin outer di-
necting rod (bearing thickness)
ameter determine connecting
E
rod bearing selection.
Piston and piston pin assembly
Between cylinder block and pis- Piston grade Piston grade = cylinder bore
(Piston is available together F
ton (piston skirt diameter) grade (inner diameter of bore)
with piston pin as assembly.)
Between piston and connecting
— — —
rod* G
*: For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between piston pin and connecting rod. (Only “0” grade is available.) The
information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference.
• The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition. H
This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
• For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the
measurement with the values of each selection table.
• For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards and the selection method of the I
selective fitting parts, refer to the text.
Piston INFOID:0000000003802297
J
WHEN NEW CYLINDER BLOCK IS USED

Check the cylinder bore grade (“1”, “2” or “3”) on rear side of cylinder
K
block, and select piston of the same grade.
NOTE:
Piston is available with piston pin as a set for the service part. (Only
“0” grade piston pin is available.) L
SEM756G
N
WHEN NEW CYLINDER BLOCK IS REUSED
1. Measure the cylinder bore inner diameter. Refer to EM-119, "Inspection".
2. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the cylinder bore inner O
diameter of the “PISTON SELECTION TABLE”.
EM-129
• VQ25DE

B : Front mark
C : Piston pin grade
JPBIA2198ZZ
• VQ35DE

B : Front mark
C : Piston pin grade
JPBIA2199ZZ
3. Select piston of the same grade.

PISTON SELECTION TABLE
VQ25DE
Unit: mm (in)
Grade 1 2 3
85.000 - 85.010 85.010 - 85.020 85.020 - 85.030
Cylinder bore inner diameter
(3.3465 - 3.3468) (3.3468 - 3.3472) (3.3472 - 3.3476)
84.980 - 84.990 84.990 - 85.000 85.000 - 85.010
Piston skirt diameter
(3.3457 - 3.3461) (3.3461 - 3.3465) (3.3465 - 3.3468)
VQ35DE
Unit: mm (in)
Grade 1 2 3
95.500 - 95.510 95.510 - 95.520 95.520 - 95.530
Cylinder bore inner diameter
(3.7598 - 3.7602) (3.7602 - 3.7606) (3.7606 - 3.7610)
95.480 - 95.490 95.490 - 95.500 95.500 - 95.510
Piston skirt diameter
(3.7590 - 3.7594) (3.7594 - 3.7598) (3.7598 - 3.7602)
NOTE:
• Piston is available together with piston pin as assembly.
• Piston pin (piston pin hole) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no pis-
ton pin grades can be selected. (Only “0” grade is available.)
• No second grade mark is available on piston.
Connecting Rod Bearing INFOID:0000000003802298
WHEN NEW CONNECTING ROD AND CRANKSHAFT ARE USED
EM-130
• Check pin diameter grade (“0”, “1” or “2”) on front of crankshaft,
and select connecting rod bearing of the same grade. A
A : Journal diameter grade No. 1

B : Journal diameter grade No. 2 EM
C : Journal diameter grade No. 3
D : Journal diameter grade No. 4
E : Pin diameter grade No. 1 C
F : Pin diameter grade No. 2
G : Pin diameter grade No. 3
JPBIA0269ZZ
H : Pin diameter grade No. 4 D
I : Pin diameter grade No. 5
J : Pin diameter grade No. 6
K : Identification E
NOTE:
There is no grading for connecting rod big end diameter.
WHEN CONNECTING ROD AND CRANKSHAFT ARE REUSED F
1. Measure the connecting rod big end diameter. Refer to EM-119, "Inspection".
2. Check that the connecting rod big end diameter is within the standard value. G
3. Measure the crankshaft pin journal diameter. Refer to EM-119, "Inspection".
4. Determine the grade of crankshaft pin diameter grade by corresponding to the measured dimension in
“Crankshaft pin journal diameter” column of “CONNECTING ROD BEARING SELECTION TABLE”. H
5. Select connecting rod bearing of the same grade.
CONNECTING ROD BEARING SELECTION TABLE
I
VQ25DE
Unit: mm (in)
Connecting rod big end diameter 48.000 - 48.013 (1.8898 - 1.8903) J

Unit: mm (in)
Crankshaft Connecting rod bearing

K
Crankshaft pin journal diameter Grade (Mark) Dimension (Bearing thickness range) Bearing grade No. Color
44.968 - 44.974 (1.7704 - 1.7706) 0 1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592) STD 0 Black
44.962 - 44.968 (1.7702 - 1.7704) 1 1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593) STD 1 Brown L
44.956 - 44.962 (1.7699 - 1.7702) 2 1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594) STD 2 Green
VQ35DE
Unit: mm (in) M
Connecting rod big end diameter 55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659)

Unit: mm (in) N
Crankshaft Connecting rod bearing
Crankshaft pin journal diameter Grade (Mark) Dimension (Bearing thickness range) Bearing grade No. Color
51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462) 0 1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592) STD 0 Black O
51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460) 1 1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593) STD 1 Brown
51.956 - 51.962 (2.0455 - 2.0457) 2 1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594) STD 2 Green
P
CONNECTING ROD BEARING GRADE TABLE
Connecting rod bearing grade table : Refer to EM-147, "Connecting Rod Bearing".
UNDERSIZE BEARING USAGE GUIDE

• When the specified connecting rod bearing oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod
bearings, use undersize (US) bearings.
EM-131
• When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the connecting rod bearing inner diameter with bearing
installed, and grind crankshaft pin so that the connecting rod bearing oil clearance satisfies the standard.
CAUTION:
In grinding crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the
fillet R (A) [1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)].
Bearing under- : Refer to EM-147,

size table "Connecting Rod Bearing".
JPBIA0216ZZ
Main Bearing INFOID:0000000003802299
WHEN NEW CYLINDER BLOCK AND CRANKSHAFT ARE USED

1. “MAIN BEARING SELECTION TABLE” rows correspond to
bearing housing grade on rear left side of cylinder block.
SEM756G
2. “MAIN BEARING SELECTION TABLE” columns correspond to

journal diameter grade on front side of crankshaft.
A : Journal diameter grade No. 1

B : Journal diameter grade No. 2
C : Journal diameter grade No. 3
D : Journal diameter grade No. 4
E : Pin diameter grade No. 1
F : Pin diameter grade No. 2
G : Pin diameter grade No. 3
JPBIA0269ZZ
H : Pin diameter grade No. 4
I : Pin diameter grade No. 5
J : Pin diameter grade No. 6
K : Identification code
3. Select main bearing grade at the point where selected row and column meet in “MAIN BEARING SELEC-
TION TABLE”.
4. Apply sign at crossing in above step 3 to “MAIN BEARING GRADE TABLE”.
NOTE:
• “MAIN BEARING GRADE TABLE” applies to all journals.
• Service parts is available as a set of both upper and lower.
WHEN CYLINDER BLOCK AND CRANKSHAFT ARE REUSED
1. Measure cylinder block main bearing housing inner diameter and crankshaft main journal diameter. Refer
to EM-119, "Inspection".
2. Correspond the measured dimension in “Cylinder block main bearing housing inner diameter” row of
“MAIN BEARING SELECTION TABLE”.
EM-132
3. Correspond the measured dimension in “Crankshaft main journal diameter” column of “MAIN BEARING
SELECTION TABLE”. A
4. Follow step 3 and later in “When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used”.
MAIN BEARING SELECTION TABLE
EM
L
PBIC5332E
MAIN BEARING GRADE TABLE (ALL JOURNALS)

M
Main bearing grade table (All journals) : Refer to EM-146, "Main Bearing".
UNDERSIZE BEARING USAGE GUIDE N

• When the specified main bearing oil clearance is not obtained with standard size main bearings, use under-
size (US) bearing.
• When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the main bearing inner diameter with bearing installed, and
grind main journal so that the main bearing oil clearance satisfies the standard. O
CAUTION:
EM-133
In grinding crankshaft main journal to use undersize bearings,
keep the fillet R (A) [1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)].
Bearing undersize : Refer to EM-146,

table "Main Bearing".
JPBIA0216ZZ
EM-134
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A
General Specification INFOID:0000000003802300
EM
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
C
Engine VQ25DE VQ35DE
Cylinder arrangement V-6
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,495 (152.24) 3,498 (213.45) D

85.0 x 73.3 95.5 x 81.4
Bore and stroke mm (in)
(3.346 x 2.886) (3.760 x 3.205)
Valve arrangement DOHC
E
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6
Compression 2
Number of piston rings F
Oil 1
Number of main bearings 4
Compression ratio 9.8 10.3 G
Standard 1,275 (12.8, 13.0, 185)
Compression pressure
Minimum 981 (9.8, 10.0, 142)
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm H
Differential limit between cylinders 98 (1.0, 1.0, 14)
J
Cylinder number
SEM713A
L
Valve timing
(Valve timing control - “OFF”) N
PBIC0187E
Unit: degree P
a b c d e f
VQ25DE 240 244 −6 58 8 52
VQ35DE 240 260 −10 70 10 50
EM-135
Drive Belt INFOID:0000000003802301
DRIVE BELT
Tension of drive belt Belt tension is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by drive belt auto-tensioner.
Spark Plug INFOID:0000000003802302
SPARK PLUG
Unit: mm (in)
Make DENSO
VQ25DE FXE20HR11
Standard type
VQ35DE FXE22HR11
Standard 1.1 (0.043)
Gap (Nominal)
Limit 1.4 (0.055)
Intake Manifold INFOID:0000000003802303
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Unit: mm (in)
Items Limit
Surface distortion Intake manifold 0.1 (0.004)
Exhaust Manifold INFOID:0000000003802304
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Unit: mm (in)
Items Limit
Surface distortion Exhaust manifold 0.3 (0.012)
Camshaft INFOID:0000000003802305
CAMSHAFT
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Items Limit
VQ25DE VQ35DE
No. 1 0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034)
Camshaft journal oil clearance 0.15 (0.0059)
No. 2, 3, 4 0.035 - 0.076 (0.0014 - 0.0030)
No. 1 26.000 - 26.021 (1.0236 - 1.0244) —
Camshaft bracket inner diameter
No. 2, 3, 4 23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260) —
No. 1 25.935 - 25.955 (1.0211 - 1.0218) —
Camshaft journal diameter
No. 2, 3, 4 23.445 - 23.465 (0.9230 - 0.9238) —
Camshaft end play 0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074) 0.24 (0.0094)
44.665 - 44.855 45.465 - 45.655
Intake
(1.7585 - 1.7659) (1.7900 - 1.7974) 0.2 (0.008)*1
Camshaft cam height “A”
44.775 - 44.965 45.475 - 45.665
Exhaust
(1.7628 - 1.7703) (1.7904 - 1.7978) 0.2 (0.008)*1
Camshaft runout [TIR*2] Less than 0.02 (0.0008) 0.05 (0.0020)
EM-136
Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*2] — 0.15 (0.0059)
A
EM
D
SEM671
*1: Cam wear limit E

*2: Total indicator reading
VALVE LIFTER
Unit: mm (in)
F
Standard
Items
VQ25DE VQ35DE G
Intake 33.980 - 33.990 (1.3378 - 1.3382)
Valve lifter outer diameter 33.980 - 33.990 (1.3378 - 1.3382)
Exhaust 29.977 - 29.987 (1.1802 - 1.1806)
Intake 34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392)
H
Valve lifter hole diameter 34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392)
Exhaust 29.997 - 30.013 (1.1810 - 1.1816)
Valve lifter clearance 0.010 - 0.036 (0.0004 - 0.0014)
I
VALVE CLEARANCE
Unit: mm (in)
J
Items Cold Hot* (reference data)
Intake 0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013) 0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016)
Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015) 0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017) K
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
AVAILABLE VALVE LIFTER

L
VQ25DE
Unit: mm (in)
Intake Exhaust M
Identification (stamped) mark Thickness Identification (stamped) mark Thickness
788P 7.88 (0.3102) 666U 6.66 (0.2622)
N
790P 7.90 (0.3110) 668U 6.68 (0.2630)
792P 7.92 (0.3118) 670U 6.70 (0.2638)
794P 7.94 (0.3126) 672U 6.72 (0.2646) O
796P 7.96 (0.3134) 674U 6.74 (0.2654)
798P 7.98 (0.3142) 676U 6.76 (0.2661)
800P 8.00 (0.3150) 678U 6.78 (0.2669) P
802P 8.02 (0.3157) 680U 6.80 (0.2677)
804P 8.04 (0.3165) 682U 6.82 (0.2685)
806P 8.06 (0.3173) 684U 6.84 (0.2693)
808P 8.08 (0.3181) 686U 6.86 (0.2701)
810P 8.10 (0.3189) 688U 6.88 (0.2709)
EM-137
Intake Exhaust
Identification (stamped) mark Thickness Identification (stamped) mark Thickness
812P 8.12 (0.3197) 690U 6.90 (0.2717)
814P 8.14 (0.3205) 692U 6.92 (0.2724)
816P 8.16 (0.3213) 694U 6.94 (0.2732)
818P 8.18 (0.3220) 696U 6.96 (0.2740)
820P 8.20 (0.3228) 698U 6.98 (0.2748)
822P 8.22 (0.3236) 700U 7.00 (0.2756)
824P 8.24 (0.3244) 702U 7.02 (0.2764)
826P 8.26 (0.3252) 704U 7.04 (0.2772)
828P 8.28 (0.3260) 706U 7.06 (0.2780)
830P 8.30 (0.3268) 708U 7.08 (0.2787)
832P 8.32 (0.3276) 710U 7.10 (0.2795)
834P 8.34 (0.3283) 712U 7.12 (0.2803)
836P 8.36 (0.3291) 714U 7.14 (0.2811)
838P 8.38 (0.3299) 716U 7.16 (0.2819)
840P 8.40 (0.3307) 718U 7.18 (0.2827)
SEM758G
VQ35DE
Unit: mm (in)
Identification (stamped) mark Thickness

788P 7.88 (0.3102)
790P 7.90 (0.3110)
792P 7.92 (0.3118)
794P 7.94 (0.3126)
796P 7.96 (0.3134)
798P 7.98 (0.3142)
800P 8.00 (0.3150)
802P 8.02 (0.3157)
804P 8.04 (0.3165)
806P 8.06 (0.3173)
808P 8.08 (0.3181)
810P 8.10 (0.3189)
812P 8.12 (0.3197)
814P 8.14 (0.3205)
816P 8.16 (0.3213)
818P 8.18 (0.3220)
EM-138
Identification (stamped) mark Thickness
A
820P 8.20 (0.3228)
822P 8.22 (0.3236)
824P 8.24 (0.3244) EM
826P 8.26 (0.3252)
828P 8.28 (0.3260)
830P 8.30 (0.3268) C
832P 8.32 (0.3276)
834P 8.34 (0.3283)
D
836P 8.36 (0.3291)
838P 8.38 (0.3299)
840P 8.40 (0.3307) E
SEM758G
I
Cylinder Head INFOID:0000000003802306
CYLINDER HEAD J
Unit: mm (in)
Items Standard Limit

Head surface distortion Less than 0.03 (0.0012) 0.1 (0.004) K
Normal cylinder head height “H” 126.3 - 126.5 (4.97 - 4.98) —
PBIC0924E
O
VALVE DIMENSIONS
P
EM-139
Unit: mm (in)
SEM188

Intake 34.0 - 34.3 (1.339 - 1.350) 36.6 - 36.9 (1.441 - 1.453)
Valve head diameter “D”
Exhaust 29.0 - 29.3 (1.142 - 1.154) 30.2 - 30.5 (1.189 - 1.201)
Intake 98.06 (3.8606) 97.13 (3.8240)
Valve length “L”
Exhaust 96.81 (3.8114) 94.67 (3.7272)
Intake 5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354) 5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354)
Valve stem diameter “d”
Exhaust 5.955 - 5.970 (0.2344 - 0.2350) 5.962 - 5.970 (0.2347 - 0.2350)
Intake
Valve seat angle “α” 45°15′ - 45°45′
Exhaust
Intake 1.1 (0.043)
Valve margin “T”
Exhaust 1.3 (0.051)
Valve margin “T” limit 0.5 (0.020)
Valve stem end surface grinding limit 0.2 (0.008)
VALVE GUIDE
Unit: mm (in)
SEM950E
Items Standard Oversize (Service) [0.2 (0.008)]

Outer diameter 10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950) 10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029)
Valve guide
Inner diameter (Finished size) 6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369)
Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter 9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935) 10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014)
Interference fit of valve guide 0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023)
Intake 0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021) 0.08 (0.0031)
Valve guide clearance
Exhaust 0.030 - 0.056 (0.0012 - 0.0022) 0.09 (0.0035)
Projection length “L” 12.6 - 12.8 (0.496 - 0.504)
VALVE SEAT
EM-140
VQ25DE
Unit: mm (in) A
EM
PBIC2745E
Items Standard Oversize (Service) [0.5 (0.020)] E

Intake 35.000 - 35.016 (1.3780 - 1.3786) 35.500 - 35.516 (1.3976 - 1.3983)
Cylinder head seat recess diameter “D”
Exhaust 30.000 - 30.016 (1.1811 - 1.1817) 30.500 - 30.516 (1.2008 - 1.2014)
F
Intake 35.080 - 35.096 (1.3811 - 1.3817) 35.580 - 35.596 (1.4008 - 1.4014)
Valve seat outer diameter “d”
Exhaust 30.080 - 30.096 (1.1842 - 1.1849) 30.580 - 30.596 (1.2669 - 1.2676)
Intake 0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038) G
Valve seat interference fit
Exhaust 0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038)
Intake 35.3 (1.390)
Diameter “d1”*1 H
Exhaust 30.3 (1.193)
Intake 33.3 - 33.8 (1.311 - 1.331)
Diameter “d2”*2
Exhaust 28.1 - 28.6 (1.106 - 1.126) I
Intake 60°
Angle “α1”
Exhaust 60°
J
Intake 88°45′ - 90°15′
Angle “α2”
Exhaust 88°45′ - 90°15′
Intake 120° K
Angle “α3”
Exhaust 120°
Intake 1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)
Contacting width “W”*3 L
Exhaust 1.2 - 1.6 (0.047 - 0.063)
Intake 6.2 - 6.3 (0.244 - 0.248) 5.4 - 5.5 (0.213 - 0.217)
Height “h”
Exhaust 5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236) 4.95 - 5.05 (0.1949 - 0.1988)
M
Intake 6.35 (0.2500)
Depth “H”
Exhaust 6.0 (0.236)
*1: Diameter made by intersection point of conic angles “α1” and “α2”
N
*3: Machining data
O
VQ35DE
EM-141
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC2745E

Intake 38.000 - 38.016 (1.4961 - 1.4967) 38.500 - 38.516 (1.5157 - 1.5164)
Cylinder head seat recess diameter “D”
Exhaust 31.600 - 31.616 (1.2441 - 1.2447) 32.100 - 32.116 (1.2638 - 1.2644)
Intake 38.097 - 38.113 (1.4999 - 1.5005) 38.597 - 38.613 (1.5196 - 1.5202)
Valve seat outer diameter “d”
Exhaust 31.680 - 31.696 (1.2472 - 1.2479) 32.180 - 32.196 (1.2669 - 1.2676)
Intake 0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044)
Valve seat interference fit
Exhaust 0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038)
Intake 34.6 (1.362)
Diameter “d1”*1
Exhaust 27.7 (1.091)
Intake 35.9 - 36.4 (1.413 - 1.433)
Diameter “d2”*2
Exhaust 29.3 - 29.8 (1.154 - 1.173)
Intake 60°
Angle “α1”
Exhaust 60°
Intake 88°45′ - 90°15′
Angle “α2”
Exhaust 88°45′ - 90°15′
Intake 120°
Angle “α3”
Exhaust 120°
Intake 1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)
Contacting width “W”*3
Exhaust 1.2 - 1.6 (0.047 - 0.063)
Intake 5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236) 5.0 - 5.1 (0.197 - 0.201)
Height “h”
Exhaust 5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236) 4.9 - 5.0 (0.193 - 0.197)
Depth “H” 6.0 (0.236)
*3: Machining data
VALVE SPRING
Items Standard
Free height 47.07 mm (1.8531 in)
Installation height 37.00 mm (1.4567 in)
Installation load 166 - 188 N (16.9 - 19.2 kg, 37 - 42 lb)
Height during valve open 27.20 mm (1.0709 in)
Load with valve open 373 - 421 N (38.0 - 42.9 kg, 84 - 95 lb)
EM-142
Unit: mm (in)
Items Limit A
Squareness 2.1 (0.083)
Cylinder Block INFOID:0000000003802307 EM
CYLINDER BLOCK
Unit: mm (in) C
JPBIA2238GB
Engine VQ25DE VQ35DE G

Standard Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
Surface flatness
Limit 0.1 (0.004) H
Main bearing housing inner
Standard 63.993 - 64.017 (2.5194 - 2.5203)
diameter
Grade No. 1 85.000 - 85.010 (3.3465 - 3.3468) 95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602) I
Cylinder Inner diame- Standard Grade No. 2 85.010 - 85.020 (3.3468 - 3.3472) 95.510 - 95.520 (3.7602 - 3.7606)
bore ter Grade No. 3 85.020 - 85.030 (3.3472 - 3.3476) 95.520 - 95.530 (3.7606 - 3.7610)
Wear limit 0.2 (0.008)
J
Out-of-round 0.015 (0.0006)

Limit
Taper 0.010 (0.0004)
K
Grade No. A 63.993 - 63.994 (2.5194 - 2.5194)
Grade No. B 63.994 - 63.995 (2.5194 - 2.5195)
Grade No. C 63.995 - 63.996 (2.5195 - 2.5195)
Grade No. D 63.996 - 63.997 (2.5195 - 2.5196) L
Grade No. E 63.997 - 63.998 (2.5196 - 2.5196)
Grade No. F 63.998 - 63.999 (2.5196 - 2.5196)
Grade No. G 63.999 - 64.000 (2.5196 - 2.5197)
Grade No. H 64.000 - 64.001 (2.5197 - 2.5197)
M
Grade No. J 64.001 - 64.002 (2.5197 - 2.5198)
Grade No. K 64.002 - 64.003 (2.5198 - 2.5198)
Grade No. L 64.003 - 64.004 (2.5198 - 2.5198) N
Main bearing housing inner diameter Grade No. M 64.004 - 64.005 (2.5198 - 2.5199)
grade (Without bearing) Grade No. N 64.005 - 64.006 (2.5199 - 2.5199)
Grade No. P 64.006 - 64.007 (2.5199 - 2.5200)
Grade No. R 64.007 - 64.008 (2.5200 - 2.5200) O
Grade No. S 64.008 - 64.009 (2.5200 - 2.5200)
Grade No. T 64.009 - 64.010 (2.5200 - 2.5201)
Grade No. U 64.010 - 64.011 (2.5201 - 2.5201)
Grade No. V 64.011 - 64.012 (2.5201 - 2.5202) P
Grade No. W 64.012 - 64.013 (2.5202 - 2.5202)
Grade No. X 64.013 - 64.014 (2.5202 - 2.5202)
Grade No. Y 64.014 - 64.015 (2.5202 - 2.5203)
Grade No. 4 64.015 - 64.016 (2.5203 - 2.5203)
Grade No. 7 64.016 - 64.017 (2.5203 - 2.5203)
Difference in inner diameter
between cylinders
EM-143
AVAILABLE PISTON
VQ25DE
Unit: mm (in)
SEM882E

Grade No. 1 84.980 - 84.990 (3.3457 - 3.3461) —
Grade No. 2 84.990 - 85.000 (3.3461 - 3.3465) —
Piston skirt diameter “A”
Grade No. 3 85.000 - 85.010 (3.3465 - 3.3468) —
Service — 85.180 - 85.210 (3.3535 - 3.3547)
“a” dimension 38.8 (1.528) —
Grade No. 0 21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661) —
Grade No. 1 21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663) —
Piston to cylinder bore clearance 0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012) 0.08 (0.0031)
VQ35DE
Unit: mm (in)
SEM882E

Grade No. 1 95.480 - 95.490 (3.7590 - 3.7594) —
Grade No. 2 95.490 - 95.500 (3.7594 - 3.7598) —
Piston skirt diameter “A”
Grade No. 3 95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602) —
Service — 95.680 - 95.710 (3.7669 - 3.7681)
“a” dimension 38.0 (1.496) —
Grade No. 0 21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661) —
Grade No. 1 21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663) —
Piston to cylinder bore clearance 0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012) 0.08 (0.0031)
PISTON RING
EM-144
VQ25DE
Unit: mm (in) A
Top 0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031) 0.11 (0.0043)
Side clearance 2nd 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) 0.10 (0.0039)
EM
Oil ring 0.045 - 0.125 (0.0018 - 0.0049) —

Top 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118) 0.54 (0.0213)
C
End gap 2nd 0.31 - 0.46 (0.0122 - 0.0181) 0.67 (0.0264)
Oil (rail ring) 0.20 - 0.50 (0.0079 - 0.0197) 0.95 (0.0374)
D
VQ35DE
Unit: mm (in)
E
Top 0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031) 0.11 (0.0043)
Side clearance 2nd 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) 0.10 (0.0039)
Oil ring 0.065 - 0.125 (0.0026 - 0.0049) — F
Top 0.23 - 0.28 (0.0091 - 0.0110) 0.49 (0.0193)
End gap 2nd 0.33 - 0.43 (0.0130 - 0.0169) 0.90 (0.0354)
G
Oil (rail ring) 0.20 - 0.45 (0.0079 - 0.0177) 0.95 (0.0374)
PISTON PIN
Unit: mm (in) H
Grade No. 0 21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659) —
Piston pin outer diameter I
Grade No. 1 21.995 - 22.001 (0.8659 - 0.8662) —
Piston to piston pin oil clearance 0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002) —
Connecting rod bushing oil clearance 0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007) 0.030 (0.0012) J
CONNECTING ROD
Unit: mm (in)
K
Standard
Items Limit
VQ25DE VQ35DE
Center distance 147.60 - 147.70 (5.81 - 5.81) 144.15 - 144.25 (5.68 - 5.68) — L
Bend [per 100 (3.94)] — 0.15 (0.0059)
Torsion [per 100 (3.94)] — 0.30 (0.0118)
M
Connecting rod bushing inner Grade No. 0 22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664) —
diameter* Grade No. 1 22.006 - 22.012 (0.8664 - 0.8666) —
Connecting rod big end diameter (Without
48.000 - 48.013 (1.8898 - 1.8903) 55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659) —
N
bearing)
Side clearance 0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138) 0.40 (0.0157)
*: After installing in connecting rod O
CRANKSHAFT
P
EM-145
Unit: mm (in)
SEM645 SBIA0535E

Grade No. A 59.975 - 59.974 (2.3612 - 2.3612)
Grade No. B 59.974 - 59.973 (2.3612 - 2.3611)
Grade No. C 59.973 - 59.972 (2.3611 - 2.3611)
Grade No. D 59.972 - 59.971 (2.3611 - 2.3611)
Grade No. E 59.971 - 59.970 (2.3611 - 2.3610)
Grade No. F 59.970 - 59.969 (2.3610 - 2.3610)
Grade No. G 59.969 - 59.968 (2.3610 - 2.3609)
Grade No. H 59.968 - 59.967 (2.3609 - 2.3609)
Grade No. J 59.967 - 59.966 (2.3609 - 2.3609)
Grade No. K 59.966 - 59.965 (2.3609 - 2.3608)
Grade No. L 59.965 - 59.964 (2.3608 - 2.3608)
Main journal diameter. “Dm” Grade No. M 59.964 - 59.963 (2.3608 - 2.3607)
Standard
grade Grade No. N 59.963 - 59.962 (2.3607 - 2.3607)
Grade No. P 59.962 - 59.961 (2.3607 - 2.3607)
Grade No. R 59.961 - 59.960 (2.3607 - 2.3606)
Grade No. S 59.960 - 59.959 (2.3606 - 2.3606)
Grade No. T 59.959 - 59.958 (2.3606 - 2.3605)
Grade No. U 59.958 - 59.957 (2.3605 - 2.3605)
Grade No. V 59.957 - 59.956 (2.3605 - 2.3605)
Grade No. W 59.956 - 59.955 (2.3605 - 2.3604)
Grade No. X 59.955 - 59.954 (2.3604 - 2.3604)
Grade No. Y 59.954 - 59.953 (2.3604 - 2.3603)
Grade No. 4 59.953 - 59.952 (2.3603 - 2.3603)
Grade No. 7 59.952 - 59.951 (2.3603 - 2.3603)
Grade No. 0 44.968 - 44.974 (1.7704 - 1.7706) 51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462)
Pin journal diameter. “Dp” grade Standard Grade No. 1 44.962 - 44.968 (1.7702 - 1.7704) 51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460)
Grade No. 2 44.956 - 44.962 (1.7699 - 1.7702) 51.956 - 51.962 (2.0445 - 2.0457)
Center distance “r” 36.61 - 36.69 (1.4413 - 1.4445) 40.66 - 40.74 (1.6008 - 1.6039)
Taper (Difference between “A”
0.002 (0.0001)
and “B”)
Limit
Out-of-round (Difference between
0.002 (0.0001)
“X” and “Y”)
Crankshaft runout [TIR*]
Limit 0.10 (0.0039)
Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Crankshaft end play
Limit 0.30 (0.0118)
*: Total indicator reading
Main Bearing INFOID:0000000003802308
MAIN BEARING
EM-146
Unit: mm (in)
A
EM
D
PBIC2619E
Grade number Thickness Width Identification color Remarks

E
0 2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789) Black
1 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) Brown
2 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) Green
F
3 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Yellow Grade is the same
for upper and lower
4 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) Blue bearings.
5 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) Pink G
6 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) Purple
7 2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797) White
H
UPR 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) Brown
01
LWR 2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789) Black
UPR 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) 19.9 - 20.1 Green I
12
LWR 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) (0.783 - 0.791) Brown
UPR 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Yellow
23 J
LWR 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) Green
UPR 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) Blue Grade and color are
34 different for upper
LWR 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Yellow and lower bearings. K
UPR 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) Pink
45
LWR 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) Blue
L
UPR 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) Purple
56
LWR 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) Pink
UPR 2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797) White M
67
LWR 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) Purple
UNDERSIZE
N
Unit: mm (in)
Items Thickness Main journal diameter

0.25 (0.0098) 2.132 - 2.140 (0.0839 - 0.0843) Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. O
MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Unit: mm (in)
P
Main bearing oil clearance 0.035 - 0.045 (0.0014 - 0.0018)* 0.065 (0.0026)
*: Actual clearance
Connecting Rod Bearing INFOID:0000000003802309
CONNECTING ROD BEARING
EM-147
Unit: mm (in)
Grade number Thickness Identification color (mark)

0 1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592) Black
1 1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593) Brown
2 1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Green
UNDERSIZE
Unit: mm (in)
Items Thickness Crank pin journal diameter

0.25 (0.0098) 1.626 - 1.634 (0.0640 - 0.0643) Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.
CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE

Unit: mm (in)

Connecting rod bearing oil clearance 0.020 - 0.045 (0.0008 - 0.0018)* 0.070 (0.0028)
*: Actual clearance
EM-148
ENGINE
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

SECTION LU LU
E
CONTENTS
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 11 F
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 2 OIL COOLER .................................................... 11

Engine Lubrication System ...................................... 2 Exploded View .........................................................11 G
Engine Lubrication System Schematic ...................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................11
Inspection ................................................................12
PRECAUTION ............................................... 4
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY .............. 13 H
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4
Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 4 OIL PUMP ......................................................... 13
Exploded View .........................................................13 I
PREPARATION ............................................ 5 Removal and Installation .........................................13
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................13
PREPARATION ................................................... 5 Inspection ................................................................14
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 J
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 7 (SDS) ............................................................ 16
K
ENGINE OIL ........................................................ 7 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Inspection .................................................................. 7 (SDS) ................................................................. 16
Draining ..................................................................... 8 Periodical Maintenance Specification ....................16 L
Refilling ..................................................................... 9 Engine Oil Pressure ...............................................16
Oil Pump .................................................................16
OIL FILTER ........................................................10 Regulator Valve ......................................................16
Removal and Installation ......................................... 10 M
Inspection ................................................................ 10
LU-1
DESCRIPTION
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS >
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION
Engine Lubrication System INFOID:0000000003793114
JPBIA2239GB
LU-2
DESCRIPTION
Engine Lubrication System Schematic INFOID:0000000003793115
LU
I
JPBIA2240GB
LU-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000003793117
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface.
• Remove liquid gasket completely from the liquid gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt
holes.
2. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface with white gasoline (lighting and heating
use) to remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials.
3. Apply liquid gasket to the liquid gasket application surface.
• Within 5 minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
• Never retighten mounting bolts or nuts after the installation.
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant.
LU-4
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
LU
Tool number
(SPX North America No.) Description C
Tool name
ST25051001 Measuring oil pressure
(J25695-1) Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa D
Oil pressure gauge (24.52 bar, 25 kg/cm2, 356 psi)
NT050
ST25052000 Adapting oil pressure gauge to oil pan (upper) F

(J25695-2)
Hose
G
S-NT559
H
KV10115801 Removing oil filter

(J38956) a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
Oil filter wrench I
S-NT375
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000003793120 K
Tool name Description L

Power tools Loosening nuts and bolts
N
PBIC0190E
LU-5
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
NT052
Deep socket Removing and installing oil pressure switch

a: 27 mm (1.06 in)
PBIC4066E
LU-6
ENGINE OIL
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE A
ENGINE OIL
LU
ENGINE OIL LEVEL

NOTE: C
Before starting engine, put vehicle horizontally and check the engine oil level. If engine is already started, stop
it and allow 10 minutes before checking.
1. Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean.
D
2. Insert oil level gauge and check the engine oil level is within the
range shown in the figure.
3. If it is out of range, adjust it. E
G
PBIC4202E
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE

• Check engine oil for white turbidity or heavy contamination. H
• If engine oil becomes turbid and white, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.
Repair or replace damaged parts.
ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE I
Check for engine oil leakage around the following areas:
• Oil pans (lower and upper)
• Oil pan drain plug J
• Oil pressure switch
• Oil filter
• Water pump cover
• Oil cooler K
• Valve timing control covers (bank 1 and bank 2)
• Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
• Mating surface between front timing chain case and rear timing chain case L
• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and cylinder head
• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and cylinder block
• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and oil pan (upper)
M
• Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
• Crankshaft oil seals (front and rear)
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
N
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
O
• Oil pressure check should be done in “Parking position”.
1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
2. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View". P
LU-7
ENGINE OIL
3. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure switch (2), and
remove oil pressure switch using deep socket (commercial ser-
vice tool).
CAUTION:
Never drop or shock oil pressure switch.
1 : Oil filter
: Vehicle front
JPBIA1677ZZ
4. Install the oil pressure gauge [SST: ST25051001 (J25695-1)] (A)

and hose [SST: ST25052000 (J25695-2)] (B).
JPBIA0074ZZ
5. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

6. Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load.
NOTE:
When the engine oil temperature is low, the engine oil pressure becomes high.
Engine oil pressure : Refer to LU-16, "Engine Oil Pressure".

If difference is extreme, check engine oil passage and oil pump for engine oil leakage.
7. After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows:
a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and the mating surface.
b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure switch to the specification.
Tightening torque : Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".

c. After warming up engine, check there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine.
Draining INFOID:0000000003793122
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin
contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Warm up the engine, and check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to LU-7, "Inspec-
tion".
2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
3. Loosen oil filler cap.
LU-8
ENGINE OIL
4. Remove drain plug (1) and then drain engine oil.
A
: Vehicle front
LU
JPBIA1676ZZ
D
Refilling INFOID:0000000003793123
1. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". E
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
F
Tightening torque : Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
2. Refill with new engine oil.
Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
G
Engine oil capacity : Refer to LU-16, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".
CAUTION: H
• When filling engine oil, never pull out oil level gauge.
• The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifica-
tions for reference only.
• Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine. I
3. Warm up the engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leakage.
J
LU-9
OIL FILTER
OIL FILTER
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
• Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot.
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
• Never allow engine oil to adhere to drive belt.
• Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle.
2. Using oil filter wrench [SST: KV10115801 (J38956)] (A), remove
oil filter.
: Vehicle front
JPBIA1678ZZ
INSTALLATION
1. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter.
SMA010
3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface,

then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A). Or tighten to the specification.
Oil filter:
: 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
JPBIA0077ZZ

2. Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil.
4. Check the engine oil level, and adjust the level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
LU-10
OIL COOLER
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
OIL COOLER
LU
JPBIA1679GB J
1. Connector bolt 2. Copper gasket 3. Water drain plug

4. Water pipe 5. Bracket 6. Clamp
K
7. Water hose 8. Relief valve 9. Oil cooler
10. Connector bolt 11. Oil filter 12. Water hose
13. Water pipe 14. Water hose L
A. To water connector B. Refer to LU-10
: Engine front
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. M
N
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil and engine coolant may be hot. O
NOTE:
When remove oil cooler only, step 2 is unnecessary.
P
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator and cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-110, "Disassem-
bly and Assembly".
NOTE:
Perform this step when removing water pipes.
3. Remove oil filter. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never spill engine oil on drive belt.
LU-11
OIL COOLER
4. Disconnect water hoses from oil cooler.
• When removing oil cooler only, pinching water hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spill-
ing out.
• Remaining engine coolant in piping will come out. Use a tray to collect it.
CAUTION:
5. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler.
CAUTION:
Never spill engine oil to rubber parts such as drive belt.
6. Remove water pipes, as necessary.
INSTALLATION
• Check that no foreign objects are adhering to the installation surfaces of oil cooler and oil pan (upper).
• Align cutout (B) on oil cooler (2) with protrusion (A) on oil pan
(upper) side, and tighten connector bolt (1).
JPBIA1680ZZ

Oil Cooler
Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing through engine coolant inlet. If necessary,
replace oil cooler.
Relief Valve
Inspect relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove
relief valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new relief valve in place by tapping it.
1. Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to
LU-7, "Inspection" and CO-8, "Inspection".
2. Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil or engine coolant.
4. Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level again. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection" and CO-8,
"Inspection".
LU-12
OIL PUMP
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A
OIL PUMP
LU
JPBIA1681GB
H
1. Oil pump body 2. Oil pump outer rotor 3. Oil pump inner rotor
4. Oil pump cover 5. Regulator valve plug 6. Regulator valve spring
7. Regulator valve I

J
REMOVAL
1. Remove oil pan (lower and upper) and oil strainer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View". K
2. Remove front timing chain case and timing chain (primary). Refer to EM-52, "Exploded View".
3. Remove oil pump assembly.
L
INSTALLATION
• When installing, align crankshaft flat faces with oil pump inner rotor flat faces.
M
DISASSEMBLY N
1. Remove oil pump cover.
2. Remove oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor from oil pump body.
3. After removing regulator valve plug, remove regulator valve spring and regulator valve. O
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
P
LU-13
OIL PUMP
• Install oil pump inner rotor with the groove (C) faced to oil pump
cover side (B).
A : Oil pump body side
JPBIA0084ZZ

Oil Pump Clearance
• Measure the clearance with feeler gauge (C).
- Clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body. [Posi-
tion (B)]
Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump".

- Tip clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer
rotor. [Position (A)]

JPBIA0078ZZ
• Measure the clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge (A).

- Side clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body.
[Position (C)]

- Side clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body.
[Position (B)]

JPBIA0079ZZ
• Calculate the clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body as follows:
OIL PUMP BODY INNER DIAMETER
- Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside microme-
ter. [Position (A)]
OIL PUMP INNER ROTOR OUTER DIAMETER
- Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of oil pump inner
rotor (1) with micrometer. [Position (B)]
JPBIA0080ZZ
OIL PUMP INNER ROTOR TO OIL PUMP BODY CLEARANCE

- (Clearance) = (Oil pump body inner diameter) – (Oil pump inner rotor outer diameter)
LU-14
OIL PUMP
Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump". A

• If measured/calculated values are out of the standard, replace oil pump assembly.
Regulator Valve Clearance
LU
(Clearance) = (Regulator valve hole diameter) – (Regulator valve
outer diameter)
1 : Regulator valve C
2 : Oil pump body
Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Regulator Valve". D

• If the calculated value is out of the standard, replace oil pump
assembly.
CAUTION: E
JPBIA0081ZZ
• Coat regulator valve with engine oil.
• Check that it falls smoothly into valve hole by its own weight.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION F
2. Start the engine, and check that there is no leakage of engine oil.
G
4. Check the engine oil level and adjust the level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
H
LU-15
Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000003793134
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)

Unit: (lmp qt)
With oil filter change 4.6 (4)

Drain and refill
Without oil filter change 4.3 (3-3/4)
Dry engine (Overhaul) 5.3 (4-5/8)
Engine Oil Pressure INFOID:0000000003793135
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
Engine speed Approximate discharge pressure*

Idle speed More than 98 (0.98, 1.0, 14)
2,000 rpm More than 294 (2.94, 3.0, 43)
*: Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)
Oil Pump INFOID:0000000003793136
Unit: mm (in)
Clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body 0.114 - 0.260 (0.0045 - 0.0102)
Tip clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor Below 0.180 (0.0071)
Side clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
Side clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body 0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043)
Oil pump inner rotor to oil pump body clearance 0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036)
Regulator Valve INFOID:0000000003793137
Unit: mm (in)
Regulator valve to oil pump body clearance 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038)
LU-16
ENGINE
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

SECTION CO CO
E
CONTENTS
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 13 F
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 2 RADIATOR ........................................................ 13

Engine Cooling System ........................................... 2 Exploded View .........................................................13 G
Engine Cooling System Schematic ......................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................13
Inspection ................................................................15
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3
COOLING FAN .................................................. 16 H
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .................. 3 Exploded View .........................................................16
Troubleshooting Chart .............................................. 3 Removal and Installation .........................................16
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................17 I
PRECAUTION ............................................... 5 Inspection ................................................................17
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5 WATER PUMP .................................................. 18
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .........................................................18 J
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Removal and Installation .........................................18
SIONER" ................................................................... 5 Inspection ................................................................21
Liquid Gasket ........................................................... 5 K
WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEM-
PREPARATION ............................................ 7 BLY .................................................................... 23
L
Special Service Tool ................................................. 7
Inspection ................................................................24
Commercial Service Tools ....................................... 7
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING .......... 25 M
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 8
Exploded View .........................................................25
ENGINE COOLANT ............................................ 8 Removal and Installation .........................................25
Inspection .................................................................. 8 Inspection ................................................................26 N
Draining ..................................................................... 8
Refilling ..................................................................... 9
Flushing ................................................................... 10 (SDS) ............................................................ 27
O
RADIATOR .........................................................12 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 27
RADIATOR CAP ........................................................ 12 Periodical Maintenance Specification ......................27 P
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection .................................. 12 Radiator ...................................................................27
Thermostat ..............................................................27
RADIATOR ................................................................ 12
RADIATOR : Inspection .......................................... 12
CO-1
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION
Engine Cooling System INFOID:0000000003793159
JPBIA1682GB
Engine Cooling System Schematic INFOID:0000000003793160
JPBIA1683GB
CO-2
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000003793161
CO
Symptom Check items

C
Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat stuck closed —
Dust contamination or pa- D
Poor heat transfer Damaged fins per clogging —
Physical damage
Clogged radiator cooling Excess foreign material E
tube (rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not oper-
ate F
Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rota- Fan assembly —
tion
Damaged fan blades G
Damaged radiator shroud — — —
Improper engine coolant
Cooling sys- — — — H
mixture ratio
tem parts
malfunction Poor engine coolant quality — Engine coolant density —
Loose clamp
Cooling hose I
Cracked hose
Water pump Poor sealing
Loose J
Radiator cap
Poor sealing
Engine coolant leakage
O-ring for damage, deterio-
Insufficient engine coolant ration or improper fitting K
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
L
Reservoir tank Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Exhaust gas leakage into
Overflowing reservoir tank Cylinder head gasket deteri- M
cooling system
oration
CO-3
Symptom Check items
High engine rpm under no
load
Driving in low gear for ex-
Abusive driving
tended time
Driving at extremely high
speed
— Overload on engine
Powertrain system malfunc-
tion
Installed improper size
Except cool- —
wheels and tires
ing system
parts mal- Dragging brakes
function
Improper ignition timing
Blocked bumper —
Installed car brassiere
Blocked radiator grille Mud contamination or paper
Blocked or restricted air clogging —
flow
Blocked radiator —
Blocked condenser
Blocked air flow
Installed large fog lamp
CO-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT CO
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000003793163
H
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING

• After removing mounting nuts and bolts, separate the mating sur- I
face using the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] (A) and
remove old liquid gasket sealing.
CAUTION: J
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• Tap (B) the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] to insert it, and
then slide (C) it by tapping on the side as shown in the figure.
• In areas where seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] is difficult K
to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the parts, to remove it.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason tool such as a screwdriver is L
JPBIA0052ZZ
used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1. Using a scraper (A), remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liq- M
uid gasket application surface and the mating surface.
• Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. N
2. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating sur-
face with white gasoline (lighting and heating use) to remove
adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. O
P
JPBIA0053ZZ
CO-5
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
3. Attach liquid gasket tube to the tube presser (commercial ser-
vice tool).
4. Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with
the specified dimensions.
• If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liq-
uid gasket to the groove.
EMA0622D
• As for the bolt holes (B), normally apply liquid gasket inside
the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Check to read the text of service manual.
A : Groove
: Inside
• Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mat-

ing component.
• Never retighten after mounting bolts and nuts the installation.
JPBIA0010ZZ
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
CO-6
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
CO
Tool number
(SPX North America No.) Description C
Tool name
KV10111100 Removing water pump cover
(J37228) D
Seal cutter
NT046
F

G
Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
S-NT052
Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts J
PBIC0190E
L
Radiator cap tester Checking radiator and radiator cap
N
PBIC1982E
Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
and radiator pipe (upper) filler neck O
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in) P
S-NT564
CO-7
ENGINE COOLANT
ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
• Check if the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the “MIN”
to “MAX” when the engine is cool.
A : MAX
B : MIN
• Adjust the engine coolant level as necessary.
JPBIA0102ZZ
LEAKAGE
• To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system with the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) (A) and radiator cap
tester adapter (commercial service tool) (B).
Testing pressure : Refer to CO-27, "Radiator".

WARNING:
Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns
could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from
radiator.
CAUTION:
Higher test pressure than specified may cause radiator dam- PBIC5121J
age.
NOTE:
In a case that engine coolant decreases, replenish radiator with engine coolant.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
WARNING:
• To avoid being scalded, never change engine coolant when the engine is hot.
• Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove radiator cap. First, turn radiator cap a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn radiator cap all the way.
1. Remove engine under cover.
2. Open radiator drain plug (1) at the bottom of radiator, and then
remove radiator cap.
: Vehicle front
JPBIA2225ZZ
When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer
to EM-110, "Disassembly and Assembly".
3. Remove reservoir tank as necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing.
CO-8
ENGINE COOLANT
4. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-10, "Flushing". A
Refilling INFOID:0000000003793168
1. Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug. CO

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
C
Tightening torque : Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-110, "Dis-
assembly and Assembly". D
2. Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened.
3. Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View". E
4. Disconnect heater hose (1) at the position ( ) in the figure.
: Vehicle front F
H
JPBIA2226ZZ
5. Fill radiator, and reservoir tank if removed, to specified level. I

CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments.
(alternator etc.)
• Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neck J
slowly of less than 2 (1-3/4 lmp qt) a minute to allow air
in system to escape.
• When engine coolant overflows disconnected heater K
hose, connect heater hose, and continue filling the engine
coolant.
• Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its
L
quality mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer
to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". JPBIA0412ZZ
Engine coolant capacity : Refer to CO-27, "Periodical Maintenance Spec- M

(With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) ification".
N
Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity :Refer to CO-27, "Periodical Maintenance Spec-
(At “MAX” level) ification".
O
A : MAX
B : MIN
JPBIA0102ZZ
CO-9
ENGINE COOLANT
6. Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
7. Install radiator cap.
8. Warm up engine until opening thermostat. Standard for warming-up time is approximately 10 minutes at
3,000 rpm.
• Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.
CAUTION:
Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine.
9. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F).
• Cool down using fan to reduce the time.
• If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.)
10. Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.
11. Repeat steps 7 through 10 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no
longer drops.
12. Check cooling system for leakage with engine running.
13. Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”.
• Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.
14. Repeat step 13 three times.
15. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 5, and steps from 7 to 14 until engine
coolant level no longer drops.
Flushing INFOID:0000000003793169
1. Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug.

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
Tightening torque : Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".

If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-110, "Dis-
assembly and Assembly".
2. Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
3. Disconnect heater hose (1) at the position ( ) in the figure.
: Vehicle front
JPBIA2226ZZ
4. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the water to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.)
• When water overflows disconnected heater hose, connect heater hose, and continue filling the
water.
5. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
6. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
7. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
8. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
CO-10
ENGINE COOLANT
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.
A
CO
CO-11
RADIATOR
RADIATOR
RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection INFOID:0000000003793170
• Check valve seat (A) of radiator cap.

- Check if valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of the
plunger (B) cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the
top.
- Check if valve seat has no soil and damage.
- Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator
cap negative-pressure valve.
- Check that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing
conditions of negative-pressure valve.
JPBIA1961ZZ
• Check radiator cap relief pressure.
Standard and limit : Refer to CO-27, "Radiator".

- When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester (commer-
cial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial
service tool) (A), apply engine coolant to the cap seal surface.
JPBIA0109ZZ
• Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three.

CAUTION:
When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator pipe (upper) filler neck to remove any
waxy residue or foreign material.
RADIATOR
RADIATOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000003793171
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows:

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator cooling fan
assembly and horns. Then tape harness and connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (4.9 bar, 5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm
(11.81 in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.
CO-12
RADIATOR
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
RADIATOR
CO
JPBIA2200GB
M
1. Reservoir tank cap 2. Reservoir tank 3. Clamp
4. Reservoir tank hose 5. Radiator cap 6. Radiator cap adapter
N
7. Radiator pipe (upper) 8. Clamp 9. Radiator hose (upper)
10. Radiator hose (upper) 11. O-ring 12. Drain plug
13. Water drain hose 14. Mounting rubber (upper) 15. Radiator upper clip
O
16. Radiator 17. Mounting rubber (lower) 18. Radiator pipe (lower)
19. Radiator hose (lower) 20. Clamp 21. CVT fluid cooler hose
22. CVT fluid cooler hose 23. Grommet 24. Cooling fan assembly
P
25. Radiator hose (lower)
A. To water outlet B. To transaxle assembly C. To water inlet
REMOVAL
CO-13
RADIATOR
WARNING:
Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine
coolant escaping from radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to
release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.
• Engine under cover.
• Air duct (inlet): Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
• Horn: Refer to HRN-6, "Exploded View".
• Hood lock: Refer to DLK-220, "Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
CAUTION:
3. Disconnect reservoir tank hose from radiator pipe (upper).
4. Disconnect CVT fluid cooler hoses from radiator.
• Install blind plug to avoid leakage of CVT fluid.
5. Disconnect Low-pressure flexible hose from lower pressure pipe, and then move it to aside. Refer to HA-
6. Remove radiator cap adapter and radiator hoses (upper) and radiator pipe (upper) assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow engine coolant to contact drive belt.
7. Disconnect radiator hose (lower) from radiator.
8. Remove condenser. Refer to HA-46, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage condenser core.
9. Remove radiator upper clip (2) by pulling the tabs (A) outside to
release the lock (B) and then remove mounting rubbers (upper)
(1).
C : Mounting pin
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
Never pull the tabs outside excessively to prevent it from
damping.
JPBIA1689ZZ
10. Lift up and remove radiator from front of radiator core support.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and installation is the reverse order of removal.
Radiator Upper Clip
Install radiator upper clip on radiator core connection as follows:
1. Install mounting rubbers (upper) (1) on mounting pins (A) of radi-
ator.
: Vehicle front
2. Align radiator upper clip (2) with radiator core connection (B),
then insert radiator upper clip straight into radiator core connec-
tions until a click is heard.
3. After connecting radiator upper clip, use the following method to
check it is fully connected.
• Visually confirm that two radiator upper clips are connected to JPBIA1690ZZ
radiator core connections.
• Move radiator upper clip and the radiator forward and backward to check they are securely connected.
CO-14
RADIATOR
A
• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection". CO
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant and CVT fluid.
CO-15
COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
JPBIA1687GB
1. Fan motor (LH) 2. Fan motor (RH) 3. Fan shroud

4. Mounting rubber 5. Cooling fan (RH) 6. Cooling fan (LH)
A. Apply on fan motor shaft
: Vehicle front
: Apply high strength thread locking sealant or equivalent.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the following parts.
• Engine under cover
• Oil level gauge: Refer to EM-96, "Exploded View".
• Battery and battery tray: Refer to PG-109, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step engine is cold.
3. Remove radiator cap adapter and radiator hoses (upper) and radiator pipe (upper) assembly. Refer to
CO-13, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect harness connector from fan motors (RH and LH), and move harness to aside.
5. Disconnect harness connector from crash zone sensor, and move harness to aside. Refer to SR-18,
"Exploded View".
6. Remove battery tray bracket mounting bolts, and move battery tray bracket to aside.
7. Remove cooling fan assembly.
CO-16
COOLING FAN
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core. A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: CO
Only use genuine parts for cooling fan mounting bolt and observe the specified torque (to prevent
radiator from being damaged).
NOTE: C
Cooling fans are controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-60, "System Diagram".
D
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove cooling fan mounting nuts, and then remove the cooling fans (RH and LH).
E
2. Remove fan motors (RH and LH).
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. F
CAUTION:
RH and LH cooling fans are different. Be careful not to misassemble them.
• Install each fan in the following position.
G
Right side : 11 blades
Left side : 9 blades
H
• Secure the harness tightly to the fan shroud to prevent the fan rotation area from being loose.
• Apply high thread locking sealant on for motor shaft.
Inspection INFOID:0000000003793178 I

J
Cooling Fan
Inspect cooling fan for crack or unusual bend.
• If anything is found, replace cooling fan.
K
CO-17
WATER PUMP
WATER PUMP
JPBIA1721GB

1. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 2. 3. Valve timing control cover (bank 1)
(bank 1)
4. Water drain plug (front) 5. Water pump cover 6. O-ring
7. O-ring 8. Water pump
A. Apply engine coolant
CAUTION:
• When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
• After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leakage using the radi-
ator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service
tool).
REMOVAL
• Engine under cover
• Front road wheel and tire
• Splash guard (RH): Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
3. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove idler pulleys. Refer to EM-25, "Exploded View".
5. Remove reservoir tank of radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
6. Remove reservoir tank of power steering oil pump with piping connected, and move it to aside. Refer to
ST-34, "Exploded View".
7. Support oil pan (lower) bottom with transmission jack.
8. Remove engine mounting insulator (RH), engine mounting bracket (RH) and upper torque rod. Refer to
CO-18
WATER PUMP
9. Remove water drain plug (front) on water pump side of cylinder block to drain engine coolant from engine
inside. A
10. Remove valve timing control cover (bank 1) and water pump cover from front timing chain case.
• Use the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J37228)] to cut liquid gasket for removal.
11. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: CO
a. Remove lower mounting bolt (1).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop mounting bolt inside timing chain C
case.
b. Loosen upper mounting bolt (2) slowly, and then turn chain ten-
sioner (primary) (3) on the mounting bolt so that plunger (4) is D
fully expanded.
NOTE:
Even if plunger is fully expanded, it is not dropped from the body
of timing chain tensioner (primary). E
JPBIA0085ZZ
c. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the tim- F

ing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose.
PBIC4820E I
d. Remove upper mounting bolt, and then remove timing chain ten-
sioner (primary).
CAUTION: J
Be careful not to drop mounting bolt inside timing chain
case.
K
PBIC3576E
12. Remove water pump as follows: M

a. Remove three water pump mounting bolts. Secure a gap
between water pump gear and timing chain, by turning crank-
shaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain looseness on N
water pump sprocket becomes maximum.
PBIC1193E
CO-19
WATER PUMP
b. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.0492 in) length: approxi-
mately 50 mm (1.97 in)] into water pumps upper and lower
mounting bolt holes until they reach timing chain case. Then,
alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out water
pump.
CAUTION:
• Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting
socket in installation area.
• Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact
timing chain.
c. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump. JLC357B
CAUTION:
Never disassemble water pump.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new O-rings to water pump.
• Apply engine oil and engine coolant to O-rings as shown in the
figure.
• Locate O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side.
PBIC1397E
2. Install water pump.

CAUTION:
Never allow cylinder block to nip O-rings when installing
water pump.
• Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are
engaged.
• Insert water pump by tightening mounting bolts alternately and
evenly.
SLC031B
3. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:

a. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the tim-
ing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose.
PBIC4820E
CO-20
WATER PUMP
b. Pull plunger stopper tab (A) up (or turn lever downward) so as to
remove plunger stopper tab from the ratchet of plunger (D). A
NOTE:
Plunger stopper tab and lever (C) are synchronized.
c. Push plunger into the inside of tensioner body. CO
d. Hold plunger in the fully compressed position by engaging
plunger stopper tab with the tip of ratchet.
e. To secure lever, insert stopper pin (E) through hole of lever into C
tensioner body hole (B).
• The lever parts and the tab are synchronized. Therefore, the
plunger will be secured under this condition. JPBIA0118ZZ
NOTE: D
Figure shows the example of 1.2 mm (0.047 in) diameter thin screwdriver being used as the stopper pin.
f. Install timing chain tensioner (primary).
• Remove dust and foreign material completely from backside of timing chain tensioner (primary) and E
from installation area of rear timing chain case.
g. Remove stopper pin (A). F
JPBIA1774ZZ
I
h. Check again that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged.
4. Install valve timing control cover (bank 1) and water pump cover as follows:
J
a. Before installing, remove all traces of old liquid gasket from mating surface of water pump cover using
scraper. Also remove traces of old liquid gasket from the mating surface of front timing chain case.
K
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket with the tube presser
(commercial service tool) to mating surface of water pump cover
(1). L
a : φ2.3 - 3.3 mm (0.091 - 0.130 in)

Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. M
CAUTION:
c. Tighten mounting bolts. N
JPBIA1722ZZ
5. Install water drain plug (front) on water pump side of cylinder block. O
• Apply liquid gasket to the thread of water drain plug (front).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal after this step. P
• After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to
purge air from the high-pressure chamber of chain tensioner. Engine may produce a rattling
noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern.

• Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly.
CO-21
WATER PUMP
• Check for rough operation due to excessive end play.
• If anything is found, replace water pump.
SLC943A

radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant.
CO-22
WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY
A
CO
G
JPBIA1688GB
1. Gasket 2. Water inlet and thermostat assembly 3. Clamp

4. Radiator hose (lower)
H
A. To radiator
I
REMOVAL J
1. Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and from water drain plug at the
front of cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-107, "Exploded View".
CAUTION: K
2. Remove reservoir tank of radiator, and move it aside. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View". L
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2). Refer toEM-52, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect radiator hose (lower) from water inlet and thermostat assembly.
5. Remove water inlet and thermostat assembly (1). M
A : Never loosen these screw

CAUTION: N
Never disassemble water inlet and thermostat assembly.
Replace them as a unit, if necessary.
O
JPBIA0261ZZ P
INSTALLATION
• Be careful not to spill engine coolant over engine room. Use rag to absorb engine coolant.
CO-23

1. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve operation.
Thermostat (Standard) : Refer to CO-27, "Thermostat".

• If the malfunctioning condition, when valve seating at ordinary
room temperature, or measured values are out of the standard,
replace water inlet and thermostat assembly.
SLC949A

CO-24
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
A
CO
J
JPBIA1691GB
1. Heater hose 2. Clamp 3. Water hose K

4. Clamp 5. Water outlet 6. Gasket
7. Gasket 8. Water connector 9. O-ring
10. Water bypass pipe 11. Clamp 12. Water hose L
13. Heater pipe 14. Water hose 15. Heater hose
16. Engine coolant temperature sensor 17. Clamp 18. Radiator hose (upper)
A. To heater core B. To electric throttle control actuator C. To oil cooler M
D. To radiator
N
REMOVAL O
1. Remove air duct (inlet), air cleaner cases (upper and lower) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assem-
bly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
2. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View". P
3. Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and from water drain plug at the
front of cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-110, "Disassembly and Assembly".
CAUTION:
4. Remove battery and battery tray. Refer to PG-109, "Removal and Installation".
CO-25
5. Remove CVT fluid charging pipe and CVT fluid level gauge. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View" (VQ25DE)
or TM-168, "Exploded View" (VQ35DE).
6. Move CVT control cable aside. Refer to TM-319, "Exploded View" (VQ25DE) or TM-157, "Exploded View"
(VQ35DE).
7. Remove vacuum pipe (front) mounting bolt from water outlet. Refer to EM-67, "Exploded View".
8. Remove radiator hose (upper) from water outlet.
9. Remove water hoses and heater hoses.
10. Disconnect harness connectors, and move harness to aside.
11. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor as necessary.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage engine coolant temperature sensor.
12. Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water bypass pipe and water connector.
INSTALLATION
• Securely insert each hose, and install clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge.
• When inserting water bypass pipe and heater pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring.

CO-26
Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000003793188
CO
ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)

Unit: (lmp qt) C
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) 9.1 (8)
Reservoir tank 0.8 (3/4)
D
Radiator INFOID:0000000003793189
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi) E

Standard 122.3 - 151.7 (1.2 - 1.5, 1.2 - 1.5, 17.7 - 22.0)
Cap relief pressure
Limit 108 (1.1, 1.1, 15.6)
Leakage test pressure 157 (1.57, 1.6, 22.8) F
Thermostat INFOID:0000000003793190
G
Standard
Valve opening temperature 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F)
Maximum valve lift 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F) H
Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F)
CO-27
ENGINE
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION EC EC
E
CONTENTS
VQ25DE, VQ35DE IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING ................................16 F
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Description .........16
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 7 IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair
Requirement ............................................................16 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .......... 7
Work Flow ................................................................. 7 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
Diagnostic Work Sheet ............................................ 10 CLEAR .......................................................................18
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE H
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................11 CLEAR : Description ................................................18
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
BASIC INSPECTION ................................................. 11
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement .....................18 I
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Require-
ment ........................................................................ 11 FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 19
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................... 19 J
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 14
System Diagram .....................................................19
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
System Description ..................................................20
CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 14
Component Parts Location ....................................20 K
Component Description ...........................................25
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .... 14
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ....... 27
IDLE SPEED .............................................................. 14 L
System Diagram .....................................................27
IDLE SPEED : Description ...................................... 14
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement ........... 14
Component Parts Location ....................................31
IGNITION TIMING ...................................................... 15 Component Description ...........................................36 M
IGNITION TIMING : Description .............................. 15
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement.... 15
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM ........................ 37
System Diagram .....................................................37
System Description ..................................................37 N
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
LEARNING ................................................................ 15 Component Parts Location ....................................38
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION Component Description ...........................................43
LEARNING : Description ......................................... 15 O
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .............. 44
LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement .............. 15 System Diagram ......................................................44
P
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARN- Component Parts Location ....................................45
ING ............................................................................. 16 Component Description ...........................................50
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
LEARNING : Description ......................................... 16 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION (ASCD) .............................................................. 51
LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement .............. 16 System Diagram ......................................................51
EC-1
Component Parts Location ................................... 53 Component Inspection .......................................... 138
Component Description ......................................... 58
P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1
CAN COMMUNICATION ................................... 59 HEATER ........................................................... 140
System Description ................................................. 59 Description ............................................................ 140
DTC Logic ............................................................. 140
COOLING FAN CONTROL ............................... 60 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 140
System Diagram ..................................................... 60 Component Inspection .......................................... 142
System Description ................................................. 60
Component Parts Location ................................... 62 P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEAT-
Component Description .......................................... 67 ER ..................................................................... 143
Description ............................................................ 143
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE DTC Logic ............................................................. 143
MOUNT .............................................................. 68 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 144
System Diagram ..................................................... 68 Component Inspection .......................................... 145
Component Parts Location ................................... 70 P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
Component Description ......................................... 75 VALVE .............................................................. 146
Description ............................................................ 146
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............... 76 DTC Logic ............................................................. 146
System Diagram ..................................................... 76 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 146
System Description ................................................. 76 Component Inspection .......................................... 147
Component Parts Location ................................... 80
Component Description ......................................... 85 P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .......................... 149
Description ............................................................ 149
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL ................. 86 DTC Logic ............................................................. 149
Component Description .......................................... 92 P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 154
Description ............................................................ 154
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM ............. 93 DTC Logic ............................................................. 154
Component Description ........................................101 P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ........................... 157
Description ............................................................ 157
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ... 102 DTC Logic ............................................................. 157
Diagnosis Description ............................................102
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 158
CONSULT-III Function ..........................................113
Component Inspection .......................................... 158
Diagnosis Tool Function ......................................122
P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR .............................. 160
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 124 Description ............................................................ 160
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION DTC Logic ............................................................. 160
VALUE ............................................................. 124
Description .............................................................124
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 162
Component Function Check ..................................124
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................125 P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 163
Description ............................................................ 163
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 132
DTC Logic ............................................................. 163
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................132
Component Function Check ................................. 165
U1000, U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............. 135 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165
Description .............................................................135
P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 167
DTC Logic ..............................................................135
Description ............................................................ 167
DTC Logic ............................................................. 167
P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ......................... 136 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168
DTC Logic ..............................................................136
P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 170
Description ............................................................ 170
EC-2
DTC Logic ............................................................. 170 Component Inspection ........................................... 221
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 171 A
P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ......... 222
P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 173 Description ............................................................. 222
Description ............................................................ 173 DTC Logic .............................................................. 222
DTC Logic ............................................................. 173 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 223 EC
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 175 Component Inspection ........................................... 224
P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ...................................... 178 P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST C
Description ............................................................ 178 FUNCTION ...................................................... 226
DTC Logic ............................................................. 178 DTC Logic .............................................................. 226
Component Function Check .................................. 179 Component Function Check .................................. 227 D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 228
P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ...................................... 184 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 231 E
Description ............................................................ 184 Description ............................................................. 231
Component Function Check .................................. 186 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 231 F
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 187 Component Inspection ........................................... 232
P0500 VSS ...................................................... 234
P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ...................................... 192 Description ............................................................. 234 G
DTC Logic ............................................................. 192 Component Function Check .................................. 235
Component Function Check .................................. 193 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 235 H
Component Inspection .......................................... 195 P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 236
Description ............................................................. 236
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM DTC Logic .............................................................. 236 I
FUNCTION ....................................................... 198 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 199 J
P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 238
P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Description ............................................................. 238
FUNCTION ....................................................... 202 DTC Logic .............................................................. 238
K
DTC Logic ............................................................. 202 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 238
P0605 ECM ..................................................... 240
P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................. 206 Description ............................................................. 240 L
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 206 M
Component Inspection .......................................... 207 P0607 ECM ..................................................... 242
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 208 Description ............................................................. 242
DTC Logic .............................................................. 242
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 242 N
P0306 MISFIRE ................................................ 209
DTC Logic ............................................................. 209 P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 243
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 210 DTC Logic .............................................................. 243
O
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................... 215
Description ............................................................ 215 P0850 PNP SWITCH ....................................... 245
DTC Logic ............................................................. 215 Description ............................................................. 245 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 215 DTC Logic .............................................................. 245
Component Inspection .......................................... 216 Component Function Check .................................. 246
Diagnosis Procedure (VQ35DE engine) ................ 246
P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ............................ 218 Diagnosis Procedure (VQ25DE engine) ................ 247
Description ............................................................ 218
DTC Logic ............................................................. 218 P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............. 249
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 219 Description ............................................................. 249
EC-3
DTC Logic ..............................................................249 DTC Logic ............................................................. 278
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................249 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 278
P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ......... 250 P1700 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... 280
DTC Logic ..............................................................250 Description ............................................................ 280
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................251 P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY
SPEED SENSOR) ............................................. 281
P1225 TP SENSOR ......................................... 254 Description ............................................................ 281
Description .............................................................254 DTC Logic ............................................................. 281
DTC Logic ..............................................................254 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 281
Special Repair Requirement ..................................255 P1720 VSS ........................................................ 283
Description ............................................................ 283
P1226 TP SENSOR ......................................... 256 DTC Logic ............................................................. 283
Description .............................................................256 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 283
DTC Logic ..............................................................256
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................256 P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1.. 285
Special Repair Requirement ..................................257 Description ............................................................ 285
DTC Logic ............................................................. 285
P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .......... 258 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 285
Description .............................................................258 Component Inspection .......................................... 286
DTC Logic ..............................................................258
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................258 P1801 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2.. 288
Component Inspection ...........................................259 Description ............................................................ 288
DTC Logic ............................................................. 288
P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SEN- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 288
SOR .................................................................. 261 Component Inspection .......................................... 289
Description .............................................................261
DTC Logic ..............................................................261 P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................... 291
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................261 Description ............................................................ 291
Component Inspection ...........................................262 DTC Logic ............................................................. 291
P1553 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .......... 264 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 292
Description .............................................................264
DTC Logic ..............................................................264 P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MO-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................264 TOR RELAY ..................................................... 294
DTC Logic ............................................................. 294
P1554 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .......... 267 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 294
Description .............................................................267
DTC Logic ..............................................................267 P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Component Function Check ..................................267 FUNCTION ........................................................ 296
Component Inspection ...........................................269 DTC Logic ............................................................. 296
P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................. 270 Component Inspection .......................................... 298
Description .............................................................270 Special Repair Requirement ................................. 299
DTC Logic ..............................................................270
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................270 P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .......... 300
DTC Logic ............................................................. 300
P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ....................... 273 Component Inspection .......................................... 300
DTC Logic ..............................................................273
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................274 P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) .......277 ACTUATOR ...................................................... 302
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) ..........277 Description ............................................................ 302
DTC Logic ............................................................. 302
P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ...... 278 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 303
EC-4
P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................... 304 Component Inspection ........................................... 332
Description ............................................................ 304 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 304 FUEL INJECTOR ............................................ 334
Component Inspection .......................................... 306 Component Function Check .................................. 334
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 334 EC
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 306
Component Inspection ........................................... 336
P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................... 307
Description ............................................................ 307 FUEL PUMP .................................................... 337 C
DTC Logic ............................................................. 307 Description ............................................................. 337
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 307 Component Function Check .................................. 337
Component Inspection .......................................... 309 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 337
D
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 310 Component Inspection (Fuel Pump) ...................... 340
Component Inspection (Condenser) ...................... 340
P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................... 311
Description ............................................................ 311 IGNITION SIGNAL .......................................... 341 E
DTC Logic ............................................................. 311 Description ............................................................. 341
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 311 Component Function Check .................................. 341
Component Inspection .......................................... 313 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 341 F
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 313 Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power
Transistor) ............................................................. 344
P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................... 314 Component Inspection (Condenser) ...................... 345
Description ............................................................ 314 G
DTC Logic ............................................................. 314 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR ......................... 346
Component Inspection .......................................... 316 Component Function Check .................................. 346 H
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 317 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 346
P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 ........................ 318 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ....... 347
Description ............................................................. 347 I
Description ............................................................ 318
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 319 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .......... 348 J
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ................................... 321 Description ............................................................. 348
Description ............................................................ 321 Component Function Check .................................. 348
Component Function Check .................................. 321 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 348
K
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 321 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM .......... 351
Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) ....... 322
Description ............................................................. 351
ASCD INDICATOR ........................................... 323 Component Function Check (VQ35DE engine) ..... 351 L
Description ............................................................ 323 Component Function Check (VQ25DE engine) ..... 353
Component Function Check .................................. 323 Diagnosis Procedure (VQ35DE engine) ................ 353
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 323 Diagnosis Procedure (VQ25DE engine) ................ 355
M
COOLING FAN ................................................. 324 ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 357
Description ............................................................ 324
ECM ................................................................. 357 N
Component Function Check .................................. 324
Reference Value .................................................... 357
Wiring Diagram—ENGINE CONTROL SYS-
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) ......... 327
TEM— ................................................................... 371
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) ......... 328 O
Fail safe ................................................................. 386
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 329 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 388
Description ............................................................ 329 DTC Index ............................................................. 389
Component Function Check .................................. 329 How to Set SRT Code ........................................ 392 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 329 Test Value and Test Limit ................................... 394
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 400

MOUNT ............................................................. 331
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ... 400
Description ............................................................ 331
Symptom Table ..................................................... 400
Component Function Check .................................. 331
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 331 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 404
EC-5
Description .............................................................404 ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................. 411
PRECAUTION ............................................ 405 FUEL PRESSURE ............................................ 411
Inspection .............................................................. 411
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 405
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .............................. 413
SIONER" ................................................................405 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .............. 413
Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service ...........405 Inspection .............................................................. 413
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..405
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
and CVT ................................................................405 (SDS) ......................................................... 414
General Precautions ..............................................406
PREPARATION .......................................... 410 (SDS) ................................................................ 414
Idle Speed ............................................................. 414
PREPARATION ............................................... 410 Ignition Timing ....................................................... 414
Special Service Tools ............................................410 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 414
Commercial Service Tools .....................................410 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 414
EC-6
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
BASIC INSPECTION A
EC
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JMBIA1416GB
DETAILED FLOW
EC-7
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer to EC-10, "Diagnostic Work
Sheet".)
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.)
- Erase DTC. (Refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Description".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
(Symptom Table is useful. Refer to EC-400, "Symptom Table".)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTCs detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MI ON).
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-404, "Description" and EC-
386, "Fail safe".
Diagnosis Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-404, "Description" and EC-
386, "Fail safe".
Diagnosis Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to EC-388, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check according to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-11, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
Will CONSULT-III be used?
EC-8
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9. A
7.PERFORM “SPEC” OF “DATA MONITOR” MODE
With CONSULT-III EC
Check that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP
value using CONSULT-III in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to EC-124, "Component Function
Check".
Are they within the SP value? C
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
D
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-125, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is a malfunctioning part detected? E
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE F
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-400, "Symptom Table" based on the confirmed symptom in
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptoms.
G
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE H
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection I
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in GI-
37, "Circuit Inspection".
Is a malfunctioning part detected? J
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-357, "Reference Value". K
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace- L
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Description".
M
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK
N
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then check that the malfunction have been completely repaired.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that
the symptom is not detected. O
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 10.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 6. P
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase unnecessary DTC in ECM and TCM
(Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Description".) If the completion of
SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific DRIVING PATTERN in EC-392,
"How to Set SRT Code".
EC-9
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000003856443
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the WORKSHEET SAMPLE
below in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MI to come on steady or blink, and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
MTBL0017
EC-10
A
BASIC INSPECTION
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003856444
EC
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance. C
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut D
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
- Hoses and ducts for leaks
- Air cleaner clogging E
- Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Head lamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF. F
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
G
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H
J
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no K

load.
6. Check that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
Are any DTCs detected? L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
M
SEF977U N
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. O
>> GO TO 3
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED P
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
EC-11
2. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm 2 or 3 times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
For procedure, refer to EC-14, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair
Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-414, "Idle Speed".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIA8513J
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-15, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-16, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-16, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. Then GO TO 4.
7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
For procedure, refer to EC-14, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the Following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-223, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-219, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> 1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
2. GO TO 4.
9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute with a non-malfunctioning ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of the incident,
although this is rare.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
SEC-8, "ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Description".
>> GO TO 4.
10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
EC-12
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
For procedure, refer to EC-15, "IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement". A
For specification, refer to EC-414, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> GO TO 19. EC
NO >> GO TO 11.
C
1. Stop engine.
ment".
D
>> GO TO 12.
12.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING E
Perform EC-16, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 13. F
Perform EC-16, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". G
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. Then GO TO 4. H
14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
2. Check idle speed. I
For procedure, refer to EC-14, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN K
1. Run engine at idle.

2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
L
For procedure, refer to EC-15, "IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement".
M
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION N
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-53, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 17. O
NO >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P
Check the following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-223, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-219, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> 1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
EC-13
2. GO TO 4.
18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute with a non-malfunctioning ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of the incident,
although this is rare.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
EC-14, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes >> Go to EC-14, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair
Requirement".
No >> INSPECTION END
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000003856445
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000003856446
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NVIS (NATS) SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NVIS (NATS) IGNI-
TION KEY IDS
Refer to SEC-8, "ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Description".
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-15, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 3.
Refer to EC-16, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 4.
Refer to EC-16, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> END
IDLE SPEED
IDLE SPEED : Description INFOID:0000000003856447
This describes how to check the idle speed. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003856448
1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-III
EC-14
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST A
Check idle speed with Service $01 of GST.
>> INSPECTION END EC

IGNITION TIMING
IGNITION TIMING : Description INFOID:0000000003856449 C
This describes how to check the ignition timing. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
D
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003856450
1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING E

1. Attach timing light to loop wires as shown.
A : Timing light F
: Vehicle front
H
JMBIA1388ZZ
2. Check ignition timing. I
>> INSPECTION END

J
JMBIA1135GB L
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000003856453 M
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. N
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Re-

quirement INFOID:0000000003856454 O
1.START
1. Check that accelerator pedal is fully released. P
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> END
EC-15
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000003856455
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000003856456
1.START
1. Check that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
Check that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
>> END
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000003856457
Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume that keeps engine idle speed within
the specific range. It must be performed under the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003856458
1.PRECONDITIONING
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, check that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
• Selector lever: P or N
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, head lamp, rear window defogger)
- For vehicle equipped with daytime light systems, perform one of the following procedures before
starting engine not to illuminate headlamps.
• Apply parking brake
• Set lighting switch to the 1st position
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “CVT” system indi-
cates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
ment".
2. Perform EC-16, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
4. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
5. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
EC-16
Is “CMPLT” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 4. A
NO >> GO TO 5.
EC
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has C
a malfunction.
ment". D
E
5. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
6. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
- Fully release the accelerator pedal. F
7. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal for approx. 20 seconds until the MI stops blinking and
turns ON.
8. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MI turns ON. G
9. Start engine and let it idle.
10. Wait 20 seconds.
J
PBIB0665E
K
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IDLE SPEED AND IGNITION TIMING
Rev up the engine 2 or 3 times and check that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. L
For procedure, refer to EC-14, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement" and EC-15, "IGNITION TIMING :
Special Repair Requirement".
For specifications, refer to EC-414, "Idle Speed" and EC-414, "Ignition Timing". M
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 5. N
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART-I
Check the following
• Check that throttle valve is fully closed. O
• Check PCV valve operation.
• Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART-II
When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are ques-
tionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE”. Refer to EC-124, "Description".
EC-17
If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and
perform Idle Air Volume Learning again:
• Engine stalls.
• Erroneous idle.
>> INSPECTION END

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Description INFOID:0000000003856459
This describes show to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the actual procedure, follow the instruc-
tions in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000003856460
1.START
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Clear mixture ratio self-learning value by touching “CLEAR”.
With GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Check that DTC P0102 is detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST to erase the DTC P0102.
>> END
EC-18
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000003856461
EC
JMBIA1465GB
EC-19
System Description INFOID:0000000003856462
ECM performs various controls such as fuel injection control and ignition timing control.
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000003856463
JMBIA1373ZZ
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Electronic controlled engine mount
valve (bank 1) valve (bank 2) control solenoid valve
4. Fuel injector (bank 2) 5. Cooling fan motor-2 6. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
7. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 8. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 9. Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
and spark plug (bank 2) (bank 2)
10. Engine coolant temperature sensor 11. Cooling fan motor-1 12. ECM
13. Refrigerant pressure sensor 14. Battery current sensor 15. IPDM E/R
16. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 17. Electric throttle control actuator 18. Power valve actuator 2 (VQ35DE
temperature sensor) models)
19. EVAP canister purge volume control 20. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 21. Ignition coil (with power transistor)
solenoid valve (bank 1) and spark plug (bank 1)
22. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) 23. Fuel injector (bank 1) 24. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 and 2
(VQ35DE models)
25. Power valve actuator 1
EC-20
EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
1. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 2. Electric throttle control actuator
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1375ZZ
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Fuel injector (bank 1) 3. Fuel injector (bank 2) I
and spark plug (bank 1)
4. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 5. EVAP canister
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB
N
1. Knock sensor (bank 1) 2. Knock sensor (bank 2) 3. Knock sensor
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-21
1. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ
1. Refrigerant pressure sensor 2. Battery current sensor

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1379ZZ
1. ECM 2. Fuel pump fuse 3. IPDM E/R

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E
EC-22
EC
JMBIA1116ZZ
D
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness con- 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) 3. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness con-
nector nector
4. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ
I
1. HO2S2 (bank 1) 2. HO2S2 (bank 2) 3. HO2S2 (bank 2) harness connector
4. Tie-rod (RH) 5. Power steering pressure sensor 6. HO2S2 (bank 1) harness connector
: Vehicle front J
M
JMBIA1381GB
1. Electronic controlled engine mount 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 3. VIAS control solenoid valve 2 N
4. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
O
EC-23
JMBIA1382GB
1. Electronic controlled engine mount 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 3. EVAP canister purge volume control
control solenoid valve solenoid valve
JMBIA1383ZZ
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Data link connector
valve (bank 1) valve (bank 2)
JMBIA1384ZZ
1. Stop lamp switch 2. ASCD brake switch 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
JMBIA1120ZZ
1. ASCD steering switch 2. CANCEL switch 3. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

4. SET/COAST switch 5. MAIN switch
EC-24
EC
JMBIA1385ZZ
D
1. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 2. Fuel pressure regulator 3. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector
: Vehicle front
E
Component Description INFOID:0000000003856464
F
Component Reference
A/F sensor 1 EC-163, "Description"
A/F sensor 1 heater EC-140, "Description"
G
Accelerator pedal position sensor EC-304, "Description"

ASCD brake switch EC-273, "Description" H
ASCD steering switch EC-270, "Description"
Battery current sensor EC-258, "Description"
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC-222, "Description" I
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-218, "Description"
Cooling fan motor EC-324, "Description"
J
Electric throttle control actuator EC-302, "Description"
Electronic controlled engine mount EC-331, "Description"
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-157, "Description" K
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-231, "Description"
Fuel injector EC-334, "Description"
L
Fuel pump EC-337, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 2 EC-178, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EC-143, "Description" M
Ignition coil with power transistor EC-341, "Description"
Intake air temperature sensor EC-154, "Description"
N
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-146, "Description"
Knock sensor EC-215, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-149, "Description" O
PCV valve EC-347, "Description"
Power steering pressure sensor EC-236, "Description"
Power valves 1 and 2 EC-351, "Description" P
Refrigerant pressure sensor EC-348, "Description"
Stop lamp switch EC-291, "Description"
TCM (VQ35DE engine)
EC-245, "Description"
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (VQ25DE engine)
Throttle control motor EC-300, "Description"
EC-25
Component Reference
Throttle control motor relay EC-294, "Description"
Throttle position sensor EC-160, "Description"
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 EC-285, "Description"
EC-26
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
A
EC
JMBIA1492GB
J
K
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
EC-27
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Fuel injection
TCM (VQ35DE engine) & mixture ratio Fuel injector
Gear position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (VQ25DE engine) control
Battery Battery voltage*3
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) VDC/TCS operation command*2
BCM Air conditioner operation*2
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Vehicle speed*2
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up
• When starting the engine
• During acceleration
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever is changed from N to D
• High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation
EC-28
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
A
EC
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. D
The three way catalyst (manifold) can better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A/F sen-
sor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about A/F sensor 1, refer to
EC-163, "Description". This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mix- E
ture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching F
characteristics of A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated
oxygen sensor 2.
• Open Loop Control
G
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
- Deceleration and acceleration
- High-load, high-speed operation H
- Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
- Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
- High engine coolant temperature I
- During warm-up
- After shifting from N to D
- When starting the engine
J
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoret-
ical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally K
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes dur-
ing operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is L
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
M
includes short-term fuel trim and long-term fuel trim.
“Short-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the the-
oretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in N
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out over time to compensate for continual deviation
of the short-term fuel trim from the central value. Continual deviation will occur due to individual engine differ-
O
ences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
EC-29
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.

• Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
• Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals 2 times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
EC-30
EC
JMBIA1373ZZ
L
4. Fuel injector (bank 2) 5. Cooling fan motor-2 6. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) M
N
O
(VQ35DE models) P
EC-31
JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1375ZZ
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Fuel injector (bank 1) 3. Fuel injector (bank 2)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-32
1. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) A
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
EC
JMBIA1378ZZ E

: Vehicle front F
I
JMBIA1379ZZ
1. ECM 2. Fuel pump fuse 3. IPDM E/R J

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E P
EC-33
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1381GB
1. Electronic controlled engine mount 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 3. VIAS control solenoid valve 2
solenoid valve
EC-34
EC
JMBIA1382GB
D
JMBIA1383ZZ H
I
L
JMBIA1384ZZ
M
P
JMBIA1120ZZ

EC-35
JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC-222, "Description"
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-157, "Description"
Fuel injector EC-334, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 2 EC-178, "Description"
Intake air temperature sensor EC-154, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-149, "Description"
Park/neutral position switch EC-245, "Description"
EC-36
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM
A
EC
JMBIA1493GB
G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) I
Engine speed*2
J
Ignition timing Ignition coil
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position K
control (with power transistor)
Knock sensor Engine knocking
L
TCM (VQ35DE engine)
Gear position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (VQ25DE engine)
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Vehicle speed*1 M
N
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ignition order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. O
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in P
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage
• During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
EC-37
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
JMBIA1373ZZ
(VQ35DE models)
EC-38
EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1375ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-39
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1379ZZ

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E
EC-40
EC
JMBIA1116ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ
I
: Vehicle front J
M
JMBIA1381GB
solenoid valve
O
EC-41
JMBIA1382GB
JMBIA1383ZZ
JMBIA1384ZZ
JMBIA1120ZZ

EC-42
EC
JMBIA1385ZZ
D
harness connector
: Vehicle front
E
F
Component Reference
G

Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-157, "Description" H
Ignition signal EC-341, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-149, "Description" I
Park/neutral position switch EC-245, "Description"
J
EC-43
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
JMBIA1414GB

BCM Air conditioner ON signal*1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
cut control
Battery 2
Battery voltage*
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
EC-44
EC
JMBIA1373ZZ
L
N
O
(VQ35DE models) P
EC-45
JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1375ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-46
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
EC
JMBIA1378ZZ E

: Vehicle front F
I
JMBIA1379ZZ

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E P
EC-47
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1381GB
solenoid valve
EC-48
EC
JMBIA1382GB
D
JMBIA1383ZZ H
I
L
JMBIA1384ZZ
M
P
JMBIA1120ZZ

EC-49
JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
EC-50
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
A
EC
JMBIA1494GB F
G
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator H

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
I
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation
ASCD vehicle speed Electric throttle control
TCM (VQ35DE engine) Gear position control actuator
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (VQ25DE
Powertrain revolution* J
engine)
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Vehicle speed*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line K
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed L
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. M
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE lamp and SET lamp in combination meter. If any malfunc-
tion occurs in the ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. N
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE lamp in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 O
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET lamp in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
P
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
EC-51
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Selector lever position is N, P or R
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
• TCS system is operated
• CVT control system has a malfunction. Refer to EC-280, "Description".
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF while ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch
is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
• Brake pedal is released
• Selector lever position is other than P and N
• Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
EC-52
EC
JMBIA1373ZZ
L
N
O
(VQ35DE models) P
EC-53
JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1375ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-54
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
EC
JMBIA1378ZZ E

: Vehicle front F
I
JMBIA1379ZZ

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E P
EC-55
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1381GB
solenoid valve
EC-56
EC
JMBIA1382GB
D
JMBIA1383ZZ H
I
L
JMBIA1384ZZ
M
P
JMBIA1120ZZ

EC-57
JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
ASCD steering switch EC-270, "Description"
ASCD brake switch EC-273, "Description"
ASCD clutch switch EC-273, "Description"
Stop lamp switch EC-291, "Description"
Electric throttle control actuator EC-302, "Description"
ASCD indicator EC-323, "Description"
EC-58
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-22, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail.
D
EC-59
COOLING FAN CONTROL
COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1324GB
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
Battery Battery voltage*1 IPDM E/R

↓
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan
Cooling fan relay
control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature ↓
Cooling fan motor
BCM Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
EC-60
COOLING FAN CONTROL
Cooling Fan Operation
A
EC
H
JMBIA0179GB
Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. I
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1 2 3 J
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF OFF
Middle (MID) OFF ON OFF K
High (HI) OFF ON ON
EC-61
COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1373ZZ
(VQ35DE models)
EC-62
COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1375ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-63
COOLING FAN CONTROL
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1379ZZ

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E
EC-64
COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
JMBIA1116ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ
I
: Vehicle front J
M
JMBIA1381GB
solenoid valve
O
EC-65
COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1382GB
JMBIA1383ZZ
JMBIA1384ZZ
JMBIA1120ZZ

EC-66
COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
JMBIA1385ZZ
D
harness connector
: Vehicle front
E
F
Component Reference
G
Cooling fan motor EC-324, "Description"

EC-67
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
JMBIA0182ZZ
1. Power valve actuator 1 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 3. VIAS control solenoid valve 2
4. Power valve actuator 2 5. Intake manifold collector
: From next figure
EC-68
EC
L
JMBIA0183ZZ
1. Electronic controlled engine mount 2. Front electronic controlled engine 3. Rear electronic controlled engine M
control solenoid valve mount mount
: To previous figure
N
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose.
System Description INFOID:0000000003856487 O

P
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic controlled en-
Engine speed Engine mount
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) gine mount control solenoid
control
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Vehicle speed* valve
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC-69
The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed. The control system has a
2-step control [Soft/Hard]
Vehicle condition Engine mount control

Engine speed: Below 950 rpm Soft
Engine speed: Above 950 rpm Hard
JMBIA1373ZZ
EC-70
(VQ35DE models) A
EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
E
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front F
I
JMBIA1375ZZ
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Fuel injector (bank 1) 3. Fuel injector (bank 2) J
and spark plug (bank 2) K
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB
O
: Vehicle front
P
EC-71
JMBIA1377ZZ
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1379ZZ

: Vehicle front
EC-72
EC
PBIB1686E
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

4. Tie-rod (RH) 5. Power steering pressure sensor 6. HO2S2 (bank 1) harness connector O
: Vehicle front
EC-73
JMBIA1381GB
solenoid valve
JMBIA1382GB
JMBIA1383ZZ
JMBIA1384ZZ
EC-74
EC
JMBIA1120ZZ
D
JMBIA1385ZZ H
harness connector
I
: Vehicle front

J
Component Reference
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC-222, "Description" K
Electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve EC-331, "Description"
L
EC-75
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
JMBIA1524GB

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
EC-76
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
EC
JMBIA1464GB F
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
G
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is H
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling. I
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
EC-77
JMBIA1393ZZ
1. Intake manifold 2. EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve
A. From EVAP canister
: Vehicle front
EC-78
EC
JMBIA1394ZZ
K
1. EVAP canister A. To previous figure B. To/From B in this figure

: Vehicle front L
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.
M
EC-79
JMBIA1373ZZ
(VQ35DE models)
EC-80
EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1375ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-81
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1379ZZ

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E
EC-82
EC
JMBIA1116ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ
I
: Vehicle front J
M
JMBIA1381GB
solenoid valve
O
EC-83
JMBIA1382GB
JMBIA1383ZZ
JMBIA1384ZZ
JMBIA1120ZZ

EC-84
EC
JMBIA1385ZZ
D
harness connector
: Vehicle front
E
F
Component Reference
G

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-218, "Description" H
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-231, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-149, "Description" I
EC-85
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
JMBIA1491GB

Engine speed and piston position
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine oil temperature sensor Engine oil temperature
timing control solenoid valve
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Vehicle speed*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JMBIA0060GB
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing (IVT) control sole-
noid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake
valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
EC-86
EC
JMBIA1373ZZ
L
N
O
(VQ35DE models) P
EC-87
JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1375ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-88
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
EC
JMBIA1378ZZ E

: Vehicle front F
I
JMBIA1379ZZ

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E P
EC-89
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1381GB
solenoid valve
EC-90
EC
JMBIA1382GB
D
JMBIA1383ZZ H
I
L
JMBIA1384ZZ
M
P
JMBIA1120ZZ

EC-91
JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-146, "Description"
EC-92
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM
A
EC
JMBIA1523GB
G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) I
Engine speed*
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature VIAS control solenoid valve 1 J
VIAS control
VIAS control solenoid valve 2
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position K
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
L
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JMBIA0181GB
EC-93
In the medium speed range, the power valves are closed. Under this condition, the pressure waves of the
exhaust stroke do not disturb the pressure waves of the intake stroke of each opposite bank. Therefore, charg-
ing efficiency is increased together with the effect of the long intake passage.
However, in the high speed range, the power valves are open. Under this condition, the pressure waves of
intake stroke are resonant with those of each opposite bank exhaust stroke. Therefore, charging efficiency is
also increased.
In addition, both valves (valves 1 and 2 for VQ35DE engine and a valve for VQ25DE engine) are opened or
closed in other ranges mentioned above. Thus maximum charging efficiency is obtained for the various driving
conditions.
VACUUM HOSE DRAWING (VQ35DE engine)
JMBIA0172ZZ
1. Power valve actuator 1 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 3. VIAS control solenoid valve 2
4. Power valve actuator 2 5. Intake manifold collector
VACUUM HOSE DRAWING (VQ25DE engine)
EC-94
EC
L
JMBIA1522ZZ
1. Power valve actuator 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 3. Intake manifold collector M
EC-95
JMBIA1373ZZ
(VQ35DE models)
EC-96
EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1375ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1376GB
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
EC-97
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1379ZZ

: Vehicle front
PBIB1686E
EC-98
EC
JMBIA1116ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ
I
: Vehicle front J
M
JMBIA1381GB
solenoid valve
O
EC-99
JMBIA1382GB
JMBIA1383ZZ
JMBIA1384ZZ
JMBIA1120ZZ

EC-100
EC
JMBIA1385ZZ
D
harness connector
: Vehicle front
E
F
Component Reference
G

Mass air flow sensor EC-149, "Description"
Power valve 1 and 2 EC-351, "Description" I
J
EC-101
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000003856502
INTRODUCTION
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of ISO 15031-5
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Freeze Frame data —
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Service $09 of ISO 15031-5
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Freeze 1st trip Freeze

DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
Frame data Frame data
CONSULT-III × × × × × × —
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator MI on the instrument panel illuminates when the same malfunction is detected in two
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-386, "Fail
safe".)
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MI will not illuminate at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MI illuminates. The MI illuminates at the same time the DTC is stored. <2nd trip>
The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during
vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to illuminate or blink the MI, and
store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
MI DTC 1st trip DTC

1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Illuminat- Illuminat- display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
ed ed ing
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst

damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses (Re-
— × — — × — — —
fer to EC-389, "DTC Index".)
Except above — — — × — × × —
DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA

DTC and 1st Trip DTC
EC-102
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC A
will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is saved in the ECM memory. The MI will not
illuminate (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
EC
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are saved in the ECM memory and the MI illuminates. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MI illuminates when the same malfunction occurs in two con-
secutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd C
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or illuminate the MI during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase D
DTC and 1st Trip DTC”.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to “EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
MATION ITEMS”. These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo-
nent. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III. E
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without illuminating the
MI and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent
the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. F
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-7, "Work Flow". Then perform DTC Confirmation
Procedure or Component Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated,
the item requires repair. G
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short-term fuel trim, long-term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base H
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or I
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once J
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data. K
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 L
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes CVT related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data M
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was saved in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal- N
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze O
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip P
DTC”.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
With GST
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
EC-103
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MI in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if
available) is recommended.
DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-III.
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for CVT related items (see EC-389), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to TM-35, "Diagnosis Description".
2. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III.
3. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
WITH GST
NOTE:
1. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results).
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be cleared within 24
hours.
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
EC-104
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours. A
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
EC
NOTE:
If MI is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. C
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
D
SRT item Performance Corresponding
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-III indication) Priority* DTC No.
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430 E
HO2S 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137, P0157
F
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for G
models with CONSULT-III.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is H
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
I
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
J
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) K
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
L
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” M
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
N
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC O
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MI ON)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. P
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
EC-105
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses show NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate
“CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is the number one (1)
for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or the number two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in
preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice
(Case 3) for the following reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• During SRT driving pattern, the 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT and the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from the ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next figure.
PBIB2320E
*1 “How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC” *2 “How to Display SRT Status” *3 “How to Set SRT Code”
EC-106
How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-III A
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. EC
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) C
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR (MI)

Description D
The MI is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MI will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check. E
If the MI does not illuminate, check MI circuit. Refer to EC-346,
"Component Function Check".
2. When the engine is started, the MI should go off. F
If the MI remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
G
SAT652J
On Board Diagnostic System Function

The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions. H
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function

Mode Status I
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MI bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit.
J
Engine stopped
K
Engine running MALFUNCTION When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive L

WARNING driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MI will illuminate
to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will illuminate or blink the MI in
the 1st trip.
M
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
• One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read. N
ON position RESULTS
O
Engine stopped
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check

In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check MI circuit. Refer to EC-
346, "Component Function Check".
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning
EC-107
MI Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Self-diagnostic Results

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MI as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MI does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode
I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MI illumi-
nates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are dis-
played, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified
codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read
a code.
JMBIA1140GB
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes as per the following.
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Flashes 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16
The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-sec-
onds) - OFF (0.6-seconds) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-seconds ON and 0.3-seconds OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-seconds OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-389, "DTC Index")
How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
EC-108
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction. A
• ECM always returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
HOW TO SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
EC
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
- Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for approx. 10 seconds until the C
MI starts blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MI starts blinking during this period. This D
blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE: E
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to completely confirm all DTCs.
H
PBIB0092E
HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to “How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II
I
(Self-diagnostic Results)”.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. J
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart K
Relationship Between MI, 1st Trip DTC, DTC, and Detectable Items
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
L
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MI will come on.
• The MI will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. A drive is counted M
only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while
counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with-
N
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-
tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CON-
SULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. O
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
Summary Chart
P
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MI (turns off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
EC-109
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
Relationship Between MI, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fu-
el Injection System”
JMBIA1466GB
EC-110
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MI will turn off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is de- A
tected in two consecutive trips, MI will times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
illuminate. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip EC
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
C
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with- D
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
Explanation for Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System” E
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as per the following:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. F
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MI will turn off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C> G
Driving pattern C means operating vehicle as per the following:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm H
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to I
70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as per the following: J
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F) K
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. L
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
Relationship Between MI, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns Except For “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deteriora- M
tion>”, “Fuel Injection System”
EC-111
JMBIA1467GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MI will turn off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in two consecutive trips, MI will times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
illuminate. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
EC-112
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without A
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.) EC
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared. C
Explanation for Driving Patterns Except for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”
<Driving Pattern A>
D
AEC574 I
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
J
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means operating vehicle as per the following:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. K
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
CONSULT-III Function INFOID:0000000003856503
L
FUNCTION
M
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work Support N
dications on the CONSULT-III unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-Diagnostic Result
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data Monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. O
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
Active Test
some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT Confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/results can be confirmed.
P
Function Test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle requires periodic maintenance.
ECU Part Number ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
EC-113
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TEST SRT STA- WORK
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
TUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × ×
Engine oil temperature sensor ×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Vehicle speed signal × × ×

Accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
Throttle position sensor × × ×
Intake air temperature sensor × ×
Knock sensor ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor ×

Closed throttle position switch (accel-
×
erator pedal position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal × ×
Stop lamp switch × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × ×
Battery voltage ×
Load signal ×
Primary speed sensor × ×
Battery current sensor × ×
ASCD steering switch × ×
ASCD brake switch × ×
EC-114
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TEST SRT STA- WORK EC
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
TUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Fuel injector × × C
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × ×
Throttle control motor relay × ×
D
Throttle control motor ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
EVAP canister purge volume control

× × × ×
solenoid valve
E
Air conditioner relay ×
Fuel pump relay × × ×
OUTPUT
Cooling fan relay × × × F

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × ×*3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × ×*3

G
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × ×
valve
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 × × × H
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 × × ×
Electronic controlled engine mount × ×
Alternator × × I
Calculated load value × ×
X: Applicable
J
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Description".
*3: Always “CMPLT” is displayed.
K
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item L
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from M
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume N
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing mixture ratio self- O
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- learning value
FICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
P
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
EC-115
Freeze frame data item* Description

DIAG TROUBLE CODE • The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code that is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer
[PXXXX] to EC-389, "DTC Index".)
FUEL SYS-B1 • “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One of in the following mode is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C] or
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] schedule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] • The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°F]
INT MANI PRES [kPa]
• These items are displayed but are not applicable to this model.
COMBUST CONDITION
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
Monitored item Unit Description Remarks
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED rpm signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) • If the signal is interrupted while the
and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is value is indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 V
displayed. • When engine is running, specification
range is indicated in “SPEC”.
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection
• When engine is running, specification
B/FUEL SCHDL msec pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any
learned on board correction.
A/F ALPHA-B1 • When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback cor- • This data also includes the data for
%
A/F ALPHA-B2 rection factor per cycle is indicated. the air-fuel ratio learning control.
• When engine is running, specification
EC-116
A
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F the signal voltage of the engine coolant tempera- ECM enters fail-safe mode. The en-
ture sensor) is displayed. gine coolant temperature determined EC
by the ECM is displayed.
A/F SEN1 (B1) • The A/F signal computed from the input signal of
V
A/F SEN1 (B2) the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed. C
HO2S2 (B1) • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2
V
HO2S2 (B2) is displayed.
D
HO2S2 MNTR(B1) • Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three
RICH/LEAN way catalyst is relatively small.
HO2S2 MNTR(B2) value is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three E
way catalyst is relatively large.
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph speed signal sent from combination meter is dis-
played.
F
BATTERY VOLT V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal volt- G
V ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ACCEL SEN 2 age is displayed.
ECM terminal voltage signal.
TP SEN 1-B1 • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis- H
V ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
TP SEN 2-B1 played.
ECM terminal voltage signal.
• The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F signal voltage of the intake air temperature sen- I
sor) is indicated.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed • After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
START SIGNAL ON/OFF by the ECM according to the signals of engine played regardless of the starter sig- J
speed and battery voltage. nal.
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF ECM according to the accelerator pedal position
sensor signal. K
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condition-
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF er switch as determined by the air conditioner sig-
nal. L
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neu-
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF
tral position (PNP) signal.
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system M
PW/ST SIGNAL ON/OFF (determined by the signal voltage of the power
steering pressure sensor) is indicated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical N
load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF
lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and light- O
ing switch are OFF.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch
IGNITION SW ON/OFF
signal. P
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan
HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp
BRAKE SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1 • Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
msec compensated by ECM according to the input sig-
INJ PULSE-B2 computed value is indicated.
nals.
EC-117
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM • When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING BTDC
according to the input signals. value is indicated.
• “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the
CAL/LD VALUE %
current air flow divided by peak air flow.
• Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM ac-
MASS AIRFLOW g·m/s cording to the signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve control value computed by the
PURG VOL C/V % ECM according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value in-
creases.
INT/V TIM (B1) • Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advance an-
°CA
INT/V TIM (B2) gle.
INT/V SOL-B1 • The control value of the intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL-B2 %
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value
increases.
• The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid
valve 1 (determined by ECM according to the in-
put signals) is indicated.
VIAS S/V-1 ON/OFF
ON: VIAS control solenoid valve 1 is operating.
OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve 1 is not operat-
ing.
• The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid
valve 2 (determined by ECM according to the in-
put signals) is indicated.
VIAS S/V-2 ON/OFF
ON: VIAS control solenoid valve 2 is operating.
OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve 2 is not operat-
ing.
• The air conditioner relay control condition (deter-
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
• The control condition of the electronic controlled
engine mount (determined by ECM according to
ENGINE MOUNT IDLE/TRVL the input signals) is indicated.
IDLE: Engine speed is below 950 rpm
TRVL: Engine speed is above 950 rpm
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF determined by ECM according to the input sig-
nals.
• The control condition of the EVAP canister vent
control valve (determined by ECM according to
VENT CONT/V* ON/OFF the input signals) is indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay control
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF condition determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.
• The control condition of the cooling fan (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
HI/MID/LOW/
COOLING FAN HI: High speed operation
OFF
MID: Middle speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
EC-118
A
HO2S2 HTR (B1) • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen
ON/OFF sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to
HO2S2 HTR (B2) the input signals.
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the EC
I/P PULLY SPD rpm
turbine revolution sensor signal.
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
VEHICLE SPEED km/h or mph
speed signal sent from TCM is displayed. C
• Displays the condition of idle air volume learning
YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been per-
IDL A/V LEARN YET/CMPLT formed yet. D
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already
been performed successfully.
• The engine oil temperature (determined by the
ENG OIL TEMP °C or °F signal voltage of the engine oil temperature sen- E
sor) is displayed.
TRVL AFTER MIL km or mile • Distance traveled while MI is activated.
A/F S1 HTR(B1) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control value
F
computed by ECM according to the input signals.
%
A/F S1 HTR(B2) • The current flow to the heater becomes larger as
the value increases. G
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure
AC PRESS SEN V
sensor is displayed.
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle H
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph speed signal sent from combination meter is dis-
played.
SET VHCL SPD km/h or mph • The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
I
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch
MAIN SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL J
CANCEL SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/AC-
RESUME/ACC SW ON/OFF
CELERATE switch signal.
K
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/COAST
SET SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake L
BRAKE SW1 ON/OFF
switch signal or ASCD clutch switch.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch
BRAKE SW2 ON/OFF
signal.
M
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD
set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT NON/CUT
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively N
low compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
O
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD
LO SPEED CUT NON/CUT set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively
low, and ASCD operation is cut off. P
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CVT O/D ac-
AT OD MONITOR ON/OFF
cording to the input signal from the TCM.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CVT O/D cancel
AT OD CANCEL ON/OFF
request signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp
CRUISE LAMP ON/OFF determined by the ECM according to the input
signals.
EC-119
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp deter-
SET LAMP ON/OFF
mined by the ECM according to the input signals.
• The signal voltage of battery current sensor is
BAT CUR SEN mV
displayed.
• The control condition of the power generation
voltage variable control (determined by ECM ac-
cording to the input signals) is indicated.
ALT DUTY SIG ON/OFF ON: Power generation voltage variable control is
active.
OFF: Power generation voltage variable control
is inactive.
A/F ADJ-B1 • Indicates the correction of factor stored in ECM.
The factor is calculated from the difference be-
— tween the target air-fuel ratio stored in ECM and
A/F ADJ-B2 the air-fuel ratio calculated from A/F sensor 1 sig-
nal.
• Indicates the duty ratio of the power generation
ALT DUTY % command value. The ratio is calculated by ECM
based on the battery current sensor signal.
*: This item is not used on this vehicle.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

• Engine: Return to the original
• Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- non-standard condition If malfunctioning symptom disap-
• Fuel injector
TION • Change the amount of fuel injec- pears, see CHECK ITEM.
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
tion using CONSULT-III.
non-standard condition
IGNITION TIM- If malfunctioning symptom disap-
• Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING pears, see CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, idle the • Harness and connectors
engine. • Compression
POWER BAL- • A/C switch OFF • Fuel injector
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE • Selector lever: P or N • Power transistor
• Cut off each injector signal one at • Spark plug
a time using CONSULT-III. • Ignition coil
• Ignition switch: ON
• Harness and connectors
1 • Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “MID”,
COOLING FAN* Cooling fan moves and stops. • Cooling fan motor
“LOW” and “OFF” using CON-
• IPDM E/R
SULT-III.
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT non-standard condition If malfunctioning symptom disap- • Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- pears, see CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP RE- Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
• Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
LAY ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III
and listen to operating sound.
EC-120
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
A
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes the operating • Harness and connectors
VIAS S/V-1
“OFF” using CONSULT-III and lis- sound. • Solenoid valve
ten to operating sound. EC
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes the operating • Harness and connectors
VIAS S/V-2
“OFF” using CONSULT-III and lis- sound. • Solenoid valve
ten to operating sound.
C
ENGINE • Turn electronic controlled engine Electronic controlled engine mount • Harness and connectors
MOUNTING mount “IDLE” and “TRVL” with makes the operating sound. • Electronic controlled engine mount D
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, run en-
gine at 1,500 rpm. E
PURG VOL • Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to • Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-III. F
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine
VENT CON- stopped)
Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and G
TROL/V*2 “OFF” with the CONSULT-III and
sound. • Solenoid valve
listen to operating sound.
V/T ASSIGN AN- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Harness and connectors H
• Intake valve timing control sole-
GLE • Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: Idle • Harness and connectors I
ALTERNATOR
• Change duty ratio using CON- Battery voltage changes. • IPDM E/R
DUTY
SULT-III. • Alternator
*1: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat. J
*2: This item is not used on this vehicle.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

K
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Description".
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode L
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
M
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page
A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-173
A/F SEN1(B1) P1276 P0130 EC-163
N
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1(B2) P1288/P1289 P0153 EC-173
A/F SEN1(B2) P1286 P0150 EC-163
O
HO2S2(B1) P1146 P0138 EC-184
HO2S2(B1) P1147 P0137 EC-178
HO2S2(B1) P0139 P0139 EC-192 P
HO2S2
HO2S2(B2) P1166 P0158 EC-184
HO2S2(B2) P1167 P0157 EC-178
HO2S2(B2) P0159 P0159 EC-192
EC-121
Diagnosis Tool Function INFOID:0000000003856504
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBD II scan tool) complying with ISO 15031-5
has 8 different functions explained below.
ISO15765-4 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic Service Function

This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA)
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
Service $08 — This diagnostic service is not applicable on this vehicle.
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector (1), which is located under
LH dash panel.
JMBIA1389ZZ
EC-122
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in A
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.) EC
SEF398S
D
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-
dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
E
the tool maker.
G
SEF416S
EC-123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC”
in “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more
malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not illuminate
the MI.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion)
• A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000003856506
1.START
Check that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (CVT
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
• Engine speed: Idle
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM “SPEC” OF “DATA MONITOR” MODE
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform “EC-11, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that monitor items are within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
NO >> Go to EC-125, "Diagnosis Procedure".
EC-124
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003856507
A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
EC
P
JMBIA1468GB
EC-125
PBIB3214E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-124, "Component Function Check".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that the each
indication is within the SP value.
EC-126
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG A
if the indication is out of the SP value even a little.
YES >> GO TO 17. EC
NO-1 >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” C
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that the indication is within the SP
value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? D
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> More than the SP value: GO TO 19.
E
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
value. F
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 6. G
1. Stop the engine. H
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that the each I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine. K
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving L
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
ditions.
M
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-411, "Inspection".)
O
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO-1 >> Fuel pressure is too high: Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then. GO TO 8.
NO-2 >> Fuel pressure is too low: GO TO 7.
P
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part and then GO TO 8.
EC-127
1. Start engine.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 10.
Check the following below.
• Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-341, "Component Function Check".)
• Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-334, "Component Function Check".)
• Intake air leakage
• Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-22, "Inspection".)
YES >> Replace fuel injector and then GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part and then GO TO 11.
1. Start engine.
NO >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-163, "DTC Logic".
• For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-318, "DTC Logic".
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that each
NO >> GO TO 15.
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
EC-128
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
A
>> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” EC
1. Start engine.
C
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-400, "Symptom Table". D
value. E
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 18. F
G
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
- Engine oil level is too high
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive H
- Noise from engine
- Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following. I
- Valve clearance malfunction
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
J
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.

19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element L
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” N
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and
check that each indication is within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? O
NO >> “B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value: GO TO
21. P
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
EC-129

1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that each
YES >> Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-150, "Diagno-
sis Procedure". Then GO TO 29.
NO >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that the indication is within the SP
value.
YES >> GO TO 24.
NO >> More than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Refer to EC-14, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 29.
25.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
• Malfunctioning seal in air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt in air cleaner element
• Improper specification in intake air system
YES >> GO TO 27.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
value.
NO >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 27.
27.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that the indication is within the SP
value.
YES >> GO TO 28.
NO >> Less than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks in PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks in EVAP purge hose, stuck open EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
• Malfunctioning seal in rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks in hoses, such as a vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
EC-130
• Malfunctioning seal in intake air system, etc.
A
>> GO TO 30.
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” EC
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and
check that each indication is within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? C
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-400, "Symptom Table".
30.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” D
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then check that the indication is within
the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? E
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-400, "Symptom Table".
F
EC-131
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION-I

2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-37, "Circuit Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection.
2.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
12
F7
16
107
Ground Existed
108
E16
111
112
3. Also check harness for short to power.
is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• Harness connectors F121, E7
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit, short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E16 93 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• IPDM E/R connector E10
• 10A fuse (No. 44)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
EC-132
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

EC
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal C
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
E16 105 Ground voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop to approximately 0 V.
D
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9. E
7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
2. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. F
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage G
Connector Terminal
49
F12 Ground Battery voltage
53 H
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. I
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". J
>> INSPECTION END

9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV K

L
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal M
F7 24 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 12. N
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
O
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
P
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F7 24 F12 69 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
EC-133
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11.CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse (No. 50) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 15A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Replace 15A fuse.
12.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
E16 105 E10 10 Existed
YES >> GO TO 13.
Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-134
U1000, U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003856510
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com-
F
U1000 munication signal of OBD (emission related diagno-
sis) for 2 seconds or more. • Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com- shorted)
U1001 munication signal other than OBD (emission related G
diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H

2. Check DTC. I
Is DTC detected?
YES >> EC-135, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END J
K
Go to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
EC-135
P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075, P0081, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
P0075, P0081. Refer to EC-146, "DTC Logic".
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake valve timing • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
P0011 control performance • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(bank 1) • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
Intake valve timing phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
P0021 control performance • Timing chain installation
(bank 2) • Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE 100 - 120 km/h (63 - 75 mph)

ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 7.3 msec
Selector lever D position
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-137, "Diagnosis Procedure"
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
EC-136
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) A

Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
EC
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions re-
quired for this test.)
C
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
With GST D
YES >> Go to EC-137, "Diagnosis Procedure" E
NO >> INSPECTION END
F
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine. G
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
Is oil pressure warming lamp illuminated? H
YES >> Go to LU-7, "Inspection".
NO >> GO TO 2.
I
J
PBIA8559J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

K
Refer to EC-138, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3. L
NO >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-221, "Component Inspection". M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). N
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-224, "Component Inspection". O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE). P
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
EC-137
• Accumulation of debris on the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
JMBIA0058ZZ
6.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-53, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-53, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Clean lubrication line.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003856514
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as per the following.
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
2. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Check that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Is the inspection result normal? JMBIA0079ZZ

EC-138
A
EC
EC-139
P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0031 1 heater (bank 1) control
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
circuit low
through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • A/F sensor 1 heater
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
circuit high
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
circuit low
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
circuit high

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
YES >> Go to EC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NG >> INSPECTION END
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
EC-140
YES >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground.
C
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
Bank Connector Terminal
D
P0031, P0032 1 F27 4
Ground Battery voltage
P0051, P0052 2 F64 4
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

• IPDM E/R harness connector F12 G
• 15A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
H
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
J
A/F sensor 1 ECM
DTC Continuity
Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
K
P0031, P0032 1 F27 3 4
F7 Existed
P0051, P0052 2 F64 3 8
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
O
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION: P
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-141

Perform GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Check resistance between A/F sensor terminals as per the following.
Terminal No. Resistance

3 and 4 1.8 - 2.44 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 and 1, 2 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2 (Continuity should not exist)

NO >> GO TO 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
• Before installing new (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-142
P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) C
Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air D
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
E
OPERATION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

F
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
• Engine: After warming up G
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003856520 H
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

I
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors
2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater J
P0037 heater (bank 1) control
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit low
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Heated oxygen sensor 2 K
2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.)
circuit high
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors L
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit low
M
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.)
circuit high
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater N

1.PRECONDITIONING O
TESTING CONDITION: P
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5 V and 16 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
EC-143
P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
With GST

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between HO2S2 harness connector and ground.
HO2S2
DTC Ground Voltage
P0037, P0038 1 F70 2
P0057, P0058 2 F71 2
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• IPDM E/R connector F12
• 15A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
4.CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0037, P0038 1 F70 3 13
F7 Existed
P0057, P0058 2 F71 3 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
EC-144
P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER A

Is the inspection result normal? EC
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 C
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 D
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant. E
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
1.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as per the following.
I
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
J
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
Is the inspection result normal? K

NO >> GO TO 2.
L
2.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
CAUTION: M
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant. N
>> INSPECTION END

O
EC-145
P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Intake valve timing control so- • Harness or connectors
P0075 An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
lenoid valve (bank 1) circuit (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
through intake valve timing control solenoid
Intake valve timing control so- circuit is open or shorted.)
P0081 valve.
lenoid valve (bank 2) circuit • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve harness connector and ground
with CONSULT-III or tester.
IVT control solenoid valve

DTC Ground Voltage
P0075 1 F81 2
P0081 2 F82 2
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC-146
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN A
AND SHORT
EC
3. Check the continuity between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector.
C
IVT control solenoid valve ECM
DTC Continuity
D
P0075 1 F81 1 78
F8 Existed
P0081 2 F82 1 75
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-147, "Component Inspection". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve. H
I
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003857782 J
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. K
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as per the following.
L
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground M
(Continuity should not exist)
YES >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. O
EC-147
2. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Check that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.

EC-148
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
A
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It EC
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The greater air flow, the C
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The D
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC F
Trouble diagnosis
name G
• Harness or connectors
Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0102
circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leaks H
• Mass air flow sensor
Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0103 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit high input sent to ECM. I

1.PRECONDITIONING J
K
Which DTC is detected?
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
L
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC. M
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END N
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-I
2. Check DTC. O
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 4. P
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-II

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
EC-149
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected DTC.
Which DTC is detected?
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Reconnect the parts.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between MAF sensor harness connector and ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness connectors E7, F121
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R
6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
F4 4 F8 56 Existed
EC-150
YES >> GO TO 7. A
7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC
1. Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor ECM C

Continuity
F4 3 F8 58 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
YES >> GO TO 8.
E
8.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-151, "Component Inspection". F
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor. G
Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". H
>> INSPECTION END

I
1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I

J
With CONSULT-III
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. K
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) L

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2
MAS A/F SE-B1 M
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 1.9
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. N
Without CONSULT-III
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. O
3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
EC-151
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
58 56 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2
F8 (MAF sen- (Sensor
sor signal) ground) 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 1.9
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
3. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

MAS A/F SE-B1
Without CONSULT-III
1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC-152
NO >> GO TO 4. A
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III
With CONSULT-III EC
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
4. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. C
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) D

MAS A/F SE-B1 E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. F
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. G
H
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage (V) I
Connector
Terminal Terminal
J
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4* K
YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
EC-153
P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into the mass air flow sen-
sor (1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a
signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the rise in temperature.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature

Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminals 50
(Intake air temperature sensor) and 56 (Sensor ground).
SEF012P
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake air tempera-
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0112 ture sensor circuit
sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
low input
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air tempera- • Intake air temperature sensor
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0113 ture sensor circuit
sent to ECM.
high input

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
EC-154
A
2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-37, "Circuit Inspection". EC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. C
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) harness connector. D
3. Check the voltage between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ground.
E
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F4 2 Ground Approx. 5 V F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
I
MAF sensor ECM
Continuity
F4 1 F8 56 Existed J
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR L
YES >> GO TO 5. M
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N
>> INSPECTION END O

1.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR P

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
3. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals as per the following.
EC-155
Terminal Condition Resistance (kΩ)

1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
EC-156
P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine EC

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- C
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
Engine coolant temperature
Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminals 46
SEF012P
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and 52 (Sensor ground).
I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC J
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
Name K
Engine coolant tem-
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0117 perature sensor cir-
sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
cuit low input
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) L
Engine coolant tem- • Engine coolant temperature sensor
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0118 perature sensor cir-
sent to ECM.
cuit high input
M
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at N
O
>> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. P
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
EC-157

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ECT sensor harness connector and ground.
ECT sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F80 1 Ground Approx. 5 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between ECT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ECT sensor ECM

Continuity
F80 2 F8 52 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
EC-158
4. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals as per the following. A
Terminals Condition Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 EC
1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
C
YES >> INSPECTION END JMBIA0080ZZ
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. D
EC-159
P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to
driving conditions via the throttle control motor.
PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0122 or P0123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-243, "DTC Logic".
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
P0122
2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0123 (TP sensor 2)
2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
EC-160
3. Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.
A
Electric throttle control actuator
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
EC
YES >> GO TO 3. C
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector. E
Electric throttle control actuator ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector. I

Continuity J
F29 3 F8 38 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-162, "Component Inspection". M
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6. N
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
2. Refer to EC-162, "Special Repair Requirement". O
>> INSPECTION END

P
>> INSPECTION END
EC-161

5. Selector lever position is D.
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
37 (TP sensor 1 Fully released More than 0.36 V

signal) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
36
F8 Accelerator pedal
(Sensor ground) Fully released Less than 4.75 V
38 (TP sensor 2
signal) Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Go to EC-162, "Special Repair Requirement".
>> INSPECTION END

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003856552

Refer to EC-16, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement"
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-16, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement"
>> END
EC-162
P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
A
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen- EC
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec-
trode layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor C
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range.
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion layer at
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current D
relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydrocar-
bon density in rich.
JMBIA0112GB E
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the F
sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of about 800°C
(1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge malfunctions, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 sig- J
nal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause K
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
A) sensor 1 signal is constantly in a range other • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 than approx. 2.2 V. (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open
P0130 L
(bank 1) circuit or shorted.)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F • A/F sensor 1
B)
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2 V.
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F M
A) sensor 1 signal is constantly in a range other • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 than approx. 2.2 V. (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open
P0150
(bank 2) circuit or shorted.)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F • A/F sensor 1
B) N
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2 V.

1.PRECONDITIONING O
TESTING CONDITION: P
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
EC-163
2. Let it idle for 2 minutes.
NO-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 7.
3.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
Does the indication fluctuate around 2.2 V?
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-I
1. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F
SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Touch “START”.
3. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.

VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 mph)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec
Selector lever D position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Is “TESTING” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Check A/F sensor 1 function again. GO TO 3.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-II
Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
Which does “TESTING” change to?
COMPLETED>>GO TO 6.
OUT OF CONDITION>>Retry DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. GO TO 4.
6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-III
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Go to EC-165, "Diagnosis Procedure".
7.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK FOR MALFUNCTION B
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-165, "Component Function Check".
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
EC-164
A
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
With GST
EC
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set D position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (31
MPH). C
CAUTION:
NOTE: D
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for 5 times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. E
8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
9. Check 1st trip DTC. F
NO >> INSPECTION END G
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION H

I
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
A/F sensor 1 L
DTC Ground Voltage
P0130 1 F27 4
Ground Battery voltage M
P0150 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 4. N
NO >> GO TO 3.
Check the following. O
• IPDM E/R harness connector F12
• 15A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse P

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EC-165
A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0130 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0150 2 F64
2 57
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Ground Continuity
1 45
P0130 1 F27
2 49
F8 Ground Not existed
1 53
P0150 2 F64
2 57
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END
EC-166
A
JMBIA0112GB E
(1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 J
signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause K
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Harness or connectors
P0131
(bank 1) circuit low voltage • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/ (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0 V. shorted.) L
P0151 • A/F sensor 1
(bank 2) circuit low voltage

M
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. N
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V at idle.
O
>> GO TO 2.
P
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Is the indication constantly approx. 0 V?
EC-167
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
2. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
CAUTION:
3. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

Selector lever Suitable position
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 1, return to step
1.
With GST

YES >> GO TO 2.
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
P0131 1 F27 4
P0151 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 15A fuse (No. 46)
EC-168
4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
1 45
P0131 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed D
1 53
P0151 2 F64
2 57
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground. E
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
1 45
P0131 1 F27
2 49
F8 Ground Not existed G
1 53
P0151 2 F64
2 57
5. Also check harness for short to power. H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I
Perform GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". J
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. K
CAUTION: L
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread M
>> INSPECTION END N
EC-169
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen-
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current
JMBIA0112GB
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Harness or connectors
P0132
(bank 1) circuit high voltage • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5 V. shorted.)
P0152 • A/F sensor 1
(bank 2) circuit high voltage

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Is the indication constantly approx. 5 V?
EC-170
NO >> GO TO 3. A
With CONSULT-III EC
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
2. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. C
3. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm D

E
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. F
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 1, return to step
1.
With GST G
H
I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
YES >> GO TO 2. K
L
M
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
N
P0132 1 F27 4
P0152 2 F64 4
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.

• 15A fuse (No. 46)
EC-171
A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0132 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0152 2 F64
2 57
A/F sensor 1 ECM

1 45
P0132 1 F27
2 49
1 53
P0152 2 F64
2 57
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END
EC-172
A
JMBIA0112GB E
(1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed J
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the com-
pensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. K
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Harness or connectors L
P0133 (bank 1) circuit slow re- (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
sponse shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1
• The response of the A/F signal computed by • A/F sensor 1 heater M
ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than • Fuel pressure
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 the specified time. • Fuel injector
P0153 (bank 2) circuit slow re- • Intake air leaks
sponse • Exhaust gas leaks N
• PCV
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE O
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at P
TESTING CONDITION:
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
EC-173

With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B2) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153)
of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Is COMPLETED displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Is OK displayed?
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-III
1. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
- Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.
- Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-124, "Component Function Check".
2. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-III
screen.
3. Check that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-124, "Component Function Check".
4. Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Is OK displayed?
5.CHECK MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
With GST
2. Select Service $01 with GST.
3. Calculate the total value of “Short-term fuel trim” and “Long-term fuel trim” indications.
Is the total percentage within ±15%?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
• PCV valve
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

7.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-IV
EC-174
2. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
3. Let engine idle for 1 minute. A
4. Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.
5. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
EC
C
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION D

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1 F
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation".
G
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
H
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
I
K
PBIB1216E
Is exhaust gas leak detected?

L
YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK M
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Is intake air leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. N
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
O
1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-18, "MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
3. Check 1st trip DTC. P
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-198, "DTC Logic"
or EC-202, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 6.
EC-175
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
P0133 1 F27 4
P0153 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• 15A fuse (No. 46)

A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0133 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0153 2 F64
2 57
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector or ECM harness connector ground.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

1 45
P0133 1 F27
2 49
1 53
P0153 2 F64
2 57
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 13.
EC-176
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor. A
11.CHECK PCV VALVE
EC
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
C
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 13.
E
CAUTION: F
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant. G
>> INSPECTION END

H
EC-177
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner con-
ditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during various driving conditions such as fuel-cut.
SEF259VA
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
P0137 (bank 1) circuit low volt- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
age The maximum voltage from the sensor does not • Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 reach the specified voltage. • Fuel pressure
P0157 (bank 2) circuit low volt- • Fuel injector
age • Intake air leaks

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
EC-178
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. A
EC
6. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” (for DTC P0137) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” (for DTC P0157) of “HO2S2” in C
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE: D
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
E
CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED>>GO TO 4.
F
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. G
>> GO TO 3.
5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK H

NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this I
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
YES >> INSPECTION END J
K
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I

Without CONSULT-III L
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. M
N
ECM
DTC Connec- + – Condition Voltage
tor Terminal Terminal O
33
P0137 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no The voltage should be above 0.68 V P
F8 (Sensor
34 load at least 10 times at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0157 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 2.
EC-179
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
ECM
tor Terminal Terminal
33
P0137 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Keeping engine at idle for 10 min- The voltage should be above 0.68 V
F8 (Sensor
34 utes at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0157 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III
ECM
33
P0137 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in The voltage should be above 0.68 V
F8 (Sensor
34 D position at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0157 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]

YES >> GO TO 2.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0174. Refer to EC-198, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
EC-180
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
4. Check the continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector and ECM harness
connector. A
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal EC
P0137 1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed
P0157 2 F71 1
C
YES >> GO TO 4. D
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
E
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity F
P0137 1 F70 4 33
F8 Existed
P0157 2 F71 4 34 G
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
H
HO2S2 ECM
P0137 1 F70 4 33 I
P0157 2 F71 4 34
J
YES >> GO TO 5.
K
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 M

CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 N
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant. O
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
>> INSPECTION END
EC-181
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item
with CONSULT-III.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
NO >> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
[HO2S2 (bank 1) The voltage should be above 0.68 V at
signal] 35
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least once during this procedure.
F8 (Sensor
34 least 10 times The voltage should be below 0.18 V at
ground)
[HO2S2 (bank 2) least once during this procedure.
signal]
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
EC-182
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
ECM A
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC
33
signal] 35
least once during this procedure.
F8 (Sensor Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes C
34 The voltage should be below 0.18 V at
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 5.
E
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III
F
ECM
Connector G
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35 H
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D po- least once during this procedure.
F8 (Sensor
34 sition The voltage should be below 0.18 V at
ground)
signal] I
NO >> GO TO 6. J
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. K
CAUTION:
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread L
>> INSPECTION END M
EC-183
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
P0138, P0158 HO2S2

ditions.
SEF327R
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching
time.
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during various driving condi-
tions such as fuel cut.
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during var-
ious driving conditions such as fuel cut.
PBIB2376E
An excessively high voltage from the sen-
A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sor is sent to ECM.
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0138 (bank 1) circuit high volt- • Harness or connectors
age (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is
B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
not reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
EC-184
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
A
An excessively high voltage from the sen-
A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sor is sent to ECM.
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
• Harness or connectors EC
P0158 (bank 2) circuit high volt-
age (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is
B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
not reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
C

1.PRECONDITIONING D
E
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A F
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. G
YES >> Go to EC-187, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 5.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B I
NOTE:
1. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. J
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. K
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood. L
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” (for DTC P0138) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” (for DTC P0158) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III. M
NOTE:
10. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
N
CON NOT BE DIAGNOSED>>GO TO 4. O
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AGAIN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). P
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again.
>> GO TO 3.
5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK FOR MALFUNCTION B
NOTE:
EC-185
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Use component function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this

Without CONSULT-III
ECM
33
P0138 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no The voltage should be below 0.18 V
F8 (Sensor
34 load at least 10 times at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0158 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 2.
ECM
33
P0138 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Keeping engine speed at idle for 10 The voltage should be below 0.18 V
F8 (Sensor
34 minutes at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0158 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 3.
EC-186
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
ECM A
EC
33
P0138 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D The voltage should be below 0.18 V
F8 (Sensor C
34 position at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0158 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
E
1.INSPECTION START F
Confirm the detected malfunction (A or B). Refer to EC-184, "DTC Logic".
Which malfunction is detected?
A >> GO TO 2. G
B >> GO TO 9.
H
I
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT J
3. Check the continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector and ECM harness K
connector.
HO2S2 ECM L
DTC Continuity
P0138 1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed M
P0158 2 F71 1
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT O
HO2S2 ECM
P
DTC Continuity
P0138 1 F70 4 33
F8 Existed
P0158 2 F71 4 34
EC-187
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
HO2S2 ECM
P0138 1 F70 4 33
P0158 2 F71 4 34
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.

YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

YES >> GO TO 10.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-202, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 11.
EC-188
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. A
EC
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0138 1 F70 1 C
F8 35 Existed
P0158 2 F71 1
D
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. E
12.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
G
P0138 1 F70 4 33
F8 Existed
P0158 2 F71 4 34
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground. H
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Ground Continuity I
P0138 1 F70 4 33
P0158 2 F71 4 34 J
YES >> GO TO 13. K
13.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 L
YES >> GO TO 15. M
NO >> GO TO 14.
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. N
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. O
P
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END
EC-189
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
with CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 4.
EC-190
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
ECM A
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC
33
signal] 35
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 5.
E
F
ECM
Connector G
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35 H
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal] I
NO >> GO TO 6. J
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END M
EC-191
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
P0139, P0159 HO2S2

ditions.
SEF327R
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during various driving conditions
such as fuel cut.
SEF302U
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
P0139 (bank 1) circuit slow re- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sponse It takes more time for the sensor to respond be- • Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 tween rich and lean than the specified time. • Fuel pressure
P0159 (bank 2) circuit slow re- • Fuel injector
sponse • Intake air leaks

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
EC-192
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. A
EC
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
8. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III. C
NOTE:
9. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. D
NG >> Go to EC-194, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED>>GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). F
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again.
>> GO TO 3. G
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-193, "Component Function Check". H
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
I
J
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I K

Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. L
5. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions. M
ECM
DTC Connec- + – Condition Voltage N
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1) O
signal] 35 A change of voltage should be more
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no
F8 (Sensor than 0.12 V for 1 second during this
34 load at least 10 times
ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2) P
signal]
NO >> GO TO 2.
EC-193
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
.
ECM
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
F8 (Sensor Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes than 0.12 V for 1 second during this
34 ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 3.
ECM
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in
F8 (Sensor than 0.12 V for 1 second during this
34 D position
ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-198, "DTC Logic"
NO >> GO TO 3.
4. Check the continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
EC-194
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
HO2S2 ECM A
DTC Continuity
P0139 1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed EC
P0159 2 F71 1
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D
E
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0139 1 F70 4 33 F
F8 Existed
P0159 2 F71 4 34
G
HO2S2 ECM
Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
P0139 1 F70 4 33
P0159 2 F71 4 34
I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
Refer to EC-195, "Component Inspection". K
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6. L
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. M
CAUTION:
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread N
>> INSPECTION END O

Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". P
>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
EC-195
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
with CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 4.
EC-196
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
ECM A
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC
33
signal] 35
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 5.
E
F
ECM
Connector G
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35 H
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal] I
NO >> GO TO 6. J
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END M
EC-197
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too lean), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and illuminates the MI (2 trip detection
logic).

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel injection system too • Intake air leaks
P0171
lean (bank 1) • A/F sensor 1
• Fuel injector
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
• Exhaust gas leaks
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
Fuel injection system too • Incorrect fuel pressure
P0174 large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
lean (bank 2) • Lack of fuel
• Incorrect PCV hose connection

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Start engine.
Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.RESTART ENGINE
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
• When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system does not start the
engine. Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
Does engine start?
NO >> Check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
1. Keep engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
NO >> GO TO 5.
EC-198
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-III A

2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes.
Refer to the table below.
EC
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
Similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data mean that the following conditions should be satisfied at
the same time.
C
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), D
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). E
F
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003856593 G

1. Start engine and run it at idle. H
K
PBIB1216E

YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. L
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
M
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
N
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT O
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. P
EC-199
A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0171 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0174 2 F64
2 57
A/F sensor 1 ECM

1 45
P0171 1 F27
2 49
1 53
P0174 2 F64
2 57
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-411, "Inspection".
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-411, "Inspection".
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.50 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
With CONSULT-III
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
For specification, refer to EC-414, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-150, "Diagnosis Procedure".
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
EC-200
3. Check that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
With GST A
1. Let engine idle.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-334, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
PBIB3332E
8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR E

2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors. F
4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-44, "Removal and Installation".
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1. G
For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2.
6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
7. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
8. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. H
For DTC P0171, check that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, check that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 2.
I
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
YES >> GO TO 9. J
NO >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K
>> INSPECTION END L
EC-201
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too rich), the ECM
judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and illuminates the MI (2 trip detection logic).

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel injection system too • A/F sensor 1
P0172
rich (bank 1) • Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leaks
Fuel injection system too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
P0175
rich (bank 2) • Mass air flow sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Start engine.
Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.RESTART ENGINE
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
• When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system does not start the
engine. Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
Does engine start?
NO >> Remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
1. Keep engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
NO >> GO TO 5.
EC-202
2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes.
Refer to the table below. A
the same time.
EC
C
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
D
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
Is 1st trip DTC detected? E
F

G
J
PBIB1216E

K
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK L
YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. M
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
N
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector. O
A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity P
1 45
P0172 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0175 2 F64
2 57
EC-203
A/F sensor 1 ECM

1 45
P0172 1 F27
2 49
1 53
P0175 2 F64
2 57
YES >> GO TO 4.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.50 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST.
Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 6.
ground. Refer to EC-150, "Diagnosis Procedure".
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
With GST
1. Let engine idle.
YES >> GO TO 7.
EC-334, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PBIB3332E
7.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-44, "Removal and Installation".
EC-204
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. A
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
EC
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Check the fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
C
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D
>> INSPECTION END E
EC-205

PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
P0222
1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0223 (TP sensor 1)
1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
EC-206
A
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
EC
YES >> GO TO 3. C
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator and ECM harness connector.
E
Continuity
F
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator and ECM harness connector.
I
Continuity
F29 2 F8 37 Existed J
K
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR L
YES >> GO TO 7. M
NO >> GO TO 6.
N
2. Refer to EC-208, "Special Repair Requirement".
O
>> INSPECTION END
Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". P
>> INSPECTION END


EC-207
5. Selector lever position is D.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal

36
38 (TP sensor 2
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END
EC-208
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC EC

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
C
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. D
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MI will blink. E
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will turn off.
F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MI will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MI will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) G
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MI will only light
when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor
signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. H
A misfire malfunction can be detected in any one cylinder or in multiple cylinders.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfires detected Multiple cylinder misfire. • Improper spark plug
• Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires.
• Incorrect fuel pressure J
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. • The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
• Fuel injector
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires.
• Intake air leak
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. • The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted K
P0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire detected No. 5 cylinder misfires. • Lack of fuel
• Signal plate
• A/F sensor 1
P0306 No. 6 cylinder misfire detected No. 6 cylinder misfires.
• Incorrect PCV hose connection L

1.PRECONDITIONING M
N
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I O
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. P
NO >> GO TO 3.
EC-209
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
the same time.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when
driving.
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature (T) T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
Driving time varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time

Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
YES >> Discover air leak location and repair.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
YES-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 4.
3.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 4.
EC-210
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
2. Listen to each fuel injector operation.
A
Clicking sound should be heard.
YES >> GO TO 5. EC
EC-334, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
PBIB3332E
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I D
CAUTION:
Perform the following procedure in a place with no combustible objects and good ventilation.
E
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro- F
cedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure. G
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. H
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 -
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal I
portion as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion. J
Spark should be generated.

K
CAUTION:
• Never place to the spark plug and the ignition coil within
50 cm (19.7 in) each other. Be careful not to get an electri- JMBIA0066GB
cal shock while checking, because the electrical dis- L

charge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is made.
NOTE: M
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), a spark might be generated even if the coil is a malfunc-
tioning.
N
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II O
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a non-malfunctioning spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and P
the grounded metal portion.

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-341, "Diagnosis Procedure".
EC-211
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-136, "Spark Plug".
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 8.
SEF156I
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
2. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.

NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-136, "Spark
Plug".
9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-22, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
At idle: Approximately 350 kPa (3.50 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
Check idle speed and ignition timing.
For procedure, refer to EC-11, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-414, "Idle Speed" and EC-414, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Follow the EC-11, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
EC-212
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. A
A/F sensor 1 ECM EC

Continuity
1 45
1 F27 C
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
2 F64
2 57 D
A/F sensor 1 ECM E

Ground Continuity
1 45
1 F27 F
2 49
1 53
2 F64
2 57 G
H
YES >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER I
YES >> GO TO 15. J
NO >> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1.
K
With CONSULT-III
2. For specification, refer to EC-414, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
L
With GST
1. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2. For specification, refer to EC-414, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
Is the measurement value within the specification? M
YES >> GO TO 16.
ground. Refer to EC-150, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
16.CHECK SYMPTOM TABLE
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-400, "Symptom Table". O
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. P
17.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Descrip-
tion".
>> GO TO 18.
EC-213
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE

>> INSPECTION END
EC-214
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
A
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A EC
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003856620 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

D
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detected condition Possible cause
name
Knock sensor (bank 1) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is E
P0327
circuit low input sent to ECM.
Knock sensor (bank 1) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0328 • Harness or connectors
circuit high input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) F
Knock sensor (bank 2) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
P0332
circuit low input sent to ECM.
Knock sensor (bank 2) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0333 G
circuit high input sent to ECM.

H
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
TESTING CONDITION:
J
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. K
YES >> Go to EC-215, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
YES >> GO TO 2. O
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. P
2. Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EC-215
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Knock sensor ECM

DTC Continuity
P0327, P0328 1 F201 2
F8 67 Existed
P0332, P0333 2 F202 2
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• Harness connectors F204, F91 (VQ25DE engine)
• Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ECM
4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Knock sensor ECM

DTC Continuity
P0327, P0328 1 F201 1 61
F8 Existed
P0332, P0333 2 F202 1 62
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ECM
6.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning knock sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
EC-216
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
3. Check resistance between knock sensor terminal as per the following.
NOTE: A
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Terminals Resistance EC
1 and 2 Approx. 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Never use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. C
NO >> Replace malfunctioning knock sensor. D
EC-217
P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
JMBIA0062ZZ
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
JMBIA0001GB
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
[CKP sensor (POS) circuit is open or
is not detected by the ECM during the first
shorted.]
few seconds of engine cranking.
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
Crankshaft position sen- (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
P0335 position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
sor (POS) circuit shorted.)
while the engine is running.
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
is not in the normal pattern during engine run-
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
ning.
• Signal plate

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with igni-
tion switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.
If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
EC-218
NO >> INSPECTION END A
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION EC

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
D
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. E
3. Check the voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ground.
CKP sensor (POS) F

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
F20 1 Ground Approx. 5
G
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3.
H
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I
3. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
CKP sensor (POS) ECM J

Continuity
F20 1 F8 76 Existed
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit. L
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
M
ECM Sensor
Connector Terminal Name Connector Terminal
N
72 Refrigerant pressure sensor E300 1
F8
76 CKP sensor (POS) F20 1
E16 87 APP sensor E110 5 O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-348, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning components.
EC-219
6.CHECK APP SENSOR

YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
CKP sensor (POS) ECM

Continuity
F20 2 F8 60 Existed
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
CKP sensor (POS) ECM

Continuity
F20 3 F8 65 Existed
Continuity should exist.

YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
11.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace the signal plate.
EC-220
>> INSPECTION END
A
1.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I EC

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. C
YES >> GO TO 2.
D
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS)
F
JMBIA0063ZZ
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II

Check resistance crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminals as per the following. G
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance

1 (+) - 2 (-)
H
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2 (+) - 3 (-)
I
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS) J
EC-221
P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
JMBIA0064ZZ
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
JMBIA0001GB
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Camshaft position sen- • Harness or connectors
P0340 sor (PHASE) (bank 1) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
circuit • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Camshaft (INT)
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for
• Starter motor [VQ25DE engine (Refer to
the first few seconds during engine cranking.
STR-5)]
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
• Starter motor [VQ35DE engine (Refer to
Camshaft position sen- during engine running.
STR-6)]
P0345 sor (PHASE) (bank 2) • The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
• Starting system circuit [VQ25DE engine (Re-
circuit pattern during engine running.
fer to STR-5.)]
• Starting system circuit [VQ35DE engine (Re-
fer to STR-6.)]
• Dead (Weak) battery

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with igni-
tion switch ON.
EC-222
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I A

If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
EC
C
NO >> GO TO 3.
1. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. D
YES >> Go to EC-223, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
F
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to START position. G
Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check starting system. (Refer to STR-2, "Work Flow".) H
2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-37, "Circuit Inspection". I
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. J
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. K
3. Check the voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ground
L
CMP sensor (PHASE)
DTC Ground Voltage (V)
P0340 1 F26 1 M
Ground Approx. 5
P0345 2 F69 1
N
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT O
3. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector. P
CMP sensor (PHASE) ECM

DTC Continuity
P0340 1 F26 2 64
F8 Existed
P0345 2 F69 2 68
EC-223
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
CMP sensor (PHASE) ECM

DTC Continuity
P0340 1 F26 3 70
F8 Existed
P0345 2 F69 3 69
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
7.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
JMBIA0058ZZ

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I

2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
4. Remove the sensor.
EC-224
5. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor
(PHASE). EC
JMBIA0065ZZ
2.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II D
Check resistance camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminals as per the following.
E
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] F
2 (+) - 3 (-)
G
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
H
EC-225
P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of A/F sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor
2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (mani-
fold) malfunction is diagnosed.
PBIB2055E
Catalyst system efficien- • Three way catalyst (manifold)
P0420 cy below threshold • Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not oper-
(bank 1) • Intake air leaks
ate properly.
• Fuel injector
Catalyst system efficien- • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
• Fuel injector leaks
P0430 cy below threshold enough oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
(bank 2) • Improper ignition timing

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 7.
2.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the acceler-
ator pedal completely.
10. Check the indication of “CATALYST”.
EC-226
CMPLT >> GO TO 6.
INCMP >> GO TO 4. A
1. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
2. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to EC
“CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes).
Does the indication change to “CMPLT”?
C
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN D
1. Stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F).
2. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again.
E
>> GO TO 3.
F
Check 1st trip DTC.
YES >> Go to EC-228, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-227, "Component Function Check". H
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. I
NO >> Go to EC-228, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK K
Without CONSULT-III
L
5. Open engine hood. M
ECM N
DTC Connec- + – Condition Voltage (V)
O
33
P0420 [HO2S2 (bank 1) The voltage fluctuation cycle takes
signal] 35
Keeping engine speed at 2,500 rpm more than 5 seconds.
F8 (Sensor
34 constant under no load • 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - P
ground)
P0430 [HO2S2 (bank 2) 1.0
signal]
EC-227
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dents.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E

NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check idle speed and ignition timing.
For procedure, refer to EC-11, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Follow the EC-11, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTORS
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
1
3
29
F7 Ground Battery voltage
30
31
32
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Perform EC-334, "Diagnosis Procedure".
EC-228
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I A

CAUTION:
EC
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro-
cedure. C
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure.
D
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. E
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
portion as shown in the figure. F
tion.
G
CAUTION:
• Never place to the spark plug and the ignition coil within H
cal shock while checking, because the electrical dis-

charge voltage becomes 20 kV or more. I
NOTE:
J
tioning.
YES >> GO TO 10.
K
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a non-malfunctioning spark plug.
the grounded metal portion. M

YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-341, "Diagnosis Procedure".
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG O
EC-229
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-136, "Spark Plug".
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 9.
SEF156I
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
the grounded portion.

NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-136, "Spark
Plug".
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-44, "Removal and Installation".
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
Check the fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
Does fuel drip from fuel injector?
YES >> Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
NO >> GO TO 11.
Is the inspection result norma?
YES >> Replace three way catalyst assembly.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
EC-230
P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to EC

control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. C
PBIB3489E E
• Harness or connectors G
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
P0444 control solenoid valve circuit shorted.)
to ECM through the valve
open • EVAP canister purge volume control so- H
lenoid valve

1.CONDITIONING I
J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
K
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. L
YES >> Go to EC-231, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
N
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ground. P
EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
EC-231
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ECM harness connector.
EVAP canister purge volume con-

ECM
trol solenoid valve Continuity
F30 2 F7 25 Existed
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 5.
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed var-
ies according to the valve opening.
Does engine speed vary according to the valve opening?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-232
5. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. A
6. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check air passage continuity of
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the
EC
following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between (A) and (B) C
100% Existed
0% Not existed
D
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-III E
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
4. Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume F
control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity G

Condition
between (A) and (B)
12 V direct current supply between
Existed H
terminals 1 and 2
No supply Not existed
I
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIB2059E
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve
J
EC-233
P0500 VSS
P0500 VSS
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi-
cation line.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-135, "DTC Logic".
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-242, "DTC Logic".
(The CAN communication line is open or short-
ed)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from • Harness or connectors
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed signal is sent to ECM even (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
when vehicle is being driven. shorted)
• Wheel sensor
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
YES >> GO TO 4.
1. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
CAUTION:
EC-234
P0500 VSS
A
EC
Selector lever Except P or N position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF C
YES >> Go to EC-235, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK E
Use component function check to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this
F
G
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK H

With GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine. I
3. Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position. J
NO >> Go to EC-235, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
1.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” L
Refer to BRC-80, "CONSULT-III Function".

M
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION N
Refer to MWI-33, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
>> INSPECTION END O
EC-235
P0550 PSP SENSOR
P0550 PSP SENSOR
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a
power steering load.
This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the
voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve
opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-243, "DTC Logic".
Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the
P0550 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
• Power steering pressure sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between PSP sensor harness connector and ground.
PSP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
EC-236
P0550 PSP SENSOR
3.CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

3. Check the continuity between PSP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EC
PSP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
F62 1 F8 48 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors.
E
4.CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between PSP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
F
PSP sensor ECM
Continuity
F62 2 F8 41 Existed
G

Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK PSP SENSOR I
J
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace PSP sensor.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K
>> INSPECTION END L
M
1.CHECK POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
2. Start engine and let it idle. N
3. Check the voltage between ECM terminals under the following conditions.
ECM O
Connector
Terminal Terminal
41 Steering wheel: Being turned. 0.5 - 4.5 V P
48
F8 (Power steering pressure
(Sensor ground) Steering wheel: Not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8 V
sensor signal)
NO >> Replace power steering pressure sensor.
EC-237
P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
PBIA9222J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
ECM power supply cir- ECM back up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back up) circuit is
P0603
cuit properly. open or shorted.]
• ECM

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON.
1.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
EC-238
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

• 15A fuse (No.50)
EC
• Harness for open or short between ECM and battery

C
YES >> GO TO 4.
E
2. Erase DTC. F
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See EC-238, "DTC Logic".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
G
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE ECM H
1. Replace ECM.
2. Go to EC-14, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require-
ment". I
>> INSPECTION END

J
EC-239
P0605 ECM
P0605 ECM
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIA9222J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
A) ECM calculation function is a malfunctioning.
P0605 Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is a malfunctioning. • ECM
C) ECM self shut-off function is a malfunctioning.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.
EC-240
P0605 ECM
A
1.INSPECTION START
2. Erase DTC. EC
Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM D
1. Replace ECM.
E
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

F
EC-241
P0607 ECM
P0607 ECM
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
When detecting error during the initial diagno-
P0607 CAN communication bus • ECM
sis of CAN controller of ECM.

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
1.INSPECTION START
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
Is the DTC P0607 displayed again?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END
EC-242
P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC EC
Trouble diagnosis
name C
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.) D
[CMP sensor (PHASE) circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
Sensor power supply ECM detects that the voltage of power
P0643 (Battery current sensor circuit is shorted.)
circuit short source for sensor is excessively low or high.
• Accelerator pedal position sensor E
• Throttle position sensor
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Power steering pressure sensor
• Battery current sensor F

1.PRECONDITIONING G
TESTING CONDITION: H
>> GO TO 2. I
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
3. Check DTC
Is DTC detected? K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003856709 L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
YES >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT O
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and ground.
P
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
E110 4 Ground Approx. 5
YES >> GO TO 7.
EC-243
NO >> GO TO 3.
ECM Sensor
47 TP sensor F29 1
51 Battery current sensor F76 1
F8 55 PSP sensor F62 3
59 CMP sensor (PHASE) (bank 1) F26 1
63 CMP sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) F69 1
E16 83 APP sensor E110 4
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Refer to EC-224, "Component Inspection".)
• Battery current sensor (Refer to EC-259, "Component Inspection".)
• Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-237, "Component Inspection".)
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning component.
5.CHECK TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-244
P0850 PNP SWITCH
P0850 PNP SWITCH
A
When the selector lever position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) signal from the TCM (VQ35DE engine) EC
or park/neutral position (PNP) switch (VQ25DE engine) is sent to ECM.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
[The park/neutral position (PNP) signal
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
Park/neutral position circuit is open or shorted.] E
P0850 signal does not change during driving after the
switch • TCM (VQ35DE engine)
engine is started.
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
(VQ25DE engine)
F
1.INSPECTION START G
YES >> GO TO 2. H
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I
J
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III K
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig-
nal under the following conditions. L
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal

N or P position ON M
Except above position OFF
N
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO-1 >> VQ35DE engine: Go to EC-246, "Diagnosis Procedure (VQ35DE engine)".
O
1. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. P
CAUTION:

EC-245
P0850 PNP SWITCH
YES-1 >> VQ35DE engine: Go to EC-246, "Diagnosis Procedure (VQ35DE engine)".
YES-2 >> VQ25DE engine: Go to EC-247, "Diagnosis Procedure (VQ25DE engine)".
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

ECM
Ground Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
P or N Battery voltage
E16 102 Ground Selector lever
Except above Approx. 0 V
Diagnosis Procedure (VQ35DE engine) INFOID:0000000003856713
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 2.
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Refer to BCS-16, "COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between TCM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
EC-246
P0850 PNP SWITCH
TCM IPDM E/R A

Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 4. C
4.CHECK PNP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
D
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors.
E
ECM IPDM E/R
Continuity
F
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

I
J
Refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Refer to BCS-16, "COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I N
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.

2. Check the voltage between Park/neutral position switch harness connector and ground.
O
Park/neutral position switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal P
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
EC-247
P0850 PNP SWITCH
• IPDM E/R connector F12
• 10A fuse (No. 42)
• Harness for open or short between Park/neutral position switch and fuse
5.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect Park/neutral position switch harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between Park/neutral position switch and IPDM E/R harness connector.
Park/neutral position switch IPDM E/R

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK PNP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Refer to TM-214, "Component Inspection (Park/Neutral Position Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace Park/neutral position switch.
EC-248
P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
A
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse EC
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC D

NOTE:
E
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
F
ECM cannot receive the information from (The CAN communication line is open or short- G
P1212 TCS communication line “ABS actuator and electric unit (control ed.)
unit)” continuously. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Dead (Weak) battery
H
1.PRECONDITIONING I
TESTING CONDITION: J
>> GO TO 2. K
2. Check 1st trip DTC. L
NO >> INSPECTION END M
Go to BRC-62, "Work Flow". N
EC-249
P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- (The cooling fan circuit is open or short-
heat). ed.)
• Cooling fan system does not operate proper- • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)
Engine over tempera- ly (Overheat). • Cooling fan motor
P1217
ture (Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system • Radiator hose
using the proper filling method. • Radiator
• Engine coolant is not within the specified • Radiator cap
range. • Water pump
• Thermostat
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, always replace the coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". Also, replace
the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Draining".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Always use
coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might
not be confirmed.

WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
EC-250
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. A
Is the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator below the
proper range?
YES >> Go to EC-251, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEF621W
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II D
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not.

Did customer fill the coolant? E
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III F
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. G
3. Check that cooling fan motors-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
Without CONSULT-III
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis H
Description".
YES >> INSPECTION END I
J
1.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-III K
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
L
Without CONSULT-III
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis
Description".
2. Check that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High). M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to EC-324, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
2.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-I

Check cooling system for leak. Refer to CO-8, "Inspection". O
Is leakage detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4. P
3.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-II
Check the following for leak.
• Hose
• Radiator
• Water pump
EC-251
4.CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR CAP : Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace radiator cap.
5.CHECK THERMOSTAT
Check thermostat. Refer to CO-24, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace thermostat
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
7.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, check the following.
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking —
• Blocked condenser
• Blocked radiator grille
• Blocked bumper
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants"
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in CO-8, "Inspection"
reservoir tank and radiator
filler neck
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester CO-12, "RADIATOR CAP : Inspection"
ON*2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks CO-8, "Inspection"
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-24, "Inspection"
lower radiator hoses
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating EC-324, "Component

Function Check"
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when —

gauge driving
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving CO-8, "Inspection"
ervoir tank and idling
OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from res- • Visual Should be initial level in CO-8, "Inspection"
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank
OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-104, "Inspection"
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-119, "Inspection"
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (56 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-3, "Troubleshooting Chart".
EC-252
>> INSPECTION END A
EC
EC-253
P1225 TP SENSOR
P1225 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- • Electric throttle control actuator
P1225
learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

2. Remove the intake air duct.
EC-254
P1225 TP SENSOR
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing. A
2: Electric throttle control actuator

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside. C
JMBIA1390ZZ
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR D

E
>> INSPECTION END

F

G
>> GO TO 2. H
I
>> END
J
EC-255
P1226 TP SENSOR
P1226 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- • Electric throttle control actuator
P1226
learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.

EC-256
P1226 TP SENSOR
and the housing. A

YES >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. C
JMBIA1390ZZ
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR D

E
>> INSPECTION END

F

G
>> GO TO 2. H
I
>> END
J
EC-257
P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the bat-
tery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is
performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power
generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation
command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to CHG-5,
"System Description".
CAUTION:
Never connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The con-
nection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery
discharge may occur.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
The output voltage of the battery current • Harness or connectors
Battery current sensor circuit
P1550 sensor remains within the specified (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
range/performance
range while engine is running. • Battery current sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and at wait
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect battery current sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.
EC-258
Battery current sensor A

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
EC
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C
3.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D
3. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Battery current sensor ECM E

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
F
YES >> GO TO 4. G
4.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
Battery current sensor ECM

Continuity I
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
5.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

Refer to EC-259, "Component Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace battery negative cable assembly. M
N
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003856735 O

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
EC-259
3. Disconnect battery negative cable (1).
: Vehicle front
: To body ground
4. Install jumper cable (A) between battery negative terminal and

body ground.
6. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals
under the following conditions.
ALBIA0076ZZ
ECM
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
F8 (Battery current Approx. 2.5
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-3, "How to Handle Battery".
NO >> Replace battery negative cable assembly.
EC-260
P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
A
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the EC
performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power C
"System Description". D
CAUTION:
discharge may occur. E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
Battery current sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sen-
P1551 • Harness or connectors
low input sor is sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Battery current sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sen- • Battery current sensor
P1552 I
high input sor is sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING J
TESTING CONDITION: K
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V with ignition
switch ON
L
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
Is 1st trip DTC detected? N
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003858135 O

YES >> GO TO 2.
EC-261
Battery current sensor

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

Continuity
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END


EC-262
A
: Vehicle front
: To body ground
EC
body ground.
6. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals C
ALBIA0076ZZ
ECM D
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
E
42
44
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
F

YES >> INSPECTION END G
EC-263
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the
performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power
CAUTION:
discharge may occur.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
The signal voltage transmitted from the • Harness or connectors
Battery current sensor perfor-
P1553 sensor to ECM is higher than the amount (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
mance
of the maximum power generation. • Battery current sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 2.
EC-264
Battery current sensor A

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
EC
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D
Battery current sensor ECM E

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
F
YES >> GO TO 4. G
H

Continuity I
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K

Refer to EC-265, "Component Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace battery negative cable assembly. M
N
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003858138 O

EC-265
: Vehicle front
: To body ground

body ground.
ALBIA0076ZZ
ECM
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
EC-266
A
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the EC
performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power C
"System Description". D
CAUTION:
discharge may occur. E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
The output voltage of the battery current • Harness or connectors
Battery current sensor perfor-
P1554 sensor is lower than the specified value (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
mance
while the battery voltage is high enough. • Battery current sensor
I
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-267, "Component Function Check". J
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the battery current sensor circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. K
NO >> Go to EC-268, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
1.PRECONDITIONING M
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 12.8 V at idle.
N
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that all load switches and A/C switch are turned
OFF.
O
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III P
2. Select “BAT CUR SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BAT CUR SEN” indication for 10 seconds.
“BAT CUR SEN” should be above 2,300 mV at least once.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
EC-267
ECM
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
42
F8 (Battery current Ground Above 2.3 at least once
sensor signal)
NO >> Go to EC-268, "Diagnosis Procedure"

YES >> GO TO 2.
Battery current sensor

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

Continuity
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
EC-268
5.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR A

YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C
D
>> INSPECTION END
E
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. F
: Vehicle front G
: To body ground

body ground. H
under the following conditions. I
ALBIA0076ZZ
ECM
+ – Voltage (V) J
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44 K
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
L
M
EC-269
P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
Refer to EC-51, "System Diagram" for the ASCD function.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Trouble diagnosis
name
• An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM.
• ECM detects that input signal from the
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
P1564 ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch is out of the specified
• ASCD steering switch
range.
• ECM
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch
is stuck ON.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds.
5. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-III.
EC-270
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
A
Monitor item Condition Indication
Pressed ON
MAIN SW MAIN switch EC
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL SW CANCEL switch
Released OFF C
RESUME/ACCEL- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ERATE switch Released OFF
Pressed ON
D
SET SW SET/COAST switch
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-III E
F
ECM
Con- + – Condition Voltage (V)

nector Terminal Terminal G
MAIN switch: Pressed Approx. 0
CANCEL switch: Pressed Approx. 1
85 92 H
E16 (ASCD steering switch (ASCD steering switch SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approx. 2
signal) ground)
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed Approx. 3
All ASCD steering switches: Released Approx. 4 I
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3. J
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between combination switch and ECM harness connector.
L
Combination switch ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
M33 16 E16 92 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
O
• Harness connectors M11, E105 P
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between combination switch and ECM harness connector.
EC-271
Combination switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
• Harness connectors M11, E105
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

2. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
3. Check resistance between combination switch harness connector terminals as per the following.
Combination switch
Condition Resistance [Ω]
Connector Terminals
MAIN switch: Pressed Approx. 0
CANCEL switch: Pressed Approx. 250
M33 13 and 16 SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approx. 660
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed Approx. 1,480
All ASCD steering switches: Released Approx. 4,000
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch
EC-272
P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. EC
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by two kinds of input (ON/OFF signal).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
E
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch is turned OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected
in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
F
Trouble diagnosis
name
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h • Harness or connectors G
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent • Harness or connectors
to the ECM at the same time. (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
P1572 ASCD brake switch • Stop lamp switch H
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to • ASCD brake switch
B) ECM for extremely long time while the ve- • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
hicle is being driver. • Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• ECM I

1.PRECONDITIONING J
NOTE: K
Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for mal-
function B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected. L
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. N
3. Press MAIN switch and check that CRUISE lamp illuminates.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
CAUTION: O
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle.
P
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

With GST
EC-273
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
NOTE:

Depress the brake pedal for more than 5
Driving location seconds so as not to come off from the
above-mentioned vehicle speed.
With GST
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.

Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW1 Brake pedal
Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
+ − Condition Voltage
110 Slightly depressed Approx. 0V

E16 E16 112 Brake pedal
(ASCD brake switch signal) Fully released Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EC-274
Monitor item Condition Indication A

Slightly depressed ON
Fully released OFF
EC
Without CONSULT-III
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
C
ECM
+ − Condition Voltage D
106 Slightly depressed Battery voltage

E16 E16 112 Brake pedal E
(Stop lamp switch signal) Fully released Approx. 0V
YES >> GO TO 12. F
NO >> GO TO 7.
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ground. H
ASCD brake switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal I
J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E103
• 10A fuse (No.3) L
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. N
3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ASCD brake switch ECM O

Continuity
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-277, "Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch)"
EC-275
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
• 10A fuse (No.7)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Stop lamp switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 10.
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and ECM
11.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-277, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)"
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-276
Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) INFOID:0000000003856756
A
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-I
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. EC
3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals under the following conditions.
Terminals Condition Continuity C

Fully released. Existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed. Not existed
D
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-II
1. Adjust ASCD brake switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals under the following conditions. F
Terminals Condition Continuity

G
1 and 2 Brake pedal
I
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000003856757
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I J

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.
K

Fully released Not existed L
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed
YES >> INSPECTION END M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II N
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
O
Fully released Not existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed P
EC-277
P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination
meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD con-
trol. Refer to EC-51, "System Diagram" for ASCD functions.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-135, "DTC Logic".
Trouble diagnosis
name
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
ASCD vehicle speed The difference between the two vehicle speed • Combination meter
P1574
sensor signals is out of the specified range. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
• TCM
• ECM

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-35, "Diagnosis Description".
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC-278
NO >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” A
Refer to BRC-80, "CONSULT-III Function".

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION C
D
>> INSPECTION END
EC-279
P1700 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
P1700 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
This DTC is displayed with other DTC regarding TCM. Perform the trouble diagnosis for corresponding DTC.
Refer to EC-389, "DTC Index". When this DTC is detected, the ASCD control is canceled.
EC-280
P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)
A
ECM receives primary speed sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal EC
for engine control.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, D
E
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340, P0345, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340,
P0345. Refer to EC-222, "DTC Logic".
to EC-240, "DTC Logic". F
G
(The CAN communication line is open or short- H
Primary speed sensor signal is different
Input speed sensor ed)
from the theoretical value calculated by
P1715 (Primary speed sensor) • Harness or connectors
ECM from secondary sensor signal and
(TCM output) (Primary speed sensor circuit is open or short-
engine rpm signal.
ed) I
• TCM

J
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE L
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 50 km/h (31 MPH) for at least 5 seconds.
3. Check 1st trip DTC. M
NO >> INSPECTION END N
O
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-121, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to TM-153, "Removal and Installation".
EC-281
>> INSPECTION END
EC-282
P1720 VSS
P1720 VSS
A
ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via the CAN communication line. One is sent from “ABS actuator and EC
electric unit (control unit)” via combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module).
ECM uses these signals for engine control.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
• If DTC P1720 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
E
F
(Secondary speed sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Harness or connectors G
Vehicle speed sensor The difference between two vehicle speed (Wheel sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P1720
(TCM output) signals is out of the specified range. • TCM
• Secondary speed sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) H
• Wheel sensor
• Combination meter
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J
>> GO TO 2. K
1. Start engine. L
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more for at least 5 seconds without depressing the brake
pedal.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? M
N
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM O

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-121, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-140, "DTC No. Index".
YES >> GO TO 3.
EC-283
P1720 VSS
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION

Refer to MWI-67, "DTC Index".
>> INSPECTION END
EC-284
P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
A
The VIAS control solenoid valve 1 cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve 1 control. It EC
responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake
manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and sends the vac-
uum signal to the power valve actuator 1.
C
• Harness or connectors E
An excessively low or high voltage signal
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 (The solenoid valve 1 circuit is open or
P1800 is sent to ECM through the VIAS control
circuit shorted.)
solenoid valve 1.
• VIAS control solenoid valve 1
F
1.CONDITIONING
G
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. H
>> GO TO 2.
I
2. Check 1st trip DTC. J
NO >> INSPECTION END K
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve 1 harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. M
4. Check the voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve 1 harness connector and ground.
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 N

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
2.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between VIAS control solenoid valve 1 harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.
EC-285
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 ECM

Continuity
F74 2 F7 27 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve 1.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to VIAS control solenoid valve 1.
5. Select “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

(VIAS S/V 1) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
ON Existed Not existed
OFF Not existed Existed
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to VIAS volume control solenoid valve 1.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

Condition
between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
12 V direct current supply be-
Existed Not existed
tween terminals 1 and 2
No supply Not existed Existed
EC-286
NO >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve 1
A
EC
EC-287
The VIAS control solenoid valve 2 cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve 2 control. It
responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake
manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and sends the vac-
uum signal to the power valve actuator 2.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
An excessively low or high voltage signal
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 (The solenoid valve 2 circuit is open or
P1801 is sent to ECM through the VIAS control
circuit shorted.)
solenoid valve 2.
• VIAS control solenoid valve 2

1.CONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check the voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve 2 harness connector and ground.
VIAS control solenoid valve 2

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between VIAS control solenoid valve 2 harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.
EC-288
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 ECM A

Continuity
F75 2 F7 26 Existed
EC
YES >> GO TO 3. C
D
YES >> GO TO 4. E
Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". F
>> INSPECTION END

G
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2 H

With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. I
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to VIAS control solenoid valve 2.
5. Select “VIAS S/V-2” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the J
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity K

(VIAS S/V 2) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
ON Existed Not existed
L
OFF Not existed Existed
M
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to VIAS volume control solenoid valve 2.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the O
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity P

Condition
Existed Not existed
EC-289
NO >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve 2
EC-290
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
A
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. EC
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is being driver.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ex-
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or short-
P1805 Brake switch tremely long time while the vehicle is being driv-
ed.) E
er.
• Stop lamp switch

F
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. G
3. Erase the DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? H
I
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

J
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
K
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated L
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. M
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. N
2. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage O
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 10A fuse (No.7)
EC-291
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
• Harness for open or short between battery and stop lamp switch
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Stop lamp switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
Refer to EC-292, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I


1 and 2 Brake pedal
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
EC-292
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Terminals Condition Continuity A

1 and 2 Brake pedal
EC
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. C
EC-293
P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is controlled ON/OFF by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle control motor ECM detects that the voltage of power source (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2100
relay circuit open for throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
• Throttle control motor relay
Throttle control motor ECM detects that the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2103
relay circuit short is stuck ON. shorted)
• Throttle control motor relay

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V.
Witch DTC is detected?
P2100 >> GO TO 2.
P2103 >> GO TO 3.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EC-294
IPDM E/R ECM A

Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 2. C
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
D
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity E
F12 54 F7 2 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
3.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse (No. 51) from IPDM E/R. H
2. Check if 15A fuse is blown.
YES >> GO TO 4. I
Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". J
K
EC-295
P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor. The throttle position
sensor provides feedback to the ECM, when opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions
via the throttle control motor.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC 2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2119. Refer to
Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
P2101
performance ate properly. shorted)
• Electric throttle control actuator

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V when
engine is running.
>> GO TO 2.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
EC-296
ECM A
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch OFF Approx. 0 V
F7 2 Ground EC
Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 7. C
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
D
4. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ECM harness connector. E
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity F
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
I
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal J
F12 54 F7 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
L
5.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse (No. 51) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check if 15A fuse is blown. M
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace 15A fuse. N
O
P
7.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
nector.
EC-297

Continuity
5 Not existed
5
6 Existed
F29 F7
5 Existed
6
6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 8.
and the housing.

YES >> GO TO 9.
control actuator inside.
JMBIA1390ZZ
9.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11.
YES >> GO TO 11.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check resistance between electric throttle control actuator terminals as per the following.
5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
EC-298
NO >> GO TO 2. A
EC
>> INSPECTION END

C
1.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING D

E
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-16, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement" F
>> END
G
EC-299
P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor. The throttle position
sensor provides feedback to the ECM, when opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions
via the throttle control motor.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
P2118
circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-300, "DTC Logic".

3. Check resistance between electric throttle control actuator terminals as per the following.
5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


EC-300
A
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING EC
>> END C
EC-301
P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and sends the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions via the throttle
control motor.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion.
Electric throttle control
P2119 Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is • Electric throttle control actuator
actuator B)
not in specified range.
ECM detects that the throttle valve is stuck
C)
open.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
2. Selector lever position is D and wait at least 3 seconds.
3. Selector lever position is P.
7. Selector lever position is P.
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
9. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
3. Selector lever position is N or P.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
EC-302
A
2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
and the housing.
C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
control actuator inside.
E
JMBIA1390ZZ
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

G
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING J
K
>> END
EC-303
P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and sends voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for engine opera-
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Accelerator pedal posi-
An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
P2122 tion sensor 1 circuit low • Harness or connectors
sor 1 is sent to ECM.
input (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- (APP sensor 1)
P2123 tion sensor 1 circuit high
input

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
EC-304
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

EC
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V) C
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E

F
3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity G
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. H
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I
4.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. J
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal K
L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
O
2. Refer to EC-306, "Special Repair Requirement". P
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

EC-305
1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

ECM
81 Fully released 0.5 - 1.0
84
(APP sensor 1 sig-
(Sensor ground) Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8
nal)
E16 E16 Accelerator pedal
100
(APP sensor 2 sig-
nal)
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> GO TO 3.
>> END
EC-306
A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal C
the accelerator pedal and sends voltage signals to the ECM. The D
signals.
PBIB1741E E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

G
Accelerator pedal posi- • Harness or connectors H
An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
P2127 tion sensor 2 circuit low (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
input [CKP sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.]
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.) I
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
P2128 tion sensor 2 circuit high (APP sensor 2)
input • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor J

1.PRECONDITIONING K
TESTING CONDITION: L
>> GO TO 2. M

1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. N
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-307, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
P
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC-307
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit.
ECM Sensor
F8
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-221, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-348, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
YES >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
EC-308
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC
C
APP sensor ECM
Continuity
E110 6 E16 82 Existed D
E
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR F
YES >> GO TO 10. G
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY H
2. Refer to EC-310, "Special Repair Requirement"
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
>> INSPECTION END

K
1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR L

3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions. M
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage (V) N
84 O
(APP sensor 1 sig-
nal)
100 P
(APP sensor 2 sig-
nal)
NO >> GO TO 2.
EC-309
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> GO TO 3.
>> END
EC-310
P2135 TP SENSOR
P2135 TP SENSOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, EC

kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into C
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to D
PBIB0145E E

NOTE:
EC-243, "DTC Logic". G
• Harness or connector H
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor 1 or 2 circuit is open or short-
P2135 circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 ed.)
mance and TP sensor 2. • Electric throttle control actuator
I
(TP sensor 1 or 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING J
K
TESTING CONDITION:
L
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. M
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-311, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
EC-311
P2135 TP SENSOR

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.

Continuity
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.

Continuity
2 37
F29 F8 Existed
3 38
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2. Refer to EC-313, "Special Repair Requirement"
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-312
P2135 TP SENSOR
A
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. EC
5. Selector lever position is D. C
ECM D
Connector
Terminal Terminal
E
36
38 (TP sensor 2 F
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
K
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING L
M
>> END
EC-313
P2138 APP SENSOR
P2138 APP SENSOR
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal
the accelerator pedal and sends voltage signals to the ECM. The
signals.
PBIB1741E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• Harness or connector
(APP sensor 1 or 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
[CKP sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
P2138 tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
shorted.)
performance and APP sensor 2.
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1 or 2)
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC-314
P2138 APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2. A
EC
C
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
F
G
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
E110 5 Ground Approx. 5 H
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4. I
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
K
APP sensor ECM
Continuity
E110 5 E16 87 Existed L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit. M

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. N
ECM Sensor
Connector Terminal Name Connector Terminal O
F8
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK COMPONENTS
EC-315
P2138 APP SENSOR
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-221, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-348, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
YES >> GO TO 11.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
2 84
E110 E16 Existed
1 100
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
3 81
E110 E16 Existed
6 82
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

EC-316
P2138 APP SENSOR
A
ECM
EC
84
(APP sensor 1 sig-
(Sensor ground) Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8 C
nal)
100
(APP sensor 2 sig-
nal) D
NO >> GO TO 2. E

1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. F
>> INSPECTION END G

1.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING H
I
>> GO TO 2.
J
>> GO TO 3.
K
L
>> END
EC-317
P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen-
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current
JMBIA0112GB
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored so it will
not shift to LEAN side or RICH side.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The output voltage computed by ECM from the
P2A00 (bank 1) circuit range/per- • A/F sensor 1
A/F sensor 1 signal shifts to the lean side for a
formance • A/F sensor 1 heater
specified period.
• Fuel pressure
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
• Fuel injector
P2A03 (bank 2) circuit range/per- sensor 1 signal shifts to the rich side for a spec-
• Intake air leaks
formance ified period.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
EC-318
7. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. A
YES >> Go to EC-319, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
C
D
YES >> GO TO 2. E
2.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation". F
>> GO TO 3.
G
3.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. H
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. I
4.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement". J
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-198, "DTC Logic" K
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR L

M
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.

N
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace harness connector.
O
2. Turn ignition switch ON. P
A/F sensor
DTC Ground Voltage (V)
P2A00 1 F27 4
P2A03 2 F64 4
EC-319
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• 15A fuse (No. 46)

A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P2A00 1 F27
2 49 Existed
F8
1 53
P2A03 2 F64
2 57
A/F sensor 1 ECM

1 45
P2A00 1 F27
2 49
1 53
P2A03 2 F64
2 57
YES >> GO TO 9.
YES >> GO TO 10.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END
EC-320
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. EC
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by two kinds of input (ON/OFF signal).
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000003856821 C
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH FUNCTION

With CONSULT-III D
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. E

Slightly depressed OFF F
Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III G
H
ECM
Connector Terminal
110 Slightly depressed Approx. 0 V I
E16 (ASCD brake Ground Brake pedal
switch signal) Fully released Battery voltage

K
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

L
4. Check the voltage between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ground. M
ASCD brake switch

Ground Voltage N
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• 10A fuse (No.3)
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
EC-321
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ASCD brake switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-322, "Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) INFOID:0000000003858143
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-I


1 and 2 Brake pedal
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-II
1. Adjust ASCD brake switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".

1 and 2 Brake pedal
EC-322
ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
A
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and EC
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE lamp illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET lamp illuminates when the following conditions are met. C
• CRUISE lamp is illuminated.
• SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of the
ASCD setting. D
SET lamp remains lit during ASCD control.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000003856825 E
1.CHECK ASCD INDICATOR FUNCTION

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. F
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION

• MAIN switch: Pressed at the G
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON 1st time → ON → OFF
at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON • ASCD: Operating ON H
• When vehicle speed is be-
SET LAMP
tween 40 km/h (25 MPH) and • ASCD: Not operating OFF
144 km/h (89 MPH)
I
NO >> Go to EC-323, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
1.CHECK DTC K
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-135, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION M
YES >> GO TO 3. N
O
YES >> Replace combination meter. P
EC-323
COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
COOLING FAN MOTOR
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as per the following.
Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
2 3 and 4
Middle (MID)
1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under
the middle speed condition.
Refer to EC-60, "System Diagram".
1.CHECK COOLING FAN FUNCTION

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that cooling fan speed varies according to the percent.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis
Description".
2. Check that cooling fan operates.
1.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2, -3.
4. Check the voltage between cooling fan relays-2, -3 harness connectors and ground.
Cooling fan relay

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E57 2
(cooling fan relay-2) 5
E59 2
(cooling fan relay-3) 5
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
EC-324
COOLING FAN

• 40A fusible link (letter K)
• 10A fuse (No.42)
EC
• IPDM E/R harness connector E10
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and battery
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-3 and battery
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and IPDM E/R C
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-3 and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
3.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
3. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor.
F
Cooling fan relay IPDM E/R
Continuity
G
E57
1 E11 42
(cooling fan relay-2)
Existed
E59 H
1 E10 34
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector.
2. Check the voltage between cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and ground.
K
Cooling fan motor-1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
L
1
E301 Ground Battery voltage
2
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N

• Harness connector E70, E305
O
• 40A fusible link (letter M)
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and battery
P
6.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and cooling fan motor-1, -2 har-
ness connectors.
EC-325
COOLING FAN
Cooling fan relay Cooling fan motor

Continuity
E302
3 2
E57 (Cooling fan motor-2)
(cooling fan relay-2) E301
7 3
(Cooling fan motor-1)
Existed
E302
3 1
E59 (Cooling fan motor-2)
(cooling fan relay-3) E301
7 4
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and cooling fan relay-2
8.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-II
1. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor-1, -2 harness connec-
tor.
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor

Continuity
E301
35 4
E10 Existed
E302
38 1
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and IPDM E/R
10.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-III
1. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and ground.
EC-326
COOLING FAN
Cooling fan motor A

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E57
6 EC
Ground Existed
E59
6
C
YES >> GO TO 11. D
11.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-IV
1. Check the continuity between cooling fan motor-2 harness connector and ground. E
Cooling fan motor-2

Ground Continuity F
Connector Terminal
3
E302 Ground Existed
4 G
YES >> GO TO 12. H
12.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3 I
Refer to EC-328, "Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay)".
YES >> GO TO 13. J
NO >> Replace malfunctioning cooling fan relay.
13.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
K
Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor)".
YES >> GO TO 14. L
NO >> Replace malfunctioning cooling fan motor.
Perform GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". M
NO >> Repair or replace harness connectors. N
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) INFOID:0000000003856830
1.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR O

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. P
3. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.
EC-327
COOLING FAN
Terminals
Condition
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
2 3 and 4
A
Cooling fan motor 1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4
B 1, 2 3, 4
Check that cooling fan speed of condition B is higher than that of A.
NO >> Replace cooling fan motor.
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) INFOID:0000000003856831
1.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY

1. Disconnect cooling fan relays -2, -3 harness connectors.
2. Check continuity between cooling fan relay -2, -3 terminals
Terminals Conditions Continuity
3 and 5 12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed

6 and 7 No current supply Not existed
NO >> Replace cooling fan relay.
SEF745U
EC-328
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
A
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred EC
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
C
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
2. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. D
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication E

ON ON
LOAD SIGNAL Rear window defogger switch
OFF OFF
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to EC-329, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH FUNCTION
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
H
ON at 2nd position ON
LOAD SIGNAL Lighting switch I
OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 3. J
3.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION
K
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication L

ON ON
HEATER FAN SW Heater fan control switch
OFF OFF
N
1.INSPECTION START O
Confirm the malfunctioning circuit (rear window defogger, headlamp or heater fan). Refer to EC-329, "Compo-
nent Function Check".
Which circuit is related to the incident? P
Rear window defogger>>GO TO 2.
Headlamp>>GO TO 3.
Heater fan>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to DEF-3, "Work Flow".
EC-329
>> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to EXL-7, "Work Flow" (XENON TYPE) or EXL-198, "Work Flow" (HALOGEN TYPE).
>> INSPECTION END

4.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to VTL-5, "System Description".
>> INSPECTION END
EC-330
A
The electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve controls the intake manifold vacuum signal for EC
electronic controlled engine mount. The electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve is moved by
ON/OFF signal from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut.
When the solenoid is ON, the intake manifold vacuum signal is sent to the electronic controlled engine mount.
C
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION D

2. Selector level position is D while depressing the brake pedal and parking brake pedal.
3. Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve harness connector. E
4. Check that body vibration increases compared to the condition of step 2 above (with vehicle stopped).
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> EC-331, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
1.CHECK VACUUM SOURCE
2. Reconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve harness connector. H
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to electronic controlled engine mount.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence. I
Vacuum should exist.

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND VACUUM GALLERY K

2. Check vacuum hoses and vacuum gallery for clogging, cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-68,
"System Diagram". L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace vacuum hoses and vacuum gallery. M
3.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT N
1. Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between front electronic controlled engine mount harness connector and ground. O

control solenoid valve Ground Voltage P
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
EC-331
• Harness connectors E6, F123
• 10A fuse (No. 3)
• Fuse block (J/B) E103
• Harness for open or short between electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve and fuse
5.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIG-
NAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and electronic controlled engine mount control
solenoid valve harness connector.
Electronic controlled engine

ECM
mount control solenoid valve Continuity
F7 28 F11 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
6.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve.
7.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
2. Install vacuum pump (A) to electronic controlled engine mount
(1).
3. Check that a vacuum is maintained when applying the vacuum
of -40 kPa (-400 mbar, -300 mmHg, -11.81 inHg) to electronic
controlled engine mount.
4. Also visually check electronic controlled engine mount.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount.
MBIB1237E

YES >> Replace intake manifold collector.
1.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve.
EC-332
5. Select “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the A
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity EC

(ENGINE MOUNTING) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
TRVL Existed Not existed
IDLE Not existed Existed C
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid JMBIA0180ZZ D
valve harness connector.
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the E
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity F

Condition
Existed Not existed
G
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIB2532E H
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount control sole-
noid valve.
I
EC-333
FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
PBIA9664J
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Are any cylinders ignited?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
Clicking sound should be heard.

PBIB3332E
1.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between fuel injector harness connector and ground.
EC-334
FUEL INJECTOR
Fuel injector A
Ground Voltage
Cylinder Connector Terminal
1 F37 1
EC
2 F38 1
3 F39 1
4 F40 1 C
5 F41 1
6 F42 1
D
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. E
• 10A fuse (No.44) F
• IPDM E/R harness connector E11
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
G
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
3. Check the continuity between fuel injector harness connector and ECM harness connector.
I
Fuel injector ECM
Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
J
1 F37 2 32
2 F38 2 31
3 F39 2 30 K
F7 Existed
4 F40 2 29
5 F41 2 3
L
6 F42 2 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR N

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
EC-335
FUEL INJECTOR

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
3. Check resistance between fuel injector terminals as per the fol-
lowing.
1 and 2 11.1 - 14.5 Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
NO >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector.
PBIB1727E
EC-336
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
A
EC
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Fuel pump relay
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control ↓ C
Battery Battery voltage* Fuel pump
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine D
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
E
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation F

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
G
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
H
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP FUNCTION I

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
J
: Vehicle front (Illustration shows
the view with intake air duct re-
moved)
K
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed
hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
L
YES >> INSPECTION END JMBIA1391ZZ
NO >> EC-337, "Diagnosis Procedure".

M
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I N

3. Turn ignition switch ON. O
ECM P
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
EC-337
FUEL PUMP
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 14.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
4.CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
3. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
5. Check the voltage between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
Battery voltage should exist for 1 second
B81 1 Ground
after ignition switch is turned ON.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK 15A FUSE
2. Disconnect 15A fuse (No. 41).
3. Check 15A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and condenser harness connector.
IPDM E/R Condenser

Continuity
E10 13 B81 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> GO TO 7.
EC-338
FUEL PUMP
• Harness connectors E104, B4 A
• IPDM E/R connector E10
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT
C
2. Check the continuity between condenser harness connector and ground.
D
Condenser
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B81 2 Ground Existed E
YES >> GO TO 9. F
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK CONDENSER G
Refer to EC-340, "Component Inspection (Condenser)".
YES >> GO TO 10. H
NO >> Replace condenser.
10.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. I
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel
pump” harness connector.
J
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel
IPDM E/R
pump Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal K
E10 13 B40 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M
• Harness connectors B4, E104
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R N
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

12.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT O
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector and ground.
P
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel

pump Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B40 3 Ground Existed
EC-339
FUEL PUMP
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK FUEL PUMP
Refer to EC-340, "Component Inspection (Fuel Pump)".
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Replace fuel pump.
Component Inspection (Fuel Pump) INFOID:0000000003856846
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP

2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
3. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals as per the following.
1 and 3 0.2 - 5.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
Component Inspection (Condenser) INFOID:0000000003856847
1.CHECK CONDENSER
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as per the following.
1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
EC-340
IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns EC
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000003856849 C
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. D
Does the engine start?
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 3. E
2.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION
F
With CONSULT-III
G
NO >> Go to EC-341, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
3.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle. I
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM harness connector ground with an oscilloscope.
ECM J
Ground Voltage signal
Connector Terminal
9
K
10
11
F7 Ground
18 L
19
21 JMBIA0035GB
M
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
O
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON.
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
EC-341
IGNITION SIGNAL
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EC-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
4. Check the voltage between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and condenser harness connector.
IPDM E/R Condenser

Continuity
YES >> Refer to EC-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
4.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F13 2 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection (Condenser)"
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
EC-342
IGNITION SIGNAL
Ignition coil A
Ground Voltage
1 F31 3
EC
2 F32 3
3 F33 3
4 F34 3 C
5 F35 3
6 F36 3
D
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. E
7.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ground. F
Ignition coil
Ground Continuity G
1 F31 2
2 F32 2 H
3 F33 2
Ground Existed
4 F34 2
5 F35 2 I
6 F36 2
3. Also check harness for short to power. J
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. K
8.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ECM harness connector. L
Ignition coil ECM

Continuity M
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1 F31 1 11
2 F32 1 10 N
3 F33 1 9
F7 Existed
4 F34 1 21
5 F35 1 19 O
6 F36 1 18
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. P
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-344, "Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)".
EC-343
IGNITION SIGNAL
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor) INFOID:0000000003856851
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-I

2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as per the following.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-II
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro-
cedure.
4. Start engine.
9. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
10. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
portion as shown in the figure.
tion.

CAUTION:
• Never place to the spark plug and the ignition coil within
cal shock while checking, because the electrical dis-

charge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
NOTE:
tioning.
EC-344
IGNITION SIGNAL
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor. A
Component Inspection (Condenser) INFOID:0000000003856852
1.CHECK CONDENSER EC

3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as per the following. C
D
1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ [at 25C° (77C°)]
YES >> INSPECTION END E
EC-345
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
The Malfunction Indicator MI is located on the combination meter.

The MI will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.
When the engine is started, the MI should turn off. If the MI remains
illuminated, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine
system malfunction.
For details, refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Description".
SEF217U
1.CHECK MI FUNCTION
2. Check that MI illuminates.
1.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-135, "Description".
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace.
YES >> Replace combination meter.
NO >> Repair or replace.
EC-346
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
A
EC
SEC921C
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. G

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve. H
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through
the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. I
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go J
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
K
PBIB1588E
M
1.CHECK PCV VALVE N

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is O
placed over valve inlet.
YES >> INSPECTION END P
NO >> Replace PCV valve.
PBIB1589E
EC-347
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB2657E
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
ECM
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
39 40
F8 1.0 - 4.0
(Refrigerant pressure sensor signal) (Sensor ground)

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ground.
Refrigerant pressure sensor

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
EC-348
NO >> GO TO 3.

EC
• IPDM E/R harness connectors E10, E346
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
C
4.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor. E
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
E300 3 F8 40 Existed
G
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
H
• Harness connectors F123, E6 I
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
J
6.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
K
1. Check the continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor.
L
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM
Continuity
E300 2 F8 39 Existed M
YES >> GO TO 8. N
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor P
EC-349
YES >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
EC-350
A
Power Valves 1 and 2 (VQ35DE engine) EC

The power valves 1 and 2 are installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of
the variable induction air control system. They are set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuators 1 and 2 operated by the vacuum stored in the vacuum tank. The vacuum to power valve actu- C
ators is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valves 1 and 2.
Power Valve (VQ25DE engine)
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of the variable D
induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve actuator
operated by the vacuum stored in the vacuum tank. The vacuum to power valve actuator is controlled by the
VIAS control solenoid valve.
E
Component Function Check (VQ35DE engine) INFOID:0000000003856866
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I F

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. G
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve 1 “ON” and “OFF”, and check that power valve actuator 1 rod moves.
JMBIA1386ZZ
K
1. Power valve actuator 1 2. Power valve actuator 1 rod 3. Power valve actuator 2
4. Power valve actuator 2 rod
: Vehicle front
L
Without CONSULT-III
2. When revving engine up to 5,000 rpm quickly. M
3. Check that power valve actuator 1 rod moves under the following conditions.
JMBIA1386ZZ
: Vehicle front
EC-351
Condition Operation
Idle Existed
When revving engine up to 5,000 rpm quickly Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> EC-353, "Diagnosis Procedure (VQ35DE engine)".
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Perform “VIAS S/V-2” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve 2 “ON” and “OFF”, and check that power valve actuator 2 rod moves.
JMBIA1386ZZ
: Vehicle front
Without CONSULT-III
1. When revving engine up to 5,000 rpm quickly.
2. Check that power valve actuator 2 rod moves under the following conditions.
JMBIA1386ZZ
: Vehicle front
Condition Operation
Idle Existed
EC-352
Component Function Check (VQ25DE engine) INFOID:0000000003895854
A
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
EC
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve 1 “ON” and “OFF”, and check
that power valve actuator (1) rod (2) moves. C
: Vehicle front
D
JMBIA1387ZZ
F
Without CONSULT-III
2. When revving engine up to 5,000 rpm quickly. G
3. Check that power valve actuator (1) rod (2) moves under the fol-
lowing conditions.
H
: Vehicle front
Condition Operation I
Idle Existed
J

K
1.INSPECTION START L
Confirm the malfunctioning system (power valve 1 or power valve 2). Refer to EC-351, "Component Function
Check (VQ35DE engine)".
Which system is related to the incident? M
Power valve 1>>GO TO 2.
Power valve 2>>GO TO 6.
2.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE-I N
With CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator 1. O
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve 1 “ON” and “OFF”, and check vacuum existence under the following con-
ditions. P
VIAS S/V 1 Vacuum

ON Existed
OFF Not existed
Without CONSULT-III
EC-353
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator 1.
3. Start engine.
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition Operation
Idle Existed
YES >> Repair or replace power valve actuator 1.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VACUUM TANK
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to intake manifold collector.
3. Check vacuum existence from intake manifold collector.
Does vacuum existence from the intake manifold collector?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace intake manifold collector.
4.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
2. Check vacuum hose for cracks, clogging, improper connection
or disconnection. Refer to EC-93, "System Diagram".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L

YES >> GO TO 9.
6.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE-II
With CONSULT-III
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve 2 “ON” and “OFF”, and check vacuum existence under the following con-
ditions.
VIAS S/V 2 Vacuum

ON Existed
OFF Not existed
Without CONSULT-III
3. Start engine.
EC-354
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions. A
Condition Operation
Idle Existed EC
YES >> Repair or replace power valve actuator 2.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK VACUUM HOSE D
1. Stop engine.
or disconnection. Refer to EC-93, "System Diagram". E
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair hoses or tubes. F
SEF109L
8.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2 H

YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the malfunctioning system (power valve). Refer to EC-353, "Component Function Check (VQ25DE
engine)". M
Which system is related to the incident?
>> GO TO 2.
N
2.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
With CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. O
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check vacuum existence under the following condi-
tions. P
VIAS S/V Vacuum

ON Existed
OFF Not existed
Without CONSULT-III
EC-355
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Start engine.
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition Operation
Idle Existed
YES >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VACUUM TANK
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to intake manifold collector.
3. Check vacuum existence from intake manifold collector.
Does vacuum existence from the intake manifold collector?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace intake manifold collector.
4.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
or disconnection. Refer to EC-93, "System Diagram".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L
5.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-356
ECM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
ECM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000003856868
EC
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Remarks: C
l Specification data are reference values.
l Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
I.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show D
the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIM-
ING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor
and other ignition timing related sensors. E
Monitor Item Condition Values/Status

Almost the same speed as F
ENG SPEED Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
the tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-124, "Description".
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-124, "Description". G
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-124, "Description".
A/F ALPHA-B2 See EC-124, "Description".
H
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V
A/F SEN1 (B2) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V I
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met.
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1) - Engine: After warming up
- After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
1.0 V J
idle for 1 minute under no load
are met. K
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) - Engine: After warming up
1.0 V
L
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
- After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at M
are met. N
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) - Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as O
VHCL SPEED SE
dication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V
P
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0 V
ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0 V

ACCEL SEN 2*1 (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8 V
EC-357
ECM
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
TP SEN 1-B1 (Engine stopped)
• Selector lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V

TP SEN 2-B1*1 (Engine stopped)
• Selector lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
Indicates intake air tempera-

INT/A TEMP SE • Ignition switch: ON
ture
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Selector lever: P or N ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON
Selector lever: Except above OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or ON
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON Lighting switch: 2nd position
Rear window defogger switch and lighting
OFF
switch: OFF
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON ON

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
INJ PULSE-B1
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
INJ PULSE-B2
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 7° - 17° BTDC
IGN TIMING
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 5% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle

• Selector lever: P or N (Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even 0%
PURG VOL C/V slightly, after engine starting.)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load 2,000 rpm —
EC-358
ECM
A
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• No load EC
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B2)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• No load
C
INT/V SOL (B1) D
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
• No load
• Selector lever: P or N E
INT/V SOL (B2)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever: P or N When revving engine up to 5,000 rpm
F
VIAS S/V-1 OFF →ON → OFF
• Air conditioner switch: OFF quickly
• No load
• Engine: After warming up G
• Selector lever: P or N When revving engine up to 5,000 rpm
VIAS S/V-2 OFF →ON → OFF
• Air conditioner switch: OFF quickly
• No load
H
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates)
I
Below 950 rpm IDLE
ENGINE MOUNT • Engine: After warming up
Above 950 rpm TRVL
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch: ON J
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above OFF
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON K
Engine coolant temperature: 97°C
OFF
(206°F) or less
L
Engine coolant temperature: Between
• Engine: After warming up, idle the LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
COOLING FAN engine
• Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine coolant temperature: Between
MID M
100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F)
Engine coolant temperature: 105°C
HI
(221°F) or more
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. N
- Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
O
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up P
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B2) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Almost the same speed as
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20km/h (12 MPH)
the tachometer indication
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as
VEHICLE SPEED
dication. the speedometer indication
EC-359
ECM
Idle air volume learning has not been per-
YET
formed yet.
IDL A/V LEARN • Engine: Running
Idle air volume learning has already been
CMPLT
performed successfully.
ENG OIL TEMP • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
Vehicle has traveled after MI has illumi- 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
nated. (0 - 40,723 miles)
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
A/F S1 HTR (B1) 4 - 100%
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine)
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
A/F S1 HTR (B2) 4 - 100%
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine)
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
dication. the speedometer indication
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
displayed
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
BRAKE SW1 Brake pedal: Fully released ON

(ASCD brake switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
VHCL SPD CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
LO SPEED CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
AT OD MONITOR • Ignition switch: ON OFF
AT OD CANCEL • Ignition switch: ON OFF
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
• When vehicle speed is between
SET LAMP
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89 MPH)
ALT DUTY • Engine: Idle 0 - 80%
A/F ADJ-B1 • Engine: Running −0.330 - 0.330
A/F ADJ-B2 • Engine: Running −0.330 - 0.330
• Engine speed: Idle
• Battery: Fully charged*2
BAT CUR SEN • Selector lever: P or N Approx. 2,600 - 3,500 mV
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load
EC-360
ECM
A
• Power generation voltage variable control: Operating ON
ALT DUTY SIG
• Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating OFF
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ EC
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
*2: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-3, "How to Handle Battery".
TERMINAL LAYOUT C
PBIA9221J F
PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE: G
• ECM is located in the engine room left side near battery. For this inspection, remove passenger side instru-
ment lower panel.
• Specification data are reference values. H
• Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.

Value I
Input/ Condition
+ -– Signal name (Approx.)
Output
1 BATTERY VOLTAGE J
Fuel injector No. 6
(P/B) (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
3
Fuel injector No. 5 • Warm-up condition
(L/W)
• Idle speed K
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes de-
29
Fuel injector No. 4 pending on rpm at idle
(LG/R)
L
112 JMBIA0047GB
Output
30 (B) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Fuel injector No. 3
(R/Y) (11 - 14 V) M
31
Fuel injector No. 2
(R/W) [Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm N
32
Fuel injector No. 1
(R/B)
JMBIA0048GB O
2 112 Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE
Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(G/W) (B) power supply (11 - 14 V)
2.9 - 8.8 V P
[Engine is running]
4 112 A/F sensor 1 heater
Output • Idle speed
(BR/Y) (B) (Bank 1)
(More than 140 seconds after
starting engine)
JMBIA0902GB
EC-361
ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
0 - 14 V
[Ignition switch: ON]

• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully de-
pressed
JMBIA0031GB
5 112
Throttle control motor (Open) Output
(L) (B)
0 - 14 V

• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully re-
leased
JMBIA0032GB
0 - 14 V

• Engine stopped
6 112
Throttle control motor (Close) Output • Selector lever: D
(P) (B)
leased
JMBIA1125GB
2.9 - 8.8 V
[Engine is running]
8 112
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) Output • Idle speed
(SB) (B)
(More than 140 seconds after
starting engine)
JMBIA0030GB
9 0 - 0.2 V
Ignition signal No. 3
(L/B)
[Engine is running]
10 • Warm-up condition
(G/R) • Idle speed
NOTE:
11
Ignition signal No. 1 pending on rpm at idle
(Y/R)
112 JMBIA0035GB
Output
18 (B)
Ignition signal No. 6 0.1 - 0.4 V
(GR/R)
19
Ignition signal No. 5 [Engine is running]
(P)
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
21
(W)
JMBIA0036GB
12
— ECM ground — — —
(B)
EC-362
ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
[Engine is running] 10 V
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 EC
rpm after the following condi-
tions are met
- Engine: after warming up
- Keeping the engine speed be-
C
13 112 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- tween 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
Output for 1 minute and at idle for 1
(P/B) (B) er (Bank 1)
minute under no load JMBIA0902GB
D
• Engine stopped
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
(11 - 14 V) E
• Engine speed: Above 3,600
rpm
• For 1 second after turning ig-
0 - 1.5 V
F
nition switch ON
14 112 [Engine is running]
Fuel pump relay Output
(GR) (B)
[Ignition switch: ON] G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turn-
(11 - 14 V)
ing ignition switch ON
0 - 1.0 V → BATTERY VOLTAGE
15 112 [Ignition switch: ON → OFF] H
Throttle control motor relay Output (11 - 14 V) → 0 V
(O) (B)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0 V
16
— ECM ground — — — I
(B/Y)
[Engine is running] 10 V
• Engine speed: Below 3,600
rpm after the following condi- J
tions are met
- Engine: after warming up
tween 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
K
17 112 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat-
Output for 1 minute and at idle for 1
(R) (B) er (Bank 2)
minute under no load JMBIA0902GB
[Ignition switch: ON] L

• Engine stopped
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
(11 - 14 V)
• Engine speed: Above 3,600
rpm M
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5 V
• A few seconds after turning N
24 112 ECM relay ignition switch OFF
Output
(W/B) (B) (Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after O
(11 - 14 V)
turning ignition switch OFF
EC-363
ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not de-
pressed even slightly, after
engine starting
25 112 EVAP canister purge volume JMBIA0039GB

Output
(P/L) (B) control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000
rpm (More than 100 seconds
after starting engine)
JMBIA0040GB
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
26 112 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14 V)
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 Output [Engine is running]
(GR/B) (B) ↓
0 - 1.0 V
• When revving engine up to
↓
5,000 rpm quickly
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
27 112 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14 V)
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 Output [Engine is running]
(V) (B) ↓
0 - 1.0 V
• When revving engine up to
↓
5,000 rpm quickly
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
• Idle speed
28 112 Electronic controlled engine
Output [Engine is running]
(BR/W) (B) mount control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Engine speed: More than 950
(11 - 14 V)
rpm
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to
3,000 rpm quickly after the fol-
lowing conditions are met
33 35 Heated oxygen sensor 2
Input - Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0 V
(W) (B) (Bank 1)
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to
3,000 rpm quickly after the fol-
lowing conditions are met
34 35 Heated oxygen sensor 2
Input - Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0 V
(W/L) (B) (Bank 2)
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
EC-364
ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
35 Sensor ground
— — — — EC
(B) (Heated oxygen sensor 2)
36 Sensor ground
— — — —
(B) (Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON] C
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D More than 0.36 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully re- D
37 36 leased
Throttle position sensor 1 Input
(W) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D Less than 4.75 V E
pressed
[Ignition switch: ON] F
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D Less than 4.75 V
38 36 leased G
Throttle position sensor 2 Input
(R) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D More than 0.36 V H
pressed
[Engine is running]
I
39 40
Refrigerant pressure sensor Input • Both A/C switch and blower 1.0 - 4.0 V
(R) (G)
fan motor switch: ON (Com-
pressor operates) J
40 Sensor ground
— — — —
(G) (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5 V
K
• Steering wheel: Being turned
41 48 Power steering pressure sen-
Input [Engine is running]
(O/B) (B/P) sor
• Steering wheel: Not being 0.4 - 0.8 V L
turned
[Engine is running]
42 44
Battery current sensor Input • Battery: Fully charged*2 2.6 - 3.5 V
(BR) (G/B) M
• Idle speed
44 Sensor ground
— — — —
(G/B) (Battery current sensor)
N
45 49
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) Input [Ignition switch: ON] 2.2 V
(P) (L)
0 - 4.8 V
46 52 Engine coolant temperature O
Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
(Y) (B/R) sensor
coolant temperature.
47 36 Sensor power supply
— [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(G) (B) (Throttle position sensor) P
Sensor ground
48
— (Power steering pressure — — —
(B/P)
sensor)
[Engine is running] 1.8 V
49 112
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) Input • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
(L) (B)
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm ratio.
EC-365
ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
0 - 4.8 V
50 56
Intake air temperature sensor Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
(L/Y) (G/B)
air temperature.
(R/Y) (G/B) (Battery current sensor)
Sensor ground
52 (Engine coolant temperature
— — — —
(B/R) sensor/Engine oil tempera-
ture sensor)
53 57
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Input [Ignition switch: ON] 2.2 V
(V) (LG)
0 - 4.8 V
54 52
Engine oil temperature sensor Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
(G) (B/R)
oil temperature.
Sensor power supply
55 48
(Power steering pressure — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(SB) (Y)
sensor)
Sensor ground
56
— (Mass air flow sensor/Intake — — —
(G/B)
air temperature sensor)
[Engine is running] 1.8 V
57 112
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Input • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
(LG) (B)
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm ratio.
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 0.9 - 1.2 V
58 56 • Idle speed
Mass air flow sensor Input
(O) (G/B) [Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 1.6 - 1.9 V
Sensor power supply
59 64
[Camshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(G/W) (B/R)
(PHASE) (Bank 1)]
Sensor ground
60
— [Crankshaft position sensor — — —
(Y/B)
(POS)]
(B) (GR)
Knock sensor (Bank 1) Input
• Idle speed 2.5 V*1
(W) (GR)
Knock sensor (Bank 2) Input
• Idle speed 2.5 V*1
Sensor power supply

63 68
[Camshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(R/W) (Y/G)
(PHASE) (Bank 2)]
Sensor ground
64
— [Camshaft position sensor — — —
(B/R)
(PHASE) (Bank 1)]
EC-366
ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
4.0 - 5.0 V
EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: C
pending on rpm at idle
JMBIA0041GB
65 60 Crankshaft position sensor D
Input
(W/B) (Y/B) (POS)
4.0 - 5.0 V
E
[Engine is running]
F
JMBIA0042GB
67 Sensor ground
— — — —
(GR) (Knock sensor) G
Sensor ground
68
— [Camshaft position sensor — — —
(Y/G)
(PHASE) (Bank 2)] H
3.0 - 5.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition I
• Idle speed
NOTE:
pending on rpm at idle J
69 68 Camshaft position sensor JMBIA0045GB
Input
(BR/W) (Y/G) (PHASE) (Bank 2)
3.0 - 5.0 V
K
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm L
JMBIA0046GB
M
3.0 - 5.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
N
NOTE:
pending on rpm at idle O
70 64 Camshaft position sensor JMBIA0045GB
Input
(W/R) (B/R) (PHASE) (Bank 1)
3.0 - 5.0 V
P
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
JMBIA0046GB
EC-367
ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
(BR/W) (G) (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12 V
75 112 Intake valve timing control so-
Output
(Y) (B) lenoid valve (Bank 2) [Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000rpm
JMBIA0038GB
Sensor power supply

76 60
[Crankshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(R/G) (Y/B)
(POS)]
77 112 Power supply for ECM (Back- BATTERY VOLTAGE
Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(W/L) (B) up) (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12 V
78 112 Intake valve timing control so-
Output
(R/L) (B) lenoid valve (Bank 1) [Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000rpm
JMBIA0038GB

• Engine stopped
0.5 - 1.0 V
81 84 Accelerator pedal position leased
Input
(W) (B) sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
4.2 - 4.8 V
pressed
• Engine stopped
0.25 - 0.50 V
82 100 Accelerator pedal position leased
Input
(O) (G) sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
2.0 - 2.5 V
pressed
Sensor power supply
83 84
(Accelerator pedal position — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(BR) (B)
sensor 1)
Sensor ground
84
— (Accelerator pedal position — — —
(B)
sensor 1)
EC-368
ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
4V EC
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
0V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON] C
85 92 1V
ASCD steering switch Input • CANCEL switch: Pressed
(Y) (BR)
• RESUME/ACCELERATE 3V D
switch: Pressed
2V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed E
Sensor power supply
87 100
(Accelerator pedal position — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(GR) (G)
sensor 2)
F
88 Input/
— Data link connector — —
(O) Output
92 Sensor ground
— — — — G
(BR) (ASCD steering switch)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
93 112
Ignition switch Input BATTERY VOLTAGE
(BR) (B) [Ignition switch: ON] H
(11 - 14 V)
1V
[Engine is running] I
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes de- J
pending on rpm at idle
94 112 JMBIA0076GB
Engine speed output signal Output
(GR) (B) K
1V
[Engine is running] L
M
JMBIA0077GB
97 Input/
— CAN communication line — —
(P) Output
N
98 Input/
— CAN communication line — —
(L) Output
Sensor ground
100 O
— (Accelerator pedal position — — —
(G)
sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
102 112 • Selector lever: P or N (11 - 14 V) P
PNP signal Input
(R) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
0V
• Selector lever: Except above
105 112 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(V) (B) (11 - 14 V)
EC-369
ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
0V
• Brake pedal: Fully released
106 112
Stop lamp switch Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(SB) (B) BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Slightly de-
(11 - 14 V)
pressed
107
(B)
108
(B)
• Brake pedal: Slightly de- 0V
110 112 pressed
ASCD brake switch Input
(G) (B)
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14 V)
111
(B)
112
(B)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: This may vary depending on internal resistance of the tester.
*2: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-3, "How to Handle Battery".
EC-370
ECM
Wiring Diagram—ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM— INFOID:0000000003856869
EC
JCBWM0560GB
P
EC-371
ECM
JCBWM0561GB
EC-372
ECM
EC
JCBWM0562GB
EC-373
ECM
JCBWM0563GB
EC-374
ECM
EC
JCBWM0564GB
EC-375
ECM
JCBWM0565GB
EC-376
ECM
EC
JCBWM0566GB
EC-377
ECM
JCBWM0567GB
EC-378
ECM
EC
JCBWM0568GB
EC-379
ECM
JCBWM0569GB
EC-380
ECM
EC
JCBWM0570GB
EC-381
ECM
JCBWM0571GB
EC-382
ECM
EC
JCBWM0572GB
EC-383
ECM
JCBWM0573GB
EC-384
ECM
EC
JCBWM0574GB
EC-385
ECM
JCBWM0575GB
Fail safe INFOID:0000000003856870
NON DTC RELATED ITEM
EC-386
ECM
Engine operating condi- Reference A

Detected items Remarks
tion in fail-safe mode page
Engine speed will not Malfunction indicator When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM cannot warn the
rise more than 2,500 rpm circuit driver by illuminating MI when there is malfunction on engine control
EC
due to the fuel cut system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related
diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the EC-346
driver that engine control system malfunctions and MI circuit is open by C
means of operating the fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MI
circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
D
DTC RELATED ITEM
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

E
P0011 Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
P0021 control does not function.
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
F
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
P0118 ture sensor circuit CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
G
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F) H
or START
Approx. 4 minutes or more after
80°C (176°F)
engine starting
I
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running. J
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal K
P0223 condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor The cooling fan operates (Highest) while engine is running. L
P0605 ECM (When ECM calculation function is a malfunctioning:)
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
ECM deactivates ASCD operation. M
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
N
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition O
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
EC-387
ECM
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P2119 Electric throttle control ac- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
tuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator because of regulating the throttle open-
ing to 20 degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is being driver, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle
stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P2128 condition.
P2138 So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000003856871
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 • U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
• P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor
• P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
• P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
• P0605 P0607 ECM
• P0643 Sensor power supply
• P0705 P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
• P1550 P1551 P1552 P1553 P1554 Battery current sensor
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P1700 CVT control system
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
EC-388
ECM
A
2 • P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
• P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 EC
• P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
• P0603 ECM power supply C
• P0710 P0715 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0746 P0776 P0778 P0840 P0845 P1740 CVT related sensors, solenoid valves
and switches
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
• P1720 Vehicle speed sensor D
• P1777 P1778 CVT step motor
• P1800 P1801 VIAS control solenoid valve
• P1805 Brake switch
• P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay
E
• P2101 Electric throttle control function
• P2118 Throttle control motor
3 • P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control F
• P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
• P0300 - P0306 Misfire
• P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
• P1212 TCS communication line G
• P1564 ASCD steering switch
• P1572 ASCD brake switch
• P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
H
• P1715 Primary speed sensor
• P2119 Electric throttle control actuator
DTC Index INFOID:0000000003856872

I
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
1
DTC* J
Items Reference
CONSULT-III SRT code Trip MI
(CONSULT-III screen terms) page
ECM*3
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 — 1 × EC-135 K
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 — 2 — EC-135
NO DTC IS DETECTED. L
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — Flashing*6 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — 2 — EC-136
M
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — 2 — EC-136
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — 2 × EC-140
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — 2 × EC-140 N
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — 2 × EC-143
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — 2 × EC-143
O
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 — 2 × EC-140
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 — 2 × EC-140
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 — 2 × EC-143 P
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 — 2 × EC-143
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — 2 × EC-146
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P0081 0081 — 2 × EC-146
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0102 0102 — 1 × EC-149
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0103 0103 — 1 × EC-149
EC-389
ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference
ECM*3
GST*2
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0112 0112 — 2 × EC-154
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0113 0113 — 2 × EC-154
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — 1 × EC-157
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — 1 × EC-157
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 — 1 × EC-160
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 — 1 × EC-160
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — 2 × EC-163
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — 2 × EC-167
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — 2 × EC-170
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × 2 × EC-173
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × 2 × EC-178
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × 2 × EC-184
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × 2 × EC-192
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 — 2 × EC-163
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 — 2 × EC-167
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 — 2 × EC-170
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 × 2 × EC-173
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 × 2 × EC-178
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 × 2 × EC-184
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × 2 × EC-192
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — 2 × EC-198
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — 2 × EC-202
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — 2 × EC-198
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — 2 × EC-202
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 — 1 × EC-206
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 — 1 × EC-206
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — 2 × EC-209
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — 2 × EC-209
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — 2 × EC-209
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — 2 × EC-209
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — 2 × EC-209
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — 2 × EC-209
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — 2 × EC-209
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — 2 — EC-215
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — 2 × EC-218
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — 2 × EC-222
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — 2 × EC-222
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × 2 × EC-226
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × 2 × EC-226
EC-390
ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference A
ECM*3
GST*2
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — 2 × EC-231 EC
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 — 2 × EC-234
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — 2 — EC-236
C
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — 2 × EC-238
ECM P0605 0605 — 1 or 2 × or — EC-240
ECM P0607 0607 — 1 × EC-242 D
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — 1 × EC-243
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — 2 × TM-47
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — 1 × TM-50 E
INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC P0715 0715 — 2 × TM-52
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 — 2 × TM-55

F
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — 2 × TM-62
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — 2 × TM-64
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — 2 × TM-66 G
PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN P0746 0746 — 1 × TM-68
PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN P0776 0776 — 2 × TM-70
H
PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC P0778 0778 — 2 × TM-72
TR PRS SENS/A CIRC P0840 0840 — 2 × TM-74
TR PRS SENS/B CIRC P0845 0845 — 2 × TM-80 I
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — 2 × EC-245
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — 2 — EC-249
J
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — 1 × EC-250
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1225 1225 — 2 — EC-254
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1226 1226 — 2 — EC-256 K
BAT CURRENT SENSOR P1550 1550 — 2 — EC-258
L
BAT CURRENT SENSOR P1554 1554 — 2 — EC-267 M
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — 1 — EC-270
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — 1 — EC-273
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — 1 — EC-278
N
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 — 2 — SEC-31
ID DISCORD IMM-ECM P1611 1611 — 2 — SEC-32
O
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 — 2 — SEC-34
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 — 2 — SEC-35
DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 — 2 — SEC-38 P
CVT C/U FUNCT P1700 1700 — 1 — EC-280
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 — 2 — EC-281
V/SP SEN(A/T OUT) P1720 1720 — 2 — EC-283
LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC P1740 1740 — 2 × TM-94
STEP MOTR CIRC P1777 1777 — 1 × TM-97
EC-391
ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference
ECM*3
GST*2
STEP MOTR FNC P1778 1778 — 2 × TM-100
VIAS S/V-1 P1800 1800 — 2 — EC-285
VIAS S/V-2 P1801 1801 — 2 — EC-288
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — 2 — EC-291
ETC MOT PWR-B1 P2100 2100 — 1 × EC-294
ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 P2101 2101 — 1 × EC-296
ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — 1 × EC-294
ETC MOT-B1 P2118 2118 — 1 × EC-300
ETC ACTR-B1 P2119 2119 — 1 × EC-302
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — 1 × EC-304
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — 1 × EC-304
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — 1 × EC-307
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — 1 × EC-307
TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 — 1 × EC-311
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — 1 × EC-314
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — 2 × EC-318
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P2A03 2A03 — 2 × EC-318
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MI illuminates.
*6: When the ECM is in the mode that displays SRT status, MI may flash. For the details, refer to “How to Display SRT Status”.
How to Set SRT Code INFOID:0000000003856873
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on “SRT Item”.
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained below. The driving pat-
tern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
EC-392
ECM
DRIVING PATTERN
A
EC
PBIB3622E
P
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
EC-393
ECM
• Sea level
• Flat road
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
sis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 46 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3 V).
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 46 and ground is lower than 1.4 V).
• The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 95 and ground is less than 4.1 V).
Pattern 2:
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
• Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
• Release the accelerator pedal during deceleration of vehicle speed
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
• The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-
state driving.
• If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted
again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
PBIB2244E
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position.
Selector lever position is D.
Test Value and Test Limit INFOID:0000000003856874
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of ISO 15031-5.

The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID (OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (eg., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 is displayed)
EC-394
ECM
Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Description
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 83H 0BH
cycle
C
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 84H 0BH
cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test D
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 E
01H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
(Bank 1) P0133 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0133 88H 04H
Lean)
F
P2A00 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A00 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
G
HO2S P0130 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0133 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
Minimum sensor output voltage for test H
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test

02H P0137 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle I
P0138 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0139 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage
J
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle

03H P0144 08H 0CH K
(Bank 1) cycle
L
EC-395
ECM
Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
P0151 84H 0BH
cycle
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
05H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
(Bank 2) P0153 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0153 88H 04H
Lean)
P2A03 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A03 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
HO2S P0150 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0153 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle

06H P0157 08H 0CH
(Bank 2) cycle
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle

07H P0164 08H 0CH
(Bank2) cycle
P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0420 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
21H
(Bank1) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2423 83H 0CH
age
CATA- P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

LYST P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0430 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
22H
(Bank2) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2424 83H 0CH
age
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst
EC-396
ECM
Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 80H 96H
rate (short-term)
C
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 81H 96H
rate (long-term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference between D
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
P0400 83H 96H Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp
E
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output
39H
(Cap Off)
P0455 80H 0CH
voltage before and after pull down
F
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) 0.04inch)
G
Leak area index (for more than
EVAP P0456 80H 05H
EVAP control system 0.02inch)
SYSTEM 3CH
(Very small leak) Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
P0456 81H FDH H
system during monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control val-
ue close I
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input: P0031 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
41H 81H 0BH
(Bank 1) High Input: P0032 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Low Input: P0037 Converted value of Heater electric cur- J
42H 80H 0CH
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
(Bank 1) rent to voltage K
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input: P0051 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
45H 81H 0BH
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Low Input: P0057 Converted value of Heater electric cur- L
46H 80H 0CH
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
47H P0063 80H 0CH
(Bank 2) rent to voltage M
Secondary Air Injection System Incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect Flow Detected
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System Insuffi- N
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient Flow
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2445 82H 01H
Stuck Off
O
SEC-
Secondary Air Injection System High
OND- 71H Secondary Air system P2448 83H 01H
Airflow
ARY AIR
Bank1: P2440 Secondary Air Injection System Switch- P
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
P2440 85H 01H
ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2444 86H 01H
Stuck On
EC-397
ECM
Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Fuel injection system function P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long-term fuel trim
81H
(Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped
FUEL
SYSTEM P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long-term fuel trim
Fuel injection system function
82H
(Bank 2) P0174 or P0175 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
P0301 80H 24H
the first cylinder
P0302 81H 24H
the second cylinder
P0303 82H 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
the fourth cylinder
P0305 84H 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 85H 24H
the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
the seventh cylinder
P0308 87H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 88H 24H
the multiple cylinders
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of the
P0301 89H 24H
first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfires
P0302 8AH 24H
second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H
third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
fourth cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0308 90H 24H
fifth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H
the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
multiple cylinders
EC-398
ECM
Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
P0301 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv-
ing cycles
C
A2H No.1 Cylinder Misfire
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy-
P0301 0CH 24H
cles
D
A3H No.2 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- E
P0302 0CH 24H
cles
P0303 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv- F
P0303 0CH 24H
cles G
H
P0304 0CH 24H
cles
MISFIRE
I
P0305 0CH 24H J
cles
A7H No.6 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles K
P0306 0CH 24H
cles
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving L
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- M
P0307 0CH 24H
cles
ing cycles
N
A9H No.8 Cylinder Misfire
P0308 0CH 24H
cles
O
EC-399
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000003856875
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-337
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-411
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-334
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-76
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-347
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-11
EC-296,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-302
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-11
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-341
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-132
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2 EC-149
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3 EC-157
EC-163,
3 EC-167,
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit EC-170,
1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-173,
EC-318
EC-160,
EC-206,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-254,
EC-256,
2 2 EC-311
EC-243,
EC-304,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-307,
EC-314
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-215
EC-400
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-218 F
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-222
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-234
G
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-236
EC-238,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-240 H
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-146
cuit
PNP signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-245 I
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 circuit 1 EC-285
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 circuit 1 EC-288
J
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-348
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-329
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HAC-159 K
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-80
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on the next figure) L
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

M
EC-401
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FL-9
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-4
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-26
Air cleaner EM-26
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-26
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-29
Air leakage from intake manifold/ EM-29,
Collector/Gasket EM-32
Cranking Battery PG-109
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit CHG-20
STR-5,
Starter circuit 3
1 STR-6
Signal plate 6 EM-104
TM-48,
PNP signal 4
TM-214
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-97
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-110
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
EC-402
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Valve Timing chain EM-65 F
mecha-
Camshaft EM-84
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-65
G
Intake valve
3 EM-97
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ H
Gasket EM-34, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
4
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- LU-7, LU- I
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion 10, LU-11,
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-13
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7 J
Cooling CO-12,
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-12
Thermostat 5 CO-23 K
Water pump CO-18
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-2
L
Cooling fan CO-16
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminat- 5
CO-8
ed coolant M
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
1 1 SEC-14
NATS)
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. N
EC-403
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED)

If the engine speed is above 1,400 rpm under no load (for example, the selector lever position is P or N and
engine speed is over 1,400 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-27,
EC-404
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT EC
WARNING: D
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
F
connectors.
G
WARNING: H
generated parts. I
headlamp ON in other conditions. Connect the power supply to the vehicle-side connector. J
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction. K
• Never perform HID circuit inspection with a tester. L
M
N
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and CVT INFOID:0000000003856880
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will illuminate the malfunction indicator MI to warn the driver of
a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
EC-405
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION:
• Always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or
inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause
the MI to illuminate.
• Always connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to illuminate due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-96, "Description".
• Always to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MI to illuminate due to the short circuit.
• Always connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may
cause the MI to illuminate due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Always erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000003856881
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Never attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative bat-
tery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
• Never disassemble ECM.

• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Thus, engine operation can vary slightly in
this case. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Never replace parts because of a slight
variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related diagnostic information will be lost
within 24 hours.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
- Freeze frame data
- Test values
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it
securely with a lever (1) as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
2 : ECM
A : Loosen
PBIB2947E
EC-406
PRECAUTIONS
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, never damage pin terminals (bends or break). A
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin ter-
minal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
EC
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away C
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
PBIB0090E
of ICs, etc. D
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and check ECM functions properly. Refer to
EC-357, "Reference Value". E
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Never clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
• Never disassemble electric throttle control actuator. F
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Never shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS). G
MEF040D
H
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Component Func- I
tion Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
K
SAT652J
EC-407
PRECAUTIONS
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow
the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
• Never use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/out-
put voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's tran-
sistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
SEF348N
• B1 indicates bank 1, B2 indicates bank 2 as shown in the fig-

ure.
• Never operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
SEC893C
• Never depress accelerator pedal when starting.

• Immediately after starting, never rev up engine unnecessarily.
• Never rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
EC-408
PRECAUTIONS
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to
observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic A
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con-
trol units.
EC
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Never let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave C
ratio can be kept smaller.
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
SEF708Y
EC-409
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000003943273

Fuel tube adapter Measuring fuel pressure
PBIB3043E

Quick connector re- Removes fuel tube quick connectors in engine
lease room
PBIC0198E
Socket wrench Removes and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditions the exhaust system threads before

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
seize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricates oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)
S-NT779
EC-410
FUEL PRESSURE
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
FUEL PRESSURE
EC
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III C
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
D
3. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
F
2. Start engine.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: H
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
• Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel I
pressure cannot be completely released because J32 models do not have fuel return system.
• Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains seal ability.
J
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release.
• Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
• Keep fuel hose connections clean. K
3. Install Fuel pressure adapter (B) and Fuel pressure gauge (A)
as shown in figure.
• Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres- L
sure gauge adapter.
• When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality. M
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump) and check for fuel
leakage.
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. N
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge kit.
• During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel JMBIA1392ZZ
connection every 3 minutes. O
At idling : Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. P
8. Check the following.
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel filter for clogging
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
9. If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part.
EC-411
FUEL PRESSURE
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero.
EC-412
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
EC
1. Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
C
2. Check EVAP canister as per the following:
a. Block port (B). Orally blow air through port (A).
Check that air flows freely through port (C). D
b. Block port (A). Orally blow air through port (B).
Check that air flows freely through port (C).
E
F
PBIB0663E
3. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, stick- G
ing, etc.
a. Wipe clean valve housing.
H
SEF989X J
b. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

K
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar, 0.156 - 0.204 kg/
Pressure:
cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
–6.0 to –3.4 kPa (–0.06 bar to –-0.034bar, –0.061 to –
Vacuum: L
0.035 kg/cm2, –0.87 to –0.49 psi)
c. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
M
SEF943S
EC-413
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ25DE, VQ35DE]

Idle Speed INFOID:0000000003856889
Condition Specification
No load (in P or N position) 600 ± 50 rpm
Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000003856890
Condition Specification
No load (in P or N position) 12 ± 5° BTDC
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000003856891
Condition Specification (Using CONSULT-III or GST)

At idle 10 – 35 %
At 2,500 rpm 10 – 35 %
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000003856892
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)

Output voltage at idle (in N position) 0.9 – 1.2 V*
2.0 – 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
7.0 – 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
EC-414
ENGINE
SECTION
FUEL SYSTEM
FL FL
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER F
AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ......................... 5
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Exploded View .......................................................... 5
General Precautions ................................................. 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 G
Inspection ................................................................. 8
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
FUEL TANK ....................................................... 9
PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Exploded View .......................................................... 9
H
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 4 Inspection ................................................................10
I
FUEL SYSTEM .................................................... 4 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Inspection .................................................................. 4 (SDS) ............................................................ 11
Quick Connector ....................................................... 4 J
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 5 (SDS) ................................................................. 11
Fuel Tank .................................................................11
K
FL-1
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following.
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop.
• Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
• Never smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area.
CAUTION:
• Use gasoline required by the regulations for octane number. Refer to GI-29, "Fuel".
• Before removing fuel line parts, perform out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in
safe area.
- Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-411, "Inspection".
- Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
• Always replace O-ring and clamps with new ones.
• Never kink or twist tubes when they are being installed.
• Never tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
• After installing tubes, check there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps.
- Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). Then check
for fuel leakage at connections.
- Start engine and rev it up and check for fuel leakage at connections.
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the
“MI” may come on.
• For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to EC-76, "System Diagram".
FL-2
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
FL

C
Lock ring wrench Removing and installing lock ring
E
ZZA0122D
FL-3
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM
Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attach-
ment, leakage, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or dete-
rioration.
A : Engine
B : Fuel line
C : Fuel tank
If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.
JPBIA0129ZZ
Quick Connector INFOID:0000000003793249
CAUTION:
• After connecting fuel tube quick connectors, check quick con-
nectors are secure.
1 : Quick connector
2 : Retainer
A : Hard tube (or the equivalent)
B : Connection (cross-section)
C : Resin tube
D : To under floor fuel line
E : To fuel tank
F : Tab
G : Disconnection
• Ensure that connector and resin tube never contact any adja-
cent parts.
JPBIA0130ZZ
FL-4
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
FL
JPBIA2201GB J
Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and

1. Lock ring 2. 3. Seal packing
fuel pump assembly
K
: Vehicle front

L
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” when working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-2, "General Precautions". M
REMOVAL
1. Check fuel level on fuel gauge. If fuel gauge indicates more than N
the level as shown in the figure (full or almost full), drain fuel
from fuel tank until fuel gauge indicates level as shown in the fig-
ure or below.
NOTE: O
Because fuel will be spilled when removing fuel level sensor
units for the top of the fuel is above the fuel level sensor units
installation surface. P
• As a guide, fuel level becomes the position as shown in the
figure or below when approximately 10 (2-1/4 Imp gal) of
fuel are drained from fuel tank. JPBIA2224ZZ
• In a case that fuel pump does not operate, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
a. Insert hose of less than 25 mm (0.98 in) in diameter into fuel filler tube through fuel filler opening to draw
fuel from fuel filler tube.
FL-5
b. Disconnect fuel filler hose from fuel filler tube. Refer to FL-9, "Exploded View".
c. Insert hose into fuel tank through fuel filler hose to draw fuel from fuel tank.
2. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-411, "Inspection".
3. Open fuel filler lid.
4. Open filler cap and release the pressure inside fuel tank.
5. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-98, "Exploded View" (WITH VENTILATION SEAT) or SE-140,
"Exploded View" (WITHOUT VENTILATION SEAT).
6. Peel off floor carpet, then remove inspection hole cover units by
turning clips clockwise by 90 degrees.
PBIC2520E
7. Disconnect harness connector and quick connector.
PBIC2521E
Disconnect quick connector as follows:

• Hold the sides of connector, push in tabs (B) and pull out fuel
feed tube.
A : Pull
• If quick connector sticks to tube of fuel level sensor unit, push
and pull quick connector several times until they start to move.
Then disconnect them by pulling.
JPBIA0134ZZ
CAUTION:
FL-6
• Quick connector (1) can be disconnected when the tabs
(F) are completely depressed. Never twist it more than A
necessary.
B : Connection (Cross-section)
FL
D : To under floor fuel line
E : To fuel tank
G : Disconnection
C
• Never use any tools to disconnected quick connector.
• Keep resin tube (C) away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the resin tube.
D
• Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from
getting on resin tube.
• Never bend or twist resin tube during installation and dis-
connection. E
• Never remove the remaining retainer (2) on hard tube (or
the equivalent) (A) except when resin tube or retainer is
replaced. F
• When resin tube or hard tube (or the equivalent) is
replaced, also replace retainer with new one.
Retainer color : White G

JPBIA0130ZZ
• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid dam-

age and foreign materials, cover them completely with H
plastic bags (A) or something similar.
JPBIA0135ZZ
K
8. Remove lock ring for fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel
pump assembly with fuel tank lock ring wrench (commercial ser-
vice tool) by turning counterclockwise. L
N
PBIC0240E
9. Remove fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly O
(1).
• Never bend float arm during removal.
• Never pollute the inside by residue fuel. Draw out avoiding
P
inclination by supporting with a cloth.
• Never cause impacts such by dropping when handling compo-
nents.
PBIC3780E
FL-7
INSTALLATION
Note to the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Fuel Level Sensor Unit
1. Install new seal packing to fuel tank without any twist.
2. Align (B) with (A) as shown in the figure. Install fuel level sensor
unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly to fuel tank (C).
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
• Never allow seal packing to drop.
• Never bend float arm during installing.
PBIC4584J
3. Install seal packing for fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel
pump assembly with lock ring wrench (commercial service tool)
by turning clockwise.
CAUTION:
Install lock ring horizontally.
PBIC0240E
Quick Connector
Connect quick connector as follows:
1. Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
2. Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click sound is
heard.
3. After connecting, check that the connection is secure by following method.
• Pull the tube and the connector to check they are securely
connected.
A : Pull
• Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
connector.
JPBIA0140ZZ

Use the following procedure to check for fuel leakage.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), then check connections for leakage by applying fuel pres-
sure to fuel piping.
2. Start engine and let it idle and check there are no fuel leakage at the fuel system connections.
FL-8
FUEL TANK
FUEL TANK
A
FL
J
JPBIA2202GB
1. Clamp 2. Vent hose 3. Clamp K

4. EVAP hose 5. Fuel tank 6. Fuel tank mounting band (RH)
7. Clip 8. Fuel tank protector 9. Fuel tank mounting band (LH)
10. Clamp 11. Fuel filler hose 12. Clamp L
13. Fuel filler tube 14. Grommet 15. Fuel filler cap
The measurement of hexagonal The measurement of hexagonal
A. B.
width across flats: 16 mm (0.63 in) width across flats: 14 mm (0.55 in) M
• In regard to the notation of torque in the figure, (A) shows an ISO standard, (B) shows a conventional stan-
dard. N
O
WARNING:
Be sure to read “General Precautions” when working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-2, "General Pre-
cautions".
P
REMOVAL
• Drain fuel from fuel tank if necessary. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".
• Perform work on level place.
1. Perform steps 2 to 7 of “REMOVAL” in “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP
ASSEMBLY” on fuel level sensor units. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove center muffler. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
3. Remove fuel tank protector.
FL-9
FUEL TANK
4. Remove rear parking brake cables. Refer to PB-5, "Exploded View".
5. Disconnect fuel filler hose, and vent hose at the position shown
in the figure.
6. Disconnect EVAP hose at EVAP canister side.
PBIC2528E
7. Support the lower part of fuel tank (1) with transmission jack (A).
CAUTION:
Support the position that fuel tank mounting bands never
engage.
JPBIA0145ZZ
8. Remove fuel tank mounting bands.

9. Supporting with hands, descend transmission jack carefully, and remove fuel tank.
CAUTION:
• Check that all connection points have been disconnected.
• Confirm there is no interference with vehicle.
10. Remove fuel filler tube, as necessary.
INSTALLATION
• Surely clamp fuel hoses and insert hose to the length below.
Fuel filler hose : 35 mm (1.38 in)

The other hoses : 25 mm (0.98 in)
• Be sure hose clamp is not placed on swelled area of fuel tube.
• Tighten fuel filler hose clamp so that the remaining length of screw thread becomes to the following.
Fuel filler tube side : 7 - 11 mm (0.28 - 0.43 in)

Fuel tank side : 5 - 9 mm (0.20 - 0.35 in)
• To connect quick connector, refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".

Use the following procedure to check for fuel leakage.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), and check connections for leakage by applying fuel pres-
sure to fuel piping.
2. Start engine and rev it up and check there are no fuel leakage at the fuel system tube and hose connec-
tions.
FL-10
Fuel Tank INFOID:0000000003793257
FL
Standard and Limit

C
Fuel tank capacity Approx. 70 (15-3/8 Imp gal)
Fuel recommendation Refer to GI-29
D
FL-11
ENGINE
SECTION
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EX EX
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 4 F
Inspection ................................................................. 4
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Removal and Installation ........................................... 2 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 5 G
PREPARATION ............................................ 3 EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 5
Exploded View .......................................................... 5
PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 H
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 Inspection ................................................................. 6
I
EX-1
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION:
• Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
• Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled down because the system will be hot
just after engine stops.
• Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge.
EX-2
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
EX

C
Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts
E
PBIC0190E
EX-3
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper attachment,

leakage, cracks, damage or deterioration.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
SMA211A
EX-4
EXHAUST SYSTEM
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EX
JPBIA2203GB K
1. Main muffler (RH) 2. Mounting rubber 3. Gasket

4. Exhaust front tube 5. Ring gasket 6. Mounting rubber L
7. Mounting rubber 8. Center muffler 9. Mounting rubber
10. Main muffler (LH) 11. Ring gasket 12. Mounting rubber
13. Dynamic damper M

N
REMOVAL
Disconnect each joint and mounting using power tool.
O
INSTALLATION
• If exhaust front tube stud bolts were removed, and install them and tighten to the specified torque below. P
: 14.7 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)

CAUTION:
• Always replace exhaust tube gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
• If heat insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace exhaust front tube/center muffler. If deposits
such as mud pile up on the heat insulator, remove them.
EX-5
EXHAUST SYSTEM
• Remove deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to avoid
gases leakage.
• When installing each mounting rubber, use silicon oil to avoid twisting.
• Temporarily tighten mounting nuts and bolts. Check each part for unusual interference, and then
tighten them to the specified torque.
• When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or unusual extension in up/down, front/rear
and right/left directions.

• Check clearance between tail tube and rear bumper is even.
• With engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises.
• Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue
stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration.
EX-6
ENGINE
SECTION STR
STARTING SYSTEM
STR
E
CONTENTS
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 2 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 13 F
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .......... 2 STARTING SYSTEM ......................................... 13

Work Flow ................................................................. 2 Symptom Table .......................................................13 G
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................... 5 PRECAUTION .............................................. 14
STARTING SYSTEM ........................................... 5 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 14 H
VQ25DE ....................................................................... 5 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
VQ25DE : System Diagram ...................................... 5 SIONER" .................................................................14
VQ25DE : System Description .................................. 5 I
VQ25DE : Component Parts Location ...................... 5 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 15
VQ25DE : Component Description ........................... 6
STARTER MOTOR ........................................... 15 J
VQ35DE ....................................................................... 6
VQ35DE : System Diagram ...................................... 6 VQ25DE .....................................................................15
VQ35DE : System Description .................................. 6 VQ25DE : Exploded View ........................................15
VQ35DE : Component Parts Location ...................... 7 VQ25DE : Removal and Installation ........................16 K
VQ35DE : Component Description ........................... 7 VQ25DE : Inspection ...............................................16
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS .......................... 8 VQ35DE .....................................................................20 L

VQ35DE : Exploded View ........................................20
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ....................................... 8 VQ35DE : Removal and Installation ........................21
Description ................................................................ 8 VQ35DE : Inspection ...............................................22
Diagnosis Procedure ................................................. 8 M
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT ....................................... 9 (SDS) ............................................................ 26
Description ................................................................ 9 N
Diagnosis Procedure ................................................. 9 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 26
STARTING SYSTEM ..........................................10 Starter Motor ...........................................................26
Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM - ................ 10 O
STR-1
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JPBIA0502GB
DETAILED FLOW
STR-2
NOTE:
If any malfunction is found, immediately disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. A
1.CHECK ENGINE START
Crank the engine and check that the engine starts.
STR
Does the engine start?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
C
2.CHECK THAT THE STARTER MOTOR STOPS
Check that the starter motor stops after starting the engine.
Does the starter motor stop? D
NO >> Replace magnetic switch.
E
3.CHECK THE ENGINE SPEED WITH CRANKING
Check that the engine turns at cranking.
Does engine turn by cranking? F
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK THE ENGINE SPEED WITH CRANKING G
Check that the engine speed is not low at cranking.
Does engine turn normally? H
YES >> Check ignition/fuel system.
NO >> Check charge condition, corrosion and connection condition of the battery. Refer to STR-2, "Work
Flow".
I
5.CHECK STARTER MOTOR ACTIVATION
Check that the starter motor turns at cranking.
Does starter motor turn? J
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 7.
6.CHECK STARTER MOTOR UNIT K
1. Remove starter motor.

2. Check that the gear shaft of starter motor rotates.
L
Does gear shaft turn?
YES >> Check pinion clutch. Refer to the following.
• VQ25DE models: STR-16, "VQ25DE : Inspection"
M
• VQ35DE models: STR-22, "VQ35DE : Inspection"
NO >> Check reduction gear, armature and gear shaft.
7.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT N
Check the following conditions.
• Fuse and fusible link
• Charge condition, corrosion and connection condition of the battery. Refer to STR-2, "Work Flow". O
Are these inspection results normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair as needed. P
8.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM WIRING
• “B” terminal circuit. Refer to STR-8, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• “S” terminal circuit. Refer to STR-9, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 9.
STR-3
NO >> Repair as needed.
9.CHECK MAGNETIC SWITCH OPERATION SOUND
Check that a magnetic switch operation sound can be heard when the ignition switch is set at the starting posi-
tion.
Does magnetic switch operation sound occur?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace magnetic switch.
10.PINION AND RING GEAR ENGAGEMENT CHECK
Check condition of pinion and ring gear mesh.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK STARTER MOTOR UNIT
• Adjust pinion movement. Refer to the following.
- VQ25DE models: STR-16, "VQ25DE : Inspection"
- VQ35DE models: STR-22, "VQ35DE : Inspection"
• Check pinion moving mechanism.
• Check ring gear.
NO >> Repair or replace, if necessary.
12.CHECK STARTER MOTOR UNIT
Check that the starter motor turns when connecting the positive ter-
minal (12 V) to starter motor terminal M and the negative terminal
(ground) to starter motor body.
Does the starter motor run?
YES >> Replace magnetic switch.
NO >> Repair starter motor.
SEL009Z
STR-4
STARTING SYSTEM
STARTING SYSTEM
VQ25DE
STR
VQ25DE : System Diagram INFOID:0000000003860417
JPBIA1991GB
J
VQ25DE : System Description INFOID:0000000003860418
K
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the engine block. With power and ground supplied, cranking occurs and the
engine starts.
L
VQ25DE : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000003860419
JPBIA2353ZZ
STR-5
STARTING SYSTEM
1. Park/neutral position switch 2. Starter motor 3. IPDM E/R

A. CVT assembly B. Engine room dash panel (LH)
VQ25DE : Component Description INFOID:0000000003860420
Component part Description

Park/neutral position switch supplies power to the starter relay in-
Park/neutral position switch side IPDM E/R when the selector lever is shifted to the P or N po-
sition.
CPU inside IPDM E/R controls the starter relay. Ignition relay in-
IPDM E/R side IPDM E/R supplies power to the park/neutral position switch
when ignition switch is ON or START.
The starter motor plunger closes and the motor is supplied with
Starter motor battery power, which in turn cranks the engine, when the “S” ter-
minal is supplied with electric power.
VQ35DE
VQ35DE : System Diagram INFOID:0000000003860421
JPBIA1665GB
VQ35DE : System Description INFOID:0000000003860422
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the engine block. With power and ground supplied, cranking occurs and the
engine starts.
STR-6
STARTING SYSTEM
VQ35DE : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000003860423
STR
D
JPBIA1756ZZ
1. Starter motor 2. BCM 3. TCM

E
4. IPDM E/R
A. Converter housing B. Behind the combination meter C. Engine room dash panel (LH)
VQ35DE : Component Description INFOID:0000000003860424

F
Component part Description G

TCM supplies power to the starter relay and starter control relay
TCM inside IPDM E/R when the selector lever is shifted to the P or N
position. H
BCM BCM controls the starter relay inside IPDM E/R.
IPDM E/R CPU inside IPDM E/R controls the starter control relay.
The starter motor plunger closes and the motor is supplied with I
Starter motor battery power, which in turn cranks the engine, when the “S” ter-
minal is supplied with electric power.
J
STR-7
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS >
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
The “B” terminal is constantly supplied with battery power.

CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis under the condition that engine cannot start by the following procedure.
1. Remove fuel pump fuse.
2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
2. Check that starter motor “B” terminal connection is clean and tight.
3. Check voltage between starter motor “B” terminal and ground.
Terminals
(+) Voltage (Approx.)
(–)
Starter motor “B” terminal Terminal
F49 (VQ25DE)
2 Ground Battery voltage
F10 (VQ35DE)
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check harness between battery and starter motor for open circuit.
2.CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTION STATUS (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
2. Check voltage between battery positive terminal and starter motor “B” terminal.
Terminals
(–)
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
(+) Starter motor
Terminal
“B” terminal
F49 (VQ25DE) When the ignition switch is Less than
Battery positive terminal 2
F10 (VQ35DE) in START position 0.5 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for poor continuity.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT STATUS (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
2. Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal.
Terminals
(+) (–)
When the ignition switch is in
Starter motor case Battery negative terminal Less than 0.2 V
START position
YES >> “B” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-2, "Work Flow".
NO >> Check the starter motor case and ground for poor continuity.
STR-8
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
A
The starter motor magnetic switch is supplied with power when the ignition switch is turned to START with the STR
selector lever “P” or “N”.
C
CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis under the condition that engine cannot start by the following procedure.
1. Remove fuel pump fuse.
2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. D
1.CHECK “S” CONNECTOR CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect “S” terminal.
4. Check voltage between starter motor harness connector and ground.
F
Terminals
(+)
Condition Voltage (Approx.) G
Starter motor harness (–)
Terminal
connector
F50 (VQ25DE) When the ignition switch H
1 Ground Battery voltage
F47 (VQ35DE) is in START position
YES >> “S” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-2, "Work Flow". I
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. J
2. Check continuity between starter motor “S” terminal and IPDM E/R harness connector.
Starter motor “S” terminal IPDM E/R harness connector K

Continuity
Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No.
F50 (VQ25DE)
1 E10 80 Existed L
F47 (VQ35DE)
YES >> Inspect IPDM E/R and power supply circuit. Refer to STR-2, "Work Flow".
M
NO >> Repair the harness.
STR-9
STARTING SYSTEM
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003860429
JCBWM0576GB
STR-10
STARTING SYSTEM
STR
JCBWM0577GB
STR-11
STARTING SYSTEM
JCBWM0578GB
STR-12
STARTING SYSTEM
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
STARTING SYSTEM
STR
Symptom Reference
C
No normal cranking
Refer to STR-2, "Work Flow".
Starter motor does not rotate
D
STR-13
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
ness connectors.
STR-14
STARTER MOTOR
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
STARTER MOTOR
VQ25DE
STR
VQ25DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003860436
REMOVAL C
JPBIA2371GB
K
1. Converter housing 2. “B” terminal harness 3. Starter motor “B” terminal nut
4. Starter motor “S” terminal nut 5. Starter motor mounting bolt 6. “S” terminal harness
7. Starter motor L
DISASSEMBLY M
STR-15
STARTER MOTOR
Type: S114-936
JSAIA0936GB
1. Magnetic switch assembly 2. Adjusting plate 3. Dust cover

4. Shift lever set 5. Pinion stopper clip 6. Pinion stopper
7. Pinion 8. Pinion spring 9. Gear case assembly
10. Center bracket (A) 11. Yoke assembly 12. Armature assembly
13. Brush holder assembly 14. Thrust washer 15. Rear cover
16. Internal gear 17. Planetary gear 18. Pinion stopper
19. Packing 20. Thrust washer 21. Center bracket (P)
22. Thrust washer 23. E-ring 24. Clutch gear assembly
VQ25DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003860437
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-109, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly and air ducts.
3. Disconnect the following unit connectors:
• ECM
• IPDM E/R
4. Remove the battery tray.
5. Remove the “B”terminal nut and “S” terminal nut.
6. Remove the starter motor mounting bolts.
7. Remove the starter motor upward from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VQ25DE : Inspection INFOID:0000000003860438
MAGNETIC SWITCH
• Before starting to check, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
STR-16
STARTER MOTOR
• Disconnect “M” terminal of starter motor.
1. Continuity test (between “S” terminal and switch body) A
A : “S” terminal
B : “B” terminal STR
C : “M” terminal
• Replace magnetic switch if continuity does not exist.
C
SKIB9002E
D
2. Continuity test (between “S” terminal and “M” terminal)

E
B : “B” terminal
C : “M” terminal F
SKIB9003E
H
PINION PROTRUSION LENGTH
• Compare movement “L” in height of pinion when it is pushed out
with magnetic switch energized and when it is pulled out by hand
I
until it touches stopper.
Movement “L” : Refer to SDS STR-26,

"Starter Motor". J
SKIB0230E
L
• If the measurement value is not in the specified area, adjust with
the adjusting plate.
M
O
JPBIA1984ZZ
PINION ASSEMBLY
P
STR-17
STARTER MOTOR
1. Inspect pinion teeth.
• Replace pinion if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check con-
dition of ring gear teeth.)
2. Inspect reduction gear teeth.
• Replace reduction gear if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also
check condition of armature shaft gear teeth.)
3. Check to see if pinion locks in one direction and rotates
smoothly in the opposite direction.
• Replace pinion assembly if it is locked or rotated in both direc-
tions or unusual resistance is evident.
SEL630BA
BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY

Brush
• Check wear of brush.
Minimum length of brush : Refer to SDS STR-26,

"Starter Motor".
• Replace brush if the measurement value is less than the specified
value.
SEL014Z
Brush Spring
• Check brush spring tension with brush spring detached from
brush.
Spring tension (with new : Refer to SDS STR-26,

brush) "Starter Motor".
• Replace brush spring if the measurement value is less than the
specified value.
SEL015Z
Brush Holder
1. Perform insulation test between brush holder (positive side) and
its base (negative side).
- Replace brush holder assembly if continuity does not exist.
2. Check brush to see if it moves smoothly.
- If brush holder is bent, replace it if sliding surface is dirty, clean.
SKIB0460E
YOKE CHECK
STR-18
STARTER MOTOR
Magnet is secured to yoke by bonding agent. Check magnet to see
that it is secured to yoke and for any cracks. Replace malfunctioning A
parts as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Never clamp yoke in a vise or strike it with a hammer.
STR
SEL305H
D
ARMATURE CHECK
1. Continuity test (between two segments side by side)
- Replace if continuity does not exist.
2. Insulation test (between each commutator bar and shaft) E
- Replace if continuity exists.
SKIB0461E
H
3. Check commutator surface.
- Grind commutator with No. 500 – 600 emery paper if the surface
is rough.
I
SEL020Z
L
4. Check diameter of commutator.
Commutator minimum di- : Refer to SDS STR-26,

M
ameter "Starter Motor".
- Replace armature assembly if the measurement value is less
than the specified value.
N
O
SEL021Z
STR-19
STARTER MOTOR
5. Check depth of insulating mold from commutator surface.
- Undercut to 0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.020 to 0.031 in) if the depth is 0.2
mm (0.008 in) or less.
SEL022Z
VQ35DE
VQ35DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003860439
REMOVAL
JPBIA1922GB
1. Converter housing 2. “B” terminal harness 3. Starter motor “B” terminal nut
4. Starter motor mounting bolt 5. Starter motor 6. “S” connector
STR-20
STARTER MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY
A
Type: M000TA0072
STR
JPBIA1777GB
I
1. Magnetic switch assembly 2. Adjusting plate 3. Gear case assembly
4. Pinion assembly 5. Stopper 6. Ring
7. Ring 8. Stopper 9. Yoke assembly
J
10. Armature assembly 11. Brush holder assembly 12. Metal
13. Rear cover 14. Gear assembly 15. Shift lever set
16. Clutch gear assembly 17. Center bracket 18. Packing K
19. Gear shaft
L
VQ35DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003860440
REMOVAL
M
1. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-109, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly and air ducts.
3. Disconnect the following unit connectors: N
• ECM
• TCM
• IPDM E/R
O
4. Remove the battery tray.
5. Disconnect the starter motor harness connectors.
6. Remove the “B” terminal nut. P
7. Remove the starter motor mounting bolts.
8. Remove the starter motor upward from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
STR-21
STARTER MOTOR
VQ35DE : Inspection INFOID:0000000003860441
MAGNETIC SWITCH
• Before starting to check, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
• Disconnect “M” terminal of starter motor.
1. Continuity test (between “S” terminal and switch body)
SKIB9002E
2. Continuity test (between “S” terminal and “M” terminal)
SKIB9003E
PINION PROTRUSION LENGTH

• Compare movement “L” in height of pinion when it is pushed out
with magnetic switch energized and when it is pulled out by hand
until it touches stopper.
Movement “L” : Refer to SDS STR-26,

"Starter Motor".
SKIB0230E
• If the measurement value is not in the specified area, adjust with

the adjusting plate.
JPBIA1984ZZ
PINION ASSEMBLY
STR-22
STARTER MOTOR
1. Inspect pinion teeth.
• Replace pinion if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check con- A
dition of ring gear teeth.)
2. Inspect reduction gear teeth.
• Replace reduction gear if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also STR
check condition of armature shaft gear teeth.)
3. Check to see if pinion locks in one direction and rotates
smoothly in the opposite direction.
C
• Replace pinion assembly if it is locked or rotated in both direc-
tions or unusual resistance is evident.
SEL630BA
D
BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY
Brush
• Check wear of brush. E
Minimum length of brush : Refer to SDS STR-26,

"Starter Motor".
F
• Replace brush if the measurement value is less than the specified
value.
G
SEL014Z H
Brush Spring
• Check brush spring tension with brush spring detached from
brush. I
Spring tension (with new : Refer to SDS STR-26,

brush) "Starter Motor". J
• Replace brush spring if the measurement value is less than the
specified value.
K
SEL015Z
Brush Holder L
1. Perform insulation test between brush holder (positive side) and
its base (negative side).
- Replace brush holder assembly if continuity does not exist. M
2. Check brush to see if it moves smoothly.
- If brush holder is bent, replace it if sliding surface is dirty, clean.
N
O
SKIB0460E
YOKE CHECK P
STR-23
STARTER MOTOR
Magnet is secured to yoke by bonding agent. Check magnet to see
that it is secured to yoke and for any cracks. Replace malfunctioning
parts as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Never clamp yoke in a vise or strike it with a hammer.
SEL305H
ARMATURE CHECK
1. Continuity test (between two segments side by side)
- Replace if continuity does not exist.
2. Insulation test (between each commutator bar and shaft)
- Replace if continuity exists.
SKIB0461E
3. Check commutator surface.

- Grind commutator with No. 500 – 600 emery paper if the surface
is rough.
SEL020Z
4. Check diameter of commutator.
Commutator minimum di- : Refer to SDS STR-26,

ameter "Starter Motor".
- Replace armature assembly if the measurement value is less
than the specified value.
SEL021Z
STR-24
STARTER MOTOR
5. Check depth of insulating mold from commutator surface.
- Undercut to 0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.020 to 0.031 in) if the depth is 0.2 A
mm (0.008 in) or less.
STR
G
SEL022Z
STR-25
Starter Motor INFOID:0000000003860442
Applied model VQ25DE VQ35DE

S114-936 M000TA0072
Type HITACHI make MITSUBISHI make
Reduction gear type
System voltage [V] 12
Terminal voltage [V] 11
No-load Current [A] Less than 90 Less than 90
Revolution [rpm] More than 2,700 More than 2,400
Minimum diameter of commutator [mm (in)] 28.0 (1.102) 28.0 (1.102)
Minimum length of brush [mm (in)] 10.5 (0.413) 5.5 (0.217)
15.0 – 20.4 (1.5 – 2.1, 3.4
Brush spring tension [N (kg, lb)] 16.2 (1.65, 3.64)
– 4.6)
Clearance between bearing metal and armature shaft [mm (in)] Less than 0.2 (0.008) Less than 0.2 (0.008)
Clearance “L” between pinion front edge and pinion stop-
[mm (in)] — —
per
Movement “L” in height of pinion assembly [mm (in)] 0.3 – 2.5 (0.012 – 0.098) 0.5 – 2.0 (0.020 – 0.079)
STR-26
ENGINE
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION ACC ACC
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 3 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .............. 3

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .......................................................... 3 G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Removal and Installation .......................................... 3
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 Inspection ................................................................. 4
H
ACC-1
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Service Manual.
WARNING:
ness connectors.
ACC-2
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
ACC
JPBIA2204GB J
1. Accelerator pedal assembly

: Vehicle front
K

L
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position sensor harness connector. M
2. Loosen mounting bolts, and remove accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble accelerator lever. Never remove accelerator pedal position sensor from
N
accelerator lever.
• Avoid impact from dropping etc. during handling.
• Be careful to keep accelerator lever away from water.
O
INSTALLATION
P
ACC-3
• Install the protrusion (A) of the bracket into the locating hole (B) of
the accelerator pedal assembly before tightening the accelerator
pedal assembly mounting bolts.
JPBIA2246ZZ

• Check accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the whole operation range when it is fully depressed and
released.
• Check accelerator pedal securely returns to the fully released position.
• For the electrical inspection of accelerator pedal position sensor, refer to EC-306, "Component Inspection",
EC-309, "Component Inspection" and EC-316, "Component Inspection".
- CAUTION:
When harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform “Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-15, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
ACC-4
TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

SECTION TM B
TM
E
CONTENTS
CVT: RE0F09B System Diagram ......................................................27 F
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 9 Component Parts Location ......................................28
Component Description ...........................................29 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 9
Work Flow ................................................................. 9 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .............................. 30
Diagnostic Work Sheet ............................................ 10 System Diagram ......................................................30
System Description ..................................................30 H
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................12 Component Parts Location ......................................31
Component Description ...........................................32
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 12 I
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 33
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING System Description ..................................................33
CONTROL UNIT : Precaution for TCM and CVT Component Parts Location ......................................34
Assembly Replacement .......................................... 12 Component Description ...........................................34 J
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 13 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 35

Diagnosis Description ..............................................35 K
CVT SYSTEM .....................................................13
System Diagram ...................................................... 13 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ............................ 37
Component Parts Location ...................................... 14 CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) ..............37
Diagnostic Tool Function .........................................40 L
MECHANICAL SYSTEM ....................................16
Cross-Sectional View .............................................. 16 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 41
System Diagram ...................................................... 17
M
System Description ................................................. 17 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 41
Component Parts Location ...................................... 18 Description ...............................................................41
Component Description ........................................... 19 DTC Logic ................................................................41
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................41 N
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM ....................20
System Diagram ...................................................... 20 P0615 START SIGNAL ..................................... 42
System Description ................................................. 20 Description ...............................................................42 O
Component Parts Location ...................................... 21 DTC Logic ................................................................42
Component Description ........................................... 22 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................42
CONTROL SYSTEM ..........................................23 P0703 STOP LAMP SWITCH ........................... 44 P
System Diagram ...................................................... 23 Description ...............................................................44
System Description ................................................. 23 DTC Logic ................................................................44
Component Parts Location ...................................... 25 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................44
Component Description ........................................... 26 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) ............45
LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ... 47
....27 Description ...............................................................47
TM-1
DTC Logic ............................................................... 47 P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 47 PERFORMANCE (LINE PRESSURE SOLE-
Component Inspection ............................................ 48 NOID VALVE) .................................................... 68
Description .............................................................. 68
P0710 CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Logic ............................................................... 68
... 50 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 68
Description .............................................................. 50
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole-
DTC Logic ............................................................... 50
noid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)] ........ 69
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 50
Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
Sensor) ................................................................... 51 PERFORMANCE (SEC PRESSURE SOLE-
P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRI SPEED NOID VALVE) .................................................... 70
Description .............................................................. 70
SENSOR) ........................................................... 52
DTC Logic ............................................................... 70
Description .............................................................. 52
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 70
DTC Logic ............................................................... 52
P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CVT (SEC- Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole-
ONDARY SPEED SENSOR) ............................. 55 noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid
Description .............................................................. 55 Valve)] ..................................................................... 71
DTC Logic ............................................................... 55 P0778 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
ELECTRICAL (SEC PRESSURE SOLENOID
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ...................... 59 VALVE) .............................................................. 72
Description .............................................................. 59 Description .............................................................. 72
DTC Logic ............................................................... 59 DTC Logic ............................................................... 72
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72
P0730 BELT DAMAGE ...................................... 60 noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid
Description .............................................................. 60 Valve)] ..................................................................... 73
DTC Logic ............................................................... 60
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 60 P0840 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
SENSOR A (SEC PRESSURE SENSOR) ......... 74
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SO- Description .............................................................. 74
LENOID VALVE ................................................. 62 DTC Logic ............................................................... 74
Description .............................................................. 62 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74
DTC Logic ............................................................... 62
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 62 P0841 PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION ........ 77
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Description .............................................................. 77
Solenoid Valve) ...................................................... 63 DTC Logic ............................................................... 77
P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK -UP) ... 64 Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole-
Description .............................................................. 64 noid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)] ........ 78
DTC Logic ............................................................... 64 Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 64 noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Valve)] ..................................................................... 78
Solenoid Valve) ...................................................... 65
Component Inspection (Lock-up Select Solenoid P0845 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
Valve) ..................................................................... 65 SENSOR B (PRI PRESSURE SENSOR) .......... 80
Description .............................................................. 80
P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE... 66 DTC Logic ............................................................... 80
Description .............................................................. 66 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 80
DTC Logic ............................................................... 66
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66 P0868 SECONDARY PRESSURE DOWN ........ 83
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole- Description .............................................................. 83
noid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)] ........ 67 DTC Logic ............................................................... 83
TM-2
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole- Description ............................................................. 103
noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid Wiring Diagram - CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - .. 103 A
Valve)] ..................................................................... 84 Component Function Check .................................. 105
P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 107 B
(POWER SUPPLY) .............................................85
Description .............................................................. 85 SPORT MODE SWITCH ................................. 108
DTC Logic ............................................................... 85 Description ............................................................. 108
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 85 Component Function Check .................................. 108 C
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........88
Description .............................................................. 88 ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 111 TM
DTC Logic ............................................................... 88
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 88 TCM ................................................................. 111
Reference Value .................................................... 111
P1722 ESTM VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ..........89 Wiring Diagram - CVT CONTROL SYSTEM - ....... 116 E
Description .............................................................. 89 Fail-safe ................................................................. 120
DTC Logic ............................................................... 89 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 121
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 89 DTC Index ............................................................. 121 F
P1723 CVT SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION ........91 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 123
Description .............................................................. 91
DTC Logic ............................................................... 91 SYSTEM SYMPTOM ....................................... 123 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91 Symptom Table ..................................................... 123
P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL PRECAUTION ............................................ 135

H
SYSTEM .............................................................93
Description .............................................................. 93
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 135
DTC Logic ............................................................... 93
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- I
SIONER" ............................................................... 135
P1740 LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
VALVE ................................................................94 tion after Battery Disconnect ................................. 135 J
Description .............................................................. 94 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 136
DTC Logic ............................................................... 94 Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 94 of CVT and Engine ................................................ 136
Precaution for TCM and CVT Assembly Replace- K
Component Inspection (Lock-up Select Solenoid
Valve) ...................................................................... 95 ment ....................................................................... 136
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit
P1745 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL .................96 Connector .............................................................. 136 L
Description .............................................................. 96 Precaution ............................................................. 138
DTC Logic ............................................................... 96 Service Notice or Precaution ................................. 138
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 96 ATFTEMP COUNT Conversion Table ................... 139 M
P1777 STEP MOTOR .........................................97 PREPARATION ......................................... 140
Description .............................................................. 97
DTC Logic ............................................................... 97 PREPARATION ............................................... 140 N
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97 Special Service Tools ............................................ 140
Component Inspection (Step Motor) ....................... 98 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 140
O
P1778 STEP MOTOR - FUNCTION ................. 100 ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................. 142
Description ............................................................ 100
DTC Logic ............................................................. 100 CVT FLUID ...................................................... 142
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100 Inspection .............................................................. 142 P
Changing ............................................................... 143
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ......... 102
Description ............................................................ 102 STALL TEST ................................................... 144
Component Function Check .................................. 102 Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 144
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 102 LINE PRESSURE TEST .................................. 146
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 103 Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 146
TM-3
ROAD TEST ..................................................... 148 Assembly .............................................................. 172
Description .............................................................148 Inspection .............................................................. 173
Check before Engine Is Started .............................148
Check at Idle ..........................................................149 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Cruise Test ............................................................150 (SDS) ......................................................... 174
CVT POSITION ................................................ 152 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................152 (SDS) ................................................................ 174
General Specification ............................................ 174
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 153 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ..................... 174
Stall Speed ............................................................ 174
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE .......... 153 Line Pressure ........................................................ 174
Exploded View .......................................................153
Solenoid Valves .................................................... 175
Removal and Installation .......................................153
CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor ............................ 175
Adjustment .............................................................154
Primary Speed Sensor .......................................... 175
CONTROL DEVICE ......................................... 155 Secondary Speed Sensor ..................................... 175
Exploded View .......................................................155 Step Motor ............................................................ 175
Removal and Installation .......................................155 Torque Converter .................................................. 175
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................156 CVT: RE0F10A
CONTROL CABLE .......................................... 157 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 176
Exploded View .......................................................157
Removal and Installation .......................................157 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 176
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................158 Work Flow ............................................................. 176
Diagnostic Work Sheet ......................................... 177
OIL PAN ........................................................... 159
Exploded View .......................................................159 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 179
Removal and Installation .......................................159 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Inspection ..............................................................160 CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 179
SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR ..................... 161 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Service After Replacing TCM
Exploded View .......................................................161
and Transaxle Assembly ....................................... 179
Inspection ..............................................................161 FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ........................... 181
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL .................... 162 CVT SYSTEM ................................................... 181
Exploded View .......................................................162
System Diagram ................................................... 181
Inspection ..............................................................163
MECHANICAL SYSTEM .................................. 183
AIR BREATHER HOSE ................................... 164 Cross-Sectional View ............................................ 183
Exploded View .......................................................164
System Diagram ................................................... 184
System Description ............................................... 184
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM ............................... 165 Component Parts Location ................................... 185
Exploded View .......................................................165 Component Description ........................................ 186
Removal and Installation .......................................165 HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM .................. 187
Inspection ..............................................................167
System Diagram ................................................... 187
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 168 System Description ............................................... 187
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY .............................. 168 Component Description ........................................ 189
Exploded View .......................................................168
CONTROL SYSTEM ......................................... 190
System Diagram ................................................... 190
Inspection ..............................................................170
System Description ............................................... 190
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ............ 172 Component Parts Location ................................... 192
Component Description ........................................ 193
TORQUE CONVERTER .................................. 172
Exploded View .......................................................172 LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM
Disassembly ..........................................................172 .. 194
TM-4
System Diagram .................................................... 194 P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CVT (SEC-
System Description ............................................... 194 ONDARY SPEED SENSOR) ........................... 222 A
Component Parts Location .................................... 195 Description ............................................................. 222
Component Description ......................................... 196 DTC Logic .............................................................. 222
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 222 B
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM ............................. 197
System Diagram .................................................... 197 P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL .................... 226
System Description ............................................... 197 Description ............................................................. 226
Component Parts Location .................................... 198 DTC Logic .............................................................. 226 C
Component Description ......................................... 199 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 226
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 200 P0730 BELT DAMAGE ................................... 228 TM
System Description ............................................... 200 Description ............................................................. 228
Component Parts Location .................................... 201 DTC Logic .............................................................. 228
Component Description ......................................... 201 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 228
E
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 202 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SO-
Diagnosis Description ........................................... 202 LENOID VALVE .............................................. 230
Description ............................................................. 230 F
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ........................... 204
DTC Logic .............................................................. 230
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) ........... 204
Diagnostic Tool Function ....................................... 207
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch
G
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 208 Solenoid Valve) ..................................................... 231
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 208 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK -UP) . 232
Description ............................................................ 208 Description ............................................................. 232 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 208 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 232
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch I
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 209 Solenoid Valve) ..................................................... 233
Description ............................................................ 209 Component Inspection (Lock-up Select Solenoid
DTC Logic ............................................................. 209 Valve) .................................................................... 233
J
P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE . 234
P0703 STOP LAMP SWITCH .......................... 210 Description ............................................................. 234
Description ............................................................ 210 DTC Logic .............................................................. 234 K
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 210 Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole-
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 211 noid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)] ....... 235
L
P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH.. 213 P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
Description ............................................................ 213 PERFORMANCE (LINE PRESSURE SOLE-
DTC Logic ............................................................. 213 NOID VALVE) .................................................. 236 M
Component Inspection (Park/Neutral Position DTC Logic .............................................................. 236
Switch) .................................................................. 214 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236 N
P0710 CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR noid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)] ....... 237
.. 216
Description ............................................................ 216 P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B O
DTC Logic ............................................................. 216 PERFORMANCE (SEC PRESSURE SOLE-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 216 NOID VALVE) .................................................. 238
Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Description ............................................................. 238 P
Sensor) .................................................................. 217 DTC Logic .............................................................. 238
P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRI SPEED Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole-
SENSOR) .......................................................... 218 noid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)] ....... 239
Description ............................................................ 218 Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole-
DTC Logic ............................................................. 218 noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 218 Valve)] ................................................................... 239
TM-5
P0778 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B DTC Logic ............................................................. 257
ELECTRICAL (SEC PRESSURE SOLENOID Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 257
VALVE) ............................................................ 240
P1740 LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID
Description .............................................................240
DTC Logic ..............................................................240
VALVE .............................................................. 258
Description ............................................................ 258
DTC Logic ............................................................. 258
noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid
Component Inspection (Lock-up Select Solenoid
Valve)] ...................................................................241
Valve) .................................................................... 259
P0840 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
P1745 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL ............... 260
SENSOR A (SEC PRESSURE SENSOR) ....... 242
Description ............................................................ 260
Description .............................................................242
DTC Logic ............................................................. 260
DTC Logic ..............................................................242
P1777 STEP MOTOR ....................................... 261
P0841 PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION ...... 245
Description ............................................................ 261
Description .............................................................245
DTC Logic ............................................................. 261
DTC Logic ..............................................................245
Component Inspection (Step Motor) ..................... 263
noid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)] .......246 P1778 STEP MOTOR - FUNCTION ................. 264
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole- Description ............................................................ 264
noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid DTC Logic ............................................................. 264
Valve)] ...................................................................246 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 264
P0868 SECONDARY PRESSURE DOWN ...... 247 SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ......... 266
Description .............................................................247 Description ............................................................ 266
DTC Logic ..............................................................247 Component Function Check ................................. 266
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................247 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 266
noid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)] .......248 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 267
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole- Description ............................................................ 267
noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid Wiring Diagram - CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - ... 267
Valve)] ...................................................................248 Component Function Check ................................. 269
P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 271
(POWER SUPPLY) .......................................... 249
Description .............................................................249 SPORT MODE SWITCH ................................... 272
DTC Logic ..............................................................249 Description ............................................................ 272
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................249 Component Function Check ................................. 272
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ........ 252
Description .............................................................252 ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 275
DTC Logic ..............................................................252
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................252 TCM .................................................................. 275
Reference Value ................................................... 275
P1722 ESTM VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ........ 253 Wiring Diagram - CVT CONTROL SYSTEM - ...... 279
Description .............................................................253 Fail-safe ................................................................ 283
DTC Logic ..............................................................253 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 284
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................253 DTC Index ............................................................. 284
P1723 CVT SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION ...... 255 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 286
Description .............................................................255
DTC Logic ..............................................................255 SYSTEM SYMPTOM ........................................ 286
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................255 Symptom Table ..................................................... 286
P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL PRECAUTION ........................................... 297

SYSTEM ........................................................... 257
Description .............................................................257
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 297
TM-6
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Inspection .............................................................. 322
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- A
SIONER" ............................................................... 297 PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR ........................... 323
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- Exploded View ....................................................... 323
tion after Battery Disconnect ................................. 297 Removal and Installation ....................................... 323
Inspection .............................................................. 323 B
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 298
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System
SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR .................... 324
of CVT and Engine ................................................ 298
Exploded View ....................................................... 324 C
Precaution for TCM and CVT Assembly Replace-
Removal and Installation ....................................... 324
ment ...................................................................... 298
Inspection .............................................................. 324
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit
Connector .............................................................. 298 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL .................... 325 TM
Precaution ............................................................. 299 Exploded View ....................................................... 325
Service Notice or Precaution ................................. 300 Removal and Installation ....................................... 325
ATFTEMP COUNT Conversion Table .................. 301 Inspection .............................................................. 326 E
PREPARATION ......................................... 302 OIL PUMP FITTING BOLT .............................. 327
Description ............................................................. 327
PREPARATION ................................................ 302 Exploded View ....................................................... 327 F
Special Service Tools ............................................ 302 Removal and Installation ....................................... 327
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 302 Inspection .............................................................. 327
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................. 304 G
AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................. 328
CVT FLUID ....................................................... 304 Exploded View ....................................................... 328
Inspection .............................................................. 304 H
Changing ............................................................... 305 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM .............................. 329
STALL TEST .................................................... 306 Exploded View ....................................................... 329
Removal and Installation ....................................... 329 I
Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 306
Inspection .............................................................. 331
LINE PRESSURE TEST ................................... 308
Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 308 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 332
J
ROAD TEST ..................................................... 310 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY .............................. 332
Description ............................................................ 310 Exploded View ....................................................... 332
Check before Engine Is Started ............................ 310 Removal and Installation ....................................... 332 K
Check at Idle ......................................................... 311 Inspection .............................................................. 334
Cruise Test ............................................................ 312
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ............ 335
L
CVT POSITION ................................................. 314
TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 314
HOUSING OIL SEAL ...................................... 335
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 315 Exploded View ....................................................... 335 M
Disassembly .......................................................... 335
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE ........... 315 Assembly ............................................................... 335
Exploded View ...................................................... 315 Inspection .............................................................. 336 N
CONTROL DEVICE .......................................... 317 (SDS) .......................................................... 337
Exploded View ...................................................... 317 O
Removal and Installation ....................................... 317 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 318 (SDS) ............................................................... 337
General Specification ............................................ 337 P
CONTROL CABLE ........................................... 319 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ..................... 337
Exploded View ...................................................... 319 Stall Speed ............................................................ 337
Removal and Installation ....................................... 319 Line Pressure ........................................................ 337
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 320 Solenoid Valves ..................................................... 338
OIL PAN ........................................................... 321 CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor ............................. 338
Primary Speed Sensor .......................................... 338
Exploded View ...................................................... 321
Secondary Speed Sensor ...................................... 338
TM-7
Step Motor .............................................................338 Torque Converter .................................................. 338
TM-8
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CVT: RE0F09B]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives signals from the vehicle speed sensor and PNP switch. Then it provides shift control or C
lock-up control via CVT solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of signals
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
CVT system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa- TM
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the E
operation of the CVT system. The CVT system must be in good
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve mal-
function, etc.
F
SAT631IB
G
It is much more difficult to diagnose a malfunction that occurs inter-
mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent malfunctions are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace- H
ment of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the malfunctions. A
road test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected I
should be performed. Follow the “DETAILED FLOW”.
J
SAT632I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a K

customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such malfunctions, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Work Sheet” as L
shown on the example (Refer to TM-10) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni- M
cally controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service Bulletins.
SEF234G N
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER O
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the diagnosis work sheet. Refer to TM-10, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
P
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
Check the following items based on the information obtained from the customer.
• Fail-safe. Refer to TM-120, "Fail-safe".
• CVT fluid inspection. Refer to TM-142, "Inspection".
• Line pressure test. Refer to TM-146, "Inspection and Judgment".
TM-9
• Stall test. Refer to TM-144, "Inspection and Judgment".
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
• Record DTC.
• Erase DTC. Refer to TM-35, "Diagnosis Description".
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the displayed DTC. Repair detected items.
>> GO TO 5.
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” for the displayed DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM 2
Confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Is any malfunction present?
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.ROAD TEST
Perform “ROAD TEST”. Refer to TM-148, "Description".
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SYMPTOM 3
YES >> GO TO 2.
INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER

KEY POINTS
• WHAT..... Vehicle & CVT model
• WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
• WHERE..... Road conditions
• HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN

Trans. Model Engine Mileage
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency o Continuous o Intermittent ( times a day)
TM-10
o Vehicle does not move. (o Any position o Particular position)
A
o No shift
o Lock-up malfunction
o Shift shock or slip (o N → D oN→R o Lock-up o Any drive position) B
Symptoms
o Noise or vibration
o No pattern select
o Others C
( )
Malfunction Indicator (MI) o Continuously lit o Not lit
TM
DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET
1 o Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. TM-120 E
o CVT fluid inspection, stall test and line pressure test
o CVT fluid inspection
o Leak (Repair leak location.) F
TM-142
o State
o Amount
2 o Stall test G
o Torque converter one-way clutch o Engine
o Reverse brake o Line pressure low TM-144
o Forward clutch o Primary pulley TM-146 H
o Steel belt o Secondary pulley
o Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:
o Perform self-diagnosis. I
3 TM-37
Enter checks for detected items.
o Perform road test. TM-148
J
4-1. Check before engine is started TM-148
4 4-2. Check at idle TM-149
4-3. Cruise test TM-150 K
o Check malfunction phenomena to repair or replace malfunctioning part after completing all road tests. TM-123
5 o Drive vehicle to check that the malfunction phenomenon has been resolved.
6 o Erase the results of the self-diagnosis from the TCM and the ECM.
L
TM-11
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Precaution for TCM
and CVT Assembly Replacement INFOID:0000000003848916
CAUTION:
• Check if new data (Unit ID) are entered correctly after replacing CVT assembly and erasing data in
TCM. (Connect CONSULT-III, and then turn ignition switch OFF.)
• When replacing CVT assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and erase the EEPROM in the
TCM if necessary.
EEPROM ERASING PATTERNS
CVT assembly TCM Erasing EEPROM in TCM Remarks

Not required because the EEPROM in the TCM is in
Replaced Replaced Not required the default state. (CVT assembly must be replaced
first.)
Not replaced Replaced Not required
the default state.
Required because data has been written in the EE-
Replaced Not replaced Required PROM in the TCM and because the TCM cannot write
data from the ROM assembly in the transmission.
METHOD FOR ERASING THE EEPROM IN THE TCM

2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
4. Press the brake pedal and turn the brake switch ON.
5. Press the accelerator pedal (0.5/8 - 4/8 throttle) not to exceed the half, and hold it in the half or less open
position. (This will set the closed throttle position signal to OFF and the wide open throttle position signal
to OFF.)
6. Perform “ERASE”.
7. Wait 3 seconds and then release the accelerator pedal.
METHOD FOR WRITING DATA FROM THE ROM ASSEMBLY IN THE TRANSAXLE
In the following procedure, the TCM reads data from the ROM assembly and writes it to the EEPROM in the
TCM.
1. Erase the EEPROM in the TCM.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
CHECK METHOD
• Standard: About 2 seconds after the ignition switch ON, the CVT indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds.
• Non-standard: Even after the ignition switch ON, the CVT indicator lamp does not light up after 2 seconds or
illuminates immediately.
CAUTION:
Perform in the “P” or “N” position.
Action for Non-standard
• Replace the CVT assembly.
• Replace the TCM.
TM-12
CVT SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F09B]
CVT SYSTEM
B
TM
JPDIA0755GB
TM-13
CVT SYSTEM
JPDIA0747ZZ
1. Sport mode switch 2. Shift position indicator 3. SPORT indicator lamp

4. TCM 5. Secondary speed sensor 6. Primary pressure sensor*1
7. Control valve assembly*2 8. CVT unit connector 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor
A. Center console B. Combination meter C. Engine room LH
D. CVT assembly E. Accelerator pedal, upper
*1: Primary pressure sensor is included in CVT assembly.

*2: Control valve assembly is included in CVT assembly.
NOTE:
The following components are included in control valve assembly (7).
• PNP switch
• Primary speed sensor
• Step motor
• Secondary pressure solenoid valve
• Line pressure solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
• Shift control valve
• Secondary valve
• Manual valve
• Lock-up select solenoid valve
TM-14
CVT SYSTEM
• CVT fluid temperature sensor
• Secondary pressure sensor A
• ROM assembly
TM
TM-15
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000003848919
SCIA7859E
1. Converter housing 2. Oil pump 3. Forward clutch

4. Reverse brake 5. Planetary carrier 6. Primary pulley
7. Steel belt 8. Sun gear 9. Side cover
10. Internal gear 11. Secondary pulley 12. Final gear
13. Differential case 14. Idler gear 15. Reduction gear
16. Taper roller bearing 17. Output gear 18. Parking gear
19. Input shaft 20. Torque converter
TM-16
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
TM
P
JPDIA0755GB
Transmits the power from the engine to the drive wheel.
TM-17
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
JPDIA0747ZZ

A. Control device B. Combination meter C. Engine room LH

NOTE:
• PNP switch
• Step motor
• Secondary valve
• Manual valve
TM-18
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
• ROM assembly
B
Item Function
The torque converter is the device that increases the engine torque as well as the con- C
Torque converter
ventional AT and transmits it to the transaxle.
The adoption of a trochoidal oil pump with a flow control valve actuated directly by the
Oil pump engine enables the sufficient discharge from an oil pump in the low-rpm range and the TM
adequate discharge adjustments in the high-rpm range.
Planetary gear
Perform the transmission of drive power and the switching of forward/backward move-
Forward clutch E
ment.
Reverse brake
Primary pulley It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direc-
tion) and the steel belt (the steel star wheels are placed continuously and the belt is guid- F
Secondary pulley
ed with the multilayer steel rings on both sides). The groove width changes according to
wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status to overdrive status continuously
Steel belt with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and secondary pul-
ley. G
Output gear
Idler gear
Reduction gear consists of primary deceleration (output gear and idler gear in pair) and H
Reduction gear secondary deceleration (reduction gear and final gear in pair). Each of them uses a he-
lical gear.
Final gear
Differential I
Manual shaft
Parking rod The parking rod rotates the parking pole and the parking pole engages with the parking
gear when the manual shaft is in “P” position. As a result the parking gear and the output J
Parking pawl axis are fixed.
Parking gear
K
TM-19
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM
JPDIA0589GB
The hydraulic control mechanism consists of the oil pump directly driven by the engine, the hydraulic control
valve that controls line pressure and transmission, and the input signal line.
LINE PRESSURE AND SECONDARY PRESSURE CONTROL
• When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine driving force is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM,
the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve and secondary pressure solenoid valve.
• Line pressure solenoid valve activates pressure regulator valve, and line pressure from oil pump is adjusted
for the optimum driving condition. Secondary pressure is controlled by lowering line pressure.
SCIA1846E
TM-20
Normal Control
Optimize the line pressure and secondary pressure, depending on driving conditions, on the basis of the throt- A
tle position, the engine speed, the primary pulley (input) revolution speed, the secondary pulley (output) revo-
lution speed, the brake signal, the PNP switch signal, the lock-up signal, the voltage, the target gear ratio, the
fluid temperature, and the fluid pressure.
B
Feedback Control
For the normal fluid control and the select fluid control, secondary pressure is detected for feedback control by
using a secondary pressure sensor to set a high-precision secondary pressure. C
TM
N
JPDIA0747ZZ
1. Sport mode switch 2. Shift position indicator 3. SPORT indicator lamp O

A. Control device B. Combination meter C. Engine room LH P

NOTE:
• PNP switch
TM-21
• Step motor
• Secondary valve
• Manual valve
• Secondary pressure sensor
• ROM assembly
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Name Function
Torque converter regulator valve Optimizes the supply pressure for the torque converter depending on driving conditions.
Pressure regulator valve Optimizes the discharge pressure from the oil pump depending on driving conditions.
• Activates or deactivates the lock-up.
TCC control valve
• Locks up smoothly by opening lock-up operation excessively.
Controls inflow/outflow of line pressure from the primary pulley depending on the stroke
Shift control valve
difference between the stepping motor and the primary pulley.
Secondary valve Controls the line pressure from the secondary pulley depending on operating conditions.
Clutch regulator valve Adjusts the clutch operating pressure depending on operating conditions.
Transmits the clutch operating pressure to each circuit in accordance with the selected
Manual valve
position.
Select control valve Engages forward clutch, reverse brake smoothly depending on select operation.
The select switch valve enables to select engagement/disengagement of lock-up clutch
Select switch valve
and that of forward clutch and reverse clutch.
TCC solenoid valve TM-62
Secondary pressure solenoid valve TM-72
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-66
Step motor TM-97
Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-94
Primary speed sensor TM-52
Secondary speed sensor TM-55
PNP switch TM-47
Primary pulley
Secondary pulley
TM-19
Forward clutch
Torque converter
EXCEPT TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Name Function
Judges driving condition according to signals from each sensor, and optimally controls
TCM
variable speed mechanism.
Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-88
TM-22
CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROL SYSTEM
A
TM
I
JPDIA0809GB

J
The CVT senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls the optimum shift
position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
K
TCM FUNCTION
The function of the TCM is to:
• Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, and lock-up operation. L
• Send required output signals to the step motor and the respective solenoids.
SENSORS (or SIGNAL) TCM ACTUATORS M

Shift control
PNP switch
Line pressure control
Accelerator pedal position signal
Primary pressure control Step motor N
Closed throttle position signal
Secondary pressure control Torque converter clutch solenoid
Engine speed signal
Lock-up control valve
CVT fluid temperature sensor
⇒ Engine brake control ⇒ Lock-up select solenoid valve
Vehicle speed signal
Vehicle speed control Line pressure solenoid valve O
Sport mode switch signal
Fail-safe control Secondary pressure solenoid valve
Stop lamp switch signal
Self-diagnosis SPORT indicator lamp
Primary speed sensor
CONSULT-III communication line Shift position indicator
Secondary speed sensor
Duet-EA control Stater relay P
Primary pressure sensor
CAN system
Secondary pressure sensor
On board diagnosis
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM
TM-23
CONTROL SYSTEM
Fluid CAN com- Fail-safe

Select con- Shift con- Lock-up
Control item pressure munica-
control
trol trol control
tion control function*3
PNP switch X X X X X X
Accelerator pedal position signal*1 X X X X X X
Closed throttle position signal*1 X X X X
Engine speed signal*1 X X X X X

CVT fluid temperature sensor X X X X X
Input Sport mode switch signal*1 X X X X
*1 X X X X
Stop lamp switch signal
Primary speed sensor X X X X X
Secondary speed sensor X X X X X X
Primary pressure sensor X X
Secondary pressure sensor X X X
TCM power supply voltage signal X X X X X X
Step motor X X
TCC solenoid valve X X X
Lock-up select solenoid valve X X X
Output
Line pressure solenoid valve X X X X
Secondary pressure solenoid valve X X X
SPORT indicator signal*2 X X
• *1: Input via CAN communications.

• *2: Output via CAN communications.
• *3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
TM-24
CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JPDIA0747ZZ
L
7. Control valve assembly*2 8. CVT unit connector 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor M
N
NOTE:
O
• PNP switch
• Step motor P
• Secondary valve
• Manual valve
TM-25
CONTROL SYSTEM
• ROM assembly
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Name Function
PNP switch TM-47
CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-50
Primary pressure sensor TM-80
Secondary pressure sensor TM-74
Step motor TM-97
Name Function
TCM TM-22
Stop lamp switch TM-44
TM-26
LOCK-UP AND SELECT CONTROL SYSTEM
A
TM
SCIA2374E
G
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to H
increase power transmission efficiency.
• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM. The torque converter clutch control valve engages or
releases the torque converter clutch piston. I
• When shifting between “N” (“P”) ⇔“D” (“R”), torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls engagement
power of forward clutch and reverse brake.
• The lock-up applied gear range was expanded by locking up the J
torque converter at a lower vehicle speed than conventional CVT
models.
K
JPDIA0312GB M
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH AND SELECT CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Lock-up Released N
In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
O
Lock-up Applied
In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled. P
Select Control
When shifting between “N” (“P”) ⇔“D” (“R”), optimize the operating pressure on the basis of the throttle posi-
tion, the engine speed, and the secondary pulley (output) revolution speed to lessen the shift shock.
TM-27
JPDIA0747ZZ


NOTE:
• PNP switch
• Step motor
• Secondary valve
• Manual valve
TM-28
• ROM assembly
B
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Name Function C
Torque converter regulator valve
TCC control valve
TM
Select control valve TM-22
Select switch valve
Manual valve E
F
CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-50 G
PNP switch TM-47
Forward clutch
H
Reverse brake TM-19
Torque converter
EXCEPT TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY I
Name Function
TCM TM-22 J
TM-29
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
JPDIA0745GB
NOTE:
The gear ratio is set for each position separately.
In order to select the gear ratio that can obtain the driving force in accordance with driver's intention and the
vehicle condition, TCM monitors the driving conditions, such as the vehicle speed and the throttle position,
selects the optimum gear ratio, and determines the gear change steps to the gear ratio. Then TCM sends the
command to the step motor, controls the inflow/outflow of line pressure from the primary pulley to determine
the position of the moving-pulley and controls the gear ratio.
“D” POSITION
Shifting over all the ranges of gear ratios from the lowest to the high-
est.
SCIA1953E
SPORT MODE
Use this position for improved engine braking.
JPDIA0685GB
“L” POSITION
TM-30
By limiting the gear range to the lowest position, the strong driving
force and the engine brake can be secured. A
JPDIA0686GB
TM
DOWNHILL ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL (AUTO ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL)
When a downhill slope is detected with the accelerator pedal released, the engine brake will be strengthened
up by downshifting so as not to accelerate the vehicle more than necessary.
E
ACCELERATION CONTROL
According to vehicle speed and a change of accelerator pedal angle, driver's request for acceleration and driv-
ing scene are judged. This function assists improvement in the acceleration feeling by making the engine
speed proportionate to the vehicle speed. And a shift map that can gain a larger driving force is available for F
compatibility of mileage with driveability.
G
JPDIA0747ZZ
TM-31


NOTE:
• PNP switch
• Step motor
• Secondary valve
• Manual valve
• ROM assembly
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Item Function
PNP switch TM-47
Step motor TM-97
Shift control valve TM-22
Primary pulley TM-19
Secondary pulley TM-19
Item Function
TCM TM-22
TM-32
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
The shift lever cannot be shifted from the “P” position unless the B
brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is set to ON. The
shift lock is unlocked by turning the shift lock solenoid ON when the
ignition switch is set to ON, the park position switch is turned ON
(selector lever is in “P” position), and the stop lamp switch is turned C
ON (brake pedal is depressed) as shown in the operation chart in the
figure. Therefore, the shift lock solenoid receives no ON signal and
the shift lock remains locked if all of the above conditions are not ful- TM
filled. (However, selector operation is allowed if the shift lock release
button is pressed.)
E
H
JPDIA0624GB
I
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION at “P” POSITION
When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Selector Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) is turned OFF (not energized) and the J
solenoid rod (B) is extended with the spring when the brake pedal is
not depressed (no selector operation allowed) with the ignition
switch ON.
The connecting lock lever (C) is located at the position shown in the K
figure when the solenoid rod is extended. It prevents the movement
of the detent rod (D). The selector lever cannot be shifted from the
“P” position for this reason. L
JPDIA0612ZZ M
When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) is turned ON (energized) when the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON. The solenoid rod (B) N
is compressed by the electromagnetic force. The connecting lock
lever (C) rotates when the solenoid is activated. Therefore, the
detent rod (D) can be moved. The selector lever can be shifted to
other positions for this reason. O
JPDIA0613ZZ
“P” POSITION HOLD MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)
TM-33
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
The shift lock solenoid (A) is not energized when the ignition switch
is in any position other than ON. In this condition, the shift mecha-
nism is locked and “P” position is held. The operation cannot be per-
formed from “P” position if the brake pedal is depressed with the
ignition switch ON when the operation system of shift lock solenoid is
malfunctioning. However, the lock lever (B) is forcibly rotated and the
shift lock is released when the shift lock release button (C) is
pressed from above. Then the selector operation from “P” position
can be performed.
D : Detent rod
JPDIA0614ZZ
CAUTION:
Use the shift lock release button only when the selector lever cannot be operated even if the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON.
JPDIA0753ZZ
1. Stop lamp switch

A. Shift lock release button B. Shift lock solenoid C. Park position switch
SHIFT LOCK
Component Function
Shift lock solenoid
Lock lever
Detent rod TM-103
Park position switch
Shift lock release button
TM-34
A
DESCRIPTION B
The CVT system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with
the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MI (Malfunction Indicator) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM mem- C
ory and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis performed by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to TM-121,
"DTC Index". TM
OBD FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the CVT system. One function is
E
to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the CVT system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MI (Malfunction Indicator) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and
solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. F
The MI automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to CVT system parts.
ONE OR TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC OF OBD G
One Trip Detection Logic
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MI illuminates and the ECM memory stores the mal-
function as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. H
Two Trip Detection Logic

When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
I
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MI does not illuminate. — 1st trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MI will illuminate. — 2nd trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed J
during vehicle operation.
OBD DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
K
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-III or GST) CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720, etc. L
These DTC are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
• Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How- M
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or
it occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-III can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-III (if available) is recom- N
mended.
- DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-III. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
- If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. O
- If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
• The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated P
load value, engine coolant temperature, short-term fuel trim, long-term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data that are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-
III or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST.
For details, refer to EC-113, "CONSULT-III Function".
TM-35
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data, and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
How to Erase DTC
• The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-III, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described below.
- If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
- When erasing the DTC, using CONSULT-III or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
• The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD. For details, refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
- Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
- Freeze frame data
- Test values
How to Erase DTC (With CONSULT-III)

The emission related diagnostic information in the TCM and ECM can be erased by selecting “ALL Erase” in
the “Description” of “FINAL CHECK” mode with CONSULT-III.
How to Erase DTC (With GST)

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
2. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). For details, refer to EC-113, "CONSULT-III Function".
Description
The MI is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MI is turned ON when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
• If the MI is not turned ON, refer to EC-346, "Component Func-
tion Check".
2. The MI is turned OFF when the engine is started.
If the MI remains ON, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
TM-36
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
A
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000003848944
FUNCTION B
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnostic test mode Function C

Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
Self-Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time. TM
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor It monitors the status of CAN communication.
E
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For en-
Function Test
gine, more practical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system. F
Special Function Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed.
WORK SUPPORT MODE

G
Display Item List
Item name Description H

ENGINE BRAKE ADJ. The engine brake level setting can be canceled.
CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN The CVT fluid deterioration level can be checked.
I
Engine Brake Adjustment
“ENGINE BRAKE LEVEL”

J
0 : Initial set value (Engine brake level control is activated)
OFF : Engine brake level control is deactivated.
CAUTION: K
Mode of “+1”“0”“−1”“−2”“OFF” can be selected by touching “UP”or “DOWN” on CONSULT-III screen.
However, do not select a mode other than “0” and “OFF”. Selecting “+1” or “−1” or “–2” may cause
irregular driveability. L
Check CVT Fluid Deterioration Date
“CVTF DETERIORATION DATE” M

More than 210000 : It is necessary to change CVT fluid.
Less than 210000 : It is not necessary to change CVT fluid.
N
CAUTION:
Touch “CLEAR” after changing CVT fluid, and then erase “CVTF DETERIORATION DATE”.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE O
Display Items List
Refer to TM-121, "DTC Index".
P
DATA MONITOR MODE
Display Items List
TM-37
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
Monitor item selection

SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU
VSP SENSOR (km/h) X — Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h) X — —
PRI SPEED SEN (rpm) X — —
ENG SPEED SIG (rpm) X — —
SEC HYDR SEN (V) X — —
PRI HYDR SEN (V) X — —
ATF TEMP SEN (V) X — CVT fluid temperature sensor
VIGN SEN (V) X — —
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
PRI SPEED (rpm) — X Primary pulley speed
SEC SPEED (rpm) — — Secondary pulley speed
ENG SPEED (rpm) — X —
Difference between engine speed and primary

SLIP REV (rpm) — X
pulley speed.
GEAR RATIO — X —
G SPEED (G) — — —
Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by
the TCM.
ACC PEDAL OPEN (0.0/8) X X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for
control is displayed.
TRQ RTO — — —
SEC PRESS (MPa) — X —
PRI PRESS (MPa) — X —

Means CVT fluid temperature. Actual oil temper-
ATFTEMP COUNT — X ature °C (°F) cannot be checked unless a numeric
value is converted. Refer to TM-139.
DSR REV (rpm) — — —
DGEAR RATIO — — —
DSTM STEP (step) — — —
STM STEP (step) — X —
LU PRS (MPa) — — —
LINE PRS (MPa) — — —
TGT SEC PRESS (MPa) — — —
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve output

ISOLT1 (A) — X
current
Pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure
ISOLT2 (A) — X
solenoid valve) output current
Pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary
ISOLT3 (A) — X
pressure solenoid valve) output current
TM-38
A
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU B
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve monitor
SOLMON1 (A) X X
current
Pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure C
SOLMON2 (A) X X
solenoid valve) monitor current
SOLMON3 (A) X X
pressure solenoid valve) monitor current TM
INH SW3M (On/Off) X — PNP switch 3 ON-OFF status monitor
INH SW4 (On/Off) X — PNP switch 4 ON-OFF status

E

F
Stop lamp switch (signal input via CAN communi-
BRAKE SW (On/Off) X X
cations)
G
FULL SW (On/Off) X X
IDLE SW (On/Off) X X Signal input via CAN communications

H
SPORT MODE SW (On/Off) X X
STRDWNSW (On/Off) X —
STRUPSW (On/Off) X —
I
DOWNLVR (On/Off) X —
Not mounted but displayed.
UPLVR (On/Off) X — J
NONMMODE (On/Off) X —
MMODE (On/Off) X — K
INDLRNG (On/Off) — — “L” position indicator output
INDDRNG (On/Off) — — “D” position indicator output L

INDNRNG (On/Off) — — “N” position indicator output
INDRRNG (On/Off) — — “R” position indicator output

M
INDPRNG (On/Off) — — “P” position indicator output
CVT LAMP (On/Off) — — —

N
SPORT MODE IND (On/Off) — — —
MMODE IND (On/Off) — — Not mounted but displayed.
SMCOIL D (On/Off) — — Step motor coil “D” energizing status

O
SMCOIL C (On/Off) — — Step motor coil “C” energizing status
SMCOIL B (On/Off) — — Step motor coil “B” energizing status P

SMCOIL A (On/Off) — — Step motor coil “A” energizing status
LUSEL SOL OUT (On/Off) — — —
REV LAMP (On/Off) — X —
STRTR RLY OUT (On/Off) — — Starter relay
TM-39
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU
LUSEL SOL MON (On/Off) — — —
STRTR RLY MON (On/Off) — — Starter relay monitor
VDC ON (On/Off) X — —
TCS ON (On/Off) X — —
ABS ON (On/Off) X — —
ACC ON (On/Off) X — Not mounted but displayed.

Indicates position is recognized by TCM. Indi-
RANGE — X cates a specific value required for control when
fail-safe function is activated.
M GEAR POS — X Not mounted but displayed.
Displays the value measured by the voltage

Voltage (V) — —
probe.
Frequency (Hz) — —
DUTY-HI (high) (%) — —

The value measured by the pulse probe is dis-
DUTY-LOW (low) (%) — —
played.
PLS WIDTH-HI (ms) — —
PLS WIDTH-LOW (ms) — —
Diagnostic Tool Function INFOID:0000000003848945
OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

Refer to EC-122, "Diagnosis Tool Function".
TM-40
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F09B]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS A
B
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links C
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with
less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC E
Item
DTC Malfunction is detected when... Possible cause
(CONSULT-III screen term) F
When TCM is not transmitting or receiving Harness or connectors
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or (CAN communication line is open or short-
more. ed.) G
NOTE:
Immediately after performing any “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, always turn ignition switch OFF. H
Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
I
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
3. Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. J
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” detected? K
YES >> Go to TM-41, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
L
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT M

With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and start engine.
2. Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. N
Is “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated?
YES >> Go to LAN section. Refer to LAN-22, "CAN System Specification Chart".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". O
TM-41
P0615 START SIGNAL
P0615 START SIGNAL
• TCM controls starter relay in IPDM E/R.

• TCM switches starter relay ON at “P” or “N” position and allows to crank engine.
• Then it prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
(CONSULT-III screen term)
If this signal is ON other than in “P” or “N” po- • Harness or connectors
sition, this is judged to be a malfunction. (Starter relay and TCM circuit is open or
P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC
(And if it is OFF in “P” or “N” position, this too shorted.)
is judged to be a malfunction.) • Starter relay circuit

CAUTION:
NOTE:
Immediately after performing any “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, always turn ignition switch OFF.
With CONSULT-III
Is “P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL

3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector

Connector Terminal
Ground
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions Battery voltage
F12 72
Selector lever in other positions 0V
YES >> Check starter relay and starter control relay. Refer to STR-10, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYS-
TEM -".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND IPDM E/R (PART 1)
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehicle side har-
ness connector terminal.
TM-42
P0615 START SIGNAL
TCM vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A
Continuity
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
C
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND IPDM E/R (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
TM
TCM vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
F23 20 Not existed E
YES >> GO TO 4.
F
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS
Check TCM connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. G
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-153, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
TM-43
P0703 STOP LAMP SWITCH
BCM detects ON/OFF state of the stop lamp switch and transmits the data to the TCM via CAN communica-
tion by converting the data to a signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
- (Stop lamp switch, and BCM circuit are
When the brake switch does not switch to open or shorted.)
P0703 BRAKE SW/CIRC
ON or OFF. - (CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle for at least 3 consecutive seconds.
Is “P0703 BRAKE SW/CIRC” detected?

1. Check and adjust the installation position of stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Disconnect BCM connector.
3. Check voltage between BCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
BCM vehicle side harness connector

Connector Terminal
Ground
Depressed brake pedal Battery voltage
M123 118
Released brake pedal 0V
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND BCM (PART 1)
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle side
harness connector terminal.
TM-44
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector A
Continuity
E115 2 M123 118 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
Check continuity between BCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
TM
Continuity
M123 118 Not existed E
YES >> GO TO 4.
F
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-45, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". G
YES >> Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch H
• 10A fuse (No. 7, located in fuse block)
NO >> Repair or replace stop lamp switch.
5.CHECK BCM I
With CONSULT-III
2. Connect BCM connector. J
4. Select “BRAKE SW 1” in “Data Monitor” of “BCM” and verify the proper operation of ON/OFF. Refer to
BCS-42, "Reference Value". K
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-78, "Removal and Installation". L
Check TCM connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
M
N
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH O

Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch connector terminal P

Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
Depressed brake pedal Existed
E115 1 2
Released brake pedal Not existed
TM-45
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-17, "Exploded View".
TM-46
P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
A
• The PNP switch is included in the control valve assembly. B

• The PNP switch includes 4 transmission position switches.
• TCM judges the selector lever position by the PNP switch signal.
C
Shift position PNP switch 1 PNP switch 2 PNP switch 3 PNP switch 4 PNP switch 3 (monitor)
P OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R ON OFF OFF ON OFF TM
N ON ON OFF OFF OFF
D ON ON ON ON ON
E
L OFF ON ON OFF ON
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item G
TCM does not receive the correct voltage • Harness or connectors
P0705 PNP SW/CIRC signal (based on the gear position) from the (PNP switches circuit is open or shorted.) H
switch. • PNP switch

CAUTION: I
NOTE:
J
With CONSULT-III K
2. Select “Data Monitor” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Start engine. L
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
VEHICLE SPEED More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)

ENG SPEED SIG : More than 450 rpm
M
ACC PEDAL OPEN : More than 1.0/8
With GST N
Is “P0705 PNP SW/CIRC” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-47, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
P
1.CHECK CVT POSITION
1. Disconnect CVT unit connector.
2. Remove control cable from manual lever. Refer toTM-157, "Exploded View".
3. Check PNP switch. Refer to TM-48, "Component Inspection".
YES >> Adjust CVT position. Refer to TM-152, "Inspection and Adjustment".
TM-47
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PNP SWITCH (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and CVT unit vehicle side har-
ness connector terminals.
TCM vehicle side harness connector CVT unit vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
1 5
2 14
4 18
11 4
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2 Ground
F23 3 Not existed
4
11
YES >> GO TO 4.
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH

Check the continuity of the PNP switch by changing selector lever to various positions and checking continuity
between CVT unit terminals and ground.
TM-48
CVT unit connector A

Shift position Continuity
Connector Terminal
P 4, 5, 14, 15, 18 Not existed
4, 15 Existed
B
R
5, 14, 18 Not existed
Ground
4, 5 Existed C
N F24
14, 15, 18 Not existed
D 4, 5, 14, 15, 18 Existed
5, 14, 18 Existed TM
L
4, 15 Not existed
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".
F
TM-49
The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects the CVT fluid temperature and sends the signal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
During running, the CVT fluid temperature • Harness or connectors
P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC sensor signal voltage is excessively high or (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
low. • CVT fluid temperature sensor

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (total).
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

ENG SPEED : 450 rpm or more
RANGE : “D” position
With GST
Is “P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

3. Check resistance between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals.

condition Resistance (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
When CVT fluid temperature is 20°C (68°F) 6.5 kΩ
F23 13 25
When CVT fluid temperature is 80° (176°F) 0.9 kΩ
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (CVT TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 1)
TM-50
ness connector terminals. A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B
13 17
F23 F24 Existed
25 19
C
YES >> GO TO 3.
TM
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (CVT TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 2)
E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
13 F
F23 Not existed
25
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR H
Check CVT fluid temperature sensor. Refer to TM-51, "Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
J
Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor) INFOID:0000000003848963
L
1.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

M
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
CVT unit connector

Condition Resistance (Approx.) N
Connector terminal
F24 17 19
When CVT fluid temperature is 80°C (176°F) 0.9 kΩ O
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". P
TM-51
P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRI SPEED SENSOR)
The input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) detects the primary pulley revolution speed and sends the sig-
nal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Input speed sensor (primary speed sen-
sor) signal is not input due to an open cir-
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC cuit.
• An unexpected signal is input when vehi-
sor)
cle is being driven.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.

Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
With GST
Is “P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)

1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals.
TCM connector
Terminal Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
(+) (-)
F23 26 25 4.75 - 5.25 V
3. If OK, check the pulse when vehicle drive.
TM-52
TCM connector A
Condition Data (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
When driving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in “L” position, use the CONSULT-III
F23 33 680 Hz B
pulse frequency measuring function.
YES >> GO TO 7. C
NO - 1 >> Battery voltage is not supplied: GO TO 2.
NO - 2 >> Battery voltage is supplied, but there is a malfunction in the frequency: GO TO 4.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT HARNESS CONNECTOR (SENSOR POWER AND TM
SENSOR GROUND) (PART 1)
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. E
F
Continuity
25 19 Existed
F23 F24 G
26 20 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3. H
3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT HARNESS CONNECTOR (SENSOR POWER AND I
SENSOR GROUND) (PART 2)
J
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
25 K
F23 Not existed
26
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT HARNESS CONNECTOR [INPUT SPEED SENSOR M
(PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)] (PART 1)
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and CVT unit vehicle side har- N
Continuity O
YES >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT HARNESS CONNECTOR [INPUT SPEED SENSOR
(PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)] (PART 2)
TM-53

Continuity
F23 33 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK THE TCM SHORT
1. Replace with the same type of TCM. Refer to TM-153, "Exploded View".
2. Connect each connectors.
3. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-52, "DTC Logic".
Is the “P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC” detected again?
YES >> GO TO 7.
TM-54
P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CVT (SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR)
A
The vehicle speed sensor CVT [output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)] detects the revolution of the B
CVT output shaft and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is transmitted to the TCM, which converts it into
vehicle speed.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
Item
• Signal from vehicle speed sensor CVT [out- E
put speed sensor (secondary speed sen-
P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT sor)] is not input due to open or short circuit.
• Output speed sensor (secondary speed
• An unexpected signal is input during run-
sensor)
ning. F

CAUTION:
G
NOTE:
Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. H
With CONSULT-III I
J
Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving K
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. L
Is “P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT” detected?
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". M
N
1.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR)
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine. O
TCM connector P
Connector
(+) (−)
46
F23 7 Battery voltage
48
3. If OK, check pulse when vehicle drive.
TM-55
TCM connector
Connector Terminal
When driving at 20 km/h (12
MPH) in “D” position, use the
F23 34 400 Hz
CONSULT-III pulse frequency
measuring function.
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER AND SENSOR GROUND
2. Disconnect output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) connector.
4. Check voltage between output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector
terminals.
Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector
Connector
(+) (−)
F19 3 1 Battery voltage
terminal and ground.
Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) vehicle side har-

ness connector Voltage (Approx.)
Ground
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO-1 (Battery voltage is not supplied between terminals 1 and 3, and between terminal 3 and ground)>>GO
TO 6.
NO-2 (Battery voltage is not supplied between terminals 1 and 3 only)>>GO TO 8.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR)
(SENSOR GROUND)
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Continuity
F23 7 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
(PART 1)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and output speed sensor (secondary
speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector terminal.
TM-56
Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) ve- A

hicle side harness connector Continuity
F23 34 F19 2 Existed B
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. C
(PART 2) TM

Continuity E
F23 34 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SEN- G
SOR) (POWER) (PART 1)

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and output speed sensor
(secondary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector terminal.
I
Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) ve-
K
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SEN- L
Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
M
Continuity
F12 58 Not existed N
O
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and IPDM E/R
• 10 A fuse (No. 43, located in IPDM E/R)
• Ignition switch
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P
(SENSOR GROUND) (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and output speed sensor (sec-
ondary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector terminal.
TM-57

F23 7 F19 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 9.

Continuity
F23 7 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK TCM
2. Connect each connector.
YES >> Replace output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor). Refer to TM-161, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-153, "Exploded View".
TM-58
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
A
The engine speed signal is transmitted from ECM to TCM via CAN communication line. B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C
Item
(CONSULT-III screen term) TM
• TCM does not receive the CAN communi- Harness or connectors
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG cation signal from the ECM. (The ECM to the TCM circuit is open or
• Engine speed is too low while driving. shorted.)
E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. F
NOTE:
G
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
I
PRI SPEED SEN : More than 1,000 rpm
Is “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-59, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
K
1.CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-III L
2. Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”.
M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK DTC WITH TCM N
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG” detected? O
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer toTM-153, "Exploded View".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS P
TM-59
P0730 BELT DAMAGE
P0730 BELT DAMAGE
TCM selects the gear ratio using the engine load (throttle position), the primary pulley revolution speed, and
the secondary pulley revolution speed as input signals. Then it changes the operating pressure of the primary
pulley and the secondary pulley and changes the groove width of the pulley.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
P0730 BELT DAMG Unexpected gear ratio detected. Transaxle assembly

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Make sure that output voltage of CVT fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.
ATF TEMP SEN : 1.0 – 2.0 V

If it is out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage
(cool down the fluid)
Start test from 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Constant acceleration : Keep 30 sec or more
Is “P0730 BELT DAMG” detected?
1.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
Are any DTC detected?
YES-1 (DTC for “P0730 BELT DAMG” is detected)>>Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168,
"Exploded View".
YES-2 (DTC except for “P0730 BELT DAMG” is detected)>>Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-37,
"CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
NO >> GO TO 2.
TM-60
P0730 BELT DAMAGE
B
TM
TM-61
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehi-
cle speed and accelerator pedal position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when CVT fluid temperature is too low.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2.0/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed shall not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid
P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC • Harness or connectors
due to open or short circuit.
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
2. Wait at least 10 consecutive seconds.
With GST
Is “P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

3. Check resistance between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Resistance (Approx.)
F23 38 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE) (PART 1)
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and CVT unit vehicle side har-
TM-62
TCM vehicle side harness connector CVT unit vehicle side harness connector A
Continuity
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
VALVE) (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. TM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground E
F23 38 Not existed
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE G
Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to TM-63, "Component Inspection (Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid Valve)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS I
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve) INFOID:0000000003848979 K
1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground. L
CVT unit connector

Resistance (Approx.) M
F24 12 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
O
TM-63
P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK -UP)
This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This
is not only caused by electrical malfunctions (circuits open or shorted), but also by mechanical malfunctions
such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• CVT cannot perform lock-up even if elec-
trical circuit is good.
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing
P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN reference value with slip rotation.
• Hydraulic control circuit
• There is a big difference between engine
speed and primary speed sensor when
TCM lock-up signal is on.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following condition for at least 30 seconds.

VEHICLE SPEED : Constant speed of more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
With GST
Is “P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” detected?
1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Perform line pressure test. Refer to TM-146, "Inspection and Judgment".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-146, "Inspection and Judgment".
3. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to TM-65, "Component Inspection (Torque Converter
TM-64
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". A
3.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE
Check lock-up select solenoid valve. Refer to TM-65, "Component Inspection (Lock-up Select Solenoid
B
Valve)".
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR) SYSTEM
Check output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-55, "DTC Logic". TM
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E
5.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR) SYSTEM
Check input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-52, "DTC Logic". F
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G
H
I
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve) INFOID:0000000003848983
1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE J

Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit connector K

F24 12 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
L
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". M
Component Inspection (Lock-up Select Solenoid Valve) INFOID:0000000003848984
1.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE N

O
CVT unit connector
F24 13 6.0 – 19.0 Ω P
TM-65
P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
The pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) regulates the oil pump discharge pres-
sure to suit the driving condition in response to the signal sent from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid • Harness or connectors
due to open or short circuit. (Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing • Pressure control solenoid valve A (line
target value with monitor value. pressure solenoid valve)

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Is “P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) CIRCUIT

F23 40 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE
PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE)] (PART 1)
Continuity
TM-66
YES >> GO TO 3. A
B

C
Continuity
F23 40 Not existed TM
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE)
Check pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-67, "Component Inspec-
F
tion [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)]"
YES >> GO TO 5.
G
Check TCM connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. H
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid

Valve)] INFOID:0000000003848988 J

Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground. K
CVT unit connector

Resistance (Approx.) L
F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
N
TM-67
P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A PERFORMANCE (LINE PRESSURE
SOLENOID VALVE)
P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A PERFORMANCE (LINE
PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Line pressure control system
Unexpected gear ratio was detected in the • Output speed sensor (secondary speed
P0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN low side due to excessively low line pres- sensor)
sure. • Input speed sensor (primary speed sen-
sor)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. Test start from 0
km/h (0 MPH).
ATF TEMP SEN : 1.0 − 2.0 V

With GST
Is “P0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN” detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-68
SOLENOID VALVE)
3. Check pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-69, "Component
Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)]". A
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". B
Check output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-55, "DTC Logic".
C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM
Check input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-52, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 5.
F
H
Valve)] INFOID:0000000003848992
I
J
CVT unit connector
connector Terminal Ground
F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω K

YES >> INSPECTION END L
TM-69
P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B PERFORMANCE (SEC PRESSURE
SOLENOID VALVE)
P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B PERFORMANCE (SEC PRES-
SURE SOLENOID VALVE)
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) regulates the secondary pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to the signal sent from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Secondary pressure is too high or too low • Pressure control solenoid valve B (sec-
P0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN compared with the commanded value while ondary pressure solenoid valve system)
driving. • Transmission fluid pressure sensor A
(secondary pressure sensor)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III

With GST
Is “P0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN” detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SECONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE)
TM-70
SOLENOID VALVE)
3. Check pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-71, "Compo-
nent Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve)]". A
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". B
C
tion [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)]".
YES >> GO TO 4. TM
4.CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A (SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR) SYS-
TEM E
Check transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) system. Refer to TM-74, "DTC
Logic".
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS G
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid I
Valve)] INFOID:0000000003848996
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) J

K
CVT unit connector
F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω L
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". M
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (Secondary Pressure So-

lenoid Valve)] INFOID:0000000003848997 N

Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground. O
CVT unit connector

Resistance (Approx.) P
connector Terminal Ground
F24 3 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
TM-71
P0778 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B ELECTRICAL (SEC PRESSURE
SOLENOID VALVE)
P0778 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B ELECTRICAL (SEC PRES-
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to the signal sent from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid • Harness or connectors
due to cut line, short, etc. (Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
P0778 PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing • Pressure control solenoid valve B (sec-
target value with monitor value. ondary pressure solenoid valve)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
With GST
Is “P0778 PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC” detected?

CIRCUIT

F23 39 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SECONDARY
PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 1)
TM-72
SOLENOID VALVE)
Continuity
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SECONDARY
PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 2)

Continuity
F23 39 Not existed
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SECONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) G
Check pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-73, "Component
Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve)]".
YES >> GO TO 5.
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (Secondary Pressure So- K
lenoid Valve)] INFOID:0000000003849001
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SECONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) L

M
CVT unit connector
F24 3 3.0 – 9.0 Ω N
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". O
TM-73
P0840 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A (SEC PRESSURE SEN-
SOR)
P0840 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A (SEC PRESSURE
SENSOR)
The transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) detects secondary pressure of CVT
and sends the signal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
Signal voltage of the transmission fluid pres-
P0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC sure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor)
• Transmission fluid pressure sensor A
is too high or too low while driving.

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III

4. Start engine and wait for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
With GST
Is “P0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
TCM connector
F23 15 “N” position idle 1.0 - 1.5 V
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminals.
TM-74
SOR)
TCM connector A
Connector
(+) (-)
F23 26 25 4.75 - 5.25 V
B

YES >> GO TO 3. C
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A
(SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR)] (PART 1) TM
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and CVT unit vehicle side har- E
Continuity F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A H
(SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR)] (PART 2)

Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. I
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground J
F23 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7. K
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SENSOR POWER AND SENSOR GROUND) (PART L
1)
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and CVT unit vehicle side har- M
TCM vehicle side harness connector CVT unit vehicle side harness connector N
Continuity
25 19
F23 F24 Existed O
26 20
YES >> GO TO 6. P
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SENSOR POWER AND SENSOR GROUND) (PART
2)
TM-75
SOR)

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
25
F23 Not existed
26
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK TCM
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".
TM-76
P0841 PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
A
Using the engine load (throttle position), the primary pulley revolution speed, and the secondary pulley revolu- B
tion speed as input signals, TCM changes the operating pressure of the primary pulley and the secondary pul-
ley and changes the groove width of the pulley to control the gear ratio.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
Item
Correlation between the values of the trans-
mission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary
• Transmission fluid pressure sensor A
P0841 PRESS SEN/FNCTN pressure sensor) and the transmission fluid
pressure sensor B (primary pressure sen-
sor) is out of specification.
• Transmission fluid pressure sensor B (pri- F
mary pressure sensor)

CAUTION: G
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III I
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. J

RANGE : “D” position K
Is “P0841 PRESS SEN/FNCTN” detected?
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". L
1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE M

YES >> .GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A (SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR) SYS- O
TEM
Check transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) system. Refer to TM-74, "Descrip-
tion". P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR B (PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR) SYSTEM
Check transmission fluid pressure sensor B (primary pressure sensor) system. Refer to TM-80, "Description".
TM-77
YES >> GO TO 4.
3. Check pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-78, "Component
Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)]".
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK STEP MOTOR SYSTEM
Check step motor system. Refer to TM-97, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 7.
Valve)] INFOID:0000000003849008

CVT unit connector

F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω

CVT unit connector

F24 3 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
TM-78
YES >> INSPECTION END A
TM
TM-79
P0845 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR B (PRI PRESSURE SEN-
SOR)
P0845 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR B (PRI PRESSURE
SENSOR)
The transmission fluid pressure sensor B (primary pressure sensor) detects primary pressure of CVT and
sends the signal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
Signal voltage of the transmission fluid pres-
P0845 TR PRS SENS/B CIRC sure sensor B (primary pressure sensor) is
• Transmission fluid pressure sensor B (pri-
too high or too low while driving.
mary pressure sensor)

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Make sure that output voltage of line temperature sensor is within the range below.

With GST
Is “P0845 TR PRS SENS/B CIRC” detected?

1. Start engine.
TCM connector
F23 14 “N” position idle 0.5 - 0.8 V
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SENSOR POWER AND SENSOR GROUND
TM-80
SOR)
TCM connector A
Connector
(+) (-)
B
F23 25 26 4.75 - 5.25 V
YES >> GO TO 3. C
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR B
(PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR)] (PART 1) TM
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and CVT unit vehicle side har- E
TCM vehicle side harness connector CVT unit vehicle side harness connector F
Continuity
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
H
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR B
(PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR)] (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. I

Continuity
F23 14 Not existed
K
YES >> GO TO 7.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SENSOR POWER AND SENSOR GROUND) (PART L
1)
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. M
N
Continuity
25 19 O
F23 F24 Existed
26 20
YES >> GO TO 6. P
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SENSOR POWER AND SENSOR GROUND) (PART
2)
TM-81
SOR)

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
25
F23 Not existed
26
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK TCM
Is “P0845 TR PRS SENS/B CIRC” detected?
TM-82
P0868 SECONDARY PRESSURE DOWN
A
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) regulates the secondary pressure B
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item TM
(Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) E
Secondary fluid pressure is too low com- • Pressure control solenoid valve B (sec-
P0868 SEC/PRESS DOWN pared with the commanded value while driv- ondary pressure solenoid valve) system
ing. • Transmission fluid pressure sensor A
(secondary pressure sensor) F

CAUTION: G
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III I
3. Make sure that output voltage of CVT fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. J

If it is out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage K
L
VEHICLE SPEED (accelerate slow- : 0 → 50 km/h (31 MPH)
ly)
ACC PEDAL OPEN : 0.5/8 – 1.0/8
M
Is “P0868 SEC/PRESS DOWN” detected?

YES >> Go to TM-83, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-83
3. Check pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-84, "Compo-
nent Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve)]".
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
TEM
Check transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) system. Refer to TM-74, "DTC
Logic".
YES >> GO TO 5.
Valve)] INFOID:0000000003849016

CVT unit connector

F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω

CVT unit connector

F24 3 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
TM-84
P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)
A
When the power supply to the TCM is cut off, for example because the battery is removed, and the self-diag- B
nosis memory function stops, a malfunction is detected.
NOTE:
Since “P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY” is indicated when replacing TCM, perform diagnosis after erasing
“Self-Diagnostic Results”. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
DTC Malfunction is detected when... Possible cause E
• When the power supply to the TCM is cut
off, for example because the battery is re-
moved, and the self-diagnosis memory F
Harness or connectors
function stops.
P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY (Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is
• This is not a malfunction message (When-
open or shorted.)
ever shutting off a power supply to the
TCM, this message appears on the G
screen).

NOTE:
I
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Wait for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
Is “P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY” detected? K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003849020 L
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

3. Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals.
N
Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector O
(+) (-)
46
Ignition switch OFF 0V P
F23 48 5, 42
Ignition switch OFF 0V
45
Always Battery voltage
47
TM-85
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
5
F23 Existed
42
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM POWER CIRCUIT
Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Connector Terminal
46
Ground
F23 48
45
47
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND IPDM E/R AND BETWEEN TCM AND BATTERY (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and IPDM E/R vehicle side har-
TCM vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
46
F23 F12 58 Existed
48
4. Disconnect fuse block J/B connector.

5. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and fuse block J/B vehicle side
TCM vehicle side harness connector Fuse block J/B vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
45
F23 E103 12F Existed
47
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-86
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND IPDM E/R AND BETWEEN TCM AND BATTERY (PART 2) A

Continuity B
Connector Terminal
45
Ground
46 C
F23 Not existed
47
48
TM
YES >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
• 10A fuse (No. 43, located in IPDM E/R) E
• 10A fuse (No. 11, located in fuse block J/B)
• Ignition switch. Refer to PG-55, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
F
H
TM-87
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throt-
tle position sensor, etc. The actuator sends the signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the signal to TCM via CAN
communication.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• ECM
TCM does not receive the proper accelera-
P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T tor pedal position signals (input via CAN
(CAN communication line is open or
communication) from ECM.
shorted.)

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
2. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it, then wait for 5 seconds.
Is “P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T” detected?

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check DTC Detected Item. Refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
With CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 3.
TM-88
P1722 ESTM VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
A
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) to TCM via CAN com- B
munication line.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item TM
• CAN communication with the ABS actua-
tor and the electric unit (control unit) is E
malfunctioning.
P1722 ESTM VEH SPD SIG • There is a big difference between the ve-
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
hicle speed signal from the ABS actuator
unit)
and the electric unit (control unit), and the F
vehicle speed sensor signal.

CAUTION: G
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III I
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. J
ACC PEDAL OPEN : 1.0/8 or less

VEHICLE SPEED : 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more K
Is “P1722 ESTM VEH SPD SIG” detected?
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". L
1.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) M
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “ABS”.
N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to BRC-140, "DTC No. Index" (VDC/TCS/ABS). O
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. P
NO >> GO TO 3.
TM-89
TM-90
P1723 CVT SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION
A
The vehicle speed sensor CVT [output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)] detects the revolution of B
parking gear and generates a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM, which converts it into vehicle
speed.
nal to the TCM. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
A rotation sensor error is detected when the
gear does not change in accordance with
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) F
the position of the stepping motor.
• Output speed sensor (secondary speed
CAUTION:
P1723 CVT SPD SEN/FNCTN sensor)
One of the “P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR
AT”, the “P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC”
sor) G
or the “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG“ is
• Engine speed signal system
displayed with the DTC at the same time.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
Immediately after performing any “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, always turn ignition switch OFF. I
J
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. K

ACC PEDAL OPEN : More than 1.0/8 L
Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving M
Is “P1723 CVT SPD SEN/FNCTN” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-91, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
O
1.CHECK STEP MOTOR FUNCTION
Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. P
Is “P1778 STEP MOTR/FNC” detected?
YES >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-100, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
TM-91
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL SYSTEM
Check engine speed signal system. Refer to TM-59, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-92
P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
The electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throt- B
tle position sensor, etc. The actuator sends the signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the signal to TCM via CAN
communication.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
Item
The electronically controlled throttle for ECM Harness or connectors E
P1726 ELEC TH CONTROL
is malfunctioning. (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

NOTE: F
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION G
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. H
Is “P1726 ELEC TH CONTROL” detected?
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". I
J
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. K
2. Select “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”.
YES >> GO TO 2. L
NO >> Check DTC Detected Item. Refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
M
With CONSULT-III
N
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS O
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-153, "Exploded View". P
TM-93
P1740 LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE
• The lock-up select solenoid valve controls lock-up clutch pressure or forward clutch pressure (reverse brake
pressure).
• When controlling lock-up clutch, the valve is turned OFF. When controlling forward clutch, it is turned ON.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid
due to cut line, short, etc.
P1740 LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC (Solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing
target value with monitor value.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
RANGE : “D”, “N” and “L” position

(At each time, wait for 5 seconds.)
With GST
Is “P1740 LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT


F23 37 6.0 – 19.0 Ω
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 1)
TM-94
ness connector terminal. A
Continuity
C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 2) TM
TCM vehicle side harness connector E

Continuity
F23 37 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
G
Valve)". H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". I
J
K
1.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE L

CVT unit connector

M
F24 13 6.0 – 19.0 Ω
N
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View". O
TM-95
P1745 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
P1745 L/PRESS CONTROL TCM detects the unexpected line pressure. TCM

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON

If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool
down the fluid)
Is “P1745 L/PRESS CONTROL” detected?
1.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
TM-96
P1777 STEP MOTOR
P1777 STEP MOTOR
A
The step motor changes the step by turning 4 coils ON/OFF according to the signal from TCM. As a result, the B
flow of line pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is controlled.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item TM
Each coil of the step motor is not energized
P1777 STEP MOTR CIRC (Step motor circuit is open or shorted.) E
properly due to an open or a short.
• Step motor

CAUTION: F
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF.
G
With CONSULT-III H
1. Start engine.
3. Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. I
With GST
Is “P1777 STEP MOTR CIRC” detected? J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003849042 K
1.CHECK STEP MOTOR CIRCUIT

L
M
Connector Terminal
N
27 28
F23 30.0 Ω
29 30
O
4. Check resistance between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
TCM vehicle side harness connector P

Connector Terminal
27
Ground
28
F23 15.0 Ω
29
30
TM-97
P1777 STEP MOTOR
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (STEP MOTOR) (PART 1)
Continuity
27 9
28 8
F23 F24 Existed
29 7
30 6
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
27
Ground
28
F23 Not existed
29
30
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEP MOTOR
Check step motor. Refer to TM-98, "Component Inspection (Step Motor)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
Component Inspection (Step Motor) INFOID:0000000003849043
1.CHECK STEP MOTOR

1. Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
CVT unit connector

Connector Terminals
6 7
F24 30.0 Ω
8 9
TM-98
P1777 STEP MOTOR
2. Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals and ground. A
CVT unit connector

Connector terminal B
6
Ground
7
F24 15.0 Ω C
8
9
Is the inspection result normal? TM
E
TM-99
P1778 STEP MOTOR - FUNCTION
• The step motor changes the step by turning 4 coils ON/OFF according to the signal from TCM. As a result,
the flow of line pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is controlled.
• This diagnosis item is detected when the electrical system is OK, but the mechanical system is NG.
• This diagnosis item is detected when the state of the changing of the speed mechanism in the unit does not
operate normally.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
There is a big difference between the num-
P1778 STEP MOTR/FNC ber of steps for the stepping motor and for Step motor
the actual gear ratio.

CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, confirm “Hi” or “Mid” or “Low” fixation by
“PRI SPEED” and “VEHICLE SPEED” on “Data Monitor”.
• If hi-geared fixation occurred, go to TM-100, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III


With GST

TM-100
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A
Check input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-52, "Description".
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
Check output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-55, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 4.
E
G
TM-101
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
• TCM sends position indicator signals to combination meter via CAN communication line.
• The selector lever position is indicated on the shift position indicator.
1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

CAUTION:
1. Start engine.
2. Check that correct selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “L”) is displayed as selector lever is moved
into each position.
NO >> Go to TM-102, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Select “RANGE” on “Data Monitor” and read out the value.
3. Check that correct selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “L”) is displayed as selector lever is moved
into each position.
NO-1 (CVT position indicator does not indicate “L” when selector lever is moved into “L”.)>>Check the fol-
lowing.
• Check sport mode switch. Refer to TM-108, "Description".
• Check CVT main system (Fail-safe function actuated).
- Perform “Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>Perform “Self-
Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>Perform
“Self-Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator.)>>Check the
combination meter. Refer to MWI-33, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
TM-102
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
B
Component Function
It operates according to the signal from the stop lamp switch and
Shift lock solenoid
moves the lock lever.
C
It moves according to the operation of the shift lock solenoid and
Lock lever
performs the release of the shift lock.
It links with the selector button and restricts the selector lever TM
Detent rod
movement.
Park position switch It detects that the selector lever is in P position.
Shift lock release button It moves the lock lever forcibly. E
Wiring Diagram - CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003862437
TM-103
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
JCDWM0253GB
TM-104
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM
JCDWM0254GB
P
1. CHECK CVT SHIFT LOCK OPERATION

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
TM-105
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
NO >> GO TO 2.
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
1. CHECK POWER SOURCE

2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector and ground.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector

Voltage (Approx.)
E115 3 Battery Voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between fuse block J/B connector terminal 4F and stop lamp switch
harness connector terminal 3
• 10 A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block J/B]
• Ignition switch
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-107, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND CONTROL DEVICE (PART 1)
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector and control device vehicle side harness con-
nector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and control device
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Control device vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
E115 4 M57 6 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Continuity
E115 4 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-106
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
5.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A

Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector and ground.
Control device vehicle side harness connector

Continuity B
M57 7 Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
TM
6.CHECK CONTROL DEVICE
1. Shift selector lever to “P” position.
2. Check continuity between control device connector. E
Control device connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal
F
M57 6 7 Existed
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-155, "Exploded View".
H
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals 3 and 4. I
Stop lamp switch connector

Connector Terminal J
E115 3 4
L
TM-107
SPORT MODE SWITCH
SPORT MODE SWITCH
• The sport mode switch is installed to the selector lever knob.

• When pushing the sport mode switch (SPORT indicator lamp turns ON), the driving condition becomes sport
mode. When pushing again the sport mode switch (SPORT indicator lamp turns OFF), the driving condition
changes to D range.
1.CHECK SPORT MODE SWITCH SIGNAL

3. Check the On/Off operations of monitor item.
Monitor item Condition Status

While pushing sport mode switch On
SPORT MODE SW
Other conditions Off
YES >> INSPECTION END.
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to TM-41, "Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “METER/M&A”.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-67, "DTC Index".
3.CHECK SPORT MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect control device connector.
4. Check voltage between control device vehicle side harness connector terminals.

Connector
(+) (−)
M57 1 4 5V
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK SPORT MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between control device connector terminals.
TM-108
SPORT MODE SWITCH
Control device connector A

Connector Terminal
While pushing sport mode switch Existed
M57 1 4 B
Other condition Not existed
YES >> GO TO 5. C
5.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check control device connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. TM
YES >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. F

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M57 4 Existed
H
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE AND COMBINATION METER (PART 1) I
2. Disconnect combination meter connector.
3. Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and combination meter J
Control device vehicle side harness connector Combination meter vehicle side harness connector
Continuity K
M57 1 M34 32 Existed
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE AND COMBINATION METER (STEP 2) M
Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Control device vehicle side harness connector N

Continuity
M57 1 Not existed
O
YES >> GO TO 9.
Check combination meter connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
YES >> GO TO 10.
TM-109
SPORT MODE SWITCH

1. Reconnect all the connectors.
3. Select “SPORT MODE SW” on “Data Monitor” mode for “METER/M&A”, and check the On/Off operations
of monitor item. Refer to MWI-53, "Reference Value".
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-126, "Exploded View".
TM-110
TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F09B]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
TCM
B

C
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
Approximately matches the speedometer
VSP SENSOR During driving
reading.
TM
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
reading.
PRI SPEED SEN During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed. E
ENG SPEED SIG Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
SEC HYDR SEN “N” position idle 0.5 - 0.8 V
PRI HYDR SEN “N” position idle 0.7 - 3.5 V F
When CVT fluid temperature is 20°C (68°F). 47
ATFTEMP COUNT*
When CVT fluid temperature is 80°C (176°F). 161
G
VIGN SEN Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
reading. H
PRI SPEED During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
50 X Approximately matches the speedom-
SEC SPEED During driving
eter reading. I
ENG SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
GEAR RATIO During driving 2.37 - 0.43
J
Released accelerator pedal - Fully depressed
ACC PEDAL OPEN 0.0/8 - 8.0/8
accelerator pedal
SEC PRESS “N” position idle 0.5 - 0.9 MPa
K
PRI PRESS “N” position idle 0.3 - 0.9 MPa
STM STEP During driving -20 step – 190 step
Lock-up OFF 0.0 A L
ISOLT1
Lock-up ON 0.7 A
Release your foot from the accelerator pedal. 0.8 A
ISOLT2 M
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down. 0.0 A
Secondary pressure low - Secondary pressure
ISOLT3 0.8 - 0.0 A
high.
N
Lock-up OFF 0.0 A
SOLMON1
Lock-up ON 0.6 - 0.7 A
“N” position idle 0.8 A O
SOLMON2
When stalled 0.3 - 0.6 A
“N” position idle 0.6 - 0.7 A
SOLMON3 P
When stalled 0.4 - 0.6 A
Selector lever in “D” and “L” positions On
INH SW3M
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions Off
Selector lever in “R” and “D” positions On
INH SW4
Selector lever in “P”, “N” and “L” positions Off
TM-111
TCM
Selector lever in “D” and “L” positions On
INH SW3
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions Off
Selector lever in “N”, “D” and “L” positions On
INH SW2
Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions Off
Selector lever in “R”, “N” and “D” positions On
INH SW1
Selector lever in “P” and “L” positions Off
Depressed brake pedal On
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal Off
Fully depressed accelerator pedal On
FULL SW
Released accelerator pedal Off
Released accelerator pedal On
IDLE SW
Fully depressed accelerator pedal Off
SPORT MODE SW
Selector lever in “L” position On
INDLRNG
Selector lever in other positions Off
Selector lever in “D” position On
INDDRNG
Selector lever in “N” position On
INDNRNG
Selector lever in “R” position On
INDRRNG
Selector lever in “P” position On
INDPRNG
When sport mode On
SPORT MODE IND
SMCOIL D During driving Changes ON ⇔ OFF.
SMCOIL C During driving Changes ON ⇔ OFF.
SMCOIL B During driving Changes ON ⇔ OFF.
SMCOIL A During driving Changes ON ⇔ OFF.
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions On
LUSEL SOL OUT Wait at least for 5 seconds with the selector lever
Off
in “R”, “D” and “L” positions
LUSEL SOL MON Wait at least for 5 seconds with the selector lever
Off
in “R”, “D” and “L” positions
STRTR RLY OUT
STRTR RLY MON
VDC operate On
VDC ON
TCS operate On
TCS ON
TM-112
TCM
A
ABS operate On
ABS ON
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. N·P B
Selector lever in “R” position. R
RANGE
Selector lever in “D” position. D
Selector lever in “L” position. L C
* Means CVT fluid temperature. Convert numerical values for actual fluid temperature °C (°F). Refer to TM-139, "ATFTEMP COUNT
Conversion Table".
TM
TERMINAL LAYOUT
SCIA6679J
PHYSICAL VALUES H
Terminal No.
Description Value
(Wire color) Condition I
(Approx.)
+ - Signal name Input/Output
Selector lever in “N” and “D” and
0V
“L” positions J
1
Ground PNP switch 2 Input 10.0 V –
(P/B)
Selector lever in other positions Battery
voltage
K
Selector lever in “D” and “L” po-
0V
sitions
2
(P/L) L
voltage
Ignition switch ON
Selector lever in “R” and “D” po-
0V M
sitions
3
(G/O)
voltage N
Selector lever in “D” and “L” po-
0V
sitions
4
(GR)
Ground PNP switch 3 (monitor) Input 10.0 V – O
voltage
5 P
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)
6
Ground K-LINE Input/Output — —
(O)
7
Ground Sensor ground Output Always 0V
(W)
8
— CLOCK (SEL2) — — —
(G/W)
TM-113
TCM
Terminal No.
Description Value
(Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
9
— CHIP SELECT (SEL1) — — —
(L/R)
10
— DATA I/O (SEL3) — — —
(BR/R)
Selector lever in “R”, “N” and “D”
0V
11 positions
Ground PNP switch 1 Input Ignition switch ON
(BR/W) Battery
Selector lever in other positions
voltage
When CVT fluid temperature is 1.9 – 2.2
13 CVT fluid temperature sen- 20°C (68°F) V
Ground Input Ignition switch ON
(V) sor When CVT fluid temperature is 0.8 – 1.1
80°C (176°F) V
Transmission fluid pres-
14 0.5 – 0.8
Ground sure sensor B (Primary Input
(R/W) V
pressure sensor)
“N” position idle
15 1.0 – 1.5
Ground sure sensor A (Secondary Input
(V/W) V
pressure sensor)
Selector lever in “R” position 0V
19
Ground Reverse lamp relay Output Ignition switch ON Battery
(G/B) Selector lever in other positions
voltage
Selector lever in “N”, “P” posi- Battery
20 tions voltage
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON
(R/B)
Selector lever in other positions 0V
25
Ground Sensor ground Output Always 0V
(W/R)
4.75 –
26 Ignition switch ON —
Ground Sensor power Output 5.25 V
(L/O)
Ignition switch OFF — 0V
27 10.0
Ground Step motor D Output
(R/G) msec
Within 2 seconds after ignition switch ON, measure the
28 time using the pulse width measurement function (Hi 30.0
Ground Step motor C Output
(R) level) of CONSULT-III.* msec
29 CAUTION: 10.0
Ground Step motor B Output Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle
(O/B) msec
diagnosis connector.
30 30.0
Ground Step motor A Output
(G/R) msec
31
— CAN-L Input/Output — —
(P)
32
— CAN-H Input/Output — —
(L)
33 Input speed sensor (Prima- When driving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in “L” position, use
Ground Input 680 Hz
(LG) ry speed sensor) the CONSULT-III pulse frequency measuring function.
34 Output speed sensor (Sec- When driving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in “D” position, use
Ground Input 400 Hz
(LG/R) ondary speed sensor) the CONSULT-III pulse frequency measuring function.
Selector lever in “P”, “N” posi- Battery
tions voltage
37 Lock-up select solenoid
Ground Output Ignition switch ON Wait at least for 5 seconds with
(V/R) valve
the selector lever in “R”, “D” and 0V
“L” positions.
TM-114
TCM
Terminal No.
Description Value
(Wire color) Condition A
(Approx.)
When CVT performs lock-up 6.0 V
38
Ground
Torque converter clutch so-
Output
When vehicle drive B
(L/W) lenoid valve in “D” position When CVT does not perform
1.0 V
lock-up
Release your foot from the ac- 5.0 – 7.0
Pressure control solenoid celerator pedal. V C
39
Ground valve B (Secondary pres- Output
(W/B) Press the accelerator pedal all 3.0 – 4.0
sure solenoid valve)
the way down. V
“N” positions idle TM
Pressure control solenoid celerator pedal. V
40
Ground valve A (Line pressure so- Output
(R/Y) Press the accelerator pedal all 1.0 – 3.0
lenoid valve)
the way down. V E
42
(B)
45 Power supply Battery F
Ground Input Always
(L/R) (memory back-up) voltage
Battery
Ground Power supply Output voltage G
(Y)
47 Power supply Battery
Ground Input Always H
Battery
Ground Power supply Output voltage
(Y) I
*: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item.
TM-115
TCM
Wiring Diagram - CVT CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003849060
JCDWM0243GB
TM-116
TCM
TM
JCDWM0244GB
TM-117
TCM
JCDWM0245GB
TM-118
TCM
TM
JCDWM0246GB
TM-119
TCM
JCDWM0247GB
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000003849061
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. In this mode TCM operates even if there is an error in a main elec-
tronic control input/output signal circuit.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid valve, this function controls the CVT to make driving possi-
ble.
TM-120
TCM
Output Speed Sensor (Secondary Speed Sensor)
The shift pattern is changed in accordance with the throttle position when an unexpected signal is sent from A
the output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) to the TCM. The sport mode is inhibited, and the transaxle
is put in “D”.
Input Speed Sensor (Primary Speed Sensor) B
The shift pattern is changed in accordance with the throttle position and secondary speed (vehicle speed)
when an unexpected signal is sent from the input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) to the TCM. The sport
mode is inhibited, and the transaxle is put in “D”. C
PNP Switch
If an unexpected signal is sent from the PNP switch to the TCM, the transaxle is put in “D”.
CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor TM
If an unexpected signal is sent from the CVT fluid temperature sensor to the TCM, the gear ratio in use before
receiving the unexpected signal is maintained or the gear ratio is controlled to keep engine speed under 5,000
rpm. E
Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor A (Secondary Pressure Sensor)
• If an unexpected signal is sent from the transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) to
the TCM, the secondary pressure feedback control is stopped and the offset value obtained before the non- F
standard condition occurs is used to control line pressure.
• If transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) error signal is inputted to the TCM, sec-
ondary pressure feedback control stops, but line pressure is controlled normally.
G
Pressure Control Solenoid A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)
If an unexpected signal is sent from the solenoid valve to the TCM, the pressure control solenoid A (line pres-
sure solenoid valve) is turned OFF to achieve the maximum fluid pressure. H
Pressure Control Solenoid B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve)
If an unexpected signal is sent from the solenoid valve to the TCM, the pressure control solenoid B (secondary
pressure solenoid valve) is turned OFF to achieve the maximum fluid pressure. I
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
If an unexpected signal is sent from the solenoid valve to the TCM, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve
is turned OFF to cancel the lock-up. J
Step Motor
If an unexpected signal is sent from the step motor to the TCM, the step motor coil phases “A” through “D” are
all turned OFF to hold the gear ratio used just before the non-standard condition occurred. K
CVT Lock-up Select Solenoid Valve
If an unexpected signal is sent from the solenoid valve to the TCM, the CVT lock-up select solenoid valve is
turned OFF to cancel the lock-up. L
TCM Power Supply (Memory Back-up)
Transaxle assembly is protected by limiting the engine torque when the memory back-up power supply (for
controlling) from the battery is not supplied to the TCM. Normal status is restored when turning the ignition M
switch OFF to ON after the normal power supply.
N
chart.
NOTE: O
If DTC “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is indicated with other DTCs, start from a diagnosis for “DTC
U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to TM-41.
P
1 U1000 CAN communication line
2 Except above
NOTE:
TM-121
TCM
If DTC “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is indicated with other DTCs, start from a diagnosis for “DTC
U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to TM-41.
DTC*1
Items
Reference
MIL*2, “ENGINE” with CON- CONSULT-III only “TRANS- (CONSULT-III screen terms)
SULT-III or GST MISSION”
— P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC TM-42
— P0703 BRAKE SW/CIRC TM-44
P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC TM-47
P0710 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC TM-50
P0715 P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC TM-52
P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT TM-55
— P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG TM-59
— P0730 BELT DAMG TM-60
P0740 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC TM-62
P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN TM-64
P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC TM-66
P0746 P0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN TM-68
P0776 P0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN TM-70
P0778 P0778 PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC TM-72
P0840 P0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC TM-74
— P0841 PRESS SEN/FNCTN TM-77
P0845 P0845 TR PRS SENS/B CIRC TM-80
— P0868 SEC/PRESS DOWN TM-83
— P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY TM-85
— P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T TM-88
— P1722 ESTM VEH SPD SIG TM-89
— P1723 CVT SPD SEN/FNCTN TM-91
— P1726 ELEC TH CONTROL TM-93
P1740 P1740 LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC TM-94
— P1745 L/PRESS CONTROL TM-96
P1777 P1777 STEP MOTR CIRC TM-97
P1778 P1778 STEP MOTR/FNC TM-100
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-41
• *1: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
• *2: Refer to TM-35, "Diagnosis Description".
TM-122
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F09B]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
B
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference C

1. Engine idle speed EC-14
2. Engine speed signal TM-59
TM
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-88
4. CVT position TM-152
5. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-50 E
ON vehicle 6. CAN communication line TM-41
Large shock. (“N”→
1 7. CVT fluid level and state TM-142
“D” position) F
8. Line pressure test TM-146
9. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-62
10. Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-94 G
11. PNP switch TM-44
12. Forward clutch
OFF vehicle TM-168 H
13. Control valve
2. Engine speed signal EC-14 I
Shift Shock
5. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-50
J

“R” position) K
10. Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-94 L
12. Reverse brake
OFF vehicle TM-168 M
13. Control valve
2. Engine speed signal TM-59 N
ON vehicle
Shock is too large for 3. CAN communication line TM-41
3
lock-up. 4. CVT fluid level and state TM-142
O
5. Torque converter TM-172
OFF vehicle
6. Control valve TM-168
TM-123
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No. Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference
1. CVT fluid level and state TM-142
3. CAN communication line TM-41
5. Stall test TM-144
6. Step motor TM-97
ON vehicle
7. Primary speed sensor TM-52
Vehicle cannot take 8. Secondary speed sensor TM-55

4
off from “D” position. 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-88
11. Secondary pressure sensor TM-74
12. TCM power supply and ground TM-85
13. Oil pump assembly
14. Forward clutch
OFF vehicle TM-168
15. Control valve
Slips/Will 16. Parking components

Not Engage 1. CVT fluid level and state TM-142
6. Step motor TM-97
ON vehicle
Vehicle cannot take 8. Secondary speed sensor TM-55

5
off from “R” position. 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-88
OFF vehicle 14. Reverse brake

TM-168
15. Control valve
16. Parking components
TM-124
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. Engine speed signal TM-59 B
6. CAN communication line TM-41 C
ON vehicle 7. Stall test TM-144
8. Step motor TM-97
6 Does not lock-up. TM
9. PNP switch TM-44
10. Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-94
12. Secondary speed sensor TM-55
F
OFF vehicle 15. Oil pump assembly
TM-168
Slips/Will 16. Control valve G
H
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-62 I
8. Step motor TM-97
J
Does not hold lock-up
7
condition. 9. PNP switch TM-44
K
13. Secondary pressure sensor TM-74 L
TM-168 M
16. Control valve
TM-125
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
ON vehicle 4. Primary speed sensor TM-52
Lock-up is not re- 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-62

8
leased. 6. CAN communication line TM-41
TM-168
10. Control valve
Slips/Will
Not Engage
6. PNP switch TM-44
ON vehicle 8. Step motor TM-97
With selector lever in
9 “D” position, accelera- 10. Secondary speed sensor TM-55
tion is extremely poor.
12. Primary pressure sensor TM-80
OFF vehicle
18. Forward clutch TM-168
19. Control valve
TM-126
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. Stall test TM-144 B
6. PNP switch TM-44 C
TM
With selector lever in
“R” position, accelera- 10. Secondary speed sensor TM-55
10
tion is extremely poor. E
F
16. Torque converter TM-172 G
Slips/Will OFF vehicle
18. Reverse brake TM-168
Not Engage H
19. Control valve
2. Line pressure test TM-146 I
J

K
8. Step motor TM-97
11 Slips at lock-up.
9. PNP switch TM-44
10. Lock-up select solenoid valve TM-94 L
M
OFF vehicle 15. Oil pump assembly N
TM-168
16. Control valve
TM-127
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
4. PNP switch TM-44
12 Others No creep at all. 11. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-88
18. Gear system
OFF vehicle
20. Reverse brake
21. Control valve
TM-128
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. PNP switch TM-44 B
6. Step motor TM-97 C
ON vehicle
TM
Vehicle cannot drive
13 10. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-50
in all positions.
11. Secondary pressure sensor TM-74 E
F
15. Gear system
OFF vehicle 16. Forward clutch G
TM-168
17. Reverse brake
18. Control valve
H
Others 19. Parking components
2. Line pressure test TM-146 I
3. PNP switch TM-44
J
6. Step motor TM-97

ON vehicle
K
With selector lever in 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-88
14 “D” position, driving is
10. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-50 L
not possible.
M
15. Gear system N
OFF vehicle
17. Control valve
O
TM-129
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
3. PNP switch TM-44
6. Step motor TM-97
ON vehicle
15 “R” position, driving is
not possible. 10. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-50
15. Gear system
OFF vehicle
17. Control valve
Others
ON vehicle 4. Secondary speed sensor TM-55
Judder occurs during
16 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-88
lock-up.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle 2. Engine speed signal TM-59
Strange noise in “D”
17 5. Oil pump assembly
position.
6. Gear system
OFF vehicle
8. Control valve
9. Bearing
TM-130
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. CAN communication line TM-41 B
Strange noise in “R” 4. Torque converter TM-172
18
position. 5. Oil pump assembly
OFF vehicle 6. Gear system C
TM-168
7. Reverse brake
8. Control valve
TM
3. CAN communication line TM-41 E
Strange noise in “N”
19 4. Torque converter TM-172
position.
Others 5. Oil pump assembly
OFF vehicle F
6. Gear system TM-168
7. Control valve
1. CVT fluid level and state TM-142 G
3. Sport mode switch TM-108
H
Vehicle does not de- ON vehicle 5. Step motor TM-97
20 celerate by engine
6. Primary speed sensor TM-52 I
brake.
J

OFF vehicle 11. Control valve TM-168
K
TM-131
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
21 Maximum speed low.
OFF vehicle 14. Gear system
TM-168
15. Forward clutch
16. Control valve
With selector lever in 1. PNP switch TM-44
Others “P” position, vehicle ON vehicle
does not enter parking
22 condition or, with se-
lector lever in another
OFF vehicle 3. Parking components TM-168
position, parking con-
dition is not cancelled.
1. PNP switch TM-44
ON vehicle 2. CVT fluid level and state TM-142
Vehicle drives with 3. CVT position TM-152

23
CVT in “P” position. 4. Parking components
OFF vehicle 5. Gear system TM-168
6. Control valve
1. PNP switch TM-44
Vehicle drives with
24 4. Gear system
CVT in “N” position.
5. Forward clutch
OFF vehicle TM-168
6. Reverse brake
7. Control valve
TM-132
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
A
3. Primary speed sensor TM-52 B
ON vehicle 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-62
25 Engine stall. 5. CAN communication line TM-41
6. Stall test TM-144 C
OFF vehicle TM
2. Engine speed signal TM-59 E
ON vehicle
Engine stalls when 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-62
26 selector lever is shift- F
ed “N”→“D”or “R”. 5. CAN communication line TM-41
7. Torque converter TM-172 G
OFF vehicle
Others H
Engine speed does ON vehicle
27 3. Secondary speed sensor TM-55
not return to idle.
4. CAN communication line TM-41 I
J

K
ON vehicle 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-88
28 CVT does not shift 6. CAN communication line TM-41
7. Primary speed sensor TM-52 L
9. Step motor TM-97
M
10. Control valve
OFF vehicle TM-168
1. Ignition switch and starter PG-55, STR-6 N
Engine does not start
29 ON vehicle 2. CVT position TM-152
in “N” or “P” position.
3. PNP switch TM-44
O
TM-133
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
1. Ignition switch and starter PG-55, STR-6
Engine starts in posi-
30 tions other than “N” or ON vehicle 2. CVT position TM-152
“P”.
3. PNP switch TM-44
When brake pedal is 1. Stop lamp switch
depressed with igni-
2. Shift lock solenoid
tion switch ON, selec-
31 ON vehicle TM-103
tor lever cannot be
shifted from “P” posi- 3. Control device
tion to other position.
not depressed with ig-
Others 2. Shift lock solenoid
nition switch ON, se-
lector lever can be
Cannot be changed to
33 ON vehicle 2. CAN communication line TM-41
sport mode.
3. Combination meter MWI-42
SPORT indicator
34 ON vehicle 2. Combination meter MWI-42
lamp is not turned ON.
TM-134
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CVT: RE0F09B]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
WARNING: TM
F
connectors.
G
INFOID:0000000003897162
NOTE: H
I
battery cables.
This vehicle is equipped with a push-button ignition switch and a steering lock unit. J
below before starting the repair operation. K
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: L
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.) M
4. Perform the necessary repair operation. N
wheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.) O
TM-135
PRECAUTIONS
PIIB3706J
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and Engine INFOID:0000000003849068
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MI) to warn the driver of
a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid
valves, etc. will cause the MI to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt,
bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MI to light up due to a malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution for TCM and CVT Assembly Replacement INFOID:0000000003849069
CAUTION:
TCM if necessary.

first.)
the default state.
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit Connector INFOID:0000000003849070
REMOVAL
TM-136
PRECAUTIONS
Rotate bayonet ring counterclockwise. Pull out CVT unit harness
connector upward and remove it. A
SCIA2096E
TM
INSTALLATION
1. Align ∆ marking on CVT unit harness connector terminal body
with o marking on bayonet ring. Insert CVT unit harness connec-
E
tor. Then rotate bayonet ring clockwise.
SCIA2097E
H
2. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise until ∆ marking on CVT unit har-
ness connector terminal body is aligned with the slit on bayonet
ring as shown in the figure (correctly fitting condition). Install
CVT unit harness connector to CVT unit harness connector ter- I
minal body.
K
SCIA2098E
CAUTION: L
• Securely align ∆ marking on CVT unit harness connector
terminal body with bayonet ring slit. Then, be careful not
to make a half fit condition as shown in the figure.
• Never mistake the slit of bayonet ring for other dent por- M
tion.
O
SCIA2099E
TM-137
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution INFOID:0000000003849071
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery

cable before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness
connector. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if
ignition switch is turned OFF.
SEF289H

from TCM, do not damage pin terminals (bend or break).
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin ter-
SEF291H
• Perform TCM input/output signal inspection and check

whether TCM functions normally or not before replacing TCM.
TM-111, "Reference Value".
MEF040DA
• Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” after performing each

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
• Always use the specified brand of CVT fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Flu-
ids and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper, not cloth rags, during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordi-
nance, etc. after replacing the CVT fluid.
SAT652J
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000003849072
OBD SELF-DIAGNOSIS
• CVT self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the Malfunction Indicator (MI). Refer to the table on TM-37, "CONSULT-III Function
(TRANSMISSION)" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
• The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MI are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories.
TM-138
PRECAUTIONS
Always perform the procedure on TM-35, "Diagnosis Description" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MI. A
For details of OBD, refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Description".
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-96.
B
ATFTEMP COUNT Conversion Table INFOID:0000000003849073
C
ATFTEMP COUNT Temperature °C (°F) ATFTEMP COUNT Temperature °C (°F)
4 –30 (–22) 177 90 (194)
8 –20 (–4) 183 95 (203) TM
13 –10 (14) 190 100 (212)
17 –5 (23) 196 105 (221)
E
21 0 (32) 201 110 (230)
27 5 (41) 206 115 (239)
32 10 (50) 210 120 (248) F
39 15 (59) 214 125 (257)
47 20 (68) 218 130 (266)
55 25 (77) 221 135 (275)
G
64 30 (86) 224 140 (284)
73 35 (95) 227 145 (293) H
83 40 (104) 229 150 (302)
93 45 (113) 231 155 (311)
104 50 (122) 233 160 (320) I
114 55 (131) 235 165 (329)
124 60 (140) 236 170 (338)
J
134 65 (149) 238 175 (347)
143 70 (158) 239 180 (356)
152 75 (167) 241 190 (374) K
161 80 (176) 243 200 (392)
169 85 (185) — —
L
TM-139
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F09B]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
Tool name
1. ST25054000 Measuring line pressure
Adapter
2. ST25055000
Adapter
SCIA8372J
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure

Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)
ZZA1227D
ST33400001 Installing differential side oil seal

Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
ZZA0814D
Tool number
Description
Tool name
PBIC0190E
TM-140
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F09B]
Tool number
Description
Tool name A
Oil pressure gauge set Measuring line pressure
1.Oil pressure gauge
2.Hose B
3.Joint pipe
C
SCIA8373J
31197CA000 Installing transaxle assembly

Drive plate location guide TM
a: 14 mm (0.55 in) dia.
SCIA2013E
F
TM-141
CVT FLUID
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [CVT: RE0F09B]
CVT FLUID
CHECKING CVT FLUID

The fluid level should be checked with the fluid warmed up to 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). The fluid level check
procedure is as follows:
1. Check for fluid leakage.
2. With the engine warmed up, drive the vehicle in an urban area.
When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10
minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F).
3. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
4. Apply parking brake firmly.
5. With engine at idle, while depressing brake pedal, move shift
selector throughout the entire shift range.
SMA146B
6. Pull out the CVT fluid level gauge from the CVT fluid charging
pipe after pressing the tab on the CVT fluid level gauge to
release the lock.
SCIA1933E
7. Wipe fluid off the CVT fluid level gauge. Insert the CVT fluid
level gauge rotating 180° from the originally installed position,
then securely push the CVT fluid level gauge until it meets the
top end of the CVT fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION:
When wiping away the CVT fluid level gauge, always use
lint-free paper, not a cloth rag.
SCIA1931E
8. Place the selector lever in “P” or “N” and check that the fluid
level is within the specified range.
CAUTION:
When reinstalling CVT fluid level gauge, insert it into the
CVT fluid charging pipe and rotate it to the original installa-
tion position until securely locked.
SCIA1932E
CVT FLUID CONDITION
TM-142
CVT FLUID
Check CVT fluid condition.
• If CVT fluid is very dark or smells burned, check operation of CVT. A
Flush cooling system after repair of CVT.
• If CVT fluid contains frictional material (clutches, brakes, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and
B
compressed air after repair of CVT. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded
View".
C
Fluid status Conceivable cause Required operation
Replace the CVT fluid and check the
CVT fluid becomes ATA0022D
Varnished (viscous CVT main unit and the vehicle for
degraded due to TM
varnish state) malfunctions (wire harnesses, cool-
high temperatures.
er pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the CVT fluid and check for
Water in the fluid
cloudy places where water is getting in. E
Large amount of Unusual wear of
Replace the CVT fluid and check for
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
improper operation of the CVT.
in CVT
F
Changing INFOID:0000000003849077
CAUTION: G
Replace O-ring with new ones at the final stage of the operation when installing.
1. Remove drain plug from oil pan.
2. Remove drain plug gasket from drain plug. H
3. Install drain plug gasket to drain plug.
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug gasket. I
4. Install drain plug to oil pan.
Drain plug – tightening torque : Refer to TM-159, "Exploded View" J
5. Fill CVT fluid from CVT fluid charging pipe to the specified level.
CVT fluid : Refer to TM-174, "General Specification". K
Fluid capacity : Refer to TM-174, "General Specification".

CAUTION: L
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Never mix with other fluid.
• Using CVT fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will deteriorate in driveability and
CVT durability, and may damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling CVT fluid, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust. M
• Sufficiently shake the container of CVT fluid before using.
• Delete CVT fluid deterioration date with CONSULT-III after changing CVT fluid. Refer to TM-37,
"CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)". N
NOTE:
When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10 minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50 to O
80°C (122 to 176°F).
7. Check CVT fluid level and condition.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 5 if CVT fluid has been contaminated. P
TM-143
STALL TEST
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000003849078
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the
CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of CVT fluid. Replenish if necessary.
SAT647B
3. Securely engage parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
NOTE:
It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine rpm on
indicator.
5. Start engine, apply foot brake, and move selector lever to “D”
position.
SCIA7463E
6. Gradually press down accelerator pedal while holding down the

foot brake.
7. Quickly read off the stall speed, and then quickly remove your
foot from accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds
during this test.
Stall speed : Refer to TM-174, "Stall Speed".

8. Move selector lever to “N” position. SAT514G
9. Cool down the CVT fluid.

CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT
Selector lever position

Expected problem location
“D” “R”
H O • Forward clutch
O H • Reverse brake
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
Stall rotation
• Line pressure low
• Primary pulley
H H
• Secondary pulley
• Steel belt
TM-144
STALL TEST
O: Stall speed within standard value position.
H: Stall speed is higher than standard value. A
L: Stall speed is lower than standard value.
TM
TM-145
LINE PRESSURE TEST
LINE PRESSURE TEST
INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the CVT fluid reaches in the range of 50 to 80°C
(122 to 176°F). Then inspect the amount of CVT fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The CVT fluid temperature rises in the range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driv-
ing.
3. After warming up CVT, remove the oil pressure detection plug
and install the joint pipe adapter (SST: KV31103600), adapter
(SST: 25054000), oil pressure gauge set (commercial service
tool).
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O-
ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.
SCIA7972E
4. Securely engage parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
SCIA7463E
5. Start the engine, and then measure the line pressure at both idle
and the stall speed.
CAUTION:
• Keep brake pedal pressed all the way down during mea-
surement.
• When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed.
Refer to TM-144, "Inspection and Judgment".
Line pressure : Refer to TM-174, "Line Pressure".

6. Install oil pressure detection plug and tighten to the specified
SAT493G
torque below after the measurements are complete.
: 7.5 N·m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring.
• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring.
JUDGMENT
TM-146
LINE PRESSURE TEST
Judgment Possible cause
A
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example
Low for all positions • Oil pump wear
(“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “L”) • Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue B
• Oil strainer ⇒ oil pump ⇒ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
• Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a specific Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
C
Idle speed
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment
function.
For example TM
• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
High
• CVT fluid temperature sensor malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid A (line pressure solenoid) malfunction (sticking in OFF state, filter
clog, cut line) E
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment func-
tion. F
For example
Line pressure does not
rise higher than the line
• TCM malfunction
pressure for idle. G
• Pressure control solenoid A (line pressure solenoid) malfunction (shorting, sticking in ON
state)
Stall speed
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pres- H
sure adjustment function.
The pressure rises, but
For example
does not enter the
standard position. I
• Pressure control solenoid A (line pressure solenoid) malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
Only low for a specific Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve. J
TM-147
ROAD TEST
ROAD TEST
DESCRIPTION
• The purpose of the test is to determine the overall performance of
CVT and analyze causes of problems.
• The road test consists of the following three parts:
1. “Check Before Engine Is Started” TM-148.
2. “Check at Idle” TM-149.
3. “Cruise Test” TM-150.
SAT786A
• Before the road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures
and items to check.
• Perform tests for all the check items until a malfunction phenome-
non is detected. Perform diagnosis for NG items after the comple-
tion of road tests.
SAT496G
CONSULT-III SETTING PROCEDURE

• Using CONSULT-III, perform a cruise test and record the result.
• Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per Shift Schedule.
1. Touch “Data Monitor” on “Direct Diagnostic Mode” screen.
2. Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” to set recording condition.
3. See “Numerical Display”, “Barchart Display” or “Line Graph Display”.
5. When performing cruise test. Refer to TM-150, "Cruise Test".
6. After finishing cruise test part, touch “RECORD”.
7. Touch “STORE”.
8. Touch “BACK”.
9. Touch “DISPLAY”.
10. Touch “PRINT”.
11. Check the monitor data printed out.
Check before Engine Is Started INFOID:0000000003849081
1.CHECK SPORT INDICATOR LAMP

1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Has SPORT indicator lamp been turned ON for about 2 seconds?
YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items. Refer to TM-121, "DTC Index".
3. Go to TM-149, "Check at Idle".
NO >> Stop “Road Test”. Refer to TM-123, "Symptom Table".
TM-148
ROAD TEST
Check at Idle INFOID:0000000003849082
A
1.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE (PART 1)
2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position. B
4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Is engine started? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE (PART 2) TM

2. Move selector lever to “D”, “L” or “R” position.
E
Is engine started?
YES >> Stop “Road Test”. Refer to TM-123, "Symptom Table".
F
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTION
1. Move selector lever to “P” position. G
3. Release parking brake.
4. Push vehicle forward or backward. H
5. Apply parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
YES >> Refer to TM-123, "Symptom Table". GO TO 4. I
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTION
1. Start engine. J
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Release parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward? K
YES >> Refer to TM-123, "Symptom Table". GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SHIFT SHOCK L
1. Apply foot brake.

M
Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?
NO >> GO TO 6.
N
6.CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTION
Release foot brake for several seconds.
Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released? O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Refer to TM-123, "Symptom Table". GO TO 7.
7.CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTION P
Move selector lever to “D” and “L” position and check if vehicle creeps forward.
Does vehicle creep forward in all positions?
YES >> Go to TM-150, "Cruise Test".
TM-149
ROAD TEST
Cruise Test INFOID:0000000003849083
1.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS (PART 1)

1. Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to warm engine oil and CVT fluid up to operating temperature.
CVT fluid operating temperature : 50 – 80°C (122 – 176°F)

4. Start engine.
5. Move selector lever to “D” position.
6. Accelerate vehicle at 2/8 throttle opening and check “Vehicle
Speed When Shifting Gears”.
With CONSULT-III
- Read vehicle speed and engine speed. Refer to TM-174, "Vehi-
cle Speed When Shifting Gears".
YES >> GO TO 2.
SCIA6644E
2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS (PART 2)

With CONSULT-III
YES >> GO TO 3.
SCIA4366E
3.CHECK SPORT MODE FUNCTION (PART 1)

2. Push sport mode switch.
With CONSULT-III
YES >> GO TO 4.
SCIA6644E
4.CHECK SPORT MODE FUNCTION (PART 2)

2. Push sport mode switch.
TM-150
ROAD TEST
Speed When Shifting Gears”. A
With CONSULT-III
- Read vehicle speed and engine speed. Refer to TM-174, "Vehi- B
YES >> GO TO 5. C
SCIA4366E
5.CHECK “L” POSITION FUNCTION (PART 1) TM

2. Move selector lever to “L” position.
E
With CONSULT-III F
YES >> GO TO 6.
H
SCIA6644E
6.CHECK “L” POSITION FUNCTION (PART 2)

1. Park vehicle on flat surface. I
Speed When Shifting Gears”. J
With CONSULT-III
cle Speed When Shifting Gears". K
YES >> GO TO 7.
L
SCIA4366E
7.CHECK ENGINE BRAKE FUNCTION M
Check engine brake.

Does engine braking effectively reduce vehicle speed in “L” position?
N
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
NO >> Refer to TM-123, "Symptom Table". Then continue trouble diagnosis.
O
TM-151
CVT POSITION
CVT POSITION
INSPECTION
1. Move selector lever to “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Check that selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check that the actual position of selector lever matches the position shown by shift position
indicator and manual lever on the transaxle.
5. The method of operating selector lever to individual positions
correctly should be as shown.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” or “L” posi-
tion without applying forward/backward force to selector lever,
check button operation for sticking.
7. Check that back-up lamps illuminate only when selector lever is
placed in the “R” position.
8. When in “R” position, check that back-up lamps illuminate even
when the selector lever is pushed toward the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Check the lighting without pressing shift button. JPDIA0343GB
9. Check that back-up lamps do not illuminate when selector lever is pushed toward the “R” position when in
the “P” or “N” position.
CAUTION:
Check the lighting without pressing shift button.
10. Check that the engine can only be started with selector lever in the “P” and “N” positions.
11. Check that transaxle is locked completely in “P” position.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Move selector lever to “ P” position.
CAUTION:
Turn wheels more than 1/4 rotations and apply the park
lock.
2. Loosen the control cable nut (A).
3. Place manual lever (B) to “P” position.
CAUTION:
Never apply any force to manual lever.
4. Tighten the control cable nut. Refer to TM-157, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Fix manual lever when tightening. JPDIA0794ZZ
TM-152
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [CVT: RE0F09B]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
B
TM
JPDIA0591GB J
1. Bracket 2. TCM
: Vehicle front
K

L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Never impact on TCM when removing or installing TCM. M
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
N
3. Disconnect TCM connector (A).
: Vehicle front O
4. Remove TCM (1) from bracket.
JPDIA0596ZZ
INSTALLATION
TM-153
Adjustment INFOID:0000000003849087
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

After TCM is replaced. Refer to TM-12, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Pre-
caution for TCM and CVT Assembly Replacement".
TM-154
CONTROL DEVICE
CONTROL DEVICE
A
TM
L
JPDIA0741GB
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Knob cover M

4. Control device assembly 5. Shift lock unit 6. Dust cover
N
REMOVAL
O
TM-155
CONTROL DEVICE
2. Slide knob cover (1) below selector lever downward.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage knob cover.
3. Pull lock pin (2) out of selector lever knob (3).
4. Remove selector lever knob and knob cover.
5. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded
View".
JPDIA0606ZZ
6. Remove control cable (1) from control device assembly. Refer to

TM-157, "Exploded View".
7. Remove control device assembly (2).
: Bolt
JPDIA0615ZZ
8. Remove control device connector (A) using a flat-bladed screw-

driver (B).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage control device connector.
9. Remove shift lock unit from control device assembly.
JPDIA0616ZZ
INSTALLATION
When installing control cable (1) to control device assembly (2),
check that control cable is fully pressed in with the ribbed (A) surface
facing upward.
JPDIA0609ZZ

Adjust the CVT positions after installing control device. Refer to TM-152, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Check the CVT positions after adjusting the CVT positions. Refer to TM-152, "Inspection and Adjustment".
TM-156
CONTROL CABLE
CONTROL CABLE
A
TM
I
JPDIA0749GB
1. Bracket 1 2. Lock plate 3. Bracket 2 J

4. Transaxle assembly 5. Control cable 6. Control device assembly
K
REMOVAL L
CAUTION:
Check that parking brake is applied before removal/installation.
1. Disconnect control cable from control device assembly. Refer to TM-155, "Exploded View".
M
2. Remove the air duct (inlet) and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
3. Remove control cable (1) from manual lever (A).
N
: Nut
4. Remove lock plate (2) from control cable.

5. Remove control cable from bracket 2 (3). O
7. Remove heat plate.
P
JPDIA0601ZZ
TM-157
CONTROL CABLE
8. Remove control cable (1) from bracket 1 (2).
9. Remove nuts ( ).
: Vehicle front
10. Remove rear foot duct 1 (right). Refer to VTL-55, "REAR FOOT
DUCT 1 : Exploded View".
11. Remove the control cable from the vehicle.
JPDIA0752ZZ
INSTALLATION
When installing the control cable (1) to the control device assembly
(2), make sure that the control cable is fully pressed in with the
ribbed (A) surface facing upward.
JPDIA0609ZZ

Adjust the CVT positions after installing control cable. Refer to TM-152, "Inspection and Adjustment".
TM-158
OIL PAN
OIL PAN
A
TM
I
JPDIA0608GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Oil pan fitting bolt 3. Drain plug J

4. O-ring 5. Oil pan 6. Oil pan gasket
7. Magnet
: Apply CVT Fluid NS-2. K
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003849095 L
REMOVAL
1. Remove drain plug. M
2. Remove O-ring from drain plug.
3. Remove oil pan fitting bolts ( ).
N
: Vehicle front
4. Remove oil pan. O
SCIA8135J
TM-159
OIL PAN
5. Remove oil pan gasket (1) from oil pan (2).
6. Remove magnet (3) from oil pan.
SCIA8219J
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from the oil pan gasket mounting surface of
transaxle case and oil pan.
• Never reuse oil pan gasket, O-ring and oil pan fitting bolts.
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the CVT fluid is very dark, smells
burned, or contains foreign particles, frictional material (clutches) may need replacement. A tacky film that will
not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump
pressure.
Check for CVT fluid leakage and check CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-142, "Inspection".
TM-160
SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR
A
TM
G
JPDIA0687GB
1. Secondary speed sensor 2. Shim 3. Transaxle assembly

4. O-ring
H
: Apply CVT Fluid NS-2.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described above.
I
REMOVAL J
1. Disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal.
2. Remove air duct (inlet) and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
K
3. Disconnect secondary speed sensor connector.
4. Remove secondary speed sensor (1) and shim (2).
CAUTION: L
Never lose the shim.
5. Remove O-ring (3) from secondary speed sensor.
M
JPDIA0617ZZ
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring. P
After completing installation, check for CVT fluid leakage and check CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-142, "Inspec-
tion".
TM-161
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL
JPDIA0593ZZ
1. RH differential side oil seal 2. LH differential side oil seal 3. Transaxle assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-16, "Exploded View".
2. Remove differential side oil seals (1) using a flat-bladed screw-
driver (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and converter
housing.
JPDIA0118ZZ
INSTALLATION
• Drive each differential side oil seal evenly using a commercial ser-
vice tool so that differential side oil seal protrudes by the dimension
(C) respectively.
A : Transaxle case side

B : Converter housing side
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension C 0 ± 0.5 (0 ± 0.020)
NOTE:
Differential side oil seal pulling direction is used as the reference. JPDIA0618ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never reuse differential side oil seals.
TM-162
• Apply CVT fluid to differential side oil seals.
Drift to be used: A
Location Tool number
Transaxle case side
ST33400001 B
Converter housing side
C
tion".
TM
TM-163
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
JPDIA0592ZZ
1. Air cleaner case 2. Air breather hose 3. Transaxle assembly

4. Heater pipe
: Vehicle front
REMOVAL
2. Remove air breather hose from transaxle assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Check that air breather hose is not collapsed or blocked due to folding or bending when installed.
• Install air breather hose to air breather tube so that the paint mark
(A) faces upward. Also insert hose to the bend of air breather tube.
SCIA7584J
TM-164
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A
TM
I
JPDIA0792GB
1. Copper washer 2. Fluid cooler tube 3. Hose clamp J

4. Fluid cooler hose A 5. Fluid cooler hose B 6. Transaxle assembly
A. To radiator assembly
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. K
L
REMOVAL
1. Remove front under cover.
2. Remove fender protector (left side). M
4. Remove fluid cooler hose A and fluid cooler hose B.
5. Remove fluid cooler tube. N
INSTALLATION
When installing CVT fluid cooler tube (1) to transaxle assembly: O
• Contact CVT fluid cooler tube to a boss portion (A) of the transaxle
case.
• Tighten the bolt of CVT fluid cooler tube without moving the CVT P
fluid cooler tube.
JPDIA0628ZZ
TM-165
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
CVT water hose Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*
Radiator assembly Facing upward A
Fluid cooler hose A
Fluid cooler tube Facing upward C
Radiator assembly Facing backward B
Fluid cooler hose B
Transaxle assembly Facing upward C
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position of each hose clamp tab.
• The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends.
D: Vehicle front
E: Vehicle upper
• When installing hose clamps the center line of each clamp tab
should be positioned as shown in the figure.
JPDIA0869ZZ
• Insert CVT water hose according to dimension ( ) described

below.
(1) (2) Tube type Dimension

30 mm (1.18 in) (Insert the
Fluid cooler hose Radiator assembly A hose until the hose touches
A the radiator)
Fluid cooler tube
Radiator assembly End reaches the tube bend
Fluid cooler hose B
R position.
B Transaxle assem-
bly
JPDIA0863ZZ
• Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of fluid cooler hose (2) with
dimension (A) from the hose edge.
Dimension (A) : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)

• Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge.
SCIA8123E
TM-166
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A
After completing installation, check for engine coolant leakage and check engine coolant level. Refer to CO-8,
"Inspection".
B
TM
TM-167
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F09B]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
JPDIA0799GB
1. CVT fluid level gauge 2. CVT fluid charging pipe 3. O-ring

4. Transaxle assembly
A. For tightening torque, refer to TM-168, "Removal and Installation".
WARNING:
Never remove the reservoir tank cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high
pressure engine coolant escaping from the reservoir tank.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine, the transaxle assembly and front suspension member. Refer to EM-67, "Exploded
View".
2. Lift with hoist and separate engine, transaxle assembly from front suspension member. Refer to EM-67,
"Exploded View".
TM-168
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
3. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-164, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect secondary speed sensor connector. Refer to TM-161, "Exploded View". A
6. Disconnect air fuel ratio sensor 1 (bank 2). Refer to EM-34, "Exploded View".
B
8. Remove CVT fluid charging pipe from transaxle assembly.
9. Remove transaxle assembly fixing bolts with power tool. C
10. Remove transaxle assembly from engine assembly with a hoist.
11. Remove fluid cooler hose from transaxle assembly.
TM
F
JPDIA0598ZZ
INSTALLATION
G
CAUTION:
Check fitting of dowel pins ( ) when installing transaxle
H
assembly to engine assembly.
JPDIA0602ZZ
K
When installing transaxle assembly to the engine assembly, attach
the fixing bolts in accordance with the following.
L
JPDIA0600ZZ
O
Engine assembly to tran-
Insertion direction Transaxle assembly to engine assembly
saxle assembly
Bolt position A B C D
P
Number of bolts 1 2 2 4
Bolt length mm (in) 55 (2.17) 39 (1.54) 108 (4.25) 40 (1.57)
Tightening torque
74.5 (7.6, 55) 50 (4.3, 31)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
TM-169
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• When using the drive plate location guide (commercial service tool:
31197CA000) (A), set it to the stud bolts which is used to install it
to the torque converter.
• When not using drive plate location guide, rotate torque converter
so that the stud bolt (B) for mounting the drive plate location guide
of torque converter aligns with the mounting position of service
hole.
JPDIA0607ZZ
• Rotate crankshaft so that the hole (A) for inserting drive plate loca-
tion guide of drive plate aligns with the service hole (B).
NOTE:
When not using drive plate location guide, insert stud bolt of torque
converter into the hole (C) of drive plate, aligning the drive plate
hole position and torque converter.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to strike the drive plate when installing the
torque converter stud bolt.
JPDIA0603ZZ
• Align the position of tightening nuts ( ) for drive plate with those
of the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the nuts. Then,
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
: 51 N·m (5.2 kg-m,38 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the
front of the engine.
• When tightening the nuts for the torque converter after fixing
the crankshaft pulley bolts, confirm the tightening torque of SCIA1861E
the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to EM-79,
"Exploded View".
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check that transaxle rotates freely without binding after con-
verter is installed to drive plate.
• Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION

After inserting a torque converter to transaxle assembly, check that
distance (A) is within the reference value limit.
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Distance A : Refer to TM-175, "Torque Converter".
JPDIA0620ZZ

Check the following items.
TM-170
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• CVT fluid leakage and CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-142, "Inspection".
• CVT position. Refer to TM-152, "Inspection and Adjustment". A
TM
TM-171
TORQUE CONVERTER
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F09B]
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

TORQUE CONVERTER
JPDIA0691ZZ
1. Torque converter 2. Transaxle assembly
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-168, "Exploded View".

2. Remove torque converter from transaxle assembly.

• Attach the pawl (A) of the torque converter to the inner gear hole
(B) on the oil pump side.
CAUTION:
Rotate the torque converter for installing torque converter.
JPDIA0692ZZ
TM-172
TORQUE CONVERTER
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F09B]
A
After inserting a torque converter to transaxle assembly, check dis-
tance (A) is within the reference value limit. B
B : Scale
C : Straightedge C

TM
JPDIA0620ZZ
E
TM-173
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F09B]

VQ35DE
Applied model
2WD
CVT model RE0F09B
CVT assembly model code number 1XE0A
D range Variable
Transmission gear ratio Reverse 1.766
Final drive 5.173
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2*
Fluid capacity 10.2 liter (9 Imp qt)
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Do not mix with other fluid.
• Using CVT fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will deteriorate in driveability and CVT durability, and may dam-
age the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
*: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears INFOID:0000000003849116
Numerical value data are reference values.

(rpm)
Engine speed
Throttle position Shift pattern
At 40 km/h (25 MPH) At 60 km/h (37 MPH)
“D” position 2,900 – 4,100 3,900 – 5,600
8/8 Sport mode 2,900 – 4,100 3,900 – 5,600
“L” position 2,900 – 4,100 3,900 – 5,600
“D” position 1,100 – 3,100 1,200 – 3,700
2/8 Sport mode 2,200 – 3,000 2,800 – 3,600
“L” position 2,900 – 3,800 3,900 – 4,800
CAUTION:
Lock-up clutch is engaged when vehicle speed is approximately 18 km/h (11 MPH) to 90 km/h (56 MPH).
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000003849117
Stall speed 2,700 – 3,500 rpm
Line Pressure INFOID:0000000003849118
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
Line pressure
Engine speed
“R”, “D” and “L” positions
At idle 700 (7.00, 7.13, 101.5)
At stall 5,700 (57.00, 58.14, 826.5)
TM-174
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F09B]
Solenoid Valves INFOID:0000000003849119
Name Resistance (Approx.)

Pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) B
Pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
C
Lock-up select solenoid valve 6.0 – 19.0 Ω
CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000003849120
TM
CONSULT-III “Data Monitor”

Name Condition Resistance (Approx.)
(Approx.)
E
When CVT fluid temperature is 20°C (68°F) 1.9 – 2.2 V 6.5 kΩ
When CVT fluid temperature is 80°C (176°F) 0.8 – 1.1 V 0.9 kΩ
F
Primary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000003849121
Name Condition Data (Approx.) G

When driving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in “L” position, use the
Primary speed sensor 680 Hz
CONSULT-III pulse frequency measuring function.
H
Secondary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000003849122
I
Name Condition Data (Approx.)
When driving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in “D” position, use the
Secondary speed sensor 400 Hz
CONSULT-III pulse frequency measuring function.
J
Step Motor INFOID:0000000003849123

Step motor A 15.0 Ω L
Step motor B 15.0 Ω
Step motor C 15.0 Ω
M
Step motor D 15.0 Ω
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000003849124
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter 14.0 mm (0.55 in)
TM-175
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CVT: RE0F10A]
BASIC INSPECTION
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives signals from the vehicle speed sensor and PNP switch. Then it provides shift control or
lock-up control via CVT solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of signals
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
CVT system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the CVT system. The CVT system must be in good
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve mal-
function, etc.
SAT631IB
It is much more difficult to diagnose a malfunction that occurs inter-

mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent malfunctions are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the malfunctions. A
road test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected
should be performed. Follow the “DETAILED FLOW”.
SAT632I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a

customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such malfunctions, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Work Sheet” as
shown on the example (Refer to TM-177) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service Bulletins.
SEF234G
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the diagnosis work sheet. Refer to TM-177, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM 1
Check the following items based on the information obtained from the customer.
• Fail-safe. Refer to TM-283, "Fail-safe".
• CVT fluid inspection. Refer to TM-304, "Inspection".
• Line pressure test. Refer to TM-308, "Inspection and Judgment".
TM-176
• Stall test. Refer to TM-306, "Inspection and Judgment".
A
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC B
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
• Record DTC.
C
• Erase DTC. Refer to TM-202, "Diagnosis Description".
YES >> GO TO 4. TM
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the displayed DTC. E
>> GO TO 5.
F
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” for the displayed DTC.
Is DTC detected? G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM 2 H

Is any malfunction present? I
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.ROAD TEST J
Perform “ROAD TEST”. Refer to TM-310, "Description".
K
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SYMPTOM 3
Confirm the symptom described by the customer. L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END M
N
INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER
KEY POINTS
• WHAT..... Vehicle & CVT model O
• WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
• WHERE..... Road conditions
• HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
P
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. Model Engine Mileage
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency o Continuous o Intermittent ( times a day)
TM-177
Symptoms o Vehicle does not move. (o Any position o Particular position)
o No shift
o Lock-up malfunction
o Shift shock or slip (o N → D oN→R o Lock-up o Any drive position)
o Noise or vibration
o No pattern select
o Others
( )
Malfunction Indicator (MI) o Continuously lit o Not lit
DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET
1 o Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. TM-283
o CVT fluid inspection, stall test and line pressure test
o CVT fluid inspection
o Leak (Repair leak location.) TM-304
o State
o Amount
2 o Stall test
o Torque converter one-way clutch o Engine
o Reverse brake o Line pressure low TM-306,
o Forward clutch o Primary pulley TM-308
o Steel belt o Secondary pulley
o Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:
o Perform self-diagnosis.
3 TM-204
Enter checks for detected items.
o Perform road test. TM-310
4-1. Check before engine is started TM-310
4-2. Check at idle TM-311
4
4-3. Cruise test TM-312
o Check malfunction phenomena to repair or replace malfunctioning part after completing all road tests. Refer to TM-286,
"Symptom Table".
5 o Drive vehicle to check that the malfunction phenomenon has been resolved.
TM-202,
6 o Erase the results of the self-diagnosis from the TCM and the ECM.
TM-204
TM-178
A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Service After Replac-
B
ing TCM and Transaxle Assembly INFOID:0000000003806346
SERVICE AFTER REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY

C
Perform the applicable service according to the following sheet when replacing TCM or transaxle assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never start the engine until the service is completed.
• “TCM-POWER SUPPLY [P1701]” may be indicated soon after replacing TCM or transaxle assembly TM
(after erasing the memory at the pattern B). Restart the self-diagnosis after erasing the self-diagnosis
result. Check that no error is detected.
E
TCM CVT assembly Service pattern
Replace the new unit. Do not replace the unit. “PATTERN A”
Do not replace the unit. Replace either an old unit or new unit. F
Do not replace the unit. “PATTERN B”
Replace the old unit.
Replace either an old unit or new unit.
G
Replace the new unit. Replace either an old unit or new unit. “PATTERN C”
NOTE:
Old unit means that the unit has been already used for another vehicle. H
PATTERN A
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position after replacing TCM. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Check that the shift position indicator in the combination meter turns ON (It indicates approximately 1 or 2 I
seconds after turning the ignition switch ON.)
• Check the following items if the shift position indicator does not turn ON. Repair or replace the shift posi-
tion indicator if necessary. J
- The harness between TCM and ROM ASSY in the transaxle assembly is open or shorted.
- Cable disconnected, loosen, or bent from the connector housing.
PATTERN B K
1. Turn the ignition switch ON after replacing each part.
2. Start engine.
CAUTION: L
Never start driving.
4. Warm up the transaxle assembly until “ATFTEMP COUNT” indicates 47 [approximately 20°C (68°F)] or M
more. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION: N
Never start engine.
6. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
7. Shift the selector lever to “R” position. O
8. Depress slightly the accelerator pedal (Pedal angle: 2/8) while depressing the brake pedal.
9. Perform “Erase”.
10. Shift the selector lever to “R” position after replacing TCM. Turn the ignition switch OFF. P
11. Wait approximately 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch OFF.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON while shifting the selector lever to “R” position.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
13. Select “Special Function” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
14. Check that the value on “CALIBRATION DATA” is the same as the data after erasing “Calibration Data”.
TM-179
• Restart the procedure from step 3 if the values are not the same.
15. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
16. Check that the shift position indicator in the combination meter turns ON. (It indicates approximately 1 or 2
seconds after shifting the selector lever to “P” position.)
• Check the following items if the shift position indicator does not turn ON. Repair or replace the shift posi-
tion indicator if necessary.
- The harness between TCM and ROM ASSY in the transaxle assembly is open or shorted.
- Cable disconnected, loosen, or bent from the connector housing.
- Power supply and ground of TCM. Refer to TM-249, "Description".
Calibration Data
Data after deletion
Item name Display value Item name Display value
UNIT CLB ID 1 00 GAIN PL 256
UNIT CLB ID 2 00 OFFSET PL 40
UNIT CLB ID 3 00 OFFSET2 PL 0
UNIT CLB ID 4 00 MAP NO SEC 32
UNIT CLB ID 5 00 GAIN SEC 256
UNIT CLB ID 6 00 OFFSET SEC 40
MAP NO LU 33 OFFSET2 SEC 0
GAIN LU 256 MAP NO SL 32
OFFSET LU 40 GAIN SL 256
OFFSET2 LU 0 OFFSET SL 40
MAP NO PL 32 OFFSET2 SL 0
PATTERN C
1. Replace the transaxle assembly first, and then replace TCM.
2. Perform the service of “PATTERN A”.
(Perform the service of “PATTERN B” if TCM is replaced first.)
TM-180
CVT SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10A]
CVT SYSTEM
B
TM
JPDIA0743GB
TM-181
CVT SYSTEM
JPDIA0746ZZ

4. TCM 5. Secondary speed sensor 6. PNP switch
7. Primary speed sensor 8. Control valve assembly* 9. CVT unit connector
10. Accelerator pedal position sensor
*: Control valve assembly is included in CVT assembly.

NOTE:
• Step motor
• ROM assembly
TM-182
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
A
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000003806349
TM
JSDIA0802ZZ
N
1. Converter housing 2. Driven sprocket 3. Chain
4. Reverse brake 5. Oil pump 6. Forward clutch
7. Planetary carrier 8. Primary pulley 9. Sun gear O
10. Steel belt 11. Side cover 12. Internal gear
13. Parking gear 14. Secondary pulley 15. Final gear
16. Differential case 17. Idler gear 18. Reduction gear P
19. Taper roller bearing 20. Output gear 21. Drive sprocket
22. Input shaft 23. Torque converter
TM-183
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
JPDIA0743GB
Transmits the power from the engine to the drive wheel.
TM-184
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
TM
JPDIA0746ZZ
L
7. Primary speed sensor 8. Control valve assembly* 9. CVT unit connector M
D. CVT assembly E. Accelerator pedal, upper N
NOTE:
The following components are included in control valve assembly (8). O
• Line pressure solenoid valve P
• Step motor
• ROM assembly
TM-185
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
Item Function
The torque converter is the device that increases the engine torque as well as the conventional
Torque converter
CVT and transmits it to the transaxle.
The efficiency of pump discharge rate has been increased at low-rpm and optimized at high-rpm
by adopting a vane-type oil pump controlled by the engine. Discharged oil from oil pump is trans-
Oil pump
mitted to the control valve. It is used as the oil of primary and secondary pulley operation and the
oil of clutch operation and the lubricant for each part.
Planetary gear
Forward clutch Perform the transmission of drive power and the switching of forward/backward movement.
Reverse brake
Primary pulley It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and
the steel belt (the steel star wheels are placed continuously and the belt is guided with the mul-
Secondary pulley
tilayer steel rings on both sides). The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel
belt and pulley from low status to overdrive status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with
Steel belt
the oil pressures of primary pulley and secondary pulley.
Output gear
Idler gear
Reduction gear consists of primary deceleration (output gear and idler gear in pair) and second-
Reduction gear
ary deceleration (reduction gear and final gear in pair). Each of them uses a helical gear.
Final gear
Differential
Manual shaft
Parking rod The parking rod rotates the parking pole and the parking pole engages with the parking gear
Parking pawl when the manual shaft is in P position. As a result the parking gear and the output axis are fixed.
Parking gear
TM-186
A
TM
J
JPDIA0733GB
System Description INFOID:0000000003806355 K
The hydraulic control mechanism consists of the oil pump directly driven by the engine, the hydraulic control
valve that controls line pressure and transmission, and the input signal line.
L
LINE PRESSURE AND SECONDARY PRESSURE CONTROL
• When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine driving force is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM,
the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve and secondary pressure solenoid valve. M
• Line pressure solenoid valve activates pressure regulator valve, and line pressure from oil pump is adjusted
for the optimum driving condition. Secondary pressure is controlled by lowering line pressure.
N
SCIA1846E
TM-187
Normal Control
Optimize the line pressure and secondary pressure, depending on driving conditions, on the basis of the throt-
tle position, the engine speed, the primary pulley (input) revolution speed, the secondary pulley (output) revo-
lution speed, the brake signal, the PNP switch signal, the lock-up signal, the voltage, the target gear ratio, the
fluid temperature, and the fluid pressure.
Feedback Control
For the normal fluid control and the select fluid control, secondary pressure is detected for feedback control by
using a secondary pressure sensor to set a high-precision secondary pressure.
JPDIA0746ZZ


NOTE:
TM-188
• Line pressure solenoid valve A
• Step motor
• ROM assembly
B
C
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
Name Function
Torque converter regulator valve Optimizes the supply pressure for the torque converter depending on driving conditions.
Pressure regulator valve Optimizes the discharge pressure from the oil pump depending on driving conditions. E
• Activates or deactivates the lock-up.
TCC control valve
• Locks-up smoothly by opening lock-up operation excessively.
Controls inflow/outflow of line pressure from the primary pulley depending on the stroke F
Shift control valve
difference between the stepping motor and the primary pulley.
Secondary valve Controls the line pressure from the secondary pulley depending on operating conditions.
Clutch regulator valve Adjusts the clutch operating pressure depending on operating conditions. G
Transmits the clutch operating pressure to each circuit in accordance with the selected
Manual valve
position.
H
Select control valve Engages forward clutch, reverse brake smoothly depending on select operation.
The select switch valve enables to select engagement/disengagement of lock-up clutch
Select switch valve
and that of forward clutch and reverse clutch.
I
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-234 J
Step motor TM-261
K

PNP switch TM-213 L
Primary pulley
Secondary pulley
TM-186
Forward clutch M
Torque converter
EXCEPT TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY N
Name Function
TCM
Judges the vehicle driving status according to the signal from each sensor and controls O
the non-step transmission mechanism properly.
P
TM-189
CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROL SYSTEM
JPDIA0744GB
The CVT senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls the optimum shift
position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
TCM FUNCTION
The function of the TCM is to:
• Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, and lock-up operation.
• Send required output signals to the step motor and the respective solenoids.
SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS

Shift control
Line pressure control
PNP switch
Primary pressure control
Accelerator pedal position signal Step motor
Secondary pressure control
Closed throttle position signal Torque converter clutch solenoid
Lock-up control
Engine speed signal valve
Engine brake control
CVT fluid temperature sensor ⇒ ⇒ Lock-up select solenoid valve
Vehicle speed control
Vehicle speed signal Line pressure solenoid valve
Fail-safe control
Sport mode switch signal Secondary pressure solenoid
Self-diagnosis
Stop lamp switch signal valve
CONSULT-III communication
Primary speed sensor SPORT indicator lamp
line
Secondary speed sensor Shift position indicator
Duet-EA control
Secondary pressure sensor
CAN system
On board diagnosis
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM
TM-190
CONTROL SYSTEM
Fluid CAN com- Fail-safe A

Select con- Lock-up
Control item pressure Shift control munication
control
trol control
control function(*3)
PNP switch X X X X X X
B
*1 X X X X X X
Accelerator pedal position signal
Closed throttle position signal*1 X X X X

C
Engine speed signal*1 X X X X X
CVT fluid temperature sensor X X X X X
Input
Sport mode switch signal*1 X X X X TM
Stop lamp switch signal*1 X X X X
Primary speed sensor X X X X X E
Secondary speed sensor X X X X X X
Secondary pressure sensor X X X
Step motor X X F
TCC solenoid valve X X X
Out- Lock-up select solenoid valve X X X

G
put Line pressure solenoid valve X X X X
Secondary pressure solenoid valve X X X
SPORT indicator signal*2 X X H

*1: Input via CAN communications.
*2: Output via CAN communications.
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
I
TM-191
CONTROL SYSTEM
JPDIA0746ZZ


NOTE:
• Step motor
• ROM assembly
TM-192
CONTROL SYSTEM
A
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Name Function B
PNP switch TM-213
C
Secondary pressure sensor TM-242 TM
Step motor TM-261
E
Secondary pressure solenoid valve TM-240 F
Name Function G
Optimally controls continuously variable transmission system by judging driving condi-
TCM
tions based on signals from each sensor.
Stop lamp switch TM-210
H
TM-193
SCIA2374E
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM. The torque converter clutch control valve engages or
releases the torque converter clutch piston.
• When shifting between “N” (“P”) ⇔“D” (“R”), torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls engagement
power of forward clutch and reverse brake.
• The lock-up applied gear range was expanded by locking up the
torque converter at a lower vehicle speed than conventional CVT
models.
JPDIA0312GB
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH AND SELECT CONTROL VALVE CONTROL

Lock-up Released
In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied
In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Select Control
When shifting between “N” (“P”) ⇔“D” (“R”), optimize the operating pressure on the basis of the throttle posi-
tion, the engine speed, and the secondary pulley (output) revolution speed to lessen the shift shock.
TM-194
TM
JPDIA0746ZZ
L
7. Primary speed sensor 8. Control valve assembly* 9. CVT unit connector M
D. CVT assembly E. Accelerator pedal, upper N
NOTE:
The following components are included in control valve assembly (8). O
• Line pressure solenoid valve P
• Step motor
• ROM assembly
TM-195
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Name Function
Torque converter regulator valve
TCC control valve
Select control valve TM-189
Select switch valve
Manual valve
PNP switch TM-213
Forward clutch
Reverse brake TM-186
Torque converter
Name Function
TCM TM-193
TM-196
A
TM
JPDIA0745GB F
NOTE:
The gear ratio is set for each position separately.
System Description INFOID:0000000003806367 G
In order to select the gear ratio that can obtain the driving force in accordance with driver's intention and the
vehicle condition, TCM monitors the driving conditions, such as the vehicle speed and the throttle position and H
selects the optimum gear ratio, and determines the gear change steps to the gear ratio. Then TCM sends the
command to the step motor, controls the inflow/outflow of line pressure from the primary pulley to determine
the position of the moving-pulley and controls the gear ratio.
I
“D” POSITION
Shifting over all the ranges of gear ratios from the lowest to the high-
est.
J
SCIA1953E
SPORT MODE M
Use this position for the improved engine braking.
“L” POSITION
N
By limiting gear range to the lowest position, the strong driving force
and the engine brake can be secured.
SCIA1955E
DOWNHILL ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL (AUTO ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL)

When a downhill slope is detected with the accelerator pedal released, the engine brake will be strengthened
up by downshifting so as not to accelerate the vehicle more than necessary.
TM-197
ACCELERATION CONTROL
According to vehicle speed and a change of accelerator pedal angle, driver's request for acceleration and driv-
ing scene are judged. This function assists improvement in the acceleration feeling by making the engine
speed proportionate to the vehicle speed. And a shift map that can gain a larger driving force is available for
compatibility of mileage with driveability.
JPDIA0746ZZ


NOTE:
• Step motor
• ROM assembly
TM-198
• Secondary pressure solenoid valve A
B
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Item Function C
PNP switch TM-213
TM
Step motor TM-261
Shift control valve TM-189 E
Primary pulley TM-186
Secondary pulley TM-186
F
Item Function G
TCM TM-193
TM-199
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
The shift lever it cannot be shifted from the “P” position unless the
brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is set to ON. The
shift lock is unlocked by turning the shift lock solenoid ON when the
ignition switch is set to ON, the park switch is turned ON (selector
lever is in “P” position), and the stop lamp switch is turned ON (brake
pedal is depressed) as shown in the operation chart in the figure.
Therefore, the shift lock solenoid receives no ON signal and the shift
lock remains locked if all of the above conditions are not fulfilled.
(However, selector operation is allowed if the shift lock release but-
ton is pressed.)
JPDIA0588GB
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION at “P” POSITION

When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Selector Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) is turned OFF (not energized) and the
solenoid rod (B) is extended with the spring when the brake pedal is
not depressed (no selector operation allowed) with the ignition
switch ON.
The connecting lock lever (C) is located at the position shown in the
figure when the solenoid rod is extended. It prevents the movement
of the detent rod (D). The selector lever cannot be shifted from the P
position for this reason.
JPDIA0612ZZ
When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed)

The shift lock solenoid (A) is turned ON (energized) when the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON. The solenoid rod (B)
is compressed by the electromagnetic force. The connecting lock
lever (C) rotates when the solenoid rod is activated. Therefore, the
detent rod (D) can be moved. The selector lever can be shifted to
other positions for this reason.
JPDIA0613ZZ
“P” POSITION HOLD MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)
TM-200
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
The shift lock solenoid (A) is not energized when the ignition switch
is in any position other than ON. in this condition, the shift mecha- A
nism is locked and “P” position is held. The operation cannot be per-
formed from “P” position if the brake pedal is depressed with the
ignition switch ON when the operation system of shift lock solenoid is
B
malfunctioning. However, the lock lever (B) is forcibly rotated and the
shift lock is released when the shift lock release button (C) is
pressed from above. Then the selector operation from “P” position
can be performed. C
D : Detent rod
JPDIA0614ZZ
CAUTION: TM
Use the shift lock release button only when the selector lever cannot be operated even if the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON.
E
JPDIA0753ZZ
M
1. Stop lamp switch

A. Shift lock release button B. Shift lock solenoid C. Park position switch N
O
SHIFT LOCK
Component Function
P
Shift lock solenoid
Lock lever
Detent rod Refer to TM-267, "Description"
Park position switch
Shift lock release button
TM-201
DESCRIPTION
The CVT system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with
the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MI (Malfunction Indicator) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM mem-
ory and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis performed by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to TM-204,
"CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
OBD FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the CVT system. One function is
to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the CVT system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MI (Malfunction Indicator) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and
solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MI automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to CVT system parts.
ONE OR TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC OF OBD
One Trip Detection Logic
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MI illuminates and the ECM memory stores the mal-
function as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
Two Trip Detection Logic
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MI does not illuminate. — 1st trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MI will illuminate. — 2nd trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-III or GST) CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720, etc.
These DTC are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
• Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or
it occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-III can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-III (if available) is recom-
mended.
- DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-III. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
- If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
- If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
• The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short-term fuel trim, long-term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data that are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-
III or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST.
For details, refer to EC-113, "CONSULT-III Function".
TM-202
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority A
for 1st trip freeze frame data, and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
B
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
C
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
TM
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. E
How to Erase DTC
• The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-III, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described below. F
- If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
- When erasing the DTC, using CONSULT-III or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
• The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC G
related to OBD. For details, refer to EC-389, "DTC Index".
- Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) H
- Freeze frame data
- Test values I
How to Erase DTC (With CONSULT-III)

The emission related diagnostic information in the TCM and ECM can be erased by selecting “All Erase” in the J
“Description” of “FINAL CHECK” mode with CONSULT-III.
How to Erase DTC (With GST)

K
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
2. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). For details, refer to EC-122, "Diagnosis Tool Function".
L
Description
The MI is located on the instrument panel. M
1. The MI is turned ON when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
• If the MI is not turned ON, refer to EC-346, "Component Func- N
tion Check".
2. The MI is turned OFF when the engine is started. If the MI
remains ON, the on board diagnostic system has detected an O
engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
P
TM-203
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000003806374
FUNCTION

Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnosis Support Mon-
It monitors the status of CAN communication.
itor
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
Special Function Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed.
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Display Item List
Item name Description

ENGINE BRAKE ADJ. The engine brake level setting can be canceled.
CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN The CVT fluid deterioration level can be checked.
Engine Brake Adjustment
“ENGINE BRAKE LEVEL”

0: Initial set value (Engine brake level control is activated)
OFF: Engine brake level control is deactivated.
CAUTION:
Mode of “+1”“0”“−1”“−2”“OFF” can be selected by touching “UP” or “DOWN” on CONSULT-III screen.
However, do not select mode other than “0” and “OFF”. Selecting “+1” or “−1” or “−2” is selected, that
may cause irregular driveability.
Check CVT Fluid Deterioration Date
“CVTF DETERIORATION DATE”

More than 210000:
It is necessary to change CVT fluid.
Less than 210000:
It is not necessary to change CVT fluid.
CAUTION:
Touch “CLEAR” after changing CVT fluid, and then erase “CVTF DETERIORATION DATE”.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE
Display Items List
Refer to TM-284, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR MODE
Display Items List
TM-204
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
A
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG- B
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU
VSP SENSOR (km/h) X — Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)
C
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h) X — —
PRI SPEED SEN (rpm) X — —

TM
ENG SPEED SIG (rpm) X — —
SEC HYDR SEN (V) X — —
PRI HYDR SEN (V) X — — E
ATF TEMP SEN (V) X — CVT fluid temperature sensor
VIGN SEN (V) X — — F

VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
PRI SPEED (rpm) — X Primary pulley speed

G
SEC SPEED (rpm) — — Secondary pulley speed
ENG SPEED (rpm) — X —

H
Difference between engine speed and primary
SLIP REV (rpm) — X
pulley speed.
GEAR RATIO — X — I
G SPEED (G) — — —
Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by
the TCM. J
ACC PEDAL OPEN (0.0/8) X X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for
control is displayed.
TRQ RTO — — — K
SEC PRESS (MPa) — X —
PRI PRESS (MPa) — X Not mounted but displayed. L

Means CVT fluid temperature. Actual oil temper-
ATFTEMP COUNT — X ature °C (°F) numeric value is converted. Refer to
TM-301 M
DSR REV (rpm) — — —
DGEAR RATIO — — —
N
DSTM STEP (step) — — —
STM STEP (step) — X —

O
LU PRS (MPa) — — —
LINE PRS (MPa) — — —
TGT SEC PRESS (MPa) — — — P
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve output

ISOLT1 (A) — X
current
ISOLT2 (A) — X
solenoid valve) output current
ISOLT3 (A) — X
pressure solenoid valve) output current
TM-205
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve monitor
SOLMON1 (A) X X
current
SOLMON2 (A) X X
solenoid valve) monitor current
SOLMON3 (A) X X
pressure solenoid valve) monitor current
P POSITION SW (On/Off) X — —
R POSITION SW (On/Off) X — —
N POSITION SW (On/Off) X — —
D POSITION SW (On/Off) X — —
L POSITION SW (On/Off) X — —
Stop lamp switch (Signal input via CAN communi-
BRAKE SW (On/Off) X X
cations)
FULL SW (On/Off) X X
IDLE SW (On/Off) X X Signal input via CAN communications
SPORT MODE SW (On/Off) X X
STRDWNSW (On/Off) X —
STRUPSW (On/Off) X —
DOWNLVR (On/Off) X —
Not mounted but displayed.
UPLVR (On/Off) X —
NONMMODE (On/Off) X —
MMODE (On/Off) X —
INDLRNG (On/Off) — — “L” position indicator output
INDDRNG (On/Off) — — “D” position indicator output
INDNRNG (On/Off) — — “N” position indicator output
INDRRNG (On/Off) — — “R” position indicator output
INDPRNG (On/Off) — — “P” position indicator output
CVT LAMP (On/Off) — — —
SPORT MODE IND (On/Off) — — —
MMODE IND (On/Off) — — Not mounted but displayed.
SMCOIL D (On/Off) — — Step motor coil “D” energizing status
SMCOIL C (On/Off) — — Step motor coil “C” energizing status
SMCOIL B (On/Off) — — Step motor coil “B” energizing status
SMCOIL A (On/Off) — — Step motor coil “A” energizing status
LUSEL SOL OUT (On/Off) — — —
LUSEL SOL MON (On/Off) — — —
VDC ON (On/Off) X — —
TM-206
A
SELEC-
MAIN SIG- TION
PUT SIG-
NALS FROM
NALS
MENU B
TCS ON (On/Off) X — —
ABS ON (On/Off) X — —
C
ACC ON (On/Off) X — Not mounted but displayed.
Indicates position is recognized by TCM. Indi-
RANGE — X cates a specific value required for control when TM
fail-safe function is activated.
M GEAR POS — X Not mounted but displayed.
E
Diagnostic Tool Function INFOID:0000000003806375
OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE F

Refer to EC-122, "Diagnosis Tool Function".
TM-207
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10A]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with
less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item Malfunction is detected

DTC Possible cause
(CONSULT-III screen term) when...
When TCM is not transmitting
Harness or connectors
or receiving CAN communica-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT (CAN communication line is
tion signal for 2 seconds or
open or shorted.)
more.

NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
Perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated after the repair.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Is “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” detected?
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-III
YES >> Go to LAN section. Refer to LAN-22, "CAN System Specification Chart".
TM-208
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with C
less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
Item
When detecting error during the Harness or connectors
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) initial diagnosis of CAN control- (CAN communication line is F
ler to TCM. open or shorted.)

G
NOTE:
Perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated after the repair. H
With CONSULT-III I
J
Is “U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)” detected?
K
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT L

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. M
Is “U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)” indicated?
YES >> Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-315, "Exploded View".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". N
TM-209
BCM detects ON/OFF state of the stop lamp switch and transmits the data to the CVT control unit via CAN
communication by converting the data to a signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
- (Stop lamp switch, and BCM
When the brake switch does circuit are open or shorted.)
P0703 BRAKE SW/CIRC
not switch to ON or OFF. - (CAN communication line is
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
Is “P0703 BRAKE SW/CIRC” detected?

1. Check and adjust the installation position of stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Disconnect BCM connector.
3. Check voltage between BCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Connector Terminal
Ground
Depressed brake pedal Battery voltage
M123 118
Released brake pedal 0V
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle side
TM-210
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector A
Continuity
E115 2 M123 118 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
Check continuity between BCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
TM
Continuity
M123 118 Not existed E
YES >> GO TO 4.
F
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-211, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". G
• Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch H
• 10 A fuse (No. 7, located in the fuse and fusible link block)
5.CHECK BCM I
With CONSULT-III
2. Connect BCM connector. J
4. Select “BRAKE SW 1” in “Data Monitor” mode for “BCM” and verify the proper operation of ON/OFF. Refer
to BCS-42, "Reference Value". K
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-78, "Exploded View". L
M
N
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH O

Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch connector P

Connector Terminal
E115 1 2
TM-211
NO >> Repair or replace the stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-17, "Exploded View".
TM-212
A
The PNP switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. B
Item
(CONSULT-III screen term) TM
TCM does not receive the cor- • Harness or connectors
rect voltage signal (based on (PNP switches circuit is open
P0705 PNP SW/CIRC
the gear position) from the or shorted.)
E
switch. • PNP switch

CAUTION: F
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch G
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION H
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “Data Monitor” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. I
3. Start engine.
VEHICLE SPEED : More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)

J
ENG SPEED : More than 450 rpm
K
With GST
Is “P0705 PNP SW/CIRC” detected? L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003806388 M
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE

2. Disconnect PNP switch connector.
4. Check voltage between PNP switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. O
PNP switch vehicle side harness connector Voltage (Approx.)

Connector Terminal Ground P
Battery voltage
F57 3
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch
• 10 A fuse (No. 4, located in the fuse block J/B)
TM-213
• Ignition switch
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and PNP switch vehicle side
harness connector terminals.
TCM vehicle side harness connector PNP switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
1 5
2 6
F23 3 F57 7 Existed
4 8
11 4
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2 Ground
F23 3 Not existed
4
11
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PNP SWITCH
1. Remove control cable from manual lever. Refer to TM-319, "Exploded View".
2. Check PNP switch. Refer to TM-214, "Component Inspection (Park/Neutral Position Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Component Inspection (Park/Neutral Position Switch) INFOID:0000000003806389
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH

Check continuity of PNP switch connector terminals.
TM-214
PNP switch connector A

Connector Terminal
1 2
Manual lever in “P” position B
3 4
3 5 Manual lever in “R” position
Existed*
F57 1 2 *Continuity should not exist in positions C
Manual lever in “N” position other than the specified positions.
3 6
3 7 Manual lever in “D” position
3 8 Manual lever in “L” position TM
YES >> INSPECTION END E
NO >> Replace CVT assembly. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View".
TM-215
The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects the CVT fluid temperature and sends the signal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
During running, the CVT fluid
(Sensor circuit is open or
P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC temperature sensor signal volt-
shorted.)
age is excessively high or low.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (total).

ENG SPEED : 450 rpm more than
With GST
Is “P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” detected?
1. CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect the TCM connector.

Condition Resistance (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F23 13 25
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 1)
TM-216
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and CVT unit vehicle side har- A
Continuity B
13 17
F23 F24 Existed
25 19 C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM
3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. E

Continuity
Connector Terminal F
Ground
13
F23 Not existed
25
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
H
4. CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check CVT fluid temperature sensor. Refer to TM-217, "Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor)". I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J
5.CHECK TCM
Check TCM connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. K
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L
Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor) INFOID:0000000003806393
1.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR M

Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminals.
CVT unit harness connector N

Condition Resistance (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F24 17 19 O
YES >> INSPECTION END P
NO >> Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View".
TM-217
nal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Input speed sensor (primary • Harness or connectors
speed sensor) signal is not in- (Sensor circuit is open or
P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC put due to an open circuit. shorted.)
• An unexpected signal is input • Input speed sensor (primary
when vehicle is being driven. speed sensor)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III

Driving location : Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the
driving conditions required for this test.
With GST
1.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)

With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
TCM connector
Connector
(+) (−)
46
48
TM-218
3. If OK, check pulse when vehicle cruises.
A
TCM connector
Connector Terminal
B
MPH) in “L” position, use the
F23 33 950 Hz
measuring function. C
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 2. TM
2. Disconnect input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) connector.
4. Check voltage between input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector termi-
nals. F
Input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector
G
Connector
(+) (−)
F55 3 1 Battery voltage H
5. Check voltage between input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector termi-
nal and ground. I
Input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) vehicle side harness

connector Voltage (Approx.) J
Ground
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO-1 (Battery voltage is not supplied between terminals 1 and 3, and between terminal 3 and ground)>>GO
TO 6. L
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR) (SEN-
SOR GROUND) M

3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. N

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground O
F23 25 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR) (PART
1)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and input speed sensor (primary
TM-219
Input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) vehicle

side harness connector Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR) (PART
2)

Continuity
F23 33 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)
(POWER) (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and input speed sensor (pri-
mary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) vehicle

YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)
(POWER) (PART 2)

Continuity
F12 58 Not existed
• 10 A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R)
• Ignition switch
SOR GROUND) (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and input speed sensor (primary
TM-220
Input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) vehicle A

F23 25 F55 1 Existed B
YES >> GO TO 9.
SOR GROUND) (PART 2) TM
E
Continuity
F23 25 Not existed F
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK CVT UNIT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between CVT unit connector terminal and ground. H
CVT unit connector
Continuity
I
F24 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 11. J
11.CHECK TCM
K
L
YES >> Replace input speed sensor (primary speed sensor). Refer to TM-323, "Exploded View".
M
O
TM-221
The vehicle speed sensor CVT [output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)] detects the revolution of the
CVT output shaft and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is transmitted to the TCM, which converts it into
vehicle speed.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Signal from vehicle speed
sensor CVT [output speed • Harness or connectors
sensor (secondary speed (Sensor circuit is open or
P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT sensor)] is not input due to shorted.)
open or short circuit. • Output speed sensor (sec-
• Unexpected signal is input ondary speed sensor)
during running.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III

With GST
1.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR)

With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
TM-222
TCM connector A
Connector
(+) (−)
B
46
48
3. If OK, check pulse when vehicle drive. C
TCM connector
Condition Data (Approx.) TM
Connector Terminal
MPH) in “D” position, use the
F23 34 490 Hz E
measuring function.
YES >> GO TO 11. F
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER AND SENSOR GROUND G
2. Disconnect output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) connector.
H
terminals.
Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector I
Connector
(+) (−)
J
F19 3 1 Battery voltage
5. Check voltage between output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector K
terminal and ground.
Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) vehicle side har-

ness connector Voltage (Approx.)
L
Ground
Connector Terminal
M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO-1 (Battery voltage is not supplied between terminals 1 and 3, and between terminal 3 and ground)>>GO N
TO 6.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR) O
(SENSOR GROUND)
2. Disconnect TCM connector. P

Continuity
F23 7 Not existed
TM-223
YES >> GO TO 4.
(PART 1)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and output speed sensor (secondary

YES >> GO TO 5.
(PART 2)

Continuity
F23 34 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SEN-
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and output speed sensor
(secondary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector terminal.

YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SEN-

Continuity
F12 58 Not existed
• Ignition switch
TM-224
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR) A
B
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and output speed sensor (sec-
ondary speed sensor) vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) ve- C

F23 7 F19 1 Existed TM

YES >> GO TO 9. E
(SENSOR GROUND) (PART 2) F
TCM vehicle side harness connector G

Continuity
F23 7 Not existed
H
YES >> GO TO 10.
I
10.CHECK TCM
2. Connect each connector. J
YES >> Replace output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor). Refer to TM-324, "Exploded View". K
L
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-315, "Exploded View". M
TM-225
The engine speed signal is transmitted from ECM to TCM via CAN communication line.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• TCM does not receive the
CAN communication signal • Harness or connectors
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG from the ECM. (The ECM to the TCM circuit
• Engine speed is too low while is open or shorted.)
driving.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
PRI SPEED SEN : More than 1000 rpm

Is “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG” detected?
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC other than “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG” detected?
YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to EC-113, "CONSULT-III Function".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
With CONSULT-III
Select “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG” detected?
YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to TM-204, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
TM-226
3. Check for engine speed change corresponding to “ACC PEDAL OPEN” while monitoring “ENG SPEED
SIG”. A
Item name Condition Display value

ENG SPEED SIG Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading. B
ACC PEDAL OPEN Released accelerator pedal – Fully depressed accelerator pedal 0.0/8 – 8.0/8
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Check ignition signal circuit. Refer to EC-341, "Description".
4. CHECK TCM TM
Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to TM-275, "Reference Value".
E
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-315, "Exploded View".
TM-227
P0730 BELT DAMAGE
P0730 BELT DAMAGE
TCM selects the gear ratio using the engine load (throttle position), the primary pulley revolution speed, and
the secondary pulley revolution speed as input signals. Then it changes the operating pressure of the primary
pulley and the secondary pulley and changes the groove width of the pulley.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
Unexpected gear ratio is de-
P0730 BELT DAMG Transaxle assembly
tected.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Make sure that output voltage of CVT fluid temperature sensor is within the range specified below.

If it is out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the
voltage (cool down the fluid)

Is “P0730 BELT DAMG” detected?
1.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
Are any DTC displayed?
YES - 1 (DTC for “P0730 BELT DAMG” is displayed)>>Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-332,
"Exploded View".
YES - 2 (DTC except for “P0730 BELT DAMG” is displayed)>>Check the DTC detected item. Refer to TM-
204, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
TM-228
P0730 BELT DAMAGE
A
TM
TM-229
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehi-
cle speed and accelerator pedal position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when CVT fluid temperature is too low.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2.0/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed shall not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Torque converter clutch sole-
Normal voltage is not applied to noid valve
P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC solenoid due to open or short • Harness or connectors
circuit. (Solenoid circuit is open or
shorted.)

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
2. Wait at least 10 consecutive seconds.
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Is “P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT


F23 38 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
VALVE) (PART 1)
TM-230
Continuity
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
VALVE) (PART 2)

Continuity
F23 38 Not existed
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE G
Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to TM-231, "Component Inspection (Torque Converter
YES >> GO TO 5.
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve) INFOID:0000000003806409 K
1.TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground. L
CVT unit harness connector

Resistance (Approx.) M
F24 12 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
O
TM-231
This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This
is not only caused by electrical malfunctions (circuits open or shorted), but also by mechanical malfunctions
such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• CVT cannot perform lock-up
even if electrical circuit is
good.
• TCM detects as irregular by
• Torque converter clutch sole-
comparing reference value
P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN noid valve
with slip rotation.
• Hydraulic control circuit
• There is a big difference be-
tween engine speed and pri-
mary speed sensor when
TCM lock-up signal is on.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following condition for at least 30 seconds.

VEHICLE SPEED : Constant speed of more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
With GST
Is “P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-232
3. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to TM-233, "Component Inspection (Torque Con-
verter Clutch Solenoid Valve)". A
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B
C
Valve)".
YES >> GO TO 4. TM
Check output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-222, "DTC Logic". E
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F
Check input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-218, "DTC Logic". G
YES >> GO TO 6.
I
J
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve) INFOID:0000000003806413
1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE K

CVT unit connector

L
F24 12 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
M
NO >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View". N
1.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE O

P
CVT unit connector
F24 13 17.0 – 38.0 Ω
TM-233
sure to suit the driving condition in response to the signal transmitted from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Normal voltage is not applied • Harness or connectors
to solenoid due to open or (Solenoid circuit is open or
short circuit. shorted.)
P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
• TCM detects as irregular by • Pressure control solenoid
comparing target value with valve A (line pressure sole-
monitor value. noid valve)

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Is “P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) CIRCUIT

F23 40 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
TM-234
Continuity
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
C

Continuity
F23 40 Not existed
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) G
tion [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)]"
YES >> GO TO 5.
Component Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid K
Valve)] INFOID:0000000003806418
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) L

Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
M
F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω N
NO >> Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View". O
TM-235
SOLENOID VALVE)
P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A PERFORMANCE (LINE
PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
Unexpected gear ratio was de- • Output speed sensor (sec-
P0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN tected in the low side due to ex- ondary speed sensor)
cessively low line pressure. • Input speed sensor (primary
speed sensor)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. Test start from 0
km/h (0 MPH).

VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) More than
With GST
Is “P0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN” detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-236
SOLENOID VALVE)
YES >> GO TO 3. A
B
YES >> GO TO 4. C
Check input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-218, "DTC Logic". TM
YES >> GO TO 5.

Check TCM connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. F
Valve)] INFOID:0000000003806422
H

Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground. I

F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
L
TM-237
SOLENOID VALVE)
P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B PERFORMANCE (SEC PRES-
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) regulates the secondary pressure
to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
(Solenoid circuit is open or
shorted.)
Secondary pressure is too high • Pressure control solenoid
or too low compared with the valve B (secondary pressure
P0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN
commanded value while driv- solenoid valve system)
ing. • Transmission fluid pressure
sensor A (secondary pres-
sure sensor)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III

VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (6 MPH) More than
With GST
Is “P0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN” detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-238
SOLENOID VALVE)
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SECONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) A

Check pressure control solenoid valve B (Secondary pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-239, "Component
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) C
Check pressure control solenoid valve A (Line pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-239, "Component
Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)]".
YES >> GO TO 4.
E
4. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A (SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR) SYS-
TEM
Check transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) system. Refer to TM-242, "DTC F
Logic".
YES >> GO TO 5. G
Check TCM connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. H
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I

Valve)] INFOID:0000000003806426 J

Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground. K

Resistance (Approx.) L
F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
N
O
P
F24 3 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
TM-239
SOLENOID VALVE)
P0778 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B ELECTRICAL (SEC PRES-
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to the signal sent from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Normal voltage is not applied • Harness or connectors
to solenoid due to cut line, (Sensor circuit is open or
short, etc. shorted.)
P0778 PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC
• TCM detects as irregular by • Pressure control solenoid
comparing target value with valve B (secondary pressure
monitor value. solenoid valve)

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
With GST
Is “P0778 PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC” detected?

CIRCUIT

F23 39 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SEC-
ONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE)] (PART 1)
TM-240
SOLENOID VALVE)
ness connector terminal. A
Continuity
C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SEC- TM
ONDARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE)] (PART 2)
E
Continuity
F23 39 Not existed F
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve). Refer to TM-241, "Component H
YES >> GO TO 5. I
J
K
lenoid Valve)] INFOID:0000000003806431 L

Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground. M

Resistance (Approx.) N
F24 3 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
P
TM-241
SOR)
P0840 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A (SEC PRESSURE
SENSOR)
The transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) detects secondary pressure of CVT
and sends the signal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Transmission fluid pressure
Signal voltage of the transmis- sensor A (secondary pres-
sion fluid pressure sensor A sure sensor)
P0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC
(secondary pressure sensor) is • Harness or connectors
too high or too low while driving. (Switch circuit is open or
shorted.)

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Make sure that output voltage of line temperature sensor is within the range specified below.

With GST

1. Start engine.
TCM connector
F23 15 “N” position idle 1.0 V
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 2.
TM-242
SOR)
A
TCM connector
Connector
(+) (−) B
F23 26 25 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A TM
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. E
F
Continuity
F23 15 F24 23 Existed G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT [TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR A
I

Continuity J
F23 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SENSOR POWER AND SENSOR GROUND) (STEP L
1)
N
Continuity
O
25 19
F23 F24 Existed
26 20
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (SENSOR POWER AND SENSOR GROUND) (STEP
2)
TM-243
SOR)

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
25
F23 Not existed
26
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK TCM
TM-244
A
Using the engine load (throttle position), the primary pulley revolution speed, and the secondary pulley revolu- B
tion speed as input signals, TCM changes the operating pressure of the primary pulley and the secondary pul-
ley and changes the groove width of the pulley to control the gear ratio.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
Item
• Transmission fluid pressure E
Secondary pressure became sure sensor)
P0841 PRESS SEN/FNCTN
higher than line pressure. • Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or F
shorted.)

CAUTION: G
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch H
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “Data Monitor” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. J
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) More than K

Is “P0841 PRESS SEN/FNCTN” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-245, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
M
Perform line pressure test. Refer to TM-308, "Inspection and Judgment". N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-308, "Inspection and Judgment". O
TEM
Check transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) system. Refer to TM-242, "Descrip- P
tion".
YES >> GO TO 3.
TM-245
Check line pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-246, "Component Inspection [Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)]".
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check secondary pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-246, "Component Inspection [Pressure Control Sole-
noid Valve B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve)]".
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
Valve)] INFOID:0000000003806442


F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω


F24 3 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
TM-246
A
The pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve) regulates the secondary pressure B
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item TM
(Solenoid circuit is open or E
shorted.)
• Pressure control solenoid
Secondary fluid pressure is too
valve B (secondary pressure
P0868 SEC/PRESS DOWN low compared with the com-
solenoid valve) system F
manded value while driving.
• Transmission fluid pressure
sure sensor)
• Line pressure control system G

CAUTION: H
NOTE:
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I
J
With CONSULT-III
3. Make sure that output voltage of CVT fluid temperature sensor is within the range specified below. K

If it is out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the L
M
VEHICLE SPEED (accelerate : 0 → 50 km/h (31 MPH)
slowly)
ACC PEDAL OPEN : 0.5/8 – 1.0/8 N
Is “P0868 SEC/PRESS DOWN” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-247, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
P
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-247

YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
TEM
Check transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) system. Refer to TM-242, "Descrip-
tion".
YES >> GO TO 5.
Valve)] INFOID:0000000003806447


F24 2 3.0 – 9.0 Ω


F24 3 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
TM-248
A
When the power supply to the TCM is cut off, for example because the battery is removed, and the self-diag- B
nosis memory function stops, a malfunction is detected.
NOTE:
Since “P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY” will be indicated when replacing TCM, perform diagnosis after
erasing “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• When the power supply to the
TCM is cut off, for example
because the battery is re- F
moved, and the self-diagno- • Harness or connectors
sis memory function stops. (Battery or ignition switch and
P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY
• This is not a malfunction TCM circuit is open or short-
message (Whenever shutting ed.) G
off a power supply to the
TCM, this message appears
on the screen). H
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch I
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION J
With CONSULT-III
2. Wait for at least 2 consecutive seconds. K
Is “P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY” detected?
L
M
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

3. Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals.
O
TM-249

Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
(+) (−)
46
F23 48 5, 42
45
47
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
5
F23 Existed
42
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM POWER CIRCUIT
Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Connector Terminal
46
Ground
F23 48
45
47
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and IPDM E/R vehicle side har-
TCM vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
46
F23 F12 58 Existed
48
TM-250
4. Disconnect fuse block J/B connector. A

TCM vehicle side harness connector Fuse block J/B vehicle side harness connector B
Continuity
45
F23 E103 12F Existed C
47
YES >> GO TO 5. TM
E
1. Disconnect fuse block J/B connector.
F
TCM vehicle side harness connector Fuse block J/B vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
G
45 E103
F23 12F Existed
46
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND IPDM E/R AND BETWEEN TCM AND BATTERY (PART 3) I
TCM vehicle side harness connector J

Continuity
Connector Terminal
45
Ground K
46
F23 Not existed
47
48 L
YES >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
M
• 10 A fuse (No. 11, located in fuse block J/B)
• Ignition switch. Refer to PG-10, "Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. N
O
TM-251
The electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throt-
tle position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the signal to TCM via CAN
communication.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
TCM does not receive the prop- • ECM
er accelerator pedal position • Harness or connectors
P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T
signals (input by CAN commu- (CAN communication line is
nication) from ECM. open or shorted.)

NOTE:
OFF.Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
With CONSULT-III
2. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it, then wait for 5 seconds.

With CONSULT-III
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check the DTC Detected Item. Refer to EC-113, "CONSULT-III Function".
With CONSULT-III
Is “P1705 TP SEN /CIRC A/T” detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.
TM-252
A
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) to TCM via CAN com- B
munication line.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item TM
• CAN communication with the
ABS actuator and the electric E
unit (control unit) is malfunc-
tioning.
• There is a big difference be-
P1722 ESTM VEH SPD SIG shorted.)
tween the vehicle speed sig- F
• ABS actuator and electric
nal from the ABS actuator
unit (control unit)
and the electric unit (control
unit), and the vehicle speed
sensor signal. G

CAUTION: H
NOTE:
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. I
J
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. K
ACC PEDAL OPEN : 1.0/8 or less

VEHICLE SPEED : 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more L
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". M
N
1.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. O
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ABS”.
YES >> GO TO 2. P
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to BRC-48, "DTC No. Index" (ABS), BRC-140, "DTC No. Index"
(VDC/TCS/ABS).
With CONSULT-III
TM-253
NO >> GO TO 3.
TM-254
A
The vehicle speed sensor CVT [output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor)] detects the revolution of B
parking gear and generates a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM, which converts it into vehicle
speed.
nal to the TCM. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
A rotation sensor error is de-
tected when the gear does not
• Harness or connectors F
change in accordance with the
position of the stepping motor.
shorted.)
CAUTION:
• Output speed sensor (sec-
P1723 CVT SPD SEN/FNCTN One of the “P0720 VEH SPD
ondary speed sensor) G
SEN/CIR AT”, the “P0715 IN-
• Input speed sensor (primary
PUT SPD SEN/CIRC” or the
speed sensor)
“P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG“
• Engine speed signal system
is displayed with the DTC at H
the same time.

CAUTION: I
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch J
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION K
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “Data Monitor” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. L

M
N
Is “P1723 CVT SPD SEN/FNCTN” detected?
O
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003806460 P
1.CHECK STEP MOTOR FUNCTION

With CONSULT-III
TM-255
YES >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-264, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL SYSTEM
Check engine speed signal system. Refer to TM-226, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-256
A
The electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throt- B
tle position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends the signal to TCM via CAN
communication.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
Item
The electronically controlled Harness or connectors E
P1726 ELEC TH CONTROL throttle for ECM is malfunction- (Sensor circuit is open or short-
ing. ed.)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

NOTE:
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. G
With CONSULT-III H
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. I
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". J
1.CHECK DTC WITH ECM K
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. L
YES >> GO TO 2. M
NO >> Check the DTC Detected Item. Refer to EC-113, "CONSULT-III Function".
With CONSULT-III N
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-315, "Exploded View". O
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS P
TM-257
• The lock-up select solenoid valve controls lock-up clutch pressure or forward clutch pressure (reverse brake
pressure).
• When controlling lock-up clutch, the valve is turned OFF. When controlling forward clutch, it is turned ON.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
• Normal voltage is not applied
to solenoid due to cut line, • Lock-up select solenoid valve
short, etc. • Harness or connectors
P1740 LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC
• TCM detects as irregular by (Solenoid circuit is open or
comparing target value with shorted.)
monitor value.

CAUTION:
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
RANGE : “D” and “N” positions

(At each time, wait for 5 seconds.)
With GST
Is “P1740 LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC” detected?
1.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT


F23 37 17.0 – 38.0 Ω
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
TM-258
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 1) A
B
Continuity
C
YES >> GO TO 3. TM
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 2)
E

Continuity F
F23 37 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE H
Valve)".
I
YES >> GO TO 5.
J
L
1.LOCK-UP SELECT SOLENOID VALVE M

CVT unit harness connector N

F24 13 17.0 – 38.0 Ω
O
P
TM-259
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
TCM detects the unexpected
P1745 L/PRESS CONTROL TCM
line pressure.

NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON

If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the
1.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
Is the “P1745 L/PRESS CONTROL” displayed?
TM-260
P1777 STEP MOTOR
P1777 STEP MOTOR
A
The step motor changes the step by turning 4 coils ON/OFF according to the signal from TCM. As a result, the B
flow of line pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is controlled.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item TM
• Step motor
Each coil of the step motor is
P1777 STEP MOTR CIRC not energized properly due to
(Step motor circuit is open or
an open or a short.
shorted.)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

CAUTION:
NOTE: G
H
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine. I
With GST
J
Is “P1777 STEP MOTR CIRC” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-261, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
L
1.CHECK STEP MOTOR CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect TCM connector. M
TCM vehicle side harness connector N

Connector Terminal
27 28
F23 30.0 Ω O
29 30
4. Check resistance between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
P
TM-261
P1777 STEP MOTOR

Connector Terminal
27
Ground
28
F23 15.0 Ω
29
30
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect CVT unit harness connector.
Continuity
27 9
28 8
F23 F24 Existed
29 7
30 6
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
27
Ground
28
F23 Not existed
29
30
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEP MOTOR
Check step motor. Refer to TM-263, "Component Inspection (Step Motor)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-262
P1777 STEP MOTOR
Component Inspection (Step Motor) INFOID:0000000003806474
A
1.STEP MOTOR
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals and ground.
B
CVT unit connector

Connector Terminal C
6 7
F24 30.0 Ω
8 9
TM
CVT unit connector
Connector Terminal
E
6
Ground
7
F24 15.0 Ω
8 F
9
G
H
TM-263
• The step motor changes the step by turning 4 coils ON/OFF according to the signal from TCM. As a result,
the flow of line pressure to primary pulley is changed and pulley ratio is controlled.
• This diagnosis item is detected when the electrical system is OK, but the mechanical system is NG.
• This diagnosis item is detected when the state of the changing of the speed mechanism in the unit does not
operate normally.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Item
There is a big difference be-
tween the number of steps for
P1778 STEP MOTR/FNC Step motor
the stepping motor and for the
actual gear ratio.

CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, confirm “Hi” or “Mid” or “Low” fixation by
“PRI SPEED” and “VEHICLE SPEED” on “Data Monitor”.
• If hi-geared fixation occurred, go to TM-264, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF.
With CONSULT-III
3. Make sure that output voltage of CVT fluid temperature sensor is within the range specified below.


With GST.

TM-264
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR) SYSTEM B
Check input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-218, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR) SYSTEM TM
Check output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) system. Refer to TM-222, "Description".
E
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS F
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-315, "Exploded View". G
TM-265
TCM sends position indicator signals to combination meter via CAN communication line.

CAUTION:
1. Start engine.
2. Check that correct selector lever position (“P”, “N”, “R”, “D” or “L”) is displayed as selector lever is moved
into each position.
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Select “RANGE” on “Data Monitor” mode for “TRANSMISSION” and read out the value.
3. Check that correct selector lever position (“P”, “N”, “R”, “D” or “L”) is displayed as selector lever is moved
into each position.
NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear
shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>Check the following.
• Check sport mode switch. Refer to TM-272, "Description".
• Check CVT main system (Fail-safe function actuated).
- Check “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>
• Check “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>
• Check “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator.)>>
• Check the combination meter. Refer to MWI-33, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
TM-266
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
B
Component Function
It operates according to the signal from the stop lamp switch and
Shift lock solenoid
moves the lock lever.
C
It moves according to the operation of the shift lock solenoid and
Lock lever
performs the release of the shift lock.
It links with the selector button and restricts the selector lever TM
Detent rod
movement.
Park position switch It detects that the selector lever is in P position.
Key interlock cable and key interlock rod It transmits the lock lever operation to the slider in the key cylinder. E
Shift lock release button It moves the lock lever forcibly.
Wiring Diagram - CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003806482

F
TM-267
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
JCDWM0253GB
TM-268
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM
JCDWM0254GB
P

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
TM-269
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
NO >> GO TO 2.
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
1. CHECK POWER SOURCE

4. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector and ground.

Voltage (Approx.)
E115 3 Battery Voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> • Harness for short or open between fuse block J/B connector terminal 4F and stop lamp switch
harness connector terminal 3
• 10 A fuse [No. 3, located in the J/B]
• Ignition switch
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-271, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and control device
Stop lamp vehicle side harness connector Control device vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Stop lamp vehicle side harness connector

Continuity
E115 4 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-270
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
5.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A

Check voltage between control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Continuity B
M57 7 Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
TM
6.CHECK CONTROL DEVICE
1. Shift selector lever to “P” position.
2. Check continuity between control device connector. E
Control device connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal
F
M57 6 7 Existed
NO >> Replace control device. Refer to TM-155, "Exploded View".
H
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals 3 and 4. I
Stop lamp switch connector

Connector Terminal J
E115 3 4
L
TM-271
SPORT MODE SWITCH
SPORT MODE SWITCH
• The sport mode switch is installed to the selector lever knob.

• When pushing the sport mode switch (SPORT indicator lamp turns ON), the driving condition becomes sport
mode. When pushing again the sport mode switch (SPORT indicator lamp turns OFF), the driving condition
changes to D range.
1.CHECK SPORT MODE SWITCH SIGNAL

3. Check the ON/OFF operations of monitor item.
Monitor item Condition Status

SPORT MODE SW
YES >> INSPECTION END.
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to TM-208, "Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “METER/M&A”.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-67, "DTC Index".
3.CHECK SPORT MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
4. Check voltage between control device vehicle side harness connector terminals.

Connector
(+) (−)
M57 1 4 5V
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK SPORT MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between control device connector terminals.
TM-272
SPORT MODE SWITCH
Control device connector A

Connector Terminal
While pushing sport mode switch Existed
M57 1 4 B
Other condition Not existed
YES >> GO TO 5. C
5.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check control device connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. TM
YES >> GO TO 10.

Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. F

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M57 4 Existed
H
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE AND COMBINATION METER (PART 1) I
3. Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and combination meter J
Control device vehicle side harness connector Combination meter vehicle side harness connector
Continuity K
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE AND COMBINATION METER (PART 2) M
Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Control device vehicle side harness connector N

Continuity
M57 1 Not existed
O
YES >> GO TO 9.
Check combination meter connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
YES >> GO TO 10.
TM-273
SPORT MODE SWITCH

1. Reconnect all the connectors.
3. Select “O/D OFF SW” on “Data Monitor” mode for “METER/M&A”, and check the ON/OFF operations of
monitor item. Refer to MWI-53, "Reference Value".
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-126, "Exploded View".
TM-274
TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10A]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
TCM
B

C
VSP SENSOR During driving
reading.
TM
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
reading.
PRI SPEED SEN During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed. E
ENG SPEED SIG Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
SEC HYDR SEN “N” position idle 1.0 V
PRI HYDR SEN “N” position idle 0.7 – 3.5 V F
When CVT fluid temperature is 20°C (68°F) 2.0 V
ATF TEMP SEN*
When CVT fluid temperature is 80°C (176°F) 1.0 V
G
VIGN SEN Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
reading. H
PRI SPEED During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
45 X Approximately matches the speedom-
SEC SPEED During driving
eter reading. I
ENG SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading.
GEAR RATIO During driving 2.34 – 0.39
J
Released accelerator pedal - Fully depressed acceler-
ACC PEDAL OPEN 0.0/8 – 8.0/8
ator pedal
SEC PRESS “N” position idle 1.3 MPa
K
STM STEP During driving −20 step – 190 step
Lock-up “OFF” 0.0 A
ISOLT1
Lock-up “ON” 0.7 A L
Release foot from the accelerator pedal. 0.8 A
ISOLT2
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down. 0.0 A
M
ISOLT3 Secondary pressure low - Secondary pressure high 0.8 – 0.0 A
Lock-up “OFF” 0.0 A
SOLMON1
Lock-up “ON” 0.7 A N
“N” position idle 0.8 A
SOLMON2
When stalled 0.3 – 0.6 A
“N” position idle 0.6 – 0.7 A O
SOLMON3
When stalled 0.4 – 0.6 A
P POSITION SW P
Other than the above position. Off
R POSITION SW
Selector lever in “N“ position On
N POSITION SW
TM-275
TCM
D POSITION SW
L POSITION SW
Depressed brake pedal On
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal Off
Fully depressed accelerator pedal On
FULL SW
Released accelerator pedal Off
Released accelerator pedal On
IDLE SW
Fully depressed accelerator pedal Off
SPORT MODE SW
INDLRNG
When setting selector lever to other positions. Off
INDDRNG
Selector lever in “N“ position On
INDNRNG
INDRRNG
INDPRNG
When sport mode On
SPORT MODE IND
SMCOIL A During driving Changes On ⇔ Off.
SMCOIL B During driving Changes On ⇔ Off.
SMCOIL C During driving Changes On ⇔ Off.
SMCOIL D During driving Changes On ⇔ Off.
LUSEL SOL OUT Wait at least for 5 seconds with the selector lever in “R”
Off
and “D” positions
LUSEL SOL MON Wait at least for 5 seconds with the selector lever in “R”
Off
and “D” positions
ABS operate On
ABS ON
Selector lever in “N” and “P” position N·P
Selector lever in “R” position R
RANGE
Selector lever in “D” position D
Selector lever in “L” position L
*Means CVT fluid temperature. Convert numerical values for actual fluid temperature °C (°F). Refer to TM-301, "ATFTEMP COUNT
Conversion Table".
TERMINAL LAYOUT
TM-276
TCM
SCIA6679J
TM
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
Description Value E
(wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
+ − Signal name Input/Output
Battery
1 Selector lever in “R” position F
Ground R RANGE SW Input voltage
(P/B)
Other than the above position 0V
Battery
2 Selector lever in “N” position
voltage G
Ground N RANGE SW Input
(P/L)
Ignition switch ON
Battery H
3 Selector lever in “D” positions
Ground D RANGE SW Input voltage
(G/O)
Battery I
4 Selector lever in “L” position
Ground L RANGE SW Input voltage
(GR)
5
J
(B)
6
Ground K-LINE Input/Output — —
(O) K
7
Ground Sensor ground Input Always 0V
(W)
8 L
— CLOCK (SEL2) — — —
(G/W)
9
— CHIP SELECT (SEL1) — — —
(L/R)
M
10
— DATA I/O (SEL3) — — —
(BR/R)
Battery N
11 Selector lever in “P” position
Ground P RANGE SW Input Ignition switch ON voltage
(BR/W)
When CVT fluid temperature is O
2.0 V
13 CVT fluid temperature sen- 20°C (68°F)
Ground Input Ignition switch ON
(V) sor When CVT fluid temperature is
1.0 V
80°C (176°F)
P
15
Ground sure sensor A (Secondary Input “N” position idle 1.0 V
(V/W)
pressure sensor)
25
Ground Sensor ground Input Always 0V
(W/R)
TM-277
TCM
Terminal No.
Description Value
(wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
+ − Signal name Input/Output
26 Ignition switch ON 5.0 V

Ground Sensor power Output
(L/O) Ignition switch OFF 0V
27 10.0
Ground Step motor D Output
(R/G) msec
Within 2 seconds after ignition switch ON, measure the
28 time using the pulse width measurement function (Hi 30.0
Ground Step motor C Output
(R) level) of CONSULT-III.* msec
29 CAUTION: 10.0
Ground Step motor B Output Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle
(O/B) msec
diagnosis connector.
30 30.0
Ground Step motor A Output
(G/R) msec
31
— CAN-L Input/Output — —
(P)
32
— CAN-H Input/Output — —
(L)
33 Input speed sensor (Prima-
Ground Input When driving [“L” position, 20 km/h (12 MPH)] 950 Hz
(SB) ry speed sensor)
34 Output speed sensor (Sec-
Ground Input When driving [“D” position, 20 km/h (12 MPH)] 490 Hz
(LG/R) ondary speed sensor)
Selector lever in “P” or “N” posi- Battery
tions voltage
37 Lock-up select solenoid
Ground Output Ignition switch ON Wait at least for 5 seconds with
(V/R) valve
the selector lever in “R” or “D” 0V
positions.
When CVT performs lock-up 6.0 V
38 Torque converter clutch so- When vehicle cruis-
Ground Output When CVT does not perform
(L/W) lenoid valve es in “D” position 1.5 V
lock-up
39
Ground valve B (Secondary pres- Output
(W/B) Press the accelerator pedal all 3.0 – 4.0
sure solenoid valve)
“P” or “N” position the way down. V
idle Release your foot from the ac- 5.0 – 7.0
40
Ground valve A (Line pressure so- Output
(R/Y) Press the accelerator pedal all
lenoid valve) 1.0 V
the way down.
42
(B)
Ground Input Always
Battery
46 Ignition switch ON
Ground Power supply Input voltage
(Y)
Ground Input Always
Battery
48 Ignition switch ON
Ground Power supply Input voltage
(Y)
*: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item.
TM-278
TCM
Wiring Diagram - CVT CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003806488
TM
P
JCDWM0248GB
TM-279
TCM
JCDWM0249GB
TM-280
TCM
TM
JCDWM0250GB
TM-281
TCM
JCDWM0251GB
TM-282
TCM
TM
JCDWM0252GB
P
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000003806489
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. In this mode TCM is operates even if there is an error in a main
electronic control input/output signal circuit.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the CVT to make driving possible.
TM-283
TCM
Output Speed Sensor (Secondary Speed Sensor)
The shift pattern is changed in accordance with throttle position when an unexpected signal is sent from the
output speed sensor (secondary speed sensor) to the TCM. The manual mode is inhibited, and the transaxle
is put in “D”.
Input Speed Sensor (Primary Speed Sensor)
The shift pattern is changed in accordance with throttle position and secondary speed (vehicle speed) when
an unexpected signal is sent from the input speed sensor (primary speed sensor) to the TCM. The manual
mode is inhibited, and the transaxle is put in “D”.
PNP Switch
If an unexpected signal is sent from the PNP switch to the TCM, the transaxle is put in “D”.
CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor
If an unexpected signal is sent from the CVT fluid temperature sensor to the TCM, the gear ratio in use before
receiving the unexpected signal is maintained or the gear ratio is controlled to keep engine speed under 5000
rpm.
Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor A (Secondary Pressure Sensor)
• If an unexpected signal is sent from the transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) to
the TCM, the secondary pressure feedback control is stopped and the offset value obtained before the non-
standard condition occurs is used to control line pressure.
• If transmission fluid pressure sensor A (secondary pressure sensor) error signal is input to TCM, secondary
pressure feedback control stops, but line pressure is controlled normally.
Pressure Control Solenoid A (Line Pressure Solenoid valve)
If an unexpected signal is sent from the solenoid to the TCM, the pressure control solenoid A (line pressure
solenoid valve) is turned OFF to achieve the maximum fluid pressure.
Pressure Control Solenoid B (Secondary Pressure Solenoid valve)
If an unexpected signal is sent from the solenoid to the TCM, the pressure control solenoid B (secondary pres-
sure solenoid valve) is turned OFF to achieve the maximum fluid pressure.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid valve
If an unexpected signal is sent from the solenoid to the TCM, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
turned OFF to cancel the lock-up.
Step Motor
If an unexpected signal is sent from the step motor to the TCM, the step motor coil phases “A” through “D” are
all turned OFF to hold the gear ratio used just before the non-standard condition occurred.
CVT Lock-up Select Solenoid valve
If an unexpected signal is sent from the solenoid to the TCM, the CVT lock-up select solenoid valve is turned
OFF to cancel the lock-up.
TCM Power Supply (Memory Back-up)
Transaxle assembly is protected by limiting the engine torque when the memory back-up power supply (for
controlling) from the battery is not supplied to TCM. Normal status is restored when turning the ignition switch
OFF to ON after the normal power supply.
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to TM-208.

1 U1000 CAN communication line
2 Except above
NOTE:
TM-284
TCM
If DTC “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to TM-208. A
DTC*1
Items B
MI*2, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III only Reference
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
CONSULT-III or “TRANSMISSION”
GST
— P0703 BRAKE SW/CIRC TM-210 C
P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC TM-213
P0710 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC TM-216
TM
P0715 P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC TM-218
P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT TM-222
— P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG TM-226 E
— P0730 BELT DAMG TM-228
P0740 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC TM-230
P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN TM-232
F
P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC TM-234
P0746 P0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN TM-236
G
P0776 P0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN TM-238
P0778 P0778 PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC TM-240
P0840 P0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC TM-242 H
— P0841 PRESS SEN/FNCTN TM-245
— P0868 SEC/PRESS DOWN TM-247
I
— P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY TM-249
— P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T TM-252
— P1722 ESTM VEH SPD SIG TM-253 J
— P1723 CVT SPD SEN/FNCTN TM-255
— P1726 ELEC TH CONTROL TM-257
K
P1740 P1740 LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC TM-258
— P1745 L/PRESS CONTROL TM-260
P1777 P1777 STEP MOTR CIRC TM-261 L
P1778 P1778 STEP MOTR/FNC TM-264
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-208
M
— U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) TM-209
*1: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
*2: Refer to TM-202, "Diagnosis Description".
N
TM-285
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10A]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
No
Item Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference
.
“D” position)
12. Forward clutch
OFF vehicle TM-332
13. Control valve
Shift Shock
“R” position)
12. Reverse brake
OFF vehicle TM-332
13. Control valve
ON vehicle
Shock is too large for 3. CAN communication line TM-208
3
lock-up. 4. CVT fluid level and state TM-304
OFF vehicle
TM-286
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
. A
B
5. Stall test TM-306 C
6. Step motor TM-261
ON vehicle
Vehicle cannot be TM
4 started from “D” posi-
tion. 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-252
12. Power supply TM-249
13. Oil pump assembly F
14. Forward clutch
OFF vehicle TM-332
15. Control valve
G
Slips/Will 16. Parking components
2. CVT position TM-314 H
I
ON vehicle
7. Primary speed sensor TM-218 J
Vehicle cannot be 8. Secondary speed sensor TM-222
5 started from “R” posi-
tion. 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-252
K
12. Power supply TM-249 L
OFF vehicle 14. Reverse brake

TM-332 M
15. Control valve
TM-287
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
.
6 Does not lock-up.
TM-332
Slips/Will 16. Control valve
Does not hold lock-up 8. Step motor TM-261

7
condition. 9. PNP switch TM-213
TM-332
16. Control valve
TM-288
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
. A
B
ON vehicle 4. Primary speed sensor TM-218
Lock-up is not re- 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-230 C

8
leased. 6. CAN communication line TM-208
TM
TM-332
10. Control valve E
3. Stall test TM-306 F
Slips/Will 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-252

Not Engage 5. CAN communication line TM-208
G
ON vehicle
8. Step motor TM-261 H
With selector lever in 9. Primary speed sensor TM-218
9 “D” position, accelera-
tion is extremely poor. 10. Secondary speed sensor TM-222
I
13. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-216 J
K
OFF vehicle
18. Control valve L
TM-289
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
.
ON vehicle
With selector lever in 9. Primary speed sensor TM-218
“R” position, accelera-
tion is extremely poor.
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will 17. Reverse brake TM-332
Not Engage 18. Control valve
11 Slips at lock-up.
TM-332
16. Control valve
TM-290
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
. A
B
5. CAN communication line TM-208 C
ON vehicle TM
10. Secondary speed sensor TM-222 E
12 No creep at all.
13. Secondary pressure sensor TM-242 F
G
17. Gear system
OFF vehicle
18. Forward clutch TM-332 H
19. Reverse brake
Others 20. Control valve
I
3. PNP switch TM-213 J
K
ON vehicle
8. Secondary speed sensor TM-222 L
Vehicle cannot run in
13 10. CVT fluid temperature sensor TM-216
all positions.
M
N
15. Gear system
OFF vehicle 16. Forward clutch O
TM-332
17. Reverse brake
18. Control valve
P
TM-291
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
.
ON vehicle
14 “D” position, driving is
15. Gear system
OFF vehicle
17. Control valve
Others
ON vehicle
15 “R” position, driving is
15. Gear system
OFF vehicle
17. Control valve
TM-292
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
. A
B
ON vehicle 4. Secondary speed sensor TM-222
Judder occurs during
16 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-252 C
lock-up.
TM
OFF vehicle
1. CVT fluid level and state TM-304 E
4. Torque converter TM-335 F
Strange noise in “D”
17 5. Oil pump assembly
position.
6. Gear system
OFF vehicle G
Others 8. Control valve
9. Bearing H
I
Strange noise in “R” 4. Torque converter TM-335

18
position. 5. Oil pump assembly J
TM-332
7. Reverse brake
K
8. Control valve
ON vehicle 2. Engine speed signal TM-226 L
Strange noise in “N”
19 4. Torque converter TM-335
position.
M
OFF vehicle
6. Gear system TM-332
7. Control valve
N
TM-293
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
.
Vehicle does not de- ON vehicle 5. Primary speed sensor TM-218
20 celerate by engine
brake. 6. Secondary speed sensor TM-222
ON vehicle
21 Maximum speed low. 8. Secondary speed sensor TM-222
Others 9. Secondary pressure sensor TM-242
TM-332
14. Forward clutch
15. Control valve
With selector lever in 1. PNP switch TM-213
“P” position, vehicle ON vehicle
does not enter park-
ing condition or, with
22
selector lever in an-
other position, park- OFF vehicle 3. Parking components TM-332
ing condition is not
cancelled.
Vehicle runs with CVT 3. CVT position TM-314

23
in “P” position. 4. Parking components
OFF vehicle 5. Gear system TM-332
6. Control valve
TM-294
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
. A
B
Vehicle runs with CVT
24 4. Gear system
in “N” position.
5. Forward clutch C
OFF vehicle TM-332
6. Reverse brake
7. Control valve
TM
3. Primary speed sensor TM-218 E
ON vehicle 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-230
25 Engine stall. 5. CAN communication line TM-208
6. Stall test TM-306 F
OFF vehicle G
2. Engine speed signal TM-226 H
ON vehicle
Engine stalls when 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-230
26 selector lever is shift- I
ed “N”→“D” or “R”. 5. CAN communication line TM-208
Others
7. Torque converter TM-335 J
OFF vehicle
K
Engine speed does ON vehicle
not return to idle.
4. CAN communication line TM-208 L
M
N
ON vehicle 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-252
28 CVT does not shift. 6. CAN communication line TM-208
7. Primary speed sensor TM-218 O
P
10. Control valve
OFF vehicle TM-332
PG-55,
1. Ignition switch and starter
STR-10
Engine does not start
29 ON vehicle
in “N” or “P” position. 2. CVT position TM-314
TM-295
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
No
.
PG-55,
1. Ignition switch and starter
Engine starts in posi- STR-10
30 tions other than “N” or ON vehicle
“P”.
depressed with igni-
tion switch ON, selec-
tor lever cannot be
Others not depressed with ig-
nition switch ON, se-
lector lever can be
Cannot be changed to
33 ON vehicle 2. CAN communication line TM-208
sport mode.
3. Combination meters MWI-42
CVT indicator lamp is
33 ON vehicle 2. Combination meters MWI-42
not turned ON.
TM-296
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CVT: RE0F10A]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: TM
F
connectors.
G
INFOID:0000000003901477
NOTE: H
I
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: L
TM-297
PRECAUTIONS
PIIB3706J
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and Engine INFOID:0000000003806496
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid
valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution for TCM and CVT Assembly Replacement INFOID:0000000003806497
CAUTION:
TCM if necessary.

first.)
the default state.
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit Connector INFOID:0000000003806498
REMOVAL
TM-298
PRECAUTIONS
Rotate bayonet ring (1) counterclockwise. Pull out CVT unit harness
connector (2) upward and remove it. A
SCIA6685J
TM
INSTALLATION
1. Align ∆ marking on CVT unit harness connector terminal body
with o marking on bayonet ring. Insert CVT unit harness connec-
E
tor. Then rotate bayonet ring clockwise.
SCIA2097E
H
2. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise until ∆ marking on CVT unit har-
ness connector terminal body is aligned with the slit on bayonet
ring as shown in the figure (correctly fitting condition). Install
CVT unit harness connector to CVT unit harness connector ter- I
minal body.
K
SCIA2098E
CAUTION: L
• Securely align ∆ marking on CVT unit harness connector
terminal body with bayonet ring slit. Then, be careful not
to make a half fit condition as shown in the figure.
• Never mistake the slit of bayonet ring for other dent por- M
tion.
O
SCIA2099E
Precaution INFOID:0000000003806499
P
NOTE:
If any malfunction occurs in the RE0F10A model transaxle, replace the entire transaxle assembly.
TM-299
PRECAUTIONS
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery
cable before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness
connector. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if
ignition switch is turned OFF.
SEF289H

from TCM, do not damage pin terminals (bend or break).
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin ter-
SEF291H
• Perform TCM input/output signal inspection and check

whether TCM functions normally or not before replacing TCM.
Refer to TM-275, "Reference Value".
MEF040DA
• Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” after performing each

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
• Always use the specified brand of CVT fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Flu-
ids and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper, not cloth rags, during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordi-
nance, etc. after replacing the CVT fluid.
SAT652J
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000003806500
OBD SELF-DIAGNOSIS
• CVT self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the Malfunction Indicator (MI). Refer to the table on TM-204, "CONSULT-III Function
(TRANSMISSION)" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
• The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MI are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories.
Always perform the procedure on TM-202, "Diagnosis Description" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
For details of OBD, refer to EC-102, "Diagnosis Description".
TM-300
PRECAUTIONS
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-96. A
ATFTEMP COUNT Conversion Table INFOID:0000000003806501
B
ATFTEMP COUNT Temperature °C (°F) ATFTEMP COUNT Temperature °C (°F)
4 –30 (–22) 177 90 (194)
8 –20 (–4) 183 95 (203)
C
13 –10 (14) 190 100 (212)

17 –5 (23) 196 105 (221) TM
21 0 (32) 201 110 (230)
27 5 (41) 206 115 (239)
32 10 (50) 210 120 (248) E
39 15 (59) 214 125 (257)
47 20 (68) 218 130 (266)
F
55 25 (77) 221 135 (275)
64 30 (86) 224 140 (284)
73 35 (95) 227 145 (293) G
83 40 (104) 229 150 (302)
93 45 (113) 231 155 (311)
H
104 50 (122) 233 160 (320)
114 55 (131) 235 165 (329)
124 60 (140) 236 170 (338) I
134 65 (149) 238 175 (347)
143 70 (158) 239 180 (356)
J
152 75 (167) 241 190 (374)
161 80 (176) 243 200 (392)
169 85 (185) — — K
TM-301
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10A]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Tool number
Description
Tool name
1. ST25054000 Measuring line pressure
Adapter
2. ST25055000
Adapter
SCIA8372J
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure

Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)
ZZA1227D
Tool number
Description
Tool name
PBIC0190E
Oil pressure gauge set Measuring line pressure

1. Oil pressure gauge
2. Hose
3. Joint pipe
SCIA8373J
TM-302
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10A]
Tool number
Description
Tool name A
Installing differential side oil seal
B
Drift
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
C
NT115
Installing converter housing oil seal

TM
Drift
a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. E
NT115
F
TM-303
CVT FLUID
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [CVT: RE0F10A]
CVT FLUID
CHECKING CVT FLUID

The fluid level should be checked with the fluid warmed up to 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). The fluid level check
procedure is as follows:
1. Check for fluid leakage.
When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10
minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F).
3. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
4. Apply parking brake firmly.
5. With engine at idle, while depressing brake pedal, move shift
selector throughout the entire shift range.
SMA146B
6. Pull out the CVT fluid level gauge from the CVT fluid charging
pipe after pressing the tab on the CVT fluid level gauge to
release the lock.
SCIA1933E
7. Wipe fluid off the CVT fluid level gauge. Insert the CVT fluid
level gauge rotating 180° from the originally installed position,
then securely push the CVT fluid level gauge until it meets the
top end of the CVT fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION:
When wiping away the CVT fluid level gauge, always use
lint-free paper, not a cloth rag.
SCIA1931E
8. Place the selector lever in “P” or “N” and check that the fluid
level is within the specified range.
CAUTION:
When reinstalling CVT fluid level gauge, insert it into the
CVT fluid charging pipe and rotate it to the original installa-
tion position until securely locked.
SCIA1932E
CVT FLUID CONDITION
TM-304
CVT FLUID
Check CVT fluid condition.
• If CVT fluid is very dark or smells burned, check operation of CVT. A
Flush cooling system after repair of CVT.
• If CVT fluid contains frictional material (clutches, brakes, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and
B
compressed air after repair of CVT. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded
View".
C
Fluid status Conceivable cause Required operation
Replace the CVT fluid and check the
CVT fluid become ATA0022D
Varnished (viscous CVT main unit and the vehicle for
degraded due to TM
varnish state) malfunctions (wire harnesses, cool-
high temperatures.
er pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the CVT fluid and check for
Water in the fluid
cloudy places where water is getting in. E
Large amount of Unusual wear of
Replace the CVT fluid and check for
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
improper operation of the CVT.
in CVT
F
Changing INFOID:0000000003806505
CAUTION: G
Replace O-ring with new ones at the final stage of the operation when installing.
1. Remove drain plug from oil pan.
2. Remove drain plug gasket from drain plug. H
3. Install drain plug gasket to drain plug.
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug gasket. I
4. Install drain plug to oil pan. Refer to TM-321, "Exploded View".
5. Fill CVT fluid from CVT fluid charging pipe to the specified level.
J
CVT fluid : Refer to TM-337, "General Specifica-
tion".
Fluid capacity : Refer to TM-337, "General Specifica- K
tion".
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Never mix with other fluid. L
• Using CVT fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will deteriorate in driveability and
CVT durability, and may damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling CVT fluid, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust. M
• Sufficiently shake the container of CVT fluid before using.
• Delete CVT fluid deterioration date with CONSULT-III after changing CVT fluid.
6. With the engine warmed up, drive the vehicle in an urban area. N
NOTE:
When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10 minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50 to
80°C (122 to 176°F).
O
7. Check CVT fluid level and condition.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 5 if CVT fluid has been contaminated.
P
TM-305
STALL TEST
STALL TEST
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the
CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of CVT fluid. Replenish if necessary.
SAT647B
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
NOTE:
It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine rpm on
indicator.
5. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
SCIA7463E
6. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
7. Quickly read off the stall speed, and then quickly remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test.
Stall speed : Refer to TM-337, "Stall Speed".

8. Move the selector lever to the “N” position. SAT514G
9. Cool down the CVT fluid.

CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT
Selector lever position

Expected problem location
“D” “R”
H O • Forward clutch
O H • Reverse brake
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
Stall rotation
• Line pressure low
• Primary pulley
H H
• Secondary pulley
• Steel belt
TM-306
STALL TEST
O: Stall speed within standard value position.
H: Stall speed is higher than standard value. A
L: Stall speed is lower than standard value.
TM
TM-307
LINE PRESSURE TEST
LINE PRESSURE TEST
INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the CVT fluid reaches in the range of 50 to 80°C
(122 to 176°F), then inspect the amount of CVT fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The CVT fluid temperature rises in the range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driv-
ing.
3. After warming up CVT, remove the oil pressure detection plug
and install the joint pipe adapter (SST: KV31103600), adapter
(SST: 25055000), oil pressure gauge set (commercial service
tool).
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O-
ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.
JPDIA0739GB
4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
SCIA7463E
5. Start the engine, and then measure the line pressure at both idle
and the stall speed.
CAUTION:
• Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
• When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer
to TM-306, "Inspection and Judgment".
Line pressure : Refer to TM-337, "Line Pressure".

6. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
SAT493G
detection plug and tighten to the specified torque below.
: 7.5 N·m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
CAUTION:
JUDGMENT
TM-308
LINE PRESSURE TEST
Judgment Possible cause A

Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example
Low for all positions • Oil pump wear
B
(“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “L”) • Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
• Oil strainer ⇒ oil pump ⇒ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
• Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a specific Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after C
Idle speed
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment
function. TM
For example
High
• CVT fluid temperature sensor malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid A (line pressure solenoid) malfunction (sticking in OFF state, filter E
clog, cut line)
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment func- F
tion.
For example
Line pressure does not
rise higher than the
line pressure for idle.
• TCM malfunction G
• Pressure control solenoid A (line pressure solenoid) malfunction (shorting, sticking in ON
state)
Stall speed H
Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the
pressure adjustment function.
The pressure rises,
For example
but does not enter the
• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction I
standard position.
• Pressure control solenoid A (line pressure solenoid) malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
Only low for a specific Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after J
TM-309
ROAD TEST
ROAD TEST
DESCRIPTION
• The purpose of the test is to determine the overall performance of
CVT and analyze causes of problems.
• The road test consists of the following three parts:
1. “Check Before Engine Is Started” TM-310.
2. “Check at Idle” TM-311.
3. “Cruise Test” TM-312.
SAT786A
• Before the road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures
and items to check.
• Perform tests for all the check items until a malfunction phenome-
non is detected. Perform diagnosis for NG items after the comple-
tion of road tests.
SAT496G
CONSULT-III SETTING PROCEDURE

• Using CONSULT-III, perform a cruise test and record the result.
• Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per Shift Schedule.
1. Touch “Data Monitor” on “Direct Diagnostic Mode” screen.
2. Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” to set recording condition.
3. See “Numerical Display”, “Barchart Display” or “Line Graph Display”.
5. When performing cruise test. Refer to TM-312, "Cruise Test".
6. After finishing cruise test part, touch “RECORD”.
7. Touch “STORE”.
8. Touch “BACK”.
9. Touch “DISPLAY”.
10. Touch “PRINT”.
11. Check the monitor data printed out.
Check before Engine Is Started INFOID:0000000003806509

3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Never start engine.)
Has shift position indicator been turned ON for about 2 seconds?
YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to TM-204, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
3. Go to TM-311, "Check at Idle".
TM-310
ROAD TEST
A
Check at Idle INFOID:0000000003806510
1.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE B

2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. C
Is engine started?
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM
2.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Turn ignition switch ON. E
2. Move selector lever to “D”, “L” or “R” position.
Is engine started? F
YES >> Stop “Road Test”. Refer to TM-286, "Symptom Table".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTION G
3. Release parking brake. H
4. Push vehicle forward or backward.
5. Apply parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward? I
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTION J
1. Start engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Release parking brake. K
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
NO >> GO TO 5. L
5.CHECK SHIFT SHOCK

1. Apply foot brake. M
Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?
YES >> Refer to TM-286, "Symptom Table". GO TO 6. N
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTION
O
Release foot brake for several seconds.
Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
YES >> GO TO 7.
P
7.CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTION
Move selector lever to “D” position and check if vehicle creeps forward.
Does vehicle creep forward in all positions?
YES >> Go to TM-312, "Cruise Test".
TM-311
ROAD TEST
Cruise Test INFOID:0000000003806511
1.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS — PART 1

1. Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to warm engine oil and CVT fluid up to operating temperature.
CVT fluid operating temperature : 50 – 80°C (122 – 176°F)

4. Start engine.
With CONSULT-III
Is the inspection results normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
SCIA6644E
2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS — PART 2

With CONSULT-III
YES >> GO TO 3.
SCIA4366E
3.CHECK SPORT MODE CONDITION (PART 1)

2. Push sport mode switch. (Sport mode ON.)
With CONSULT-III
YES >> GO TO 4.
SCIA6644E
4.CHECK SPORT MODE CONDITION (PART 2)

TM-312
ROAD TEST
Speed When Shifting Gears”. A
With CONSULT-III
cle Speed When Shifting Gears". B
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Refer to TM-286, "Symptom Table". GO TO 5. C
SCIA4366E
5.CHECK “L” POSITION FUNCTION (PART 1) TM

E
With CONSULT-III F
Is the inspection results normal? G
YES >> GO TO 6.
H
SCIA6644E
6.CHECK “L” POSITION FUNCTION (PART 2)

1. Park vehicle on flat surface. I
J
With CONSULT-III
Does it switch to manual mode? K
YES >> GO TO 7.
L
SCIA4366E
7.CHECK ENGINE BRAKE FUNCTION

M
Check engine brake.
Does engine braking effectively reduce vehicle speed in “L” position?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle. N
2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TM-204, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
NO >> Refer to TM-286, "Symptom Table". Then continue trouble diagnosis.
O
TM-313
CVT POSITION
CVT POSITION
INSPECTION
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Check that selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check that the actual position of the selector lever matches the position shown by the shift
position indicator and the manual lever on the transaxle.
5. The method of operating the selector lever to individual posi-
tions correctly should be as shown.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” or “L” posi-
tion without applying forward/backward force to selector lever,
check button operation for sticking.
7. Check that back-up lamps illuminate only when selector lever is
placed in the “R” position.
8. When in “R” position, check that back-up lamps illuminate even
when the selector lever is pushed toward the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Check the lighting without pressing shift button. JPDIA0343GB
9. Check that the back-up lamps do not illuminate when selector lever is pushed toward the “R” position
when in the “P” or “N” position.
CAUTION:
Check the lighting without pressing shift button.
10. Check that the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the “P” and “N” positions.
11. Check that transaxle is locked completely in “P” position.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Place selector lever in “ P” position.
CAUTION:
Turn wheels more than 1/4 rotations and apply the park lock.
2. Loosen nut (A) and place manual lever (B) in “P” position.
CAUTION:
Never apply any force to the manual lever.
3. Tighten nut. Refer to TM-319, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Fix the manual lever when tightening.
JPDIA0780ZZ
TM-314
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [CVT: RE0F10A]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
B
TM
JPDIA0591GB J
1. Bracket 2. TCM
: Vehicle front
K

L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Never impact on TCM when removing or installing TCM. M
1. Disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal.
2. Remove the air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
N
3. Disconnect the TCM connector (A).
: Vehicle front O
4. Remove the TCM (1) from the bracket.
JPDIA0596ZZ
INSTALLATION
TM-315
CAUTION:
After TCM is replaced, refer to TM-179, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT :
Service After Replacing TCM and Transaxle Assembly".
TM-316
CONTROL DEVICE
CONTROL DEVICE
A
TM
L
JPDIA0741GB
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Knob cover M

4. Control device assembly 5. Shift lock unit 6. Dust cover
N
REMOVAL
O
TM-317
CONTROL DEVICE
2. Slide knob cover (1) below selector lever downward.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage knob cover.
3. Pull lock pin (2) out of selector lever knob (3).
4. Remove selector lever knob and knob cover.
5. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded
View".
JPDIA0606ZZ
6. Remove control cable (1) from control device assembly. Refer to

7. Remove control device assembly (2).
: Bolt
JPDIA0615ZZ
8. Remove control device connector (A) using a flat-bladed screw-

driver (B).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage control device connector.
9. Remove shift lock unit from control device assembly.
JPDIA0616ZZ
INSTALLATION
When installing control cable (1) to control device assembly (2),
check that control cable is fully pressed in with the ribbed (A) surface
facing upward.
JPDIA0609ZZ

Adjust the CVT positions after installing control device. Refer to TM-152, "Inspection and Adjustment".
TM-318
CONTROL CABLE
CONTROL CABLE
A
TM
I
JPDIA0742GB
1. Bracket 1 2. Lock plate 3. Bracket 2 J

4. Transaxle assembly 5. Control cable 6. Control device assembly
K
REMOVAL L
CAUTION:
Check that parking brake is applied before removal/installation.
1. Disconnect control cable from control device assembly. Refer to TM-319, "Exploded View".
M
3. Remove control cable (1) from manual lever (A).
N
: Nut
4. Remove lock plate (2) from control cable.

5. Remove control cable from bracket 2 (3). O
7. Remove heat plate.
P
JPDIA0738ZZ
TM-319
CONTROL CABLE
8. Remove control cable (1) from bracket 1 (2).
9. Remove nuts ( ).
: Vehicle front
10. Remove rear foot duct 1 (right). Refer to VTL-55, "REAR FOOT
DUCT 1 : Exploded View".
11. Remove the control cable from the vehicle.
JPDIA0752ZZ
INSTALLATION
When installing the control cable (1) to the control device assembly
(2), make sure that the control cable is fully pressed in with the
ribbed (A) surface facing upward.
JPDIA0609ZZ

Adjust the CVT positions after installing control cable. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection and Adjustment".
TM-320
OIL PAN
OIL PAN
A
TM
I
JPDIA0769GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Magnet J

4. Drain plug gasket 5. Drain plug 6. Oil pan fitting bolt
7. Oil pan
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. K
L
REMOVAL
1. Remove drain plug (1), and then drain CVT fluid from oil pan.
M
: Vehicle front
2. Remove oil pan fitting bolts (2).

3. Remove oil pan (3). N
4. Remove oil pan gasket from oil pan.
5. Remove magnet from oil pan.
O
JPDIA0761ZZ
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from the oil pan gasket mounting surface of
transaxle case and oil pan.
• Never reuse oil pan gasket, drain plug gasket and oil pan fitting bolts.
TM-321
OIL PAN
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the CVT fluid is very dark, smells
burned, or contains foreign particles, frictional material (clutches) may need replacement. A tacky film that will
not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump
pressure.
Check for CVT fluid leakage and check CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-304, "Inspection".
TM-322
PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
A
TM
G
JPDIA0770GB
1. Primary speed sensor 2. O-ring 3. Transaxle assembly

H

I
REMOVAL
J
2. Remove the battery.
3. Disconnect ECM connector and TCM connector. K
4. Remove battery bracket.
5. Remove CVT fluid level gauge and CVT fluid charging pipe. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View".
6. Disconnect primary speed sensor connector. L
7. Remove primary speed sensor.
8. Remove O-ring from primary speed sensor.
M
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring. N
O
tion".
P
TM-323
JPDIA0771GB
1. Secondary speed sensor 2. O-ring 3. Transaxle assembly

4. Shim
REMOVAL
3. Disconnect secondary speed sensor connector.
4. Remove secondary speed sensor and shim.
5. Remove O-ring from secondary speed sensor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
tion".
TM-324
A
TM
G
JPDIA0767ZZ
1. RH differential side oil seal 2. LH differential side oil seal 3. Transaxle assembly
H

I
REMOVAL
J
1. Remove drive shaft assembly. Refer to FAX-16, "Exploded View".
2. Remove differential side oil seals (1) using a flat-bladed screw-
driver (A).
CAUTION: K
Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and converter
housing.
L
JPDIA0118ZZ
INSTALLATION N
• Drive each differential side oil seal evenly using a commercial ser-
vice tool so that differential side oil seal protrudes by the dimension O
(A) or (B) respectively.
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension A (transaxle case side) 1.8 ± 0.5 (0.071 ± 0.020)

P
Dimension B (converter housing side) 2.2 ± 0.5 (0.087 ± 0.020)
NOTE:
Differential side oil seal pulling direction is used as the reference.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse differential side oil seals. SCIA6608J
• Apply CVT fluid to differential side oil seals.
TM-325
Drift to be used:
Location Tool number
Transaxle case side Commercial service tool [Outer diameter: 54 mm (2.13 in), inner di-
Converter housing side ameter: 47 mm (1.85 in)]
tion".
TM-326
OIL PUMP FITTING BOLT
OIL PUMP FITTING BOLT
A
Replace the oil pump fitting bolt and the O-ring if oil leakage or exudes from the oil pump fitting bolt. B
TM
H
JPDIA0763GB
1. Oil pump fitting bolt 2. O-ring 3. Transaxle assembly

I
J
REMOVAL
K
1. Remove Oil pump fitting bolt (1) from transaxle assembly.
2. Remove O-ring from oil pump fitting bolt.
L
N
JPDIA0077ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pump fitting bolt and O-ring.
P
tion".
TM-327
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
JPDIA0768ZZ
1. Air breather hose 2. Clip 3. Bracket

A. Air breather tube B. Paint mark
: Vehicle front
REMOVAL
1. Remove clip from the bracket.
2. Remove air breather hose from transaxle assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Install air breather hose with paint mark facing upward.
• Insert air breather hose a minimum of 17 mm (0.67 in) onto air breather tube (to end of air breather
tubes radius end).
• Install air breather hose to bracket by fully inserting the clip.
• Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on air breather hose caused by bending or wind-
ing when installing it.
TM-328
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A
TM
I
JPDIA0787GB
1. Hose clamp 2. Fluid cooler hose A 3. Fluid cooler hose B J

4. Copper washer 5. CVT fluid cooler tube 6. CVT fluid cooler tube
A. To radiator K
: Vehicle front
L
REMOVAL M
2. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-28, "Exploded View".
3. Remove fender protector (left side). Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View". N
4. Remove fluid cooler hose A and fluid cooler hose B.
5. Remove CVT fluid cooler tube from transaxle assembly.
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer. P
TM-329
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
• When installing CVT fluid cooler tube (1) to transaxle assembly:
- Contact CVT fluid cooler tube a boss portion (A) of the transaxle
case.
- Tighten the bolt of CVT fluid cooler tube without moving the CVT
fluid cooler tube
JPDIA0772ZZ
• Refer to the followings when installing fluid cooler hose.
Fluid cooler hose Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*
Radiator assembly side Facing backward A
A
CVT fluid cooler tube side Facing upward B
Radiator assembly side Facing upward C
B
CVT fluid cooler tube side Facing upward D
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
- The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends.
E : Vehicle front
F : Vehicle upper
- When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab
should be positioned as shown in the figure.
JPDIA0801ZZ
- Insert fluid cooler hose according to dimension (A) described below.
(1) (2) Tube type Dimension A

Radiator side A End reaches the tube bend R position.
Fluid cooler hose A
CVT fluid cooler tube side B 33 mm (1.30 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (D).]
Radiator side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator.
Fluid cooler hose B
CVT fluid cooler tube side B 33 mm (1.30 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (D).]
JPDIA0860ZZ
TM-330
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
- Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of fluid cooler hose (2) with
dimension (A) from the hose edge. A
Dimension A : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)

- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube. B
SCIA8123E
TM
After completing installation, check for CVT fluid leakage and CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-304, "Inspection".
E
TM-331
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10A]

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
JPDIA0736GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. O-ring 3. CVT fluid charging pipe

4. CVT fluid level gauge
A. For tightening torque, refer to TM-332, "Removal and Installation".
B. To water outlet
WARNING:
Never remove the reservoir tank cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high
pressure engine coolant escaping from the reservoir tank.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine, the transaxle assembly and front suspension member. Refer to EM-67, "Exploded
View".
2. Lift with hoist and separate engine, transaxle assembly from front suspension member. Refer to EM-67,
"Exploded View".
3. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-328, "Exploded View".
4. Remove CVT fluid level gauge and CVT fluid charging pipe.
5. Disconnect the following connectors:
• Primary speed sensor connector
• Secondary speed sensor connector
• PNP switch connector
• CVT unit connector
TM-332
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
7. Remove rear plate. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
8. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts ( ) for A
drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from B
the front of the engine.
9. Remove transaxle assembly fixing bolts with power tool.
C
SCIA1861E
TM
10. Remove transaxle assembly from engine assembly with a hoist.

E
11. Remove CVT fluid cooler tube from transaxle assembly. Refer to
JPDIA0598ZZ
H
INSTALLATION
Note following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring. I
• Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
• Check fitting of dowel pin ( ) when installing transaxle
assembly to engine assembly. J
JPDIA0602ZZ
M
• When installing transaxle assembly to the engine assembly, attach
the fixing bolts in accordance with the following.
N
P
JPDIA0737ZZ
TM-333
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Insertion direction Transaxle assembly to engine assembly Engine assembly to transaxle assembly
Bolt position A B C D
Number of bolts 2 1 1 4
Bolt length mm (in) 55 (2.17) 35 (1.38) 55 (2.17) 40 (1.57)
Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 75 (7.7, 55) 50 (5.1, 37)
• Align the position of tightening bolts ( ) for drive plate with those
of the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then,
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the
front of the engine.
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter
after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, confirm the tightening
torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to EM-
53, "Removal and Installation".
• After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft SCIA1861E
several turns and check that transaxle rotates freely without
binding.
INSPECTION BE FORE INSTALLATION

• After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check that distance
(A) within the reference value limit.
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
JPDIA0740ZZ

• After completing installation, check the following item.
- CVT fluid leakage and CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-304, "Inspection".
- CVT position. Refer to TM-314, "Inspection and Adjustment".
TM-334
TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER HOUSING OIL SEAL
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F10A]
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A

B
TM
JPDIA0773ZZ
H
1. Torque converter 2. Converter housing oil seal 3. Transaxle assembly
I
J
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-332, "Exploded View".
2. Remove torque converter from transaxle assembly.
CAUTION: K
Never damage bushing inside of torque converter sleeve when removing torque converter.
3. Remove converter housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION: L
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
M
• Drive converter housing oil seal (1) evenly using a drift (commercial service tool) (A) so that converter hous-
ing oil seal protrudes by the dimension (B) respectively. N
Unit: mm (in)
Outer diameter: 65 (2.56)
Commercial service tool: A
Inner diameter: 60 (2.36) O
2 : Transaxle assembly
P
JPDIA0766ZZ
TM-335
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F10A]
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension B 1.0 ± 0.5 (0.039 ± 0.020)
NOTE:
Converter housing oil seal pulling direction is used as the refer-
ence.
• After completing installation, check for CVT fluid leakage and CVT
fluid level. Refer to TM-304, "Inspection".
SCIA7909J
• Attach the pawl (A) of the torque converter to the drive sprocket
hole (B) on the transaxle assembly side.
CAUTION:
• Rotate the torque converter for installing torque converter.
• Never damage the bushing inside the torque converter
sleeve when installing the converter housing oil seal.
• Never reuse converter housing oil seal.
• Apply CVT fluid to converter housing oil seal.
SCIA7907J

• After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check distance (A)
within the reference value limit.
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
JPDIA0740ZZ
TM-336
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F10A]

B
Applied model VQ25DE

C
CVT model RE0F10A
CVT assembly Model code number 1XF8E
D range 2.349 – 0.394 TM
Transmission gear ratio Reverse 1.750
Final drive 6.120
E
Recommended fluid NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2*
Fluid capacity 8.3 liter (7-1/4 Imp qt)
CAUTION: F
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Never mix with other fluid.
• Using CVT fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will deteriorate in driveability and CVT durability, and may dam-
age the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
*: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
G
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears INFOID:0000000003806562
H
Numerical value data are reference values.
(rpm)
Engine speed I
Throttle position Shift pattern
At 40 km/h (25 MPH) At 60 km/h (37 MPH)
“D” position 3,500 – 4,400 4,700 – 5,600
8/8 Sport mode 3,500 – 4,400 4,700 – 5,600 J
“L” position 3,500 – 4,400 4,700 – 5,600
“D” position 1,300 – 3,100 1,400 – 3,400
K
2/8 Sport mode 2,200 – 3,000 2,800 – 3,600
“L” position 3,300 – 4,200 4,200 – 5,000
CAUTION: L
Lock-up clutch is engaged when vehicle speed is approximately 18 km/h (11 MPH) to 90 km/h (56 MPH).
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000003806563

M
Stall speed 2,500 – 2,970 rpm

N
Line Pressure INFOID:0000000003806564
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi) O

Line pressure
Engine speed
“R”, “D” positions
At idle 750 (7.50, 7.65, 108.8) P
At stall 5,700 (57.00, 58.14, 826.5)*

*: Reference values
TM-337
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F10A]
Solenoid Valves INFOID:0000000003806565

Pressure control solenoid valve B (secondary pressure solenoid valve)
Pressure control solenoid valve A (line pressure solenoid valve) 3.0 – 9.0 Ω
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Lock-up select solenoid valve 17.0 – 38.0 Ω
CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000003806566
Name Condition CONSULT-III “Data Monitor” (Approx.) Resistance (Approx.)

20°C (68°F) 2.0 V 6.5 kΩ
80°C (176°F) 1.0 V 0.9 kΩ
Primary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000003806567

Primary speed sensor When driving [“L” position, 20 km/h (12 MPH)] 950 Hz
Secondary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000003806568

Secondary speed sensor When driving [“D” position, 20 km/h (12 MPH)] 490 Hz
Step Motor INFOID:0000000003900491

Step motor A 15.0 Ω
Step motor B 15.0 Ω
Step motor C 15.0 Ω
Step motor D 15.0 Ω
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000003806569
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter 14.4 mm (0.567 in)
TM-338
SECTION FAX FRONT AXLE

B
FAX
E
CONTENTS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT .......................... 10 F
Exploded View .........................................................10
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 2 WHEEL SIDE .............................................................12
G
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 2 WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation ................12
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 TRANSAXLE SIDE ....................................................15

TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation .......15 H
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Inspection ................................................................15
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ..................................... 16
Exploded View .........................................................16 I
SIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- LEFT SIDE .................................................................18
tion after Battery Disconnect ..................................... 3 LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation ....................18 J
Precautions for Drive Shaft ....................................... 3
RIGHT SIDE ...............................................................19
PREPARATION ............................................ 5 RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation ..................19
K
PREPARATION ................................................... 5 WHEEL SIDE .............................................................20
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly ...........20
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 6 TRANSAXLE SIDE ....................................................22 L

TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly....22
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............. 6 Inspection ................................................................33
Inspection .................................................................. 6 M
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ........................................ 7 (SDS) ............................................................ 35
Inspection .................................................................. 7
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS N
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 8 (SDS) ................................................................. 35
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............. 8 Wheel Bearing .........................................................35
Drive Shaft ...............................................................35 O
Exploded View .......................................................... 8
Removal and Installation ........................................... 8
Inspection .................................................................. 9
P
FAX-1
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000003811068
Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart

Refer to Front axle in this chart
NVH in FAX and FSU sections
NVH in WT section
NVH in WT section
NVH in BR section
NVH in ST section
FAX-33
FAX-8
FAX-6
—
—
Reference page
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION

Improper installation, looseness
Wheel bearing damage

Joint sliding resistance
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS

Excessive joint angle
Parts interference
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT AXLE
STEERING
Imbalance
BRAKE
TIRE
DRIVE Noise × × × × × × × × ×
SHAFT Shake × × × × × × × × ×
Noise × × × × × × × × ×
Shake × × × × × × × × ×
Symptom
FRONT Vibration × × × × × × ×
AXLE Shimmy × × × × × × ×
Judder × × × × × ×
Poor quality ride or handling × × × × ×
×: Applicable
FAX-2
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: FAX
F
connectors.
G
INFOID:0000000003890159
NOTE: H
I
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: L
Precautions for Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000003811071
P
CAUTION:
Note the following precautions when disassembling and assembling drive shaft.
• Never disassemble joint sub-assembly because it is non-overhaul parts.
• Perform work in a dust-free location.
• Before disassembling and assembling, clean the parts.
• Prevent the entry of foreign objects during disassembly of the service location.
FAX-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a
clean cover must be placed over parts.
• Paper waste must be used. Never use fabric shop cloths because of the danger of lint adhering to
parts.
• Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be
removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper waste.
FAX-4
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
Tool number
Description C
Tool name
KV40107300 Installing boot band
Boot band crimping tool
FAX
E
ZZA1229D
KV40107500 Removing drive shaft

Drive shaft attachment F
ZZA1230D
H
KV38107900 Installing drive shaft
Protector
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
I
J
PDIA1183J
FAX-5
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
MOUNTING INSPECTION
Make sure that the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions
(wear, damage) are normal.
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
• Move wheel hub and bearing assembly in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of
wheel bearing.
Standard
Axial end play : Refer to FAX-35, "Wheel Bearing".
• Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there is any of
irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
FAX-6
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
A
• Check drive shaft mounting point and joint for looseness and other damage. B
• Check boot for cracks and other damage.
CAUTION:
Replace drive shaft assembly when noise or vibration occur from drive shaft.
C
FAX
FAX-7
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
JPDIF0194GB
1. Steering knuckle 2. Splash guard 3. Wheel hub and bearing assembly

4. Wheel hub lock nut 4. Cotter pin
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
2. Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded
View" (without VDC), BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC).
3. Remove lock plate of brake hose from strut assembly. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT : Exploded View".
4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-34, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut.
7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the
wood to disengage drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing
assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be
careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for
joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other parts.
NOTE:
Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive
shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro-
JPDIG0070ZZ
cedure.
8. Remove wheel hub lock nut.
9. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-9, "Exploded View".
10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly, suspend the drive shaft with suitable wire.
Refer to FAX-16, "Exploded View".
FAX-8
11. Temporarily tighten strut assembly and steering knuckle.
12. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly, and then remove splash guard. A
13. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-18, "Exploded View".
14. Remove steering knuckle from transverse link and strut assembly.
B
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal.
• Install removed wheel hub and bearing assembly and steering knuckle and perform the final tightening of
C
each part under unladen conditions on the level surface.
• Never reuse cotter pin.
FAX

Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. Replace if necessary. E
Ball Joint Inspection
Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial play, and torque. Refer to
FSU-12, "Inspection" and ST-26, "Inspection". F
1. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View" (without VDC), BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". (with VDC). G
2. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Wheel Alignment Inspection".
3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor (with VDC). Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement". H
FAX-9
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
LEFT SIDE
VQ25DE
JPDIF0193ZZ
1. Circular clip 2. Dust shield 3. Housing

4. Snap ring 5. Spider assembly 6. Boot band
7. Boot 8. Shaft 9. Damper band
10. Dynamic damper 11. Circular clip 12. Joint sub-assembly
: Wheel side
: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent.
VQ35DE
JPDIF0141ZZ
1. Circular clip 2. Dust shield 3. Housing assembly

4. Boot band 5. Boot 6. Circular clip
7. Joint sub-assembly
: Wheel side
FAX-10
A
RIGHT SIDE
B
VQ25DE
FAX
G
JPDIF0184GB
1. Joint sub-assembly 2. Circular clip 3. Boot band H

7. Dynamic damper 8. Spider assembly 9. Snap ring
10. Housing 11. Dust shield 12. Support bearing I
13. Snap ring 14. Dust shield 15. Plate
16. Support bearing bracket
: Wheel side J
K
VQ35DE
JPDIF0182GB
1. Joint sub-assembly 2. Circular clip 3. Boot band

4. Boot 5. Damper band 6. Dynamic damper
7. Housing assembly 8. Dust shield 9. Snap ring
10. Support bearing 11. Baring housing 12. Support bearing bracket
FAX-11
: Wheel side
WHEEL SIDE
WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811080
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View".
assembly.
CAUTION:
joint sub-assembly and the other parts.
NOTE:
JPDIG0070ZZ
cedure.
9. Remove steering knuckle from strut assembly. Refer to FSU-9, "Exploded View".
10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
11. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly.
12. Screw drive shaft puller (A) into joint sub-assembly screw part to
a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one
hand and pull out joint sub-assembly with a sliding hammer (B)
from shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE).
CAUTION:
• Align a sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them
by pulling firmly and uniformly.
• If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after
removing drive shaft from vehicle.
JPDIF0022ZZ
13. Remove circular clip (1) from shaft (VQ25DE) or housing

assembly (VQ35DE).
14. Remove boot from shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly
(VQ35DE).
JPDIF0007ZZ
FAX-12
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste. A
2. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN genuine
grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove
become full to the brim. B
CAUTION:
After applying grease, use a paper waste to wipe off old
grease that has oozed out. C
FAX
JPDIF0008ZZ
E
3. Wrap serration on shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly
(VQ35DE) with tape (A) to protect the boot from damage. Install
boot and boot bands to shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly
(VQ35DE). F
CAUTION:
Never reuse boot and boot band.
4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft G
(VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE).
H
JPDIF0009ZZ
5. Position the circular clip (1) on groove at the shaft (VQ25DE) or

housing assembly (VQ35DE) edge. I
CAUTION:
Never reuse circular clip.
NOTE: J
Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip.
6. Align both center axles of the shaft (VQ25DE) or housing
assembly (VQ35DE) edge and joint sub-assembly. Then assem- K
ble shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE) with circu-
lar clip joint sub-assembly.
JPDIF0010ZZ
L
7. Install joint sub-assembly (1) to shaft (VQ25DE) or housing
assembly (VQ35DE) using plastic hammer.
CAUTION: M
Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while
rotating shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE).
8. Fill into the boot inside with the specified amount of grease from N
large diameter side of boot.
Standard O
Grease amount : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft".
JPDIF0011ZZ
FAX-13
9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
CAUTION:
If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated
by “*” mark) on the shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly
(VQ35DE) or joint sub-assembly, boot may be removed.
Remove all grease from the boot mounting surface.
10. To prevent from the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot
installation length (L) by inserting the suitable tool into inside of
the boot from the large diameter side of the boot and discharg-
ing the inside air. JPDIF0142ZZ
Standard
L : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft".
CAUTION:
• If the boot mounting length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in the boot.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool.
11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands
using the boot band crimping tool (A) (SST: KV40107300).
CAUTION:
Never reuse boot band.
JPDIF0012ZZ
NOTE:
Secure boot band so that dimension (M) meets the specification
Standard
M : 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.039 – 0.157 in)
12. Secure joint sub-assembly and shaft (VQ25DE) or housing
assembly (VQ35DE), and then make sure that they are in the
correct position when rotating boot. Reinstall them using boot
bands when boot installation positions become incorrect.
CAUTION: DSF0047D
13. Insert drive shaft to wheel hub and bearing assembly, and then temporarily tighten wheel hub lock nut.
CAUTION:
The drive shaft is press-fit. When assembling the drive shaft, never press it, but pull it until fully
seated by tightening the wheel hub lock nut.
14. Install steering knuckle to strut assembly. Refer to FSU-9, "Exploded View".
15. Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View".
16. Install cotter pin. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness.
17. Install disc rotor. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
18. Install caliper assembly to steering knuckle. Refer to BR-34, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded
View".
19. Install lock plate of brake hose to strut assembly. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT : Exploded View".
FAX-14
20. Install wheel sensor and sensor harness to steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT WHEEL SEN-
SOR : Exploded View" (without VDC), BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with A
VDC).
TRANSAXLE SIDE
B
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811081
Remove boot after removing drive shaft.

• Remove: refer to FAX-18, "LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation" (left side), FAX-19, "RIGHT SIDE : C
Removal and Installation" (right side).
• Disassembly: refer to FAX-22, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly".
FAX
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL E

• Move joint up/down, left/right, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for signifi-
cant looseness.
• Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease.
• Disassemble drive shaft and exchange malfunctioning part if there F
is a non-standard condition.
SDIA1190J
I
FAX-15
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
LEFT SIDE
VQ25DE
JPDIF0193ZZ
1. Circular clip 2. Dust shield 3. Housing

4. Snap ring 5. Spider assembly 6. Boot band
10. Dynamic damper 11. Circular clip 12. Joint sub-assembly
: Wheel side
VQ35DE
JPDIF0141ZZ
1. Circular clip 2. Dust shield 3. Housing assembly

4. Boot band 5. Boot 6. Circular clip
7. Joint sub-assembly
: Wheel side
FAX-16
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
A
RIGHT SIDE
B
VQ25DE
FAX
G
JPDIF0184GB
1. Joint sub-assembly 2. Circular clip 3. Boot band H

7. Dynamic damper 8. Spider assembly 9. Snap ring
10. Housing 11. Dust shield 12. Support bearing I
13. Snap ring 14. Dust shield 15. Plate
16. Support bearing bracket
: Wheel side J
K
VQ35DE
JPDIF0182GB
1. Joint sub-assembly 2. Circular clip 3. Boot band

4. Boot 5. Damper band 6. Dynamic damper
7. Housing assembly 8. Dust shield 9. Snap ring
10. Support bearing 11. Baring housing 12. Support bearing bracket
FAX-17
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
: Wheel side
LEFT SIDE
LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811084
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View".
assembly.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
JPDIG0070ZZ
cedure.
11. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly.
• Use the drive shaft attachment (A) (SST: KV40107500) and a
sliding hammer (B) while inserting tip of the drive shaft attach-
ment between housing assembly and transaxle assembly.
CAUTION:
Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when
removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend
slide joint.
JPDIF0004ZZ
INSTALLATION
• Always replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TM-162, "Exploded
View" (CVT: RE0F09B), TM-325, "Exploded View" (CVT: RE0F10A).
FAX-18
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
• Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem-
bly to prevent damage to the oil seal while inserting drive shaft. A
Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install
securely.
CAUTION:
B
Make sure that circular clip is completely engaged.
JPDIF0023ZZ
RIGHT SIDE FAX
RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811085
E
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
2. Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded F
4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-34, "BRAKE G
6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View". H
assembly. I
CAUTION:
careful not to overextend slide joint. J
NOTE:
Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive K
JPDIG0070ZZ
cedure.
8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. L
11. Remove the following bolts. M
• VQ25DE: plate mounting bolts.
• VQ35DE: bearing housing mounting bolts.
12. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. N
CAUTION:
Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to
overextend slide joint. O
13. Remove support bearing bracket, follow the procedure described below.
a. Remove heat insulator from suspension member.
b. Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". P
c. Remove three way catalyst (bank 1) support bracket and heated oxygen sensor harness bracket. Refer to
d. Remove support bearing bracket.
INSTALLATION
FAX-19
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
• Always replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TM-162, "Exploded
View" (CVT: RE0F09B), TM-325, "Exploded View" (CVT: RE0F10A).
• Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem-
bly to prevent damage to the oil seal while inserting drive shaft.
Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install
securely.
JPDIF0049ZZ
• Install support bearing bracket (1) in following proce-

dure.(VQ25DE)
- Temporarily tighten mounting bolts (A), then tighten them to speci-
fied torque.
- Set plate (2) so that notch (C) become upper side.
- Temporarily tighten mounting bolts in the order (a) (b), then tighten
them to specified torque.
JPDIF0185ZZ
• Install support bearing bracket (1) in following proce-

dure.(VQ35DE)
- Temporarily tighten mounting bolts (A), then tighten them to speci-
fied torque.
- Temporarily tighten mounting bolts (B), then tighten them to speci-
fied torque.
JPDIF0143ZZ
WHEEL SIDE
WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000003811086
DISASSEMBLY
1. Fix shaft with a vise.
CAUTION:
Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise.
2. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly.
3. Screw drive shaft puller (A) into joint sub-assembly screw part to
a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one
hand and pull out joint sub-assembly with a sliding hammer (B)
from shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE).
CAUTION:
• Align a sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them
by pulling firmly and uniformly.
• If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after
removing drive shaft from vehicle.
4. Remove circular clip from shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly
(VQ35DE). JPDIF0015ZZ
FAX-20
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
5. Remove boot from shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE).
A
ASSEMBLY
1. Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste.
2. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN genuine B
grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove
become full to the brim.
CAUTION:
After applying grease, use a paper waste to wipe off old C
grease that has oozed out.
FAX
JPDIF0008ZZ E
3. Wrap serration on shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly

(VQ35DE) with tape (A) to protect the boot from damage. Install F
boot and boot bands to shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly
(VQ35DE).
CAUTION:
Never reuse boot and boot band. G
4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft
(VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE).
H
JPDIF0009ZZ
I
5. Position the circular clip (1) on groove at the shaft (VQ25DE) or
housing assembly (VQ35DE) edge.
CAUTION:
Never reuse circular clip. J
NOTE:
Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip.
6. Align both center axles of the shaft (VQ25DE) or housing K
assembly (VQ35DE) edge and joint sub-assembly. Then assem-
ble shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE) with circu-
lar clip joint sub-assembly. L
JPDIF0010ZZ
7. Install joint sub-assembly (1) to shaft (VQ25DE) or housing M

assembly (VQ35DE) using plastic hammer.
CAUTION:
Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while
rotating shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly (VQ35DE). N
8. Fill into the boot inside with the specified amount of grease from
large diameter side of boot.
O
Standard
JPDIF0011ZZ P
FAX-21
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
CAUTION:
by “*” mark) on the shaft (VQ25DE) or housing assembly
(VQ35DE) or joint sub-assembly, boot may be removed.
10. To prevent from the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot
installation length (L) by inserting the suitable tool into inside of
the boot from the large diameter side of the boot and discharg-
ing the inside air. JPDIF0142ZZ
Standard
CAUTION:
• If the boot mounting length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in the boot.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool.
11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands
using the boot band crimping tool (A) (SST: KV40107300).
CAUTION:
JPDIF0012ZZ
NOTE:
Secure boot band so that dimension (M) meets the specification
Standard
M : 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.039 – 0.157 in)
12. Secure joint sub-assembly and shaft (VQ25DE) or housing
assembly (VQ35DE), and then make sure that they are in the
correct position when rotating boot. Reinstall them using boot
bands when boot installation positions become incorrect.
CAUTION: DSF0047D
TRANSAXLE SIDE
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000003811087
DISASSEMBLY (VQ25DE)
Left Side
1. Fix drive shaft with a vise.
CAUTION:
2. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from housing.
3. Put matching marks on housing and shaft, and then pull out housing from shaft.
CAUTION:
Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces.
FAX-22
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
4. Put matching marks (A) on the spider assembly and shaft.
CAUTION: A
Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never
scratch the surfaces.
B
JPDIF0006ZZ
FAX
5. Remove snap ring (1), and then remove spider assembly from
shaft.
6. Remove boot from shaft. E
7. Remove circular clip from housing.
8. Remove dust shield from housing.
F
9. Remove dynamic damper, follow the procedure described
below.
a. Remove damper bands.
G
b. Remove dynamic damper from shaft.
JPDIF0014ZZ
Right Side
H
CAUTION:
I
2. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from housing.
3. Put matching marks on housing and shaft, and then pull out housing from shaft.
CAUTION:
J
Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces.
4. Put matching marks (A) on the spider assembly and shaft.
CAUTION:
Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never K
scratch the surfaces.
JPDIF0006ZZ
N
5. Remove snap ring (1), and then remove spider assembly from
shaft.
6. Remove boot from shaft.
O
7. Remove dynamic damper, follow the procedure described
below.
a. Remove damper bands.
P
b. Remove dynamic damper from shaft.
JPDIF0014ZZ
8. Remove support bearing, follow the procedure described below.
FAX-23
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
a. Remove dust shield from housing.
JPDIF0121ZZ
b. Remove snap ring (1).
JPDIF0106ZZ
c. Press out support bearing from housing.

d. Remove dust shield.
YAX004
DISASSEMBLY (VQ35DE)
Left Side
CAUTION:
2. Disassemble boot (wheel side). Refer to FAX-20, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly".
3. Remove boot bands and boot (transaxle side).
4. Remove dust shield and circular clip.
Right Side
CAUTION:
2. Disassemble boot (wheel side). Refer to FAX-20, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly".
3. Remove dynamic damper, follow the procedure described below.
a. Remove damper band.
b. Remove dynamic damper from housing assembly.
4. Remove boot bands and boot (transaxle side).
5. Remove support bearing, follow the procedure described below.
FAX-24
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
a. Remove dust shield.
A
JPDIF0121ZZ
FAX
b. Remove snap ring (1).
G
JPDIF0073ZZ
c. Press out bearing housing and support bearing from housing

H
assembly.
d. Remove dust shield.
I
SFA693
K
e. Remove snap ring (1).
N
JPDIF0177ZZ
f. Press out support bearing from bearing housing (1) with suitable O
drift (A).
JPDIF0192ZZ
FAX-25
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
ASSEMBLY (VQ25DE)
Left side
1. Clean old grease on housing with paper waste.
2. Install dust shield.
CAUTION:
Never reuse dust shield.
3. Install circular clip.
CAUTION:
4. Install dynamic damper, follow the procedure described below.
a. Install dynamic damper to shaft.
b. Secure dynamic damper with bands in the following specified
position (A).
Standard
A : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft".
JPDIF0178ZZ
c. Install damper bands securely as shown in the figure.

CAUTION:
Never reuse damper band.
PDIA1188J
5. Wrap serration on shaft with tape (A) to protect boot from dam-
age. Install boot and boot bands to shaft.
CAUTION:
JPDIF0009ZZ
FAX-26
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
6. Install the spider assembly (1), align it with the matching marks
(A) on the shaft (2) put during the removal, and direct the serra- A
tion mounting surface (B) to the shaft.
JPDIF0017ZZ
FAX
7. Secure spider assembly onto shaft with snap ring (1).
CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring. E
8. Apply the appropriate amount of grease to spider assembly and
sliding surface.
9. Assemble the housing onto spider assembly, and apply the bal- F
ance of the specified amount grease.
Standard G
Grease amount : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft". JPDIF0014ZZ
10. Align matching marks put during the removal of housing.

H
11. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown
in the figure.
CAUTION:
If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated I
by “*” mark) on housing assembly, boot may be removed.
12. To prevent from deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa- J
tion length (L) by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of boot
from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air.
K
Standard JPDIF0144ZZ

CAUTION: L
• If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in boot.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool.
13. Install boot bands securely as shown in the figure. M
a. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls
( ) into holes to temporary installation.
NOTE: N
For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit (B) at
first.
O
P
JPDIF0157ZZ
FAX-27
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
b. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band.
c. Insert tip of band below end of the pawl.
14. Secure housing assembly, and then make sure that they are in
the correct position when rotating boot. Reinstall them with boot
bands when the mounting positions become incorrect.
JPDIF0158ZZ
Right side
1. Clean old grease on housing with paper waste.
2. Install support bearing, follow the procedure described below.
a. Install dust shield on housing.
CAUTION:
b. Press support bearing (1) onto housing to using the suitable tool
(A).
JPDIF0056ZZ
c. Install snap ring (1).

CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring.
JPDIF0106ZZ
d. Install dust shields.

CAUTION:
JPDIF0127ZZ

FAX-28
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
b. Secure dynamic damper with bands in the following specified
position (A). A
Standard
A : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft". B
JPDIF0178ZZ
FAX
c. Install damper bands securely as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never reuse damper band.
E
G
PDIA1188J
4. Wrap serration on shaft with tape (A) to protect boot from dam- H
age. Install boot and boot bands to shaft.
CAUTION:
I
JPDIF0009ZZ K
5. Install the spider assembly (1), align it with the matching marks
(A) on the shaft (2) put during the removal, and direct the serra- L
tion mounting surface (B) to the shaft.
JPDIF0017ZZ
FAX-29
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
6. Secure spider assembly onto shaft with snap ring (1).
CAUTION:
7. Apply the appropriate amount of grease to spider assembly and
sliding surface.
8. Assemble the housing onto spider assembly, and apply the bal-
ance of the specified amount grease.
Standard
Grease amount : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft". JPDIF0014ZZ
9. Align matching marks put during the removal of housing.

in the figure.
CAUTION:
11. To prevent from deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa-

CAUTION:
12. Install boot bands securely as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
first.
JPDIF0157ZZ

JPDIF0158ZZ
ASSEMBLY (VQ35DE)
Left side
1. Clean old grease on housing assembly with paper waste.
2. Install dust shield.
CAUTION:
FAX-30
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
3. Install circular clip. A
CAUTION:
4. Apply balance of the specified amount grease to housing assembly. B
Standard
Grease amount : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft". C

in the figure.
CAUTION: FAX
Remove all grease from the boot mounting surface. E
from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air. F
L : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft". G

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool. H
( ) into holes to temporary installation. I
NOTE:
first. J
JPDIF0157ZZ
L
8. Secure housing assembly, and then make sure that they are in M
9. Assemble boot (wheel side). Refer to FAX-20, "WHEEL SIDE : N
Disassembly and Assembly".
O
JPDIF0158ZZ
Right Side
1. Clean old grease on housing assembly with paper waste. P
2. Install support bearing, follow the procedure described below.
FAX-31
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
a. Press support bearing to bearing housing (1) with suitable drift
(A)
JPDIF0151ZZ
b. Install snap ring (1).

CAUTION:
c. Install dust shield.
d. Press bearing housing and support bearing to housing assem-
bly.
JPDIF0177ZZ
e. Install snap ring (1).

CAUTION:
JPDIF0073ZZ
f. Install dust shields.

CAUTION:
Never reuse dust shields.
3. Apply balance of the specified amount grease to housing
assembly.
Standard
JPDIF0127ZZ

in the figure.
CAUTION:
JPDIF0144ZZ
FAX-32
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Standard A
CAUTION:
• If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in boot. B
a. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls C
NOTE:
For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit (B) at FAX
first.
JPDIF0157ZZ
F

c. Insert tip of band below end of the pawl. G
bands when the mounting positions become incorrect. H
b. Assemble boot (wheel side) and joint sub-assembly. Refer to I
FAX-20, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly".
JPDIF0158ZZ
J
c. Secure dynamic damper with band in the following specified
position (A) when installing.
CAUTION:
K
Never reuse bands.
Standard
L
A : Refer to FAX-35, "Drive Shaft".
M
JPDIF0178ZZ
N
• Move joint up/down, left/right, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for signifi-
cant looseness. O
FAX-33
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
• Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease.
• Disassemble drive shaft and exchange malfunctioning part if there
is a non-standard condition.
SDIA1190J

Shaft
Check shaft for runout, cracks, or other damage. Replace if necessary.
Dynamic Damper
Check damper for cracks or wear. Replace if necessary.
Joint Sub-Assembly (Wheel Side)
Check the following:
• Joint sub-assembly for rough rotation and excessive axial looseness.
• The inside of the joint sub-assembly for entry of foreign material.
• Joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks, and fractures inside of joint sub-assembly.
Replace joint sub-assembly if there are any non-standard conditions of components.
Housing or housing assembly (Transaxle Side)
Replace housing assembly if there is scratching or wear of housing assembly roller contact surface.
Support Bearing (Right Side)
Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Replace if necessary.
Support Bearing Bracket (Right Side)
Check for bending, cracks, or damage. Replace if necessary.
FAX-34
Wheel Bearing INFOID:0000000003811089
B
Item Standard
C
Axial end play 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000003811090
FAX
VQ25DE
Item Left side Right side E

Wheel side 88 – 108 g (3.11 – 3.80 oz)
Grease quantity
Transaxle side 153 – 166 g (5.40 – 5.85 oz)
F
Wheel side 186.7 mm (7.35 in)
Boots installed length
Transaxle side 153.4 mm (6.04 in)
Dimension of dynamic damper 207 – 213 mm (8.15 – 8.39 in) G
VQ35DE
Item Left side Right side

H
Wheel side 170 – 190 g (6.00 – 6.70 oz)

Grease quantity
Transaxle side 155 – 175 g (5.47 – 6.17 oz)
I
Wheel side 158.6 mm (6.24 in)
Boots installed length
Transaxle side 163.67 mm (6.44 in)
Dimension of dynamic damper — 202 – 208 mm (7.95 – 8.19 in) J
FAX-35
SECTION RAX REAR AXLE

B
RAX
E
CONTENTS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2 REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING ................ 4 F
Exploded View .......................................................... 4
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Removal and Installation .......................................... 4
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 2 Inspection ................................................................. 5 G
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 2
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 3 (SDS) ............................................................. 6 H
REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING ................. 3 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Inspection .................................................................. 3 (SDS) .................................................................. 6
Wheel Bearing .......................................................... 6 I
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 4
RAX-1
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NVH in RAX and RSU sections
NVH in WT section
NVH in WT section
NVH in BR section
RAX-4
RAX-3
—
Reference page
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION

Wheel bearing damage

Parts interference
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKE
TIRE
Noise × × × × × × ×
Shake × × × × × × ×
Vibration × × × × ×
Symptom REAR AXLE
Shimmy × × × × × ×
Judder × × × × ×
Poor quality ride or handling × × × × ×
×: Applicable
RAX-2
REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING
B
MOUNTING INSPECTION
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, back lash) of each component and component conditions C
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
• Move wheel hub and bearing assembly in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of RAX
wheel bearing.
Standard E
Axial end play : Refer to RAX-6, "Wheel Bearing".
• Rotate wheel hub, and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there is any of
irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. F
RAX-3
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
JPDIG0104GB
1. Hub cap 2. Ball seat 3. Bushing

4. Cotter pin 5. Axle housing 6. Back plate
7. Anchor block 8. Wheel hub and bearing assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove tire.
2. Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-58, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View"
(without VDC), BRC-152, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC).
3. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. Refer to
BR-40, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
5. Remove cotter pin, then loosen suspension arm mounting nut of axle housing. Refer to RAX-4, "Exploded
View".
6. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly.
7. Remove parking brake shoe and parking brake cable from back plate. Refer to PB-7, "Exploded View"
and PB-5, "Exploded View".
8. Remove anchor block mounting nuts, and then remove anchor block and back plate from axle housing.
9. Remove stabilizer connecting rod (upper side). Refer to RSU-15, "Exploded View".
10. Remove radius rod (axle housing side). Refer to RSU-12, "Exploded View".
11. Remove coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Exploded View".
12. Set suitable jack under axle housing.
13. Remove shock absorber (lower side). Refer to RSU-10, "Exploded View".
14. Remove front lower link (axle housing side). Refer to RSU-14, "Exploded View".
15. Separate suspension arm from axle housing so as not to damage ball joint boot using ball joint remover,
and then remove axle housing from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
RAX-4
Temporarily tighten nuts to prevent damage to threads and to prevent the ball joint remover from
coming off. A
16. Remove hub cap.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. B
• Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing
wheel hub and bearing assembly and steering knuckle.
• Never reuse cotter pin. C
RAX
Wheel Hub and Bearing Assembly
Check the wheel hub and bearing assembly for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace if necessary. E
Axle Housing
Check the axle housing for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace if necessary.
Ball Joint Inspection F
Check for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of suspension arm ball joint. Refer to RSU-16, "Inspec-
tion".
G
1. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-58, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View" (without VDC), BRC-152, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC).
H
2. Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). Refer to PB-2, "Inspection and Adjustment".
3. Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
4. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor (with VDC). Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF I
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement".
RAX-5
Wheel Bearing INFOID:0000000003811102
Item Standard
Axial end play 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
RAX-6
SUSPENSION
SECTION
FRONT SUSPENSION
FSU B
FSU
CONTENTS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2 FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT ................. 9 F
Exploded View .......................................................... 9
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 2 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................10 G
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 2 Inspection ................................................................11
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 TRANSVERSE LINK ......................................... 12

Exploded View .........................................................12 H
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................12
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Inspection ................................................................12
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 FRONT STABILIZER ........................................ 14
J
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 4 Inspection ................................................................15
Precautions for Suspension ...................................... 4
PREPARATION ............................................ 5 K
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ..................... 16
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 Removal and Installation .........................................16
L
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 Inspection ................................................................17
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 6 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

(SDS) ............................................................ 18 M
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ................... 6
Inspection .................................................................. 6 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 18 N
WHEEL ALIGNMENT .......................................... 7
Wheel Alignment .....................................................18
Wheel Alignment Inspection ...................................... 7
Ball Joint ..................................................................18
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 9 Wheel Height ...........................................................18
O
FSU-1
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
FSU-9, FSU-12, FSU-14, FSU-16
FSU-9, FSU-12, FSU-14, FSU-16
NVH in FAX and FSU sections
NVH in FAX section

NVH in WT section
NVH in WT section
NVH in BR section
NVH in ST section
FSU-18
FSU-15
FSU-11
—
Reference page
Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION

Bushing or mounting deterioration
Incorrect wheel alignment

Suspension looseness
Stabilizer bar fatigue

Parts interference
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
Spring fatigue
STEERING
BRAKE
TIRE
Noise × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Shake × × × × × × × × × × ×
Vibration × × × × × × × × ×
Symptom FRONT SUSPENSION Shimmy × × × × × × × × × ×
Judder × × × × × × × ×
Poor quality ride or
× × × × × × × × × ×
handling
×: Applicable
FSU-2
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. FSU
F
connectors.
G
INFOID:0000000003890156
NOTE: H
I
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: L
FSU-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PIIB3706J
Precautions for Suspension INFOID:0000000003811111
CAUTION:
• When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions
with tires on ground. Oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
- Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools
and mats are in designated positions.
• After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment.
• Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are
pre-oiled, tighten as they are.
FSU-4
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
Tool number
Description C
Tool name
KV991040S0 Measuring wheel alignment
CCK gauge attachment
1. KV99104020 Adapter A D
2. KV99104030 Adapter B
3. KV99104040 Adapter C
4. KV99104050 Adapter D
5. KV99104060 Plate FSU
6. KV99104070 Guide bolt
7. KV99104080 Spring ZZA1167D
8. KV99104090 Center plate
F
ST35652000 Disassembling and assembling strut
Strut attachment
H
ZZA0807D
ST3127S000 Measuring rotating torque of ball joint

Preload gauge
I
ZZA0806D
K
Tool name Description L

Spring compressor Removing and installing coil spring
N
S-NT717
FSU-5
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING INSPECTION
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions
BALL JOINT AXIAL END PLAY
1. Set front wheels in a straight-ahead position.
CAUTION:
Never depress brake pedal when measuring.
2. Place an iron bar or equivalent between transverse link and steering knuckle.
3. Measure axial end play by prying it up and down.
Standard
Axial end play : Refer to FSU-18, "Ball Joint".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Never damage the installation position by applying exces-
sive force.
STRUT ASSEMBLY
Check for oil leakage and damage. Replace if necessary.
FSU-6
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
A
Wheel Alignment Inspection INFOID:0000000003812473
INSPECTION B
Description
CAUTION:
• Camber, caster, kingpin inclination angles cannot be adjusted. C
• If camber, caster, or kingpin inclination angle exceeds the standard value, check front suspension
parts for wear and damage. Replace suspect parts if a malfunction is detected.
• Kingpin inclination angle is reference value, no inspection is required. D
Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions.
NOTE:
“Unladen conditions” means that fuel, engine coolant, and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions. FSU
Preliminary Check
• Tires for improper air pressure and wear F
• Road wheels for runout: Refer to WT-2, "Inspection".
• Wheel bearing axial end play: Refer to FAX-6, "Inspection".
• Transverse link ball joint axial end play: Refer to FSU-11, "Inspection". G
• Strut operation.
• Each mounting part of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation
• Each of suspension member and transverse link for cracks, deformation and other damage H
• Vehicle height (posture)
CAMBER, CASTER, AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES
• Camber, caster, kingpin inclination angles cannot be adjusted. I
• Before inspection, mount front wheels onto turning radius gauge. Mount rear wheels onto a stand at the
same height so that vehicle remains horizontal.
J
Using a CCK Gauge
Install the CCK gauge attachment (SST: KV991040S0) with the following procedure on wheel, then measure
wheel alignment.
K
1. Remove three wheel to nuts, and install the guide bolts to hub
bolt.
2. Screw the adapter into the plate until it contacts the plate tightly. L
3. Screw the center plate into the plate.
4. Insert the plate assembly on the guide bolt. Put the spring in,
and then evenly screw the three guide bolt nuts. When fastening M
the guide nuts, do not completely compress the spring.
N
SEIA0240E
5. Place the dent of alignment gauge onto the projection of the

center plate and tightly contact them to measure. O
Standard
Camber, caster, kingpin in- : Refer to FSU-18, "Wheel P
clination angles Alignment".
CAUTION:
• If camber, caster, or kingpin inclination angle exceeds the
standard value, check front suspension parts for wear and
damage. Replace suspect parts if a malfunction is SEIA0241E
detected.
FSU-7
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
• Kingpin inclination angle is reference value, no inspection is required.
Toe-In
Measure toe-in by the following procedure.
WARNING:
• Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
• Make sure that no person is in front of vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put matching mark (A) on base line of the tread (rear side) of
both tires at the same height of hub center. These are measur-
ing points.
JPEIA0014ZZ
4. Measure distance (A) (rear side).

5. Push vehicle slowly ahead to rotate wheels 180 degrees (1/2
turn).
NOTE:
If the wheels rotates more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn), start this
procedure again from the beginning. Do not push the vehicle
backward.
6. Measure distance (B) (front side).
Standard
JPEIA0015ZZ
Total toe-in = A – B
Total toe-in : Refer to FSU-18, "Wheel Alignment".
• If toe-in exceeds the standard value, adjust toe-in by varying the length of between steering outer socket
and inner socket.
FSU-8
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
B
FSU
JPEIA0112GB
H
1. Strut mounting insulator 2. Strut mounting bearing 3. Coil spring
4. Bound bumper 5. Lower rubber seat 6. Strut
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. I
J
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
2. Remove lock plate of brake hose. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT : Exploded View". K
3. Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (without VDC),
BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC).
4. Remove stabilizer connecting rod from strut assembly. Refer to FSU-14, "Exploded View". L
5. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle.
6. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-20, "Exploded View".
7. Remove mounting bolts of strut mounting insulator, and then remove strut assembly. M
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. N
• Become it in projection (A) an illustration to the vehicle outside.
: Vehicle front
O
• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts, under unladen conditions
with tires on level ground.
P
JPEIA0094ZZ
FSU-9
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Never damage strut assembly piston rod when removing components from strut assembly.
1. Install strut attachment (A) (SST: ST35652000) to strut assem-
bly and secure it in a vise.
CAUTION:
When installing the strut attachment to strut assembly,
wrap a shop cloth around strut to protect from damage.
JPEIA0006ZZ
2. Using a spring compressor (A) (commercial service tool), com-

press coil spring between strut mounting bearing and lower rub-
ber seat (on strut assembly) until coil spring with a spring
compressor is free.
CAUTION:
Be sure a spring compressor is securely attached to coil
spring. Compress coil spring.
3. Make sure coil spring with a spring compressor between strut
mounting bearing and lower rubber seat (strut assembly) is free.
And then remove piston rod lock nut while securing the piston
rod tip so that piston rod does not turn. JPEIA0007ZZ
4. Remove strut mounting insulator and strut mounting bearing,

and bound bumper from strut.
5. After remove coil spring with a spring compressor, and then gradually release a spring compressor.
CAUTION:
Loosen while making sure coil spring attachment position does not move.
6. Remove lower rubber seat from strut.
7. Remove the strut attachment (SST: ST35652000) from strut.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install strut attachment (SST: ST35652000) to strut and secure it in a vise.
CAUTION:
When installing the strut attachment to strut assembly, wrap a shop cloth around strut to protect
from damage.
2. Install lower rubber seat.
3. Install bound bumper onto strut mounting insulator.
4. Compress coil spring using a spring compressor (commercial service tool), and install it onto strut assem-
bly.
CAUTION:
• Face tube side of coil spring (1) downward. Align the
lower end (A) to lower rubber seat (2).
• Be sure a compressor is securely attached to coil spring.
Compress coil spring.
• Set coil spring so that its paint marks are aligned with the
positions of 1.25 turns and 2.25 turns from the bottom end
of the coil spring.
JPEIA0095ZZ
FSU-10
5. Install strut mounting bearing and strut mounting insulator with bound bumper to strut.
• Installation position of strut mounting insulator is shown in the A
figure.
CAUTION:
Become it in projection (A) to the vehicle outside.
B
: Vehicle front
6. Secure piston rod tip so that piston rod does not turn, then C
tighten piston rod lock nut with specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston rod lock nut. D
JPEIA0094ZZ
7. Gradually release a spring compressor, and remove coil spring.
CAUTION:
Loosen while making sure coil spring attachment position does not move.
FSU
8. Remove the strut attachment from strut assembly.
F
Exploded View" (without VDC), BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC). G
2. Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Wheel Alignment Inspection".
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement". H

Strut I
Check the following items, and replace if necessary.
• Strut for deformation, cracks or damage
• Piston rod for damage, uneven wear or distortion
J
• Oil leakage
Strut Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Inspection
Check strut mounting insulator for cracks and rubber parts for wear. Replace if necessary. K
Coil Spring
Check coil spring for cracks, wear or damage. Replace if necessary.
L
FSU-11
TRANSVERSE LINK
TRANSVERSE LINK
JPEIA0100GB
1. Transverse link 2. Front suspension member

REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
2. Remove drive shaft of wheel side from wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-16, "Exploded
View".
3. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle.
4. Remove transverse link from suspension member.
INSTALLATION
• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the front suspension member, under unladen conditions with
tires on level ground.

Appearance
• Transverse link and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.
• Ball joint boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leakage. Replace if necessary.
Manually move ball stud to confirm it moves smoothly with no binding.
Swing Torque Inspection
NOTE:
Before measurement, move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.
FSU-12
TRANSVERSE LINK
• Hook a spring balance (A) at cotter pin mounting hole. Confirm
spring balance measurement value is within specifications when A
ball stud begins moving.
Standard B
Swing torque :Refer to FSU-18, "Ball Joint".
Spring balance :Refer to FSU-18, "Ball Joint".
measurement C
- If swing torque exceeds standard value, replace transverse link
assembly. JPEIA0005ZZ
D
Rotating Torque Inspection
• Attach mounting nut to boll stud. Check that rotating torque is
within specifications with a preload gauge (A) (SST: ST3127S000).
FSU
Standard
Rotating torque : Refer to FSU-18, "Ball Joint".
F
- If rotating torque exceeds standard range, replace transverse link
assembly.
G
PDIA1258E
Axial End Play Inspection H

• Move tip of ball stud in axial direction to check for looseness.
Standard
I
Axial end play :Refer to FSU-18, "Ball Joint".
- If axial end play exceeds the standard value, replace transverse link assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION J
Exploded View" (without VDC), BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC).
K
L
FSU-13
FRONT STABILIZER
FRONT STABILIZER
JPEIA0101GB
1. Stabilizer clamp 2. Stabilizer bushing 3. Stabilizer bar

4. Front suspension member 5. Stabilizer connecting rod
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
2. Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
3. Remove stabilizer connecting rod.
4. Remove steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-18, "Exploded View".
5. Remove mounting bolts ( ) of stabilizer clamp, and then
remove stabilizer clamp and stabilizer bushing from front sus-
pension member.
6. Remove stabilizer bar.
WEIA0182E
INSTALLATION
FSU-14
FRONT STABILIZER
• Install stabilizer clamp that notch (A) becomes vehicle front side
( ). A
• Install stabilizer bushing that slit (B) becomes vehicle front side
( ).
B
JPEIA0058ZZ
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL FSU

Check stabilizer bar, stabilizer connecting rod, stabilizer bushing and stabilizer clamp for deformation, cracks
or damage. Replace if necessary.
FSU-15
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
JPEIA0102GB
1. Front suspension member 2. Rebound stopper 3. Front suspension member stay

REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
2. Remove under cover.
3. Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (without VDC),
BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC).
4. Remove lock plate of brake hose. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT : Exploded View".
6. Remove stabilizer connecting rod (upper side). Refer to FSU-14, "Exploded View".
8. Remove power steering solenoid valve harness connector and harness clip. Refer to ST-18, "Exploded
View".
9. Remove heat insulator from suspension member.
10. Remove drive shaft. Refer to FAX-18, "LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation" (left side), FAX-19, "RIGHT
SIDE : Removal and Installation" (right side).
11. Separate lower shaft and steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-16, "Exploded View".
12. Remove power steering oil pump and then separate suction hose and high pressure piping. Refer to ST-
28, "Exploded View", ST-34, "Exploded View".
13. Separate engine mount insulator from engine assembly. Refer to EM-67, "Exploded View".
14. Set suitable jack to front suspension member.
15. Remove front suspension member stay.
16. Remove front suspension member mounting bolts.
17. Gradually lower the jack placed at the front suspension member.
CAUTION:
Perform the work while checking that the jack is stable.
FSU-16
NOTE:
Remove the steering knuckle and wheel bearing assembly, steering gear assembly and hydraulic line, A
stabilizer bar, transverse link and engine mounting insulator as a unit from the vehicle.
• Steering knuckle and wheel hub and bearing assembly: refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View". B
• Steering gear assembly and hydraulic line: refer to ST-18, "Exploded View" and ST-34, "Exploded
View".
• Stabilizer bar: refer to FSU-14, "Exploded View".
• Transverse link: refer to FSU-12, "Exploded View". C
• Engine mounting insulator: refer to EM-67, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
D
• Perform final tightening of installation position between front suspension member and transverse links (rub-
ber bushing) under unladen condition with tires on level ground.
FSU
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL F

Check the front suspension member for significant deformation, cracks, or damages. Replace if necessary.
1. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : G
Exploded View" (without VDC), BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC).
3. Adjust the neutral position of the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING H
ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement".
FSU-17
Wheel Alignment INFOID:0000000003811129
Item Standard
Minimum –1° 10′ (–1.16°)
Camber Nominal –0° 25′ (–0.42°)

Degree minute (Decimal degree) Maximum 0° 20′ (0.33°)
Left and right difference 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum 4° 10′ (4.17°)
Caster Nominal 4° 55′ (4.92°)

Degree minute (Decimal degree) Maximum 5° 40′ (5.66°)
Left and right difference 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum 11° 55′ (11.92°)
Kingpin inclination
Nominal 12° 40′ (12.67°)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Maximum 13° 25′ (13.41°)
Minimum In 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
Distance Nominal In 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Total toe- Maximum In 2.5 mm (0.098 in)

in Minimum In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
Angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
Maximum In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
Ball Joint INFOID:0000000003811130
Item Standard
Swing torque Transverse link 0.5 – 4.9 N·m (0.06 – 0.49 kg-m, 5 – 43 in-lb)
Measurement on spring balance Transverse link 11.1 – 108.9 N (1.2 – 11.1 kg, 3 – 24 lb)
Rotating torque Transverse link 0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.06 – 0.34 kg-m, 5 – 30 in-lb)
Axial end play 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Wheel Height INFOID:0000000003811131
Tire size 205/65R16 215/55R17

Grade 250XE 250XL-V6 250XV-V6 350XV-V6
Front (Hf) 712 mm (28.03 in) 711 mm (27.99 in) 710 mm (27.95 in)
FSU-18
Tire size 205/65R16 215/55R17
A
Rear (Hr) 703 mm (27.68 in) 702 mm (27.64 in) 701 mm (27.60 in) B
FSU
SFA818A
Measure value under unladen* conditions. F

FSU-19
SUSPENSION
SECTION RSU
REAR SUSPENSION
B
RSU
CONTENTS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2 RADIUS ROD .................................................... 12 F
Exploded View .........................................................12
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Removal and Installation .........................................12
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 2 Inspection ................................................................12 G
FRONT LOWER LINK ....................................... 14
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 Exploded View .........................................................14
Removal and Installation .........................................14 H
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Inspection ................................................................14
Precautions for Suspension ...................................... 3
REAR STABILIZER .......................................... 15 I
PREPARATION ............................................ 4 Exploded View .........................................................15
PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Inspection ................................................................15
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 J
REAR SUSPENSION ARM ............................... 16 K
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ..................... 5 Exploded View .........................................................16
Inspection .................................................................. 5
WHEEL ALIGNMENT .......................................... 6 Inspection ................................................................16
L
Inspection .................................................................. 6 REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER ....................... 18
Adjustment ................................................................ 7
Exploded View .........................................................18
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 8 Removal and Installation .........................................18 M
Inspection ................................................................19
REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING ............... 8
Exploded View .......................................................... 8 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
N
Removal and Installation ........................................... 8 (SDS) ............................................................ 20
Inspection .................................................................. 9
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ..............................10 (SDS) ................................................................. 20 O
Exploded View ........................................................ 10 Wheel Alignment .....................................................20
Removal and Installation ......................................... 10 Ball Joint ..................................................................20
Inspection ................................................................ 10 Wheel Height ...........................................................20 P
RSU-1
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
RSU-8, RSU-10, RSU-12, RSU-14, RSU-15, RSU-16, RSU-18
RSU-8, RSU-10, RSU-12, RSU-14, RSU-15, RSU-16, RSU-18
NVH in RAX and RSU sections
NVH in WT section
NVH in WT section
NVH in BR section
RSU-10
RSU-15
RSU-6
—
—
Reference page
Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION

Bushing or mounting deterioration

Incorrect wheel alignment
Suspension looseness
Stabilizer bar fatigue

Parts interference
ROAD WHEEL
Spring fatigue
BRAKE
TIRE
Noise × × × × × × × × × ×
Shake × × × × × × × × ×
Vibration × × × × × × ×
Symptom REAR SUSPENSION Shimmy × × × × × × × × ×
Judder × × × × × × ×
Poor quality ride or
× × × × × × × × × ×
handling
×: Applicable
RSU-2
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Suspension INFOID:0000000003811137
B
CAUTION:
• When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions
with tires on ground. Oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. C
- Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools
and mats are in designated positions.
• After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment. D
• Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are
pre-oiled, tighten as they are.
RSU
RSU-3
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Tool number
Description
Tool name
ST3127S000 Measuring rotating torque of ball joint
Preload gauge
ZZA0806D
RSU-4
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
B
MOUNTING INSPECTION
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions C
SHOCK ABSORBER
Check for oil leakage and damage. Replace if necessary. D
RSU
RSU-5
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
DESCRIPTION
Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions.
NOTE:
“Unladen conditions” means that fuel, engine coolant, and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.
PRELIMINARY CHECK
• Tires for improper air pressure and wear
• Road wheels for runout: refer to WT-2, "Inspection".
• Wheel bearing axial end play: refer to RAX-3, "Inspection".
• Shock absorber operation
• Each mounting point of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation
• Each of lower link, upper link, rear suspension member, suspension arm and shock absorber for cracks,
deformation, and other damage
• Vehicle height (posture)
CAMBER
• Measure camber of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge.
• If camber is outside specified range, adjust with adjusting bolt in
lower. Refer to RSU-7, "Adjustment".
Standard
Camber: Refer to RSU-20, "Wheel Alignment".
SRA096A
TOE-IN
Measure toe-in by the following procedure.
WARNING:
• Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
• Make sure that no person is in front of vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put matching mark (A) on base line of the tread (rear side) of
both tires at the same height of hub center. These are measur-
ing points.
JPEIA0014ZZ
RSU-6
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
4. Measure distance (A) (rear side).
5. Push vehicle slowly ahead to rotate wheels 180 degrees (1/2 A
turn).
NOTE:
If the wheels rotates more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn), start this B
procedure again from the beginning. Do not push the vehicle
backward.
6. Measure distance (B) (front side).
C
Standard
Total toe-in = A − B
JPEIA0015ZZ
D
Total toe-in: Refer to RSU-20, "Wheel Align-
ment".
• If toe-in is outside specified range, adjust with adjusting bolt in suspension arm. RSU
F
CAMBER
If camber is outside of specified range, adjust with adjusting bolt (1)
in front lower link (2).
G
Standard
Refer to RSU-20, "Wheel Alignment".
H
CAUTION:
• When tightening the nut firmly and checking the torque, use a
wrench to prevent the turning of bolt.
• After adjusting camber, be sure to check toe-in. I
• If camber exceeds the standard value, inspect and replace any
JPEIB0109ZZ
damaged or worn suspension parts.
J
TOE-IN
If toe-in is outside of specified range, adjust with adjusting bolt (1) in
rear lower link (2).
K
Standard
Refer to RSU-20, "Wheel Alignment".
L
CAUTION:
• Be sure to adjust equally on right and left side with adjusting
bolt.
• When tightening the nut firmly and checking the torque, use a M
wrench to prevent the turning of bolt.
JPEIB0110ZZ
• If toe-in is outside of specified range, inspect and replace any dam-
aged or worn suspension parts. N
RSU-7
REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
JPEIB0108GB
1. Upper seat 2. Coil spring 3. Rubber seat

4. Rear lower link 5. Rear suspension member 6. Radius rod
7. Front lower link
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
2. Set jack under rear lower link.
3. Loosen rear lower link mounting bolt and nut (rear suspension member side), and then remove rear lower
link mounting bolt and nut (axle housing side).
4. Slowly lower jack, then remove upper seat, coil spring and rubber seat from rear lower link.
5. Remove rear lower link mounting bolt and nut (rear suspension member side), and remove rear lower link.
INSTALLATION
• Make sure that upper seat is attached as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
• Make sure keep the upper seat (1) to place protrusion for
projection (A) on outside of vehicle (lateral direction of vehi-
cle).
• Make sure that the projection (C) on upper seat inside is
securely fitted on the bracket (2) tabs (B).
: Body
• Match up rubber seat indentions and rear lower link grooves and
attach.
JPEIB0082ZZ
RSU-8
• Install coil spring by aligning lower end of the coil spring to step (A)
between rubber seat (1) and rear lower link (2). A
CAUTION:
Set coil spring so that its paint marks are aligned with the
positions of 3.0 turns (2 places) and 4.0 turns (1 place) or 4.0
B
turns (2 places) and 5.0 turns (1 place) from the bottom end of
the coil spring.
• Perform the final tightening of rear suspension member and axle
installation position (rubber bushing) under unladen condition with C
tires on level ground.
JPEIB0122ZZ
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL RSU

Check lower link, bushing and coil spring for deformation, crack, and damage. Replace if necessary.
1. Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection". F
G
RSU-9
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
JPEIB0123GB
1. Shock absorber 2. Bound bumper 3. Shock absorber mounting bracket

4. Mounting seal 5. Cap
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
3. Separate stabilizer connecting rod (lower side). Refer to RSU-15, "Exploded View".
4. Set suitable jack under axle housing to relieve the coil spring tension.
5. Remove shock absorber mounting bolt (lower side).
6. Gradually lower the jack to remove it from rear axle.
7. Remove shock absorber mounting nuts (upper side) ( ), and
remove shock absorber assembly.
JPEIB0111ZZ
INSTALLATION
• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the shock absorber lower side (rubber bushing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
RSU-10
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
Check the following items, and replace the if necessary.
• Shock absorber for deformation, cracks, damage. A
• Welded and sealed areas for oil leakage.
• Piston rod for damage, uneven wear or distortion.
• Seal of shock absorber mounting bracket for cracks, damage and come off.
B
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-58, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded
View" (without VDC), BRC-152, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View" (with VDC). C
RSU
RSU-11
RADIUS ROD
RADIUS ROD
JPEIB0108GB

7. Front lower link
REMOVAL
1. Remove tire.
3. Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Exploded View".
4. Remove shock absorber mounting bolt (lower side). Refer to RSU-10, "Exploded View".
5. Remove front lower link mounting bolt and nut (axle housing side). Refer to RSU-14, "Exploded View".
6. Loosen front lower link mounting bolt and nut (suspension member side). Refer to RSU-14, "Exploded
View".
7. Remove radius rod mounting bolts and nuts (axle housing side).
8. Remove radius rod mounting bolt (rear suspension member side), and then remove radius rod.
INSTALLATION
• Perform final tightening of rear suspension member and axle installation position (rubber bushing), under
unladen conditions with tires on level ground.

Check radius rod and bushing for any deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace if necessary.
RSU-12
RADIUS ROD
3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING
ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement". A
RSU
RSU-13
FRONT LOWER LINK
FRONT LOWER LINK
JPEIB0108GB

7. Front lower link
REMOVAL
1. Remove tire.
4. Remove shock absorber mounting bolt (lower side). Refer to RSU-10, "Exploded View".
5. Remove front lower link mounting bolts and nuts (axle housing side).
6. Remove front lower link mounting bolts and nuts (rear suspension member side), and then remove front
lower link.
INSTALLATION
• Perform final tightening of rear suspension member and axle installation position (rubber bushing), under
unladen conditions with tires on level ground.

Check front lower link and bushing for any deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace if necessary.
RSU-14
REAR STABILIZER
REAR STABILIZER
A
RSU
G
JPEIB0105GB
1. Suspension arm 2. Stabilizer connecting rod mount 3. Stabilizer connecting rod

bracket H
4. Stabilizer bar 5. Stabilizer bushing 6. Stabilizer clamp
I
REMOVAL J
1. Remove stabilizer connecting rod mount bracket.
2. Remove stabilizer connecting rod.
CAUTION: K
Apply a matching mark to identify the installation position.
3. Remove mounting bolts on stabilizer clamp and remove stabilizer bar.
INSTALLATION L
• Check the matching mark when installing.
M
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL N

Check stabilizer bar, stabilizer bushing, stabilizer clamp, stabilizer connecting rod, stabilizer connecting rod
mounting bracket for any deformation, crack or damage. Replace if necessary.
RSU-15
REAR SUSPENSION ARM
REAR SUSPENSION ARM
JPEIB0106GB
1. Suspension arm 2. Stopper rubber 3. Rear suspension member

REMOVAL
1. Remove suspension arm with rear suspension member. Refer to RSU-18, "Exploded View".
2. Remove auto levelizer control unit (with xenon combination lamp type). Refer to EXL-190, "Exploded
View".
3. Remove suspension arm.
INSTALLATION
• Perform final tightening of rear suspension member installation position (rubber bussing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
• Install stopper rubber (suspension arm rear side) and suspension arm as a set to rear suspension member.
• After final tightening, and install auto levelizer control unit (with xenon combination lamp type). Refer to EXL-

Appearance
Check the following items, and replace if necessary.
• Suspension arm and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage.
• Boot of ball joint for cracks or damage, and also for grease leakage.
Manually move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.
Swing Torque Inspection
NOTE:
Before measurement, move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.
RSU-16
REAR SUSPENSION ARM
• Hook spring balance (A) at cotter pin mounting hole. Confirm
spring balance measurement value is within specifications when A
ball stud begins moving.
Standard B
Swing torque : Refer to RSU-20, "Ball Joint".
• If swing torque exceeds the standard value, replace suspension
arm assembly. C
JPEIA0005ZZ
D
Rotating Torque Inspection
• Attach the mounting nut to ball stud. Make sure that rotating torque
is within the specifications with a preload gauge (A) (SST:
ST3127S000). RSU
Standard
Rotating torque : Refer to RSU-20, "Ball Joint". F
- If rotating torque exceeds the standard value, replace suspension
arm assembly.
G
PDIA1258E
Axial End Play Inspection H

• Move tip of ball stud in axial direction to check for looseness.
Standard
I
Axial end play : Refer to RSU-20, "Ball Joint".
- If axial end play exceeds the standard value, replace suspension arm assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION J
K
L
RSU-17
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER
JPEIB0107GB
1. Member stay (rear side) 2. Rear suspension member 3. Member stay (front side)
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires.
2. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. Refer to
BR-40, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
4. Remove center muffler and main muffler. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
5. Remove stabilizer bar. Refer to RSU-15, "Exploded View".
6. Separate the attachment between parking brake cable and vehicle and rear suspension member. Refer to
PB-5, "Exploded View".
7. Separate auto levelizer control unit harness connector (with xenon combination lamp type). Refer to EXL-
9. Remove shock absorber (lower side). Refer to RSU-10, "Exploded View".
10. Set suitable jack under rear suspension member.
11. Remove member stay (front and rear side).
12. Slowly lower jack, then remove rear suspension member, suspension arm, radius rod, front lower link and
axle housing from vehicle as a unit.
• Axle housing: refer to RAX-4, "Exploded View".
• Auto levelizer control unit (with xenon combination lamp type): refer to EXL-190, "Exploded View".
• Suspension arm: refer to RSU-16, "Exploded View".
• Radius rod: refer to RSU-12, "Exploded View".
• Front lower link: refer to RSU-14, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal.
RSU-18
• Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing
rear suspension assembly. A
• After final tightening, install auto levelizer control unit (with xenon combination lamp type). Refer to EXL-190,
"Exploded View".
B
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL C

Check rear suspension member for deformation, cracks, or any other damage. Replace if necessary.
D
2. Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). PB-2, "Inspection and Adjustment".
RSU
F
RSU-19
Wheel Alignment INFOID:0000000003811163
Item Standard
Minimum –0° 57′ (–0.95°)
Camber
Nominal –0° 27′ (–0.45°)
Maximum 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Minimum 0 mm (0 in)
Distance Nominal In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Maximum In 3.2 mm (0.126 in)
Total toe-in
Minimum 0° 00′ (0.00°)
Angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Nominal In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
Maximum In 0° 08′ (0.13°)
Ball Joint INFOID:0000000003811164
Item Standard
Swing torque 0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.06 – 0.34 kg-m, 5 – 30 in-lb)
Measurement on spring balance (cotter pinhole position) 8.1 – 54.8 N (0.83 – 5.6 kg, 1.82 – 12.32 lb)
Rotating torque 0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.06 – 0.34 kg-m, 5 – 30 in-lb)
Axial end play 0 mm (0 in)
Wheel Height INFOID:0000000003815380
Tire size 205/65R16 215/55R17

Front (Hf) 712 mm (28.03 in) 711 mm (27.99 in) 710 mm (27.95 in)
Rear (Hr) 703 mm (27.68 in) 702 mm (27.64 in) 701 mm (27.60 in)
SFA818A

RSU-20
SUSPENSION
SECTION
ROAD WHEELS & TIRES
WT B
WT
CONTENTS
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 2 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS F
(SDS) ............................................................. 5
ROAD WHEEL .................................................... 2
Inspection .................................................................. 2 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS G
(SDS) .................................................................. 5
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 3 Road Wheel .............................................................. 5
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY ...................... 3 Wheel Nut ................................................................. 5 H
Adjustment ................................................................ 3 Tire Air Pressure ....................................................... 5
WT-1
ROAD WHEEL
ROAD WHEEL
ALUMINUM WHEEL
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel
runout.
a. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine.
b. Set dial indicator as shown in the figure.
c. If the lateral deflection (A) or vertical deflection (B) for radial
runout value exceeds the limit, replace aluminum wheel.
Limit
A: Refer to WT-5, "Road Wheel".
B: Refer to WT-5, "Road Wheel".
SEIA0737E
STEEL WHEEL
1. Check tires for were and improper inflation.
2. Check wheels for deformation, clacks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel
runout.
a. Remove tire from steel wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine.
b. Set two dial indicators as shown in the illustration.
c. Set each dial indicator to “0”.
d. Rotate wheel and check dial indicators at several points around
the circumference of the wheel.
e. Calculate runout at each point as shown below.
Lateral runout limit (A): ( + )/2

Radial runout limit (B): ( + )/2
f. Select maximum positive runout value and the maximum nega-
tive value. Add the two values to determine total runout.
CAUTION:
In case a positive or negative value is not available, use the
maximum value (negative or positive) for total runout.
Limit
A: Refer to WT-5, "Road Wheel".
B: Refer to WT-5, "Road Wheel".
g. If the total runout value exceeds limit, replace steel wheel.
SEIA0738E
WT-2
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
B
BALANCING WHEELS (BONDING WEIGHT TYPE)

Preparation Before Adjustment C
Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. D
• After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the road
wheel.
Wheel Balance Adjustment WT
If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select
and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for road wheels.
1. Set road wheel on tire balance machine using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. F
2. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the tire balance machine indicator, multiply outer
unbalance value by 5/3 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight
with a value closest to the calculated value above and install to the designated outer position of, or at the
G
designated angle in relation to the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
• Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the road wheel. H
a. Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) bal- I
ance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
NOTE:
Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
J
balance weight value.
Example:
36.2 ⇒ 35 g (1.23 oz)
36.3 ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) K
SMA054D
b. Installed balance weight in the position. L
WT-3
• When installing balance weight (1) to road wheels, set it into
the grooved area (A) on the inner wall of the road wheel as
shown in the figure so that the balance weight center (B) is
aligned with the tire balance machine indication position
(angle) (C).
CAUTION:
• Always use genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
• Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with
new ones.
• Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight.
JPEIC0040ZZ
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install

two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start the tire balance machine again.
4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
tire balance machine indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weight.
5. Start the tire balance machine. Make sure that inner and outer PEIA0033E
residual unbalance values are 5 g (0.17 oz) each or below.

6. If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.17 oz), repeat installation procedures.
Limit
Dynamic (At rim flange): Refer to WT-5, "Road Wheel".
Static (At rim flange): Refer to WT-5, "Road Wheel".
TIRE ROTATION
• Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals.
Refer to MA-5, "General Maintenance".
• When installing the wheel, tighten wheel nuts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
• When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing
the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels
from developing any distortion.
• Be careful not to tighten wheel nut at torque exceeding the
criteria for preventing strain of disc rotor.
• Use NISSAN genuine wheel nuts for aluminum wheels.
SMA829C
Wheel nuts tighting torque : Refer to WT-5, "Wheel Nut".
WT-4
Road Wheel INFOID:0000000003812918
B
ALUMINUM WHEEL (CONVENTIONAL)

C
Item Limit
Lateral deflection
Radial runout Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
Radial deflection D
Dynamic (At flange) Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side)
Allowable unbalance
Static (At flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
WT
STEEL WHEEL
Item Limit F
Lateral deflection Less than 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
Radial runout
Radial deflection Less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
Dynamic (At flange) Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side) G
Allowable unbalance
Static (At flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
Wheel Nut INFOID:0000000003812919 H
Item Standard
I
Wheel nut tighting torque 108 N·m (11 kg-m, 80 ft-lb)
Tire Air Pressure INFOID:0000000003812920

J
2
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm , psi)
Standard
Item K
Front Rear
205/65R16 95H 220 (2.2, 2.2, 32) 200 (2.0, 2.0, 29)
215/55R17 94V 240 (2.4, 2.4, 35) 220 (2.2, 2.2, 32) L
WT-5
BRAKES
SECTION
BRAKE SYSTEM
BR B
E
CONTENTS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3 BRAKE PAD ..............................................................15 BR
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment ...............15
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 3 DISC ROTOR .............................................................15
G
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 3 DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment .............15
PRECAUTION ............................................... 4 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 17

H
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 BRAKE PEDAL ................................................. 17
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .........................................................17
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................18 I
SIONER" ................................................................... 4
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- BRAKE PIPING ................................................. 19
tion after Battery Disconnect ..................................... 4
J
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 5 FRONT .......................................................................19
Precaution for Brake System .................................... 5 FRONT : Exploded View .........................................19
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping .......................................20
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 6 FRONT : Removal and Installation ..........................21 K
FRONT : Inspection .................................................21
BRAKE PEDAL ................................................... 6
Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 6 REAR .........................................................................22 L
REAR : Exploded View ............................................22
BRAKE FLUID ..................................................... 9 REAR : Hydraulic Piping ..........................................22
Inspection .................................................................. 9
REAR : Removal and Installation ............................23
Draining ..................................................................... 9 M
REAR : Inspection ...................................................23
Refilling ..................................................................... 9
Bleeding Brake System ........................................... 10 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .......................... 25
Exploded View .........................................................25 N
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ............................11 Removal and Installation .........................................25
Inspection ................................................................ 11
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................26
BRAKE BOOSTER ............................................12 Inspection ................................................................27
O
Inspection ................................................................ 12 BRAKE BOOSTER ........................................... 28
FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................13 Exploded View .........................................................28
Removal and installation .........................................28 P
BRAKE PAD .............................................................. 13 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................29
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment .............. 13
VACUUM LINES ............................................... 31
DISC ROTOR ............................................................. 13 Exploded View .........................................................31
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment ............ 13 Removal and Installation .........................................31
Inspection ................................................................31
REAR DISC BRAKE ..........................................15
BR-1
FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................ 33 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................................ 40
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ... 40
BRAKE PAD ............................................................. 33 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and In-
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ................................ 33 stallation .................................................................. 41
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................. 33 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and
BRAKE PAD : Inspection ........................................ 34 Assembly ................................................................ 42
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............ 44
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................................ 34
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ... 34 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and In-
stallation ................................................................. 35
(SDS) .......................................................... 45
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Assembly ................................................................ 36 (SDS) ................................................................. 45
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........... 38
General Specifications ............................................ 45
REAR DISC BRAKE .......................................... 39 Brake Pedal ............................................................ 45
Brake Booster ......................................................... 45
BRAKE PAD ............................................................. 39 Front Disc Brake ..................................................... 45
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ................................ 39 Rear Disc Brake ...................................................... 45
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................. 39
BRAKE PAD : Inspection ........................................ 40
BR-2
Symptom
×: Applicable
Reference page
Possible cause and
BRAKE
SUSPECTED PARTS
Noise
Shake
Shimmy, Judder
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
Pads - damaged BR-13, BR-15
×
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Pads - uneven wear BR-13, BR-15
×
Shims damaged BR-34, BR-40
×
Rotor imbalance BR-13, BR-15
×
×
Rotor damage BR-13, BR-15
BR-3
Rotor runout BR-13, BR-15
×
Rotor deformation BR-13, BR-15
×
Rotor deflection BR-13, BR-15
×
Rotor rust BR-13, BR-15
×
Rotor thickness variation BR-13, BR-15
×
PROPELLER SHAFT NVH in DLN section
×
×
×
DIFFERENTIAL NHV in DLN section
AXLE AND SUSPENSION NVH in FAX, RAX, FSU and RSU section
×
×
×
TIRE NVH in WT section

×
×
×
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
ROAD WHEEL NVH in WT section

×
×
×
× × DRIVE SHAFT NVH in FAX section
STEERING NVH in ST section

×
×
×
INFOID:0000000003811166
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
D
C
O
G
M
BR
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
connectors.
INFOID:0000000003890161
NOTE:
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
BR-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
A
B
D
PIIB3706J
Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000003811170

E
WARNING:
Clean any dust from the front brake and rear brake with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with com-
pressed air. BR
CAUTION:
• Only use “DOT 3 or DOT 4” brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid. G
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Always clean with new brake fluid when cleaning the master cylinder, brake caliper and other com-
ponents. H
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and
cause improper operation.
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench. I
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with
torque wrench (A).
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when install-
ing the brake pipes. J
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) connector or the battery nega-
tive terminal before performing the work. K
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing
the parts.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replac-
L
ing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at
JPFIA0061ZZ
very low mileage.
- Front brake pad: refer to BR-13, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
- Front disc rotor: refer to BR-13, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment". M
- Rear brake pad: refer to BR-15, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
- Rear disc rotor: refer to BR-15, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
N
BR-5
BRAKE PEDAL
BRAKE PEDAL
INSPECTION
Brake Pedal Height
Check the brake pedal height (H1) between the dash lower panel (1)
and the brake pedal upper surface.
Standard
H1 : Refer to BR-45, "Brake
Pedal".
CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim.
JPFIA0065ZZ
Stop Lamp Switch and ASCD Brake Switch

Check the clearance (C) between stopper rubber (1) and stop lamp
switch and ASCD brake switch (2) threaded end.
Standard
C : Refer to BR-45, "Brake
Pedal".
CAUTION:
The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is
released.
NOTE: JPFIA0122ZZ
Pull the brake pedal pad to make the clearance between stopper
rubber and stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch threaded end.
Brake Pedal Play
Press the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal play (A).
Standard
A : Refer to BR-45, "Brake
Pedal".
JPFIA0121ZZ
Depressed Brake Pedal Height

Check the brake pedal height (H2) between the dash lower panel (1)
and the brake pedal upper surface when depressing the brake pedal
at 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON.
Standard
H2 : Refer to BR-45, "Brake
Pedal".
CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim.
JPFIA0068ZZ
BR-6
BRAKE PEDAL
ADJUSTMENT
A
Brake Pedal Height
1. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch harness connector. B
3. Turn the stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch 45° counterclockwise.
4. Loosen the input rod lock nut (1). Adjust the brake pedal height
(H1) to the specification. Tighten the input rod lock nut to the C
specification. Refer to BR-28, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
The threaded end of the input rod (2) must project to the
inner side (L) of the clevis (3). D
JPFIA0003ZZ
BR
Standard
H1 : Refer to BR-45, "Brake G
Pedal".
I
JPFIA0279ZZ
Stop Lamp Switch and ASCD Brake Switch

J
2. Disconnect the stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn the stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch 45° counterclockwise. K
4. Press-fit stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch (2) until stop
lamp switch and ASCD brake switch hits the stopper rubber (1)
45° clockwise. L
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the stopper rubber and stop
lamp switch and ASCD brake switch threaded end must
be the specified value. Refer to BR-45, "Brake Pedal". M
• The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is
released.
N
JPFIA0122ZZ
Brake Pedal Play

O
2. Disconnect the stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn the stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch 45° counterclockwise. P
BR-7
BRAKE PEDAL
4. Press-fit stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch (2) until stop
lamp switch and ASCD brake switch hits the stopper rubber (1)
45° clockwise.
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the stopper rubber and stop
lamp switch and ASCD brake switch threaded end must
be the specified value. Refer to BR-45, "Brake Pedal".
• The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is
released.
JPFIA0122ZZ
BR-8
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
A
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL B

• Check that the fluid level in the sub tank is within the specified
range (MAX – MIN lines).
• Visually check for any brake fluid leakage around the sub tank, C
reservoir tank and hose.
• Check the brake system for any leakage if the fluid level is
extremely low (lower than MIN).
• Check the brake system for fluid leakage if the warning lamp D
remains illuminated even after the parking brake is released.
E
JPFIA0007ZZ
BRAKE LINE
BR
1. Check brake line (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
2. Check for fluid leakage by fully depressing brake pedal while
G
engine is running.
CAUTION:
If leakage occurs around joints, retighten or, if necessary,
replace damaged parts. H
SBR389C
J
CAUTION: K
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) con-
nector or the battery negative terminal before draining. L
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleed valve.
2. Depress the brake pedal and loosen the bleeder valve to gradu-
ally discharge brake fluid. M
O
BRA0007D
Refilling INFOID:0000000003811175 P
CAUTION:
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connec-
tor or the battery negative terminal before refilling.
1. Check that there is no foreign material in the sub tank, and refill with new brake fluid.
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
BR-9
BRAKE FLUID
2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the full stroke, and then release the pedal.
Repeat this operation at intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until all brake fluid is discharged. Then close the
bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed. Repeat the same work on each wheel.
3. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
Bleeding Brake System INFOID:0000000003811176
CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) con-
nector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work.
• Monitor the fluid level in the sub tank during the air bleeding.
• Always use new brake fluid for refilling. Never reuse the drained brake fluid.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve of the rear right brake.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
3. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the
bleeder valve.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all of the air is out of the brake line.
5. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque.
• Front disc brake: refer to BR-34, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
• Rear disc brake: refer to BR-40, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 for the rear right brake → front left brake → rear left brake → and front right brake in
order.
7. Check that the fluid level in the sub tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR-9,
"Inspection".
BR-10
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
A
FLUID LEAK B
Check for brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder mounting face, reservoir tank mounting face, and brake
tube connections.
C
BR
BR-11
BRAKE BOOSTER
BRAKE BOOSTER
OPERATION
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the
engine stopped. Start the engine with the brake pedal fully
depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash
lower panel decreases.
NOTE:
A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the
brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due to
the brake system operation.
BRA0037D
AIR TIGHT
• Idle the engine for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster,
and stop the engine. Then depress the brake pedal several times
at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake
pedal and dash lower panel gradually increases (A → B → C) each
time the brake pedal is depressed during this operation.
JPFIA0043ZZ
• Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the
engine while holding down the brake pedal. Check that the brake
pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal
for 30 seconds or more.
NOTE:
brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due
to the brake system operation.
JPFIA0044ZZ
BR-12
FRONT DISC BRAKE
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003811179
B
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary. C
Limit
Wear thickness : Refer to BR-45, "Front D
Disc Brake".
BRA0010D
BR
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
• Burnish contact surfaces between pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or
G
replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pads and disc
rotor are securely fitted.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. H
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. I
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
DISC ROTOR J
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003811180
K
INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace if there are any abnormal L
conditions.
Runout
1. Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with M
wheel nuts (2 points at least).
2. Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection.
Refer to FAX-6, "Inspection". N
3. Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measured at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge.
O
Limit
Runout : Refer to BR-45, "Front
Disc Brake". SBR019B P
4. Find the installation position with a minimum runout by shifting the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing
assembly installation position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value.
5. Replace or refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above opera-
tion.
Thickness
BR-13
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace
the disc rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit.
Limit
Wear thickness : Refer to BR-45, "Front
Disc Brake".
SBR020B
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake.
BR-14
REAR DISC BRAKE
REAR DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003811181
B
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary. C
Limit
Wear thickness : Refer to BR-45, "Rear D
Disc Brake".
BRA0010D
BR
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
G
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. H
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. I
DISC ROTOR J
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003811182
K
INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace if there are any abnormal L
conditions.
Runout
1. Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with M
wheel nuts (2 points at least).
2. Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection.
Refer to RAX-3, "Inspection". N
3. Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measured at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge.
O
Limit
Runout : Refer to BR-45, "Rear
Disc Brake". SBR019B P
4. Find the installation position with a minimum runout by shifting the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing
assembly installation position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value.
5. Replace or refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above opera-
tion.
Thickness
BR-15
REAR DISC BRAKE
Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace
the disc rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit.
Limit
Wear thickness : Refer to BR-45, "Rear
Disc Brake".
SBR020B
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake.
BR-16
BRAKE PEDAL
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
BRAKE PEDAL
B
BR
JPFIA0341GB J
1. Clevis pin 2. Brake pedal assembly 3. Brake pedal pad

4. Snap pin 5. Clip 6. ASCD brake switch
K
7. Stop lamp switch
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. L
REMOVAL M

2. Disconnect the stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch harness connectors. N
3. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from clevis of brake booster.
4. Separate steering column assembly and lower shaft. Refer to ST-13, "Exploded View".
5. Remove the brake pedal assembly. O
CAUTION:
Hold the brake booster and master cylinder so as not to drop out or contact them to other parts.
6. Remove accelerator pedal from brake pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, "Exploded View". P
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install the reverse order of removal.
• Apply the multi-purpose grease to the clevis pin and the mating faces. (Not necessary if grease has been
already applied.)
NOTE:
The clevis pin may be inserted in either direction.
BR-17
BRAKE PEDAL

• Check the following items and replace the brake pedal assembly if
necessary.
- Check the brake pedal upper rivet (made by aluminum) (A) for
deformation.
- Check the brake pedal for bend, damage, and cracks on the
welded parts.
- Check the lapping length (X) of sub-bracket (B) and slide plate (C).
Standard
X : 5.0 mm (0.197 in) or more
JPFIA0342ZZ
• Check clevis pin and plastic stopper (A) for damage and deforma-
tion. If any damage is found, replace clevis pin.
PFIA0756J

• Perform the brake pedal adjustment after installing the brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection
and Adjustment".
• Perform the accelerator pedal check after installing the accelerator pedal. Refer to ACC-4, "Inspection".
BR-18
BRAKE PIPING
BRAKE PIPING
A
FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003811186
B
WITHOUT VDC
C
BR
K
JPFIA0343GB
1. Brake tube 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 3. Connector L

trol unit)
4. Connector bracket 5. Master cylinder assembly 6. Brake booster
7. Lock plate 8. Brake hose 9. Union bolt
M
10. Copper washer
A. To front brake hose B. To rear brake tube
N
WITH VDC
BR-19
BRAKE PIPING
JPFIA0344GB
1. Brake tube 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 3. Connector

trol unit)
4. Connector bracket 5. Master cylinder assembly 6. Brake booster
7. Lock plate 8. Brake hose 9. Union bolt
10. Copper washer
A. To front brake hose B. To rear brake tube
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000003811187
JPFIA0345ZZ
BR-20
BRAKE PIPING
1. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 2. Front disc brake 3. Master cylinder assembly A
trol unit)
4. Brake booster 5. Connector 6. Rear disc brake
A. Brake tube B. Brake hose
B
: Flare nut
: Union bolt
C
FRONT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811188
REMOVAL D
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
E
1. Remove tires.
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-9, "Draining".
3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the hose. BR
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and tubes.
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. G
4. Remove the union bolt and copper washers, and remove the brake hose from the brake caliper assembly.
5. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose.
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it I
1. Assemble the union bolt and the copper washers to the brake hose.
CAUTION:
J
Never reuse the copper washer.
2. Align the brake hose pin to the projection (A) of the brake caliper
assembly and tighten the union bolt (1) to the specified torque.
K
3. Install the brake tube to the brake hose, temporarily tighten the
flare nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the brake
hose to the bracket with the lock plate.
CAUTION: L
Check that all brake hoses and tubes are not twisted and
bent.
4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot and M
torque wrench.
CAUTION: JPFIA0099ZZ
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.

N
5. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
O
FRONT : Inspection INFOID:0000000003811189
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION P

1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interfer-
ence with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785N (80 kg, 177 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately 5
seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present.
BR-21
BRAKE PIPING
REAR
REAR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003811190
JPFIA0346GB
1. Brake tube 2. Lock plate 3. Brake hose

4. Union bolt 5. Copper washer
A. To connector B. To rear brake hose C. To brake tube
REAR : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000003811191
JPFIA0345ZZ
BR-22
BRAKE PIPING
1. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 2. Front disc brake 3. Master cylinder assembly A
trol unit)
4. Brake booster 5. Connector 6. Rear disc brake
A. Brake tube B. Brake hose
B
: Flare nut
: Union bolt
C
REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811192
REMOVAL D
CAUTION:
E
1. Remove tires.
3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the hose. BR
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Never sharply bend, twist or strongly pull the brake hoses and tubes.
• Cover the open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. G
4. Remove the union bolt and copper washers, and remove the brake hose from the brake caliper assembly.
5. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose from the vehicle.
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it I
1. Assemble the union bolt and the copper washers to the brake hose.
CAUTION:
J
Never reuse copper washer.
2. Install the brake hose L-pin by aligning it with the brake caliper
assembly positioning hole, and tighten the union bolt (1) to the
specified torque. K
3. Connect the hose to the brake tube, temporarily tighten the flare
nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the brake hose
to the bracket with the lock plate. L
CAUTION:
Check that the brake hoses and tubes are not twisted and
bent. M
4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot and
torque wrench. JPFIA0012ZZ
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. N
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained brake fluid. O
REAR : Inspection INFOID:0000000003811193
P
1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interfer-
ence with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785N (80 kg, 177 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately 5
seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
BR-23
BRAKE PIPING
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present.
BR-24
A
BR
I
JPFIA0347GB
1. Reservoir cap 2. Oil strainer 3. Reservoir tank J

4. Cylinder body 5. Pin 6. O-ring
7. Grommet
: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease. K
: Apply brake fluid.

L
REMOVAL M
CAUTION:
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. N
2. Remove air duct and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
3. Separate the brake fluid level switch harness connector and harness clip. O
4. Separate the brake tubes from the master cylinder assembly with a flare nut wrench.
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. P
5. Remove the master cylinder assembly.
CAUTION:
• Depress the brake pedal several times to release the vacuum pressure from the brake booster.
Then remove the master cylinder assembly.
• Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed.
• The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never damage it when removing the
master cylinder.
BR-25
• The piston may drop off when pulled out strongly. Never hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body
when handling the master cylinder assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Note the following, and install the reverse order of removal.
• Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) silicone-based grease to the
brake booster [see (A) in the figure] when installing the master cyl-
inder assembly to the brake booster.
• The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never
damage it when handling the master cylinder and check that no dirt
and dust are present on the piston before installation. Clean it with
new brake fluid if necessary.
• The piston may drop off when pulled strongly. Never hold the pis-
ton. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder
assembly.
• Temporarily tighten the brake tube flare nut to the master cylinder
JPFIA0013ZZ
assembly by hand. Then tighten it to the specified torque with a
crowfoot and torque wrench. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• After installation, perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble the cylinder body.
• Remove the reservoir tank if necessary.
1. Fix the master cylinder assembly to a vise.
CAUTION:
Always set copper plates or cloth between vise when fixing the cylinder body to a vise. Never
overtighten the vise.
2. Remove the reservoir tank mounting pin with a pin punch.
3. Remove the reservoir tank and grommet from the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never drop the removed parts. The parts must not be
reused if they are dropped.
JPFIA0348ZZ
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply new brake fluid to the grommet and install it to the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
• Never use mineral oil such as gasoline or light oil.
• Never reuse the grommets.
2. Install the reservoir tank to the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
• Never drop the parts when installing. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped.
• Never reuse reservoir tank.
BR-26
3. Fix the cylinder body to a vise.
CAUTION: A
• Place the reservoir tank with the chamfered pin hole ( )
facing up.
• Always set copper plates or cloth between vise when fix- B
ing the cylinder body to a vise. Never overtighten the vise.
JPFIA0349ZZ
D
4. Tilt the reservoir tank so that a mounting pin can be inserted.
Insert a mounting pin. Return the reservoir tank to the horizontal
position. Insert another mounting pin into the pin hole on the E
opposite side in the same manner after the mounting pin passes
through the cylinder body pin hole.
CAUTION:
BR
Never reuse the mounting pin.
G
JPFIA0348ZZ
H

Fluid Leak I
Check for brake fluid leakage from the cylinder body-to-brake booster mounting face, reservoir tank mounting
face and brake tube connections.
J
BR-27
BRAKE BOOSTER
BRAKE BOOSTER
JPFIA0350GB
1. Master cylinder assembly 2. Brake booster 3. Lock nut

4. Clevis 5. Gasket
Removal and installation INFOID:0000000003811199
REMOVAL
1. Remove brake master cylinder assembly. Refer to BR-25, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Depress the brake pedal several times to release the vacuum pressure from the brake booster.
Then remove the master cylinder assembly.
• The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never damage it when removing the
master cylinder.
• The piston may drop off when pulled out strongly. Never hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body
when handling the master cylinder assembly.
2. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to BR-31, "Exploded View".
3. Remove snap pin (1) and clevis pin (2) from inside vehicle.
4. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
Hold the brake booster so as to avoid dropping out.
5. Remove brake tube bracket and fuel feed tube bracket.
6. Remove brake booster from dash panel in engine room side.
CAUTION:
Never deform or bend the brake tubes.
NOTE:
If removing brake booster is difficult, remove clevis from brake
booster. JPFIA0019ZZ
INSTALLATION
• Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted during installation, the
dash panel may damage the threads.
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes when installing the brake booster.
• Always use a new gasket between the brake booster.
BR-28
BRAKE BOOSTER
• Replace the clevis pin if it is damaged. Refer to BR-18, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• After installation, perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". A
CAUTION:
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003811200 B

C
Output Rod Length Inspection
1. With a handy vacuum pump, apply vacuum pressure of −66.7
kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.70 inHg, –0.667 bar) to the brake
D
booster.
2. Check the output rod length (A).
E
Standard
A : Refer to BR-45, "Brake Booster".
BR
JPFIA0021ZZ
Input Rod Length Inspection G

1. Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the input rod (2) to the speci-
fied length (B).
H
Standard
B : Refer to BR-45, "Brake Booster".
I
2. Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque.
J
JPFIA0020ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION K

Operation
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the
engine stopped. Start the engine with the brake pedal fully L
depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash
lower pane decreases.
NOTE:
M
brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due to
the brake system operation.
N
BRA0037D
O
Air Tight
BR-29
BRAKE BOOSTER
• Idle the engine for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster,
and stop the engine. Then depress the brake pedal several times
at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake
pedal and dash lower panel gradually increases (A → B → C) each
time the brake pedal is depressed during this operation.
JPFIA0043ZZ
• Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the
engine while holding down the brake pedal. Check that the brake
pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal
for 30 seconds or more.
NOTE:
brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a normal phenomenon due
to the brake system operation.
JPFIA0044ZZ

Perform the brake pedal adjustment after installing the brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and
Adjustment".
BR-30
VACUUM LINES
VACUUM LINES
A
BR
G
JPFIA0351ZZ
1. Vacuum hose (built in orifice) 2. Clamp 3. Vacuum tube

4. Vacuum hose (built in check valve)
H
A. To brake booster B. Paint mark C. Stamp indicating orifice direction
D. Stamp indicating engine direction E. To intake manifold
I
REMOVAL J
Remove the vacuum hose and tube.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, install the vacuum hose and tube. K
• Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct position. Refer to the stamp
to confirm correct installation. Brake booster will not operate normally if the hose is installed in the wrong
direction. L
• When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the
back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure.
M
Standard
A : 24 mm (0.95 in) or more
- Face the marking side up when assembling of vacuum hose. (For N
both side of vacuum hose of intake manifold side.)
- Face the marking side vehicle front when assembling of vacuum
hose. (For both side of vacuum hose of brake booster side)
O
CAUTION:
JPFIA0023ZZ
Never use lubricating oil during assembly.
P

Appearance
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.
Check Valve Airtightness
BR-31
VACUUM LINES
• Use a handy vacuum pump (A) to check.
When connected to the brake booster side (B)

: Vacuum should decrease within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg,
0.39 inHg, 0.013 bar) for 15 seconds under a vacuum
of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.70 inHg, −0.667 bar).
When connected to the engine side (C):
: Vacuum should not exist.
• Replace vacuum hose assembly if vacuum hose and check valve
JPFIA0024ZZ
are malfunctioning.
BR-32
FRONT DISC BRAKE
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003811204
B
BR
JPFIA0352GB
H
1. Cylinder body 2. Inner shim 3. Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)
4. Pad retainer 5. Torque member 6. Outer pad (with pad wear sensor)
7. Outer shim 8. Outer shim cover
I
1: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease.
2: Apply copper based brake grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. J
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811205
K
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with L
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor. M
1. Remove tires.
2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
N
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake hose will not stretch. Then remove the
brake pads, shims and shim cover from the torque member.
CAUTION:
• Never deform the pad retainer when removing the pad retainer from the torque member. O
• Never damage the piston boot.
• Never drop the brake pads, shims, and the shim cover.
INSTALLATION P
WARNING:
Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Never blow with
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the pis-
ton may pop out.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor.
BR-33
FRONT DISC BRAKE
1. Install the pad retainer to the torque member if the pad retainers has been removed.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be lifted up from the torque member.
• Never deform the pad retainers.
2. Apply copper based brake grease to the mating faces between the brake pads and pad retainers.
3. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the mating faces between the brake
pads, shims and shim cover, and install them to the brake pad.
CAUTION:
Always replace the shims together with the shim cover when replacing the brake pad.
4. Install the cylinder body and brake pads to the torque member.
CAUTION:
• When replacing a pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake
fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing piston in.
NOTE:
Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston.
5. Install the lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque.
6. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer
to BR-34, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection".
BRAKE PAD : Inspection INFOID:0000000003811206

Replace the shims and the shim cover if rust is excessively attached.
1. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
2. Remove brake pads.
3. Press the piston.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
4. Install brake pads.
5. Depress the brake pedal several times.
6. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR-
36, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly".
7. Burnish contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
Refer to BR-13, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003811207
REMOVAL
BR-34
FRONT DISC BRAKE
JPFIA0308GB BR
1. Brake caliper assembly

G
DISASSEMBLY
JPFIA0353GB M
1. Cap 2. Bleeder valve 3. Cylinder body

4. Piston seal 5. Piston 6. Piston boot N
7. Sliding pin 8. Sliding pin boot 9. Bushing
10. Torque member
: Apply rubber grease. O
P
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811208
REMOVAL
WARNING:
compressed air.
BR-35
FRONT DISC BRAKE
CAUTION:
Never depress the brake pedal. Brake fluid may splash while removing the brake hose.
1. Remove tires.
2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor.
4. Remove union bolt and copper washers, and then disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to
BR-19, "FRONT : Exploded View".
5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly.
CAUTION:
Never drop brake pads and caliper assembly.
6. Remove disc rotor.
CAUTION:
• Put matching marks on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing
the disc rotor.
• Never drop disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
compressed air.
CAUTION:
1. Install disc rotor.
CAUTION:
Align the matching marks put during removal when reusing the disc rotor.
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the vehicle and tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the
specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake caliper assembly mounting face,
threads, mounting bolts and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assembly, and tighten union bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-38, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY :
Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000003811209
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body.
1. Remove the sliding pin bolts, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member.
CAUTION:
Never drop brake pads, shims, shim cover and pad retainers from torque member.
2. Remove brake pads, shims and shim cover. Refer to BR-33, "BRAKE PAD : Exploded View".
3. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
4. Remove bushing from sliding pin.
BR-36
FRONT DISC BRAKE
5. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from
union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. A
CAUTION:
Never get fingers caught in the piston.
B
MAA0272D
D
6. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
E
7. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
BR
G
JPFIA0038ZZ
ASSEMBLY
H
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.
2. Apply rubber grease to piston seal (1), and install to cylinder
body.
CAUTION: I
Never reuse piston seal.
JPFIA0039ZZ
3. Apply rubber grease to piston boot (1). Cover the piston (2) end L
with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot
securely into a groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: M
Never reuse piston boot.
O
JPFIA0040ZZ
BR-37
FRONT DISC BRAKE
4. Apply brake fluid to piston (1). Push piston into cylinder body by
hand and push piston boot (2) piston-side lip into the piston
groove.
CAUTION:
Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to pre-
vent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
5. Apply rubber grease to bushing, install bushing to sliding pin.
6. Apply rubber grease to sliding pins and sliding pin boots, install
sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
7. Install the cylinder body to the torque member and tighten the
sliding pin bolts to the specified torque. JPFIA0034ZZ
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection INFOID:0000000003811210

Cylinder Body
Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.
Piston
Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.
CAUTION:
A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing
Check the sliding pins, sliding boot and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.
1. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
6. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR-
7. Burnish contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing disc rotors, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mile-
age. Refer to BR-13, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
BR-38
REAR DISC BRAKE
REAR DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003811211
B
BR
JPFIA0354GB
H
1. Sliding pin bolt 2. Cylinder body 3. Inner shim
4. Inner pad (only RH side with pad 5. Pad retainer 6. Torque member
wear sensor)
7. Outer pad 8. Outer shim
I
1: Apply rubber grease.

2: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease. J
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811212

K
REMOVAL
WARNING: L
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the pis- M
ton may pop out.
1. Remove tires. N
2. Remove the upper sliding pin bolt.
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake hose will not stretch. Remove the brake
pads and shims from the torque member. O
CAUTION:
• Never deform the pad retainers if removing the pad retainers.
• Never damage the piston boot. P
• Never drop the brake pad and shims.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
compressed air.
CAUTION:
BR-39
REAR DISC BRAKE
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the pis-
ton may pop out.
1. Install the pad retainers to the torque member if the pad retainers has been removed.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble the pad retainers not to be lifted up from the torque member.
• Never deform the pad retainers.
2. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the mating faces between the brake
pads, the shims and pawls part of cylinder body, and install them to the brake pad.
CAUTION:
Always replace the shims together when replacing the brake pad.
3. Install cylinder body and brake pads to torque member.
CAUTION:
• When replacing pads with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake
NOTE:
4. Install the upper sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque.
5. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the rear disc brake. Refer
to BR-40, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection".
BRAKE PAD : Inspection INFOID:0000000003811213

Replace the shims if rust is excessively attached.
1. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
6. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR-
7. Burnish contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
Refer to BR-15, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003811214
REMOVAL
BR-40
REAR DISC BRAKE
JPFIA0311GB BR
1. Brake caliper assembly

G
DISASSEMBLY
JPFIA0355GB M
1. Sliding pin bolt 2. Bushing 3. Cap

4. Bleeder valve 5. Cylinder body 6. Piston seal N
7. Piston 8. Piston boot 9. Sliding pin boot
10. Torque member
1: Apply rubber grease. O
2: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease.

P
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003811215
REMOVAL
WARNING:
BR-41
REAR DISC BRAKE
compressed air.
CAUTION:
1. Remove tires.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on the disc rotor.
4. Remove union bolt and copper washers then disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly.
5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly.
CAUTION:
Never drop brake pads and caliper assembly.
6. Remove disc rotor.
CAUTION:
• Put matching marks on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing
the disc rotor.
• Never drop disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
compressed air.
CAUTION:
1. Install disc rotor.
CAUTION:
Align the matching marks put during removal when reusing the disc rotor.
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the vehicle and tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the
specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake caliper assembly mounting face,
threads, mounting bolts, and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assembly, and tighten union bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to BR-22, "REAR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
5. Check that no drag feel is present for the rear disc brake. Refer to BR-44, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
: Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000003811216
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body.
1. Remove the sliding pin bolts and remove the cylinder body from the torque member.
2. Remove brake pads and shims. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE PAD : Exploded View".
3. Remove sliding pin boots from torque member.
4. Remove bushing from sliding pin bolt.
BR-42
REAR DISC BRAKE
5. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from
union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. A
CAUTION:
Never get fingers caught in the piston.
B
BRD0041D
D
6. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
E
7. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
BR
G
JPFIA0038ZZ
ASSEMBLY
H
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.
2. Apply rubber grease to piston seal (1), and install to cylinder
body.
CAUTION: I
Never reuse piston seal.
JPFIA0039ZZ
3. Apply rubber grease to piston boot (1). Cover the piston (2) end L
with the piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on the pis-
ton boot securely into the groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: M
Never reuse piston boot.
O
JPFIA0040ZZ
BR-43
REAR DISC BRAKE
4. Apply brake fluid to piston (1). Push piston into cylinder body by
hand and push piston boot (2) piston side lip into the piston
groove.
CAUTION:
Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to pre-
vent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
5. Apply rubber grease to bushing, install bushing to sliding pin
bolt.
6. Apply rubber grease to the sliding pin bolts and the sliding pin
boots, install sliding pin boot to torque member.
7. Install the cylinder body to the torque member and tighten the JPFIA0041ZZ
sliding pin bolts to the specified torque.

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection INFOID:0000000003811217

Cylinder Body
Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the cylinder if any abnormal
condition is detected.
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the member if any abnormal condition is
detected.
Piston
Check the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the piston if any abnormal condition is detected.
CAUTION:
A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pin Bolt, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing
Check the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots for rust, wear, cracks or damage. Replace the parts if any
abnormal condition is detected.
1. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
6. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body. Refer to BR-
7. Burnish contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing disc rotors, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mile-
age. Refer to BR-15, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
BR-44
General Specifications INFOID:0000000003811218
B
Unit: mm (in)
Cylinder bore diameter 57.2 (2.252) C

Front brake Pad length × width × thickness 126.0 × 46.0 × 11.0 (4.96 × 1.811 × 0.433)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness 296 × 26.0 (11.65 × 1.024)
Cylinder bore diameter 34.93 (1.3752) D
Rear brake Pad length × width × thickness 83.0 × 31.9 × 8.5 (3.268 × 1.256 × 0.335)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness 292 × 9.0 (11.50 × 0.354)
E
Master cylinder Cylinder bore diameter 23.8 (15/16)
Control valve Valve type Electric brake force distribution
Brake booster Diaphragm diameter 278 (10.94) BR
Recommended brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4
Brake Pedal INFOID:0000000003811219

G
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard H
Brake pedal height 191.7 – 201.7 (7.55 – 7.94)
Clearance between stopper rubber and stop lamp switch and ASCD brake switch threaded end 0.74 – 1.96 (0.0291 – 0.0772)
Brake pedal play 3.0 – 11.0 (0.118 – 0.433) I
Depressed brake pedal height
103 (4.06) or more
[Depressing 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning the engine ON]
J
Brake Booster INFOID:0000000003811220
Unit: mm (in)
K
Item Standard
Output rod length 30.4 – 30.6 (11.97 – 12.05)
Input rod length 126.5 (4.98) L
Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000003811221
M
Unit: mm (in)
Item Limit
Brake pad Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079)
N
Wear thickness 24.0 (0.945)
Disc rotor
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.040 (0.0016) or less
O
Rear Disc Brake INFOID:0000000003811222
Unit: mm (in)
P
Item Limit
Brake pad Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness 8.0 (0.315)
Disc rotor
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.050 (0.0020) or less
BR-45
BRAKES
SECTION
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
PB B
E
CONTENTS
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 2 PARKING BRAKE SHOE .................................. 7 PB
Exploded View .......................................................... 7
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ............................... 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7
Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 2 Inspection and Adjustment ....................................... 8 G
PARKING BRAKE SHOE ................................... 4 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Adjustment ................................................................ 4 (SDS) ............................................................ 10 H
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 5 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ............................ 5 (SDS) ................................................................. 10
Exploded View .......................................................... 5 Parking Drum Brake ................................................10 I
Removal and Installation ........................................... 5 Parking Brake Control .............................................10
Adjustment ................................................................ 6
J
PB-1
INSPECTION
Pedal Stroke
1. Operate the parking brake pedal with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb). Check that the pedal stroke is within
the specified number of notches. (Check it by listening to the clicks of the ratchet.)
Standard
Number of notches : Refer to PB-10, "Parking Brake Control".
2. When brake warning lamp turns ON, check that the pedal stroke is within the specified number of
notches. (Check it by listening to the clicks of the ratchet.)
Standard
Number of notches : Refer to PB-10, "Parking Brake Control".
Inspect Components
• Check each component for installation condition such as looseness.
• Check the device assembly for bend, damage and cracks. Replace if necessary.
• Check the cables for wear, damage and cracks. Replace if necessary.
• Check the parking brake switch, and replace it if necessary. Refer to BRC-41, "Diagnosis Procedure" (with-
out VDC), BRC-124, "Component Inspection" (with VDC).
ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove rear tires.
3. Release the parking brake pedal (1) by turning the adjusting nut
(2) with a deep socket wrench and loosening the cable.
JPFIB0051ZZ
4. Remove the adjusting hole plug from the disc rotor. Turn the
adjuster (1) in the direction (A) as shown in the figure using a
suitable tool until the disc rotor is locked.
5. Turn back the adjuster 5 or 6 notches from the locked position.
6. Rotate the disc rotor to check that there is no drag. Install the
adjusting hole plug.
7. Adjust the cable with the following procedure.
a. Operate the parking brake pedal with a force of 490 N (50 kg,
110 lb) for 10 strokes or more.
b. Adjust the parking brake pedal stroke by turning the adjusting JPFIB0002ZZ
nut with a deep socket wrench.
CAUTION:
Never reuse the adjusting nut if the nut is removed.
PB-2
c. Operate the parking brake pedal with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb). Check that the pedal stroke is within
the specified number of notches. (Check it by listening to the clicks of the ratchet.) A
Standard
Number of notches : Refer to PB-10, "Parking Brake Control". B
d. Rotate the disc rotor with the parking brake pedal released and check that there is no drag. Refer to PB-8,
"Inspection and Adjustment".
C
PB
PB-3
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to PB-2, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Perform parking brake break-in (drag on) operation by driving vehicle under the following conditions:
• Drive forward
• Vehicle speed: 40 km/h (25 MPH) set (constant and forward)
• Parking brake operating force: 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)
• Distance: 100 m (328 ft)
• Number of times: 1
CAUTION:
To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after
every break-in operation.
3. After the break-in procedure, check parking pedal stroke of parking brake.
CAUTION:
If it is out of the specification, adjust again. Refer to PB-2, "Inspection and Adjustment".
PB-4
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
B
PB
JPFIB0050GB J
1. Pin 2. Rear cable (RH) 3. Rear cable (LH)

4. Bracket 5. Return spring 6. Front cable
K
7. Parking brake switch 8. Stopper rubber 9. Return spring
10. Silencer 11. Device assembly 12. Pedal pad
13. Adjusting nut L

M
REMOVAL
N
3. Disconnect parking brake switch harness connector.
4. Remove adjusting nut and loosen front cable. O
5. Remove device assembly.
6. Remove rear ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-54, "REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Exploded View" (Without 7
inch display), VTL-112, "REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Exploded View" (with 7 inch display). P
7. Separate front cable from rear cable, and remove front cable and return spring.
8. Remove pin from toggle lever, and separate rear cable.
9. Remove rear cable mounting bolts and nuts, pull out rear cable from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, Install the reverse order of the removal.
• Never reuse the adjusting nut.
PB-5

Adjust the parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to PB-2, "Inspection and Adjustment".
PB-6
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
A
PB
G
JPFIB0046ZZ
1. Back plate 2. Parking brake shoe 3. Adjuster

4. Adjuster spring 5. Return spring 6. Anti-rattle spring
H
7. Retainer 8. Anti-rattle pin 9. Toggle lever
: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease.
I
REMOVAL J
WARNING:
Clean any dust from the parking brake shoes and back plates with a vacuum dust collector. Never
blow with compressed air. K
CAUTION: L
Parking brake completely in the released position.
3. If disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows:
a. Fix the disc rotor with wheel nuts and remove the adjusting hole plug. M
b. Using suitable tool, rotate adjuster (1) in direction (B) to retract
and loosen parking brake shoe.
4. Remove anti-rattle pins, retainers, anti-rattle spring, adjuster N
spring and return springs.
CAUTION:
Never drop the removed parts. O
5. Remove parking brake shoes, adjuster assembly and toggle
lever.
CAUTION: P
• The parking brake shoes for the front side are made of dif-
ferent materials from those for the rear side. Never misi- JPFIB0007ZZ
dentify them when removing.

• Never drop the removed parts.
INSTALLATION
• Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the back plate and brake shoe.
PB-7
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
CAUTION:
The parking brake shoes for the front side are made of different materials from those for the rear
side. Never misidentify them when removing and replacing.
• Assemble adjusters so that threaded part is expanded when rotat-
ing it in the direction shown by arrow.
A : For RH brake
B : For LH brake
: Vehicle front
: Adjuster expands
• Shorten adjuster by rotating it.

• When disassembling, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or
silicone-based grease to threads. JPFIB0009ZZ
• Check parking brake shoe sliding surface and drum inner surface
for grease. Wipe it off if it adhere on the surfaces.
INSPECTION
Brake Lining Thickness Inspection
• Check thickness (A) of brake lining.
Limit
A : Refer to PB-10, "Parking Drum Brake".
SBR021A
Drum Inner Diameter Inspection

• Check inner diameter (B) of drum.
Limit
B : Refer to PB-10, "Parking Drum Brake".
JPFIB0008ZZ
Other Inspections
• Check brake lining for excessive wear, damage, and peeling. Replace if necessary.
• Check parking brake shoe sliding surface for excessive wear and damage. Replace if necessary.
• Check anti-rattle pin and retainer for excessive wear, damage and rust. Replace if necessary.
• Check adjuster spring, anti-rattle spring and return springs for settling, excessive wear, damage, and rust.
Replace if necessary.
• Check adjuster for smoothness. Replace if necessary.
• Check toggle lever for excessive wear, damage and rust. Replace if necessary.
• Visually check inside of the drum for excessive wear, cracks, and damage with a pair of vernier calipers.
Replace if necessary.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjust the parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to PB-2, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Check a drag of the parking brake.
PB-8
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
CAUTION:
If any drag is found, inspection the rear disc brake. Refer to BR-42, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY A
: Disassembly and Assembly".
PB
PB-9
Parking Drum Brake INFOID:0000000003811320
Unit: mm (in)
Item Limit
Brake lining 1.5 (0.059)
Drum (disc of inner diameter) 172 (6.77)
Parking Brake Control INFOID:0000000003811321
Item Standard
Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)] 6 – 7 notches
Number of notches when brake warning lamp turns ON 1 notch
PB-10
BRAKES
SECTION
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
BRC B
E
CONTENTS
ABS C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM ........ 22 BRC
Description ...............................................................22
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 6 DTC Logic ................................................................22
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 6
Work Flow ................................................................. 6 C1110 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC
Diagnostic Work Sheet .............................................. 8 UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 24
H
DTC Logic ................................................................24
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................... 9 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................24
ABS ..................................................................... 9 C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYS- I
System Diagram ........................................................ 9 TEM ................................................................... 25
System Description ................................................... 9
Description ...............................................................25
Component Parts Location ...................................... 10
DTC Logic ................................................................25 J
Component Description ........................................... 10
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................25
EBD ....................................................................11 Component Inspection .............................................26
System Diagram ...................................................... 11 C1115 WHEEL SENSOR .................................. 27 K
Description ...............................................................27
Component Parts Location ...................................... 12 DTC Logic ................................................................27
Component Description ........................................... 12 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................27 L
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR Component Inspection .............................................29
AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)] ........13 C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH ........................... 30
CONSULT-III Function ............................................ 13 Description ...............................................................30 M
DTC Logic ................................................................30
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 16
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SEN- Component Inspection .............................................30 N
SOR ....................................................................16 C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL ..... 32
Description .............................................................. 16
Description ...............................................................32
DTC Logic ............................................................... 16 O
DTC Logic ................................................................32
Component Inspection ............................................ 18 Component Inspection .............................................33
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SEN- P
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL... 34
SOR ....................................................................19 Description ...............................................................34
Description .............................................................. 19 DTC Logic ................................................................34
DTC Logic ............................................................... 19 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................34
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 19 Component Inspection .............................................35
Component Inspection ............................................ 21
C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM .............. 36
BRC-1
Description .............................................................. 36 Precaution for Brake System .................................. 55
DTC Logic ............................................................... 36 Precaution for Brake Control ................................... 56
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36 Precautions for Harness Repair .............................. 56
Component Inspection ............................................ 37
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 57
U1000, U1002 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............... 38
Description .............................................................. 38 WHEEL SENSOR .............................................. 57
DTC Logic ............................................................... 38
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ........................................ 57
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ........... 57
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 39 FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Instal-
Description .............................................................. 39 lation ....................................................................... 57
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ........................................... 58
ABS WARNING LAMP ...................................... 40 REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ............. 58
Description .............................................................. 40 REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installa-
Component Function Check ................................... 40 tion .......................................................................... 58
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 40 SENSOR ROTOR .............................................. 59
BRAKE WARNING LAMP ................................. 41 FRONT SENSOR ROTOR ........................................ 59
Description .............................................................. 41 FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View ........... 59
Component Function Check ................................... 41 FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Instal-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 41 lation ....................................................................... 59
ECU DIAGNOSIS ........................................ 42 REAR SENSOR ROTOR ........................................... 59
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View ............. 59
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installa-
(CONTROL UNIT) .............................................. 42 tion .......................................................................... 59
Reference Value ..................................................... 42
Wiring Diagram - BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM - ... 44 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
Fail-Safe ................................................................. 47 (CONTROL UNIT) .............................................. 60
DTC No. Index ........................................................ 48 Exploded View ........................................................ 60
Removal and Installation ......................................... 60
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 49 VDC/TCS/ABS
EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 62
FREQUENCY ..................................................... 49
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 49 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 62
Work Flow ............................................................... 62
UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION .................. 50
Diagnostic Work Sheet ........................................... 65
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 66
THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG ............... 51
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 51 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 66
ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE .......... 52 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 52 CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 66
PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
SOUND OCCURS .............................................. 53 CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ..... 66
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53 ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
NEUTRAL POSITION ................................................ 66
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 54
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Description .............................................................. 54
NEUTRAL POSITION : Description ........................ 66
PRECAUTION ............................................. 55 ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Require-
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 55 ment ........................................................................ 66
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................ 68
SIONER" ................................................................. 55
VDC .................................................................... 68
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover... 55
BRC-2
System Diagram ...................................................... 68 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................94
System Description ................................................. 68 Component Inspection .............................................95 A
Component Parts Location ...................................... 69 Special Repair Requirement ....................................95
Component Description ........................................... 70
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR .................................. 96
TCS .....................................................................71 Description ...............................................................96 B
System Diagram ...................................................... 71 DTC Logic ................................................................96
System Description ................................................. 71 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................96
Component Parts Location ...................................... 72 Component Inspection .............................................98 C
Component Description ........................................... 73 Special Repair Requirement ....................................98
ABS ....................................................................74 C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH ........................... 99

D
System Diagram ...................................................... 74 Description ...............................................................99
System Description ................................................. 74 DTC Logic ................................................................99
Component Parts Location ...................................... 75 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................99
Component Description ........................................... 76 Component Inspection .............................................99 E
Special Repair Requirement .................................. 100
EBD ....................................................................77
System Diagram ...................................................... 77 C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL ... 101 BRC
System Description ................................................. 77 Description ............................................................. 101
Component Parts Location ...................................... 78 DTC Logic .............................................................. 101
Component Description ........................................... 79 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 101
Component Inspection ........................................... 102 G
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR Special Repair Requirement .................................. 102
AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)] ........80
CONSULT-III Function ............................................ 80 C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL. 103 H
Description ............................................................. 103
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 85 DTC Logic .............................................................. 103
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SEN- I
SOR ....................................................................85 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 104
Description .............................................................. 85
DTC Logic ............................................................... 85 C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL ................................. 105 J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 85 Description ............................................................. 105
Component Inspection ............................................ 87 DTC Logic .............................................................. 105
Special Repair Requirement ................................... 87 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105 K
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SEN-
SOR ....................................................................88 C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM ............ 106
Description .............................................................. 88 Description ............................................................. 106 L
DTC Logic ............................................................... 88 DTC Logic .............................................................. 106
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 88 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 106
Component Inspection ............................................ 90 Component Inspection ........................................... 107 M
Special Repair Requirement ................................... 90 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 107
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM .........91 C1142 PRESS SENSOR ................................. 108
Description .............................................................. 91 Description ............................................................. 108 N
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 108
Special Repair Requirement ................................... 92 Component Inspection ........................................... 108 O
C1110, C1153, C1170 ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) ..................93 C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............. 110
Description ............................................................. 110 P
DTC Logic ............................................................... 93
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 93 DTC Logic .............................................................. 110
Special Repair Requirement ................................... 93 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110
C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYS- Special Repair Requirement .................................. 111
TEM ....................................................................94
Description .............................................................. 94 C1144 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............. 112
BRC-3
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................112 VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP .......................... 130
Special Repair Requirement ..................................112 Description ............................................................ 130
Component Function Check ................................. 130
C1145, C1146 YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR . 113 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 130
Description .............................................................113
DTC Logic ..............................................................113 SLIP INDICATOR LAMP .................................. 131
Component Inspection ...........................................114 Component Function Check ................................. 131
Special Repair Requirement ..................................115 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 131
C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH .......... 116 ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 132
Description .............................................................116
DTC Logic ..............................................................116 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................116 (CONTROL UNIT) ............................................. 132
Component Inspection ...........................................117 Reference Value ................................................... 132
Special Repair Requirement ..................................117 Wiring Diagram - BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM - . 136
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 139
C1164, C1165 CV SYSTEM ............................ 118 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 140
Description .............................................................118
DTC Logic ..............................................................118 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 142
Component Inspection ...........................................119 EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION
Special Repair Requirement ..................................119 FREQUENCY .................................................... 142
C1166, C1167 SV SYSTEM ............................. 120
Description .............................................................120 UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION ................. 143
DTC Logic ..............................................................120 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143
Component Inspection ...........................................121 THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG .............. 144
Special Repair Requirement ..................................121 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 144
U1000, U1002 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............. 122 ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ......... 145
Description .............................................................122 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145
DTC Logic ..............................................................122 PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION
SOUND OCCURS ............................................. 146
Special Repair Requirement ..................................122
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 123
VEHICLE JERKS DURING VDC/TCS/ABS
Description .............................................................123
CONTROL ........................................................ 147
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ............................ 124
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 148
Description ............................................................ 148
Component Inspection ...........................................124 PRECAUTION ........................................... 149
VDC OFF SWITCH .......................................... 126 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 149
Description .............................................................126
Component Function Check ..................................126 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................126 SIONER" ............................................................... 149
Component Inspection ...........................................127
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 149
ABS WARNING LAMP .................................... 128 Precaution for Brake System ................................ 149
Description .............................................................128 Precaution for Brake Control ................................. 150
Component Function Check ..................................128 Precautions for Harness Repair ............................ 150
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .............................. 151
BRAKE WARNING LAMP ............................... 129
WHEEL SENSOR ............................................. 151
Description .............................................................129
Component Function Check ..................................129 FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ...................................... 151
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................129 FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ......... 151
BRC-4
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Instal- REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installa-
lation ...................................................................... 151 tion ......................................................................... 153 A
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ......................................... 152 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ........... 152 (CONTROL UNIT) ........................................... 154
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installa- B
Exploded View ....................................................... 154
tion ........................................................................ 152 Removal and Installation ....................................... 154
SENSOR ROTOR ............................................. 153 YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR ........................ 156 C
Exploded View ....................................................... 156
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR ....................................... 153
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View ......... 153
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Instal- STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 157 D
lation ...................................................................... 153 Exploded View ....................................................... 157
REAR SENSOR ROTOR ......................................... 153
E
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View ........... 153
BRC
BRC-5
< BASIC INSPECTION > [ABS]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSFIA0239GB
DETAILED FLOW
BRC-6
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER A

the incident/malfunction occurred) using the diagnosis work sheet. Refer to BRC-8, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
B
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
C
Check the DTC display with the self-diagnosis function.
Is there any DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3. D
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.PERFORM THE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the diagnosis applicable to the displayed DTC. Refer to BRC-48, "DTC No. Index". E
>> GO TO 7.
BRC
4.CHECK THE SYMPTOM THAT IS NOT CONSIDERED A SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Check that the symptom is a normal operation that is not considered a system malfunction. Refer to BRC-54,
"Description". G
Is the symptom a normal operation?
NO >> GO TO 5. H
5.CHECK THE WARNING LAMP FOR ILLUMINATION
Check that the warning lamp illuminate.
• ABS warning lamp: Refer to BRC-40, "Description". I
• Brake warning lamp: Refer to BRC-41, "Description".
Is ON/OFF timing normal?
YES >> GO TO 6. J
NO >> GO TO 2.
6.PERFORM THE DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM K
Perform the diagnosis applicable to the symptom.
>> GO TO 7. L
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.
M
>> GO TO 8.
8.MEMORY CLEAR N
Perform self-diagnosis memory clear.
O
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
Perform the self-diagnosis again, and check that the malfunction is repaired completely. P
Is no other DTC present and the repair completed?
NO >> GO TO 3.
BRC-7
SFIA3264E
BRC-8
ABS
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [ABS]
ABS
B
BRC
JSFIA0257GB J
• Anti-Lock Braking System detects wheel revolution while braking, electronically controls braking force, and K
prevents wheel locking during sudden braking. It improves handling stability and maneuverability for avoid-
ing obstacles.
• Electrical system diagnosis by CONSULT-III is available. L
BRC-9
ABS
JSFIA0258ZZ
1. ABS warning lamp 2. Brake warning lamp 3. ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit)
4. Front wheel sensor 5. Rear wheel sensor
A. Combination meter B. Engine room right side C. Steering knuckle

D. Rear axle
Component parts Reference

Pump
BRC-25, "Description"
Motor
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Actuator relay (main relay) BRC-36, "Description"
Solenoid valve BRC-32, "Description"
Wheel sensor BRC-16, "Description"
ABS warning lamp BRC-40, "Description"
Brake warning lamp BRC-41, "Description"
BRC-10
EBD
EBD
A
BRC
I
JSFIA0257GB

J
• Electric Brake force Distribution is a following function. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) detects
subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels during braking. Then is electronically controls the rear
braking force (brake fluid pressure) to reducing and reduces rear wheel slippage. Accordingly it improves K
vehicle stability.
• Electrical system diagnosis by CONSULT-III is available.
L
BRC-11
EBD
JSFIA0258ZZ
1. ABS warning lamp 2. Brake warning lamp 3. ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit)
4. Front wheel sensor 5. Rear wheel sensor
A. Combination meter B. Engine room right side C. Steering knuckle

D. Rear axle

Pump
Motor
Solenoid valve BRC-32, "Description"
BRC-12
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
A
UNIT)]
B
FUNCTION
C
Self diagnostic result Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly.
D
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) can be read.
CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and
Active test
also shifts some parameters in a specified range.
E
ECU identification ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

BRC
Operation Procedure
Before performing the self-diagnosis, start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approxi-
mately 1 minute.
G
Display Item List
How to Erase Self-diagnosis Results H
After erasing DTC memory, start the engine and drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approxi-
mately 1 minute as the final inspection, and make sure that the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp
turn OFF.
CAUTION: I
If memory cannot be erased, perform applicable diagnosis.
NOTE:
• When the wheel sensor malfunctions, after inspecting the wheel sensor system, ABS warning lamp and J
brake warning lamp will not turn OFF even when the system is normal unless the vehicle is driven at approx-
imately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
• Brake warning lamp will turn ON in case of parking brake operation (when switch is ON) or in case of brake
K
fluid level switch operation (when brake fluid is insufficient).
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List L
×: Applicable : Optional item
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor item (Unit) Remarks M
ECU INPUT
MAIN SIGNALS
SIGNALS
FR LH SENSOR
× × Wheel speed calculated by front LH wheel sensor signal N
[km/h (MPH)]
FR RH SENSOR
× × Wheel speed calculated by front RH wheel sensor signal
[km/h (MPH)]
RR LH SENSOR O
× × Wheel speed calculated by rear LH wheel sensor signal
[km/h (MPH)]
RR RH SENSOR
× × Wheel speed calculated by rear RH wheel sensor signal
[km/h (MPH)] P
STOP LAMP SW
× × Stop lamp switch signal status
(On/Off)
BATTERY VOLT Battery voltage supplied to the ABS actuator and electric
× ×
(V) unit (control unit)
BRC-13
UNIT)]
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor item (Unit) ECU INPUT Remarks
MAIN SIGNALS
SIGNALS
FR RH IN SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
FR RH OUT SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
FR LH IN SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
FR LH OUT SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
Operation status of each solenoid valve
RR RH IN SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
RR RH OUT SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
RR LH IN SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
RR LH OUT SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
MOTOR RELAY
× Motor and motor relay operation
(On/Off)
ACTUATOR RLY
× Actuator relay operation
(On/Off) (Note 1)
ABS WARN LAMP
× ABS warning lamp
(On/Off)
EBD WARN LAMP
Brake warning lamp
(On/Off)
EBD SIGNAL
EBD operation
(On/Off)
ABS SIGNAL
ABS operation
(On/Off)
EBD FAIL SIG
EBD fail-safe signal
(On/Off)
ABS FAIL SIG
ABS fail-safe signal
(On/Off)
NOTE:
1: A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an
operation for checking.
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
• Do not perform active test while driving vehicle.
• Make sure to completely bleed air from brake system.
• The active test cannot be started when ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp are ON.
• ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp are ON during active test.
NOTE:
• When active test is performed while depressing the pedal, the pedal depression amount will change. This is
normal. (Only solenoid valve and ABS motor.)
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed 10 seconds after operation start.
• After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again.
Test Item
ABS SOLENOID VALVE

• Touch “Up”, “Keep” and “Down”. Then use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve operates as shown in
the table below.
BRC-14
UNIT)]
Display (Note) A
Test item Display item
Up Keep Down
FR RH IN SOL Off On On
FR RH SOL B
FR RH OUT SOL Off Off On*
FR LH IN SOL Off On On
FR LH SOL
FR LH OUT SOL Off Off On* C
RR RH IN SOL Off On On
RR RH SOL
RR RH OUT SOL Off Off On*
RR LH IN SOL Off On On D
RR LH SOL
RR LH OUT SOL Off Off On*
*: On for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then Off.
E
NOTE:
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an
BRC
ABS MOTOR
• Touch “On” and “Off” on screen. Make sure motor relay and actuator relay operates as shown in table below.
G
Display
On Off
MOTOR RELAY On Off H
ABS MOTOR
ACTUATOR RLY (Note) On On
NOTE:
I
ECU IDENTIFICATION J
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
BRC-15
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [ABS]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
When the sensor rotor rotates, the magnetic field changes. Wheel sensor converts the magnetic field changes
to current signals (rectangular wave) and transmits them to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition Possible cause

Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open. Or when the sen-
C1101 RR RH SENSOR-1
sor power voltage is outside the standard.
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open. Or when the sen- • Harness or connector
C1102 RR LH SENSOR-1
sor power voltage is outside the standard. • Wheel sensor
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open. Or when the • ABS actuator and electric unit
C1103 FR RH SENSOR-1 (control unit)
sensor power voltage is outside the standard.
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open. Or when the
C1104 FR LH SENSOR-1

1.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1101”, “C1102”, “C1103” or “C1104” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis. Refer to BRC-16, "Diagnosis Procedure".
CAUTION:
Do not check between wheel sensor terminals.
1.CHECK TIRES
Check air pressure, wear and size. Refer to WT-5, "Tire Air Pressure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR
• Check sensor rotor for damage.
• Check wheel sensor for damage, disconnection or looseness.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair wheel sensor mount or replace sensor rotor. Then perform the self-diagnosis.
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
3. Disconnect malfunctioning wheel sensor connector.
4. Check terminal to see if it is deformed, disconnected, looseness, etc.
YES >> GO TO 4.
BRC-16
4.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS A

1. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel
sensor harness connector. (Also check continuity when steering wheel is turned right and left and when
sensor harness inside the wheel house is moved.)
B
Measurement terminal for power supply circuit
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
9 E39 (Front RH)
16 E22 (Front LH)
E34 1 Existed D
8 C4 (Rear RH)
6 C3 (Rear LH)
Measurement terminal for signal circuit E

Continuity
10 E39 (Front RH) BRC
5 E22 (Front LH)
E34 2 Existed
19 C4 (Rear RH)
G
17 C3 (Rear LH)
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
H
Continuity
9, 10 I
16, 5
E34 E34 1, 4 Not existed
8, 19
J
6, 17
YES >> GO TO 5. K
5.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
L
1. Connect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine. M
3. Check the voltage between wheel sensor harness connector and ground.
Wheel sensor N
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E39 (Front RH)
O
E22 (Front LH)
1 Ground 8 V or more
C4 (Rear RH)
C3 (Rear LH) P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK DATA MONITOR
2. Connect each wheel sensor connector.
BRC-17
3. Check wheel sensor signal. Refer to BRC-18, "Component Inspection".
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).

On “DATA MONITOR”, select “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”, and “RR RH SEN-
SOR”, and check the vehicle speed.
Wheel sensor Condition Vehicle speed (DATA MONITOR)

Vehicle stopped 0 [km/h (MPH)]
FR LH SENSOR Vehicle running Nearly matches the speedometer display
(Note) (± 10% or less)
FR RH SENSOR Vehicle running Nearly matches the speedometer display
RR LH SENSOR Vehicle running Nearly matches the speedometer display
RR RH SENSOR Vehicle running Nearly matches the speedometer display
NOTE:
Confirm tire pressure is normal.
NO >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-16, "Diagnosis Procedure".
BRC-18
A
When the sensor rotor rotates, the magnetic field changes. Wheel sensor converts the magnetic field changes B
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition Possible cause D

When the circuit in the rear RH wheel sensor is short-cir-
cuited. Or when the distance between the wheel sensor
and sensor rotor is too large and the sensor pulse cannot E
be recognized by the control unit.
When the circuit in the rear LH wheel sensor is short-cir-
C1106 RR LH SENSOR-2 BRC
and sensor rotor is too large and the sensor pulse cannot • Harness or connector
be recognized by the control unit. • Wheel sensor
When the circuit in the front RH wheel sensor is short-cir- • ABS actuator and electric unit
cuited. Or when the distance between the wheel sensor (control unit) G
C1107 FR RH SENSOR-2
and sensor rotor is too large and the sensor pulse cannot
When the circuit in the front LH wheel sensor is short-cir- H
I
1. Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. J
K
L
CAUTION:
M
1.CHECK TIRES
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR O

P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
BRC-19
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS
Continuity
9 E39 (Front RH)
16 E22 (Front LH)
E34 1 Existed
8 C4 (Rear RH)
6 C3 (Rear LH)
Measurement terminal for signal circuit

Continuity
10 E39 (Front RH)
5 E22 (Front LH)
E34 2 Existed
19 C4 (Rear RH)
17 C3 (Rear LH)

Continuity
9, 10
16, 5
8, 19
6, 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Wheel sensor
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E39 (Front RH)
E22 (Front LH)
C4 (Rear RH)
C3 (Rear LH)
YES >> GO TO 6.
BRC-20
6.CHECK DATA MONITOR A

B
C
D
SOR”, and check the vehicle speed. E

Vehicle stopped 0 [km/h (MPH)] BRC
G
H
I
J
NOTE:
L
BRC-21
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
Supplies electric power to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

BATTERY VOLTAGE When the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
C1109 • ABS actuator and electric unit
[ABNORMAL] power supply voltage is lower than normal.
(control unit)

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
Is DTC “C1109” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-22, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, etc.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
2. Check 30A fusible link (G).
3. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and battery
positive terminal.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
Battery positive
E34 3 Existed
terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. (Check ABS earth bolt for tightness and corrosion.)
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.
BRC-22
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E34 Ground Existed B
4
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). C
BRC
BRC-23
C1110 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
C1110 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator ABS actuator and electric unit
C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE
and electric unit (control unit). (control unit)

1.REPLACE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

CAUTION:
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) when self-diagnostic result shows items other
than those applicable.
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
BRC-24
C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYSTEM
A
PUMP B
The pump returns the brake fluid stored in the reservoir to the master cylinder by reducing the pressure.
MOTOR
The motor drives the pump according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control C
unit).
MOTOR RELAY
D
Activates or deactivates motor according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit).
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003766749 E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

BRC
During the actuator motor operating with ON, when the
actuator motor turns OFF, or when the control line for ac- G
tuator motor relay is open. • Harness or connector
C1111 PUMP MOTOR • ABS actuator and electric unit
During the actuator motor operating with OFF, when the (control unit)
actuator motor turns ON, or when the control line for relay
is shorted to ground.
H

1.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE I
J
K
1.CHECK CONNECTOR L
3. Check terminal for deformation, disconnect, looseness, etc. M
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.
O

— Voltage
Connector Terminal P
YES >> GO TO 3.
BRC-25

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E34 Ground Existed
4
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST

1. On “ACTIVE TEST”, select “ABS MOTOR”.
2. Touch “On” and “Off” on screen. Make sure motor relay and actuator relay operates as shown in table
below.
Display
On Off
MOTOR RELAY On Off
ABS MOTOR
NOTE:
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is
an operation for checking.
BRC-26
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
A
When the sensor rotor rotates, the magnetic field changes. Wheel sensor converts the magnetic field changes B
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

ABS SENSOR • Wheel sensor
C1115 When wheel sensor input signal is malfunctioning.
[ABNORMAL SIGNAL] • ABS actuator and electric unit E
(control unit)

1.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE BRC
G
NO >> INSPECTION END H
CAUTION: I
1.CHECK TIRES
Check air pressure, wear and size. Refer to WT-5, "Tire Air Pressure". J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K

• Check sensor rotor for damage. L
YES >> GO TO 3. M
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
N
4. Check terminal to see if it is deformed, disconnected, looseness, etc. O
YES >> GO TO 4.
BRC-27
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
Continuity
9 E39 (Front RH)
16 E22 (Front LH)
E34 1 Existed
8 C4 (Rear RH)
6 C3 (Rear LH)

Continuity
10 E39 (Front RH)
5 E22 (Front LH)
E34 2 Existed
19 C4 (Rear RH)
17 C3 (Rear LH)

Continuity
9, 10
16, 5
8, 19
6, 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
CAUTION:
Wheel sensor
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E39 (Front RH)
E22 (Front LH)
C4 (Rear RH)
C3 (Rear LH)
YES >> GO TO 6.
BRC-28
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
A
SOR”, and check the vehicle speed. B

C
D
(Note) (± 10% or less) E
(Note) (± 10% or less) BRC
(Note) (± 10% or less) G
NOTE:
I
BRC-29
C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH
The stop lamp switch transmits the stop lamp switch signal (ON/OFF) to the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C1116 STOP LAMP SW When stop lamp switch circuit is open.
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to BRC-30, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

— Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
Brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
E34 20 Ground
Brake pedal is released Approx. 0 V

BRC-30
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. A
3. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch B

Terminal
Release stop lamp switch
Existed
(When brake pedal is depressed.) C
1−2
Push stop lamp switch
Not existed
(When brake pedal is released.)
E
BRC
BRC-31
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL
The solenoid valve increases, holds or decreases the fluid pressure of each brake caliper according to the sig-
nals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the control unit detects a malfunction in the front
C1120 FR LH IN ABS SOL
LH inlet solenoid circuit.
C1122 FR RH IN ABS SOL
RH inlet solenoid circuit. ABS actuator and electric unit
When the control unit detects a malfunction in the rear LH (control unit)
C1124 RR LH IN ABS SOL
inlet solenoid circuit.
When the control unit detects a malfunction in the rear
C1126 RR RH IN ABS SOL
RH inlet solenoid circuit.

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SOLENOID AND ACTUATOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SOLENOID AND ACTUATOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
BRC-32
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
4
D
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST
1. Select each test menu item on “ACTIVE TEST”. E
2. On the display, touch “Up”, “Keep” and “Down”, and check that the system operates as shown in the table
below.
Display (Note) BRC

Up Keep Down
FR RH SOL G
FR LH SOL
FR LH OUT SOL Off Off On* H
RR RH SOL
I
RR LH IN SOL Off On On
RR LH SOL
*: On for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then Off. J
NOTE:
an operation for checking. K
NO >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-32, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
BRC-33
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL
The solenoid valve increases, holds or decreases the fluid pressure of each brake caliper according to the sig-
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C1121 FR LH OUT ABS SOL
LH outlet solenoid circuit.
C1123 FR RH OUT ABS SOL
RH outlet solenoid circuit. ABS actuator and electric unit
C1125 RR LH OUT ABS SOL
outlet solenoid circuit.
C1127 RR RH OUT ABS SOL
RH outlet solenoid circuit.

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 2.

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
BRC-34
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
4
D
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST
1. Select each test menu item on “ACTIVE TEST”. E
below.
Display (Note) BRC

Up Keep Down
FR RH SOL G
FR LH SOL
FR LH OUT SOL Off Off On* H
RR RH SOL
I
RR LH SOL
*: On for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then Off. J
NOTE:
an operation for checking. K
NO >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-34, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
BRC-35
C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM
Activates or deactivates each solenoid valve according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

During the actuator relay operating with OFF, when the
actuator relay turns ON, or when the control line for the
relay is shorted to the ground. • Harness or connector
C1140 ACTUATOR RLY • ABS actuator and electric unit
During the actuator relay operating with ON, when the (control unit)
relay is open.

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 2.

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E34 Ground Existed
4
BRC-36
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). A
B
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST
1. On “ACTIVE TEST”, select “ABS MOTOR”. C
below.
D
Display
On Off
MOTOR RELAY On Off E
ABS MOTOR
NOTE:
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is BRC
BRC-37
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is not
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2
seconds or more. • CAN communication line
When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is not (control unit)
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN) transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2
seconds or less.

Is DTC “U1000” or “U1002” detected?
1.PERFORM ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
BRC-38
A
Supplies power to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). B

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY C
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground. D

— Voltage E
Connector Terminal
E34 18 Ground Approx. 0 V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON. BRC
CAUTION:
G

— Voltage
Connector Terminal H
YES >> GO TO 2. I
NO >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY J
K
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E34 3 Ground Battery voltage L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit. M
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND

Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground. N

— Continuity
Connector Terminal O
1
E34 Ground Existed
4
P
BRC-39
ABS WARNING LAMP
ABS WARNING LAMP
×: ON –: OFF
Condition ABS warning lamp

Ignition switch OFF –
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ×
1 second later after turning ignition switch ON –
ABS function is malfunctioning. ×
EBD function is malfunctioning. ×
1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP OPERATION

Check that the lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON.
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check items displayed by self-diagnosis.
Check if the indication and operation of combination meter are normal. Refer to MWI-32, "Diagnosis Descrip-
tion".
NO >> Repair or replace combination meter.
BRC-40
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
A
×: ON –: OFF B
Condition Brake warning lamp (Note 1)
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON × (Note 2) C
1 second later after turning ignition switch ON × (Note 2)
D
NOTE:
• 1: Brake warning lamp will turn on in case of parking brake operation (when switch is ON) or of brake fluid level switch operation
(when brake fluid is insufficient). E
• 2: After starting the engine, brake warning lamp is turned off.
BRC
1.BRAKE WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK 1
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
H
Check that the brake warning lamp in the combination meter turns ON/OFF correctly when operating the park-
ing brake pedal. I
NO >> Check parking brake switch. J
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH K
ing brake pedal.
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check parking brake switch. M
YES >> GO TO 3.
O
tion". P
BRC-41
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [ABS]
ECU DIAGNOSIS

CAUTION:
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short-circuited.
Data monitor
Monitor item Display content Reference value in
Condition
normal operation
Wheel sensor calculated by front LH Nearly matches the
FR LH SENSOR Vehicle running
wheel sensor signal is displayed speedometer dis-
(Note 1)
play (± 10% or less)
Wheel sensor calculated by front RH Nearly matches the
FR RH SENSOR Vehicle running
(Note 1)
Wheel sensor calculated by rear LH Nearly matches the
RR LH SENSOR Vehicle running
(Note 1)
Wheel sensor calculated by rear RH Nearly matches the
RR RH SENSOR Vehicle running
(Note 1)
When brake pedal is depressed On
STOP LAMP SW Stop lamp switch signal status
When brake pedal is not depressed Off
Battery voltage supplied to the ABS ac-
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON 10 – 16 V
tuator and electric unit (control unit)
Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“AC-
On
TIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III)
Operation status of each solenoid
FR RH IN SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
active and actuator relay is active (igni- Off
tion switch ON)
On
FR RH OUT SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
On
FR LH IN SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
On
FR LH OUT SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
BRC-42
Data monitor
Monitor item Display content A
Reference value in
Condition
normal operation
On B
RR RH IN SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON) C
On
RR RH OUT SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not D
valve
tion switch ON)
Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“AC- E
On
RR LH IN SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
BRC

On
Operation status of each solenoid G
RR LH OUT SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
When the motor relay and motor are op- H
On
erating
MOTOR RELAY Motor and motor relay operation
When the motor relay and motor are not
Off
operating I
ACTUATOR RLY When the actuator relay is operating On
Actuator relay operation
(Note 2) When the actuator relay is not operating Off
J
ABS warning lamp When ABS warning lamp is ON On
ABS WARN LAMP
(Note 3) When ABS warning lamp is OFF Off
Brake warning lamp When brake warning lamp is ON On K

EBD WARN LAMP
(Note 3) When brake warning lamp is OFF Off
EBD is active On
EBD SIGNAL EBD operation L
EBD is inactive Off
ABS is active On
ABS SIGNAL ABS operation
ABS is inactive Off M
In EBD fail-safe On
EBD FAIL SIG EBD fail-safe signal
EBD is normal Off
In ABS fail-safe On N
ABS FAIL SIG ABS fail-safe signal
ABS is normal Off
NOTE:
O
• 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
• 2: A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an
• 3: On and off timing for warning lamp and indicator lamp. P
- ABS warning lamp: Refer to BRC-40, "Description".
- Brake warning lamp: Refer to BRC-41, "Description".
BRC-43
Wiring Diagram - BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003766849
JCFWM0154GB
BRC-44
BRC
JCFWM0155GB
BRC-45
JCFWM0156GB
BRC-46
BRC
JCFWM0157GB
P
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000003766850
ABS, EBD SYSTEM

If ABS malfunction electrically, ABS warning lamp will turn on. If EBD malfunction electrically, brake warning
lamp and ABS warning lamp will turn on. Simultaneously, the ABS become one of the following conditions of
the fail-safe function.
BRC-47
• For malfunction of ABS, only the EBD is activated and the condition of vehicle is the same condition of vehi-
cles without ABS system.
NOTE:
ABS self-diagnosis sound may be heard. That is a normal condition because a self-diagnosis for “Ignition
switch ON” and “The first starting” are being performed.
• For malfunction of EBD, EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of vehicle is the same as the
condition of vehicles without ABS, EBD system.
DTC No. Index INFOID:0000000003766851
DTC Items (CONSULT screen terms) Reference

BRC-16, "DTC Logic"
BRC-19, "DTC Logic"
C1109 BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] BRC-22, "DTC Logic"
C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE BRC-24, "DTC Logic"
C1111 PUMP MOTOR BRC-25, "DTC Logic"
C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] BRC-27, "DTC Logic"
C1116 STOP LAMP SW BRC-30, "DTC Logic"
C1120 FR LH IN ABS SOL BRC-32, "DTC Logic"
C1121 FR LH OUT ABS SOL BRC-34, "DTC Logic"
C1122 FR RH IN ABS SOL BRC-32, "DTC Logic"
C1123 FR RH OUT ABS SOL BRC-34, "DTC Logic"
C1124 RR LH IN ABS SOL BRC-32, "DTC Logic"
C1125 RR LH OUT ABS SOL BRC-34, "DTC Logic"
C1126 RR RH IN ABS SOL BRC-32, "DTC Logic"
C1127 RR RH OUT ABS SOL BRC-34, "DTC Logic"
C1140 ACTUATOR RLY BRC-36, "DTC Logic"
BRC-38, "DTC Logic"
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN)
BRC-48
EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION FREQUENCY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [ABS]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
1.CHECK START
Check front and rear brake force distribution using a brake tester. Refer to BR-45, "General Specifications". C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check brake system. D
2.CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLE
Make sure that there is no excessive play in the front and rear axles. E
• Front: Refer to FAX-6, "Inspection".
• Rear: Refer to RAX-3, "Inspection".
BRC
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
3.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR G
• Wheel sensor installation for damage.
• Sensor rotor installation for damage. H
• Wheel sensor connector connection.
• Wheel sensor harness inspection.
I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> • Replace wheel sensor or sensor rotor.
• Repair harness.
J
4.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP DISPLAY
Make sure that the ABS warning lamp is turned off after the ignition switch is turned ON or when driving.
Is the ABS warning lamp illuminated? K
YES >> Perform self-diagnosis.
NO >> Normal
L
BRC-49
UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION
1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE

Check brake pedal stroke. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the stroke too large?
YES >> • Bleed air from brake tube and hose. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
• Check brake pedal, brake booster, and master cylinder for mount play, looseness, brake system
fluid leakage, etc.
- Brake pedal: Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
- Brake booster: Refer to BR-12, "Inspection".
- Brake master cylinder: Refer to BR-11, "Inspection".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUNCTION
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS. Check if braking force is
normal in this condition. Connect connector after inspection.
YES >> Normal
NO >> Check brake system.
BRC-50
THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG
A
CAUTION: B
The stopping distance on slippery road surfaces might be longer when the ABS is operating than
when the ABS is not operating.
1.CHECK FUNCTION C
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deacti-
vate ABS. In this condition, check stopping distance. After inspection, connect connector.
YES >> Normal
E
BRC
BRC-51
ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
CAUTION:
ABS does not operate when speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or lower.
Make sure that the ABS warning lamp turns OFF after ignition switch is turned ON or when driving.
YES >> Normal
NO >> Perform self-diagnosis.
BRC-52
PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION SOUND OCCURS
A
CAUTION: B
Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly
depressed (just place a foot on it). However, this is normal.
• When shifting gears
• When driving on slippery road C
• During cornering at high speed
• When passing over bumps or grooves [at approximately 50 mm (1.97 in) or more]
• When pulling away just after starting engine [at approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH) or higher] D
1.SYMPTOM CHECK 1
Check that there are pedal vibrations when the engine is started.
E
Do vibrations occur?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspect the brake pedal.
BRC
2.SYMPTOM CHECK 2
Check that there are ABS operation noises when the engine is started.
Do the operation noises occur? G
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.SYMPTOM CHECK 3 H
Check symptoms when electrical component (headlamps, etc.) switches are operated.
Do symptoms occur? I
YES >> Check if there is a radio, antenna, antenna lead wire, or wiring close to the control unit. If there is,
move it farther away.
NO >> Normal J
BRC-53
Symptom Result
Slight vibrations are felt on the brake pedal and the operation noises occur, when ABS is activated. This is a normal condi-
Stopping distance is longer than that of vehicles without ABS when the vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or tion due to the ABS acti-
snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. vation.
This is a normal, and it is

The brake pedal vibrates and motor operation noises occur from the engine room, after the engine starts and
caused by the ABS op-
just after the vehicle starts.
eration check.
BRC-54
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [ABS]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
BRC
connectors.
G
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. H
PIIB3706J
K
WARNING: L
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
• Only use “DOT 3” or “DOT 4” brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off M
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil. They may damage rubber parts and cause improper
operation. N
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a flare
nut torque wrench (A).
• Always conform the specified tightening torque when installing the O
brake pipes.
• Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is
detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction is P
detected, replace part with a new one.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) connector or the battery negative terminal
before performing the work.
JPFIA0061ZZ
BRC-55
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [ABS]
Precaution for Brake Control INFOID:0000000003766861
• When starting engine or when starting vehicle just after starting engine, brake pedal may vibrate or motor
operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is normal condition.
• When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer
(what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for estimate causes before starting diagnos-
tic servicing. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and oil
leaks.
• If tire size and type are used in an improper combination, or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts,
stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
• ABS might be out of order or malfunctions by putting a radio (wiring inclusive), an antenna and a lead-in wire
near the control unit.
• If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits, and improper wiring.
Precautions for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000003859437
COMMUNICATION LINE
• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
SKIB8766E
• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.

NOTE:
Bypass connection may cause communication error as spliced
wires that are separate from the main line or twisted lines lose
noise immunity.
• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected
on the shield lines of communication line.
SKIB8767E
BRC-56
WHEEL SENSOR
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [ABS]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
WHEEL SENSOR
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
B
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003766865
BRC
J
JSFIA0221GB
1. Front LH wheel sensor 2. Front LH wheel sensor connector K

: Vehicle front
Refer to GI section GI-4, "Components" for symbol marks in the figure.
L
NOTE:
The above figure shows left side. Right side is the mirror image.
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003766866
M
REMOVAL
Be careful with the following when removing sensor. N
CAUTION:
• Do not twist sensor harness as much as possible, when removing it. Pull sensors out without pulling
sensor harness. O
• Be careful to avoid damaging sensor edges or rotor teeth. Remove wheel sensor first before remov-
ing front or rear wheel hub. This is to avoid damage to sensor wiring and loss of sensor function.
INSTALLATION P
Be careful with the following when installing wheel sensor. Tighten installation bolts to the specified torques.
Refer to BRC-57, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• When installing, make sure there is no foreign material such as iron chips on and in the mounting
hole of the wheel sensor. Make sure no foreign material has been caught in the sensor rotor. Remove
any foreign material and clean the mount.
BRC-57
WHEEL SENSOR
• Completely push in rubber grommets of strut bracket and body bracket until they lock when install-
ing wheel sensor so that the wheel sensor harness will not be twisted. Install grommet groove onto
bracket with orange line on the harness facing bracket opening (mounting hole). There should be no
twists in the harness when installed.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003766867
JSFIA0222GB
1. Rear LH wheel sensor connector 2. Rear LH wheel sensor
: Vehicle front
NOTE:
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003766868
REMOVAL
Be careful with the following when removing sensor.
CAUTION:
sensor harness.
INSTALLATION
Refer to BRC-58, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
When installing, make sure there is no foreign material such as iron chips on and in the mounting hole
of the wheel sensor. Make sure no foreign material has been caught in the sensor rotor. Remove any
foreign material and clean the mount.
BRC-58
SENSOR ROTOR
SENSOR ROTOR
A
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003766869
B
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003766870
C
REMOVAL
Sensor rotor cannot be disassembled. Remove the sensor rotor together with hub bearing assembly. Refer to
FAX-8, "Exploded View". D
INSTALLATION
Sensor rotor cannot be disassembled. Install the sensor rotor together with hub bearing assembly. Refer to E
REAR SENSOR ROTOR
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003766871
BRC
Refer to RAX-4, "Exploded View".

G
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003766872
REMOVAL
H
RAX-4, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION I
Sensor rotor cannot be disassembled. Install the sensor rotor together with hub bearing assembly. Refer to
J
BRC-59
JSFIA0223GB
1. ABS actuator and electric unit (control 2. Bushing 3. Bracket

unit)
A. From master cylinder secondary side B. From master cylinder primary side C. To front LH brake caliper
D. To rear RH brake caliper E. To rear LH brake caliper F. To front RH brake caliper
: Vehicle front
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before servicing, disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal.
• To remove brake tube, use a flare nut wrench to prevent flare nuts and brake tube from being dam-
aged. To install, use flare nut torque wrench.
• Do not apply excessive impact to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), such as dropping it.
• Do not remove and install actuator by holding harness.
• After work is completed, bleed air from brake tube. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
3. Loosen brake tube flare nuts, then remove brake tubes from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
4. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) bracket mounting nuts.
5. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BRC-60
aged. To install, use flare nut torque wrench. A
B
• After installing harness connector in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), make sure
connector is securely locked.
Install ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) as per the follow-
ing steps. C
1. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt (1) because the bracket (2) is
temporarily being hold.
2. Tighten mounting bolt (3) while holding the bracket. D
3. Tighten mounting bolts to the specified torque in the order of (4),
(1).
E
JSFIA0271ZZ
BRC
BRC-61
< BASIC INSPECTION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
BASIC INSPECTION
PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS

If steering angle sensor, steering system parts, suspension system parts, ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit) or tires have been replaced, or if wheel alignment has been adjusted, be sure to adjust neutral posi-
tion of steering angle sensor before driving. Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
BRC-62
OVERALL SEQUENCE
A
BRC
JSFIA0239GB
P
DETAILED FLOW
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the diagnosis work sheet. Refer to BRC-65, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
>> GO TO 2.
BRC-63
2.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

Check the DTC display with the self-diagnosis function.
Is there any DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.PERFORM THE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the diagnosis applicable to the displayed DTC. Refer to BRC-140, "DTC No. Index".
>> GO TO 7.
4.CHECK THE SYMPTOM THAT IS NOT CONSIDERED A SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Check that the symptom is a normal operation that is not considered a system malfunction. Refer to BRC-148,
"Description".
Is the symptom a normal operation?
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THE WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR LAMP FOR ILLUMINATION
Check that the warning lamp and indicator lamp illuminate.
• ABS warning lamp: Refer to BRC-128, "Description".
• Brake warning lamp: Refer to BRC-129, "Description".
• VDC OFF indicator lamp: Refer to BRC-130, "Description".
• SLIP indicator lamp: Refer to BRC-131, "Description".
Is ON/OFF timing normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2.
6.PERFORM THE DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM
Perform the diagnosis applicable to the symptom.
>> GO TO 7.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.
>> GO TO 8.
8.MEMORY CLEAR
Perform self-diagnosis memory clear.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
Perform the self-diagnosis again, and check that the malfunction is repaired completely.
Is no other DTC present and the repair completed?
NO >> GO TO 3.
BRC-64
BRC
I
SFIA3265E
BRC-65
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000003766881
After replacing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the neutral position adjustment for the
steering angle sensor.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000003766882
1.PERFORM THE NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT FOR THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor.
>> Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Spe-
cial Repair Requirement".
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description
INFOID:0000000003766883
When doing work that applies to the list below, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor
before running vehicle.
×: Required –: Not required
Situation Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position

Removing/Installing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) —
Replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ×
Removing/Installing steering angle sensor ×
Replacing steering angle sensor ×
Removing/Installing steering components ×
Replacing steering components ×
Removing/Installing suspension components ×
Replacing suspension components ×
Change tires to new ones —
Tire rotation —
Adjusting wheel alignment ×
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Re-

pair Requirement INFOID:0000000003766884
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION

CAUTION:
To adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, make sure to use CONSULT-III.
(Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-III.)
1.ALIGN THE VEHICLE STATUS
Stop the vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM THE NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT FOR THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
1. On the CONSULT-III screen, touch "WORK SUPPORT" and “ST ANG SEN ADJUSTMENT" in order.
BRC-66
CAUTION:
Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. A
3. After approximately 10 seconds, touch “END”.
NOTE:
After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.
B
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform above operation.
C
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DATA MONITOR D
1. Run the vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop.
2. Select “STR ANGLE SIG” in “DATA MONITOR” and check steering angle sensor signal.
E
STR ANGLE SIG : 0±2.5°
Is the steering angle within the specified range?
YES >> GO TO 4. BRC
NO >> Perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor again, GO TO 1.
4.ERASE THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MEMORY
G
Erase the self-diagnosis memories of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit): Refer to BRC-80, "CONSULT-III Function".
• ECM: Refer to EC-113, "CONSULT-III Function".
H
Are the memories erased?
NO >> Check the items indicated by the self-diagnosis.
I
BRC-67
VDC
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
VDC
JSFIA0259GB
• Vehicle Dynamics Control system detects driver′s steering operation amount and brake pedal travel from
steering angle sensor and pressure sensor. Using information from yaw rate/side G sensor and wheel sen-
sor, VDC judges driving condition (conditions of under steer and over steer) to improve vehicle driving stabil-
ity by controlling brake application to 4 wheels and engine output.
• During VDC operation, it informs driver of system operation by flashing SLIP indicator lamp.
BRC-68
VDC
BRC
P
JSFIA0260ZZ
1. Steering angle sensor 2. ABS warning lamp 3. Brake warning lamp

4. VDC OFF indicator lamp 5. SLIP indicator lamp 6. Yaw rate/side G sensor
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 8. Front wheel sensor 9. VDC OFF switch
trol unit)
10. Rear wheel sensor
BRC-69
VDC
A. Back of spiral cable assembly B. Combination meter C. Under center console
D. Engine room right side E. Steering knuckle F. Instrument driver lower panel
G. Rear axle

Pump
Motor
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Solenoid valve BRC-101, "Description"
Pressure sensor BRC-108, "Description"
VDC switch-over valve (USV1, USV2) BRC-118, "Description"
VDC switch-over valve (HSV1, HSV2) BRC-120, "Description"
Yaw rate/side G sensor BRC-113, "Description"
Steering angle sensor BRC-110, "Description"
VDC OFF switch BRC-126, "Description"
VDC OFF indicator lamp BRC-130, "Description"
SLIP indicator lamp BRC-131, "Description"
BRC-70
TCS
TCS
A
BRC
I
JSFIA0259GB

J
• Traction Control System is a function that electronically controls engine torque, brake fluid pressure and
CVT shift position to ensure the optimum slippage ratio at drive wheels by computing wheel speed signals
from 4 wheel sensors. When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) detects a spin at drive wheels (rear K
wheels), it compares wheel speed signals from all 4 wheels. At this time, LH and RH rear brake fluid pres-
sure are controlled, while fuel being cut to engine and throttle valve being closed to reduce engine torque by
the control unit. Further more, throttle position is continuously controlled to ensure the optimum engine L
torque at all times.
• During TCS operation, TCS informs driver of system operation by flashing SLIP indicator lamp.
M
BRC-71
TCS
JSFIA0260ZZ

trol unit)
BRC-72
TCS
D. Engine room right side E. Steering knuckle F. Instrument driver lower panel A
G. Rear axle
Component Description INFOID:0000000003767314 B

C
Pump
Motor
Actuator relay (main relay) BRC-106, "Description" D
E
Wheel sensor BRC-96, "Description" BRC
G
Brake warning lamp BRC-129, "Description" H
I
BRC-73
ABS
ABS
JSFIA0259GB
• Anti-Lock Braking System detects wheel revolution while braking, electronically controls braking force, and
prevents wheel locking during sudden braking. It improves handling stability and maneuverability for avoid-
ing obstacles.
BRC-74
ABS
BRC
P
JSFIA0260ZZ

trol unit)
BRC-75
ABS
D. Engine room right side E. Steering knuckle F. Instrument driver lower panel
G. Rear axle

Pump
Motor
BRC-76
EBD
EBD
A
BRC
I
JSFIA0259GB

J
• Electric Brake force Distribution is a following function. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) detects
subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels during braking. Then is electronically controls the rear
braking force (brake fluid pressure) to reducing and reduces rear wheel slippage. Accordingly it improves K
vehicle stability.
L
BRC-77
EBD
JSFIA0260ZZ

trol unit)
BRC-78
EBD
D. Engine room right side E. Steering knuckle F. Instrument driver lower panel A
G. Rear axle
Component Description INFOID:0000000003767320 B

C
Pump
Motor
Actuator relay (main relay) BRC-106, "Description" D
E
Wheel sensor BRC-96, "Description" BRC
G
Brake warning lamp BRC-129, "Description" H
I
BRC-79
UNIT)]
UNIT)]
FUNCTION

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following
Work support
the indications on CONSULT-III.
Self diagnostic result Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly.
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) can be read.
CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and
Active test
also shifts some parameters in a specified range.
ECU identification ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
WORK SUPPORT
Item Description
ST ANG SEN ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Operation Procedure
Before performing the self-diagnosis, start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approxi-
mately 1 minute.
Display Item List
How to Erase Self-diagnosis Results
After erasing DTC memory, start the engine and drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approxi-
mately 1 minute as the final inspection, and make sure that the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp,
SLIP indicator lamp and brake warning lamp turn OFF.
CAUTION:
If memory cannot be erased, perform applicable diagnosis.
NOTE:
• When the wheel sensor malfunctions, after inspecting the wheel sensor system, ABS warning lamp, VDC
OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and brake warning lamp will not turn OFF even when the system is
normal unless the vehicle is driven at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
• Brake warning lamp will turn ON in case of parking brake operation (when switch is ON) or in case of brake
fluid level switch operation (when brake fluid is insufficient).
• VDC OFF switch should not stay in “ON” position.
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
×: Applicable : Optional item
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
MAIN SIGNALS
SIGNALS
FR LH SENSOR
× × Wheel speed calculated by front LH wheel sensor signal
[km/h (MPH)]
FR RH SENSOR
× × Wheel speed calculated by front RH wheel sensor signal
[km/h (MPH)]
RR LH SENSOR
× × Wheel speed calculated by rear LH wheel sensor signal
[km/h (MPH)]
BRC-80
UNIT)]
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor item (Unit) Remarks A
ECU INPUT
MAIN SIGNALS
SIGNALS
RR RH SENSOR
× × Wheel speed calculated by rear RH wheel sensor signal B
[km/h (MPH)]
STOP LAMP SW
× × Stop lamp switch signal status
(On/Off)
BATTERY VOLT Battery voltage supplied to the ABS actuator and electric C
× ×
(V) unit (control unit)
GEAR × × Gear position determined by TCM
D
OFF SW
× × VDC OFF switch
(On/Off)
YAW RATE SEN
× × Yaw rate detected by yaw rate/side G sensor E
(d/s)
ACCEL POS SIG Throttle actuator opening/closing is displayed
×
(%) (Linked with accelerator pedal)
SIDE G-SENSOR
BRC
× Transverse G detected by yaw rate/side G sensor
(m/s2)
STR ANGLE SIG
× Steering angle detected by steering angle sensor G
(°)
PRESS SENSOR
× Brake fluid pressure detected by pressure sensor
(bar)
H
ENGINE RPM
× Engine speed
[tr/min (rpm)]
FLUID LEV SW
× Brake fluid level switch signal status I
(On/Off)
PARK BRAKE SW
× Parking brake switch signal status
(On/Off)
FR RH IN SOL J
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
FR RH OUT SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1) K
FR LH IN SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
FR LH OUT SOL L
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
Operation status of each solenoid valve
RR RH IN SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1) M
RR RH OUT SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
RR LH IN SOL N
×
(On/Off) (Note 1)
RR LH OUT SOL
×
(On/Off) (Note 1) O
MOTOR RELAY
× Motor and motor relay operation
(On/Off)
ACTUATOR RLY P
× Actuator relay operation
(On/Off) (Note 1)
ABS WARN LAMP
× ABS warning lamp
(On/Off)
OFF LAMP
× VDC OFF indicator lamp
(On/Off)
SLIP LAMP
× SLIP indicator lamp
(On/Off)
BRC-81
UNIT)]
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
MAIN SIGNALS
SIGNALS
EBD WARN LAMP
Brake warning lamp
(On/Off)
EBD SIGNAL
EBD operation
(On/Off)
ABS SIGNAL
ABS operation
(On/Off)
TCS SIGNAL
TCS operation
(On/Off)
VDC SIGNAL
VDC operation
(On/Off)
EBD FAIL SIG
EBD fail-safe signal
(On/Off)
ABS FAIL SIG
ABS fail-safe signal
(On/Off)
TCS FAIL SIG
TCS fail-safe signal
(On/Off)
VDC FAIL SIG
VDC fail-safe signal
(On/Off)
CRANKING SIG
Crank operation
(On/Off)
USV[FR-RL]
(On/Off) (Note 1)
USV[FL-RR]
(On/Off) (Note 1)
VDC switch-over valve
HSV[FR-RL]
(On/Off) (Note 1)
HSV[FL-RR]
(On/Off) (Note 1)
V/R OUTPUT
Solenoid valve relay activated
(On/Off)
M/R OUTPUT
Actuator motor and motor relay activated
(On/Off)
NOTE:
1: A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
• Do not perform active test while driving vehicle.
• Make sure to completely bleed air from brake system.
• The active test cannot be started when ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator
lamp and brake warning lamp are ON.
• ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and brake warning lamp are ON
during active test.
NOTE:
• When active test is performed while depressing the pedal, the pedal depression amount will change. This is
normal. (Only solenoid valve and ABS motor.)
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed 10 seconds after operation start.
• After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again.
Test Item
ABS SOLENOID VALVE
BRC-82
UNIT)]
• Touch “Up”, “Keep” and “Down”. Then use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve operates as shown in
the table below. A
Display (Note)
Up Keep Down B
FR RH SOL C
USV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
HSV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
FR LH IN SOL Off On On D
FR LH OUT SOL Off Off On*
FR LH SOL
USV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
HSV[FL-RR] Off Off Off E
RR RH SOL BRC
HSV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
RR LH IN SOL Off On On G
RR LH SOL
H
NOTE: I
ABS SOLENOID VALVE (ACT) J

• Touch “Up”, “ACT UP” and “ACT KEEP”. Then use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve operates as
shown in the table below.
K
Display (Note)
Up ACT UP ACT KEEP
FR RH IN SOL Off Off Off L
FR RH ABS SOLENOID FR RH OUT SOL Off Off Off
(ACT) USV[FR-RL] Off On On
M
HSV[FR-RL] Off On* Off
FR LH IN SOL Off Off Off
FR LH ABS SOLENOID FR LH OUT SOL Off Off Off N

(ACT) USV[FL-RR] Off On On
HSV[FL-RR] Off On* Off
O
RR RH IN SOL Off Off Off
RR RH ABS SOLENOID RR RH OUT SOL Off Off Off

(ACT) USV[FL-RR] Off On On P
RR LH IN SOL Off Off Off
RR LH ABS SOLENOID RR LH OUT SOL Off Off Off

BRC-83
UNIT)]
NOTE:
ABS MOTOR
• Touch “On” and “Off” on screen. Make sure motor relay and actuator relay operates as shown in table below.
Display
On Off
MOTOR RELAY On Off
ABS MOTOR
NOTE:
ECU IDENTIFICATION
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
BRC-84
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS A
B
C

Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open. Or when the sen- E
sor power voltage is outside the standard.
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open. Or when the sen- • Harness or connector
sor power voltage is outside the standard. • Wheel sensor BRC
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open. Or when the • ABS actuator and electric unit
C1103 FR RH SENSOR-1 (control unit)
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open. Or when the G

1.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE H
I
CAUTION: K
1.CHECK TIRES
Check air pressure, wear and size. Refer to WT-5, "Tire Air Pressure". L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M

• Check sensor rotor for damage. N
YES >> GO TO 3. O
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
P
YES >> GO TO 4.
BRC-85

Continuity
9 E39 (Front RH)
16 E22 (Front LH)
E36 1 Existed
8 C4 (Rear RH)
6 C3 (Rear LH)

Continuity
10 E39 (Front RH)
5 E22 (Front LH)
E36 2 Existed
19 C4 (Rear RH)
17 C3 (Rear LH)

Continuity
9, 10
16, 5
8, 19
6, 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
CAUTION:
Wheel sensor
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E39 (Front RH)
E22 (Front LH)
C4 (Rear RH)
C3 (Rear LH)
YES >> GO TO 6.
BRC-86
B
1.CHECK DATA MONITOR C

D
FR LH SENSOR Vehicle running Nearly matches the speedometer display E
FR RH SENSOR Vehicle running Nearly matches the speedometer display BRC
G
RR RH SENSOR
H
Vehicle running Nearly matches the speedometer display
NOTE:
I
YES >> INSPECTION END J
K
1.ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION
Always perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor, when replacing the ABS actua-
tor and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEU- L
TRAL POSITION : Description".
>> END M
BRC-87
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the circuit in the rear RH wheel sensor is short-cir-
When the circuit in the rear LH wheel sensor is short-cir-
and sensor rotor is too large and the sensor pulse cannot • Harness or connector
be recognized by the control unit. • Wheel sensor
When the circuit in the front RH wheel sensor is short-cir- • ABS actuator and electric unit
cuited. Or when the distance between the wheel sensor (control unit)
When the circuit in the front LH wheel sensor is short-cir-

CAUTION:
1.CHECK TIRES
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
BRC-88
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS B
C
Continuity D
9 E39 (Front RH)
16 E22 (Front LH) E
E36 1 Existed
8 C4 (Rear RH)
6 C3 (Rear LH)
BRC
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal G
10 E39 (Front RH)
5 E22 (Front LH)
E36 2 Existed H
19 C4 (Rear RH)
17 C3 (Rear LH)
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. I

Continuity
9, 10
16, 5
E36 E36 1, 4 Not existed K
8, 19
6, 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M
CAUTION: N
O
Wheel sensor
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E39 (Front RH) P
E22 (Front LH)
C4 (Rear RH)
C3 (Rear LH)
YES >> GO TO 6.
BRC-89


NOTE:

tor and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEU-
>> END
BRC-90
A
Supplies electric power to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). B

• Harness or connector D
BATTERY VOLTAGE When the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
C1109 • ABS actuator and electric unit
[ABNORMAL] power supply voltage is lower than normal.
(control unit)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. BRC
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-91, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
H
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. I
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) L

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
M
2. Check 30A fusible link (G).
3. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and battery
positive terminal.
N

— Continuity
Battery positive
E36 3 Existed
terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
BRC-91

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E36 Ground Existed
4

>> END
BRC-92
C1110, C1153, C1170 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
C1110, C1153, C1170 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
A
UNIT)
B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition Possible cause C

When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator
C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE
and electric unit (control unit).
ABS actuator and electric unit D
When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is mal-
C1153 EMERGENCY BRAKE (control unit)
functioning. (Pressure increase is too much or too little)
C1170 VARIANT CODING In a case where VARIANT CODING is different.
E
BRC
Is DTC “C1110”, “C1153” or “C1170” detected?
G
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003766917 H
1.REPLACE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

CAUTION: I
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) when self-diagnostic result shows items other
than those applicable.
J
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
K
Always perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor, when replacing the ABS actua- L
M
>> END
BRC-93
PUMP
The pump returns the brake fluid stored in the reservoir to the master cylinder by reducing the pressure.
MOTOR
The motor drives the pump according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
MOTOR RELAY
Activates or deactivates motor according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

During the actuator motor operating with ON, when the
actuator motor turns OFF, or when the control line for ac-
tuator motor relay is open. • Harness or connector
C1111 PUMP MOTOR • ABS actuator and electric unit
During the actuator motor operating with OFF, when the (control unit)
actuator motor turns ON, or when the control line for relay
is shorted to ground.

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Check terminal for deformation, disconnect, looseness, etc.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
BRC-94

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
4
D
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST
1. On “ACTIVE TEST”, select “ABS MOTOR”. E
below.
BRC
Display
On Off
MOTOR RELAY On Off G
ABS MOTOR
NOTE:
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is H
YES >> INSPECTION END I
J
Always perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor, when replacing the ABS actua- K
L
>> END
BRC-95
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

ABS SENSOR • Wheel sensor
C1115 When wheel sensor input signal is malfunctioning.
[ABNORMAL SIGNAL] • ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)

CAUTION:
1.CHECK TIRES
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 4.
BRC-96
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor A
Continuity
9 E39 (Front RH)
16 E22 (Front LH)
B
E36 1 Existed
8 C4 (Rear RH)
6 C3 (Rear LH) C
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D
10 E39 (Front RH)
5 E22 (Front LH)
E36 2 Existed E
19 C4 (Rear RH)
17 C3 (Rear LH)
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. BRC

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal G
9, 10
16, 5
E36 E36 1, 4 Not existed H
8, 19
6, 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

CAUTION: K
L
Wheel sensor
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
M
E39 (Front RH)
E22 (Front LH)
C4 (Rear RH) N
C3 (Rear LH)
YES >> GO TO 6. O
6.CHECK DATA MONITOR P
BRC-97
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR


NOTE:

>> END
BRC-98
A
The stop lamp switch transmits the stop lamp switch signal (ON/OFF) to the ABS actuator and electric unit B
(control unit).
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C1116 STOP LAMP SW When stop lamp switch circuit is open.
• ABS actuator and electric unit E
(control unit)

1.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE BRC

G
1.CHECK CONNECTOR I
3. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. J
YES >> GO TO 2. K
L
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to BRC-99, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3. M
Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground. N

— Condition Voltage
Brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
E36 20 Ground
Brake pedal is released Approx. 0 V
P

BRC-99
3. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch

Terminal
Release stop lamp switch
Existed
(When brake pedal is depressed.)
1−2
Push stop lamp switch
Not existed
(When brake pedal is released.)

>> END
BRC-100
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL
A
The solenoid valve increases, holds or decreases the fluid pressure of each brake caliper according to the sig- B
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C1120 FR LH IN ABS SOL
LH inlet solenoid circuit.
When the control unit detects a malfunction in the front E
C1122 FR RH IN ABS SOL
RH inlet solenoid circuit. ABS actuator and electric unit
C1124 RR LH IN ABS SOL
inlet solenoid circuit. BRC
C1126 RR RH IN ABS SOL
RH inlet solenoid circuit.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1. Turn the ignition switch ON. H
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-101, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
K
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SOLENOID, VDC SWITCH-OVER VALVE AND ACTUATOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) N

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SOLENOID, VDC SWITCH-OVER VALVE AND ACTUATOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
BRC-101
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 IN ABS SOL

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E36 Ground Existed
4
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST

1. Select each test menu item on ”ACTIVE TEST“.
below.
Display (Note)
Up Keep Down
FR RH SOL
FR LH SOL
RR RH SOL
RR LH SOL
NOTE:

>> END
BRC-102
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL
A
The solenoid valve increases, holds or decreases the fluid pressure of each brake caliper according to the sig- B
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C1121 FR LH OUT ABS SOL
LH outlet solenoid circuit.
When the control unit detects a malfunction in the front E
C1123 FR RH OUT ABS SOL
RH outlet solenoid circuit. ABS actuator and electric unit
C1125 RR LH OUT ABS SOL
outlet solenoid circuit. BRC
C1127 RR RH OUT ABS SOL
RH outlet solenoid circuit.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1. Turn the ignition switch ON. H
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-103, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
K
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SOLENOID, VDC SWITCH-OVER VALVE AND ACTUATOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) N

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
BRC-103
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 OUT ABS SOL

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E36 Ground Existed
4
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST

below.
Display (Note)
Up Keep Down
FR RH SOL
FR LH SOL
RR RH SOL
RR LH SOL
NOTE:

>> END
BRC-104
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL
A
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM exchange the engine signal with CAN communication B
line.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL 1 Major engine components are malfunctioning. (control unit) E
• ECM
• CAN communication line
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE BRC

2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. G
H
I
1.ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ECM self-diagnosis.
Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? J
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS K
1. Erase ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. L
3. Start the engine. Drive the vehicle for a while.
4. Make sure that malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) turns OFF.
5. Stop the engine. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display? M
NO >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection
with harness connector. If any items and damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. N
O
tor and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEU- P
>> END
BRC-105
Activates or deactivates each solenoid valve according to the signals transmitted by the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

During the actuator relay operating with OFF, when the
relay is shorted to the ground. • Harness or connector
C1140 ACTUATOR RLY • ABS actuator and electric unit
During the actuator relay operating with ON, when the (control unit)
relay is open.

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SOLENOID, VDC SWITCH-OVER VALVE AND ACTUATOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E36 Ground Existed
4
BRC-106
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). A
B
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST
1. On “ACTIVE TEST”, select “ABS MOTOR”. C
below.
D
Display
On Off
MOTOR RELAY On Off E
ABS MOTOR
NOTE:
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is BRC
H

Always perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor, when replacing the ABS actua- I
J
>> END
BRC-107
C1142 PRESS SENSOR
C1142 PRESS SENSOR
The pressure sensor converts the brake fluid pressure to an electric signal and transmits it to the ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit). [The pressure sensor is integrated in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).]
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Pressure sensor signal line is open or shorted, or pres- • Stop lamp switch
C1142 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
sure sensor is malfunctioning. • ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)


Check stop lamp switch. Refer to BRC-99, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunction component.
Check pressure sensor signal. Refer to BRC-108, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> • Check brake pedal, brake booster, and master cylinder for mount play, looseness, brake system
fluid leakage, etc.
- Brake pedal: Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
3.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Is any item indicated on the self-diagnosis display?
NO >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection
with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.

On “DATA MONITOR”, select “PRESS SENSOR” and check the brake fluid pressure.
BRC-108
C1142 PRESS SENSOR
PRESS SENSOR A
Condition
(DATA MONITOR)
With ignition switch turned ON and brake pedal released. Approx. 0 bar
With ignition switch turned ON and brake pedal depressed. − 40 to 300 bar B

YES >> INSPECTION END C
D
tor and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEU- E
>> END BRC
BRC-109
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
The steering angle sensor detects the rotation amount, angular velocity and direction of the steering wheel,
and transmits the data to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Steering angle sensor
C1143 ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT Steering angle sensor is malfunctioning.
(control unit)

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR HARNESS
CAUTION:
2. Check the voltage between steering angle sensor harness connector and ground.
Steering angle sensor

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
M30 4 Ground Battery voltage
4. Check the continuity between steering angle sensor harness connector and ground.
Steering angle sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M30 1 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
BRC-110
3.CHECK DATA MONITOR A

1. Connect steering angle sensor connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check steering angle sensor signal. Refer to BRC-111, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal? B
NO >> Replace steering angle sensor and adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003766961 C

D
Select “STR ANGLE SIG” in “DATA MONITOR” and check steering angle sensor signal.
Steering condition STR ANGLE SIG (DATA MONITOR)

E
Driving straight ±2.5°
Turn 90° to right Approx. +90°
Turn 90° to left Approx. −90° BRC
NO >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-110, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
H
Always perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor, when replacing the steering
angle sensor or the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF I
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
>> END J
BRC-111
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Steering angle sensor
C1144 ST ANG SEN SIGNAL Neutral position of steering angle sensor is not finished.
(control unit)

2. Select “ST ANG SEN ADJUSTMENT” in “WORK SUPPORT”, and perform adjust the neutral position of
steering angle sensor.
1.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

Check steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-110, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Always perform the neutral position adjustment for the steering angle sensor, when replacing the steering
angle sensor or the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
>> END
BRC-112
C1145, C1146 YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR
A
The yaw rate/side G sensor detects the yaw rate/side G affecting the vehicle, and transmits the data to the B
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) as an analog voltage signal.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Yaw rate sensor is malfunctioning, or the yaw rate sensor • Harness or connector
C1145 YAW RATE SENSOR
signal line is open or shorted. • ABS actuator and electric unit
Side G sensor is malfunctioning, or circuit of side G sen- (control unit) E
C1146 SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT • Yaw rate/side G sensor
sor is open or shorted.

BRC
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. G
Is DTC “C1145” or “C1146” detected?
CAUTION: I
• Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc., when VDC function is off (VDC
OFF switch “ON”) may cause yaw rate/side G sensor system to indicate a malfunction. However, this
is not a malfunction, if normal operation can be resumed after restarting engine. Then erase memory J
of self-diagnosis.
• If vehicle is on turn-table at entrance to parking garage, or on other moving surface, VDC OFF indica-
tor lamp may illuminate and CONSULT-III self-diagnosis may indicate yaw rate sensor system mal-
function. However, in this case there is no malfunction in yaw rate sensor system. Take vehicle off of K
turn-table or other moving surface, and start the engine. Results will return to normal.
1.CHECK CONNECTOR L
3. Disconnect yaw rate/side G sensor connector.
4. Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, etc. M
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch ON. O
CAUTION:
2. Check the voltage between yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector and ground.
P
Yaw rate/side G sensor

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
4. Check the voltage between yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector and ground.
BRC-113

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
M72 4 Ground Approx. 0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the continuity between yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector and ground.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR HARNESS
Check the continuity between yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector.
ABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit) Continuity
14 2
E36 M72 Existed
25 3
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to BRC-150, "Precautions for Harness Repair".
1. Connect yaw rate/side G sensor connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check yaw rate/side G sensor signal. Refer to BRC-114, "Component Inspection".
NO >> Replace yaw rate/side G sensor.

Select “YAW RATE SEN”, “SIDE G-SENSOR” in “DATA MONITOR” and check yaw rate/side G sensor signal.
Yaw rate sensor
YAW RATE SEN

Vehicle condition
(DATA MONITOR)
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 d/s
Vehicle turning right Negative value
Vehicle turning left Positive value
BRC-114
Side G sensor
SIDE G-SENSOR A
Vehicle condition
(DATA MONITOR)
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 m/s2
B
Vehicle turning right Negative value
D

E
BRC
>> END
G
BRC-115
C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
The brake fluid level switch converts the brake fluid level to an electric signal and transmits it to the ABS actu-
ator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Brake fluid level is low or communication line between • Harness or connector
C1155 BR FLUID LEVEL LOW the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake • Brake fluid level switch
fluid level switch is open or shorted. • Combination meter

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect brake fluid level switch connector.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
Check brake fluid level switch. Refer to BRC-117, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Brake fluid level switch is malfunction. Replace reservoir tank.
3.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Check the continuity between brake fluid level switch harness connector and combination meter harness
connector.
Combination meter Brake fluid level switch

Continuity
2. Check the continuity between brake fluid level switch harness connector and ground.
Brake fluid level switch

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E37 2 Ground Existed
3. Check the continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
BRC-116
Combination meter A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M34 27 Ground Not existed
B
YES >> Replace combination meter.
1.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH D

2. Disconnect brake fluid level switch connector.
3. Check the continuity between brake fluid level switch connector terminals. E
Brake fluid level switch

Condition Continuity BRC
Terminal
When brake fluid is full in the reservoir tank. Not existed
1−2 When brake fluid is empty in the reservoir
Existed G
tank.
YES >> INSPECTION END H
NO >> Replace reservoir tank. Refer to BR-25, "Exploded View".
I
J
K
>> END
BRC-117
C1164, C1165 CV SYSTEM
The cut valve shuts off the normal brake fluid path from the master cylinder, when VDC/TCS is activated.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

VDC switch-over solenoid valve (CV1) on the primary
C1164 CV 1 side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open
or shorted to the power supply or the ground. • Harness or connector
VDC switch-over solenoid valve (CV2) on the secondary (control unit)
C1165 CV 2 side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open
or shorted to the power supply or the ground.

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 2.

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E36 Ground Existed
4
BRC-118
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST B

2. On the display, touch “Up”, “ACT UP”, and “ACT KEEP”, and check that the system operates as shown in
the table below. C
Display (Note)
Test item Display item D
Up ACT UP ACT KEEP
FR RH IN SOL Off Off Off
FR RH ABS SOLENOID FR RH OUT SOL Off Off Off E

FR LH IN SOL Off Off Off BRC
FR LH ABS SOLENOID FR LH OUT SOL Off Off Off

G
RR RH ABS SOLENOID RR RH OUT SOL Off Off Off H

I

(ACT) USV[FR-RL] Off On On J
NOTE: K
M
1.ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION N

O
>> END
P
BRC-119
C1166, C1167 SV SYSTEM
The suction valve supplies the brake fluid from the master cylinder to the pump, when VDC/TCS is activated.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

VDC switch-over solenoid valve (SV1) on the primary
C1166 SV 1 side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open
or shorted to the power supply or the ground. • Harness or connector
VDC switch-over solenoid valve (SV2) on the secondary (control unit)
C1167 SV 2 side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open
or shorted to the power supply or the ground.

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 2.

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E36 Ground Existed
4
BRC-120
1.CHECK ACTIVE TEST B

2. On the display, touch “Up”, “ACT UP”, and “ACT KEEP”, and check that the system operates as shown in
the table below. C
Display (Note)
Test item Display item D
Up ACT UP ACT KEEP
FR RH IN SOL Off Off Off
FR RH ABS SOLENOID FR RH OUT SOL Off Off Off E

FR LH IN SOL Off Off Off BRC
FR LH ABS SOLENOID FR LH OUT SOL Off Off Off

G
RR RH ABS SOLENOID RR RH OUT SOL Off Off Off H

I

(ACT) USV[FR-RL] Off On On J
NOTE: K
M
1.ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION N

O
>> END
P
BRC-121
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is not
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2
seconds or more. • CAN communication line
When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is not (control unit)
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN) transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2
seconds or less.

1.PERFORM ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

>> END
BRC-122
A
Supplies power to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). B

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY C
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground. D

— Voltage E
Connector Terminal
E36 18 Ground Approx. 0 V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON. BRC
CAUTION:
G

— Voltage
Connector Terminal H
YES >> GO TO 2. I
NO >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY J
K
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 3 Ground Battery voltage L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit. M
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND

Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground. N

— Continuity
1
E36 Ground Existed
4
P
BRC-123
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH OPERATION

Operate the parking brake pedal. Then check that the brake warning lamp in the combination meter turns ON/
OFF correctly.
Condition Brake warning lamp illumination status

When the parking brake pedal is opera-
ON
tion.
When the parking brake pedal is not oper-
OFF
ation.
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-124, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace parking brake switch.
tion".
YES >> GO TO 3.
On “DATA MONITOR”, select “PARK BRAKE SW” and perform the parking brake switch inspection.
Condition PARK BRAKE SW (DATA MONITOR)

Parking brake switch is active On
Parking brake switch is inactive Off
NO >> Check combination meter. Refer to MWI-33, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

2. Disconnect parking brake switch connector.
3. Check the continuity between parking brake switch connector and ground.
Parking brake switch

— Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
When the parking brake switch is operated. Existed
E27 1 Ground
When the parking brake switch is not operated. Not existed
BRC-124
YES >> INSPECTION END A
NO >> Replace parking brake switch.
BRC
BRC-125
VDC OFF SWITCH
VDC OFF SWITCH
VDC OFF switch can deactivate (turn OFF) the VDC/TCS function by pressing the VDC OFF switch.
1.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH OPERATION

Turn ON/OFF the VDC OFF switch and check that the VDC OFF indicator lamp in the combination meter turns
ON/OFF correctly.
Condition VDC OFF indicator lamp illumination status

Press the VDC OFF switch when VDC
ON
OFF indicator lamp is OFF.
Press the VDC OFF switch when VDC
OFF
OFF indicator lamp is ON.
1.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH

Check VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-127, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> VDC OFF switch is malfunctioning. Replace VDC OFF switch.
2.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH HARNESS
2. Disconnect VDC OFF switch connector.
3. Check the continuity between VDC OFF switch harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector.
ABS actuator and electric unit

VDC OFF switch
(control unit) Continuity
E36 21 M5 1 Existed
4. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E36 21 Ground Not existed
5. Check the continuity between VDC OFF switch harness connector and ground.
VDC OFF switch

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M5 2 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> If the open or short in harness, repair or replace harness.
BRC-126
VDC OFF SWITCH
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER A

2. Connect VDC OFF switch connector.
3. Check the indication and operation of combination meter are normal. Refer to MWI-32, "Diagnosis
B
Description".
C
D
2. Disconnect VDC OFF switch connector. E
3. Check the continuity between VDC OFF switch connector terminals.
VDC OFF switch BRC

Terminal
When VDC OFF switch is hold pressed. Existed
1−2 G
When releasing VDC OFF switch. Not existed
YES >> INSPECTION END H
NO >> Replace VDC OFF switch.
BRC-127
ABS WARNING LAMP
ABS WARNING LAMP
×: ON –: OFF
Condition ABS warning lamp

1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP OPERATION

YES >> GO TO 2.
tion".
BRC-128
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
A
×: ON –: OFF B
Condition Brake warning lamp (Note 1)
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON × (Note 2) C
1 second later after turning ignition switch ON × (Note 2)
D
NOTE:
• 1: Brake warning lamp will turn on in case of parking brake operation (when switch is ON) or of brake fluid level switch operation
(when brake fluid is insufficient). E
• 2: After starting the engine, brake warning lamp is turned off.
BRC
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
H
ing brake pedal. I
NO >> Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-124, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH K
ing brake pedal.
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-124, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
YES >> GO TO 3.
O
tion". P
BRC-129
VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP
VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP
×: ON –: OFF
Condition VDC OFF indicator lamp

VDC OFF switch turned ON. (VDC function is OFF.) ×
VDC/TCS function is malfunctioning. ×
1.VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION CHECK 1

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION CHECK 2
Check that the VDC OFF indicator lamp in the combination meter turns ON/OFF correctly when operating the
VDC OFF switch.
NO >> Check VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Perform the trouble diagnosis for VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
tion".
BRC-130
SLIP INDICATOR LAMP
SLIP INDICATOR LAMP
A
×: ON : Blink –: OFF B
Condition SLIP indicator lamp
C

VDC/TCS is activated while driving D
VDC/TCS function is malfunctioning. ×
E
BRC
1.CHECK SLIP INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION
H
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS I
YES >> GO TO 2. J
K
tion".
M
BRC-131
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
ECU DIAGNOSIS

CAUTION:
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short-circuited.
Data monitor
Condition
normal operation
Wheel speed calculated by front LH Nearly matches the
FR LH SENSOR Vehicle running
(Note 1)
Wheel speed calculated by front RH Nearly matches the
FR RH SENSOR Vehicle running
(Note 1)
Wheel speed calculated by rear LH Nearly matches the
RR LH SENSOR Vehicle running
(Note 1)
Wheel speed calculated by rear RH Nearly matches the
RR RH SENSOR Vehicle running
(Note 1)
When brake pedal is depressed On
STOP LAMP SW Stop lamp switch signal status
When brake pedal is not depressed Off
Battery voltage supplied to the ABS ac-
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON 10 – 16 V
tuator and electric unit (control unit)
1st gear 0
2nd gear 1
3rd gear 2
4th gear 3
GEAR Gear position determined by TCM 5th gear 4
6th gear 5
7th gear 6
8th gear 7
other 0
VDC OFF switch ON
On
(When VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON)
OFF SW VDC OFF switch ON/OFF
VDC OFF switch OFF
Off
(When VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF)
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 d/s
Yaw rate detected by yaw rate/side G
YAW RATE SEN Vehicle turning right Negative value
sensor
Accelerator pedal not depressed
Throttle actuator opening/closing is 0%
(ignition switch is ON)
ACCEL POS SIG displayed (linked with accelerator ped-
al) Depress accelerator pedal
0 - 100 %
(ignition switch is ON)
BRC-132
Data monitor
Reference value in
Condition
normal operation
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 m/s2
Transverse G detected by side G sen- B
SIDE G-SENSOR Vehicle turning right Negative value
sor
Driving straight ±2.5° C
Steering angle detected by steering an-
STR ANGLE SIG Turn 90° to right Approx. +90°
gle sensor
Turn 90° to left Approx. –90°
D
With ignition switch turned ON and brake
Approx. 0 bar
Brake fluid pressure detected by pres- pedal released
PRESS SENSOR
sure sensor With ignition switch turned ON and brake
pedal depressed
–40 to 300 bar E
With engine stopped 0 rpm
ENGINE RPM With engine running Almost in accor-

BRC
Engine running dance with tachome-
ter display
When brake fluid level switch ON On
FLUID LEV SW Brake fluid level switch signal status G
When brake fluid level switch OFF Off
Parking brake switch is active On
PARK BRAKE SW Parking brake switch signal status
Parking brake switch is inactive Off H
On
FR RH IN SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not I
valve
tion switch ON)
Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“AC- J
On
FR RH OUT SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
K

On
FR LH IN SOL
Operation status of each solenoid L
valve When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
tion switch ON)
Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“AC- M
On
FR LH OUT SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
active and actuator relay is active (igni- Off N
tion switch ON)
On
TIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III) O
RR RH IN SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
P
On
RR RH OUT SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
BRC-133
Data monitor
Condition
normal operation
On
RR LH IN SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
On
RR LH OUT SOL When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
valve
tion switch ON)
When the motor relay and motor are op-
On
erating
MOTOR RELAY Motor and motor relay operation
When the motor relay and motor are not
Off
operating
ACTUATOR RLY When the actuator relay is operating On

Actuator relay operation
(Note 2) When the actuator relay is not operating Off
ABS warning lamp When ABS warning lamp is ON On

ABS WARN LAMP
(Note 3) When ABS warning lamp is OFF Off
Brake warning lamp When brake warning lamp is ON On

EBD WARN LAMP
(Note 3) When brake warning lamp is OFF Off
VDC OFF indicator lamp When VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON On

OFF LAMP
(Note 3) When VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF Off
SLIP indicator lamp When SLIP indicator lamp is ON On

SLIP LAMP
(Note 3) When SLIP indicator lamp is OFF Off
EBD is active On
EBD SIGNAL EBD operation
EBD is inactive Off
ABS is active On
ABS SIGNAL ABS operation
ABS is inactive Off
TCS is active On
TCS SIGNAL TCS operation
TCS is inactive Off
VDC is active On
VDC SIGNAL VDC operation
VDC is inactive Off
In EBD fail-safe On
EBD FAIL SIG EBD fail-safe signal
EBD is normal Off
In ABS fail-safe On
ABS FAIL SIG ABS fail-safe signal
ABS is normal Off
In TCS fail-safe On
TCS FAIL SIG TCS fail-safe signal
TCS is normal Off
In VDC fail-safe On
VDC FAIL SIG VDC fail-safe signal
VDC is normal Off
Crank is active On
CRANKING SIG Crank operation
Crank is inactive Off
BRC-134
Data monitor
Reference value in
Condition
normal operation
When actuator (switch-over valve) is ac-
On B
tive (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III)
USV [FL-RR]
VDC switch-over valve When actuator (switch-over valve) is not
(Note 2)
tion switch ON) C
On
USV [FR-RL]
VDC switch-over valve When actuator (switch-over valve) is not D
(Note 2)
tion switch ON)
When actuator (switch-over valve) is ac- E
On
HSV [FL-RR]
(Note 2)
tion switch ON)
BRC

On
HSV [FR-RL] G
(Note 2)
tion switch ON)
When the solenoid valve relay is active H
On
V/R OUTPUT (When ignition switch OFF)
Solenoid valve relay activated
(Note 2) When the solenoid valve relay is not ac-
Off
tive (in the fail-safe mode) I
When the actuator motor and motor relay
are active On
Actuator motor and motor relay activat- (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III)
M/R OUTPUT
ed
J
When the actuator motor and motor relay
Off
are inactive
NOTE: K
• 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
• 2: A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an
operation for checking. L
• 3: On and off timing for warning lamp and indicator lamp.
- ABS warning lamp: Refer to BRC-128, "Description".
- Brake warning lamp: Refer to BRC-129, "Description".
M
- VDC OFF indicator lamp: Refer to BRC-130, "Description".
- SLIP indicator lamp: Refer to BRC-131, "Description".
BRC-135
Wiring Diagram - BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003767020
JCFWM0150GB
BRC-136
BRC
JCFWM0151GB
BRC-137
JCFWM0152GB
BRC-138
BRC
JCFWM0153GB
P
ABS, EBD SYSTEM

If ABS malfunction electrically, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. If
EBD malfunction electrically, brake warning lamp, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indi-
cator lamp will turn on. Simultaneously, the VDC/TCS/ABS become one of the following conditions of the fail-
safe function.
BRC-139
• For malfunction of ABS, only the EBD is activated and the condition of vehicle is the same condition of vehi-
cles without TCS/ABS system.
NOTE:
ABS self-diagnosis sound may be heard. That is a normal condition because a self-diagnosis for “Ignition
switch ON” and “The first starting” are being performed.
• For malfunction of EBD, EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of vehicle is the same as the
condition of vehicles without TCS/ABS, EBD system.
VDC/TCS
If VDC/TCS/ABS system malfunction electrically, VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp are turned on,
and the condition of vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without VDC/TCS control.
CAUTION:
If the Fail-Safe function is activated, then perform self-diagnosis for VDC/TCS/ABS control system.
DTC No. Index INFOID:0000000003767022

BRC-85, "DTC Logic"
BRC-88, "DTC Logic"
C1109 BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] BRC-91, "DTC Logic"
C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE BRC-93, "DTC Logic"
C1111 PUMP MOTOR BRC-94, "DTC Logic"
C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] BRC-96, "DTC Logic"
C1116 STOP LAMP SW BRC-99, "DTC Logic"
C1120 FR LH IN ABS SOL BRC-101, "DTC Logic"
C1121 FR LH OUT ABS SOL BRC-103, "DTC Logic"
C1122 FR RH IN ABS SOL BRC-101, "DTC Logic"
C1123 FR RH OUT ABS SOL BRC-103, "DTC Logic"
C1124 RR LH IN ABS SOL BRC-101, "DTC Logic"
C1125 RR LH OUT ABS SOL BRC-103, "DTC Logic"
C1126 RR RH IN ABS SOL BRC-101, "DTC Logic"
C1127 RR RH OUT ABS SOL BRC-103, "DTC Logic"
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL 1 BRC-105, "DTC Logic"
C1140 ACTUATOR RLY BRC-106, "DTC Logic"
C1142 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT BRC-108, "DTC Logic"
C1143 ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT BRC-110, "DTC Logic"
C1144 ST ANG SEN SIGNAL BRC-112, "DTC Logic"
C1145 YAW RATE SENSOR
BRC-113, "DTC Logic"
C1146 SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT
C1153 EMERGENCY BRAKE BRC-93, "DTC Logic"
C1155 BR FLUID LEVEL LOW BRC-116, "DTC Logic"
C1164 CV 1
C1165 CV 2
BRC-140
A
C1166 SV 1
C1167 SV 2
C1170 VARIANT CORDING BRC-93, "DTC Logic" B
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN)
C
BRC
BRC-141
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
1.CHECK START
Check front and rear brake force distribution using a brake tester. Refer to BR-45, "General Specifications".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLE
Make sure that there is no excessive play in the front and rear axles.
• Front: Refer to FAX-6, "Inspection".
• Rear: Refer to RAX-3, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
3.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR
• Wheel sensor installation for damage.
• Sensor rotor installation for damage.
• Wheel sensor connector connection.
• Wheel sensor harness inspection.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> • Replace wheel sensor or sensor rotor.
• Repair harness.
Make sure that the ABS warning lamp is turned off after the ignition switch is turned ON or when driving.
Is the ABS warning lamp illuminated?
YES >> Perform self-diagnosis.
NO >> Normal
BRC-142
A
1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE B

Check brake pedal stroke. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the stroke too large?
C
YES >> • Bleed air from brake tube and hose. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
• Check brake pedal, brake booster, and master cylinder for mount play, looseness, brake system
fluid leakage, etc.
- Brake pedal: Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment". D
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2.CHECK FUNCTION
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS. Check if braking force is
normal in this condition. Connect connector after inspection. BRC
YES >> Normal
NO >> Check brake system. G
BRC-143
CAUTION:
The stopping distance on slippery road surfaces might be longer when the ABS is operating than
when the ABS is not operating.
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deacti-
vate ABS. In this condition, check stopping distance. After inspection, connect connector.
YES >> Normal
BRC-144
A
CAUTION: B
ABS does not operate when speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or lower.
Make sure that the ABS warning lamp turns OFF after ignition switch is turned ON or when driving. C
YES >> Normal
NO >> Perform self-diagnosis. D
BRC
BRC-145
CAUTION:
Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly
depressed (just place a foot on it). However, this is normal.
• When shifting gears
• When driving on slippery road
• During cornering at high speed
• When passing over bumps or grooves [at approximately 50 mm (1.97 in) or more]
• When pulling away just after starting engine [at approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH) or higher]
1.SYMPTOM CHECK 1
Check that there are pedal vibrations when the engine is started.
Do vibrations occur?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspect the brake pedal.
2.SYMPTOM CHECK 2
Check that there are ABS operation noises when the engine is started.
Do the operation noises occur?
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.SYMPTOM CHECK 3
Check symptoms when electrical component (headlamps, etc.) switches are operated.
Do symptoms occur?
YES >> Check if there is a radio, antenna, antenna lead wire, or wiring close to the control unit. If there is,
move it farther away.
NO >> Normal
BRC-146
VEHICLE JERKS DURING VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL
VEHICLE JERKS DURING VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL
A
1.SYMPTOM CHECK B
Check if the vehicle jerks during VDC/TCS/ABS control.
C
YES >> Normal.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS D
Perform self-diagnosis of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Are self-diagnosis results indicated?
YES >> Check corresponding items, make repairs, and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control E
unit) self-diagnosis.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONNECTOR BRC
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and
check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, etc.
• Securely connect connectors and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. G
YES >> If poor contact, damage, open or short circuit of connector terminal is found, repair or replace.
NO >> GO TO 4. H
4.CHECK ECM AND A/T SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform ECM self-diagnosis and TCM self-diagnosis. I
YES >> Check the corresponding items.
NO >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). J
BRC-147
Symptom Result
Slight vibrations are felt on the brake pedal and the operation noises occur, when VDC, TCS or ABS is acti-
vated.
This is a normal condi-
Stopping distance is longer than that of vehicles without ABS when the vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or
tion due to the VDC,
snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
TCS or ABS activation.
The brake pedal moves and generates noises, when TCS or VDC is activated due to rapid acceleration or
sharp turn.
This is a normal, and it is
The brake pedal vibrates and motor operation noises occur from the engine room, after the engine starts and
caused by the ABS op-
just after the vehicle starts.
eration check.
Depending on the road conditions, the driver may experience a sluggish feel. This is normal, because
TCS places the highest
TCS may activate momentarily if wheel speed changes when driving over location where friction coefficient priority on the optimum
varies, when downshifting, or when fully depressing accelerator pedal. traction (stability).
The ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn ON when the vehicle is
In this case, restart the
subject to strong shaking or large vibration, such as when the vehicle is rotating on a turntable or located on
engine on a normal
a ship while the engine is running.
road. If the normal con-
VDC may not operate normally or the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp dition is restored, there
may illuminate, when running on a special road that is extremely slanted (e.g. bank in a circuit course). is no malfunction. At
that time, erase the self-
A malfunction may occur in the yaw rate/side G sensor system, when the vehicle turns sharply, such as dur-
diagnosis memory.
ing a spin turn, axle turn, or drift driving, while the VDC function is off (VDC OFF indicator lamp illuminated).
Normal (Deactivate the
VDC/TCS function be-
The vehicle speed will not increase even though the accelerator pedal is depressed, when inspecting the
fore performing an in-
speedometer on a 2-wheel chassis dynamometer.
spection on a chassis
dynamometer.)
This is not a VDC sys-
VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may simultaneously turn on when low tire pressure warn- tem error but results
ing lamp turns on. from characteristic
change of tire.
BRC-148
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
BRC
connectors.
G
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. H
PIIB3706J
K
WARNING: L
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
• Only use “DOT 3” or “DOT 4” brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off M
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil. They may damage rubber parts and cause improper
operation. N
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a flare
nut torque wrench (A).
• Always conform the specified tightening torque when installing the O
brake pipes.
• Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is
detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction is P
detected, replace part with a new one.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) connector or the battery negative terminal
before performing the work.
JPFIA0061ZZ
BRC-149
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
Precaution for Brake Control INFOID:0000000003767032
• When starting engine or when starting vehicle just after starting engine, brake pedal may vibrate or motor
operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is normal condition.
• When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer
(what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for estimate causes before starting diagnos-
tic servicing. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and oil
leaks.
• If tire size and type are used in an improper combination, or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts,
stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
• ABS might be out of order or malfunctions by putting a radio (wiring inclusive), an antenna and a lead-in wire
near the control unit.
• If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits, and improper wiring.
• VDC system may not operate normally or a VDC OFF indicator lamp or SLIP indicator lamp may light.
- When replacing the following parts with parts other than genuine parts or making modifications: Suspension
related parts (shock absorber, spring, bushing, etc.), tires, wheels (other than specified sizes), brake-related
parts (pad, rotor, caliper, etc.), engine-related parts (muffler, ECM, etc.) and body reinforcement-related parts
(roll bar, tower bar, etc.).
- When driving with worn or deteriorated suspension, tires and brake-related parts.
Precautions for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000003843440
COMMUNICATION LINE
• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
SKIB8766E
• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.

NOTE:
Bypass connection may cause communication error as spliced
wires that are separate from the main line or twisted lines lose
noise immunity.
• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected
on the shield lines of communication line.
SKIB8767E
BRC-150
WHEEL SENSOR
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [VDC/TCS/ABS]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
WHEEL SENSOR
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
B
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003767300
BRC
J
JSFIA0221GB
1. Front LH wheel sensor 2. Front LH wheel sensor connector K

: Vehicle front
L
NOTE:
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003767301
M
REMOVAL
Be careful with the following when removing sensor. N
CAUTION:
sensor harness. O
INSTALLATION P
Refer to BRC-151, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• When installing, make sure there is no foreign material such as iron chips on and in the mounting
hole of the wheel sensor. Make sure no foreign material has been caught in the sensor rotor. Remove
any foreign material and clean the mount.
BRC-151
WHEEL SENSOR
• Completely push in rubber grommets of strut bracket and body bracket until they lock when install-
ing wheel sensor so that the wheel sensor harness will not be twisted. Install grommet groove onto
bracket with orange line on the harness facing bracket opening (mounting hole). There should be no
twists in the harness when installed.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003767302
JSFIA0222GB
1. Rear LH wheel sensor connector 2. Rear LH wheel sensor
: Vehicle front
NOTE:
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003767303
REMOVAL
Be careful with the following when removing sensor.
CAUTION:
sensor harness.
INSTALLATION
Refer to BRC-152, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
When installing, make sure there is no foreign material such as iron chips on and in the mounting hole
of the wheel sensor. Make sure no foreign material has been caught in the sensor rotor. Remove any
foreign material and clean the mount.
BRC-152
SENSOR ROTOR
SENSOR ROTOR
A
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003767304
B
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003767305
C
REMOVAL
FAX-8, "Exploded View". D
INSTALLATION
Sensor rotor cannot be disassembled. Install the sensor rotor together with hub bearing assembly. Refer to E
REAR SENSOR ROTOR
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003767306
BRC
Refer to RAX-4, "Exploded View".

G
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003767307
REMOVAL
H
INSTALLATION I
Sensor rotor cannot be disassembled. Install the sensor rotor together with hub bearing assembly. Refer to
J
BRC-153
JSFIA0223GB
1. ABS actuator and electric unit (control 2. Bushing 3. Bracket

unit)
A. From master cylinder secondary side B. From master cylinder primary side C. To front LH brake caliper
D. To rear RH brake caliper E. To rear LH brake caliper F. To front RH brake caliper
: Vehicle front
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
aged. To install, use flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench.
3. Loosen brake tube flare nuts, then remove brake tubes from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
4. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) bracket mounting nuts.
5. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BRC-154
aged. To install, use flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. A
B
• After installing harness connector in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), make sure
connector is securely locked.
• When replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), make sure to adjust neutral position of
steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL C
POSITION : Description".
Install ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) as per the follow-
ing steps. D
1. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt (1) because the bracket (2) is
temporarily being hold.
2. Tighten mounting bolt (3) while holding the bracket. E
3. Tighten mounting bolts to the specified torque in the order of (4),
(1).
BRC
JSFIA0271ZZ
BRC-155
YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR
YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR
JSFIA0224GB
1. Yaw rate/side G sensor 2. Bracket
: Vehicle front
Refer to GI section GI-4, "Components" for symbol makes in the figure.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Do not drop or strike yaw rate/side G sensor, or do not use power tool etc., because yaw rate/side G
sensor is sensitive to the impact.
1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-54, "REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Exploded View".
3. Disconnect yaw rate/side G sensor harness connector.
4. Remove mounting nuts. Remove yaw rate/side G sensor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not drop or strike yaw rate/side G sensor, or do not use power tool etc., because yaw rate/side G
sensor is sensitive to the impact.
BRC-156
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
JSFIA0237GB
E
1. Steering angle sensor
: Vehicle front BRC


G
REMOVAL
1. Remove spiral cable assembly. Refer to SR-9, "Exploded View". H
2. Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. I
CAUTION:
• Never reuse steering angle sensor.
• When installing steering angle sensor, tighten it to the specified torque with an electric screwdriver. J
Be sure to tighten it completely with no floating and tilting.
• After work, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-66,
"ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
K
BRC-157
STEERING
SECTION
STEERING SYSTEM
ST B
E
CONTENTS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2 LOWER SHAFT ................................................ 16 F
Exploded View .........................................................16
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Removal and Installation .........................................16
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 2 Inspection ................................................................17 ST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ................... 18
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 Exploded View .........................................................18
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................20
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Inspection ................................................................26
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ....................... 28
J
Service Notice or Precautions for Steering System Disassembly and Assembly .....................................29
...... 3 Inspection ................................................................32
PREPARATION ............................................ 5 HYDRAULIC LINE ............................................ 34 K

Exploded View .........................................................34
PREPARATION ................................................... 5 Removal and Installation .........................................35
Special Service Tools ................................................ 5
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS L
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................... 7 (SDS) ............................................................ 37
POWER STEERING FLUID ................................ 7 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS M
Inspection .................................................................. 7 (SDS) ................................................................. 37
STEERING WHEEL ............................................. 9 General Specifications .............................................37
Inspection .................................................................. 9 Steering Wheel Axial End Play and Play .................37 N
Steering Wheel Turning Force .................................37
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 12 Steering Angle .........................................................37
Steering Column Length ..........................................37
STEERING WHEEL ............................................12 O
Steering Column Mounting Dimensions ..................37
Exploded View ........................................................ 12 Steering Column Operating Range .........................37
Removal and Installation ......................................... 12 Lower Shaft Sliding Range ......................................38
Rack Sliding Force ..................................................38 P
STEERING COLUMN .........................................13 Rack Stroke .............................................................38
Exploded View ........................................................ 13 Socket Swing Force and Rotating Torque ...............38
Removal and Installation ......................................... 13 Socket Axial End Play .............................................38
Inspection ................................................................ 14 Inner Socket Length ................................................38
Relief Oil Pressure ...................................................38
ST-1
Symptom
×: Applicable
Reference
Steering
Noise
Shake
Judder
Shimmy
Vibration
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
Fluid level ST-7, "Inspection"
×
Air in hydraulic system ST-7, "Inspection"
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
×
Outer/inner socket ball joint swinging torque ST-26, "Inspection"
×
Outer/inner socket ball joint rotating torque ST-26, "Inspection"
×
Outer/inner socket ball joint end play ST-26, "Inspection"
×
Steering fluid leakage ST-7, "Inspection"
ST-2
×
Steering wheel play ST-9, "Inspection"
×
Steering gear rack sliding force ST-9, "Inspection"
×
Drive belt looseness EM-12, "Checking"
×
×
×
Improper steering wheel ST-9, "Inspection"
Improper installation or looseness of tilt lock lever —
×
×
×
×
Mounting looseness ST-18, "Exploded View"
×
×
Steering column deformation or damage ST-14, "Inspection"
×
×
Improper installation or looseness of steering column ST-13, "Exploded View"
×
×
Steering linkage looseness ST-18, "Exploded View"
×
×
×
PROPELLER SHAFT NVH in DLN section.
×
DIFFERENTIAL NVH in DLN section.
×
×
×
×
×
AXLE and SUSPENSION NVH in FAX, RAX, FSU, RSU section.
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
TIRE NVH in WT section.
×
×
×
× ROAD WHEEL NVH in WT section.
×
×
×
DRIVE SHAFT NVH in FAX section.
×
×
×
×
BRAKE NVH in BR section.

INFOID:0000000003806305
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors.
ST
INFOID:0000000003806307
NOTE: H
I
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: L
2. Carry the Intelligent Key or insert it to the key slot and turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position.
Service Notice or Precautions for Steering System INFOID:0000000003806308
P
CAUTION:
• In case of removing steering gear assembly, make the final tightening with grounded and unloaded
vehicle condition, and then check wheel alignment.
• Observe the following precautions when disassembling.
- Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit.
- Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
ST-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
- For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack.
- Use nylon cloth or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might inter-
fere with their operation.
- Never reuse non-reusable parts.
- Before assembling, apply the specified grease to the directed parts.
ST-4
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
Tool number
Description C
Tool name
ST27180001 Removing steering wheel
Steering wheel puller
D
E
ZZA0819D
ST3127S000 Inspecting sliding torque, steering torque, and

Preload gauge rotating torque for ball joint F
ST
ZZA0806D
H
KV48104400 Installing rack Teflon ring
Teflon ring correcting tool
a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia. I
c: 100 mm (3.94 in)
J
S-NT550
KV48103400 Inspecting rotating torque

Preload adapter
K
ZZA0824D
ST35300000 Installing oil pump oil seal M

Drift
a: 45.1 mm (1.776 in) dia.
b: 59.0 mm (2.323 in) dia.
N
ZZA0881D O
ST-5
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV48103500 Measuring oil pump relief pressure
Oil pressure gauge
S-NT547
KV48102500 Measuring oil pump relief pressure

Oil pressure gauge adapter
S-NT542
ST-6
POWER STEERING FLUID
B
FLUID LEVEL
1. Check fluid level with engine stopped. C
2. Ensure that fluid level is between MIN and MAX.
3. Fluid levels at HOT and COLD are different. Do not confuse
them. D
HOT (A) : Fluid temperature 50 – 80°C (122 – 176°F)

COLD (B) : Fluid temperature 0 – 30°C (32 – 86°F) E
Recommended fluid : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids

and Lubricants". F
Fluid capacity : Refer to ST-37, "General ALGIA0002GB
Specifications".
ST
CAUTION:
• The fluid level should not exceed the MAX line. Excessive fluid causes fluid leakage from the
cap.
• Never reuse drained power steering fluid. H
FLUID LEAKAGE
Check hydraulic connections for fluid leakage, cracks, damage,
looseness, or wear. I
1. Run the engine until the fluid temperature reaches 50 to 80°C
(122 to 176°F) in reservoir tank, and keep engine speed idle.
J
2. Turn steering wheel several times from full left stop to full right
stop.
3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and
carefully check for fluid leakage. K
CAUTION:
Never hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more
than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that power steer- SGIA0506E
L
ing oil pump assembly may be damaged.)
4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not overtighten con-
nector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. M
5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to ST-32, "Inspection".
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid leaked from steering gear.
AIR BLEEDING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM N
If air bleeding is not complete, the following symptoms can be observed.
• Bubbles are created in reservoir tank.
• Clicking noise can be heard from oil pump. O
• Excessive buzzing in the oil pump.
NOTE:
Fluid noise may occur in the steering gear or oil pump. This does not affect performance or durability of the
P
system.
1. Turn steering wheel several times from full left stop to full right stop with engine off.
CAUTION:
Fill reservoir tank with a sufficient amount of fluid so that fluid level is not below the MIN line while
turning steering wheel.
2. Start the engine and hold steering wheel at each lock position for 3 second at idle to check for fluid leak-
age.
ST-7
3. Repeat step 2 above several times at approximately 3 second intervals.
CAUTION:
Never hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possi-
bility that oil pump may be damaged.)
4. Check fluid for bubbles and white contamination.
5. Stop the engine if bubbles and white contamination do not drain out. Perform step 2 and 3 above after
waiting until bubbles and white contamination drain out.
6. Stop the engine, and then check fluid level.
ST-8
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL
A
STEERING WHEEL AXIAL END PLAY B

1. Check installation conditions of steering gear assembly, front suspension assembly, axle and steering col-
umn assembly.
2. Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to the axial C
direction.
Standard D
Steering wheel axial end : Refer to ST-37, "Steering
play Wheel Axial End Play and
Play". E
3. Check the following items when steering wheel axial end play is out of the standard.
• Check the steering column assembly mounting condition. Refer to ST-13, "Exploded View".
• Check steering gear assembly mounting condition for looseness. Refer to ST-18, "Exploded View". F
STEERING WHEEL PLAY

1. Turn steering wheel so that front wheels come to the straight-ahead position. ST
2. Start the engine and lightly turn steering wheel to the left and right until front wheels start to move.
3. Measure steering wheel movement on the outer circumference.
H
Standard
Steering wheel play : Refer to ST-37, "Steering
Wheel Axial End Play and I
Play".
4. Check the following items when steering wheel play is out of the standard.
• Check backlash for each joint of steering column assembly. J
• Check installation condition of steering gear assembly.
NEUTRAL POSITION STEERING WHEEL
K
1. Check that steering gear assembly, steering column assembly and steering wheel are installed in the cor-
rect position.
2. Perform neutral position inspection after wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Wheel Alignment Inspection". L
3. Set the vehicle to the straight-ahead position and confirm steering wheel is in the neutral position.
4. Loosen outer socket lock nut and turn inner socket to left and right equally to make fine adjustments if
steering wheel is not in the neutral position. M
STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE
1. Park the vehicle on a level and dry surface, set parking brake.
N
2. Tires need to be inflated normal pressure. Refer to WT-5, "Tire Air Pressure".
3. Start the engine.
4. Bring power steering fluid up to adequate operating temperature. O
Fluid temperature : 50 – 80°C (122 – 176°F)

P
ST-9
STEERING WHEEL
5. Check steering wheel turning force when steering wheel has
been turned 540° from neutral position.
Standard
Steering wheel turning : Refer to ST-37, "Steering
force Wheel Turning Force".
NOTE:
Multiply the distance (L) from the hook of spring balance to the
center of steering wheel by the measurement value with a spring
balance. JSGIA0027ZZ
6. If steering wheel turning force is out of the specification, check
rack sliding force and relief hydraulic pressure of oil pump. Regarding relief hydraulic pressure of oil
pump, refer to ST-32, "Inspection".
RACK SLIDING FORCE
1. Disconnect lower joint and steering knuckle from steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-16, "Exploded
View".
2. Start and run the engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal operating temperature.
Fluid temperature : 50 – 80°C (122 – 176°F)

3. While pulling outer socket slowly in ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) range
from neutral position, make sure rack sliding force is within
specification.
Standard
Rack sliding force : Refer to ST-38, "Rack
Sliding Force".
4. If rack sliding force is not within specification, overhaul steering
gear assembly.
SST090B
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE

1. Check front wheel turning angle after toe-in inspection. Refer to FSU-7, "Wheel Alignment Inspection".
2. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges and rear wheels on
stands, so that vehicle can be level.
3. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH
and RH road wheels.
FAA0016D
4. With the engine at idle, turn steering wheel from full left stop to
full right stop and measure the turning angles.
Standard
Inner wheel (Angle: A) : Refer to ST-37, "Steering
Angle".
Outer wheel (Angle: B) : Refer to ST-37, "Steering
Angle".
SGIA0055E
ST-10
STEERING WHEEL
5. Check the following items when turning angle is out of the stan-
dard. A
a. Check the neutral position of the rack stroke (L).
Standard B
L : Refer to ST-38, "Rack
Stroke".
C
b. Disassemble steering gear assembly to check the cause that
rack stroke is outside of the standard.
• Steering angles are not adjustable. Check steering gear SGIA0629J
assembly, steering column assembly and front suspension D

components for wear or damage if any of the turning angles are different from the specified value.
Replace any of them, if any non-standard condition exists.
E
ST
ST-11
STEERING WHEEL
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
STEERING WHEEL
JSGIA0303GB
1. Steering wheel
REMOVAL
NOTE:
When reconnecting spiral cable, fix cable with a tape so that fixing case and rotating part keep aligned. This
will omit neutral position alignment procedure during spiral cable installation.
1. Set the vehicle to the straight-ahead position.
2. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-6, "Exploded View".
3. Remove steering wheel lock nut after steering is locked.
4. Remove steering wheel with the steering wheel puller (A) (SST:
ST27180001).
JSGIA0391ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Never twist spiral cable freely on excessively after it becomes tight (doing so may cause the cable to
tear off).
NOTE:
Check the spiral cable neutral position after replacing or rotating spiral cable. Refer to SR-9, "Exploded View".
ST-12
STEERING COLUMN
STEERING COLUMN
A
ST
I
JSGIA0386GB
1. Steering column assembly 2. Clip 3. Clip J

4. Upper joint 5. Spring

K
REMOVAL L
2. Place the tilt to the highest level.
M
3. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-6, "Exploded View".
4. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View".
5. Remove the instrument driver lower panel. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". N
6. Remove the steering column cover. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
7. Remove spiral cable. Refer to SR-9, "Exploded View".
8. Remove combination switch. Refer to BCS-79, "Exploded View". O
ST-13
STEERING COLUMN
9. Remove knee protector (1).
: Bolt
10. Disconnect each switch harness connectors installed to steering

column assembly.
11. Remove the upper joint mounting bolt and nut (lower shaft side),
and separate the joint from lower shaft.
12. Remove steering column assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never give axial impact to steering column assembly dur- JSGIA0344ZZ
ing removal.
• Never move steering gear assembly when removing steering column assembly.
INSTALLATION
• Make sure there is no space between clip (1) and steering column assembly (2).
CAUTION:
Never reuse the clip.
JSGIA0346ZZ
• Tighten the mounting nuts in the order shown in the figure steering
member (1) when installing the steering column assembly (2).
• Be careful of the following points when installing the steering col-
umn assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never give axial impact to steering column assembly during
installation.
• Never move steering gear assembly.
• Never reuse the joint mounting nut (lower shaft side).
• Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-66,
"ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL
JSGIA0387ZZ
POSITION : Special Repair Requirement" (VDC models).

• Check each part of steering column assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary.
• Measure steering column assembly rotating torque using a preload gauge (SST: ST3127S000). Replace
steering column assembly if outside the standard.
Standard
Rotating torque : Refer to ST-37, "Steering
Column Operating
Range".
ST-14
STEERING COLUMN
• Measure the length (L) as shown, if vehicle has been involved in a
minor collision. Replace steering column assembly if out side the A
standard.
Standard B
L : Refer to ST-37, "Steering
Column Length".
C
JSGIA0388ZZ
D
• Install the bracket (1) and steering column housing (2) so that the
clearance (A) is within the specified range as described below.
Replace steering column assembly if out side the standard. E
Standard
A : Refer to ST-37, "Steering F
Column Mounting Dimen-
sions".
ST
JSGIA0389ZZ

H
• Check each part of steering column assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary.
• Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning force, and front wheel
turning angle. Refer to ST-9, "Inspection".
• Check tilt mechanism operating range (L), as shown in the figure. I
Standard
L : Refer to ST-37, "Steering J
Column Operating
Range".
K
JSGIA0390ZZ
L
ST-15
LOWER SHAFT
LOWER SHAFT
JSGIA0392GB
1. Steering column assembly 2. Hole cover seal 3. Clamp

4. Hole cover 5. Lower shaft
REMOVAL
2. Fix the steering wheel.
3. Remove upper joint fixing bolt and nut (lower shaft side).
4. Separate the lower shaft from the steering gear assembly by
sliding the slide shaft (A: sliding range).
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while sepa-
rating steering column assembly and steering column
assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to
avoid turning.
5. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3,
"Exploded View".
6. Remove the side brake pedal bracket and wire clamp stay.
7. Remove the hole cover mounting nuts. JSGIA0393ZZ
8. Remove the hole cover seal, clamp and hole cover.

9. Remove lower shaft joint fixing bolt (steering gear side).
10. Remove the lower shaft.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column assembly and steer-
ing gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
ST-16
LOWER SHAFT
• After lower shaft (steering gear side) fitted, make sure there is not
gap (A) between the yoke (1), lower shaft (2), joint fixing bolt (3). A
JSGIA0180ZZ
D
• When installing lower joint to steering gear assembly, follow the procedure listed below.
- Set rack of steering gear in the neutral position.
NOTE: E
To get the neutral position of rack, turn gear-sub assembly and measure the distance of inner socket, and
then measure the intermediate position of the distance.
- Align rear cover cap projection (A) with the marking position of
gear housing assembly (B). F
: Bolt
ST
- Install slit part of lower joint (C) aligning with the rear cover cap
projection (A). Make sure that the slit part of lower joint (C) is
aligned with rear cover cap projection (A) and the marking position
of gear housing assembly (B). H
• Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-66,
"ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL
POSITION : Special Repair Requirement". JSGIA0313ZZ
I
• Check the following after installation:
- Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the end of the left and right.
- Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning force, and front wheel
turning angle. Refer to ST-9, "Inspection". J
K
• Check the length (A) (extended position) of the lower shaft.
Standard
L
A : Refer to ST-38, "Lower
Shaft Sliding Range".
• Check each part of lower shaft for damage or other malfunctions. M
Replace if there are.
N
JSGIA0405ZZ
ST-17
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
REMOVAL
JSGIA0394GB
1. Steering gear assembly 2. cotter pin
: Vehicle front
DISASSEMBLY
JSGIA0396GB
1. Low pressure piping 2. Rear cover cap 3. Gear-sub assembly

4. Power steering solenoid valve 5. O-ring 6. Adjusting screw
7. Spring 8. Retainer 9. Outer socket
ST-18
10. Boot clamp 11. Boot 12. Inner socket
13. Boot clamp (stainless wire) 14. Spacer 15. Cylinder tube A
16. Gear housing assembly 17. Rack oil seal 18. Rack assembly
19. Rack Teflon ring 20. O-ring 21. End cover assembly
B
: Apply power steering fluid.
: Apply Genuine Liquid Gasket, Three Bond 1111B or equivalent.

C
: Apply Genuine High Strength Thread Locking Sealant, Loctite 271 or equivalent.
D
REMOVAL E

2. Remove front tires.
F
3. Remove splash guards (RH and LH). Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View".
5. Remove heat insulator from front floor. ST
6. Remove cotter pin (1), and then loosen the nuts.
7. Remove steering outer socket (2) from steering knuckle (3) so
as not to damage ball joint boot (4) using suitable ball joint H
remover.
CAUTION:
Temporarily tighten the nut to prevent damage to threads
I
and to prevent the ball joint remover from suddenly coming
off.
8. Remove high pressure piping and low pressure hose of hydrau-
lic piping, and then drain power steering fluid. J
JSGIA0320ZZ
9. Remove steering hydraulic piping bracket from front steering K

gear assembly.
: Bolt L
JSGIA0321ZZ N
10. Remove power steering solenoid valve harness connector and harness clip.
11. Separate the lower shaft from the steering gear assembly by sliding the slide shaft. O
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column assembly and
steering gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
P
12. Remove the front stabilizer assembly. Refer to FSU-16, "Exploded View".
13. Remove the mounting bolts and nuts of steering gear assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column assembly and steer-
ing gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
ST-19
• When installing low pressure hose (1), refer to the figure.
CAUTION:
• Never apply fluid to the hose (1) and tube (2).
• Insert hose securely until it contacts spool (A) of tube.
• Leave clearance (L) when installing clamp (3).
Standard
L : 3 – 8 mm (0.12 – 0.31 in)
JSGIA0118ZZ
• When installing lower joint to steering gear assembly, follow the procedure listed below.
- Set rack of steering gear in the neutral position.
NOTE:
To get the neutral position of rack, turn gear-sub assembly and measure the distance of inner socket, and
then measure the intermediate position of the distance.
- Align rear cover cap projection (A) with the marking position of
gear housing assembly (B).
: Bolt
- Install slit part of lower joint (C) aligning with the rear cover cap
projection (A). Make sure that the slit part of lower joint (C) is
aligned with rear cover cap projection (A) and the marking position
of gear housing assembly (B).
• After installation, bleed air from the steering hydraulic system.
Refer to ST-32, "Inspection".
• Perform final tightening of nuts and bolts on each part under JSGIA0111ZZ
unladen conditions with tires on level ground when removing steer-

ing gear assembly. Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Wheel Alignment Inspection".
• Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor after checking wheel alignment. Refer to BRC-66, "ADJUST-
MENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Special Repair Requirement" (VDC mod-
els).
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove low pressure piping.
CAUTION:
• Disassemble and assemble steering gear assembly by fixing the mounting area with a vise using
copper plates.
• Clean steering gear assembly with kerosene before disassembling. Be careful to avoid splash-
ing or applying any kerosene over connector of discharge port or return port.
2. Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly.
3. Remove rear cover cap from gear-sub assembly.
4. Measure adjusting screw height “H”, and loosen adjusting
screw.
CAUTION:
• Never loosen adjusting screw 2 turns or more.
• Replace steering gear assembly if adjusting screw is
loosened 2 turns or more and it is removed.
5. Remove gear-sub assembly from gear housing assembly.
6. Remove O-ring from gear housing assembly.
7. Loosen outer socket lock nut, and remove outer socket.
8. Remove boot clamps, and then remove boot from inner socket. SGIA0624E
CAUTION:
ST-20
Never damage inner socket and gear housing assembly when removing boot. Inner socket and
gear housing assembly must be replaced if inner socket and gear housing assembly are damaged A
because it may cause foreign material interfusion.
9. Remove inner socket and spacer from gear housing assembly.
10. Drill out the clinching part of gear housing assembly (end cover B
assembly side) outer rim with a 3 mm (0.12 in) drill bit. [Drill for
approximately 1.5 mm (0.059 in) depth.]
C
STC0013D E
11. Remove end cover assembly with a 36 mm (1.42 in) open head
(suitable tool).
F
CAUTION:
Never damage rack assembly surface when removing. Rack
assembly must be replaced if damaged because it may
cause fluid leakage. ST
12. Pull rack assembly together with rack oil seal (outer side) out
from gear housing assembly.
CAUTION: H
Never damage cylinder inner wall when remove rack
assembly. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if dam- SST081B
aged because it may cause fluid leakage.
I
13. Heat rack Teflon ring to approximately 40°C (104°F) with a
dryer, and remove rack Teflon ring and O-ring from rack assem-
bly.
CAUTION: J
Never damage rack assembly. Rack assembly must be
replaced if damaged because it cause fluid leakage.
K
L
SGIA0151E
14. Push rack oil seal inside with a 29 mm (1.14 in) socket and an
extension bar to push out rack oil seal (inner side) from gear M
housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Never damage gear housing assembly and cylinder inner N
wall. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if damaged
because it may cause fluid leakage.
O
SGIA0179E
P
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply recommended fluid to O-ring. Put an O-ring into a rack Teflon ring.
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
ST-21
2. Heat rack Teflon ring to approximately 40°C (104°C) with a
dryer. Assemble it to mounting groove of rack assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse rack Teflon ring.
SGIA0153E
3. Install the Teflon ring correcting tool (A) (SST: KV48104400)

from tooth side of rack fit rack Teflon ring (1) on rack. Compress
the with tool.
SGIA1324E
4. Apply recommended grease to rack oil seal, and then install

rack oil seal in the following procedure. Then assemble rack
assembly to gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
• Install rack oil seal in a direction so that the lip of inner oil
seal and the lip of outer oil seal face each other.
• Never damage retainer sliding surface by rack assembly.
Replace gear housing assembly if damaged.
• Never damage gear housing assembly inner wall by rack
assembly. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if
damaged because it may cause fluid leakage.
SGIA0205E
a. Wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm

(3.94 in)]. Around rack assembly teeth to avoid damaging rack
oil seal (inner). Install rack oil seal over sheet. Then, pull OHP
sheet along with rack oil seal until they pass rack assembly
teeth, and remove OHP sheet.
SGIA0157E
b. Insert rack oil seal (inner) (1) into rack assembly piston (2).
c. Push retainer to adjusting screw side by hand, and move the
rack assembly inside the gear housing assembly so that the
rack oil seal (inner) can be pressed against the gear housing
assembly.
JSGIA0323ZZ
ST-22
d. Wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm
(3.94 in)]. Around the edge to avoid damaging rack oil seal A
(outer). Install rack oil seal over sheet. Then, pull oil seal along
with OHP sheet until they pass rack edge, and remove OHP
sheet. B
e. Install end cover assembly to rack edge, and move rack oil seal
(outer) until it contacts with gear housing assembly.
C
SGIA0157E
D
5. Tighten end cover assembly to specified torque using a 36 mm
(1.42 in) open head (suitable tool).
CAUTION: E
Never damage rack assembly. Replace it if damaged
because it may cause fluid leakage.
F
ST
SST081B
6. Crimp gear housing assembly at one point using a punch as H

shown in the figure so as to prevent end cover assembly from
getting loose after tightening end cover assembly.
7. Apply recommended fluid to O-ring, and then install O-ring to I
gear housing assembly.
8. Install gear-sub assembly to gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
In order to protect oil seal from any damage, insert gear- J
sub assembly straightly.
9. Install inner socket and spacer to gear housing assembly with
the following procedure. SGIA0871E K
a. Apply recommended thread locking sealant into the thread of inner socket.
Use Genuine High Strength Thread Locking Sealant, Loctite 271 or equivalent.
b. Screw inner socket into rack part and tighten at the specified torque. L
10. Decide on the neutral position of the rack stroke (L).
M
Standard
L : Refer to ST-38, "Rack
Stroke".
N
11. Install rear cover cap to gear sub-assembly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the projection of rear cover cap is aligned
O
with the marking position of gear housing assembly.
SGIA0877E
ST-23
12. Apply recommended sealant into the thread of adjusting screw
(2 turns thread), and then screw in the adjusting screw until it
reaches height “H” from gear housing assembly measured
before disassembling.
Use Genuine Liquid Gasket, Three Bond 1111B or equiva-
lent.
13. Move rack assembly 10 strokes throughout the full stroke so that
the parts can fit with each other.
SGIA0624E
14. Adjust pinion rotating torque with the following procedure.

a. Measure pinion rotating torque within ±180° of neutral position
of the rack assembly using Tools. Stop the gear at the point
where highest torque is read.
A: Preload gauge (SST: ST3127S000)

B: Preload adapter (SST: KV48103400)
b. Loosen adjusting screw and retighten to 5.4 N·m (0.55 kg-m, 48
in-lb), and then loosen by 20 to 40°.
SGIA1383E
c. Measure pinion rotating torque using Tools to make sure that the
measured value is within the standard. Readjust if the value is
outside the standard. Replace steering gear assembly, if the
value is outside the standard after readjusting, or adjusting
screw rotating torque is 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb) or less.
Pinion rotating torque

Around neutral position : 2.27 – 3.05 N·m (0.24 –
(within±100°) average (A) 0.31 kg-m, 20 – 26 in-lb)
Maximum variation (B) : 0.98 N·m (0.10 kg-m, 9.0 SGIA0936E
in-lb)
d. Apply recommended liquid gasket to inner socket and turn pinion fully to left with inner socket installed to
gear housing assembly.
e. Install dial indicator at 5 mm (0.20 in) (L) from the edge of gear
housing assembly (1), and tooth point.
f. Measure vertical movement of rack assembly when pinion is
turned clockwise with torque of 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb).
Readjust adjusting screw angle if the measured value is outside
the standard.
Vertical movement : 0.265 mm (0.0104 in)

• If reading is outside of the specification, readjust screw angle
with adjusting screw.
JSGIA0104ZZ
CAUTION:
• If reading is still outside of specification, or if the rotating torque of adjusting screw is less
than 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb), replace steering gear assembly.
• Never turn adjusting screw more than twice.
• Replace steering gear assembly when adjusting screw is removed or turned more than twice.
ST-24
15. Install large end of boot to gear housing assembly.
16. Install small end of boot to inner socket boot mounting groove. A
17. Install boot clamp to boot small end.
SGIA1325E
D
18. Install boot clamp to the large side of boot with the following procedure.
CAUTION:
Never reuse boot clamp.
E
a. Tighten large side of boot with boot clamp (stainless wire).
Wire length (L) : 370 mm (14.57 in) F

b. Wrap clamp around boot groove for two turns. Insert a flat-
bladed screwdriver in loops on both ends of wire. Twist 4 to 4.5
turns while pulling them with force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, ST
22 lb).
H
SGIA0163E
c. Twist boot clamp as shown. Pay attention to relationship

between winding and twisting directions. I
SGIA0164E
L
d. Twisted area (A) of clamp is in the opposite side of adjusting
screw (1) as shown in the figure (to prevent contact with other
parts). M
O
JSGIA0324ZZ
ST-25
e. Bent cut end of the wire toward rack axial as shown in the figure
after twisting the wire 4 to 4.5 turns so that cut end does not con-
tact with boot.
STC0124D
19. Install cylinder tubes to gear housing assembly.

20. Install low pressure piping.
21. Adjust inner socket to standard length (L), and then tighten lock
nut to the specified torque. Check length again after tightening
lock nut.
Standard
L : Refer to ST-38, "Inner
Socket Length".
CAUTION:
Adjust toe-in after this procedure. The length achieved after
toe-in adjustment is not necessary the above value. SGIA0167E

• Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the end of the left and right.
• Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning force, and front wheel
turning angle. Refer to ST-9, "Inspection".
• Check the fluid level, fluid leakage, and air bleeding hydraulic system. Refer to ST-7, "Inspection".
Boot
Check boot for cracks, and replace it if a malfunction is detected.
Rack Assembly
Check rack for damage or wear, and replace it if a malfunction is detected.
Gear-Sub Assembly
• Check gear-sub assembly for damage or wear, and replace it if a malfunction is detected.
• Rotate gear-sub assembly and check for torque variation or rattle, and replace it if a malfunction is detected.
Gear Housing Assembly
Check gear housing assembly for damage and scratches (inner wall). Replace if there are.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket
Check the following items and replace the component if it does not meet the standard.
BALL JOINT SWINGING TORQUE
ST-26
Hook a spring balance at the point shown in the figure and pull the
spring balance. Make sure that the spring balance reads the speci- A
fied value when ball stud and inner socket start to move. Replace
outer socket and inner socket if they are outside the standard.
B
Standard
(Measuring point of outer socket: Stud cotter pin
mounting hole)
C
Outer socket : Refer to ST-38, "Socket
Swing Force and Rotating
SGIA0896E
Torque". D
Standard
(Measuring point of inner socket: “*” mark shown in E
the figure)
Inner socket : Refer to ST-38, "Socket
Swing Force and Rotating F
Torque".
BALL JOINT ROTATING TORQUE ST

Make sure that the reading is within the following specified range
using preload gauge (A) (SST: ST3127S000). Replace outer socket
if the reading is outside the specified value. H
Standard
Rotating torque : Refer to ST-38, "Socket I
Swing Force and Rotating
Torque".
J
SGIA1382E
BALL JOINT AXIAL END PLAY

Apply an axial load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) to ball stud. Using a dial K
gauge, measure amount of stud movement, and then make sure that
the value is within the following specified range. Replace outer
socket (1) and inner socket (2) if the measured value is outside the L
standard.
Standard M
Outer socket : Refer to ST-38, "Socket Axial
End Play".
Inner socket : Refer to ST-38, "Socket Axial N
JSGIA0109ZZ
End Play".
ST-27
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
REMOVAL
JSGIA0326GB
1. Power steering oil pump
: Vehicle front
DISASSEMBLY
JSGIA0408GB
1. Pulley 2. Oil seal 3. Front bracket

4. Suction pipe 5. O-ring 6. Body assembly
7. Flow control valve spring 8. Flow control valve 9. Flow control valve sub assembly
ST-28
10. O-ring 11. O-ring 12. Front side plate
13. Vane 14. Rotor 15. Cam ring A
16. Dowel pin 17. Rear side plate 18. O-ring
19. Teflon ring 20. Rear cover 21. Rear bracket
22. Cartridge B
A. Oil seal lip
: Apply power steering fluid. C

D
REMOVAL E
1. Drain power steering fluid from reservoir tank.
2. Remove front tires.
3. Remove splash guard. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View". F
4. Loosen drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove drive belt from oil pump pulley.
ST
6. Remove copper washers and eye bolt (drain fluid from their pipings).
7. Remove suction hose (drain fluid from their pipings).
8. Remove oil pump mounting bolts, and then remove oil pump. H
CAUTION:
Never damage drive shaft boot.
INSTALLATION I
• When installing suction hoses (1), refer to the figure.
CAUTION:
J
• Insert hose securely until it contacts spool (A) of tube.
K
Standard
L : 3 – 8 mm (0.12 – 0.31 in)
L
JSGIA0118ZZ
M
• When installing eye bolt (1) and copper washers (2) to oil pump
(3), refer to the figure.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse copper washer. N
• Apply power steering fluid to around copper washer, then
install eye bolt.
• Install eye bolt with eye joint (assembled to high pressure O
hose) (B) protrusion (A) facing with pump side cutout, and
then tighten it to the specified torque after tightening by
hand. Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View".
• Securely insert harness connector to pressure sensor. P
SGIA1379E
• Adjust belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment".
• Check fluid level, fluid leakage and air bleeding hydraulic system after the installation. Refer to ST-7,
"Inspection".
DISASSEMBLY
ST-29
1. Remove rear cover mounting bolts, and then remove rear cover from body assembly.
CAUTION:
• Fix oil pump with a vise if necessary.
• Use copper plates when fixing with a vise.
2. Remove O-ring from body assembly.
3. Remove rear side plate from cartridge, and then remove Teflon ring and O-ring from rear side plate.
4. Remove rotor snap ring using a snap ring pliers, and remove
pulley from body assembly.
CAUTION:
Remove pulley so as not to be damaged when removing
rotor snap ring.
SGIA0059E
5. Remove cartridge and front side plate.

6. Remove flow control valve (1), flow control valve spring (2) and
flow control valve sub assembly (3) from body assembly (4).
CAUTION:
Never drop and damage flow control valve A and flow con-
trol valve B assembly when removing.
7. Remove oil seal from body assembly.
8. Remove mounting bolt of suction pipe, and then remove suction
pipe from body assembly.
9. Remove O-ring from body assembly.
10. Remove bracket mounting bolts, and then remove bracket from JSGIA0365ZZ
body assembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply recommended grease to oil seal lips. Apply recommended
fluid to around oil seal, and then install oil seal to body assembly
using a drift (SST: ST35300000).
CAUTION:
• Fix oil pump with a vise if necessary.
• Use copper plates when fixing with a vise.
2. Install bracket to body assembly.
3. If dowel pin has been removed, insert it into body assembly by
hand. If it cannot be inserted by hand, lightly tap with a hammer.
STC0914D
4. Install flow control valve (1), flow control valve spring (2) and
flow control valve sub assembly (3) to body assembly (4).
JSGIA0365ZZ
ST-30
5. Install front side plate (3) with dowel pin (2) on flow control valve
(1) side as shown in the figure aligning with front side plate cut- A
out (A) to body assembly (4).
SGIA1189E
D
6. Install cam ring as shown in the figure.
7. Install pulley to body assembly.
CAUTION: E
Never damage oil seal when installing pulley.
ST
SGIA0612E
8. Install rotor so that mark faces body assembly, and then install it
H
to pulley shaft.
SGIA0989E
K
9. Install vane to rotor so that arc of vane faces cam ring side.
N
SGIA0613E
10. Install rotor snap ring to slit of pulley shaft using a hammer and a O
10 mm (0.39 in) box.
CAUTION:
• Never damage rotor and pulley shaft. P
• Oil pump assembly must be replaced if rotor is damaged.
SGIA0063E
ST-31
11. Install rear side plate with dowel pin A on flow control valve side
as shown in the figure aligning with rear side plate cutout B to
cartridge.
12. Apply recommended fluid to O-ring, and then install O-ring to
body assembly.
rear side plate.
14. Apply recommended fluid to Teflon ring, and then install Teflon
ring to rear side plate.
15. Install rear cover to body assembly. PGIA0035E
body assembly.
17. Install suction pipe to body assembly.
RELIEF OIL PRESSURE

CAUTION:
Make sure that belt tension is normal before starting the following procedure.
1. Connect the oil pressure gauge (SST: KV48103500) and the oil
pressure gauge adapter (SST: KV48102500) between oil pump
discharge connector and high-pressure hose. Bleed air from the
hydraulic circuit while opening valve fully. Refer to ST-7,
"Inspection".
2. Start the engine. Run the engine until oil temperature reaches
50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F).
CAUTION:
• Leave the valve of the oil pressure gauge fully open while
starting and running the engine. If engine is started with
the valve closed, the hydraulic pressure in oil pump goes
up to the relief pressure along with unusual increase of oil
temperature.
• Be sure to keep hose clear of belts and other parts when
engine is started.
3. Fully close the oil pressure gauge valve with engine at idle and
measure the relief oil pressure.
Standard
Relief oil pressure : Refer to ST-38, "Relief Oil
Pressure".
CAUTION: SGIA1225E
Never keep valve closed for 10 seconds or longer.

4. Open the valve slowly after measuring. Repair oil pump if the relief oil pressure is outside the standard.
Refer to ST-29, "Disassembly and Assembly".
5. Disconnect the oil pressure gauge from hydraulic circuit.
6. When installing eye bolt (1) and copper washers (2) to oil pump
(3), refer to the figure.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse copper washer.
• Apply power steering fluid or equivalent to around copper
washer, then install eye bolt.
• Install eye bolt with eye joint (assembled to high pressure
then tighten it to the specified torque after tightening by
hand. Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View".
• Securely insert harness connector to pressure sensor.
SGIA1379E
ST-32
7. Check fluid level, fluid leakage and air bleeding hydraulic system after the installation. Refer to ST-7,
"Inspection". A
BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
Disassemble oil pump only when the following malfunctions occur.
• If oil leakage is found on oil pump. B
• Oil pump pulley is damaged or deformed.
• Performance of oil pump is low.
AFTER DISASSEMBLY C
Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection

• Check body assembly and rear cover for internal damage. Replace rear cover if it is damaged. Replace oil
D
pump assembly if body assembly is damaged.
Cartridge Assembly Inspection
• Check cam ring, rotor and vane for damage. Replace cartridge assembly if necessary. E
Side Plate Inspection
• Check side plate for damage. Replace side plate if necessary.
Flow Control Valve Inspection F
• Check flow control valve and spring for damage. Replace if necessary.
ST
ST-33
HYDRAULIC LINE
HYDRAULIC LINE
VQ25DE Models
JSGIA0401GB
1. Reservoir tank bracket 2. Bushing 3. Reservoir tank

4. Suction hose 5. Clamp 6. Copper washer
7. High pressure piping 8. Steering gear assembly 9. O-ring
10. Eye bolt 11. Pressure sensor
A. To power steering oil pump suction B. To power steering oil pump.
hose.
: Vehicle front
ST-34
HYDRAULIC LINE
VQ35DE Models
A
ST
I
JSGIA0402GB
1. Reservoir tank bracket 2. Bushing 3. Reservoir tank

J
4. Suction hose 5. Clamp 6. Copper washer
7. High pressure piping 8. Steering gear assembly 9. O-ring
10. Eye bolt 11. Pressure sensor
K
A. To power steering oil pump suction B. To power steering oil pump.
hose.
: Vehicle front L

M
CAUTION:
• Insert hose securely until it contacts spool (A) of tube. N
Standard O
L : 3 – 8 mm (0.12 – 0.31 in)
JSGIA0118ZZ
ST-35
HYDRAULIC LINE
• Install eye bolt with eye joint (assembled to high pressure
then tighten it to the specified torque after tightening by hand.
Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View".
• Securely insert harness connector to pressure sensor.
• Never reuse copper washer.
SGIA1379E
ST-36
General Specifications INFOID:0000000003806332
B
Steering gear model PR26AF

C
Fluid capacity (Approx.) (lmp qt) 1.0 (7/8)
Steering Wheel Axial End Play and Play INFOID:0000000003806333

D
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
E
Steering wheel axial end play 0 (0)
Steering wheel play on the outer circumference 0 – 35 (0 – 1.38)
Steering Wheel Turning Force INFOID:0000000003806334 F
Unit: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Item Standard ST
Steering wheel turning force 7.45 (0.76, 66)
Steering Angle INFOID:0000000003806335 H
Unit: Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Standard I
Item
Tire size: 205/65R16 Tire size: 215/55R17
Minimum 38°00′ (38.0°) 34°00′ (34.0°)
Inner wheel Nominal 41°00′ (41.0°) 37°00′ (37.0°)
J
Maximum 42°30′ (42.5°) 38°30′ (38.5°)

Outer wheel Nominal 33°00′ (31.0°) 31°00′ (31.0°)
K
Steering Column Length INFOID:0000000003826226
Unit: mm (in) L
Item Standard
Column length 484 – 486 (19.06 – 19.13)
M
Steering Column Mounting Dimensions INFOID:0000000003826227
Unit: mm (in)
N
Item Standard
Mounting dimension 19.5 (0.768) or less
O
Steering Column Operating Range INFOID:0000000003806336
Item Standard P
Tilt operating range 37 mm (1.46 in)
Rotating torque 0.49 N·m (0.05 kg-m, 4 in-lb)
ST-37
Lower Shaft Sliding Range INFOID:0000000003806337
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
Sliding range 422.2 – 423.2 (16.62 – 16.66)
Rack Sliding Force INFOID:0000000003806338
Unit: N (kg, lb)
Item Standard
Rack sliding force 225.6 – 284.4 (23 – 29, 50.7 – 63.9)
Rack Stroke INFOID:0000000003806339
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Item
Tire size: 205/65R16 Tire size: 215/55R17
Rack stroke 74.5 (2.933) 69.0 (2.720)
Socket Swing Force and Rotating Torque INFOID:0000000003806340
SWING FORCE
Unit: N (kg, lb)
Item Standard
Outer socket 4.81 – 45.7 (0.5 – 4.6, 1.1 – 10.2)
Inner socket 8.9 – 64 (0.91 – 6.5, 2.01 – 14.3)
ROTATING TORQUE
Unit: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Item Standard
Outer socket 0.3 – 2.9 (0.03 – 0.29, 3 – 25)
Socket Axial End Play INFOID:0000000003806341
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
Outer socket 0.5 (0.02) or less
Inner socket 0.2 (0.008) or less
Inner Socket Length INFOID:0000000003806342
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
Rack neutral position 84.3 (3.32)
Relief Oil Pressure INFOID:0000000003806343
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
Item Standard
Relief oil pressure 9,300 – 10,300 (93 – 103, 94.9 – 105.1, 1,349 – 1,494)
ST-38
STEERING
SECTION
STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM
STC B
E
CONTENTS
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 2 ECU DIAGNOSIS ......................................... 13 F
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 2 POWER STEERING CONTROL UNIT .............. 13
Work Flow ................................................................. 2 Reference Value ......................................................13 STC
Wiring Diagram - ELECTRONICALLY CON-
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3 TROLLED POWER STEERING SYSTEM - ............14
Fail-Safe ..................................................................15
EPS SYSTEM ...................................................... 3 H
System Diagram ........................................................ 3 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 17
System Description ................................................... 3
Component Parts Location ........................................ 5 UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING I
Component Description ............................................. 5 FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION) ....................... 17
Description ...............................................................17
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS .......................... 6 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................17
J
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....... 6 PRECAUTION .............................................. 18
Description ................................................................ 6
Diagnosis Procedure ................................................. 6 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 18 K
POWER STEERING SOLENOID VALVE ........... 7 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Description ................................................................ 7 SIONER" .................................................................18
Diagnosis Procedure ................................................. 7 L
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
Component Inspection .............................................. 8 tion after Battery Disconnect ...................................18
ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................... 9 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 19 M
Description ................................................................ 9
Diagnosis Procedure ................................................. 9 POWER STEERING CONTROL UNIT .............. 19
Exploded View .........................................................19
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................11 Removal and Installation .........................................19 N
Description .............................................................. 11
O
STC-1
BASIC INSPECTION
DETAILED FLOW
It is also important to clarify customer complaints before inspection. First of all, reproduce symptoms and
understand them fully. Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. In some cases, it is necessary to
check symptoms by driving vehicle with customer.
CAUTION:
Customers are not professional. It is dangerous to make an easy guess like “maybe the customer
means that...,” or “maybe the customer mentions this symptom”.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THE STATUS
1. Check the power steering fluid leakage and power steering fluid level. Refer to ST-7, "Inspection".
2. Check the drive belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Checking".
3. Check the power steering gear for damages, cracks and fluid leakage. Refer to ST-26, "Inspection".
4. Check the relief oil pressure. Refer to ST-32, "Inspection".
>> GO TO 3.
3.DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM
Perform the diagnosis by symptom. Refer to STC-17, "Diagnosis Procedure".
>> GO TO 4.
4.FINAL CHECK
Check the input/output standard values for the power steering control unit.
Are the power steering control unit input/output values within standard ranges respectively?
NO >> GO TO 2.
STC-2
EPS SYSTEM
EPS SYSTEM
B
CONTROL DIAGRAM
C
STC
H
JSGIA0119GB
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
I
N
JSGIA0376ZZ
1. Combination meter 2. Power steering control unit 3. Power steering solenoid valve
O
4. Steering gear assembly 5. Gear housing assembly 6. Gear sub-assembly
7. Pinion 8. Power steering oil pump 9. Reservoir tank
System Description INFOID:0000000003893523 P
• The EPS system controls the power steering solenoid valve through the power steering control unit.
STC-3
EPS SYSTEM
• The valve driving voltage to control the power steering solenoid
valve varies according to the vehicle speed.
JSGIA0374GB
OPERATION PRINCIPLE
During Parking (When Turning The Steering Wheel To The Right.)
JSGIA0020GB
1. Power steering solenoid valve is closed while a vehicle is stopped.

2. Pinion “1R”, “2R” and “3R” are closed depending on steering torque of steering wheel.
3. Oil pressure “P” in the gear housing assembly is the sum of oil pressures occurred in “2R” and “3R”. This
results in a light steering force because of high pressure.
During High-speed Operation
JSGIA0021GB
1. Power steering solenoid valve is opened during high-speed operation.

2. Pinion “1R”, “2R” and “3R” are closed depending on steering torque of steering wheel.
3. Oil pressure “2R” does not occur because the power steering solenoid valve is on full throttle.
4. Oil pressure “P” in the gear housing assembly includes only oil pressure occurred in “3R” and results in a
heavy steering force.
STC-4
EPS SYSTEM
JSGIA0406ZZ
STC
1. Power steering solenoid valve 2. Power steering control unit
A. Steering gear assembly B. Glove box assembly removed
: Vehicle front H
Component parts Reference/Function

• Signals from various sensors control the driving voltage to the power steering solenoid valve. J
• The power steering control unit controls the driving voltage to the power steering solenoid valve
Power steering control unit
for maintaining the power steering assist force when the fail-safe function is activated. (The en-
gine speed signals control EPS system if any vehicle speed signal error is detected.)
Combination meter STC-11, "Description" K
ECM STC-9, "Description"
Power steering solenoid valve STC-7, "Description" L
STC-5
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
Power supply to EPS system

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY

2. Disconnect power steering control unit harness connector.
3. Check voltage between power steering control unit harness connector and ground.

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
M61 3 Ground 0V

CAUTION:

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
• 10A fuses (#3) open
- Harness for short or open between ignition switch and power steering control unit harness con-
nector No. 3 terminal.
- Ignition switch. Refer to PCS-64, "Component Inspection".
2. Check continuity between power steering control unit harness connector and ground.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TERMINALS AND HARNESS CONNECTORS
Check power steering control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
STC-6
POWER STEERING SOLENOID VALVE
A
Power steering solenoid valve controls the power steering oil pressure in the gear housing assembly. B
1.CHECK POWER STEERING SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL C

D
— Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E
Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 MPH)
4.4 – 6.6 V
M61 1 Ground (Engine is running)
Vehicle speed: 100 km/h (62 MPH) 2.4 – 3.6 V
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4. STC
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN POWER STEERING SOLENOID VALVE AND POWER STEERING CON-
TROL UNIT
H
2. Disconnect power steering solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between power steering solenoid valve harness connector and the power steering I
control unit harness connector.
Power steering solenoid valve Power steering control unit J

Continuity
E52 1 M61 1 Existed
K
E52 2 M61 5 Existed
L
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M61 1
M
Ground Not existed
M61 5
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER STEERING SOLENOID VALVE O
Check power steering solenoid valve. Refer to STC-8, "Component Inspection".
P
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace gear-sub assembly. Refer to ST-18, "Exploded View".
• Check power steering control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
• Check power steering solenoid valve pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
STC-7
1.CHECK POWER STEERING SOLENOID VALVE

2. Disconnect power steering solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Check resistance between power steering solenoid valve connector terminals.
Power steering solenoid valve

Connector Terminal
E52 1 2 4–6Ω
4. Check power steering solenoid valve by listening for its operation sound while applying battery voltage to
power steering solenoid valve connector E52 terminals 1 (positive) and 2 (negative).
NO >> Replace gear-sub assembly. Refer to ST-18, "Exploded View".
STC-8
ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
ECM sends engine speed signal to power steering control unit. B

1.PERFORM ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS C

With CONSULT-III
Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-113, "CONSULT-III Function". D
YES >> Check the DTC.
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND POWER STEERING CONTROL UNIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. F
2. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
4. Check continuity between ECM harness connector and power steering control unit harness connector.
STC
ECM Power steering control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
I
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
YES >> GO TO 3. K
3.CHECK ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL (1)
L
1. Connect ECM harness connectors.
2. Check signal between ECM harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.
M
STC-9
ECM
Connector Terminal
Engine is running
• Idle speed
JSGIA0143ZZ
E16 94 Ground
Engine is running
• Engine speed: Approx. 2,000 rpm
PBIA3655J

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace ECM. Refer to EC-14, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT :
Description".
4.CHECK ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL (2)
1. Connect power steering control unit harness connector.
2. Check signal between power steering control unit harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.

Connector Terminal
Engine is running
• Idle speed
JSGIA0143ZZ
M61 10 Ground
Engine is running
PBIA3655J

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace power steering control unit. Refer to STC-19, "Exploded View".
• Check ECM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
STC-10
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Combination meter sends vehicle speed signal to power steering control unit. B
1.PERFORM COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS C

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to MWI-33, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)". D
YES >> Check the DTC.
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND POWER STEERING CONTROL UNIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. F
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and power steering control unit harness
STC
connector.
Combination meter Power steering control unit

Continuity H
5. Check continuity between power steering control unit harness connector and ground. I

— Continuity J
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL (1) L
1. Connect combination meter harness connector.
2. Check combination meter input/output standard values. Refer to MWI-53, "Reference Value".
M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace combination meter Refer to MWI-126, "Exploded View".
N
4.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL (2)
1. Connect power steering control unit harness connector.
2. Check signal between power steering control unit harness connector and ground with oscilloscope. O
STC-11

Connector Terminal

CAUTION:
M61 8 Ground
Check air pressure of tire under
standard condition.
JSNIA0015GB

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace power steering control unit. Refer to STC-19, "Exploded View".
• Check combination meter pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
STC-12
POWER STEERING CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
B
TERMINAL LAYOUT
C
JSGIA0023ZZ
F
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
Description
STC
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.)
Input/
+ - Signal name
Output H
1 Power steering solenoid 4.4 – 6.6 V
Ground Output (Engine is running)
(R/Y) valve voltage
Vehicle speed: 100 km/h (62 MPH) 2.4 – 3.6 V I
3 Ignition switch power Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
Ground Input
(G/W) supply Ignition switch: OFF 0V
5 Power steering solenoid
J
Ground — Always 0V
(LG) valve ground
6
Ground Ground — Always 0V K
(B)
Vehicle speed: 40 km/h (25 MPH) L

8 CAUTION:
Ground Vehicle speed signal Input
(L/B) Check air pressure of tire under
standard condition.
M
JSNIA0015GB
Engine is running
• Idle speed O
JSGIA0143ZZ
10
(V/W)
Ground Engine speed signal Input P
Engine is running
PBIA3655J
STC-13
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
CAUTION:
When using circuit tester or oscilloscope to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to forcibly extend any connector ter-
minals.
Wiring Diagram - ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED POWER STEERING SYSTEM -

INFOID:0000000003893536
JCGWM0089GB
STC-14
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
STC
JCGWM0090GB
P
EPS system
STC-15
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
• EPS system enters the fail-safe mode (that allows the steering
force to be controlled without impairing the drivability) if any of the
input/output values to/from EPS system (power steering control
unit) deviate from the standard range.
NOTE:
The system enters the fail-safe mode if the engine speed remains
at 1,500 rpm or more for over 10 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped. This is normal.
• The fail-safe function is canceled when a vehicle speed signal of 2
km/h (1.2 MPH) or more is inputted or the ignition switch is turned
OFF→ON. EPS system restores the normal operation at that time.
JSGIA0426GB
Warn-
Mode DTC Detection point (malfunction part) Error area and root cause
ing lamp
• Engine speed is 1,500 rpm or more and there is no vehicle
speed signal input for over 10 seconds during vehicle travel.
Fail-safe
— — Vehicle speed signal input • Vehicle speed signal has abruptly dropped from 30 km/h (19
function
MPH) or more to 2 km/h (1.2 MPH) or less within 1.4 sec-
onds.
STC-16
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION)
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIA-
TION)
B
• Hard steering when fully turning the steering wheel. C

• Light steering when driving at a high speed.
D
1.CHECK SYSTEM FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
Perform trouble diagnosis for power supply and ground. Refer to STC-6, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
F
2.CHECK SYSTEM FOR VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Perform trouble diagnosis for vehicle speed signal. Refer to STC-11, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? STC
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SYSTEM FOR ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL H
Perform trouble diagnosis for engine speed signal. Refer to STC-9, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYSTEM FOR POWER STEERING SOLENOID VALVE J
Perform trouble diagnosis for power steering solenoid valve. Refer to STC-7, "Diagnosis Procedure".
K
YES >> Perform the symptom diagnosis for the steering system. Refer to ST-2, "NVH Troubleshooting
Chart".
L
STC-17
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
connectors.
INFOID:0000000003893541
NOTE:
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
2. Carry the Intelligent Key or insert it to the key slot and turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position.
STC-18
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
B
STC
JSGIA0407ZZ
H
1. Steering member 2. Power steering control unit
: Vehicle front I
J
REMOVAL
1. Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect power steering control unit connector. K
3. Remove power steering control unit.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. L
STC-19
RESTRAINTS
SECTION SB
SEAT BELT
B
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................. 6 F
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ........................... 6
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View .................... 7
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation..... 7 G
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 REAR SEAT BELT ............................................. 8
Precaution for Seat Belt Service ............................... 2
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ......................................... 8 SB
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 3 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection ................... 8
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View ...........10
FRONT SEAT BELT ............................................ 3 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Instal-
I
lation ........................................................................10
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR .......................................... 3
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection .................... 3 SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................10
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View ............. 5 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ..........................10 J
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Instal- SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View ...................11
lation .......................................................................... 5 SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation....11
K
SB-1
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
connectors.
Precaution for Seat Belt Service INFOID:0000000003848851
CAUTION:
• Before removing the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect
both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
• Never use electrical test equipment for front seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
• After replacing or reinstalling front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting front seat belt
pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRC-10, "Diagnosis Description".
• Deploy front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly before disposing. Refer to SR-25, "Caution for Air Bag
Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner"
• Never use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly.
• Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
• Never oil tongue and buckle.
• If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, never repair. Replace the entire seat belt
assembly.
• If webbing is cut, frayed or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
• When replacing seat belt assembly, use a Genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the col-
lision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Not doing so could
result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision
should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buck-
les show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or
distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The front seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
SB-2
FRONT SEAT BELT
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
FRONT SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
B
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000003848852
AFTER A COLLISION C
WARNING:
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced D
unless the collision is minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Not
doing so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision must also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-ten-
E
sioners must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air
bags are deployed.
• The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and F
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt was damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).
• The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage G
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• The seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed. SB
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: I
a. Turn ignition switch ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime
should sound for about six seconds.
b. Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn off and the chime (if sounding) should J
stop.
2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis with CONSULT-III and air bag warning lamp.
Refer to SRC-10, "Diagnosis Description".
K
3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.
4. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels
freely and that webbing lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and L
holds securely.
5. Check retractor operation:
a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. M
b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If
the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Because dirt
build-up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
N
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing
does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE
SET” and perform the following steps.
O
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor
1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more.
2. Fix the seat belt at the center pillar webbing opening with a clip or other device.
P
3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor webbing opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull it
tauntly while moving it up and down several times along the webbing opening surface to remove dirt
stuck there.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean
cloth.
5. Apply tape at the point where the webbing contacts the through-anchor webbing opening.
NOTE:
Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.
SB-3
FRONT SEAT BELT
6. Remove the clip fixing the seat belt and check that the webbing returns smoothly.
6. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK

Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the
retractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors
except the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also
called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt
is fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt
in a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat
belt to fully wind back into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating prop-
erly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from
extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check
1. Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
2. Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the
retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.
3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If
NG, replace the retractor assembly.
4. Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. Never perform the following test on
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop
and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does
not lock, apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock,
perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1. Remove the seat belt retractor.
Remove the front seat belt assembly, refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
2. Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without
twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration.
SB-4
FRONT SEAT BELT
• The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15
degrees or more. A
• The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 27
degrees or more.
B
A and B : Tilting angles
: Vehicle front
C
PHIA0954J
D
3. If the seat belt assembly dose not operate normally, replace the seat belt assembly.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003848853
E
SB
JMHIA0646GB
M
1. Pre-tensioner seat belt retractor 2. Anchor bolt 3. Seat belt pre-tensioner connector
4. Anchor nut 5. Shoulder anchor 6. Seat belt adjuster
7. Bush 8. Spacer 9. Retaining washer N
10. Outer anchor 11. Anchor cover
O
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003848854
REMOVAL P
CAUTION:
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove the outer anchor.
• Remove the outer anchor cover.
• Remove the fixing anchor bolt of the outer anchor.
SB-5
FRONT SEAT BELT
2. Remove the shoulder anchor.
• Remove the center pillar lower and upper garnishes, refer to INT-39, "Removal and Installation".
• Remove the shoulder anchor fixing anchor nut.
3. Remove the seat belt assembly.
• Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
CAUTION:
• For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connec-
tor, insert thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch,
lift lock and remove connector.
• Install connector with lock raised, and push lock into
connector.
PHIA0953J
• Remove the fixing screw and anchor bolt of the pre-tensioner seat belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection INFOID:0000000003848855
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Not
bags are deployed.
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which
the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
b. Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn OFF and the chime (if sounding) should
stop.
4. Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts.
SB-6
FRONT SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003848856
JMHIA0648GB
G
1. Seat belt buckle 2. Anchor nut 3. Seat belt buckle harness connector
4. Washer
SB
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003848857
REMOVAL I
Remove the seat belt buckle.
• Remove the front seat from vehicle. Refer to SE-92, "Removal and Installation" (for ease of tool operation in
narrow space). J
• Disconnect the seat belt buckle harness connector.
• Remove the seat belt buckle fixing anchor nut.
INSTALLATION K
SB-7
REAR SEAT BELT
REAR SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000003848858
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Not
bags are deployed.
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
b. Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn OFF and the chime (if sounding) should
stop.
4. Check retractor operation:
a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Check that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the
seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Because dirt
build-up in the loops of that upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing
does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE
SET” and perform the following steps.
5. Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK

Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the
retractor locks and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except
the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child
restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully
extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a
specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt
to fully return into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating prop-
erly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
SB-8
REAR SEAT BELT
Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from
extending further. A
ALR Function Stationary Check
1. Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
B
2. Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the
retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.
3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If
NG, replace the retractor assembly. C
4. Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check D
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. NEVER perform the following test on E
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. F
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop
and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does G
not lock, apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock,
perform the retractor off-vehicle check. SB
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK

1. Remove the seat belt retractor. I
Remove the rear seat belt assembly, refer to SB-10, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
2. Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without J
twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration.
• The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15
degrees or more.
• The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 27 K
degrees or more.
A and B : Tilting angles L

: Vehicle front
M
PHIA0962J
3. If the seat belt assembly dose not operate normally, replace the seat belt assembly. N
SB-9
REAR SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003848859
JMHIA0647GB
1. Anchor bolt 2. Outer seat belt retractor 3. Center seat belt retractor
4. Outer anchor 5. Inner seat belt buckle 6. Outer seat belt buckle
7. Inner anchor 8. Retaining washer
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003848860
REMOVAL
1. Remove the outer and inner anchors.
• Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-99, "Removal and Installation".
• Remove the outer anchor fixing anchor bolt and the anchor bolt tightening the inner anchor together with
the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the seat belt assembly.
• Remove the rear seatback. Refer to SE-99, "Removal and Installation".
• Remove the rear pillar finisher. Refer to INT-39, "Removal and Installation".
• Remove the seat belt finisher from the rear parcel shelf finisher.
• Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-43, "Removal and Installation".
• Remove the fixing anchor bolt of the seat belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection INFOID:0000000003848861
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
SB-10
REAR SEAT BELT
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Not A
a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-ten-
sioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the
B
air bags are deployed.
les show no damage and continue to operate properly). C
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.)
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. D
• The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which
the air bags are deployed.
E
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
2. Repeat step above as necessary to check the other seat belts. F
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003860685
SB
JMHIA0647GB
O
1. Anchor bolt 2. Outer seat belt retractor 3. Center seat belt retractor
4. Outer anchor 5. Inner seat belt buckle 6. Outer seat belt buckle
7. Inner anchor 8. Retaining washer P
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003848863
REMOVAL
Remove the seat belt buckle.
• Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-99, "Removal and Installation".
SB-11
REAR SEAT BELT
• Remove the fixing anchor bolt of the inner seat belt buckle and outer seat belt buckle.
INSTALLATION
SB-12
RESTRAINTS
SECTION SR
SRS AIRBAG
B
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................12 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ................ 14

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .........................................................14
G
SIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE .................... 16
Exploded View .........................................................16 SR
Service ...................................................................... 2
Occupant Classification System .............................. 3 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ................................... 18
Exploded View .........................................................18 I
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ........... 20 J
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Exploded View .........................................................20
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .................................. 6 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 22 K
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ............................... 6 Exploded View .........................................................22
Exploded View .......................................................... 6 Removal and Installation .........................................22
Removal and Installation ........................................... 6 L
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ........... 24
SPIRAL CABLE .................................................. 9 Removal and Installation .........................................24
Exploded View .......................................................... 9 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND M
Removal and Installation ........................................... 9
SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ........................ 25
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .......12 Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-ten-
Exploded View ........................................................ 12 sioner .......................................................................25 N
SR-1
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
connectors.
INFOID:0000000003838498
NOTE:
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Service INFOID:0000000003751420
• Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 min-
utes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt pre-
tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have
elapsed.
SR-2
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the
vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installa- A
tion and replace as required.
• The spiral cable must be aligned in the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not turn steering
wheel and column after removal of steering gear.
B
• Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down.
• Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper functioning after replacing any components.
• After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. C
• Always replace instrument panel pad following front passenger air bag deployment.
Occupant Classification System INFOID:0000000003751422
D
Replace occupant classification system control unit and passenger front seat cushion as an assembly.
• With VENTILATION SEAT: Refer to SE-89, "Exploded View".
• Without VENTILATION SEAT: Refer to SE-130, "Exploded View". E
SR
SR-3
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV99105300
Anchors air bag module
Air bag module bracket
S-NT354
KV99106400 Disposes of air bag module and front seat

Deployment tool belt pre-tensioner
S-NT357
KV99110500
Deployment tool adapter
• Deployment tool adapter for driver • Connects between the deployment tool
air bag module (Yellow connector) and driver air bag module
• Deployment tool adapter for front • Connects between the deployment tool
seat belt pre-tensioner (Yellow and front seat belt pre-tensioner
connector) • Connects between the deployment tool
• Deployment tool adapter for side and side curtain air bag module
curtain air bag module (Yellow • Connects between the deployment tool
connector) PHIA0184E
and front passenger air bag module
• Deployment tool adapter for front
passenger air bag module
KV99108300
Connects between the deployment tool and
Deployment tool adapter for front
front side air bag module
side air bag module
ZZA1166D
SR-4
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

B
Tamper resistant TORX bit Removes of driver air bag module C
S-NT757 D
E
Remover tool Removes clip, pawl and metal clip
F
PIIB7923J
SR
SR-5
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
JMHIA0613GB
1. Steering wheel 2. Side lid (LH/RH) 3. TORX bolt (LH/RH)

4. Driver air bag module
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3
minutes.
• Always work from the side of air bag module. Never work in front of it.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the side lids (LH/RH).
2. Remove the driver air bag module (1) mounting TORX bolt (LH/
RH) with TORX bit (A).
JMHIA0614ZZ
SR-6
3. Pull out driver air bag module.
4. Disconnect driver air bag harness connector. A
NOTE:
• For installing/removing driver air bag harness connector, insert
thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch, lift lock and B
remove connector.
• Install connector with lock raised, and push lock into connec-
tor.
• After installing the connector, check that the lock is pushed C
securely into it.
PHIA0953J
D
5. Remove the driver air bag module.

CAUTION: E
• Always place driver air bag module with pad side facing
upward.
F
: Upward
SR
JMHIA0504ZZ
• Never impact the driver air bag module. I

• Replace the driver air bag module if it has been dropped or
sustained an impact.
J
JMHIA0009ZZ L
• Never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into driver air bag module.
• Never disassemble driver air bag module. M
• Never expose the driver air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
• Never allow oil, grease, detergent or water to come in contact with the driver air bag module.
INSTALLATION N
CAUTION:
• Never use old TORX bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
O
• Fix the driver air bag harness (B) to the harness fixing hook
(A).
JMHIA0615ZZ
SR-7
• Tighten the TORX bolts after completely adjusting the centers of fixing holes on the driver air bag
module side and the steering wheel side. If the holes are misaligned, the bolt threads are damaged
and the module is not installed securely.
• In the case that a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of
the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory by self-diagnosis or by CONSULT-III.
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
SR-8
SPIRAL CABLE
SPIRAL CABLE
A
SR
I
JMHIA0616ZZ
1. Spiral cable 2. Steering angle sensor 3. Steering column assembly J
K
WARNING:
minutes.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing. L
REMOVAL
1. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SR-6, "Removal and Installation". M
2. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ST-12, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the steering column cover (upper/lower). Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect spiral cable body side harness connectors (A) and N
steering angle sensor harness connectors (B).
NOTE:
Disconnect spiral cable body side harness connectors after
removing the spiral cable. O
JMHIA0617ZZ
5. Remove the spiral cable fixing screws.
SR-9
SPIRAL CABLE
6. Remove the spiral cable (1) side pawls (LH/RH).
JMHIA0618ZZ
: Pawl
7. Pull the spiral cable out forward.

CAUTION:
• Never disassemble the spiral cable.
• Never apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
• Never allow oil, grease, detergent or water to come in contact with the spiral cable.
• Never impact the spiral cable.
• Replace the spiral cable if it has been dropped or sustained
an impact.
JMHIA0009ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• The spiral cable may snap during steering operation if the
cable is installed in an improper position.
The neutral position is set as follows.
• Carefully turn the spiral cable clockwise to the end position.
Then turn it counterclockwise (about 2 and a half turns) and
stop turning at the mark (B) on which the stopper insertion
holes are in the same position.
• The service part is installed in the neutral position by the
stopper and can be set without adjusting after the stopper is
removed.
• Never over turn the spiral cable or go beyond the number of
turns required. (These will cause the cable to snap.)
• Adjust the spiral cable locating pin (A) to the steering wheel
locating pin hole (C).
JMHIA0657ZZ
SR-10
SPIRAL CABLE
Refer to SRC-10, "Diagnosis Description". A
SR
SR-11
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
JMHIA0619GB
1. Instrument panel assembly 2. Front passenger air bag module

WARNING:
minutes.
• Always work from the side of air bag module. Never work in front of it.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front passenger air bag module fixing screws (A).
3. Disconnect pawls by using remover tool, and then remove front
passenger air bag module (2) from instrument panel (1).
: Pawl
JMHIA0621ZZ
CAUTION:
SR-12
• Always place front passenger air bag module (1) with pad side
facing upward. A
: Upward
JMHIA0622ZZ
D
• Never impact the front passenger air bag module.
• Replace the front passenger air bag module if it has been
dropped or sustained an impact. E
G
JMHIA0009ZZ
• Never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into front passenger air bag module. SR
• Never disassembly front passenger air bag module.
• Never expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
• Never allow oil, grease, detergent or water to come in contact with the front passenger air bag mod- I
ule.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. J
CAUTION:
• Never use old fixing bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
K
L
SR-13
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
JMHIA0623GB
1. Side curtain air bag module

WARNING:
minutes.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headlining assembly.
• Normal roof models: Refer to INT-50, "NORMAL ROOF : Removal and Installation".
• Sunroof models: Refer to INT-54, "SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the side curtain air bag harness connector.
NOTE:
• For installing/removing side curtain air bag harness connector,
insert thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch, lift lock and
remove connector.
• Install connector with lock raised, and push lock into connec-
tor.
• After installing the connector, check that the lock is pushed
securely into it.
PHIA0953J
SR-14
3. Remove fixing bolts, and then remove side curtain air bag module.
CAUTION: A
• Never impact the side curtain air bag module.
• Replace the side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped
or sustained an impact. B
D
JMHIA0009ZZ
• Never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into side curtain air bag module. E
• Never disassemble side curtain air bag module.
• Never expose the side curtain air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
• Never allow oil, grease, detergent or water to come in contact with the side curtain air bag module. F
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: G
SR
SR-15
FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
JMHIA0649GB
1. Seat frame assembly 2. Side air bag module bracket 3. Side air bag module
4. Seatback finisher
REMOVAL
WARNING:
minutes.
• Always work from the rear of air bag module.
1. Remove the front seat.
• With VENTILATION SEAT: Refer to SE-92, "Removal and Installation".
• Without VENTILATION SEAT: Refer to SE-135, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the seatback trim and pad.
• With VENTILATION SEAT: Refer to SE-93, "Disassembly and Assembly".
• Without VENTILATION SEAT: Refer to SE-135, "Disassembly and Assembly".
3. Remove the seatback finisher fixing screws, and then remove seatback finisher.
4. Disconnect the front side air bag harness connector and harness clips.
5. Remove the side air bag module fixing nut, and then remove side air bag module.
CAUTION:
SR-16
• Always place front side air bag module with pad side facing
upward. A
: Upward
B
JMHIA0274ZZ
D
• Never impact the air bag module.
• Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sus-
tained an impact. E
G
JMHIA0009ZZ
• Never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into front side air bag module. SR
• Never disassemble front side air bag module.
• Never expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
• Never allow oil, grease, detergent or water to come in contact with the air bag module. I
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: J
• Never use old fixing nut after removal; replace with new nut.
• Never damage the air bag harness.
• If any malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and
K
delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
• If any malfunction is still detected after the above operations, perform self-diagnosis to repair mal-
functions.
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. L
SR-17
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
JMHIA0624GB
1. Crash zone sensor

: Vehicle front
WARNING:
minutes.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove radiator hose clamp (1) mounting nut (A).
: Vehicle front
JMHIA0632ZZ
SR-18
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
3. Disconnect crash zone sensor harness connector (A).
4. Remove the crash zone sensor (1) fixing nuts (B), and then A
remove crash zone sensor.
JMHIA0625ZZ
D
CAUTION:
• Never impact the crash zone sensor.
• Replace the crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sus-
E
tained an impact.
JMHIA0009ZZ
SR
• Replace the crash zone sensor of deployed SRS driver air bag and deployed SRS front passenger air
bag.
INSTALLATION I
CAUTION:
• Never use old fixing nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. J
Refer to SRC-10, "Diagnosis Description". K
SR-19
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
JMHIA0626GB
1. Side air bag (satellite) sensor

: Vehicle front
WARNING:
minutes.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pre-tensioner seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) fixing nuts (B).
3. Disconnect side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector (A),
and then remove side air bag (satellite) sensor.
JMHIA0627ZZ
CAUTION:
SR-20
• Never impact he side air bag (satellite) sensor.
• Replace the side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been A
dropped or sustained an impact.
JMHIA0009ZZ
D
• Replace the side air bag (satellite) sensor of deployed SRS front side air bag and deployed SRS side
curtain air bag.
E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never use old fixing nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. F
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. G
SR
SR-21
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
JMHIA0628GB
1. Bracket 2. Diagnosis sensor unit

: Vehicle front
WARNING:
minutes.
• Before disconnecting the diagnosis sensor unit harness connector, be sure to disconnect each har-
ness connector of the air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt to prevent air bag deployment by
static electricity and pre-tensioner seat belt operation.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect each connector of all air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts.
2. Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the rear ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-53, "REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 : Exploded View".
SR-22
4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit (1) harness connectors (A).
5. Remove harness clip (B). A
6. Remove fixing bolts (C), and then remove diagnosis sensor unit.
JMHIA0629ZZ
D
CAUTION:
• Never impact the diagnosis sensor unit.
• Replace the diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or
E
sustained an impact.
JMHIA0009ZZ
SR
• Replace the diagnosis sensor unit of deployed SRS air bag and deployed SRS front seat belt pre-ten-
sioner.
INSTALLATION I
CAUTION:
• Never use old fixing bolts after removal; replace with new fixing bolts. J
Refer to SRC-10, "Diagnosis Description". K
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.

After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the L
vehicle as equipped.
ECU DISCRIMINATED
Specification M
No.
Driver and passenger air bag, front seat belt pre-tensioner and
AE07
front side air bag
VQ25DE N
Driver and passenger air bag, front seat belt pre-tensioner, front
side air bag and side curtain air bag
AE09
Driver and passenger air bag, front seat belt pre-tensioner, front O
VQ35DE
side air bag and side curtain air bag
SR-23
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
SR-24
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
A
Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner INFOID:0000000003839142
Precaution for Work B

• Before disposing of air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, or vehicles equipped with such systems,
deploy the systems. If such systems have already been deployed due to an accident, dispose of them as
indicated in Disposing of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner. Refer to SR-25, "Caution for Air Bag C
Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner".
• When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, always use the Special Service Tool;
Deployment tool (SST: KV99106400).
• When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5.0 m (16.4 ft.) away from the D
deployment component.
• When deploying air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, a fairly loud noise is made, followed by smoke
being released. The smoke is not poisonous, however, be careful not to inhale smoke since it irritates the E
throat and can cause choking.
• Always activate one air bag module at a time.
• Due to heat, leave air bag module unattended for more than 30 minutes after deployment. Also leave seat
belt pre-tensioner unattended for more than 10 minutes after deployment. F
• Wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
• Never apply water to the deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
• Wash your hands after work is completed. G
• Place the vehicle outdoors with an open space of at least 6.0 m (19.7 ft) on all sides when deploying air bag
module and seat belt pre-tensioner while mounted in vehicle.
• Use a volt meter to make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged.
• Never dispose of the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner that does not deploy. SR
CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL

Connecting to Battery I
CAUTION:
The battery must show voltage of 9.6 V or more.
Remove the battery from the vehicle and place it on dry wood blocks J
approximately 5.0 m (16.4 ft) away from the vehicle.
• Wait 3 minutes after the vehicle battery is disconnected before pro-
ceeding.
• Connect red clip of deployment tool (A) to battery positive terminal K
and black clip to negative terminal.
Check that the polarity is correct. The right side lamp in the
tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should illuminate with a L
green light. If the right side lamp illuminates red, reverse the
connections to the battery.
JMHIA0204ZZ
Deployment Tool Check M

Press the deployment tool switch (C) to the ON position. The left
side lamp in the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage” should illu-
minate (B). If it does not illuminate, replace the deployment tool (A). N
P
JMHIA0205ZZ
Air Bag Deployment Tool Lamp Illumination Chart (Battery Connected)
SR-25
Left side lamp, green* Right side lamp, green*

Switch operation
“AIR BAG CONNECTOR VOLTAGE” “DEPLOYMENT TOOL POWER”
OFF OFF ON
ON ON ON
*: If this lamp glows red, the tool is connected to the battery incorrectly. Reverse the connections and check the lamp glows green.
DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)

Driver Air Bag Module
1. Unless the vehicle is being scrapped, deploying the air bag in
the vehicle is not recommended. This may cause damage to the
vehicle interior.
Anchor air bag module bracket (SST: KV99105300) (A) in a vice
secured to a firm foundation deployment.
JMHIA0208ZZ
2. Using wire (D), secure air bag module (1) to air bag module
bracket (SST: KV99105300) (A) at two places.
CAUTION:
Use wire of at least 1.0 mm (0.039 in) diameter.
3. Firmly secure air bag module bracket (SST: KV99105300) with
air bag module attached, in a vise.
4. Connect deployment tool adapter (SST: KV99110500) (C) to
driver air bag module and deployment tool connector (SST:
KV99106400) (B).
JMHIA0630ZZ
5. Connect red clip of deployment tool (A) to battery positive termi-

nal and black clip to negative terminal (B).
6. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should illuminate green, not red.
7. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module (1) will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the driver air bag module, stand at least 5.0
m (16.4 ft) away from the air bag module.
JMHIA0209ZZ
Front Passenger Air Bag Module

1. Make 6.5 mm (0.256 in) diameter hole (B) in air bag module
bracket (SST: KV99105300) (A) at the position shown in figure.
JMHIA0225ZZ
SR-26
2. Firmly secure air bag module bracket (SST: KV99105300) (A) in
a vise. A
3. Insert two bolts (D) through air bag module bracket and air bag
module lower side holes, and fix then with two nuts.
4. Connect deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) (B) and deploy- B
ment tool adapter (SST: KV99110500) (C) to front passenger air
bag module (1).
C
JMHIA0631ZZ
D
nal and black clip to negative terminal (B).
6. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool E
7. Press the button on the deployment tool (A). The left side lamp
on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate F
and the air bag module (1) will deploy.
CAUTION:
• When deploying the front passenger air bag module,
never stand on the deploying side. G
• Stand at least 5.0 m (16.4 ft) away from the air bag module. JMHIA0209ZZ
Side Curtain Air Bag Module SR

1. Cut the inflator (1) from side curtain air bag module (2).
K
JMHIA0282ZZ
2. Connect deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) (A) and deploy- L

ment tool adapter (SST: KV99110500) (B) to the inflator.
JMHIA0283ZZ O
SR-27
3. Put the inflator connected with the deployment tool (SST:
KV99106400) and deployment tool adapter (SST: KV99110500)
into a tire without a wheel.
PHIA0937J
4. Put the tire with the inflator (1) onto another tire without a wheel.
Add an additional tire without a wheel and then a tire mounted
on a wheel on top.
CAUTION:
Tie all tires together with a strap in order keep them stand-
ing.
nal and black clip to negative terminal.
7. Press the button on the deployment tool (A). The left side lamp PHIA1173E
on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate

and the air bag module inflator (1) will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the side curtain air bag module, stand at least 5.0 m (16.4 ft) away from the side
curtain air bag module.
Front Side Air Bag Module

1. Make 6.5 mm (0.256 in) diameter hole (B) in air bag module
bracket (SST: KV99105300) (A) at the position shown in figure.
JMHIA0225ZZ
2. Firmly secure air bag module bracket in a vise.

3. Insert two bolts through air bag module bracket and air bag
module upper side holes, and fix them with two nuts (C).
4. Connect deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) (A) and deploy-
ment tool adapter (SST: KV99108300) (B) to air bag module
connector.
JMHIA0284ZZ
SR-28
5. Connect red clip of deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) (A) to
battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal (B). A
7. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on B
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module (1) will deploy.
CAUTION:
C
When deploying the front side air bag module, stand at
least 5.0 m (16.4 ft) away from the air bag module.
JMHIA0285ZZ
D
Front Seat Belt Pre-Tensioner (Outside of Vehicle)
1. Firmly grip pre-tensioner (1) in a vise (A) and cut off the web-
bing. E
JMHIA0068ZZ
SR
2. Connect deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) (A) and deploy-
ment tool adapter (SST: KV99110500) (B) yellow connector to
front seat belt pre-tensioner (1). I
3. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
and black clip to negative terminal (C).
4. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool J
5. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “seat belt pre-tensioner connector voltage”, will
K
illuminate and the seat belt pre-tensioner (1) will deploy.
CAUTION: JMHIA0214ZZ
When deploying the front seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at

least 5.0 m(16.4 ft) away from the seat belt pre-tensioner. L
DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER

Deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner are very hot. Before disposing of air bag module and M
seat belt pre-tensioner, wait at least 30 minutes, and 10 minutes, respectively. Seal them in a plastic bag
before disposal.
CAUTION:
N
• Never apply water to a deployed air bag module or seat belt
pre-tensioner.
• Wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module or seat
belt pre-tensioner. O
• No poisonous gas is produced upon air bag module deploy-
ment. However, be careful not to inhale gas since it irritates
the throat and can cause choking. P
• Never disassemble air bag module and seat belt pre-ten-
sioner.
• Air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner cannot be reused.
• Wash your hands clean after the work is complete.
SBF276H
SR-29
RESTRAINTS
SRS AIRBAG CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION SRC B
E
CONTENTS
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 5 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22 F
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 5 B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SEN .................. 24
Work Flow ................................................................. 5 Description ...............................................................24
G
DTC Logic ................................................................24
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................... 7 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................24
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM ...................................... 7 B1035, B1036 CRASH ZONE SEN .................. 26 SRC
System Diagram ........................................................ 7 Description ...............................................................26
System Description ................................................... 7 DTC Logic ................................................................26
Component Parts Location ........................................ 8 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................26 I
Component Description ............................................. 8
B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENS1... 28
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIRBAG) ......................10 Description ...............................................................28
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 10 DTC Logic ................................................................28 J
Air Bag Warning Lamp Diagnosis ........................... 10 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................28
CONSULT-III Function ............................................ 15
B1042, B1043, B1044, B1045, B1046, B1047
K
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 16 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 30
Description ...............................................................30
B1001, B1002, B1003, B1004, B1005 DIAG- DTC Logic ................................................................30
NOSIS SENSOR UNIT .......................................16 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................30 L
Description .............................................................. 16
DTC Logic ............................................................... 16 B1049 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE .................. 32
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 16 Description ...............................................................32 M
DTC Logic ................................................................32
B1006, B1007, B1008, B1009, B1010 DIAG- Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................32
NOSIS SENSOR UNIT .......................................18
Description .............................................................. 18 B1050 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE .................. 34 N
DTC Logic ............................................................... 18 Description ...............................................................34
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 18 DTC Logic ................................................................34
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................34 O
B1011, B1012, B1013, B1014, B1015 DIAG-
NOSIS SENSOR UNIT .......................................20 B1051 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE .................. 36
Description .............................................................. 20 Description ...............................................................36
DTC Logic ................................................................36 P
DTC Logic ............................................................... 20
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 20 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36
B1026, B1027, B1028, B1029, B1030, B1031 B1052 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE .................. 38
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..............................22 Description ...............................................................38
Description .............................................................. 22 DTC Logic ................................................................38
DTC Logic ............................................................... 22 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38
SRC-1
B1058, B1059, B1060, B1061, B1062, B1063 B1088 PRE-TEN FRONT LH ............................. 64
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .............................. 40 Description .............................................................. 64
Description .............................................................. 40 DTC Logic ............................................................... 64
DTC Logic ............................................................... 40 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 64
B1089 PRE-TEN FRONT LH ............................. 66
B1065 ASSIST A/B MODULE ........................... 42 Description .............................................................. 66
Description .............................................................. 42 DTC Logic ............................................................... 66
DTC Logic ............................................................... 42 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 66
B1090, B1091, B1092, B1093, B1094, B1095
B1066 ASSIST A/B MODULE ........................... 44 CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 68
B1067 ASSIST A/B MODULE ........................... 46 B1106, B1107, B1108, B1109, B1110, B1111
Description .............................................................. 46 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 70
DTC Logic ............................................................... 46 Description .............................................................. 70
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 46 DTC Logic ............................................................... 70
B1068 ASSIST A/B MODULE ........................... 48
Description .............................................................. 48 B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENS RH .............. 72
B1074, B1075, B1076, B1077, B1078, B1079
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .............................. 50 B1115, B1116 SATELLITE SENS RH .............. 74
B1081 PRE-TEN FRONT RH ............................ 52 B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENS LH ............... 76

B1082 PRE-TEN FRONT RH ............................ 54 B1120, B1121 SATELLITE SENS LH ............... 78

B1083 PRE-TEN FRONT RH ............................ 56 B1122, B1123, B1124, B1125, B1126, B1127
Description .............................................................. 56 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 80
B1084 PRE-TEN FRONT RH ............................ 58
Description .............................................................. 58 B1129 SIDE MODULE RH ................................ 82
B1086 PRE-TEN FRONT LH ............................. 60
B1087 PRE-TEN FRONT LH ............................. 62
SRC-2
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 86 B1151 CURTAIN MODULE LH ....................... 112
Description ............................................................. 112 A
B1132 SIDE MODULE RH .................................88 DTC Logic .............................................................. 112
Description .............................................................. 88 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 112
DTC Logic ............................................................... 88
B
Description ............................................................. 114
B1134 SIDE MODULE LH ..................................90 DTC Logic .............................................................. 114
Description .............................................................. 90 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 114 C
DTC Logic ............................................................... 90
Description ............................................................. 116 D
B1135 SIDE MODULE LH ..................................92 DTC Logic .............................................................. 116
Description .............................................................. 92 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116
DTC Logic ............................................................... 92
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 92 B1154, B1157, B1170, B1171, B1172, B1173, E
B1174, B1175 CONTROL UNIT ..................... 118
B1136 SIDE MODULE LH ..................................94 Description ............................................................. 118
Description .............................................................. 94
DTC Logic .............................................................. 118 F
DTC Logic ............................................................... 94 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 118
B1202, B1203, B1204, B1205, B1206, B1207
B1137 SIDE MODULE LH ..................................96 G
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 120
Description .............................................................. 96
Description ............................................................. 120
DTC Logic ............................................................... 96
DTC Logic .............................................................. 120
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120 SRC
B1138, B1139, B1140, B1141, B1142, B1143
B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION .. 122
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..............................98 Description ............................................................. 122
Description .............................................................. 98 I
DTC Logic .............................................................. 122
DTC Logic ............................................................... 98 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122
B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION .......... 124 J
B1144 ACU ....................................................... 100 Description ............................................................. 124
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100 K
B1212, B1213, B1214 RH1 SAT-SENS .......... 126
B1145 CURTAIN MODULE RH ....................... 102 Description ............................................................. 126
Description ............................................................ 102 L
DTC Logic .............................................................. 126
B1215, B1216, B1217 LH1 SAT-SENS .......... 128
B1146 CURTAIN MODULE RH ....................... 104 Description ............................................................. 128
M
Description ............................................................ 104
DTC Logic .............................................................. 128
DTC Logic ............................................................. 104
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104 N
B1218, B1219, B1220, B1221, B1222, B1223
B1147 CURTAIN MODULE RH ....................... 106
CONTROL UNIT .............................................. 130
Description ............................................................ 106
Description ............................................................. 130 O
DTC Logic ............................................................. 106
DTC Logic .............................................................. 130
B1148 CURTAIN MODULE RH ....................... 108 P
Description ............................................................ 108
ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 132
DTC Logic ............................................................. 108 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 132
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 108 DTC Index ............................................................. 132
B1150 CURTAIN MODULE LH ........................ 110 Wiring Diagram - SRS AIR BAG CONTROL SYS-
TEM - ..................................................................... 139
Description ............................................................ 110
DTC Logic ............................................................. 110 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 145
SRC-3
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT PRECAUTION ........................................... 147
TURN OFF ....................................................... 145
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................145 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 147
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
TURN ON ......................................................... 146 SIONER" ............................................................... 147
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................146 Service .................................................................. 147
SRC-4
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
SRC
M
JMHIA0027GB
DETAILED FLOW
N
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Interview the customer about the symptom.
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM PRELIMINARY CHECK P
At the beginning of inspection, confirm the condition of power supply circuit, check that the battery is charged
and fuses and fusible links are not blown.
Is power supply circuit normal?
YES-1 >> GO TO 3. (With CONSULT-III)
YES-2 >> GO TO 4. (Without CONSULT-III)
NO >> Repair or replace the battery and fuse/fusible links.
SRC-5
3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS USING “CONSULT-III” (WITH CONSULT-III)
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result.
Is “MALFUNCTIONING PART” displayed on CONSULT-III?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repeat DTC confirmation with diagnostic procedure.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS “AIR BAG” WARNING LAMP (WITHOUT CONSULT-III)
Check the air bag warning lamp status.
Is “MALFUNCTIONING PART” detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repeat DTC confirmation with diagnostic procedure.
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
After the malfunction is repaired, erase the self-diagnostic result. Refer to SRC-10, "Air Bag Warning Lamp
Diagnosis" or SRC-15, "CONSULT-III Function".
>> GO TO 6.
6.FINAL CHECK
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result with CONSULT-III and /or, air bag warning lamp status.
Are all malfunctions corrected?
NO-1 >> GO TO 3. (With CONSULT-III)
NO-2 >> GO TO 4. (Without CONSULT-III)
SRC-6
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
B
SRC
JMHIA0600GB
P
THIS SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM HAS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS

1. Detects crash and supply the energy for deploying air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner.
2. Detects electrical trouble in air bag system and seat belt pre-tensioner system, records trouble code, and
blinking air bag warning lamp.
SRC-7
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
3. Detects and records the deployment of air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner, and turns on air bag warning
lamp.
4. Indicates malfunctioning portion with blinking times of air bag warning lamp in diagnosis mode.
5. Indicates the malfunctioning record by CONSULT-III.
JMHIA0599ZZ
1. Front passenger air bag module M62 2. Driver air bag module M350 3. Conbination switch (Spiral cable)
M32
4. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit B14, 5. LH/RH satellite sensor 6. Front LH/RH seat belt pre-tensioner
B228, M59 • LH B37 • LH B36
• RH B211 • RH B213
7. Front LH/RH side air bag module 8. Crash zone sensor E313 9. Combination meter (Air bag warning
• LH B16 lamp) M34
• RH B212
10. LH/RH side curtain air bag module
• LH B72
• RH B256
• Air bag diagnosis sensor units are prepared for operation while the ignition switch is in the ON or START
position.
• The operation of Supplemental Restraint System is different from collision modes application. For example,
the driver air bag module and front passenger air bag module are activated in a frontal collision but not in a
side collision.
• SRS configurations which are activated for some collision modes are as follows.
SRS configuration Frontal collision Left side collision Right side collision
Driver air bag module. Refer to SRC-122, "Diagnosis
× — —
Procedure"
Front passenger air bag module. Refer to SRC-122,
× — —
"Diagnosis Procedure"
SRC-8
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
SRS configuration Frontal collision Left side collision Right side collision
A
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SRC-122,
× — —
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SRC-122,
× — — B
Front LH side air bag module. Refer toSRC-124, "Di-
— × —
agnosis Procedure"
Front RH side air bag module. Refer to SRC-124, "Di- C
— — ×
agnosis Procedure"
LH side curtain air bag module. Refer to SRC-124,
— × —
"Diagnosis Procedure" D
RH side curtain air bag module. Refer to SRC-124,
— — ×
×: Application, —: No application E
SRC
SRC-9
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIRBAG)
CAUTION:
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed in this Ser-
connectors.
• Never repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged, replace it with a
new one.
• Keep ground portion clean.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
• The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using air bag warning lamp and/or CONSULT-III.
• The user mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system
malfunction through the operation of the air bag warning lamp.
• The diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
• The mode applications for the air bag warning lamp and CONSULT-III are as follows.
User mode Diagnosis mode Display type

Air bag warning lamp X X ON-OFF operation
CONSULT-III – X Monitoring
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR

A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp-
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Information from Customer.
• WHAT..... Vehicle model.
• WHEN..... Date, Frequency.
• WHERE..... Road conditions.
• HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms.
Preliminary Check.
Check that the following parts are in good order.
• Battery (Refer to PG-3, "How to Handle Battery").
• Fuse (Refer to PG-82, "Fuse").
• System component-to-harness connections.
Air Bag Warning Lamp Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003843289
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
• The reading of these results is accomplished by “User mode” and “Diagnosis mode”.
• After a malfunction is repaired, turn ignition switch ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that
time, the self-diagnosis result is cleared.
SRC-10
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-III
A
PHIA0709E F
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (USER MODE)
Checking air bag operation according to air bag warning lamp-User mode G
1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks.
2. Compare the air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the
examples. SRC
BF-1845D
SRC-11
Air bag warning lamp examples (User mode)
Air bag warning lamp operation -User mode SRS condition Reference item
• No malfunction is detected
—
• No further action is necessary
SHIA0011E
The system is malfunctioning and Go to SRC-10, "Air Bag Warning

needs to be repaired as indicated Lamp Diagnosis"
SHIA0012E
Go to SRC-122, "Diagnosis Proce-

• Air bag is deployed
dure" or SRC-124, "Diagnosis Pro-
• Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed
cedure"
• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is mal-

functioning
• Air bag power supply circuit is mal- Go to SRC-145, "Diagnosis Proce-
functioning dure"
• Air bag warning lamp circuit is mal-
functioning
SHIA0013E
• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is mal-

functioning Go to SRC-146, "Diagnosis Proce-
• Air bag warning lamp circuit is mal- dure"
functioning
SHIA0014E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (DIAGNOSIS MODE)

1. Turn the ignition switch ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks.
2. There are 2 blinking patterns for the air bag warning lamp. One is a 3-second blink followed by a 0.5- sec-
ond blink repeat. The other is two 1.5-second blinks followed by a 0.5-second blink repeat.
SRC-12
An Example of a 3-second Blink Followed by a 0.5-second Blink Repeat
A
E
JMHIA0640GB
a through b are repeated.

b: Seven 0.5-second blinks indicate that the air bag diagnosis sensor unit circuit is malfunctioning.
F
Number of 0.5-second Blinks After a 3-second Blink Indicates Malfunctioning Items
Number of 0.5-second blinks Malfunctioning items Blinking pattern G

0 Self-diagnosis result is not deleted —
Refer to the following
• SRC-60, "DTC Logic" SRC
1 Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner • SRC-62, "DTC Logic"
• SRC-64, "DTC Logic"
I
2 Driver air bag module • SRC-34, "DTC Logic"
• SRC-36, "DTC Logic" J
K
3 Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner • SRC-54, "DTC Logic"
Refer to the following L
6 Crash zone sensor
M
• SRC-20, "DTC Logic" N
7 Air bag diagnosis sensor unit • SRC-50, "DTC Logic" O
P
SRC-13
Number of 0.5-second blinks Malfunctioning items Blinking pattern
8 Front passenger air bag module • SRC-44, "DTC Logic"
17 Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
SRC-100, "DTC Logic"
An Example of Two 1.5-second Blinks Followed by a 0.5-second Blink Repeat
JMHIA0641GB
a through b are repeated.

b: Six 0.5-second blinks indicate that the LH side curtain air bag module circuit is malfunctioning.
Number of 0.5-second Blinks After Two 1.5-second Blinks Indicates Malfunctioning Items
Number of 0.5-second blinks Malfunctioning items Blinking pattern

1 Front LH side air bag module • SRC-92, "DTC Logic"
2 Front RH side air bag module • SRC-84, "DTC Logic"
3 RH satellite sensor
4 LH satellite sensor
5 RH side curtain air bag module • SRC-104, "DTC Logic"
6 LH side curtain air bag module • SRC-112, "DTC Logic"
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

SRC-14
After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then turn ignition switch
ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the user mode. At that time the self-diagnosis result is cleared. A
B
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-III
From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode
After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis C
mode.
From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode
To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III until “SELECT SYSTEM” D
appears, then Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode.
DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-III
• “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” E
Current self-diagnosis results (also indicated with the number of air bag warning lamp blinks in Diagnosis
mode) are displayed on CONSULT-III screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring
repairs.
F
• “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on CONSULT-III screen. The stored results
are not erased until memory erasing is executed.
• “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” G
With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed
on CONSULT-III screen.
• “DISCRIMINATED NO.” SRC
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model has its own individual classification number. This
number is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. When replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the
part number for the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a correct unit can be checked by con-
firming this classification number on CONSULT-III screen. I
After repair, check that the discriminated number of air bag diagnosis sensor unit installed to vehicle is the
same. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View".
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS J
• “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
A current self-diagnosis result is displayed on CONSULT-III screen in real time.
After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”. K
• “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”
Return to “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-III screen by touching “BACK” key of CONSULT-III and
select “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” L
mode.
NOTE:
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the user mode shows the system
malfunction by illuminating the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. M
• “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”
The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased.
N
SRC-15
B1001, B1002, B1003, B1004, B1005 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
Check the whole SRS and displays the malfunction either by illuminating or blinking the air bag warning lamp
in the combination meter. Malfunctioning part can be detected by on board self-diagnosis system and CON-
SULT-III.
OPERATION
It detects a shock that exceeds a specified level and monitors whether the driver and passenger air bags, front
side air bag, side curtain air bag and pre-tensioner seat belts operate normally.
STRUCTURE
It contains the “G” sensors for both frontal and side collisions and spare battery function in case of main bat-
tery damage in collision.
INSTALLATION
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is installed under the center console with fixed bolts.
B1001 CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is mal- • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sen-
B1002 functioning or out of the specification sor unit
B1003 • Configuration in air bag diagnosis
B1004 sensor unit dose not match to the ve-
B1005 hicles specification

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-10, "Air Bag Warning Lamp Diagnosis".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in User mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-16, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WARNING:
minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
SRC-16
YES >> GO TO 3. A
NO >> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
B
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-16, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
C
YES >> GO TO 1.
D
SRC
SRC-17
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-18
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT A
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-18, "DTC Logic"
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-19
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-20
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View"
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-21
B1026, B1027, B1028, B1029, B1030, B1031 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1031

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-22
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace wiring harness. A
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-23
B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SEN
Main “G” sensor generates signal voltage, when it detects deceleration beyond the specified level caused by
vehicle frontal collision.
OPERATION
When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor and the safing algorithm to
be that of collision which exceeds specified level, the driving circuit switches on and feeds the electric ignitor of
both driver and passenger air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.
STRUCTURE
Integrated type of the “G” sensor element for frontal collision with output terminals for signal voltage.
INSTALLATION
Crash zone sensor is installed on the radiator core support assembly with fixed nuts.
B1033 CRASH ZONE SEN- Crash zone sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1034 SOR • Malfunction in crash zone sensor
[UNIT FAIL] • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sen-
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-24
3.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR A
1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-18, "Exploded View".
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT C
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-25
OPERATION
be that of collision which exceeds a specified level, the driving circuit switches on and feeds the electric ignitor
of both driver and passenger air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1035 CRASH ZONE SEN- Crash zone sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1036 SOR • Malfunction in crash zone sensor
[COMM FAIL] • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sen-
[UNMATCH] sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-26
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-27
B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENS1
OPERATION
of both driver and passenger air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1037 CRASH ZONE Crash zone sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1039 SENSOR1 • Malfunction in crash zone sensor
B1041 • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sen-
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-28
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-29
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1047

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-30
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-31
B1049 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
For driver air bag module, crash is judged by main “G” sensor output signal and safing algorithm in front direc-
tion.
OPERATION
In case of frontal collision whose acceleration exceeds the specified level, the ignition materials are ignited by
electric ignition system. The system burns the gas generating materials resulting in a chemical reaction. This
generates hot gases that flow into the air bag through a filter and expand the bag.
STRUCTURE
Driver air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator which inflates air bag.
INSTALLATION
Driver air bag module is installed on the center of steering wheel with fixed bolts.
B1049 DRIVER AIRBAG MOD- Driver air bag module circuit is open • Disconnection of wiring harness and
ULE (including the spiral cable) open
[OPEN] • Malfunction in driver air bag module
• Malfunction in spiral cable
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sen-
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
With CONSULT-III
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace harness connector.
SRC-32
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT
B
2. Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and Combination switch (Spiral cable) harness con-
nector.
3. Check continuity between driver side air bag module harness connector and body side harness connec-
tor. C
Driver air bag module Combination switch (Spiral cable)

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D
10 28
M350 M32 Existed
11 30
E
4. Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground.
Driver air bag module Continuity

F
Connector Terminal
10 Ground
M350 Not existed
11 G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-9, "Exploded View". SRC
4.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-6, "Exploded View" I
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5. J
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View" K
Is DTC detected?
L
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC-33
tion.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1050 DRIVER AIRBAG MOD- Driver air bag module circuit is shorted • Disconnection of wiring harness and
ULE to some power supply circuit short
[VB-SHORT] (including the spiral cable) • Malfunction in driver air bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-34
3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT A

B
nector.
tor.
C
Continuity
10 28 D
M350 M32 Existed
11 30
4. Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground. E

10 Ground
M350 Not existed
11
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-9, "Exploded View".
SRC
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-34, "DTC Logic". I
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC-35
tion.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1051 DRIVER AIRBAG MOD- Driver air bag module circuit is shorted • Disconnection of wiring harness and
ULE to ground short
[GND-SHORT] (including the spiral cable) • Malfunction in driver air bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-36

B
nector.
tor.
C
Continuity
10 28 D
M350 M32 Existed
11 30

10 Ground
M350 Not existed
11
YES >> GO TO 4.
SRC
1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-6, "Exploded View".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-36, "DTC Logic". K
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
L
SRC-37
tion.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1052 DRIVER AIRBAG MOD- Driver air bag module circuit are shorted • Disconnection of wiring harness
ULE to each other and short
[SHORT] (including the spiral cable) • Malfunction in driver air bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-38

B
nector.
tor.
C
Continuity
10 28 D
M350 M32 Existed
11 30

10 Ground
M350 Not existed
11
YES >> GO TO 4.
SRC
1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-6, "Exploded View".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic". K
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
L
SRC-39
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1063

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-40
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-41
B1065 ASSIST A/B MODULE
For front passenger air bag module, crash is judged by main “G” sensor output signal and safing algorithm in
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
Front passenger air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator which inflates air bag.
INSTALLATION
Front passenger air bag module is installed on the instrument panel with fixed bolts.
B1065 ASSIST A/B MODULE Front passenger air bag module circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[OPEN] is open open
• Malfunction in front passenger air
bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-42
3.REPLACE FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE A
1. Replace front passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-12, "Exploded View"
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-42, "DTC Logic". D
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END E
SRC
SRC-43
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
[VB-SHORT] is shorted to some power supply circuit short
bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-44
1. Replace front passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-12, "Exploded View".
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-45
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
[GND-SHORT] is shorted to ground short
bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-46
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-47
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1068 ASSIST A/B MODULE Front passenger air bag module circuits • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[SHORT] are shorted to each other short
bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-48
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-49
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1079

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-50
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-51
B1081 PRE-TEN FRONT RH
For front RH seat belt pre-tensioner, crash is judged by main “G” sensor output signal and safing algorithm in
front direction.
OPERATION
In the case of a frontal collision that exceeds specified impact level, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit detects
the deceleration caused by collision. It restrains the passenger with seat belt easing the stress on passengers
chest with load limiter.
STRUCTURE
The restraint system for front seat occupant consists of the pre-tensioner mechanism and load limiter mecha-
nism.
INSTALLATION
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is installed on the underside of center pillar with fixed nuts.
B1081 PRE-TEN FRONT RH Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[OPEN] is open open
• Malfunction in front RH seat belt pre-
tensioner
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-52
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
1. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View".
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View". D
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1. E
SRC
SRC-53
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
nism.
INSTALLATION
tensioner
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-54
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1. E
SRC
SRC-55
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
nism.
INSTALLATION
tensioner
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-56
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1. E
SRC
SRC-57
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
nism.
INSTALLATION
tensioner
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-58
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1. E
SRC
SRC-59
B1086 PRE-TEN FRONT LH
For front LH seat belt pre-tensioner, crash is judged by main “G” sensor output signal and safing algorithm in
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
nism.
INSTALLATION
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is installed on the underside of center pillar with fixed nuts.
B1086 PRE-TEN FRONT LH Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[OPEN] is open open
• Malfunction in front LH seat belt pre-
tensioner
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-60
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View".
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1. E
SRC
SRC-61
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
nism.
INSTALLATION
tensioner
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-62
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1. E
SRC
SRC-63
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
nism.
INSTALLATION
tensioner
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-64
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1. E
SRC
SRC-65
front direction.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
nism.
INSTALLATION
tensioner
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-66
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1. E
SRC
SRC-67
B1090, B1091, B1092, B1093, B1094, B1095 CONTROL UNIT
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1095

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-68
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-69
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1111

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-70
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-71
B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENS RH
Main “G” sensor generates signal voltage, when it detects deceleration beyond the specified level by vehicle
side collision.
OPERATION
of both the front side air bag and side curtain air bag.
STRUCTURE
Integrated type of the “G” sensor element for side collision with output terminals for signal voltage.
INSTALLATION
RH satellite sensor is installed at the underside of center pillar with fixed nuts.
B1113 SATELLITE SENS RH RH satellite sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1114 [UNIT FAIL] • Malfunction in RH satellite sensor
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-72
3.REPLACE SATELLITE SENSOR A
1. Replace RH satellite sensor. Refer to SR-20, "Exploded View".
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-73
side collision.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1115 SATELLITE SENS RH RH satellite sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1116 [COMM FAIL] • Malfunction in RH satellite sensor
[UNMATCH] • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sen-
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-74
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-75
B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENS LH
side collision.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
LH satellite sensor is installed at the underside of center pillar with fixed nuts.
B1118 SATELLITE SENS LH LH satellite sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1119 [UNIT FAIL] • Malfunction in LH satellite sensor
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-76
1. Replace LH satellite sensor. Refer to SR-20, "Exploded View".
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-77
side collision.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1120 SATELLITE SENS LH LH satellite sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1121 [COMM FAIL] • Malfunction in LH satellite sensor
[UNMATCH] • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sen-
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-78
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-79
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1127

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-80
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-81
B1129 SIDE MODULE RH
For front RH side air bag module, crash is judged by main “G” sensor output signal (left side: LH satellite sen-
sor, right side: RH satellite sensor) and safing algorithm (in air bag diagnosis sensor unit).
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
Front RH side air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator which inflates air bag.
INSTALLATION
Front RH side air bag module is installed on the side of front seat back with fixed nuts.
B1129 SIDE MODULE RH Front RH side air bag module circuit is • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[OPEN] open open
• Malfunction in front RH side air bag
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status.SRC-10, "Air Bag Warning Lamp Diagnosis"
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-82
3.REPLACE FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE A
1. Replace front RH side air bag module. Refer to SR-16, "Exploded View".
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-83
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
Front RH side air bag module is installed on the side of front seatback with fixed nuts.
[VB-SHORT] shorted to some power supply circuit short
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-84
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-85
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
[GND-SHORT] shorted to ground short
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-86
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-87
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1132 SIDE MODULE RH Front RH side air bag module circuit are • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[SHORT] shorted to each other short
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-88
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-89
B1134 SIDE MODULE LH
For front LH side air bag module, crash is judged by main “G” sensor output signal (left side: LH satellite sen-
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
Front LH side air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator which inflates air bag.
INSTALLATION
Front LH side air bag module is installed on the side of front seatback with fixed nuts.
B1134 SIDE MODULE LH Front LH side air bag module circuit is • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[OPEN] open open
• Malfunction in front LH side air bag
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-90
1. Replace front LH side air bag module. Refer to SR-16, "Exploded View".
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-91
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-92
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-93
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-94
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-95
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1137 SIDE MODULE LH Front LH side air bag module circuit are • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[SHORT] shorted to each other short
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
• Never use un specified tester or other measuring device.
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-96
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-97
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1143

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-98
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-99
B1144 ACU
B1144 ACU
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1144 ACU Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is mal- • Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sen-
functioning or out of the specification sor unit
• Configuration in air bag diagnosis
sensor unit dose not match to the ve-
hicles specification

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-100
B1144 ACU
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-101
B1145 CURTAIN MODULE RH
For RH side curtain air bag module, crash is judged by main “G” sensor output signal (left side: LH satellite
sensor, right side: RH satellite sensor) and safing algorithm (left and right GP in air bag diagnosis sensor unit).
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
RH side curtain air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator which inflates air bag.
INSTALLATION
RH side curtain air bag module is installed on the roof side with fixed bolts.
B1145 CURTAIN MODULE RH RH side curtain air bag module circuit is • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[OPEN] open open
• Malfunction in RH side curtain air
bag module
• Replace air bag diagnosis sensor
unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-102
3.REPLACE SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE A
1. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View"
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-103
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-104
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-105
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
bag module
• Replace air bag diagnosis sensor
unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-106
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-107
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1148 CURTAIN MODULE RH RH side curtain air bag module circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and
bag module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-108
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-109
B1150 CURTAIN MODULE LH
For LH side curtain air bag module, crash is judged by main “G” sensor output signal (left side: LH satellite
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
LH side curtain air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator which inflates air bag.
INSTALLATION
LH side curtain air bag module is installed on the roof side with fixed bolts.
B1150 CURTAIN MODULE LH LH side curtain air bag module circuit is • Disconnection of wiring harness and
[OPEN] open open
• Malfunction in LH side curtain air bag
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-110
1. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View"
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-111
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-112
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-113
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-114
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-115
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1153 CURTAIN MODULE LH LH side curtain air bag module circuit • Disconnection of wiring harness and
module
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-116
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
SRC
SRC-117
B1154, B1157, B1170, B1171, B1172, B1173, B1174, B1175 CONTROL UNIT
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1173
B1174
B1175

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-118
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT B
C
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END D
SRC
SRC-119
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1207

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-120
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-121
B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION
DTC B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION

When crash zone sensor detects a component damage resulting from a front collision, the system blinks or
illuminates the air bag warning lamp to inform the driver. Malfunctioning can be detected by the CONSULT-III.
OPERATION
The air bags and seat belt pre-tensioners for driver and front passenger are activated by the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit signal transmitted at the time of the frontal collision.
STRUCTURE
It consists of crash zone sensor, air bag diagnosis sensor unit, air bags and seat belt pre-tensioners for driver
and front passenger.
INSTALLATION
Refer to SR-6, "Exploded View" (Driver air bag module), SR-12, "Exploded View" (Front passenger air bag
module), SR-18, "Exploded View"(Crash zone sensor), SR-22, "Exploded View" (air bag diagnosis sensor
unit), SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View" (Front LH/RH seat belt pre-tensioner).
B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION Front seat belt pre-tensioner, front air —
DETECTION bag is deployed

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
1.CHECK FRONT AIR BAG MODULE
Check front air bag modules. (driver air bag module and/or front passenger air bag module.)
Is the front air bag module deployed?
YES >> Replace front air bag modules. Refer to SR-6, "Exploded View" or SR-12, "Exploded View".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Check front seat belt pre-tensioner.
Is the front seat belt pre-tensioner activated?
SRC-122
YES >> Replace front seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded
View". A
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
B
Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Is the front air bag module and/or front seat belt pre-tensioner activated?
YES >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View".
C
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEERING WHEEL
Check steering wheel. D
Is the steering wheel normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace steering wheel. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View". E
5.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
1. Check the continuity of spiral cable.Refer to SRC-32, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
2. Operate the steering wheel to check excessive heavy operation force, abnormal noise or damage.
YES >> GO TO 6. G
6.CHECK WIRING HARNESS/HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check wiring harness/harness connector. SRC
Is the wiring harness/harness connector normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace wiring harness/harness connector. I
7.FINAL CHECK
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result with CONSULT-III and/or Air bag warning lamp status. J
NO >> Check the intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". K
SRC-123
B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION
DTC B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION

When satellite sensor detects a component damage resulting from a side collision, blinks or illuminates the air
bag warning lamp to inform the driver. Malfunctioning can be detected by the CONSULT-III.
OPERATION
The front side air bag and side curtain air bag are activated by the air bag diagnosis sensor unit signal trans-
mitted at the time of the side collision.
STRUCTURE
It consists of satellite sensor, air bag diagnosis sensor unit, front side air bag and side curtain air bag.
INSTALLATION
Refer to SR-16, "Exploded View" (Front LH/RH side air bag module), SR-14, "Exploded View"SR-20,
"Exploded View" (LH/RH satellite sensor).
B1210 SIDE COLLISION DE- Front side air bag, side curtain air bag is —
TECTION deployed

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor)
1.CHECK FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Check front side air bag module.
Is the front side air bag module deployed?
YES >> Replace front side air bag module. Refer to SR-16, "Exploded View".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Check side curtain air bag module.
Is the side curtain air bag module deployed?
YES >> Replace side curtain air bag module. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
NO >> GO TO 3.
SRC-124
3.CHECK SATELLITE SENSOR A
Check satellite sensor.
Is the front side air bag module and/or side curtain air bag module deployed?
YES >> Replace satellite sensor. Refer to SR-20, "Exploded View". B
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
C
Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Is the front side air bag module and/or side curtain air bag module deployed?
YES >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View". D
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS/HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check wiring harness/harness connector. E
Is the wiring harness/harness connector normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace wiring harness/harness connector. F
6.FINAL CHECK
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result with CONSULT-III and/or Air bag warning lamp status. G
NO >> Check the intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". SRC
SRC-125
B1212, B1213, B1214 RH1 SAT-SENS
B1212, B1213, B1214 RH1 SAT-SENS
side collision.
OPERATION
When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor and the Safing algorithm to
both the front side air bag and side curtain air bag.
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1212 RH1 SAT-SENS RH satellite sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1213 • Malfunction in RH satellite sensor
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-126
B1212, B1213, B1214 RH1 SAT-SENS
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-127
B1215, B1216, B1217 LH1 SAT-SENS
B1215, B1216, B1217 LH1 SAT-SENS
side collision.
OPERATION
When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor and the Safing algorithm to
both the front side air bag and side curtain air bag.
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1215 LH1 SAT-SENS LH satellite sensor is out of order • Disconnection of wiring harness
B1216 • Malfunction in LH satellite sensor
sor unit

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
SRC-128
B1215, B1216, B1217 LH1 SAT-SENS
Is DTC detected? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
Is DTC detected? D
YES >> GO TO 1.
E
SRC
SRC-129
SULT-III.
OPERATION
STRUCTURE
INSTALLATION
B1223

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WARNING:
YES >> GO TO 2.
SRC-130
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
C
SRC
SRC-131
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
ECU DIAGNOSIS
DTC No. Index (With CONSULT-III)

(“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”), (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”)
NOTE:
Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is
eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-III each time repair is completed. If malfunction is still
observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.
Repair order
Diagnostic item Explanation
“Recheck SRS at each replacement”
NO DTC IS DETECT- When malfunction is in- Low battery voltage (Less than 9 V)
ED. dicated by the “AIR
• Self-diagnosis result “SELF-DIAG Go to SRC-10, "Air Bag Warning Lamp
BAG” warning lamp in
[PAST]” (previously stored in the Diagnosis" or SRC-15, "CONSULT-III
User mode
memory) might not be erased after re- Function"
pair
• Intermittent malfunction has been de-
tected in the past
No malfunction is detected —
CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is out of order or mis-matched Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit
[B1001-B1015]
[B1026-B1031]
CRASH ZONE SEN Crash zone sensor is out of order 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[UNIT FAIL] connector
[B1033] 2. Replace crash zone sensor
[B1034] 3. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor
CRASH ZONE SEN unit
[COMM FAIL]
[B1035]
[UNMATCH]
[B1036]
CRASH ZONE SEN1
[B1037]
[B1039]
[B1041]
[B1042-B1047]
DRIVER AIRBAG MOD- Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable) 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
ULE connector
[OPEN] 2. Replace driver air bag module
[B1049] 3. Replace spiral cable.
4. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor
DRIVER AIRBAG MOD- Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply cir-
unit
ULE cuit (including the spiral cable)
[VB-SHORT]
[B1050]
DRIVER AIRBAG MOD- Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spi-
ULE ral cable)
[GND-SHORT]
[B1051]
DRIVER AIRBAG MOD- Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other (including
ULE spiral cable)
[SHORT]
[B1052]
SRC-132
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
Repair order
“Recheck SRS at each replacement” A
[B1058-B1063]
ASSIST A/B MODULE Front passenger air bag module circuit is open 1. Replace wiring harness/harness B
[OPEN] connector
[B1065] 2. Replace front passenger air bag
module
ASSIST A/B MODULE Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power C
[VB-SHORT] supply circuit
unit
[B1066]
ASSIST A/B MODULE Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground D
[GND-SHORT]
[B1067]
ASSIST A/B MODULE Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other
[SHORT] E
[B1068]
[B1074-B1079] F
PRE-TEN FRONT RH Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is open 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[OPEN] connector
[B1081] 2. Replace front RH seat belt pre- G
tensioner
PRE-TEN FRONT RH Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to some power
unit
[B1082]
SRC
PRE-TEN FRONT RH Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to ground
[GND-SHORT]
[B1083]
I
PRE-TEN FRONT RH Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuits are shorted to each other
[SHORT]
[B1084]
PRE-TEN FRONT LH Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is open 1. Replace wiring harness/harness J
[OPEN] connector
[B1086] 2. Replace front LH seat belt pre-
tensioner
PRE-TEN FRONT LH Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to some power
K
unit
[B1087]
PRE-TEN FRONT LH Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to ground L
[GND-SHORT]
[B1088]
PRE-TEN FRONT LH Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuits are shorted to each other
[SHORT] M
[B1089]
[B1090-B1095] N
[B1106-B1111]
SATELLITE SENS RH RH satellite sensor is out of order 1. Replace wiring harness/harness O
[B1113] 2. Replace RH satellite sensor
SATELLITE SENS RH unit P
[COMM FAIL]
[B1115]
[UNMATCH]
[B1116]
SRC-133
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
Repair order
“Recheck SRS at each replacement”
SATELLITE SENS LH LH satellite sensor is out of order 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[B1118] 2. Replace LH satellite sensor
SATELLITE SENS LH unit
[COMM FAIL]
[B1120]
[UNMATCH]
[B1121]
[B1122-B1127]
SIDE MODULE RH Front RH side air bag module circuit is open 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[OPEN] connector
[B1129] 2. Replace front RH side air bag
module
SIDE MODULE RH Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power sup-
[VB-SHORT] ply circuit
unit
[B1130]
SIDE MODULE RH Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground
[GND-SHORT]
[B1131]
SIDE MODULE RH Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuits are shorted to each other
[SHORT]
[B1132]
SIDE MODULE LH Front LH side air bag module circuit is open 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[OPEN] connector
[B1134] 2. Replace front LH side air bag
module
SIDE MODULE LH Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power sup-
[VB-SHORT] ply circuit
unit
[B1135]
SIDE MODULE LH Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground
[GND-SHORT]
[B1136]
SIDE MODULE LH Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other
[SHORT]
[B1137]
[B1138-B1143]
ACU Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is out of order or mis-matched Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit
[B1144]
CURTAIN MODULE RH RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[OPEN] connector
[B1145] 2. Replace RH side curtain air bag
module
CURTAIN MODULE RH RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power
unit
[B1146]
CURTAIN MODULE RH RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground
[GND-SHORT]
[B1147]
CURTAIN MODULE RH RH side curtain air bag module circuits are shorted to each other
[SHORT]
[B1148]
SRC-134
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
Repair order
“Recheck SRS at each replacement” A
CURTAIN MODULE LH LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[OPEN] connector
[B1150] 2. Replace LH side curtain air bag B
module
CURTAIN MODULE LH LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power
[VB-SHORT] supply circuits
unit
[B1151]
C
CURTAIN MODULE LH LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground
[GND-SHORT]
[B1152]
D
CURTAIN MODULE LH LH side curtain air bag module circuits are shorted to each other
[SHORT]
[B1153]
CONTROL UNIT Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is out of order or mis-matched Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit E
[B1154]
[B1157]
[B1170-B1175]
F
[B1202-B1207]
FRONTAL COLLISION Front seat belt pre-tensioner and front air bag is deployed Go to SRC-122, "Diagnosis Procedure" G
DETECTION
[B1209]
SIDE COLLISION DE- Front side air bag and side curtain air bag are deployed Go to SRC-124, "Diagnosis Procedure"
TECTION SRC
[B1210]
RH1 SAT-SENS RH satellite sensor is out of order 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[B1212] connector I
[B1213] 2. Replace RH satellite sensor
unit
J
LH1 SAT-SENS LH satellite sensor is out of order 1. Replace wiring harness/harness
[B1215] connector
[B1216] 2. Replace LH satellite sensor
[B1217] 3. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor K
unit
[B1218-B1223] L
WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART (Without CONSULT-III)
NOTE:
Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is M
eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-III each time repair is completed. If malfunction is still
observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.
N
PHIA0532E
SRC-135
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
JMHIA0689GB
JMHIA0692GB
JMHIA0693GB
JMHIA0694GB
JMHIA0695GB
SRC-136
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
C
JMHIA0696GB
JMHIA0697GB
G
SRC
J
JMHIA0698GB
JMHIA0699GB
JMHIA0700GB
SRC-137
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
JMHIA0701GB
JMHIA0702GB
JMHIA0703GB
SRC-138
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
Wiring Diagram - SRS AIR BAG CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003814105
SRC
JCHWM0188GB
P
SRC-139
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
JCHWM0189GB
SRC-140
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
SRC
JCHWM0190GB
SRC-141
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
JCHWM0191GB
SRC-142
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
SRC
JCHWM0192GB
SRC-143
< ECU DIAGNOSIS >
JCHWM0193GB
SRC-144
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
B
1.CHECK FRONT AIR BAG MODULE

Check the deployment of front air bag module. C
Is air bag module deployed?
YES >> Refer to SR-6, "Exploded View" or SR-12, "Exploded View".
NO >> GO TO 2. D
2.CHECK AIR BAG FUSE
Check the air bag fuse. Refer to PG-82, "Fuse". E
Is 10A fuse [No.2, located in fuse block (J/B)] normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace the air bag fuse and GO TO 3. F
3.CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the air bag fuse. Refer to PG-82, "Fuse". G
Did the air bag fuse blow again?
YES >> Repair or replace related harness.
NO >> GO TO 4. SRC
4.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic result. I
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
NO >> Check the intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". J
SRC-145
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
1.CHECK METER FUSE

Check the meter fuse. Refer to PG-82, "Fuse".
Is 10A fuse [No.4, located in fuse block (J/B)] normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace the fuse GO TO 2.
2.CHECK METER FUSE AGAIN
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the meter fuse. Refer to PG-82, "Fuse".
Did the meter fuse blow again?
YES >> Repair or replace the related harness.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION
1. Check harness connection between air bag diagnosis sensor unit and combination meter.
2. Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Did air bag warning lamp turn ON?
YES >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-22, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace combination meter assembly. Refer to MWI-127, "Exploded View".
SRC-146
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors.
G
Service INFOID:0000000003814109
• Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 SRC
minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the battery negative terminal is removed, it is still possible for the air bag
and seat belt pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 I
minutes have elapsed.
• Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the
vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installa-
tion and replace as required. J
• The spiral cable must be aligned in the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not turn steering
wheel and column after removal of steering gear.
• Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side K
facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down.
• Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
• After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
L
• Always replace instrument panel pad following front passenger air bag deployment.
SRC-147
VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
VENTILATION SYSTEM
VTL B
E
CONTENTS
WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY Removal and Installation .........................................20 F
Replacement ...........................................................20
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................... 5
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 21 G
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNC-
TION .................................................................... 5 A/C CONTROL .................................................. 21
System Description ................................................... 5 Exploded View .........................................................21
AIR DISTRIBUTION ............................................ 6
System Description ................................................... 6 A/C DISPLAY .................................................... 22
Exploded View .........................................................22
VTL
PRECAUTION ............................................... 7 Removal and Installation .........................................22
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 7 A/C AUTO AMP. ............................................... 23

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .........................................................23 J
SIONER" ................................................................... 7
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- AMBIENT SENSOR .......................................... 24
Exploded View .........................................................24 K
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 8 Removal and Installation .........................................24
Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service ............... 8 IN-VEHICLE SENSOR ...................................... 25 L
Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) ............................. 8
Exploded View .........................................................25
General Refrigerant Precaution ................................ 8
Refrigerant Connection ............................................. 9
Service Equipment .................................................. 11 SUNLOAD SENSOR ......................................... 26 M
Exploded View .........................................................26
COMPRESSOR ..................................................14 Removal and Installation .........................................26
General Precautions ............................................... 14
N
INTAKE SENSOR ............................................. 27
FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTOR .................15 Exploded View .........................................................27
General Precautions ............................................... 15
O
PREPARATION ........................................... 16 BLOWER UNIT ................................................. 29
PREPARATION ..................................................16 Exploded View .........................................................29
Special Service Tool ............................................... 16 Removal and Installation .........................................30 P
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 18 BLOWER MOTOR ............................................ 32
Sealant or/and Lubricant ......................................... 18 Exploded View .........................................................32
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................... 20
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ................................... 33
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER ..............................20
Exploded View .........................................................33
Exploded View ........................................................ 20
VTL-1
Removal and Installation ........................................ 33 REAR FOOT DUCT 1 ................................................ 54
REAR FOOT DUCT 1 : Exploded View .................. 55
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY ......... 35 REAR FOOT DUCT 1 : Removal and Installation ... 55
Exploded View ........................................................ 35
MODE DOOR MOTOR ...................................... 40 REAR FOOT DUCT 2 : Removal and Installation ... 56
Exploded View ........................................................ 40
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR .................................... 41 REAR FOOT DUCT 3 : Removal and Installation ... 58
Exploded View ........................................................ 41
Removal and Installation ........................................ 41 FOOT DUCT .............................................................. 59
FOOT DUCT : Exploded View ................................ 59
HEATER CORE ................................................. 43 FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation ................. 60
Exploded View ........................................................ 43 WITH 7 INCH DISPLAY
Removal and Installation ........................................ 44
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................ 61
DUCT AND GRILLE .......................................... 45
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNC-
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE .............................. 45 TION ................................................................... 61
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View... 45
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and WITHOUT INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER
Installation .............................................................. 45 SYSTEM .................................................................... 61
WITHOUT INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE .................................... 45 SYSTEM : System Description ............................... 61
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View ....... 46
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and In- WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYS-
stallation ................................................................. 46 TEM ........................................................................... 62
WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYS-
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE ..................................... 46 TEM : System Description ...................................... 62
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Exploded View ........ 47
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and In- AIR DISTRIBUTION .......................................... 63
stallation ................................................................. 47 System Description ................................................. 63
VENTILATOR DUCT ................................................. 47 PRECAUTION ............................................ 64
VENTILATOR DUCT : Exploded View ................... 48
VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation ... 48 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 64
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE .................................... 49 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Exploded View ...... 49 SIONER" ................................................................. 64
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and In- Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
stallation ................................................................. 49
tion after Battery Disconnect ................................... 64
DEFROSTER NOZZLE ............................................. 50 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover... 65
DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Exploded View ................ 50 Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service ............. 65
DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) ........................... 65
... 51 General Refrigerant Precaution .............................. 65
Refrigerant Connection ........................................... 66
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE .................................. 51 Service Equipment .................................................. 68
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View ...... 52
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and In- COMPRESSOR ................................................. 71
stallation ................................................................. 52 General Precautions ............................................... 71
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 ................................... 52 FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTOR ................. 72

REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 : Exploded View ..... 53 General Precautions ............................................... 72
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 : Removal and In-
stallation ................................................................. 53 PREPARATION .......................................... 73
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 ................................... 53 PREPARATION ................................................. 73
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Exploded View ..... 54 Special Service Tool ............................................... 73
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Removal and In- Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 75
stallation ................................................................. 54 Sealant or/and Lubricant ......................................... 75
VTL-2
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................... 77 Exploded View .........................................................98
Removal and Installation .........................................98 A
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER ..............................77
Exploded View ........................................................ 77 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR ................................... 99
Removal and Installation ......................................... 77 Exploded View .........................................................99
Removal and Installation .........................................99 B
Replacement ........................................................... 77
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 78 HEATER CORE ............................................... 101

Exploded View ....................................................... 101 C
PRESET SWITCH ..............................................78 Removal and Installation ....................................... 102
Exploded View ........................................................ 78
Removal and Installation ......................................... 78 DUCT AND GRILLE ........................................ 103
D
REAR CONTROL SWITCH ................................79 CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE ............................. 103
Exploded View ........................................................ 79 CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View.. 103
Removal and Installation ......................................... 79 CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and E
Installation ............................................................. 103
A/C AUTO AMP. .................................................80
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE ................................... 103
Exploded View ........................................................ 80
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View ...... 104 F
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and In-
AMBIENT SENSOR ...........................................81 stallation ................................................................ 104
Exploded View ........................................................ 81 G
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE .................................... 104
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Exploded View ...... 105
GAS SENSOR ....................................................82 SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and In-
stallation ................................................................ 105 H
TEM ............................................................................ 82 VENTILATOR DUCT ................................................ 105
WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYS- VENTILATOR DUCT : Exploded View .................. 106
VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation .. 106 VTL
TEM : Exploded View .............................................. 82
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE ................................... 107
TEM : Removal and Installation .............................. 82
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Exploded View ..... 107 J
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR .......................................83 SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and In-
Exploded View ........................................................ 83 stallation ................................................................ 107
Removal and Installation ......................................... 83 DEFROSTER NOZZLE ............................................ 108 K
SUNLOAD SENSOR ..........................................84 DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Exploded View .............. 108
Exploded View ........................................................ 84 DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation
.. 109 L
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE ................................. 109
INTAKE SENSOR ..............................................85
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View .... 110
Exploded View ........................................................ 85 M
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and In-
stallation ................................................................ 110
BLOWER UNIT ...................................................87 REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 ................................. 110
Exploded View ........................................................ 87 N
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 : Exploded View .... 111
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 : Removal and In-
BLOWER MOTOR ..............................................90 stallation ................................................................ 111
O
Exploded View ........................................................ 90 REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 ................................. 111
Removal and Installation ......................................... 90 REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Exploded View .... 112
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ....................................91 REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Removal and In-
P
stallation ................................................................ 112
Exploded View ........................................................ 91
Removal and Installation ......................................... 91 REAR FOOT DUCT 1 .............................................. 112
REAR FOOT DUCT 1 : Exploded View ................. 113
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY .........93
REAR FOOT DUCT 1 : Removal and Installation.. 113
Exploded View ........................................................ 93
Removal and Installation ......................................... 95 REAR FOOT DUCT 2 .............................................. 114
REAR FOOT DUCT 2 : Exploded View ................. 114
MODE DOOR MOTOR .......................................98
VTL-3
REAR FOOT DUCT 2 : Removal and Installation..114 IONIZER ............................................................ 119
REAR FOOT DUCT 3 ...............................................115 WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYS-
REAR FOOT DUCT 3 : Exploded View .................116 TEM ......................................................................... 119
REAR FOOT DUCT 3 : Removal and Installation..116 WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYS-
TEM : Exploded View ............................................ 119
FOOT DUCT .............................................................117
FOOT DUCT : Exploded View ...............................117
TEM : Removal and Installation ............................ 119
FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation ...............118
VTL-4
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY]
B
VTL
JPIIA0885GB
JSIIA1186GB
VTL-5
AIR DISTRIBUTION
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY]
AIR DISTRIBUTION
JPIIA0877GB
VTL-6
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors.
G
INFOID:0000000003845340
NOTE: H
VTL
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: L
VTL-7
PRECAUTIONS
PIIB3706J
WARNING:
generated parts.
CAUTION:
Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) INFOID:0000000003802521
CAUTION:
• CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. These refrigerants
must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. Compressor malfunction is likely occur if the
refrigerants are mixed.
• Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) compo-
nents. Compressor malfunction is likely to occur if lubricant other than that specified is used.
• The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The fol-
lowing handling precautions must be observed:
- Cap (seal) immediately the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere when
removing refrigerant components from a vehicle.
- Never remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components when installing refrig-
erant components to a vehicle. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to
minimize the entry of moisture into system.
- Use only the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Reseal immediately containers of lubricant.
Lubricant becomes moisture saturated and should not be used without proper sealing.
- Never allow lubricant (NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S) to come in contact with styrene foam parts.
Damage may result.
General Refrigerant Precaution INFOID:0000000003802522
WARNING:
• Never breath A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant.
VTL-8
PRECAUTIONS
Ventilate work area before resuming service if accidental system discharge occurs. Additional health
and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. A
• Never release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant each time an air conditioning system is discharged.
• Wear always eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
B
conditioning system.
• Never store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (126°F).
• Never heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; Place the bottom of the container in a warm
pail of water if container warming is required. C
• Never intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
• Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas is produced if refrigerant burns.
• Refrigerant displaces oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffo- D
cation.
• Never pressure test or leakage test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air condi-
tioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause E
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refriger-
ant manufacturers.
Refrigerant Connection INFOID:0000000003802523
F
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations.
• Expansion valve to evaporator G
• Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
H
VTL
O
JPIIA0986ZZ
F. Former type refrigerant connection N. New type refrigerant connection P
: O-ring size
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Never confuse O-
rings since they are not interchangeable. Refrigerant may leak at the connection if a wrong O-ring is
installed.
VTL-9
PRECAUTIONS
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
Connection type Piping connection point Part number QTY O-ring size
Low-pressure flexible hose to low-pressure pipe 92474 N8210 1 19
High-pressure pipe to condenser pipe assembly (Outlet) 92471 N8210 1 8
Condenser pipe assembly (Inlet) to high-pressure flexible
92472 N8210 1 12
hose
Condenser assembly to condenser pipe as- Inlet 92472 N8210 1 12

sembly Outlet 92471 N8210 1 8
New
Low-pressure pipe to expansion valve 92473 N8210 1 16
High-pressure pipe to expansion valve 92471 N8210 1 8
Compressor to low-pressure flexible hose 92474 N8210 1 19
Compressor to high-pressure flexible hose 92472 N8210 1 12
Inlet 1
Liquid tank to condenser assembly 92471 N8210 8
Outlet 1
Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank J2476 89956 1 10
Inlet 92475 71L00 1 12
Expansion valve to evaporator pipe assembly
Former Outlet 92475 72L00 1 16
Inlet 92475 71L00 1 12
Evaporator to evaporator pipe assembly
Outlet 92475 72L00 1 16
WARNING:
Check that all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
Observe the following when replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components.
• Store it in the same way at it is when mounted on the car when the compressor is removed. Failure
to do so causes lubricant to enter the low-pressure chamber.
• Use always a torque wrench and a back-up wrench when connecting tubes.
• Plug immediately all openings to prevent entry of dust and moisture after disconnecting tubes.
• Connect the pipes at the final stage of the operation when installing an air conditioner in the vehicle.
Never remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection.
• Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
• Remove thoroughly moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
• Replace always used O-rings.
• Apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration when connecting tube. Be careful not to
apply lubricant to threaded portion.
Name : NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S

• O-ring must be closely attached to the groove portion of tube.
• Be careful not to damage O-ring and tube when replacing the O-ring.
• Connect tube until a click can be heard. Then tighten the nut or bolt by hand. Check that the O-ring is
installed to tube correctly.
VTL-10
PRECAUTIONS
• Perform leakage test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections after connecting line.
Disconnect that line and replace the O-ring when the refrigerant leaking point is found. Then tighten A
connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
RHA861F
Service Equipment INFOID:0000000003802524 G
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never H
introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTOR
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance. VTL
VACUUM PUMP
The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible J
with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems.
The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pres-
sure. So the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump
into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched K
OFF after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve placed near the hose-
to-pump connection, as per the following. L
• Vacuum pumps usually have a manual isolator valve as part of the
pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump.
• Use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump
end for pumps without an isolator. Close the valve to isolate the M
hose from the pump.
• Disconnect the hose from the pump if the hose has an automatic
shut-off valve. As long as the hose is connected, the valve is open N
and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump’s
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended. O
P
RHA270DA
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
VTL-11
PRECAUTIONS
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a or R-134a. Be
sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for ser-
vice hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants.
SHA533D
SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must equip positive shut-
off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses
opposite to the manifold gauge.
RHA272D
SERVICE COUPLERS
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a
CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers do
not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve

Clockwise Open
Counterclockwise Close
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE

Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and speci-
fied lubricants have been used with the scale. The hose fitting must
be 1/2″-16 ACME if the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically.
RHA274D
CALIBRATING ACR4 WEIGHT SCALE

Calibrate the scale each three month.
To calibrate the weight scale on the ACR4:
1. Press “Shift/Reset” and “Enter” at the same time.
2. Press “8787”. “A1” is displayed.
3. Remove all weight from the scale.
4. Press “0”, then press “Enter”. “0.00” is displayed and change to “A2”.
VTL-12
PRECAUTIONS
5. Place a known weight (dumbbell or similar weight), between 4.5 and 8.6 kg (10 and 19 lb.) on the center
of the weight scale. A
6. Enter the known weight using four digits. (Example 10 lb. = 10.00, 10.5 lb. = 10.50)
7. Press “Enter”— the display returns to the vacuum mode.
8. Press “Shift/Reset” and “Enter” at the same time. B
9. Press “6”— the known weight on the scale is displayed.
10. Remove the known weight from the scale. “0.00” is displayed.
C
11. Press “Shift/Reset” to return the ACR4 to the program mode.
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder’s top valve D
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.
E
VTL
VTL-13
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
CAUTION:
• Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
• Store it in the same way at it is when mounted on the car when the compressor is removed.
• Follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly when replacing or repairing
compressor. Refer to HA-28, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity".
• Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. Wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth
moistened with thinner if the surface is contaminated with lubricant.
• Turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in both directions after compressor service
operation. This distributes equally lubricant inside the compressor. Let the engine idle and operate
the compressor for one hour after the compressor is installed.
• Apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation after replacing the compressor magnet
clutch.
VTL-14
FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTOR
A
CAUTION: B
• The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leakages. An
ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leakages.
• Wear always fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye. C
• The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electrical leak detector (SST). The fluo-
rescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electrical leak detector (SST) to pin-
point refrigerant leakages. D
• Read and follow all manufacture’s operating instructions and precautions prior to performing the
work for the purpose of safety and customer’s satisfaction.
• A compressor shaft seal should not necessarily be repaired because of dye seepage. The compres-
sor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leakage with an electrical leak detector E
(SST).
• Remove always any remaining dye from the leakage area after repairs are completed to avoid a mis-
diagnosis during a future service. F
• Never allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. Clean imme-
diately with the approved dye cleaner if dye is spilled. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an
extended period of time cannot be removed.
• Never spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). G
• Never use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce /7.4 cc) per A/C system.
• Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Never use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system, or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection H
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system, or A/C system damage may result.
• The fluorescent properties of the dye remains for three or more years unless a compressor malfunc-
tion occurs.
VTL
IDENTIFICATION
NOTE:
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green label. J
Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue label.
IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have the identification label on the front side of hood. K
VTL-15
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment

• Never mix HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/
or its lubricant.
• Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/
lubricant.
• Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid
mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant.
• Never use adapters that convert one size fitting to another: refrigerant/lubricant contamination occurs and
compressor malfunction may result.
Tool number
(SPX-North America No.) Description
Tool name
Recovery/recycling/recharging Function: Refrigerant recovery, recycling

equipment (ACR4) and recharging
RJIA0195E
Power supply:
Electrical leak detector
DC 12 V (Cigarette lighter)
SHA705EB
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection
kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector Power supply:
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce DC 12 V (Battery terminal)
bottle
(J-41447)
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles) ZHA200H
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
VTL-16
PREPARATION
Tool number
(SPX-North America No.) Description A
Tool name
Power supply: B
DC 12 V (Battery terminal)
(J-42220) For checking refrigerant leak when fluores-
UV lamp and UV safety goggles cent dye is installed in A/C system
Includes: C
SHA438F
D
Application:
For HFC-134a (R-134a) PAG oil
(J-41447)
Container:
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent E
1/4 ounce (7.4 cc) bottle
leak detection dye
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
labels for affixing to vehicle after charging
system with dye.)
SHA439F F
(J-41459) G
HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent leak
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce detection dye into A/C system
bottle
H
SHA440F
VTL
(J-43872)
For cleaning dye spills
Refrigerant dye cleaner J
SHA441F
K
L
Identification:
• The gauge face indicates HFC-134a (R-
Manifold gauge set (with hoses 134a).
and couplers) Fitting size: Thread size M
• 1/2″-16 ACME
N
RJIA0196E
Hose color:
• Low-pressure side hose: Blue with black O
stripe
Service hoses • High-pressure side hose: Red with black
• High-pressure side hose stripe
• Low-pressure side hose • Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or P
• Utility hose green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
S-NT201
• 1/2″-16 ACME
VTL-17
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Service couplers Hose fitting to service hose:

• High-pressure side coupler M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently
• Low-pressure side coupler attached.
S-NT202
For measuring of refrigerant

Refrigerant weight scale Fitting size: Thread size
1/2″-16 ACME
S-NT200
Capacity:
• Air displacement: 4 CFM
Vacuum pump • Micron rating: 20 microns
(Including the isolator valve) • Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz.)
Fitting size: Thread size
• 1/2″-16 ACME
S-NT203
Remover tools Remove clips, pawls, metal clips
PIIB7923J
Sealant or/and Lubricant INFOID:0000000003802543

or its lubricant.
lubricant.
• Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
VTL-18
PREPARATION
Tool name Description A
Container color: Light blue

Container marking: HFC-134a (R- B
HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant 134a)
• Large container 1/2″-16 ACME
C
S-NT196
Type: Polyalkylene glycol oil (PAG), D

type S (DH-PS)
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S Application:
(DH-PS) HFC-134a (R-134a) swash plate com-
pressors (Nissan only)
E
Capacity: 40 m (1.4 Imp fl oz.)
S-NT197
VTL
VTL-19
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY]
JPIIA0895ZZ
1. Heater & cooling unit assembly 2. Air conditioner filter 3. Filter cover
REMOVAL
1. Remove filter cover (1), and then remove air conditioner filter
(2).
JPIIA0896ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is basically the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• If the filter is deformed/damaged when removing, replace it with a new one. Deformed/damaged filter
may deteriorate the duct collecting performance.
• When installing, handle the filter with extreme care to avoid deforming/damaging.
Replacement INFOID:0000000003774656
Replace air conditioner filter.

Refer to MA-6, "Periodic Maintenance".
Affix a caution label inside the glove box when replacing filter.
VTL-20
A/C CONTROL
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [WITHOUT 7 INCH DISPLAY]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
A/C CONTROL
B
JPIIA0948ZZ
H
1. Cluster lid D 2. A/C control

VTL
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". J
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove A/C control (1).
M
JPIIA0949ZZ
INSTALLATION
N
VTL-21
A/C DISPLAY
A/C DISPLAY
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1028ZZ
1. AV display 2. CRT filter 3. A/C display

4. Bracket
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove audio display
with bracket as a single unit (1).
JPIIA0950ZZ
3. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove A/C display (1).
JPIIA0951ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-22
A/C AUTO AMP.
A/C AUTO AMP.
A
DISASSEMBLY B
JPNIA1027ZZ
H
1. Audio unit 2. Bracket LH 3. A/C auto amp.
4. Bracket RH

VTL
REMOVAL
J
1. Remove audio unit. Refer to AV-37, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove A/C auto amp.
(1).
K
JPIIA0897ZZ
INSTALLATION N
VTL-23
AMBIENT SENSOR
AMBIENT SENSOR
1. Ambient sensor
JPIIA0898ZZ
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect ambient sensor connector (A), and then remove
ambient sensor (1).
JPIIA0899ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-24
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
A
JPIIA0902ZZ
G
1. In-vehicle sensor 2. Instrument lower panel LH
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774666 H
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". VTL
2. Remove mounting screw (A), and then remove in-vehicle sensor
(1).
J
L
JPIIA0903ZZ
INSTALLATION M
VTL-25
SUNLOAD SENSOR
SUNLOAD SENSOR
1. Sunload sensor
JPIIA0904ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect sunload sensor connector, and then remove sunload
sensor (1).
JPIIA0905ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-26
INTAKE SENSOR
INTAKE SENSOR
A
VTL
JPIIA0906GB
N
1. Ventilator seal 2. Defroster seal 3. Distributor upper case
4. Center case 5. Heater & cooling unit case cover 6. Foot duct 1 (right)
7. Foot duct 2 (right) 8. Air mix door motor (passenger side) 9. Evaporator pipe assembly O
10. Expansion valve 11. O-ring 12. Evaporator
13. Filter cover 14. Air conditioner filter 15. Case packing
16. Heater & cooling unit case (right) 17. Cooler pipe grommet 18. Grommet P
19. Heater pipe grommet 20. Heater pipe support 21. Drain hose
22. Heater & cooling unit case (left) 23. Air mix door motor (driver side) 24. Heater core
25. Heater pipe cover 26. Foot duct 2 (left) 27. Foot duct 1 (left)
28. Aspirator hose 29. Aspirator 30. Mode door motor
31. Main link 32. Rod link 33. Ventilator door link
34. Mode door lever 35. Ventilator door lever 36. Max. cool door link
VTL-27
INTAKE SENSOR
37. Defroster door link 38. Foot door link 39. Max. cool door lever
40. Foot door lever 41. Defroster door lever 42. Adapter case
43. Distributor lower case 44. Ventilator door 45. Intake sensor
46. Intake sensor bracket 47. Foot door 48. Max. cool door
49. Defroster door 50. Air mix door (Slide door)
REMOVAL
1. Remove evaporator pipe assembly. Refer to HA-54, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect intake sensor connector.
3. Slide evaporator (1) toward the right side of the vehicle (as
shown in the figure), and then remove intake sensor (2).
JPIIA0907ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Replace O-rings with new ones. Then apply compressor oil to them when installing.
• Mark the mounting position of intake sensor bracket prior to removal so that the reinstalled sensor
can be located in the same position.
• Do not rotate the bracket insertion part when removing and installing the intake sensor.
• Check for refrigerant leakage when charging refrigerant.
VTL-28
BLOWER UNIT
BLOWER UNIT
A
VTL
JPIIA0914GB
1. Blower unit 2. Heater & cooling unit assembly 3. Steering member J

4. Instrument stay 5. Instrument panel assembly
K
DISASSEMBLY
VTL-29
BLOWER UNIT
JPIIA0908ZZ
1. Shutter box case 2. Intake door 3. Intake door motor

4. Blower motor 5. Intake lower case 6. Outlet seal
7. Intake upper case 8. Intake seal
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting nuts (A), and then remove instrument stay
(1).
JPIIA0909ZZ
3. Disconnect intake door motor and blower motor connectors.
VTL-30
BLOWER UNIT
4. Remove heater & cooling unit assembly mounting bolts (A) and blower unit mounting bolts (B).
A
H
JPIIA0910ZZ
5. Remove steering member mounting bolts (C) (right).

6. Remove blower unit (2) while pulling steering member (1). VTL
INSTALLATION
J
VTL-31
BLOWER MOTOR
BLOWER MOTOR
JPIIA0908ZZ
1. Shutter box case 2. Intake door 3. Intake door motor

REMOVAL
1. Remove globe box assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect blower motor connector.
3. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove blower motor
(1).
JPIIA0911ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-32
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
A
VTL
JPIIA0908ZZ
1. Shutter box case 2. Intake door 3. Intake door motor J

K
REMOVAL L
1. Remove globe box assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting screw (A), and then move remote keyless
entry receiver (1) to a position where it does not inhibit work. M
JPIIA0912ZZ
VTL-33
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
3. Remove mounting screw (A), and then remove intake door
motor (1).
4. Disconnect intake door motor connector.
JPIIA0913ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-34
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
A
VTL
JPIIA0914GB
1. Blower unit 2. Heater & cooling unit assembly 3. Steering member J

4. Instrument stay 5. Instrument panel assembly
K
DISASSEMBLY
VTL-35
JPIIA0906GB

7. Foot duct 2 (right) 8. Air mix door motor (passenger side) 9. Evaporator pipe assembly
16. Heater & cooling unit case (right) 17. Cooler pipe grommet 18. Grommet
VTL-36
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. A
B
REMOVAL
1. Collect the refrigerant with refrigerant collecting equipment (for HFC134a).
2. Drain engine coolant from cooling system. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". C
3. Remove mounting bolt (A), and then disconnect low-pressure
pipe (1) and high-pressure pipe (2) from the expansion valve.
CAUTION: D
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and expansion valve
with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry
of air. E
F
JPIIA0915ZZ
4. Remove air cleaner case and air duct. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View" G
5. Remove clamps (A), and then disconnect heater hoses (1).
CAUTION:
• Some coolant may spill when heater hoses are discon- H
nected. Wipe them off with wastes.
• Close the coolant inlet/outlet on the heater core and
heater hoses with wastes.
VTL
J
JPIIA0916ZZ
6. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". K

7. Remove mounting nuts (A), and then remove instrument stay
(1).
L
N
JPIIA0909ZZ
VTL-37
8. Remove mounting bolts (A) from heater & cooling unit assembly and blower unit.
JPIIA0917ZZ
9. Remove steering column mounting nuts (B). Refer to ST-13, "Exploded View".
10. Remove ground bolts (C) from steering member (1).
11. Disconnect each harness connectors, and remove harness clips from steering member.
12. Remove mounting bolts (A), and then remove steering member (1).
JPIIA0918ZZ
13. Disconnect the intake door motor and blower motor connectors.
14. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove blower unit (1).
JPIIA0919ZZ
15. Disconnect drain hose (1) from heater & cooling unit assembly.
JPIIA0920ZZ
VTL-38
16. Remove floor duct 1 (left and right) (1) and rear ventilator duct 1
(2), and then remove heater & cooling unit assembly (3). A
JPIIA0921ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Replace O-rings with new ones. Then apply compressor oil to them when installing. E
• Check for leakages when recharging refrigerant.
NOTE:
• Refer to CO-9, "Refilling" when filling radiator with engine coolant. F
• Charge the refrigerant.
VTL
VTL-39
MODE DOOR MOTOR
MODE DOOR MOTOR
JPIIA0922ZZ
1. Heater & cooling unit assembly 2. Air mix door motor (passenger side) 3. Air mix door motor (driver side)
4. Mode door motor 5. Main link 6. Rod link
7. Mode door lever 8. Ventilator door link 9. Foot door link
10. Foot door lever 11. Max. cool door link 12. Max. cool door lever
13. Defroster door link 14. Defroster door lever
REMOVAL
1. Remove BCM. Refer to BCS-78, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove mode door
motor (1).
3. Disconnect mode door motor connector.
JPIIA0923ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-40
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
A
G
JPIIA0922ZZ
1. Heater & cooling unit assembly 2. Air mix door motor (passenger side) 3. Air mix door motor (driver side)
4. Mode door motor 5. Main link 6. Rod link
H
7. Mode door lever 8. Ventilator door link 9. Foot door link
10. Foot door lever 11. Max. cool door link 12. Max. cool door lever
13. Defroster door link 14. Defroster door lever
VTL
J
REMOVAL
Driver Side
K
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal after setting the temperature (driver side) to 18°C
(60°F).
2. Remove foot duct (driver side). Refer to VTL-59, "FOOT DUCT : Exploded View".
L
3. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove air mix door
motor (driver side) (1).
4. Disconnect air mix door motor connector (driver side). M
O
JPIIA0577ZZ
Passenger Side
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal after setting the temperature (passenger side) to P
18°C (60°F).
VTL-41
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then move foot duct (passen-
ger side) (1) to a position where it does not inhibit work.
3. Remove mounting screws (B), and then remove air mix door
motor (passenger side) (2).
4. Disconnect air mix door motor connector (passenger side).
JPIIA0924ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-42
HEATER CORE
HEATER CORE
A
VTL
JPIIA0906GB
N
VTL-43
HEATER CORE
REMOVAL
1. Remove heater & cooling unit assembly. Refer to VTL-35, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove foot duct (left)
(1).
JPIIA0925ZZ
3. Remove heater pipe grommet (1).

4. Remove mounting screw (A), and then remove heater pipe sup-
port (2).
5. Remove mounting screws (B), and then remove heater pipe
cover (3).
JPIIA0926ZZ
6. Slide heater core (1) to leftward (as shown in the figure).
JPIIA0927ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Replace O-rings with new ones. Then apply compressor oil to them when installing.
• Check for refrigerant leakage when charging refrigerant.
NOTE:
• Refer to CO-9, "Refilling" when filling radiator with engine coolant.
• Charge the refrigerant.
VTL-44
DUCT AND GRILLE
DUCT AND GRILLE
A
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774687
B
VTL
JPIIA0928ZZ
J
1. Side defroster nozzle (right) 2. Defroster nozzle 3. Side defroster nozzle (left)
4. Ventilator duct 5. Side defroster grille (left) 6. Instrument panel assembly
7. Side ventilator grille (left) 8. Center ventilator grille (left) 9. Cluster lid D K
10. Center ventilator grille (right) 11. Side ventilator grille (right) 12. Side defroster grille (right)
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774688 L
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". M
2. Disengage the pawls, and then remove center ventilator grilles
(left and right) (1).
N
: Pawl
P
JPIIA0929ZZ
INSTALLATION
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE
VTL-45
DUCT AND GRILLE
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774689
JPIIA0928ZZ
7. Side ventilator grille (left) 8. Center ventilator grille (left) 9. Cluster lid D
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774690
REMOVAL
1. Remove ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-48, "VENTILATOR DUCT : Exploded View".
2. Disengage the pawls, and then remove side ventilator grilles
(left and right) (1).
: Pawl
JPIIA0930ZZ
INSTALLATION
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE
VTL-46
DUCT AND GRILLE
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774691
JPIIA0928ZZ
VTL
7. Side ventilator grille (left) 8. Center ventilator grille (left) 9. Cluster lid D J
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774692

K
REMOVAL
1. Remove side defroster nozzles (left and right). Refer to VTL-49, "SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Exploded L
View".
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove side defroster
grilles (left and right) (1). M
JPIIA0931ZZ
INSTALLATION P
VENTILATOR DUCT
VTL-47
DUCT AND GRILLE
VENTILATOR DUCT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774693
JPIIA0928ZZ
VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774694
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting screws (A).
JSIIA1172ZZ
3. Remove ventilator duct (1).
VTL-48
DUCT AND GRILLE
INSTALLATION
Installation is basically the reverse order of removal. A
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774697 B
VTL
JPIIA0928ZZ J
K
L
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774698
REMOVAL
M
1. Remove ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-48, "VENTILATOR DUCT : Exploded View".
VTL-49
DUCT AND GRILLE
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove side defroster nozzle (left) (1).
JPIIA0933ZZ
3. Remove mounting screw (B) and harness clip (C), and then remove side defroster nozzle (right) (2).
INSTALLATION
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003821401
JPIIA0928ZZ
VTL-50
DUCT AND GRILLE
DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003821398
A
REMOVAL
1. Remove side defroster nozzles (left and right). Refer to VTL-49, "SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Exploded
View". B
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove defroster nozzle (1).
JPIIA0934ZZ
H
INSTALLATION
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE VTL
VTL-51
DUCT AND GRILLE
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774699
JPIIA0935ZZ
1. Heater & cooling unit assembly 2. Rear foot duct 1 (left) 3. Rear foot duct 2 (left)
4. Rear foot duct 3 (left) 5. Rear ventilator duct 2 6. Console rear cover (Rear
ventilator grille)
7. Rear foot duct 3 (right) 8. Rear foot duct 2 (right) 9. Rear foot duct 1 (right)
10. Rear ventilator duct 1
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774700
REMOVAL
Remove console rear cover (rear ventilator grille). Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1
VTL-52
DUCT AND GRILLE
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774701
VTL
JPIIA0935ZZ
J
ventilator grille) K
L
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 1 : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774702
REMOVAL M
1. Remove rear ventilator duct 2. Refer to VTL-54, "REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting clip (A), and then remove rear ventilator duct
1 (1). N
JPIIA0936ZZ
INSTALLATION
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2
VTL-53
DUCT AND GRILLE
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774703
JPIIA0935ZZ
ventilator grille)
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT 2 : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774704
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".
2. Remove screws (A), and then remove rear ventilator duct 2 (1).
JPIIA0937ZZ
INSTALLATION
REAR FOOT DUCT 1
VTL-54
DUCT AND GRILLE
REAR FOOT DUCT 1 : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003774709
VTL
JPIIA0935ZZ
J
ventilator grille) K
L
REAR FOOT DUCT 1 : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774710
REMOVAL M
Driver side
1. Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
N
2. Remove rear foot duct 1 (left) (1).
JPIIA0938ZZ
Passenger side
1. Remove instrument lower cover RH. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
VTL-55
DUCT AND GRILLE
2. Remove the rear foot duct 1 (right) (1).
JPIIA0939ZZ
INSTALLATION
REAR FOOT DUCT 2
JPIIA0935ZZ
ventilator grille)
REMOVAL
Driver side
VTL-56
DUCT AND GRILLE
1. Remove rear foot duct 1 (left). Refer to VTL-55, "REAR FOOT DUCT 1 : Exploded View".
2. Pull up driver side floor carpet. Refer to INT-47, "Exploded View". A
3. Remove mounting clip (A), and then remove rear foot duct 2
(left) (1).
B
D
JPIIA0940ZZ
Passenger side E
1. Remove the rear foot duct 1 (right). Refer to VTL-55, "REAR FOOT DUCT 1 : Exploded View".
2. Pull up passenger side floor carpet. Refer to INT-47, "Exploded View".
3. Remove mounting clip (A), and then remove rear foot duct 2 F
(right) (1).
JPIIA0941ZZ VTL
INSTALLATION
J
REAR FOOT DUCT 3
VTL-57
DUCT AND GRILLE
JPIIA0935ZZ
ventilator grille)
REMOVAL
Driver side
1. Pull up driver side floor carpet. Refer to INT-47, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting clip (A) and harness clip (B), and then
remove rear foot duct 3 (left) (1).
JPIIA0942ZZ
Passenger side
1. Pull up passenger side floor carpet. Refer to INT-47, "Exploded View".
VTL-58
DUCT AND GRILLE
2. Remove mounting clip (A) and harness clip (B), and then
remove rear foot duct 3 (right) (1). A
JPIIA0943ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
FOOT DUCT E
FOOT DUCT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003821492
VTL
JPIIA0906GB
VTL-59
DUCT AND GRILLE

7. Foot duct 2 (right) 8. Air mix door motor (passenger side) 9. Evaporator pipe assembly
16. Heater & cooling unit case (right) 17. Cooler pipe grommet 18. Grommet
FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003774716
REMOVAL
Driver side
1. Remove instrument driver lower panel. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove foot duct (left)
(1).
JPIIA0944ZZ
Passenger side
1. Remove blower unit assembly. Refer to VTL-29, "Exploded View".
2. Remove mounting screws (A) and harness clip, and then
remove foot duct (right) (1).
JPIIA0945ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-60
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [WITH 7 INCH DISPLAY]
WITHOUT INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
B
WITHOUT INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000003894439
VTL
JPIIA0885GB
J
JSIIA1189GB
VTL-61
WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000003894440
JPIIA0885GB
JSIIA1190GB
VTL-62
AIR DISTRIBUTION
AIR DISTRIBUTION
A
JPIIA0877GB F
VTL
VTL-63
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH 7 INCH DISPLAY]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
INFOID:0000000003894445
NOTE:
battery cables.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
VTL-64
PRECAUTIONS
A
B
D
PIIB3706J

E
WARNING:
• Disconnect the battery cable (negative terminal) or the power supply fuse before installing, remov- F
generated parts.
• Never work with wet hands. G
• Never touch the bulb glass immediately after turning it OFF. It is extremely hot. H
CAUTION:
• Install the xenon bulb securely. (Insufficient bulb socket installation may melt the bulb, the connec- VTL
• Dispose of the used xenon bulb after packing it in thick vinyl without breaking it. J
Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) INFOID:0000000003894449
K
CAUTION:
• CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. These refrigerants
must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. Compressor malfunction is likely occur if the L
refrigerants are mixed.
• Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) compo-
nents. Compressor malfunction is likely to occur if lubricant other than that specified is used. M
• The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The fol-
lowing handling precautions must be observed:
- Cap (seal) immediately the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere when
removing refrigerant components from a vehicle. N
- Never remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components when installing refrig-
erant components to a vehicle. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to
minimize the entry of moisture into system. O
- Use only the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Reseal immediately containers of lubricant.
Lubricant becomes moisture saturated and should not be used without proper sealing.
- Never allow lubricant (NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S) to come in contact with styrene foam parts.
Damage may result. P
General Refrigerant Precaution INFOID:0000000003894450
WARNING:
• Never breath A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant.
VTL-65
PRECAUTIONS
Ventilate work area before resuming service if accidental system discharge occurs. Additional health
and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
• Never release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant each time an air conditioning system is discharged.
• Wear always eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
• Never store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (126°F).
• Never heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; Place the bottom of the container in a warm
pail of water if container warming is required.
• Never intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
• Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas is produced if refrigerant burns.
• Refrigerant displaces oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffo-
cation.
• Never pressure test or leakage test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air condi-
tioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refriger-
ant manufacturers.
Refrigerant Connection INFOID:0000000003894451
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations.
• Expansion valve to evaporator
• Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
JPIIA0986ZZ
F. Former type refrigerant connection N. New type refrigerant connection
: O-ring size
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Never confuse O-
rings since they are not interchangeable. Refrigerant may leak at the connection if a wrong O-ring is
installed.
VTL-66
PRECAUTIONS
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
A
Connection type Piping connection point Part number QTY O-ring size
Low-pressure flexible hose to low-pressure pipe 92474 N8210 1 19
B
High-pressure pipe to condenser pipe assembly (Outlet) 92471 N8210 1 8
Condenser pipe assembly (Inlet) to high-pressure flexible
92472 N8210 1 12
hose
C
Condenser assembly to condenser pipe as- Inlet 92472 N8210 1 12
sembly Outlet 92471 N8210 1 8
New
Low-pressure pipe to expansion valve 92473 N8210 1 16 D
High-pressure pipe to expansion valve 92471 N8210 1 8
Compressor to low-pressure flexible hose 92474 N8210 1 19
E
Compressor to high-pressure flexible hose 92472 N8210 1 12
Inlet 1
Liquid tank to condenser assembly 92471 N8210 8
Outlet 1 F
Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank J2476 89956 1 10
Inlet 92475 71L00 1 12
Expansion valve to evaporator pipe assembly G
Former Outlet 92475 72L00 1 16
Inlet 92475 71L00 1 12
Evaporator to evaporator pipe assembly
Outlet 92475 72L00 1 H 16
WARNING:
Check that all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it. VTL
CAUTION:
Observe the following when replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components.
• Store it in the same way at it is when mounted on the car when the compressor is removed. Failure
to do so causes lubricant to enter the low-pressure chamber. J
• Use always a torque wrench and a back-up wrench when connecting tubes.
• Plug immediately all openings to prevent entry of dust and moisture after disconnecting tubes.
• Connect the pipes at the final stage of the operation when installing an air conditioner in the vehicle. K
Never remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection.
• Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
• Remove thoroughly moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant. L
• Replace always used O-rings.
• Apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration when connecting tube. Be careful not to
apply lubricant to threaded portion. M
Name : NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S

• O-ring must be closely attached to the groove portion of tube. N
• Be careful not to damage O-ring and tube when replacing the O-ring.
• Connect tube until a click can be heard. Then tighten the nut or bolt by hand. Check that the O-ring is
installed to tube correctly. O
VTL-67
PRECAUTIONS
• Perform leakage test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections after connecting line.
Disconnect that line and replace the O-ring when the refrigerant leaking point is found. Then tighten
connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
RHA861F
Service Equipment INFOID:0000000003894452
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never
introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTOR
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
VACUUM PUMP
The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible
with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems.
The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pres-
sure. So the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump
into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched
OFF after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve placed near the hose-
to-pump connection, as per the following.
• Vacuum pumps usually have a manual isolator valve as part of the
pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump.
• Use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump
end for pumps without an isolator. Close the valve to isolate the
hose from the pump.
• Disconnect the hose from the pump if the hose has an automatic
shut-off valve. As long as the hose is connected, the valve is open
and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump’s
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
RHA270DA
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
VTL-68
PRECAUTIONS
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a or R-134a. Be
sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for ser- A
vice hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants.
B
SHA533D
D
SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must equip positive shut-
off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses E
opposite to the manifold gauge.
RHA272D
SERVICE COUPLERS H
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a
CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers do
not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an VTL
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
J
Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve
Clockwise Open
Counterclockwise Close K
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE

Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and speci- L
fied lubricants have been used with the scale. The hose fitting must
be 1/2″-16 ACME if the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically.
M
O
RHA274D
CALIBRATING ACR4 WEIGHT SCALE

Calibrate the scale each three month. P
To calibrate the weight scale on the ACR4:
2. Press “8787”. “A1” is displayed.
3. Remove all weight from the scale.
4. Press “0”, then press “Enter”. “0.00” is displayed and change to “A2”.
VTL-69
PRECAUTIONS
5. Place a known weight (dumbbell or similar weight), between 4.5 and 8.6 kg (10 and 19 lb.) on the center
of the weight scale.
6. Enter the known weight using four digits. (Example 10 lb. = 10.00, 10.5 lb. = 10.50)
7. Press “Enter”— the display returns to the vacuum mode.
9. Press “6”— the known weight on the scale is displayed.
10. Remove the known weight from the scale. “0.00” is displayed.
11. Press “Shift/Reset” to return the ACR4 to the program mode.
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder’s top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.
VTL-70
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
A
CAUTION: B
• Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
• Store it in the same way at it is when mounted on the car when the compressor is removed.
• Follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly when replacing or repairing
compressor. Refer to HA-28, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity". C
• Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. Wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth
moistened with thinner if the surface is contaminated with lubricant.
• Turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in both directions after compressor service D
operation. This distributes equally lubricant inside the compressor. Let the engine idle and operate
the compressor for one hour after the compressor is installed.
• Apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation after replacing the compressor magnet
clutch. E
VTL
VTL-71
CAUTION:
• The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leakages. An
ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leakages.
• Wear always fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
• The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electrical leak detector (SST). The fluo-
rescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electrical leak detector (SST) to pin-
point refrigerant leakages.
• Read and follow all manufacture’s operating instructions and precautions prior to performing the
work for the purpose of safety and customer’s satisfaction.
• A compressor shaft seal should not necessarily be repaired because of dye seepage. The compres-
sor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leakage with an electrical leak detector
(SST).
• Remove always any remaining dye from the leakage area after repairs are completed to avoid a mis-
diagnosis during a future service.
• Never allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. Clean imme-
diately with the approved dye cleaner if dye is spilled. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an
extended period of time cannot be removed.
• Never spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
• Never use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce /7.4 cc) per A/C system.
• Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Never use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system, or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system, or A/C system damage may result.
• The fluorescent properties of the dye remains for three or more years unless a compressor malfunc-
tion occurs.
IDENTIFICATION
NOTE:
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green label.
Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue label.
IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have the identification label on the front side of hood.
VTL-72
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITH 7 INCH DISPLAY]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

• Never mix HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/ C
or its lubricant.
lubricant.
• Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles D
• Never use adapters that convert one size fitting to another: refrigerant/lubricant contamination occurs and E
Tool number
F
Tool name
H
Recovery/recycling/recharging Function: Refrigerant recovery, recycling
equipment (ACR4) and recharging
VTL
RJIA0195E
J
Power supply:
Electrical leak detector
DC 12 V (Cigarette lighter) L
M
SHA705EB
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection N
kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles O
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector Power supply:
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce DC 12 V (Battery terminal)
bottle P
(J-41447)
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles) ZHA200H
(J-43872)
VTL-73
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Power supply:
DC 12 V (Battery terminal)
(J-42220) For checking refrigerant leak when fluores-
UV lamp and UV safety goggles cent dye is installed in A/C system
Includes:
SHA438F
Application:
For HFC-134a (R-134a) PAG oil
(J-41447)
Container:
1/4 ounce (7.4 cc) bottle
leak detection dye
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
labels for affixing to vehicle after charging
system with dye.)
SHA439F
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent leak
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce detection dye into A/C system
bottle
SHA440F
(J-43872)
For cleaning dye spills
SHA441F
Identification:
• The gauge face indicates HFC-134a (R-
Manifold gauge set (with hoses 134a).
and couplers) Fitting size: Thread size
• 1/2″-16 ACME
RJIA0196E
Hose color:
• Low-pressure side hose: Blue with black
stripe
Service hoses • High-pressure side hose: Red with black
• High-pressure side hose stripe
• Low-pressure side hose • Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or
• Utility hose green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
S-NT201
• 1/2″-16 ACME
VTL-74
PREPARATION
Tool number
(SPX-North America No.) Description A
Tool name
B
Service couplers Hose fitting to service hose:
• High-pressure side coupler M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently
• Low-pressure side coupler attached. C
S-NT202
For measuring of refrigerant

Refrigerant weight scale Fitting size: Thread size E
1/2″-16 ACME
S-NT200 F
Capacity:
• Air displacement: 4 CFM G
Vacuum pump • Micron rating: 20 microns
(Including the isolator valve) • Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz.)
H
• 1/2″-16 ACME
S-NT203
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000003894468 VTL

J
K
Remover tools Remove clips, pawls, metal clips
L
PIIB7923J
Sealant or/and Lubricant INFOID:0000000003894469

M

or its lubricant. N
lubricant.
• Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles O
compressor malfunction may result. P
VTL-75
PREPARATION
Container color: Light blue

Container marking: HFC-134a (R-
HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant 134a)
• Large container 1/2″-16 ACME
S-NT196
Type: Polyalkylene glycol oil (PAG),

type S (DH-PS)
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S Application:
(DH-PS) HFC-134a (R-134a) swash plate com-
pressors (Nissan only)
Capacity: 40 m (1.4 Imp fl oz.)
S-NT197
VTL-76
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [WITH 7 INCH DISPLAY]
B
JPIIA0895ZZ
H
1. Heater & cooling unit assembly 2. Air conditioner filter 3. Filter cover

VTL
REMOVAL
1. Remove filter cover (1), and then remove air conditioner filter J
(2).
JPIIA0896ZZ M
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: N
• If the filter is deformed/damaged when removing, replace it with a new one. Deformed/damaged filter
may deteriorate the duct collecting performance.
• When installing, handle the filter with extreme care to avoid deforming/damaging. O
Replacement INFOID:0000000003894473
Replace air conditioner filter. P

Refer to MA-6, "Periodic Maintenance".
Affix a caution label inside the glove box when replacing filter.
VTL-77
PRESET SWITCH
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [WITH 7 INCH DISPLAY]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
PRESET SWITCH
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1044ZZ
1. Preset switch 2. Cluster lid C
REMOVAL
Refer to AV-177, "Exploded View" (BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM), AV-389, "Exploded View" (BOSE
AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION) or AV-660, "Exploded View" (BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION).
INSTALLATION
VTL-78
REAR CONTROL SWITCH
REAR CONTROL SWITCH
A
B
1. Rear control switch
JSIIA1157ZZ E
REMOVAL F
1. Remove rear control switch (1), stretching pawls (A) of armrest

assembly.
G
2. Disconnect rear control switch connector.
VTL
JSIIA1158ZZ
INSTALLATION J
VTL-79
A/C AUTO AMP.
A/C AUTO AMP.
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1034ZZ
1. AV control unit 2. Bracket LH 3. A/C auto amp.

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
1. Remove AV control unit. Refer to AV-170, "Exploded View" (BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM), AV-
378, "Exploded View" (BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION) or AV-648, "Exploded View" (BOSE
AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION).
2. Remove mounting screws (A), and then remove A/C auto amp.
(1).
JPIIA0897ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-80
AMBIENT SENSOR
AMBIENT SENSOR
A
B
1. Ambient sensor
JPIIA0898ZZ E
REMOVAL F

2. Disconnect ambient sensor connector (A), and then remove G
ambient sensor (1).
VTL
JPIIA0899ZZ
J
INSTALLATION
K
VTL-81
GAS SENSOR
GAS SENSOR
WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003894490
1. Gas sensor
JPIIA0900ZZ
WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000003894491
REMOVAL
1. Remove mounting bolt (A), and then remove gas sensor (1).
2. Disconnect gas sensor connector (B).
JPIIA0901ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-82
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
A
JPIIA0902ZZ
G
1. In-vehicle sensor 2. Instrument lower panel LH
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003894493 H
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". VTL
2. Remove mounting screw (A), and then remove in-vehicle sensor
(1).
J
L
JPIIA0903ZZ
INSTALLATION M
VTL-83
SUNLOAD SENSOR
SUNLOAD SENSOR
1. Sunload sensor
JPIIA0904ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect sunload sensor connector, and then remove sunload
sensor (1).
JPIIA0905ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL-84
INTAKE SENSOR
INTAKE SENSOR
A
VTL
JPIIA0906GB
N

Nissan Teana j32 2008 Service Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nissan Teana j32 2008 Service Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

© 2008 NISSAN INTERNATIONAL SA

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD TOW TRUCK TOWING ..................................... 32

Drive Shaft Installation Bolt : 44.3 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)

1. Union bolt 2. Copper washer 3. Brake hose

1. Test group number and test group title

• For detail, refer to following GI-11, "Description".

Number Item Description

8 Splice • The shaded circle “ ” means the splice.

• This means the connector information.

The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: B

Hexagonal Tightening torque (Without lubricant)

Hexagonal Tightening torque

Destination Body Engine Transmission Axle Grade Model

Russia and VQ25DE 250XL-V6 BLGULEW-EQA

Information About Identification or Model Code INFOID:0000000003852773

Vehicle identification number (Chas-

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

CVT Unit (RE0F09B)

Wheels & Tires INFOID:0000000003852775

General Precautions INFOID:0000000003852781 J

• Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without

• To prevent serious burns:

• Before servicing the vehicle:

HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

• After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of

Engine Oils INFOID:0000000003852785

Tool name Description

Safety stand attachment

Control Units and Electrical Parts INFOID:0000000003852794

Connector & Harness

COLD OR HOT START UP L

Continuity Check Method

Resistance Check Method D

VOLTAGE DROP TESTS

Measuring Voltage Drop — Steb-by-Step

INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART

INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART

Body Switch ON 0V Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)

Body Switch ON 0V Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)

• When CONSULT-III/GST is connected with a data link connector B

HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices I

Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU

CONSULT-III/GST Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INFOID:0000000003852799

Symptom Check item

SYSTEM ITEM REFERENCE

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS SPARK PLUG ................................................... 15

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5 COMPRESSION PRESSURE ........................... 22

1. Locate the area where noise occurs.

Operating condition of engine

Piston to piston pin oil EM-143

• Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification.

REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING

3. Attach liquid gasket tube to the tube presser (commercial ser- J

KV10107902 Replacing valve oil seal

KV10115600 Installing valve oil seal

EM03470000 Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore

ST16610001 Removing pilot converter

KV10111100 Removing oil pan (lower and upper), front and

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio sensor 1 D